IN  MEMOmAJA 

George  Holmes  howison 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/combinedspanishOOtornrich 


THE 

COMBINED  SPANISH  METHOD 

^A  PRACTICAL  AND   THEORETICAL  SYS'i'E)i;F<)Sl  Li^ARNII^O  ly 

THE   SPANISH   LA>TGrAaE/,,;^.,/.\\', 

EMBRACING  THE   MOST  ADVAN-fAGEOaS 'Fi]ATi:jKES  >   -     '    ^ 
OF  THE  BEST  KNOWN  METHODS 

WITH  A  PEONOUNCING  VOCABULARY 

CONTAINING  ALL  THE  WORDS  USED  IN  THE  COURSE  OF  THE  WORK,  AND 

EEFERENCES  TO  THE  LESSONS  IN  WHICH  EACH  ONE  IS  EXPLAINED, 

THUS  ENABLING  ANY  ONE  TO  BE  HIS  OWN  INSTRUCTOR 


BY 

ALBERTO   DE  TORNOS,  AM. 

FORMERLY  DIRBCTOR  OP  NORMAL  SCHOOLS  IN  SPAIN,   AND  TBACHBR  OP  SPANISH 

IN  THB  NEW  YORK  MERCANTILE  LIBRARY,  NEW  YORK  EVENING  HIGH  SCHOOL, 

AND  THB  POLYTECHNIC  AND  PACKER  INSTITUTES,  BROOKLYN 


REVISED  EDITION 


:N"EW   YORK 

D.  appleton  and  company 

1910 


•••••••     « 


•  •.•.••••.•.•     ••..-.« 


Copyright,  1867,  1907, 
By  D.  APPLETON  AND  COMPANY. 

Copyright,   1895, 
By  MANUEL    DE    TORNOS. 


Copyright,   1899, 
By   FRANCISCA    DE   TORNOS. 


•J 


EEVISER'S  PKEFACE. 


Professor  De  Tornos's  Combined  Spanish  Method,  first 
published  thirty  years  ago,  has  won  for  itself  an  established 
position  among  students  of  the  Spanish  language.  After 
the  test  of  use  and  competition  for  a  quarter  of  a  century, 
it  still  continues  to  be  the  most  satisfactory  book  of  the 
kind  in  the  hands  of  the  public.  Nevertheless,  the  exten- 
sive modification  of  Spanish  orthography  by  the  decrees  of 
the  Real  Academia  Espanola^  enacted  some  years  ago,  has 
necessitated  further  revisions  in  accordance  with  these 
changes.  The  object  of  the  present  edition  is  to  preserve 
the  unquestioned  advantages  possessed  by  the  original 
work,  and  at  the  same  time  to  make  it  conform  entirely 
to  the  rulings  of  the  Academy,  in  order  to  meet  the 
demands  of  the  modern  student. 

Since  many  of  those  who  are  to  use  the  method  will 
do  so  with  the  view  of  travel  or  residence  in  some  of  the 
Spanish- American  countries,  special  attention  has  been  de- 
voted to  a  consideration  of  the  American  variations  from 
Castilian  Spanish  in  the  matter  of  pronunciation.  How- 
ever, there  has  been  no  departure  from  the  grammatical 
principles  laid  down  by  the  Academy. 

861169 


iv  REVISER'S  PREFACE. 

The  written  language  is  the  same  everywhere,  save  that 
the  speech  and  literature  of  each  country  have  adopted 
many  words  of  native  origin.  It  will  be  found  expedient 
to  acquire  first  the  true  Spanish  word,  and  afterward  to 
take  up  the  native  variant. 

June,  1899, 


PKEFACE, 


It  is  an  undoubted  fact  that  in  teaching,  not  only  lan- 
guages, but  any  other  science  or  art,  there  neither  is,  nor 
can  be,  any  other  method  than  that  of  uniting  theory  with 
jpractice;  and  the  various  modes  of  applying  the  one  to  the 
other,  the  extent  of  the  application,  and  the  time  at  which 
it  should  be  commenced,  have  produced  the  great  number 
of  methods  hitherto  published. 

This  fact  is  now  universally  acknowledged,  and  each 
new  author  proclaims  himself  to  be  the  only  one  who  has 
put  it  into  execution.  The  most  insignificant  little  phrase- 
book  does  not  fail  to  announce,  in  its  introduction,  that  it 
combines  theory  and  practice;  and  grammars  containing 
nothing  more  than  confused  masses  of  rules,  heaped  one 
upon  another,  are  entitled  '-^  Theoretical  ^rAPracticalP  It 
is  admitted  on  all  hands  that  much  progress  has  been  made 
within  the  last  few  years  in  the  art  of  teaching  languages ; 
and,  in  testimony  of  this,  we  have  only  to  mention  the 
excellent  oral  and  practical  methods  of  Jacotot,  Manesca, 
Ollendorff,  Boulet,  Eobertson,  and  others  who  have  followed 
in  their  footsteps,  all  of  which  are  ably  treated,  and  have 
done  much  good  in  their  way.  But  each  one  of  the  gram- 
marians referred  to,  satisfied  with  his  own  invention,  looked 


vi  PREFACE. 

with  disdain  upon  that  of  his  predecessor.  Hence  the  en- 
mity and  the  almost  unaccountable  diversity  of  opinion 
which  we  observe  amongst  them.  Had  they  studied  each 
other  with  impartiality,  and  .endeavored  to  profit  by  the 
experience,  and  even  the  defects  of  the  several  systems, 
their  labors  would  certainly  have  been  attended  with  still 
more  favorable  results,  and  of  course  more  considerable 
benefit  would  have  accrued  thereby  to  the  science  in  gen- 
eral. Numberless  points  of  excellence  are  to  be  found, 
scattered  here  and  there,  throughout  the  various  ancient 
and  modern  systems,  and  chiefly  those  already  alluded  to ; 
and  it  has  been  taught  that,  if  carefully  sifted  out  and 
judiciously  combined,  they  would  form  a  new  method 
which  would  be  in  details  essentially  superior  to  any  of  the 
old  ones. 

This  conviction,  joined  to  twenty  years'  experience  in 
teaching  the  Spanish  language,  sometimes  through  the  me- 
dium of  one,  sometimes  of  another  of  the  systems  mentioned 
above,  has  led  the  author  to  prepare  and  publish  the  Com- 
bined Method,  which  he  now  offers  to  those  desiring  to 
learn  the  noble  language  of  Cervantes. 

Whether  he  hae  successfully  attained  his  object  the 
public  will  decide. 


OBSERVATIONS 

ON   SOME   OP   THE   ADVANTAGEOUS   FEATURES   OF   THE 
"DE   TORNOS'S  COMBINED    METHOD." 


1st.  The  advantage  of  presenting  the  verb  as  the  first  and 
principal  part  of  speech,  which  serves  as  the  axis  upon  which 
all  the  other  parts  revolve.  These,  too,  have  been  introduced 
in  their  turn,  not  in  grammatical  order,  nor  by  mere  chance, 
but  in  the  logical  and  natural  order  in  which  they  occur  in 
discourse,  whether  written  or  spoken. 

2d.  That  of  explaining  these  parts  of  speech  in  the  order 
just  mentioned,  not  in  an  isolated  manner,  but  united  to 
form  a  homogeneous  whole,  and  in  such  a  way  that  the  learn- 
er will  have  no  difficulty  in  finding  the  explanation  relative 
to  the  use  of  each  one  of  them  respectively,  as  often  as  occa- 
sion may  require. 

3d.  These  explanations,  which  embrace  the  whole  theory, 
and  form  a  complete  grammar  of  the  language,  are  separate 
from  and  independent  of  the  exercises  ;  the  latter  being  com- 
posed in  strict  accordance  with  the  examples  accompanying 
each  lesson,  in  such  a  manner  that  those  unacquainted  with 
grammar  in  general,  and  those  who  have  no  desire  to  enter 
into  the  theory  of  the  language,  or,  finally,  those  who  are  too 
young  or  too  old  to  learn  grammar,  may  acquire  a  thorough 
conversational  knowledge  of  Spanish,  by  merely  committing 
to  memory  the  Vocabulary,  studying  the  Compositions,  and 
carefully  writing  the  Exercises. 

4th.  From  this  arrangement  arises  another  great  advan- 
tage, namely,  that  all  the  elements  are  found  in  the  vocabu- 
lary of  each  lesson,  separated  and  detached  from  the  examples 
and  rules  given  in  the  explanation  ;  thus  enabling  the  student 
to  see  at  one  glance  all  that  he  has  to  commit  to  memory  for 
each  recitation. 


viii  OBSER  VA  TIONS, 

5th.  And  this  division  of  the  lessons  into  Elements,  Com- 
position, Explanation,  Version,  and  Exercise,  enables  the 
teacher  to  divide  each  lesson  into  two,  three,  or  even  four 
parts,  according  to  the  age  and  capacity  of  the  student. 

6th.  Repetition^  and  constant  repetition^  is  indispensable 
in  acquiring  any  language ;  but  by  repetition  should  not  be 
understood  the  simple  reiteration  of  single  words  and  easy 
phrases ;  but  repetition  of  the  idioms,  and  of  those  forms  of 
expression  differing  most  widely  from  the  idiomatical  con- 
struction of  the  learner's  native  tongue.  It  is  true,  that 
though  this  is  the  proper  plan  for  acquiring  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  a  language,  that  feature  might  tend  to  make 
the  present  work  appear,  at  first  sight,  more  difficult  than 
the  books  hitherto  used  ;  but  such  will  not  be  found  the  case ; 
for  when  there  is  frequent  change  of  matter  there  cannot  be 
monotony ;  and  variety  renders  study  at  the  same  time  easy 
and  agreeable.  This  repetition,  then,  of  useful  forms  of  ex- 
pression and  contrast  of  style  will  be  found  on  every  page  of 
our  "  CoMBii^ED  Method,"  in  which  it  has  been  our  endeavor 
to  introduce  gradually,  and  with  the  necessary  explanations 
of  each,  the  most  important  idioms  of  the  Spanish  language. 

7th.  Although  we  are  of  opinion  that  to  learn  a  language, 
and,  above  all,  to  learn  to  pronounce  it,  it  is  always  preferable 
to  have  the  assistance  of  a  skilful  teacher,  and  one  who 
speaks  the  language  with  purity  and  correctness ;  yet,  as  it 
is  not  always  possible  to  procure  such,  we  have  placed  at  the 
end  of  the  Method  a  Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  words 
used  in  the  course  of  the  work,  and  the  pronunciation  of 
each,  so  that  nothing  may  be  wanting  to  second  the  efforts  of 
those  who,  from  choice  or  necessity,  may  be  their  own  in- 
structors. 

8th.  The  Vocabulary,  besides  giving  the  pronunciation 
and  meaning  of  the  words,  indicates  the  lesson  in  which  the 
explanation  of  each  has  been  given  in  the  Grammar.  By 
this  means  the  learner  can  with  ease  refer  to  the  explanation 
of  all  those  words  of  which  it  has  been  deemed  essential 
to  give  one. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

Reviser's  Preface, iii,  iv 

Preface, v,  vi 

A  FEW  Remarks  on  the  Combined  Method, vii,  viii 

Contents, • ix-xviii 

Preliminary  Lesson  on  Orthography  and  Pronunciation,       .       .       .xix-xxix 

LESSON    I. 

RULE 

1.  Regular  verbs,  classified  in  three  conjugations, 1 

2.  Stems, ,2 

3.  Terminations  of  the  three  model  verbs,  corresponding  to  all  the  regular 

verbs, 2 

— .    Suppression  of  the  nominative  pronouns, 2 

4.  F.  (CTsfed)  requires  the  verb  in  the  third  person, 3 

5.  Position  of  subject  and  predicate, 3 

6.  Use  of  do  and  did  as  auxiliaries, 8 

LESSON   II. 

7.  Seflor,  seflorito,  seHora,  seHorita,  use  of  these  words, 4 

8.  Don  and  Dona,  use  of  these  words, 5 

9.  No,  placed  before  the  verb, 6 

LESSON    III. 

10.  The  conjunction  y  changed  into  e, 8 

11.  Qu4,  interrogative  pronoun, 8 

12.  Pero  and  Sino, 8 

13.  Espanol,  ingUs,  &c.,  one  word  may  be  classed  with  different  parts  of 

speech, 8 


LESSON    IV. 

A,  preposition  to,  used  after  active  verbs,  when  the  object  is  a  person, 
De,  used  to  express  position  or  the  material  of  which  anything  is  made 
El,  the  article  the,  used  to  determine  a  noun  masculine  singular,  . 
Contraction  of  the  article  el  and  the  prepositions  d  and  de  into  el,  del, 
Un,  the  indefinite  pronoun  used  before  masculine  nouns, 
Uno  is  only  used  as  a  numeral  adjective, 


11 
11 
11 
11 
11 
11 


LESSON    V. 

18.  Gender,  how  ascertained, ,       .       .  14 

— .     Una,  used  before  feminine  nouns, 15 

19.  Your,  how  translated,      .       .       .        .       • .  15 


CONTENTS, 


LESSON    VI. 

RULE  PAGK 

20.  The  terminations  of  the  persons  of  the  present  indicative  ;  how  they  differ 

in  the  three  conjugations, * .       ,       .       .18 

21.  Muy^  how  translated, 18 

22.  Nouns  ending  in  o  change  that  vowel  into  a  for  the  feminine,        .       .       .19 

23.  Usted  and  Ustedes  abbreviated  into  V.  and  Vds., 19 


24. 


LESSON    VII. 

Adjectives  ending  in  o,  an,  or  on,  form  their  feminine  in  a,    .        .       .       ,22 
Adjectives  signifying  nationality  and  ending  in  a  consonant  . 

Adjectives  are  generally  placed  after  their  nouns, 23 

Adjectives  used  metaphorically  are  always  placed  before  the  nouns. 
Some  adjectives  drop  their  last  letter  or  syllable,      .... 


LESSON    VIII. 

25.  The  endings  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations  ;  how  they  differ,     .       .  26 

26.  The  conjunction  6  changed  into  w, 26 

27.  Ni,  how  translated 26 

28.  The  plural  of  nouns, 26 

29.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender  and  number        ....  27 

The  article  agrees  also, 27 

Feminine  nouns  that  take  the  masculine  article, 27 

The  neuter  article  Zo, 27 

LESSON    IX. 

32.  Papa,  mama,  pie,  are  exceptions, 31 

33.  Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable,  and  ending  in  s,  form  their  plural,    .        .  31 
— .    Words  ending  in  z,  their  plural, 31 

34.  Words  which  are  compounds  of  two  nouns,  their  plural,         ....  31 

35.  The  days  of  the  week,  when  they  take  the  article, 31 

36.  Donde,  adonde,  cuando,  placed  before  the  verb, 31 

37.  Donde,  adonde,  cudndo,  in  interrogations  require  an  accent, ....  32 

LESSON    X. 

Irregular  verbs, 35 

Tener  not  included  in  the  seven  verbs, 35 

39.  Personal  pronouns  as  direct  or  indirect  objects, 35 

Position  of  objective  pronouns  with  regard  to  the  verb, 35 

It  and  so  are  translated  sometimes  by  Zo, 36 

40.  Quien,  cual,  que,  de  quien,  used  interrogatively  do  not  take  the  article,      .  37 

41.  When  the  interrogative  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  the  same  preposition 

must  be  repeated  in  the  answer, 37 

42.  El  as  a  definite  pronoun, 37 

LESSON    XI. 

43.  Alguien,  alguno,  the  difference  between  them 40 

— .    Any  one  or  anybody,  when  translated  by  cualquiera, 40 

44.  Nadie^  ninguno,  their  distinction, 40 


CONTENTS.  xi 

RULE  PAGB 

45.  Alguno  and  ninguno,  when  they  lose  the  o,       .       .       •       .       .       .       .40 

46.  AlgOy  alguna  cosa,  used  aflarmatively, 40 

47.  Nadn,  ninguna  cosa,  used  negatively, 40 

48.  Negatives,  when  placed  before  the  verb, 40 

— .    Two  negatives  render  the  negation  more  emphatic  than  one,         ...  41 

49.  A  or  an^  when  not  translated, 42 

LESSON    XII. 

59.    Tener  and  haber,  their  distinction, 44 

— .    To  have  and  to  be,  followed  by  an  infinitive,  how  they  are  translated,  .       .  44 

51.  Perfect 45 

LESSON    XI.II. 

52.  Mio,  tuyo,  &c.,  change  the  o  into  a  for  the  feminine, 49 

53.  Possessive  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  name  of  the  thing 


49 

54.  As  pronominal  adjectives,  mio,  tuyo,  suyo  precede  the  noun  and  drop  their 

final  syllable,  .        .        .        ' 49 

55.  JIfio,  when  placed  after  the  noun, 49 

56.  Possessives  used  as  pronouns  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  nouns 

they  represent,  and  take  the  article, 49 

57.  When  used  indefinitely  they  take  the  neuter  article, 49 

58.  When  connected  with  the  verb  to  be,  the  article  is  omitted,    ....  49 

59.  Vv^tro,  vuestra,  when  used, 50 

LESSON    XIV. 

60.  Formation  of  compound  numbers, 54 

61.  Numbers  are  indeclinable,  except  uno  and  the  compounds  of  cienfo,  .       .  54 

62.  Uno,  Its  agreement ;  when  it  loses  the  o, 54 

63.  Ciento,  its  agreement ;  when  it  loses  the  last  syllable, 54 

LESSON    XV. 

64.  Ordinals,  their  agreement  and  place, 58 

— .    Primer o  and  tercero,  when  they  drop  their  final  letter, 58 

65.  Ordinals,  when  used 59 

— .    N.  B.— When  ordinals  do  not  require  the  definite  article, 59 

LESSON  XVI. 

66.  Preterit, .  64 

67.  Ante,  its  meaning, 64 

68.  Mds  and  menos,  how  used, 65 

LESSON    XVII. 

69.  Quien,  how  used, 68 

70.  Who,  when  translated  by  que,  and  when  by  quien, 68 

71.  Cual  and  que  relate  to  persons  and  things, 69 

72.  Cuyo  refers  to  persons  and  things  :  its  agreement 69  • 

■— .    It  partakes  of  the  nature  of  the  relatives  and  of  the 


xii  CONTENTS. 

RULE  PAGE 

73.  The  preposition  placed  before  the  relative, 69 

74.  Relative  pronoung  can  never  be  suppressed  in  Spanish,         ....  69 

LESSON    XVIII. 

75.  Declension  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  este,  cse,  aquel^    ....  75 

76.  Este,  how  used, 75 

77.  Use  of  the  adverb  ahi, 75 

78.  Este,  ese,  forming  one  word  with  the  adjective  otro, 75 

79.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  used  as  neuter, 76 

80.  The  former  a.nd  the  latter,  tTELnslatedhj  aquel  and  este,       ....  76 

81.  That  of  or  that  which,  translated  hy  el  de,  el  qtie 76 

82.  English  personal  pronouns  rendered  in  Spanish  by  demonstrative  pro- 

nouns,   76 

83.  Aqui,  alii,  acd,  alia,  how  employed, 76 

LESSON    XIX. 

85.  Para  and  por,  how  they  differ, 81 

86.  Entre,  its  meaning, 8fc 

87.  Hasta,  its  meaning, 88 

LESSON    XX. 

88.  Tanto  and  cuanto,  when  they  lose  the  last  syllable, 87 

89.  Comparison  of  equality,  how  formed, 87 

90.  Cuan  may  be  employed, 87 

91.  Comparison  of  superiority,  how  formed, 87 

92.  Comparison  of  inferiority, 87 

93.  Mayor,  menor,  wejor,  peor,  are  already  in  the  comparative  degree,  .       .  88 

94.  Than,  translated  by  de  and  que, 88 

95.  Comparison  relating  to  nouns,  verbs,  and  adverbs, 88 


100. 
101 
102. 
103, 
104, 


105, 


LESSON    XXI. 

Superlatives  ending  in  est,  or  formed  by  most,  how  translated,    ...  93 

Most,  or  viost  of,  when  translated  by  la  mayor  parte,  or  by  mAs,        .        .  93 

In,  preposition,  when  translated  by  de 93 

Superlatives  formed  by  very,  most,  &c.,  when  formed  in  Spanish  by  muy 

and  when  by  isimo, 93 

Adjectives  drop  the  last  vowel  on  taking  the  termination  isimo,  ...  94 

Other  superlatives  ending  in  errimo, 94 

Adjectives  which  change  their  endings  before  the  termination  isimo,        .  94 

Superlatives  in  isimo  irregularly  formed, 94 

Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives, 94 

These  make  also  a  superlative  in  isimo, 95 

Also  with  muy,  and  a  comparative  with  mas  or  menos, 95 

Substantives  used  adjectively  admit  the  degrees  of  comparison, ...  95 


LESSON    XXII. 

106.  Ser  and  estar,  the  distinction  between  them, '  .       .100 

107.  "  "      their  employment 100 

.    N.  B.— Use  of  either  ser  or  estar,  but  with  different  meaning,       .        .       .101 

108.  Present  participles, 102 


CONTENTS.  xiii 

LESSON   XXIII. 

RULB  PAG" 

109.  Future  tense, 108 

110.  The  definite  article  used  with  numerals,  indicating  the  hour  of  the  day,    .  108 

111.  Evening  and  night,  translated  by  noche, 108 

112.  The  conjunction  si,  when  it  governs  the  subjunctive,  and  when  the  indica- 

tive   108 

LESSON    XXIV. 

113.  Future  perfect, 113 

114.  Acabar  de,  its  meaning, 113 

115.  How  the  pupil  may  learn  a  great  number  of  words  with  little  or  no  difla- 

culty, 113 

— .    Nouns  ending  in  tion  are  the  same  in  Spanish,  changing  the  letter  t  into  c,  113 

116.  The  days  of  the  month  are  counted  by  the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by 

the  article, 113 

LESSON    XXV. 

117.  Saber  and  conocer,  how  they  differ, 1 19 

118.  Aun,  ya,  todavia,  their  diflPerent  meaning  and  uses, 120 

— .    Once,  twice,  &c.,  translated  by  wna  vez,  dos  veces,  &c., 120 

— .    Miedo,  valor,  &o.,  take  the  preposition  de  after  them, 120 

119.  To  be  afraid,  to  be  thirsty,  &c.,  how  translated, 120 

120.  Jamas  and  nunca,  how  used, 120 

LESSON   XXVI. 

121.  Pronoun  subject,  or  nominative, 126 

122.  Two  objective  cases  of  the  personal  pronouns,  how  used,      .       .       .        .126 

123.  The  objective  case,  when  not  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  aflflxed  to  infini- 

tives, present  participles,  &c., 126 

124.  When  the  verb  drops  the  final  letter  followed  by  nos  or  os,  .       .       .       .  126 
— .    The  reason  of  this, 127 

125.  When  the  objective  case  may  follow  the  verb, 127 

126.  When  the  objective  may  be  placed  before  the  first  verb,  or  after  the 

second, 127 

127.  Prepositions,  when  expressed,  always  govern  the  second  objective  case,  .  127 

128.  ilfi,  iti,  si,  when  preceded  by  con, 127 

129.  Entre,  how  used 127 

130.  The  second  objective  case  is  used  after  comparatives, 127 

131.  When  the  first  objective  case  is  used, 128 

132.  The  objective  case  of  the  third  person  is  rendered  by  le,  les,  if  the  preposi- 

tion to  govern  it  in  English, -       .       .  128 

LESSON    XXVII. 

133.  The  third  person  rendered  in  Spanish  by  se 133 

134.  The  object  of  the  verb  is  to  be  placed  last,  when  two  first  objective  cases 

occur  in  the  sentence 134 

135.  Placed  first  when  the  object  of  the  verb  is  the  reflexive  pronoun,        .       .  135 

136.  Both  of  the  objective  cases  belonging  to  the  same  person  used  together,  .  136 


xiv  CONTENTS, 

RULE  PAGB 

137.  The  expressions  d  el  quiero,  a  ti  amo,  are  incorrect, 137 

138.  Use  of  le  and  les  with  second  objectives, 134 

139.  The  pronouns  el,  la,  lo,  los,  and  las,  how  distinguished  from  the  articles 

el,  la,  lo,  lo8,  las, 135 

— .    The  adjective  mismo,  how  used, 136 

LESSON    XXVIII. 

140.  Wnen  the  imperfect  is  used, 141 

141.  When  the  pa«f  per/ecf  is  used, 142 

142.  How  the  expressions  to  have  just  and  to  he  just  are  translated  before  a 

past  participle, 143 

LESSON    XXIX. 

143.  The  preterit  perfect,  its  use, 147 

144.  Derivation  of  adverbs  of  manner  and  quality, 147 

145.  How  adverbs  are  formed  from  adjectives, 147 

146.  Adverbs  terminating  in  mente  admit,  like  adjectives,  the  degrees  of  com- 

parison,    147 

147.  How  these  adverbs  can  be  substituted, 147 


148. 
149, 
150. 
151 
152. 


153. 


LESSON    XXX. 

What  impersonal  verbs  are, 153 

Amanecer  and  anochecer,  used  in  the  three  persons, 153 

Haber  and  hacer,  and  other  verbs  used  impersonally, 153 

The  pronoun  it,  accompanying  impersonal  verbs,  not  translated,       .        .  154 

The  article.— Nouns  taken  in  a  definite  sense  require  it,         ....  154 

Nouns  used  in  their  most  general  sense  take  the  article,        ....  J54 

Names  of  nations,  countries,  mountains,  &c.,  take  the  article,     .        .        .  154 
Nations,  countries,  and  provinces,  when  preceded  by  a  preposition,  do  not 

take  the  article, 155 

Names  of  some  places  that  always  take  the  article, 155 


LESSON    XXXI. 

154.  Gustar,  signifying  to  give  pleasure  to,  how  used, 161 

155.  Gustar,  followed  by  the  preposition  de, 161 

156.  Gustar,  used  as  an  active  verb, 161 

157.  Verbs  that  require  the  same  idiomatic  construction  as  th«,t  of  the  verb 

gustar, ...  161 

158.  The  verb  pesar,  when  meaning  to  regret,  ....  ...  161 

LESSON    XXXII. 

159.  How  the  passive  voice  is  formed, 167 

160.  When  the  passive  form  is  used  with  the  verb  ser  in  the  present  and  imper- 

fect tenses  of  the  indicative 167 

161.  When  the  preposition  de  or  por  is  to  be  used  after  passive  verbs,        .        .  167 

162.  Passive  voice  formed  by  se, 167 

163.  When  the  passive,  formed  with  se,  is  to  be  preferred, 168 


CONTENTS,  'XV 
LESSON    XXXIII. 

RULK  PAOB 

164.  Reflexive  verbs,  what  they  are, 174 

165.  When  are  the  v.erbs  made  reflexive  ? 174 

166.  When  a  verb  denotes  reciprocity^  how  it  is  conjugated,        ,       .       .       .174 

LESSON    XXXIV. 

167.  Which  are  the  irregular  verbs, 180 

168.  Verbs  which,  although  they  undergo  slight  changes  in  their  radical  let- 

ters, are  not  to  be  considered  as  irregular, 180 

169.  Verbs  which  change  i  into  y, 181 

170.  Verbs  ending  in  uir, 181 

171.  Regular  irregular  verbs, 181 

172.  Whatistobeobservedrelativeto  the  object  of  the  verb  payar,         .       .  182 

LESSON    XXXV. 

173.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  acosiar, 187 

174.  Imperative  mode,  when  used, 187 

175.  The  s  of  the  first  person  jrtural,  and  the  d  of  the  second,  suppressed  be- 

fore nos  and  os, 187 

176.  The  subjunctive,  used  with  the  negative  imperative, 188 

177.  The  future  indicative,  used  for  the  imperative, 188 

178.  Adjectives  ending  in  ous,  how  rendered  into  Spanish, 188 

179.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  English  in  ic  or  ical^  how  rendered  into 

Spanish, ' 188 

LESSON    XXXVI. 

180.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  mover, 193 

181.  Se,  as  the  Spanish  indefinite  personal  pronoun, 193 

182.  The  pronoun  se,  in  its  four  functions,         .        .        .        .        .        .        .        .193 

183.  Nouns  ending  in  English  in  ty,  how  rendered  into  Spanish,  .       ,       .        .194 

184.  Doler,  how  used, 194 

LESSON    XXXVII. 

185.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  atender, 199 

186, 187,  188,  189.    Subjunctive  Mode,  when  used  in  Spanish, 200 

190.  Present  tense  of  the  subjunctive, 201 

191.  Perfect  tense, 202 

LESSON    XXXVIII. 

192.  Active  Participles, 207 

193.  Present  Participles, 207 

194.  The  verb  estar  used  with  the  gerund  in  Spanish, 207 

195.  When  in  English  the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used, 

how  rendered  into  Spanish, 207 

196.  The  infinitive  used  as  a  verbal  noun, 207 

197.  The  infinitive  governed  by  another  verb,  how  rendered  into  English,         .  208 

2 


XVI 


CONTENTS. 


LESSON    XXXIX. 

BTTT^  PAGB 

198.  Irregularity  of  the  verb  pedir, 213 

199.  The  usual  forms  of  salutations, 213 

LESSON    XL. 

200.  Conducir,  its  irregularity, 219 

201.  Segun  as  a  preposition  and  adverb, 220 

202.  Collective  nouns, 220 

LESSON    XLI. 

203.  Defective  verbs.    Placer, 225 

204.  Yacer,  its  use, 225 

205.  Soler,  its  use 226 

206.  Desde,  its  meaning  and  use, 226 

207.  Contra,  rendered  into  English  by  against, 226 

208.  Sobre,  its  signification, 226 

209.  Tras,  its  meaning, 226 

210.  The  conjunction  pues,  its  use, 227 

211.  Pues,  meaning  well, 227 

LESSON    XLII. 

212.  Conjunctions,  their  classification, 232 

213.  What  is  to  be  observed  in  relation  to  the  government  of  conjunctions,      .  232 

214.  Some  conjunctions  that  govern  the  subjunctive  mode, 233 

215.  Compound  conjunctions  which  require  the  infinitive  mode,  .        ...  233 

216.  Compound  conjunctions  which  require  the  indicative,           ....  233 

LESSON    XLIII. 

217.  Imperfect  and  past  perfect  subjunctive,           238 

218.  How  to  render  into  Spanish  the  auxiliaries  may,  might,  can,  could,  will, 

would,  and  should, 240 

219.  What  the  imperfect  subjunctive  denotes,  . 240 

220.  What  the  past  perfect  denotes, 240 

LESSON    XLIV. 

221.  Augmentative  and  diminutive  nouns, 246 

222.  Irregular  terminations  of  certain  diminutives, 247 

223.  Diminutives  may  be  formed  from  adjectives   participles,  gerunds,  and 

adverbs, 248 

224    Some  of  the  primitive  words  do  not  admit  all  the  diminutive  termina- 
tions,        248 

225.  There  are  derivatives  which,  although  they  appear  to  be  augmentatives 

or  diminutives,  are  not  so, 248 

LESSON    XLV. 

226.  The  future  of  the  subjunctive, 254 

227.  How  the  present  of  the  subjunctive  may  be  substituted  by  the  future,      .  254 

228.  The  future  perfect  subjunctive, 254 


CONTEm^S,  xvii 

RULE  PAGE 

229.  The  perfect  subjunctive  may  be  substituted  by  the  future  perfect  sub- 

junctive,          355 

230.  What  is  to  be  observed  in  order  not  to  misapply  the  imperfect  and  past 

perfect, 255 

231.  The  future  and  future  perfect  subjunctive  as  determining  verbs,        .       .  255 

>^  LESSON    XLVI. 

232.  233.    Interjections, 261 

LESSON    XLVII. 

234.  Use  of  the  article, 268 

235.  The  definite  article  used  with  common  nouns  taken  in  a  general  sense,      .  268 

236.  The  article  before  the  names  of  the  four  parts  of  the  globe,  names  of  em- 

pires, kingdoms,  &c 268 

237.  Nouns  of  measure,  weight,  &c.,  when  they  require  the  article,     .       .        .268 

238.  The  article  repeated  before  every  noun  enumerated, 269 

239.  The  definite  article  used  before  nouns  indicating  rank,  office,  &c.,      .        .  269 

240.  Used  instead  of  the  possessive  adjective, 269 

241.  Used  as  in  English,  before  nouns,  taken  in  a  particular  or  definite  sense,  .  269 

LESSON    XLVIII. 

242.  Correspondence  of  the  tenses  with  each  other, 276 

243.  When  the  determined  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive, 276 

244.  When  the  determining  verb  is  ser^  or  any  impersonal  verb,  and  the  govern- 

ing verb  has  no  subject, 277 

245.  Put  in  the  subjunctive  when  the  determining  verb  has  a  nominative, .        .  277 

246.  When  the  governing  verb  is  put  in  the  present  or  future  of  the  subjunctive,  277 

247.  When  there  are  different  subjects  of  determining  and  determined  verbs,  .  278 

248.  The  nominative  being  the  same  for  both  verbs  and  the  governing  one  in 

the  indicative,  in  what  mode  the  determining  verb  is  put,  .       .       .       .278 

LESSON    XLIX. 

249.  250,  251,  252,  253,  254,  255,  256,  257,  258,  259.    Derivative  nouns,  ....  284 

LESSON    L. 

260.  Compound  nouns, 291 

LESSON    LI. 

261.  The  natural  construction, 297 

262.  ^63.    Figurative  construction, 297 

264.  Which  of  the  two  constructions  is  preferable, 298 

LESSON    LII. 

265.  Past  Participles 304 

266.  Agreement  of  past  participles 304 

267.  When  a  verb  has  two  past  participles,  one  regular  and  the  other  irregular, 

how  they  are  used, 304 

268.  Irregular  past  participles  that  may  be  used  with  the  verb  haber,         .       .  305 

269.  Extraordinary  irregularity  of  the  verb  morrr^ 30^ 


xviii  CONTENTS. 

RULE  PASS 

270.  Some  past  participles  take  an  active  signification,  ......    305 

271.  Past  participles  may  sometimes  take  the  place  of  substantives,  .       ^       .306 

272.  Other  tenses  in  the  infinitive  mode, c        .       .    306 

LESSON    LIII. 

273.  Idiomatic  expressions,  in  which  the  English  preposition  differs  in  meaning 

from  that  which  most  generally  constitutes  its  proper  signification,        .    312 

LESSON    LIV. 

274.  Conjunctions  in  English  that  are  frequently  used  as  substitutes  for  other 

words,  how  rendered  into  Spanish, 318 

275.  Spanish  conjunctions  used  as  substitutes  for  other  words,     .       .       .       .318 
— .    Different  uses  of  the  conjimction  si, 318 

LESSON    LY. 

276.  Some  of  the  principal  uses  of  the  conjunction  gwc, 324 

LESSON    LVI. 

277.  Epistolary  correspondence, 330 

LESSON    LVII. 

278.  Observation  in  regard  to  verbs  that  change  their  meaning  according  to  the 

preposition  by  which  they  are  followed, 339 

LESSON   LVIII. 

279.  The  verbs  to  he  glad  and  to  he  rejoiced,  how  translated,        ....    344 

280.  The  verbs  to  he  sorry  and  to  grieve,  how  translated, 844 

281.  How  the  verb  caber  is  used, 345 

LESSON    LIX. 

282.  Idioms  with  the  verbs  caer,  dar^  decir,  echar^ 351 

LESSON    LX. 

283.  Idioms  with  the  verbs  entrar,  fuicer,  ir,  llevar,  mandar,  oler  d,  saber  d, 

salir,  servir,  tardar,  and  volver, 358 

LESSONS    LXI    TO    LXV. 
On  the  Principal  Idioms  of  the  Spanish  Language, 360  to  £88 

General  observations  on  some  grammatical  and  idiomatical  peculiarities  of  the 

Spanish  language,  not  hitherto  treated  of  in  the  Grammar,       .        .       .       .389 
Complete  list  of  the  conjugations  of  all  the  Spanish  verbs,      .        .        .         400  to  451 

List  of  all  the  irregular  verbs 455,  456 

Vocabulary,  containing  all  the  Spanish  words  used  in  the  Grammar,  .         459  to  496 


INTKODUCTION. 


OETHOGRAPHY  AND   PEONUNCIATIOK 


THE  ALPHABET. 


The  Spanish  Alphabet  contains  twenty-eight  letters, 
exclusive  of  Tf,  which  is  used  in  foreign  words  only,  and  ifc^ 
pronounced  as  in  English.  (7A,  ??,  ^,  and  rr  are  single  let- 
ters, although  double  in  form.     The  alphabet  is  as  follows : 


A, 

a, 

ah^ 

M, 

m, 

em'-may. 

B, 

b, 

lay. 

N, 

n, 

en' -nay. 

c, 

c, 

thay^  or 

say  A 

\ 

fi, 

en'-yay. 

CH, 

ch, 

chay. 

0, 

0, 

0. 

D, 

d, 

day. 

P, 

P, 

'pay. 

E, 

e, 

ay. 

Q, 

q, 

Tcoo, 

F, 

f, 

ef-M^ 

E, 

r, 

eh' -ray. 

(>, 

g, 

hay. 

8, 

s, 

es'-say. 

H, 

h, 

at'-ckay. 

T, 

t, 

tay. 

I, 

i, 

e. 

u, 

u, 

00, 

J, 

3, 

Tio'-tah, 

V, 

V, 

my. 

K, 

k, 

Mh, 

X, 

X, 

eh'-lcees. 

L, 

1, 

el'-Uy. 

Y, 

y, 

e-gree-ay'-gah. 

LL, 

11, 

eV-yay, 

or  W-yay.  f 

z, 

z, 

thay-tali^  or  say'-tah.ji 

*  The  pupil  should  not  try  to  learn  the  Spanish  names  of  the  letters 
immediately,  as  they  are  confusing ;  but  only  their  sounds,  or  orthograph- 
ical force. 

t  This  is  the  American  variation,  now  used  by  the  many  millions  who 
speak  Spanish  as  their  native  tongue  in  Mexico,  Cuba,  and  South  America. 


XX  INTRODUCTION, 

A  number  of  the  letters  are  invariable  in  sound,  as  will  be 
seen  in  the  proper  place ;  and  every  letter  is  pronounced  in 
all  positions,  except  the  A,  which  is  always  silent,  and  the  u^ 
without  the  dieresis,  in  the  syllables  gue^  gui^  and  que^  qui. 

With  a  few  exceptions,  the  Spanish  language  is  pro- 
nounced exactly  as  it  is  written,  and  does  not  present  those 
difficulties  met  with  in  the  orthography  and  pronunciation  of 
most  other  languages.  The  method  of  representing,  in  each 
lesson,  the  pronunciation  of  every  word  by  an  incorrect  or- 
thography only  augments  the  labor  and  doubts  of  the  learner, 
besides  increasing  unnecessarily  the  size  of  the  work.  A  few 
lessons  with  a  wise  teacher  who  speaks  Spanish  accurately 
will  do  more  to  further  the  acquisition  of  a  correct  pronuncia- 
tion than  all  the  works  that  could  be  written  on  the  subject. 

As  the  English  vowels  differ  in  sound  from  those  of  all 
other  languages,  great  care  ought  to  be  taken  to  learn  the 
true  sound  of  the  Spanish  vowels.     They  are  : 


a, 

e, 

1, 

o, 

u. 

ah. 

ay^ 

e, 

0, 

oo. 

A  has  an  invariable  sound,  like  a  in  father-^  as,  parte^ 
part,  arte^  art,  carta^  letter,  carne^  meat,  hotica^  drug-store. 

E  has  the  sound  of  e  in  they\  as,  cera,  wax,  madera^ 
wood. 

I  is  invariable,  and  has  the  sound  of  i  in  machine ;  as,  si^ 
yes,  sino^  but,  alli^  there. 

0  is  invariable,  and  has  the  sound  of  o  in  Lord — neither 
the  0  of  note  nor  that  of  top  ;  todo,  all,  amo,  I  love. 

TJ  is  invariable,  and  sounds  like  u  in  rule ;  as,  puro,  pure, 
tuna,  prickly  pear ;  it  is  silent  in  the  syllables  gue,gui,guerra, 
except  it  have  a  dieresis  marked  over  it ;  as,  vergiienza,  shame. 
In  the  syllables  que^  qui,  it  is  always  silent. 


INTRODUCTION.  xxi 


SOUNDS  OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 

B  has  nearly  the  same  sound  as  in  English ;  but  in  Castile, 
and  wherever  the  Castilian  language  is  most  purely  spoken, 
they  do  not  press  the  lips  quite  as  closely  together  as  those 
who  speak  English  do,  and  this  causes  it  to  be  very  fre- 
quently confounded  with  the  v^  although  they  are  distinct 
letters. 

C,  when  followed  by  a,  o,  w,  or  any  consonant,  sounds 
like  k.  Before  e  and  i  it  sounds  like  th  in  thanks ;  as,  cecina^ 
gracias,  leccion, 

CH  is  not  a  double  consonant,  but  a  letter  which,  although 
of  a  double  form,  has  by  itself  a  particular  denomination  and 
sound ;  it  is  pronounced  like  ch  in  chess ;  as,  chico^  chocolate. 
Formerly,  in  words  of  Hebrew  and  Greek  origin,  it  had  the 
sound  of  ^,  when  the  vowel  following  it  was  marked  with 
the  circumflex  accent ;  as,  archangel^  chimica :  but  this  prac- 
tice is  obsolete,  and  such  words  are  now  written  arcdngel^ 
quimica. 

D  has  two  sounds ;  between  two  vowels,  and  at  the  end  of 
words,  it  has  the  sound  of  th  in  that ;  as,  ido^  amad ;  but  care 
must  be  had  not  to  give  this  d  the  sound  of  th  in  thin.  Every- 
where else  it  has  the  sound  of  d  in  English ;  as,  de^  divino^ 
duro. 

F  is  always  pronounced  like  the  English  /,  and  is  now 
used  instead  of  ph ;  as,  Filosofia^  Filadelfia^  instead  of  Fhilo- 
sophia^  Philadelphia, 

G  has  two  distinct  sounds :  one,  before  a^  o,  u^  or  a  conso- 
nant, is  the  same  sound  as  in  English  go^  good ;  as,  gato^  gra^ 
cias ;  before  e  and  i  it  has  a  strong,  guttural,  aspirated  sound, 
for  which  the  English  has  no  equivalent,  and  which  even  a 
very  strongly  aspirated  h^  as  in  the  words  hot^  holy,,  does  not 
represent ;  as,  gente^  people  ;  gesto,,  gesture ;  general,,  general. 


xxii  INTRODUCTION, 

H  is  always  silent ;  as,  hace^  Mgo^  pronounced  as  if  no  such 
h  were  there.  It  is  preserved  only  as  a  sign  to  indicate  the 
etymology  of  words,  and  is  now  omitted  in  many  words  in 
which  it  was  formerly  used;  as,  Cristo,  Filosofia,  Teatro^ 
Pitdgoras^  Filadelfia, 

H  is  always  written  before  words  beginning  with  ue  and 
ui^  and,  with  three  exceptions  {uardnido,  uarano,  uatita)^ 
before  ua, 

J  has  always  an  aspirated  guttural  sound,  like  that  which 
the  g  has  before  e  and  i, 

L  always  sounds  as  in  English. 

LL  is  a  single  letter,  and  may  not  be  divided  at  the  end 
of  a  line.  It  has  a  liquid  sound,  resembling  that  of  the 
English  II  in  William^  brilliant ;  as,  Guillermo^  hrillante ; 
but  in  the  Americas  it  has  the  sound  of  y  with  a  slight 
rough  breathing  ;  as,  Saltillo,  pronounced  Sal-ti'-yo. 

M,  N,  and  P  have  the  English  sound. 

N  is  always  pronounced  like  ni  in  the  English  word 
pinion  ;  as,  canon,  pronounced  can-yon' . 

Q,  is  pronounced  like  the  English  k  before  ue  and  ui,  in 
which  combination  alone  it  is  now  used ;  in  all  other  posi- 
tions it  has  been  replaced  by  c ;  as,  cuando,  cama,  corner^ 
quien,  querer. 

E,  between  two  vowels  is  like  the  English  r,  only  it  is 
softer,  and  it  requires  a  nice  perception  to  catch  the  dif- 
ference ;  as,  pero.  At  the  beginning  or  end  of  a  word,  or 
when  it  follows  Z,  ?i,  5,  it  is  pronounced  with  a  strong  trill, 
produced  by  breathing  out  through  the  mouth  while  the 
tongue  is  being  vibrated  against  the  upper  gums ;  as,  reloj\ 
malrotar^  enriquecer,  Israel,  prerrogativa,  manirroto,  cari* 
rredondo,  &c. 


INTRODUCTION,  xxiii 

RE  is  a  single  letter,  and  must  be  treated  as  such.  It 
has  the  rough,  trilled  sound  just  described  ;  as,  tierra^  hurro^ 
perro, 

S  is  pronounced  like  the  English  s  in  say ;  as,  salio,  solo. 
Great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  give  the  Spanish  s  the 
sound  of  sh^  or  z  which  it  often  has  in  English — as  in  sion^ 
or  these.     There  is  no  sh  or  z  sound  Jn  Spanish. 

T  is  pronounced  as  in  English. 

V  has  the  sound  of  the  English  v,     (See  letter  B.) 

X,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  the  x  in  the 
English  word  tax  ;  as,  examen^  extranjero.  At  the  beginning 
of  a  word  or  syllable  x  has  the  sound  of  the  Spanish  /,  that 
is,  a  very  strong  guttural ;  as,  Mexico,  Oaxaca.  (See  letter 
J,)  Some  replace  it  by  the  letter  5,  when  it  comes  before  a 
consonant,  and  write  estranjero  instead  of  extranjero.  The 
grammar  of  the  Spanish  Academy  does  not  authorize  this 
practice. 

Y,  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  or  syllable,  is  like  the 
English  y  in  the  same  position ;  as,  yegua^  Yucatan,  It 
stands  alone  in  the  conjunction  y,  as  a  vowel,  and  was  for- 
merly used  as  a  vowel  at  the  beginning  of  certain  words ; 
as,  Yglesia^  Yrapuato ;  but  it  has  given  place  to  t,  and  it 
never  stands  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  as  a  vowel  in  mod- 
ern Spanish.  It  is  used  instead  of  i  at  the  end  of  words  in 
the  combinations  a%  ei,  oi,  ui ;  as,  verdegay,  rey,  soy,  muy. 
These,  and  many  similar  words,  are  often  met  with  in  old 
Spanish  terminating  in  i, 

Z  has  the  sound  of  fh  in  thistle.  Z  never  has  the  sound 
of  English  2;,  or  the  English  s  in  has. 


XXIV 


INTR  OB  UCTION, 


SYLLABLES. 

Such  syllables  only  will  be  noted 
to  doubt  as  to  the  pronunciation  and 


here  as  may  be  subject 
orthography. 


ca, 

que, 

qui, 

CO, 

cu, 

hah. 

Tcay. 

;fce^. 

A». 

^<x?. 

za, 

ce,     ► 

ci. 

zo. 

zu, 

thah. 

thay. 

thee. 

«Ao. 

thoo. 

az, 

ez, 

iz, 

oz. 

uz, 

ath. 

eth. 

e^^A. 

oth. 

ooth. 

ga, 

gue, 

gui, 

go, 

g^» 

gah. 

^«y. 

ghee. 

i7^. 

^0^. 

ja, 

ge, 

gi, 

3*0, 

jii, 

Mh. 

A«y. 

;^e^. 

A^. 

A<?(?. 

ya. 

ye. 

yi. 

yo. 

yu. 

cha, 

che, 

chi, 

cho. 

chu, 

tchah. 

tcAay. 

tehee. 

Uho. 

tchoo. 

Ua, 

He, 

lli, 

Uo, 

Uu, 

lyaK 

lyay. 

lyee. 

lyo. 

lyoo. 

lla, 

fie, 

fii, 

fio, 

fiu. 

nydh. 

nyai. 

nye. 

nyo. 

nyoo. 

cua, 

cue, 

cui. 

cuo. 

hwaK 

Tcway, 

^2^?e«. 

hwo. 

goa, 

gne, 

g^. 

guo. 

gwah. 

^t/jay. 

gwee. 

gwo. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

a% 

as  in        dabais, 

dah'-lxih-eesa. 

You  gave 

«y, 

hay, 

ah'-e. 

There  is. 

au, 

**           pawsa, 

pah'-oo-sa. 

Pause. 

ei, 

**                V^iS, 

vai'-eess. 

You  see. 

«y, 

"           1^2^, 

Ui'-e. 

Law. 

eo, 

**           linea, 

le'-nai-a 

Line. 

INTRODUCTION.  XXV 

eo^         as  in        virgin^^?,         veer-he' -nai-o.  VirginaL 

eUy  "  d^i^da,  dai'-oo-da.  Debt. 

ia,  **  gracm,  grah' -the-a.  Grace. 

*€,  ^*  cielo^  the-ai'-lo.  Heaven. 


preci(?,  prai'-the-o.  Price, 

cmdad,  the-oo-dath' .  City. 


iu^  ** 

<>^,  **  h^r^^,  ai'-ro-ai.  Hero. 

<>i,  **  so^s,  so'-eess.  You  are. 

oy,  **  VM/,  W-^.  I  go. 

t^a,  **  frskgua,  frah'-gwa.  Forge.   _ 

-i^e,  **  dt/ello,  doo-ain'-yo.  Owner. 

1(1,  **  rwido,  roo-e'-do.  Noise, 

i^y,  **  mwj^,  moo'-e.  Very. 

1^,  "  ardi^<?,  ar'-doo-o.  Arduous. 


TRIPHTHONGS. 

iai,  as  in  precmis,  prai-the-ah'-eess, 

iei,  **  vaci^is,  va7i-tjie-ai' -eess. 

uai^  **  santigt^ais,  aan-te-gwah' -eess. 

ua/y^  **  'PsLTSigudy,  pah-rah-gwah'-e. 

uei,  **  averigweis,  ah-vai-re-gwai'-eess. 

uey,  **  b'w^,  Iwai'-e. 

Whenever  one  of  the  vowels  is  accented,  these  combina- 
tions do  not  form  diphthongs,  because  each  vowel  then  be- 
comes a  separate  syllable ;  as,  leia^  varia^  efectua^  &c.  In 
poetry  the  diphthongs  as  well  as  the  triphthongs  may  be 
divided  into  different  syllables  by  a  dieresis,  when  the  verse 
requires  an  additional  syllable,  as  : 

"  6  si  rodeo  tal  vez, 
Por  el  Istmo  de  Siiez." 


SYLLABICATION. 


Accuracy  in  pronunciation  depends  largely  on  the  man- 
ner of  dividing  words  into  syllables,  and  on  a  certain  nicety 
in  severing  or  isolating  these,  by  means  of  precision  in  vocal 


XX  vi  INTRODUCTION, 

utterance.     This  is  especially  true  of  certain  combinations 
of  letters.     Let  the  following  rules  be  observed  : 

1.  When  a  consonant  is  preceded  and  followed  by  a 
vowel,  it  forms  a  syllable  with  the  following  vowel ;  and  in 
writing  or  speech  all  words  must  be  so  divided  as  to  con- 
form to  this  law  ;  as,  se-nor,  and  not  seft-or  ;  a-dios^  and  not 
ad-ios  ;  Jia-cia^  and  not  hac-ia  ;  ce-rd^  and  not  cer-a, 

2.  LI,  ch,  and  rr,  as  has  been  said,  must  never  be  divided 
in  writing ;  and  diphthongs  and  triphthongs  never  have 
their  vowels  separated  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

3.  The  groups  U,  Ir,  cl,  cr,  dr,  /,  /r,  gl,  gr,  ^Z,  jf?r,  tr^ 
are  never  separated. 

4.  A  special  effort  should  be  made  to  have  the  stress  of 
voice  fall  sharply  on  the  accented  syllable.  Certain  vowel 
combinations  must  be  carefully  severed  in  pronunciation; 
as,  d/a,  patio,  hacz«,  o^do,  c^e^ble ;  and  when  two  consonants 
come  together,  one  at  the  end  of  one  syllable,  and  the  other 
at  the  beginning  of  the  next,  they  must  be  scrupulously 
separated  by  the  voice  ;  as,  men-te,  es-te,  pruden-te,  ausen-te. 
To  overlook  this  is  to  abandon  all  hope  of  a  correct  and 
delicate  Spanish  pronunciation. 


ACCENTUATION. 

Attention  to  these  rules  is  necessary  for  correctness  in 
this  branch  of  Spanish  orthography,  and  their  mastery  will 
save  endless  confusion  and  worry. 

By  a  revision  of  the  rules  governing  the  placing  of  the 
written  accent  upon  words  irregularly  accented,  made  some 
years  ago  by  the  Spanish  Academy,  the  whole  system  of 
accentuation  was  changed.  The  following  are  the  modern 
rules  : 

1.  Words  ending  in  unaccented  vowels  receive  the  in- 
flection on  the  next  to  the  last  syllable  ;  as,  hlanco^  white ; 
mesa,  table  ;  caballo,  horse. 

2.  Unaccented  words  ending  in  consonants  (except  n  or  s) 


INTRODUCTION,  xxvii 

receive  the  inflection  on  the  last  syllable;  as,  haUar^  to 
speak ;  unidad^  unity ;  virtud,  virtue ;  querub^  cherub ;  reloj\ 
watch  ;  marfil^  ivory  ;  arroz^  rice. 

3.  Any  departure  from  these  rules  must  be  indicated  by 
placing  an  accent  upon  the  syllable  which  is  irregularly 
accented ;  as,  prdctico^  practical ;  Jiuerfano,  orphan ;  alii, 
there  ;  mier coles,  Wednesday  ;  Idj^iz,  pencil ;  drlol,  tree  ; 
mdrtir,  martyr. 

4.  Since  n  and  s  are  used  constantly  as  the  final  letters 
of  verbs  under  inflection,  they  are  excepted  from  the  gen- 
eral rule,  so  that  any  word  ending  in  either  of  these  letters, 
and  accented  on  any  other  than  the  next  to  the  last  syllable, 
must  have  a  written  accent ;  as,  inter es,  interest ;  ingles, 
English  ;  corazon,  heart ;  hahlards,  thou  wilt  speak ;  compo- 
sicion,  composition  ;  regimen,  regimen  ;  haUdhamos,  we  were 
speaking ;  and  this  rule  is  invariable.  Therefore,  it  is  almost 
needless  to  add  that  words  ending  in  n  and  s,  and  accented 
on  the  next  to  the  last  syllable,  do  not  take  a  written  accent ; 
as,  Carlos,  Charles  ;  antes,  before  ;  examen,  examination. 

5.  For  purposes  of  accent,  certain  diphthongs,  when  at 
the  end  of  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  are  treated  as  a 
single  vowel ;  viz.,  io,  ia,  no,  ua,  ie,  etc.,  so  that  when  words 
ending  in  any  of  these  combinations  are  accented  on  the 
next  to  the  last  syllable,  the  accent  is  not  written  ;  as,  hacia, 
toward  ;  continuo,  continuous  ;  especie,  sort. 

6.  Words  ending  in  io,  ia,  uo,  ua,  ie,  &c.,  and  accented 
on  the  first  of  these  vowels,  have  the  accent  written ;  as, 
dia,  day ;  mio  or  mia,  mine ;  hacia,  I  was  making ;  eyivio, 
I  send  ;  continuo,  I  continue. 

7.  The  accent  is  frequently  placed  on  one  of  the  vowels 
of  a  diphthong  or  triphthong  to  indicate  that  that  partic- 
ular vowel  is  accented,  and  not  another,  on  which  it  would 
regularly  fall ;  as,  oido,  heard ;  puntapie,  kick  ;  pais,  coun- 
try ;  leido,  read  ;  haul,  trunk. 

8.  The  written  accent  is  used  to  distinguish  from  each 
other  certain  monosyllabic  words,  which  are  similar  in  form, 
but  different  in  meaning;   as,  mds,  more,  and  mas,  but; 


xxviii  INTRODUCTION, 

e7,  he,  and  el^  the  ;  que^  what  or  which  (interrogative),  and 
que^  that  or  which  (relative)  ;  si^  yes,  and  si^  if. 

9.  When  the  vowels  «,  e,  o,  u  stand  alone,  as  words,  they 
are  always  accented. 

10.  All  unnecessary  accents  are  to  be  avoided ;  and  all 
words  must  be  pronounced  according  to  their  accent,  whether 
regular  and  unwritten,  or  irregular  and  written.  Many 
words  formerly  accented  are  not  now  accented;  as,  antes^ 
before ;  fe^  faith ;  ^^,  thee ;  liacia^  toward. 

It  was  formerly  the  custom  to  accent  all  the  first  persons 
plural  of  the  preterite  indicative  of  verbs  of  the  first  and  third 
conjugations ;  as,  haUamos^  we  spoke  ;  escrihimos^  we  wrote ; 
to  distinguish  them  from  the  same  forms  of  the  present 
indicative ;  as  also  the  same  person  and  number  of  the  future 
indicative  of  all  verbs ;  as,  hablaremos^  we  shall  speak ;  ajpren- 
deremos^  we  shall  learn ;  escrihiremos^  we  shall  write ;  but 
this  has  been  abandoned,  as  being  contrary  to  rule  of  accent 
number  4. 

11.  When  adverbs  ending  in  -mente  are  formed  from  ad- 
jectives which  have  a  written  accent,  the  written  accent  is 
preserved  in  the  adverbs;  as,  comodo^  convenient;  comoda- 
mente^  conveniently ;  prdctico^  practical ;  prdcticamente^  prac- 
tically. 

12.  Words  ending  in  n  and  5,  and  accented  on  the  last 
syllable  of  their  masculine  singular  form,  drop  the  written 
accent  in  their  masculine  plural  and  in  their  feminine  sin- 
gular and  plural ;  as  ingles^  Englishman ;  ingleses^  English- 
men; inglesa^  an  Englishwoman;  inglesas,  Englishwomen; 
alemdn,  a  German ;  alemanes^  Germans ;  alemana^  a  German 
woman ;  alemanas^  German  women. 

The  one  word  car  deter  ^  character,  has  an  irregular  accent 
in  the  plural,  caracteres^  which  is  accented  on  the  next  to 
the  last  syllable,  while  it  ought  to  fall  on  the  third  from  the 
last,  if  it  followed  its  singular. 

13.  When  a  pronominal  suffix  is  attached  to  the  end  of  a 
verb  which  has  a  written  accent  on  the  last  syllable,  the 
accent  is  preserved  to  show  the  nature  of  the  word,  even 


INTRODUCTION. 


XXIX 


though  this  be  an  apparent  violation  of  rule  1 ;  as,  hahU^ 
he  spoke ;  lidbUle^  he  spoke  to  him ;  also,  when  a  verb  is 
accented  on  the  next  to  the  last  syllable,  and  a  pronominal 
suffix  is  added,  thus  throwing  the  accent  on  the  third  syl- 
lable from  the  last,  the  word  must  have  a  written  accent ; 
as,  tenga^  let  him  have ;  Ungalo^  let  him  have  it ;  so  also  when 
there  are  two  such  suffixes,  and  the  accent  is  thrown  still 
further  from  the  end  of  the  word ;  as,  ^^^a,tell  (subjunctive); 
digalo^  tell  it ;  digaselo^  tell  it  to  him. 


PUNCTUATION  AND  CAPITALS. 

Spanish  is  not  so  profuse  as  English  in  its  use  of  either 
punctuation  marks  or  capital  letters.  The  punctuation 
marks  are  the  same  as  those  used  in  English,  with  the  addi- 
tion of  the  inverted  signs  of  interrogation  and  exclamation, 
which  stand  at  the  beginning  of  interrogatory  and  exclama- 
tory sentences,  phrases,  and  words ;  as,  '^  Donde  vive  usted  9 
Where  do  you  live  ?  and  /  Oh^  que  yo  siipiera!  Oh!  that  I  knew! 

Proper  nouns  begin  with  capitals ;  but  proper  adjectives, 
such  as  americano^  the  American  (man),  alemana^  the  Ger- 
man woman,  do  not.  The  names  of  the  months  and  the 
names  of  the  days  of  the  week  begin  with  small  letters. 


DE  TOENOS'S 
SPANISH    GEAMMAJR.. 


LESSON   i;, ''>'.;„* 

REGULAR  yERB.— First  Conjugation. 


TERMINATIONS   OP   THE 

INDICATIVE   PRESENT. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  O. 

1.  amos. 

2.  as. 

2.  ais. 

3.  a. 

3.  an. 

HablsLT.     (Infinitive.) 

To  speak. 

INDICATIVI 

]   PRESENT. 

Yo  hablo. 

I  speak. 

Tii  hablas. 

Thou  speakest. 

El  or  ella  habla. 

He  or  she  speaks. 

Usted  habla. 

You    speak,    i.e.,    your 

speaks. 

Nosotros,  or  1  -    ,  , 
Nosotras,       [  hablamos. 

We  speak. 

Vosotros,  or  )  -    .  ^ , . 
Vosotras,       \^^^^^'^- 

You  speak. 

Ellos,  or  ellas,  hablan. 

They  speak. 

Ustedes  hablan. 

You  speak. 

Si  (adverb). 

Yes. 

No       " 

No,  or  not. 

Senor. 

Sir. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

^ Habla  usted? 

Do  you  speak  f 

Si,  senor,  yo  hablo. 

Yes,  sir,  I  speak. 

i  Hablan  ustedes  1 

Do  you  speak  ? 

3 

1 

honor 


LESSON  I. 


No,  senor,  ellas  hablan. 

i  Hablais  vosotras  f 

No,  senor,  ellos  hablan. 

iHablaella? 

No,  senor,  ella  no  habla. 

I  Hablas  tu  ? 

No,  senor,  el  habla. 

i  Habla  usted  ? 

Si,  senor,  hablo. 

I  Hablaii  el-as  ? 

No  senor,  no  habJan. 

4  Hablamcs  no9o|;f  ^ys  ? 

Si,  senor,  hablamos. 

I  Hablais  vosotras  f 

Nosotras  no  hablamos. 


No,  sir,  they  speak. 

Do  you  speak  f 

No,  sir,  they  speak. 

Does  she  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak. 

Dost  thou  speak  ? 

No,  sir,  he  speaks. 

Do  you  speak  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  speak. 

Do  they  speak  f 

No,  sir,  they  do  not  speak. 

Do  we  speak  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  speak. 

Do  you  speak? 

We  do  not  speak. 


EXPLANATION. 

1.  Eegular  Verbs. — All  the  verbs  of  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage have  their  infinitive  endings  in  either  «r,  er,  or  ir ; 
hence  their  classification  in  three  conjugations ;  1st,  those 
ending  in  ar ;  2d,  those  ending  in  er ;  and  3d,  in  ir  ;  as  hor 
hlar^  aprender,  escribir, 

2.  Stems. — The  letters  before  the  terminations  ar^  er,  ir, 
in  the  preceding  verbs,  habl,  aprend,  escrih,  are  called  the 
stems. 

3.  Terminations. — All  regular  verbs  of  the  first  conju- 
gation vary  the  endings  in  their  respective  modes  and  tenses, 
80  as  to  correspond  with  those  of  the  verb  liablar ;  all  those 
of  the  second  conjugation  correspond  to  the  terminations  of 
aprender ;  and  all  those  of  the  third  correspond  to  escribir. 

AYhen  therefore  the  student  has  learned  to  conjugate  one 
of  the  regular  verbs  of  each  conjugation,  he  can  conjugate 
all  the  regular  verbs  of  the  Spanish  language  (about  8,000). 
For  this  reason  we  recommend  the  pupils  to  devote  their  at- 
tention, in  the/r5^  place,  to  committing  to  memory  the  differ- 
ent forms  of  these  three  model  verbs.  They  will  be  found 
complete  near  the  end  of  the  book. 

As  the  terminations  of  the  verbs  are  different  for  each 
person,  both  in  the  singular  and  plural,  the  nominative  pro- 


LFSSON  I.  3 

nouns  are  ordinarily  dispensed  with,  and  are  only  used  to 
avoid  ambiguity,  or  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  except  the 
pronoun  listed^  which  is  usually  expressed. —  Usted,  meaning 
You,  is  a  contraction  from  vuestra  merced^  Your  Honor; 
and,  being  a  title,  its  omission  would  be  considered  impolite. 
It  is  usually  abbreviated  to  V.  or  Ud.  for  the  singular,  and 
Vds.  or  Uds.  for  the  plural ;  but  in  order  not  to  perplex  the 
beginner,  we  shall  use  the  full  word  for  the  present. 

4.  You. — In  addressing  an  individual  in  Spanish,  the  third 
person  of  the  verb  is  used  with  the  pronoun  Usted :  as,  Usted 
habla^  you  speak  ;  the  second  person  singular  is  employed  only 
in  addressing  the  Deity,  and  in  conversation  between  relatives 
and  intimate  friends,  and  in  speaking  to  children  and  ser- 
vants. The  second  person  plural  is  used  as  the  second  person 
singular  when  addressing  more  than  one  person,  and  in  ad- 
dressing audiences — where  ustedes  would  be  inappropriate — 
and  kings  or  persons  in  very  exalted  station,  and,  in  old 
Spanish  and  in  certain  exalted  discourse,  the  Deity. 

5.  In  a  declarative  sentence,  where  a  statement  is  made, 
the  subject,  whether  noun  or  pronoun,  precedes  the  verb ;  as, 
Usted  kahla^  you  speak ;  in  interrogative  sentences  the  verb 
precedes  the  subject;  as,  ^Habla  el?  does  he  speak?  (liter- 
ally, speaks  he^), 

6.  The  Spanish  language  has  no  auxiliary  corresponding 
to  do  or  did\  so  all  these  interrogative  sentences  must  be 
reduced  to  a  form  similar  to  the  Spanish ;  as  speah  you^  in- 
stead of,  do  you  speah ;  then  it  is  easy  to  translate  this  by 
^  Hdbla  usted  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Hablan  ellas  ?    Si,  seiior,  ellas  hablan. 

2.  I  Hablais  vosotros  ?    No,  senor ;  alios  hablan. 

3.  I  Hablamos  nosotras  ?    No,  seiior ;  ella  habla. 

4.  I  Hablais  vosotros  ?    No,  senor ;  el  habla. 

5.  I  Habla  ella  ?    Si,  seiior,  habla. 

6.  i  Habla  el  ?    No,  seiior,  no  habla. 

7.  i  Hablas  tii  ?    Si,  senor,  yo  hablo. 

8.  e  Hablais  vosotras  ?    Si,  senor,  nosotras  hablamos. 


4  LESSON  11. 

9.  I  Hablo  yo  ?    Si,  senor,  usted  habla. 

10.  i  Habla  el  ?    No,  senor,  no  habla. 

11.  I  No  hablan  ellos  ?    Si,  seiior,  ellos  hablan. 

12.  I  Habla  usted  ?    No,  senor,  yo  no  hablo. 

13.  I  No  habla  usted  ?    No,  senor,  yo  no  hablo. 

14.  i  No  hablan  ellas  ?    Si,  senor,  hablan. 

15.  I  No  hablais  vosotras  ?    No,  senor,  nosotras  no  hablamos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  speak  ?    I  speak. 

2.  Do  they  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  speak. 

3.  Dost  thou  speak  ?    No,  sir,  he  speaks. 

4.  Do  you  speak  ?    No,  sir, 'we  do  not  speak. 

5.  Dost  thou  speak  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak. 

6.  Does  he  not  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  speaks. 

7.  Do  you  not  speak  ?    No,  sir,  we  do  not  speak. 

8.  Does  she  not  speak  ?    No,  sir,  she  does  not  speak. 

9.  Do  we  not  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  speak. 

10.  Do  they  (/em.)  not  speak  ?    No,  sir,  they  {fern.)  do  not 
speak. 

11.  Do  we  {fern.)  not  speak  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  {fern.)  speak. 

12.  Do  you  speak  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak ;  they  {fem.)  speak. 


LESSON    II. 


MASCULINE   NOUNS. 

Senor  (Sr.).   Sir,  Mr.,  or  Lord. 
Caballero.     Gentleman,  Sir. 

Senorito.       Young  gentleman. 

Don.  (Dn.,  or  D.).     Mr.,  Esq. 


Manuel. 

Emanuel. 

Espaiiol. 

Spanish. 

Ingles. 

English. 

Frances. 

French. 

Aleman. 

German. 

FEMININE  NOUNS. 

Senora  (Sra.).       Madam,  or  Mrs. 
"  "  Lady,     or    My 

lady. 
Senorita  (Srita.).  Miss,  or  young 

lady. 
Dona  (Da.)  Mrs. 


Luisa. 


Louisa. 


LESSON  11. 


COMPOSITION. 


Sefiorita,  %  habla  usted  espanol  ? 

Si,  senor,  hablo  espanol. 

Luisa,  I  hablas  f ranees  ? 

No,  senor,  no  hablo  frances. 

^  Hablan  ustedes  ingles  ? 

Hablamos  ingles. 

I  Hablan  ellos,  6  ellas,  frances  ? 

Seiiora,  ^  habla  usted  espanol ! 

Don  Manuel,  ^  habla  usted  aleman^ 

Caballero,  i  habla  usted  espanol  ? 

Sefiorita  Luisa,  |, habla  usted  frances? 


Do  you  speak  Spanish,  Miss? 
Yes,  sir,  I  speak  Spanish. 
Louisa,  dost  thou  speak  French  ? 
No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  French. 
Do  you  speak  English  ? 
We  speak  English. 
Do  they  speak  French  ? 
Madam,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 
Mr.  Emanuel,  do  you  speak  German? 
Sir,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 
Miss  Louisa,  do  you  speak  French  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

7.  Se:S^or. — This  word,  used  alone,  i.  e.,  as  a  vocative,  was 
originally  supposed  to  imply  inferiority  on  the  part  of  the 
speaker,  and  corresponded  to  the  English  word  master^  as  used 
by  slaves  or  servants ;  and  it  is  so  used  to-day  by  the  same 
classes ;  but  it  is  also  used  in  addressing  the  Deity,  or  Jesus 
Christ,  and  the  king  or  any  person  in  very  high  position. 
Theoretically,  the  proper  term  of  address  among  equals  is 
caballero^  gentleman  or  sir ;  but  8enor  is  very  commonly  used 
in  this  case  at  the  present  time,  and  especially  with  the  words 
5^,  yes,  no.,  no ;  as,  5^,  sefior ;  no^  senor.  It  is  used  with  the 
surname,  and  means  Mr.,  as,  Senor  Gomez^  Mr.  Gomez. 

Seftora,  Senorita. — In  addressing  married  ladies,  the  word 
Senora,  Madam  or  Mrs.,  and  Senorita,  Young  (unmarried) 
lady  or  Miss,  may  be  used  alone;  as,  Sefiora,  or  Senoritay 
SJiaUa  usted  espanol?  Madam,  or  Young  lady,  or  Miss,  do 
you  speak  Spanish  ? 

Senorito,  like  Senor,  usually  implies  inferiority  on  the 
part  of  the  speaker,  for  which  reason  it  is  seldom  used,  except 
by  servants,  though  it  is  sometimes  applied  to  boys  in  play- 
fulness, like  the  English,  "  My  little  man,"  "  Young  sir." 

8.  Don,  Mr.,  applies  to  gentlemen,  and  Bona,  Mrs.,  to  la- 
dies. These  terms  are  only  used  in  conjunction  with  the 
Christian  names;  as,  Bon  Manuel,  Bona  Luisa,  and  still 
more  respectfully,  Senor  Bon  Manuel,  Senora  Bona  Luisa. 


6  LESSON  IL 

This  title,  conferred,  in  old  times,  only  upon  members  of 
noble  families,  is  now  used  in  addressing  all  persons,  except 
those  of  very  humble  station,  and  is  thus  abbreviated,  Dn.,  Da. 

9.  The  negative  no^  is  always  placed  immediately  before 
the  verb. 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  i  Habla  usted  espaiiol  ?    Hablo  espanol. 

2.  Luisa,  I  hablas  f ranees  ?    Hablo  frances. 

3.  I  Habla  Manuel  ingles  ?    Habla  ingles. 

4.  Cabal  lero,  i  habla  usted  aleman  ?    Si,  senor,  hablo  aleman. 

5.  i  Hablan  ustedes  frances  ?    Hablamos  frances. 

6.  I  Hablan  ellos  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  no  hablan  ingles. 

7.  i  Hablan  ellas  espanol  ?    No,  senor,  no  hablan  espanol. 

8.  i  Habla  Luisa  frances  ?    No,  senor,  no  habla  frances ;  ella 
habla  espanol. 

9.  e  No  habla  Manuel  aleman  ?    No,  senor,  no  habla  aleman ; 
el  habla  ingles. 

10.  I  Habla  usted  espanol  ?    No,  senor,  no  hablo  espaiiol. 

11.  I  Habla  Manuel  espaiiol  ?    Si,  seiior,  el  habla  espanol. 

12.  Don  Manuel,  i  habla  usted  frances  ?    No,  seiior,  no  hablo 
frances. 

13.  Senora  Da.   Luisa,   i  habla  usted   espanol  ?     No,   senor ; 
hablo  ingles. 

14.  Senorita   Da.   Luisa,   i  habla  usted    frances  ?     Yo  hablo 
frances. 

15.  Caballero,   i  habla  usted  aleman  ?    No,  senorita,  hablo 
espanol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  they  speak  French  ?    They  speak  French. 

2.  Do  you  speak  English  ?    We  speak  English. 

3.  Do  they  speak  Spanish  ?    No,  madam,  they  do  not  speak 
Spanish. 

4.  Sir,  do  you  speak  German  ?    Yes,  madam,  I  speak  German- 

5.  Does  Emanuel  speak  French  ?    No,  sir ;  he  speaks  English. 

6.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish. 

7.  Does  not  Louisa  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  she  does  not 
speak  German  ;  she  speaks  French. 

8.  Emanuel,  dost  thou  speak  English  ?    I  speak  Enp^lish. 

9.  Does  Louisa  speak  Spanish  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  speaks  Spanish. 


LJESSOJSr  IIL  ff 

10.  Do  you  speak  French  ?    No,  sir,  I  speak  English. 

11.  Sir,  do  you  speak  French  ?    No,  sir. 

12.  Miss  Louisa,  do  you  speak  Spanish  ?    Yes,  madam. 

13.  (Don)  Emanuel,  do  you  speak  English  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak 
English. 

14.  Do  we  speak  Spanish  ?    We  do  not  speak  Spanish ;  we 
speak  French. 


LESSON   III. 


Estudiar,     (Infinitive.  ) 

To  Study. 

Estudio. 

I  study. 

Estudias. 

Thou  studiest. 

Estudia. 

He  studies. 

Estudiamos. 

We  study. 

Estudiais. 

You  study. 

Estudian. 

They  study. 

El  (masc,  sing.). 

The. 

Y  or  e. 

And. 

Que  (interrog.  pronoun). 

What  or  which 

Pero,  sino. 

But. 

Bien  (adverb). 

Well. 

Mai 

Badly. 

ADJECTIVES. 

Espanol. 

Spaniard. 

Ingles. 

Englishman. 

Frances. 

Frenchman. 

Aleman. 

German. 

Americano. 

American. 

MASCULINE   NOUNS. 

Alejandro.    Alexander. 


FEMININE  NOUNS. 

Margarita.    Margaret. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Estudia  usted  espanol  ? 
No,  senor,  el  frances  estudia  espa- 
nol ;  pero  yo  estudio  ingles. 
4  Que  estudia  el  americano  ? 


Do  you  study  Spanish  ? 
No,  sir,  the  Frenchman  studies  Span- 
ish ;  but  I  study  English. 
What  does  the  American  study  ? 


8 


LESSON  III. 


Estudia  espanol  y  frances. 
Alejandro,  4  estudias  frances  y  ale- 
man  ? 
No,  senor,  estudio  espanol  e  ingles. 
Manuel  no  estudia  sino  frances. 
j,  Que  hablan  ellos  sino  espanol  ? 
4  Habla  bien  ingles  el  espanol  ? 

No,  senor,  el  habla  el  ingles  mal, 
pero  habla  bien  el  espanol. 


He  studies  Spanish  and  French. 
Alexander,  do  you  study  French  and 

German  ? 
No,  sir,  I  study  Spanish  and  English. 
Emanuel  studies  but  (only)  French. 
What  do  they  speak  but  Spanish  f 
Does  the  Spaniard  speak  English 

well? 
No,  sir,  he  speaks  English  badly,  but 

speaks  Spanish  well. 


EXPLANATION. 

10.  Y. — The  conjunction  y  is  changed  into  e  when  the 
following  word  begins  with  i  or  hi ;  as,  espanol  e  ingles^  Span- 
ish and  English ;  algodon  e  Jiilo^  cotton  and  thread. 

11.  Que,  interrogative  pronoun^  is  written  with  an  ac- 
cent, to  distinguish  it  from  que^  relative  pronoun,  or  con- 
junction. 

12.  Peeo  and  Sing. — When  we  translate  hut  into  Spanish, 
we  must  first  ascertain  its  meaning ;  because  this  conjunc- 
tion is  used  in  English  in  various  senses.  Peeo  is  used 
adversatively,  where  one  sentence  or  phrase  or  word  is  set 
over  against  another  ;  as,  Hahlo  espanol^  pero  no  Jiahlo  ingles : 
I  speak  Spanish,  but  I  do  not  speak  English.  Sino  is  used 
in  the  sense  of  exception,  as  but,  when  it  means  nothing  but, 
besides,  else,  except,  only,  no  more  than ;  as,  Bl  no  hahla  sino 
espanol^  He  speaks  naught  but  (except)  Spanish.  Pero  is  1 
much  more  common  than  sino. 

13.  We  have  again  introduced  the  words  espanol.,  ingles^ 
frances.,  and  alemdn  into  this  lesson,  because,  while  they 
were  given  before  as  substantives,  they  are  now  employed 
as  adjectives.  The  pupil  will  observe  that,  in  Spanish,  as  in 
English,  some  words  are,  at  different  times,  different  parts  of 
speech ;  as,  El  espanol  habla  Men  frances.  The  Spaniard 
speaks  French  well.  Here  the  word  espanol  is  used  as  an 
adjective,  meaning  Spaniard.,  and  the  word  frances  as  a 
substantive,  meaning  the  French  language ;  Men  is  employed 
as  an  adverb,  meaning  tvell^  and  it  will  appear  later  as  a 


Lussojsr  III.  9 

substantive,  meaning  good.  Consequently,  the  learner,  be- 
fore translating  a  word,  must  first  ascertain  what  part  of 
speech  it  is. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Habla  espanol  Margarita  ?    Margarita  no  habla  espanol, 
pero  habla  ingles. 

2.  I  Habla  usted  espanol  ?    No,  senor,  hablo  frances  y  ale- 
man. 

3.  Alejandro,  l  hablas  ingles  ?    Si,  senor,  hablo  ingles. 

4.  I  Hablan  ustedes  espanol  ?    Hablamos  espanol  e  ingles. 

5.  I  Que  hablan  ellos  ?    Hablan  aleman. 

6.  Caballero,  i  estudia  usted  espanol  ?    Si,  senor,  estudio  es- 
panol e  ingles. 

7.  I  Que  estudia  el  aleman  ?    Estudia  espanol. 

8.  I  Estudian  ustedes  espanol  ?     Estudiamos  frances  y  ale- 
man. 

9.  e  Habla   bien  Luisa  el   ingles  ?    Habla   bien  espanol   e 
ingles. 

10.  i  Habla  bien  Manuel  el  aleman  ?    No,  seiior,  habla  mal  el 
aleman,  pero  habla  bien  el  frances. 

11.  I  Habla  bien  ingles  el  americano  ?    Habla  bien  ingles,  pero 
habla  mal  el  espanol. 

12.  Seiiora,  e  estudia  usted  frances  ?    No,  seiior,  estudio  es- 
paiiol. 

13.  «  Que  estudia  Alejandro  ?    El  no  estudia  sino  frances. 

14.  e  Que  hablan  ellos  sino  espanol  ?    Ellos  hablan  frances. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  study  German  ?    V^e  study  French  and  Spanish. 

2.  Does  Alexander  speak  Spanish?      Alexander  does  not 
speak  Spanish,  but  he  speaks  English. 

3.  Margaret,  do  you  speak  French  ?    No,  sir,  I  speak  Ger- 
man and  Spanish. 

4.  What  do  they  speak  ?    They  speak  Spanish  and  German, 
but  do  not  speak  French. 

5.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak  Spanish, 
but  I  speak  English. 

6.  Does  Louisa  speak  French  well  ?    She  speaks  French  bad- 
ly, but  speaks  German  well. 


10 


LESSON  IV. 


7.  What  do  you  study  ?    We  study  Spanish,  and  Alexander 
studies  French. 

8.  What  does  the  German  study  ?    He  studies  Spanish. 

9.  Does  he  study  well  ?    No,  madam,  he  studies  badly. 

10.  Do  you  speak  Spanish,  madam  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  speak 
Spanish,  but  I  speak  English  and  German. 

11.  Does  the  Frenchman  speak  English  well  ?    No,  madam, 
he  speaks  English  badly,  but  the  Spaniard  speaks  English  well. 

12.  What  does  the  German  study  ?    He  studies  English,  and 
the  Englishman  studies  German. 

13.  What  does  Alexander  study  ?    He  studies  French  only. 

14.  What  do  they  speak  but  Spanish  ?  )  They  speak 
What   else  do  they  speak  but   Spanish  ? )      French. 


LESSC 

Comprar.*     (Infinitive.) 
Compro. 
Compras. 
Compra. 

Compramos. 

Comprais. 

Compran. 

Buscar. 

)N    IV. 

To  buy. 
I  buy. 

Thou  buyest. 
He  buys. 

We  buy. 
You  buy. 
They  buy. 

To  look  for,  to  seek. 

A. 

De. 

Al. 

Del. 

Un  {masc.  sing.). 

To. 

Of,  or  from. 

To  the. 

Of  the,  or  from  the. 

A,  or  an. 

Libro.                Book. 
Cuaderno.        Copy-book. 
Papel.                Paper. 
Caballo.            Horse. 
Tintero.             Inkstand. 

Madera.    Wood,  lumber. 

*  Comprar,  to  buy,  takes  the  preposition  d  before  the  person  from 
whom  something  is  bought ;  as,  Compre  seda  al  comerciante^  I  bought 
silk  of  the  merchant. 


LESSON  IV.  11 

COMPOSITION. 


4  Que  compra  usted  f 

Compro  un  libro. 

4  Compran  ustedes  papel  ? 

No,  senor,  no  compramos  papel, 

compramos  un  cuaderno. 
Busco  al  americano. 
ifil  busca  el  libro. 
El  caballo  del  f  ranees. 
El  tintero  de  madera. 


What  do  you  buy  t 

I  buy  a  book. 

Do  you  buy  paper  ? 

No,  sir,  we  do  not  buy  paper,  we 

buy  a  copy-book. 
I  look  for  the  American. 
He  looks  for  the  book. 
The  Frenchman's  horse. 
The  wooden  inkstand. 


EXPLANATION. 

14.  A. — The  preposition  a,  to.  When  the  direct  or  in- 
direct object  of  a  verb  is  a  person,  it  is  preceded  by  the  prep- 
osition a ;  as,  Busco  al  {a  el)  americano^  I  seek  the  Ameri- 
can ;  otherwise  it  is  not ;  as,  Busco  el  libro,  I  seek  the  book. 

15.  De. — The  preposition  de,  of,  or  from,  is  used  to  ex- 
press possession,  being  always  placed  before  the  possessor ; 
as,  Ul  caballo  del  f ranees:  The' Frenchman's  horse.  Since 
there  is  no  possessive  case  in  Spanish,  corresponding  to  the 
English  '5,  all  such  ideas  must  be  rendered  by  means  of  the 
preposition  de  preceded  by  the  thing  possessed  and  followed 
by  the  possessor  ;  and  since  Spanish  nouns  cannot  be  used  as 
adjectives,  a  qualifying  phrase,  composed  of  de  and  a  noun, 
must  be  substituted ;  as,  Bl  tintero  de  madera,  The  wooden 
inkstand,  literally,  the  inkstand  of  wood. 

16.  El. — The  article  el,  the,  is  used  to  determine  a  noun 
masculine  singular ;  as,  el  libro,  the  book. 

:N".  B. — When  the  article  el  comes  after  the  preposition  a 
(to),  or  de  (of,  or  from),  the  e  is  dropped,  and  the  two  words 
become  one ;  thus,  al,  del,  instead  of  a  el,  4e  el',  but  this  does 
not  take  place  when  el  is  a  pronoun ;  as,  a  el,  de  el ;  though 
it  was  common  in  old  Spanish. 

17.  Un. — The  indefinite  article  tm,  shortened  from  uno,  is 
used  before  masculine  nouns  ;  as,  un  ingles,  an  Englishman ; 
un  caballo,  a  horse. 

^N".  B. —  Uno  is  used  only  as  a  numeral  adjective,  or  as  an 
indefinite  pronoun,  as  will  be  explained  later. 


12  LESSON  IV. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Que  compra  el  frances  ?    Compra  el  caballo  del  ingles. 

2.  e  Que  comprais  vosotras  ?    Compramos  un  cuaderno. 

3.  I  Que  compra  usted  ?    Com  pro  un  libro. 

4.  I  Compran  ustedes  un  cuaderno  ?    No,  senor,  compramosr 
un  tintero  de  madera. 

5.  e  Que  buscas  tii  ?    Busco  un  libro  espanol. 

6.  I  Que  buscais  vosotros  ?    Nosotros  buscamos  un  tintero. 

7.  e  Que  buscan  ellas  ?    Buscan  el  papel. 

8.  Alejandro,  i  buscas  el  papel  ?    No,  senor,  busco  el  cua- 
derno. 

9.  I  Estudia  Margarita  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  estudia  frances. 

10.  e  Que  estudia  el  americano  ?    Estudia  espaiiol. 

11.  e  Estudian  ustedes  frances  ?    No,  seiior,  estudiamos  ingles. 

12.  I  Que  estudia  ella  ?    Estudia  aleman. 

13.  e  Que  compra  usted  ?    Compro  el  caballo  del  espanol. 

14.  I  Que  compran  ellos  ?    Compran  un  tintero  de  madera. 

15.  2  Buscais  vosotros  al  aleman  ?     No,  senor,  buscamos  al 
frances. 

16.  I  Hablais  vosotros  aleman  ?    Si,  senor,  hablamos  aleman. 

17.  I  Hablan  ellas  espanol  ?    No,  senor,  hablan  frances. 

18.  I  Que  estudia  usted  ?    Estudio  ingles  y  espanol. 

19.  I  Compra  ella  un  libro  ?    Si,  seiior,  compra  un  libro. 

20.  I  Busca  el  al  frances  ?    No,  seiior,  busca  al  aleman. 

21.  I  Que  habla  el  americano  ?    Habla  espanol. 

22.  Manuel  l  que  estudias  tii  ?    Estudio  aleman. 

23.  t  Que  compran  ellos  ?    Compran  un  caballo. 

24.  i  Que  buscan  ustedes  ?    Buscamos  el  libro  espanol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  they  look  for  ?    They  look  for  an  inkstand. 

2.  What  does  she  look  for  ?    She  looks  for  a  book. 

3.  Do  you  look  for 'a  copy-book  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  {fern.)  look 
for  a  copy-book. 

4.  Do  they  (fern.)  buy  a  wooden  inkstand  ?    Yes,  sir,  they 
buy  a  wooden  inkstand. 

5.  What  do  you  buy  ?    We  buy  the  Frenchman's  horse. 

6.  Do  you  buy  paper  ?    No,  sir,  I  buy  a  book. 

7.  Do  you  buy  a  copy-book  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  buy  a  copy-book. 

8.  What  does  the  Frenchman  study  ?    He  studies  G-erman. 


LESSON  V. 


13 


9.  Do  you  study  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  study  French. 

10.  What  does  she  study  ?    She  studies  English. 

11.  What  do  they  (fern.)  study  ?    They  study  Spanish. 

12.  Do  you  speak  French  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak  French. 

13.  Does  she  speak  English  ?    No,  sir,  she  speaks  German. 
14  Do  you  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  we  (fern.)  speak  English. 

15.  Do  you  look  for  the  Frenchman  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  look  for  the 
Frenchman. 

16.  Do  you  look  for  paper  ?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  a  copy-book. 

17.  What  do  they  look  for  ?    They  look  for  a  book. 

18.  Do  you  look  for  the  German  ?  Yes,  sir,  we  (fern.)  look  for 
the  German. 

19.  Do  you  speak  French  ?     Yes,  sir,  I  speak  French. 

20.  What  does  Margaret  speak  ?    She  speaks  English. 

21.  What  do  they  buy  ?    They  buy  a  wooden  inkstand. 

22.  What  dost  thou  look  for  ?    I  look  for  a  horse. 

23.  What  do  you  study  ?    We  (fern.)  study  Spanish. 

24.  What  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  English. 


LESSON    Y. 


(Infinitive.) 


Necesitar. 
Necesito. 
Necesitas. 
Necesita. 

Necesitamos. 

Necesitais. 

Necesitan. 

Mi. 

Su. 

Su  (n)  de  usted,  or 

El  (n)  de  usted. 


El  papa.  The  papa. 

El  abogado.        The  lawyer. 
El  comerciante.  The  merchant. 
El  lacre.  The  sealing-wax 


To  need,  or  to  be  in  want  of. 
I  need. 

Thou  needest. 
He  needs. 

We  need. 
You  need. 
They  need. 

My. 

His,  her,  its,  their. 

Your. 


GENDER. 

La  mama. 
La  pluma. 
La  tinta. 
La  gramatica. 


The  mamma. 
The  pen. 
The  ink. 
The  grammar. 


14 


LESSON   V. 


El  polio.  The  chicken. 

El  algodon.        The  cotton. 
El  jabon.  The  soap. 

El  panuelo.        The      handker- 
chief. 
El  zapatero.        The  shoemaker. 


La  gallina. 

La  seda. 

La  lavandera. 

La  camisa. 


The  hen. 
The  silk. 
The      washer* 

woman. 
The  shirt. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Necesita  el  abogado  la  pluma  ? 

Si,  senor,  necesita  la  pluma  y  el  tin- 
tero. 

i  Que  necesita  comprar  la  lavandera? 

Necesita  comprar  jabon. 

i  Necesita  el  comerciante  mi  algo- 
don? 

Necesita  comprar  el  algodon  de  us- 
ted  y  la  seda  del  f  ranees. 

I  Necesita  usted  su  pauuelo  de  algo- 
don? 

No,  senora,  necesito  su  panuelo  de 
seda  de  usted. 

I  Que  necesitan  ustedes  ? 

Necesitamos  un  polio  y  una  gallina. 


Does  the  lawyer  want  the  pen  f 

Yes,  sir,  he  wants  the  pen  and  the 
inkstand. 

What  does  the  washerwoman  want 
to  buy  ? 

She  wants  to  buy  soap. 

Does  the  merchant  want  my  cotton  I 

He  wants  to  buy  your  cotton  and 
the  Frenchman's  silk. 

Do  you  want  your  cotton  handker- 
chief? 

No,  madam,  I  want  your  silk  hand- 
kerchief. 

What  do  you  want  ? 

We  want  a  chicken  and  a  hen. 


EXPLANATION. 

18.  Gender. — In  Spanish  all  nouns  are  either  masculine 
or  feminine  ;  the  neuter  gender  is  only  applied  to  those 
things  so  indefinitely  used  that  their  gender  cannot  be  de- 
termined. 

The  gender  of  nouns  may  be  ascertained  either  by  their 
signification  or  their  termination. 

Xouns  which  signify  males,  or  which  denote  titles  or  pro- 
fessions, &c.,  common  to  men,  are  masculine ;  and  those 
which  signify  females,  or  professions,  &c.,  associated  with 
women,  are  feminine,  without  regard  to  their  terminations : 
so  that,  Jiomlre^  man ;  caballero^  gentleman ;  pollo^  chicken ; 
zapatero^  shoemaker ;  abogado^  lawyer,  are  masculine ;  and 
mujer^  woman ;  senora^  lady ;  galli^m^  hen ;  lavandera^  wash- 
erwoman, are  feminine. 


LESSON   V. 


15 


IN'ouns  ending  in  a,  d,  ion,  or  U7nl?re  are  generally  femi- 
nine, and  those  ending  in  other  letters  are  masculine ;  as, 


Papel. 

Paper. 

Leccion. 

Lesson 

Tintero. 

Inkstand. 

Pluma. 

Pen. 

Billete. 

Billet. 

Ciudad. 

City. 

Xouns  ending  in  ema  are  masculine.  Only  one  common 
noun  in  the  Spanish  language  ending  in  o  is  feminine — 
mano,  hand.  The  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  all  feminine, 
as  letra,  letter,  is  feminine. 

]^.  B. —  Una  {indefinite  article),  a,  is  used  before  feminine 
nouns  in  the  singular. 

To  facilitate  the  pupils  in  the  distinction  of  gender,  the 
left-hand  side,  in  the  vocabulary,  is  reserved  for  masculine, 
the  right  for  feminine  nouns. 

19.  When  your  is  preceded  by  you,  and  there  is  no  pos- 
sibility of  ambiguity,  it  is  translated  by  su ;  otherwise,  it  is 
generally  rendered  by  el — de  usted,  or  su — de  usted ;  as. 


listed  necesita  su  carta. 

^  Que  necesita  el  papa  de  usted  f 

Necesita  su  lilro  de  usted. 


You  need  yoiir  letter. 

What  does  your  father  need  ? 

He  needs  your  book. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Necesita  usted  mi  gramatica  ?     No,  seiior,  no  necesito  su 

gramatica  de  usted.  ^ 

2.  h  Necesita  ella  el  panuelo  de  seda  ?    Si,  senor,  ella  necesita 

el  panuelo  de  seda. 

3.  I  Necesita  usted  comprar  un  libro  ?    Necesito  comprar  un 

cuaderno. 

4.  I  Necesitan  ellas  el  lacre  ?     No,  senor,  necesitan  el  panue- 
lo de  algodon. 

5  i  Que  necesita  comprar  el  abogado  ?     Necesita  comprar 

una  pluma. 

6.  i  Que  necesita  comprar  la  lavandera  ?    Necesita  comprar 

jabon. 

7.  I  Busca  usted  su  paiiuelo  ?    Si,  seiior,  busco  mi  panuelo. 

8.  I  Busca  usted  el  cuaderno  de  Manuel  ?    No,  senor,  busco  el 
cuaderno  de  usted. 


16  LESSON  F. 

9.  i  Habla  usted  bien  el  aleman  ?    No,  senorita,  hablo  mal  el 
aleman. 

10.  I  Estudian  ustedes  frances  ?   No,  senor,  estudiamos  espanol. 

11.  I  Compra  usted  un  caballo  ingles  ?    Si,  senor,  compro  un 
caballo  ingles. 

12.  I  Que  compran  ellos  ?    Compran  una  plum  a  j  tinta. 

13.  I  Que  comprais  vosotras  ?     Nosotras  compramos  un  pa- 
nuelo  de  seda. 

14.  e  Que  compra  la  lavandera  ?    Compra  jabon. 

15.  e  Busca  usted  a  mi  abogado  ?    Si,  sefLor,  busco  al  abogado 
de  usted. 

16.  I  Compra  la  lavandera  un  polio  ?    Compra  una  gallina. 

17.  I  Compra  jabon  el  comerciante  ?     No,  senor,  el  comer- 
ciante  compra  algodon. 

18.  e  Buscan  ellas  el  panuelo  de  usted  ?    Buscan  el  panuelo 
de  usted. 

19.  I  Necesita  usted  hablar  al  abogado  ?    Si,  senora,  necesito 
hablar  al  abogado. 

20.  e  Necesita  usted  comprar  un  libro  ?    No,  senor,  necesito 
comprar  una  pluma  y  papel. 

21.  I  Necesita  usted  estudiar  ingles  ?    Si,  senor,  necesito  estu- 
diar  ingles. 

22.  I  Que  necesitais  vosotras  ?    Necesitamos  comprar  lacre. 

23.  I  Necesita  usted  hablar  al  frances  ?    No,  senor,  necesito 
hablar  al  aleman. 

24.  i  Que  necesita  usted  ?    Necesito  un  panuelo  de  algodon. 


EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  a  book  and  paper. 

2.  What  does  she  need  ?    She  needs  your  handkerchief. 

3.  Do  you  need  a  horse  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  an  English  horse. 

4.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  soap. 

5.  Does  the  American  need  the  Spanish  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  he 
needs  the  Spanish  book. 

6.  Do  they  need  a  lawyer  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  need  a  lawyer. 

7.  Do  you  buy  a  silk  handkerchief  ?    No,  sir,  we  {fern.)  buy 
a  cotton  handkerchief. 

8.  Do  you  look  for  the  Frenchman's  horse  ?    No,  sir,  I  look 
for  the  Englishman's  horse. 

9.  Dost  thou  study  German  ?    No,  sir,  I  study  English. 


LESSOJSr   VI. 


17 


10.  What  does  the  merchant  buy  ?    He  buys  cotton. 

11.  What  does  the  washerwoman  buy  ?    She  buys  a  hen  and 
a  chicken. 

12.  Does  the  lawyer  buy  a  book  ?    No,  sir,  he  buys  paper. 

13.  Do  they  (fern.)  speak  well  ?    No,  sir,  they  speak  badly. 

14.  Do  you  speak  French,  sir  ?    No,  sir,  I  speak  English. 

15.  Do  you  study  much  (mucho)  ?    No,  sir,  we  study  very 
little  (poco). 

16.  Do  you  study  fast  (aprisa)  ?    No,  sir,  I  study  slowly  {des- 
pacio). 

17.  Do  you  buy  cotton  from  the  merchant  ?    No,  sir,  I  buy 
silk  from  your  brother  (hermano). 

18.  What  does  your  papa  need  ?    He  needs  the  lawyer's  book. 

19.  What  are  they  looking  for  ?    They  are  looking  for  paper. 

20.  Do  you  need  a  copy-book  ?    No,  sir,  I  need  a  book. 

21.  Do  you  study  Spanish  ?    Yes,  madam,  I  study  Spanish. 

22.  Do  you  need  paper  and   pen  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  paper 
and  pen. 

23.  What  do  they  need  ?    They  need  a  silk  handkerchief. 

24.  What  do  you  need  ?    I  need  an  English  horse. 


LESSON 

YI. 

REGULAR  VERB.— Second   Conjugation, 

INDICATIVE  PRESENT — 

TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

1.  o. 

2.  es. 

3.  e. 

Plural. 

1.  emos. 

2.  eis. 

3.  en. 

Aprender.     (Infinitive.) 
Aprendo. 
Aprendes. 
Aprende. 

To  learn. 
I  learn. 
Thou  learnest 
He  learns 

Aprendemos. 

Aprendeis. 

Aprenden. 

We  learn. 
You  learn. 
They  learn. 

Vender. 
4 

To  sell. 

18 

Muy. 

Mucho. 

Poco. 

Aprisa. 

Despacio. 

Man. 

Boy. 

Father. 

Son. 

Brother 

( 

LJSSSOJV 

VL 

Very. 
Much,  a  c 
Little. 
Quickly. 
Slowly. 

Studious. 
Idle. 

Mujer. 

Muchacha. 

Madre. 

Hija. 

Hermana. 

ION. 

p:*eat  de^l. 

Estudioso. 
Holg-azan. 

Hombre. 

Muchacho. 

Padre. 

Hijo. 

Hermano. 

:^OUPOi 

m 

Woman. 

Girl. 

Mother. 

Daughter. 

Sister. 

j,  Aprende  muy  aprisa  el  muchacho  ? 

El  muchacho  estudioso  aprende  muy 
aprisa ;  pero  el  muchacho  holga- 
zan  aprende  muy  despacio. 

I  Aprenden  ingles  su  padre  y  su  her- 
mano de  usted  ? 

Si,  senor,  y  mi  madre  y  mi  hermana 
aprenden  frances. 

^  Aprende  mucho  la  muchacha  ? 

No,  senor,  aprende  poco. 

I  Aprenden  aprisa  su  hijo  y  su  hija 
de  usted  ? 

No,  sefior,  aprenden  despacio. 


Does  the  boy  learn  very  fast  ? 
The  studious  boy  learns  very  fast ; 
but  the  idle  one  learns  very  slowly. 

Do  your  father  and  brother  learn 

English  ? 
Yes,  sir,  and  my  mother  and  sister 

learn  French. 
Does  the  girl  learn  much  ? 
No,  sir,  she  learns  little. 
Do  your  son  and  daughter  learn 

fast? 
No,  sir,  they  learn  slowly. 


EXPLANATION. 

20.  The  termination  of  the  first  person  in  the  indica- 
tive present  of  all  the  conjugations  is  always  o,  with  the  ex- 
ception of  the  following  six  verbs  :  dar,  to  give — indie,  pres., 
first  singular,  doy ;  esfar^  to  be — estoy ;  Jiaher^  to  have — he ; 
tV,  to  go — voy^  saber ^  to  know — se-^  ser,  to  be — soy.  The 
only  difference  between  the  termination  of  the  first  and 
second  conjugations  is  the  changing  of  the  a  into  e  in  the 
second  and  third  persons  singular,  and  in  all  the  plural. 

21.  Muy  is  generally  translated  by  very  or  very  much ;  as 


LESSON  VL  19 

muy  Men^  very  well ;  muy  lueno^  very  good,  &c. ;  but  it  can 
never  qualify  a  verb  nor  stand  alone  in  discourse ;  as,  Does 
he  speak  very  well  ?  Yes,  very.  ^  Hahla  el  muy  Men  9  8i^ 
mucho.  Muy  must  not  be  used  before  mucho ;  instead,  there- 
fore, of  saying  muy  mucho^  the  form  is  mucJiisimo^  very  much. 
22.  Most  masculine  nouns  ending  in  o  change  this  letter 
into  a  for  the  feminine  ;  as, 


Hermana.  Sister. 

Hija.  Daughter. 

Muchacha.  Girl. 


Hermano.  Brother. 

Hijo.  Son. 

Muchacho.  Boy. 

23.  The  words  usted  and  ustedes,  you,  singular  and  plural, 
have  been  written  in  full  up  to  this  point,  so  as  not  to  con- 
fuse the  student ;  but  after  this  the  capital  V.  will  be  used, 
according  to  custom,  for  usted,  and  Vds.  for  the  plural.  It 
is  very  common  at  the  present  time  to  use  Ud.  and  Uds.  as 
the  abbreviations  in  letter  writing  or  business  papers. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Aprende  V.  bien  el  frances  ?  No,  senor,  aprendo  muy 
mal  el  frances. 

2.  I  Aprenden  ellas  aprisa  ?    No,  seiior,  aprenden  despacio. 

3.  i  Aprende  mucho  el  muchacho  holgazan  ?  No,  seiior, 
aprende  muy  poco. 

4.  e  Aprendeis  vosotros  aprisa  ?     Si,  seiior,  aprisa  y  bien. 

5.  I  Que  vende  el  hermano  de  su  padre  de  V.  ?   Vende  algodon. 

6.  e  Venden  ellas  papel  ?    No,  senor,  venden  plumas  y  lacre. 

7.  t  Que  vende  Margarita  ?    Vende  una  gallina. 

8.  t  Vende  lacre  el  comerciante  ?    No,  seiior,  vende  papel. 

9.  i  Necesita  V.  el  paiiuelo  de  su  hermana  ?  No,  senor,  nece- 
sito  el  paiiuelo  de  su  hija  de  V. 

10.  I  Busca  su  mama  de  V.  el  paiiuelo  de  seda  ?  No,  senor, 
busca  el  paiiuelo  de  algodon. 

11.  I  Que  necesita  su  hija  de  V.  ?  Necesita  hablar  al  herma- 
no de  V. 

12.  g  Necesita  la  muchacha  comprar  papel  ?  No,  seiiora,  nece- 
sita comprar  un  cuaderno. 

13.  I  Habla  V.  del  frances  ?    No,  senorita,  hablo  del  aleman. 

14.  2  Que  compra  su  padre  de  V.  ?  Compra  el  caballo  del  hijo 
del  abogado. 


20  LESSON  VL 

15.  I  Que  busca  V.  ?    Busco  un  libro  y  una  plumar 

16.  i  Que  busca  la  muchacha  ?    Busca  el  jabon  de  la  hermana 
deV. 

17.  e  Aprende   mucho  el    muchacho    estudioso  ?     Si,  senor, 
aprende  mucho. 

18.  I  Aprende  V.  su  leccion  de  frances  ?    No,  senor,  aprende 
mi  leccion  de  aleman. 

19.  I  Habla  bien  Don  Manuel  el  espanol  ?    Si,  senor,  habla 
muy  bien  el  espanol. 

20.  I  Estudia  V.  gramatica  inglesa  ?    No,  seiior,  estudio  gra- 
matica  francesa. 

21.  I  Compra  Y.  un  tintero  y  papel  ?    No  compro  sino  un  tin- 
tero. 

22.  I  Busca  Y.  a  mi  padre  ?    Si,  senorita,  busco  a  su  padre 
deY. 

23.  i  Necesita  Y.  comprar  un  tintero  ?    No,  senora,  necesito 
hablar  a  mi  hermana. 

24.  I  Necesitamos  nosotras  aprender  espaiiol  ?    Si,  senor,  nece- 
sitamos  mucho  aprender  espanol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  your  sister  learn  English  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  learns  Eng- 
lish. 

2.  What  does  your  brother  learn  ?  My  brother  learns  Spanish. 

3.  Do  you  learn  quickly  ?    No,  sir,  we  learn  very  slowly. 

4.  Does  the  studious  boy  learn  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  learns  very 
well. 

5.  What  does  your  brother  sell  ?    He  sells  cotton  and  silk. 

6.  Do  you  sell  paper  ?    No,  sir,  I  sell  sealing  wax  and  ink. 

7.  Do  they  {fem.)  need  a  French  book  ?    No,  sir,  they  need 
a  copy-book,  a  pen,  and  ink. 

8.  Do  you  need  the  English  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  I  need  the 
Spanish  grammar. 

9.  Do  you  want  to  speak  to  my  father  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  want  to 
speak  to  your  father. 

10.  Do  you  want  to  speak  to  my  sister's  son  ?    No,  sir,  I  want 
to  speak  to  the  Frenchman. 

11.  Does  he  want  to  buy  a  horse  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  wants  to  buy 
a  horse. 

12.  Do  you  need  my  book  ?    No,  madam,  I  need  your  wooden 
inkstand. 


LESSON  VIL 


21 


13.  Do  you  look  for  the  merchant  ?    No,  sir,  I  look  for  your 
father. 

14.  Do  they  look  for  papa  ?    No,  sir,  they  look  for  the  lawyer. 

15.  Do  you  buy  a  book  ?    No,  sir,  we  buy  a  copy-book  and 
paper. 

16.  Do  they  study  English  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  study  English. 

17.  Do  you  study  German,  sir  ?    No,  I  study  Spanish,  madam, 

18.  Do  you  speak  English  well  ?    No,  sir,  I  speak  English 
badly. 

19.  Does  your  sister  speak  French  very  well  ?     No,  sir,  she 
speaks  very  little  French. 

20.  What  does  your  father  speak  ?     He  speaks  but  (only) 
English. 

21.  Does  he  not  speak  German  ?    No,  sir,  he  does  not  speak 
German. 

22.  Does  your  daughter  speak  to  your  sister  ?    Yes,  sir,  she 
speaks  to  my  sister. 

23.  Do  you  learn  very  quickly  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  learn  very  quickly. 

24.  Do  you  sell  your  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  sell  my  paper. 


LESSON  YII. 

ieer. 

(Infinitive.) 

To  read. 

Leo. 

I  read. 

Lees. 

Thou  readest. 

Lee. 

He  reads. 

Leemos. 

We  read. 

Leeis. 

You  read. 

Leen. 

They  read. 

Comer. 

1            To  eat,  to  dine. 

Beber. 

To  drink. 

MASCULINE  ADJECTIVES. 

Bueno.      Good. 
Hermoso.  Handsome. 
Feo.  Ugly. 

Pequeno.  Little  or  small. 
Grande  (m.  &/.).     Large. 
Espaiiol.  Spanish,  also  Spaniard. 
Americano.  American. 


FEMININE  ADJECTIVES. 

Buena.  Good. 

Hermosa.  Handsome. 

Fea.  Ugly. 

Pequena.  Little  or  small. 

Espaiiola.  Spanish. 

Americana.  American. 


LESSON  VII. 

Pan. 

Bread. 

Carne. 

Meat. 

Pescado. 

Fish. 

Leche. 

Milk. 

Queso, 

Cheese 

Agua. 

Water. 

Yino. 

Wine. 

Cerveza. 

Beer. 

Billete. 

Billet  or  note. 

Cai'ta. 

Letter. 

COMPOSITION. 

4  Lee  V.  un  billete  f 

No,  senor,  leo  una  carta. 

I,  Que  come  el  espafiol  I 

Come  buen  pescado,  pero  come  mala 

carne. 
j,  Beben  Vds.  vino  bueno  ? 
Bebemos  buen  vino  y  buena  cerveza. 
I  Que  compra  el  americano  ? 
Compra  un  caballo  pequeno. 
i  Habla  V.  al  gran  hombre  1 
No,  senor,  hablo  al  hombre  grande. 
J  Que  vende  la  francesa? 
Vends  seda  hermosa. 


Do  you  read  a  note  f 
No,  sir,  I  read  a  letter. 
What  does  the  Spaniard  eat  f 
He  eats  good  fish,  but  bad  meat. 

Do  you  drink  good  wine  ? 

We  drink  good  wine  and  good  beer. 

What  does  the  American  buy? 

He  buys  a  small  horse. 

Do  you  speak  to  the  great  man  ? 

No,  sir,  I  speak  to  the  large  man. 

What  does  the  French  woman  sell  f 

She  sells  handsome  silk. 


EXPLANATION. 
24.  Adjectives  terminating  in  o,  an,  or  on,  form  their 
feminine  termination  in  a.     Those  terminating  otherwise  are 
common  to  both  genders ;  as, 


El  muchacho  holgazan. 
La  muchacha  holgazana. 
El  hombre  comil6n. 
La  mujer  comilona. 
El  hombre  feliz. 
La  mujer  feliz. 
La  gallina  buena. 


The  idle  boy. 

The  idle  girl. 

The  gluttonous  man. 

The  gluttonous  woman. 

The  happy  man. 

The  happy  woman. 

The  good  hen. 


Adjectives  signifying  nationality,  and  ending  in  a  conso- 
nant, take  an  a  to  form  their  feminine  terminations ;  as, 


Espafiol. 
Espanola. 
Libro  ingles. 
Gramatica  inglesa. 

Those  ending  in  o  change  this  letter  into  a ;  as, 
Americano.  j         American. 

Americana*  I         American. 


Spaniard. 
Spanish. 
English  book. 
English  grammar. 


LESSON  VII. 


23 


Adjectives  are  generally  placed  after  their  nouns  \  but  in 
poetry,  or  in  an  elevated  style,  and  even  in  conversation, 
many  are  placed  before  the  noun.  This  is  especially  true  of 
'certain  short  adjectives.  Eeading  and  practice  will  give  the 
pupil  the  idea  as  to  their  proper  use. 

Adjectives  used  metaphorically,  or  with  a  signification 
different  from  their  proper  one,  are  placed  before ;  as, 

Un  gran  caballo.  |         A  great  horse. 

Some  adjectives  lose  their  last  letter,  or  syllable,  when 
they  precede  the  masculine  singular  noun ;  as, 


Mai  muchacho. 
Buen  libro. 
Gran  caballo. 

Primer  hombre. 
Tercer  paso. 
Cien  arboles. 


Bad  boy. 
Good  book. 
Great  horse. 

First  man. 
Third  step. 
Hundred  trees. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Lee  Y.  un  buen  libro  ?    Si,  seiior,  leo  un  libro  bueno. 

2.  I  Leemos  nosotros  bien  el  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  leemos  mal 
el  ingles,  pero  leemos  bien  el  espanol. 

3.  I  Bebe  V.  vino  ?    No,  senor,  yo  bebo  agua. 

4.  I  Que  beben  ellos  ?    Beben  cerveza. 

5.  I  Comeis  vosotros  queso  y  pan  ?    No,  senor,  comemos  pes- 
cado. 

6.  I  Que  com  en  los  ingleses  ?     Los  ingleses  comen  buena 
carne. 

7.  I  Que  bebe  el  espafiol  ?    Bebe  buen  vino  y  cerveza  mala. 

8.  e  Que  lee  la  americana  ?    Lee  un  libro  de  mi  hermana. 

9.  ^  Que  estUdia  el  hi  jo  pequeno  de  V.  ?    Estudia  gramatica. 

10.  e  Que  necesita  la  muchacha  hermosa  ?    Necesita  un  peque- 
no panuelo  de  seda. 

11.  I  Necesita  Y.  un  caballo  grande  ?    No,  senor,  yo  no  nece- 
sito  un  caballo  grande,  sino  un  gran  caballo. 

12.  I  Que  estudia  la  espanola  ?    Estudia  ingles. 

13.  I  Estudia  Y.  la  gramatica  francesa  ?    No,  seiior,  estudio  la 
gramatica  inglesa. 

14.  I  Come  pan  la  inglesa  ?    Si,  seiior,  come  pan  y  carne. 

15.  I  Que  beben  Yds.  ?    Bebemos  leche. 


24  LEJSSON  VIL 

16.  I  Lee  V.  un  libro  ingles  ?    No,  seiior,  leo  un  libro  frances. 

17.  I  Que  lee  la  americana  ?    Lee  su  leccion. 

18.  i  Que  vende  la  inglesa  ?    Vende  un  panuelo. 

19.  I  Compra  Y.  algodon  al  comerciante  americano  ?    Si,  se- 
nor,  compro  algodon  al  comerciante  americano. 

20.  I  Necesita  la  francesa  un  paiiuelo  grande  ?    No,  senor,  ne- 
cesita  un  paiiuelo  hermoso. 

21.  i  Que  busca  el  muchacho  ?    Busca  a  su  hermana. 

22.  I  Que  compra  V.  ?     Compro  un  paiiuelo  feo,  pero  bueno. 

23.  i  Necesita  V.  seda  ?    No,  seiior,  necesito  algodon. 

24.  I  Que  lee  Y.  ?*    Leo  el  libro  de  mi  padre. 

25.  I  Que  comeis  vosotros  ?    Comemos  pan  y  pescado. 
2^.  I  Que  bebe  el  aleman  ?    Bebe  vino  j  cerveza. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  you  read  ?    I  read  a  great  book. 

2.  Do  you  read  English  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  read  English  very 
well. 

3.  Does  the  German  drink  wine  ?    No,  sir,  he  drinks  beer. 

4.  What  do  they  (fern.)  drink  ?    They  drink  water. 

5.  Do  you  eat  meat  ?    No,  sir,  I  eat  fish. 

6.  What  does  the  Englishman  eat  ?    He  eats  bread  and  meat. 

7.  What  does  your  daughter  buy  ?    She  buys  a  silk  hand- 
kerchief from  the  American  woman. 

8.  Does  the  studious  boy  buy  a  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  buys  a 
French  grammar. 

9.  Does  the  handsome  American  woman  buy  a  large  book  ? 
No,  sir,  she  buys  a  little  book. 

10.  Does  your  mamma  want  a  large  handkerchief  ?    No,  sir, 
she  wants  a  handsome  handkerchief. 

11.  Do  you  need  your  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  do  not  need  my  book. 

12.  Do  they  need  a  Spanish  grammar  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  need  a 
Spanish  grammar. 

13.  Does  the  woman  sell  bread  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  sells  bread  and 
fish. 

14.  What  do  you  read  ?    I  read  my  letter. 

15.  What  does  your  brother  read  ?    He  reads  a  note. 

16.  Does  the  girl  sell  soap  ?    No,  sir,  she  sells  milk. 

17.  Does  the  Jazy  boy  learn  well  ?    No,  sir,  he  learns  badly. 

18.  Do  you  learn  much  ?    No,  sir,  I  learn  little. 

19.  Do  you  read  the  book  ?    No,  sir,  I  read  the  letter. 


LUSSON   VIIL 


25 


20.  Do  you  buy  cheese  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  buy  cheese. 

21.  Do  they  buy  bread  ?    No,  sir,  they  buy  meat  and  beer. 

22.  Do  you  need  a  handkerchief  ?    No,  sir,  I  need  soap. 

23.  Do  you  read  your  father's  letter  ?    No,  sir,  I  read  my 
brother's  letter. 

24.  Does  your  father  buy  an  English  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  he 
buys  a  French  book. 

25.  Does  your  brother  read  my  note  ?    No,  sir,  he  reads  my 
sister's  letter. 


LESSON    YIII. 


Third 

Conjugation. 

INDICATIVE 

PRESENT- 

-TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 
1.   O. 

Plural. 
1.  imos. 

2. 

es. 

2.  is. 

3. 

e. 

3.  en. 

Escribir. 
Escribo. 
Escribes. 
Escribe. 

(Infinitive.) 

To  write. 
I  write. 
Thou  writest. 
He  writes. 

Escribimos 

Escribis. 

Escriben. 

We  write. 
You  write. 
They  write. 

Eecibir. 

ing.). 
:ng.). 
). 

plural), 
olural),  . 

1 

To  receive. 

En. 

Ni. 

In,  into,  or  at. 
No,  neither,  nor. 

El  (masc.  s 
La  (fern,  si 
Lo  (neuter 
Los  (masc. 
Las  (fem.  j 

The. 

ADJECTITES. 

Mucho. 
Muchcs. 

Much. 
Many. 

Poco.                 Little. 
Pocos.                Few. 

LESSON  VIIL 

SUBSTANTIVES. 

Periodico. 

Newspaper. 

Leccion. 

Lesson. 

Periodicos. 

Newspapers. 

Lecciones. 

Lessons. 

Ejercicio. 

Exercise. 

Ley. 

Law. 

Ejercicios. 

Exercises. 

Leyes. 

Laws. 

Zapatero. 

Shoemaker. 

Plata. 

Silver. 

Sombrerero. 

Hatter. 

Semana. 

Week. 

Semanas. 

Weeks. 

COMPOSITION. 

4  Escribe  V.  las  lecciones  6  los  ejerr 

cicios  f 
No  escribo  ni  las  lecciones  ni  los 

ejercicios. 
i  Escriben  las  senoritas  muchos  bi- 

lletesf 
Ellas  escriben  muchos. 
4  Recibe  el  comerciante  plata  li  oro  f 

fel  recibe  oro  y  plata. 

I  Escribe  V.  la  carta  en  ingles  ? 

Si,  senor,  escribo  la  carta  en  ingles. 


Do  you  write  the  lessons  or  the  ex- 
ercises I 

I  write  neither  the  lessons  nor  the 
exercises. 

Do  the  young  ladies  write  many 
notes  I 

They  write  many. 

Does  the  merchant  receive  silver  or 
gold? 

He  receives  gold  and  silver. 

Do  you  write  the  letter  in  English  f 

Yes,  sir,  I  write  the  letter  in  Eng- 
lish. 


EXPLANATION. 

25.  The  endings  of  the  third  conjugation  and  those  of 
the  second  are  the  same,  except  in  the  first  and  second  per- 
sons of  the  plural ;  in  which  the  e  of  the  second  conjugation 
is  changed  into  i  in  the  third,  as  must  have  been  observed. 

26.  The  conjunction  6  is  changed  into  u  when  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  o  or  ho ;  as, 

Plata  u  oro.  I  Silver  or  gold. 

27.  Ni. — Neither  and  nor  are  rendered  by  ni ;  and  it  is 
common  to  use  two  negatives  in  Spanish ;  as, 

El  no  necesita  ni  la  came  ni  el  pes-  I  He  wants  neither  the  meat  nor  the 
cado.  I      fish. 

28.  The  plural  of  nouns  is  formed  by  adding  s  to  those 
terminating  in  an  unaccented  vowel ;  as, 

Ejercicio.  Exercise.  J         Ejercicios.  Exercises, 


LESSON  VIIL 


27 


And  adding  es — 

1st.  To  those  ending  in  an  accented  vowel ;  as, 

Aleli.  Gilliflower.       |         Alelies.  Gilliflowers. 

2d.  To  those  ending  in  a  consonant ;  as, 

Leccion.  Lesson.  |         Lecciones.  Lessons. 

3d.  To  those  ending  in  y ;  as, 

Ley.  Law.  |         Leyes,  Laws. 

Words  ending  in  z  form  their  plural  by  changing  z  to  c 
(since  z  seldom  stands  before  e  or  i),  and  adding  es  ;  as, 
Luz.  Light.  I         Luces.  Lights. 

29.  Ai!^  ADJECTIVE  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender  and 
number,  and  forms  the  plural  according  to  the  rules  laid 
down  for  nouns ;  as, 


Buen  hombre. 
Buenos  hombres. 
Buena  mujer. 
Buenas  mujeres. 


Good  man. 
Good  men. 
Good  woman. 
Good  women. 


30.  The  article  also  must  agree  with  the  noun  to  which 
it  refers,  in  gender  and  number ;  as, 


El  libro. 
Los  libros. 
La  pluma. 
Las  plumas. 
Lo  bueno. 


The  book. 
The  books. 
The  pen. 
The  pens. 
"What  is  good. 


bmgular  feminine  nouns  beginning  with  an  accented  a 
or  lia  take  the  masculine  article  el,  instead  of  the  feminine 
la,  in  order  to  avoid  the  disagreeable  meeting  of  two  ac- 
cented ^'s ;  as. 


El  alma. 
El  agua. 
El  alba. 
El  hambre. 


The  soul. 
The  water. 
The  dawn  of  day. 
The  hunger,  &c. 


31.  The  i^euter  article  lo  has  no  plural  number,  and 
is  placed  only  before  adjectives  used  as  substantives  in  an 
abstract  sense ;  as, 

Lo  bueno.  1    The  good,  i.  e.,  that  which  is  good. 

Lo  malo.  I    The  bad,  i.  e.,  that  which  is  bad. 


28  LESSOJV   VIIL 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  e  Escribe  V.  a  su  padre  ?    No,  senor,  escribo  a  mi  her- 
mano. 

2.  I  Que  escribe  Y.  ?    Escribo  una  carta  a  la  muchacha. 

3.  e  Escribe  V.  muchos  billetes  ?    No,  senor,  escribo  muy 
pocos. 

4.  ^  Escriben  ellos  bien  los  ejercicios  ?    Si,  senor,  ellos  escri- 
ben  bien  los  ejercicios. 

5.  e  Recibe  V.  libros  ingleses  ?    No,  senor,  recibo  libros  fran- 
ceses. 

6.  i  Que  reciben  ellos  ?    Reciben  plata  y  oro. 

7.  I  Reciben  mucho  oro  ?    No,  senor,  reciben  muy  poco. 

8.  Lee  V.  sus  cartas  6  sus  billetes  ?    No  leo  ni  mis  cartas,  ni 
mis  billetes ;  leo  mis  ejercicios. 

9.  I  Necesita  V.  muchos  panuelos  ?    No,  senor,  necesito  muy 
pocos. 

10.  e  Estudia    Y.    muchas    lecciones  ?      No,    senor,    estudio 
pocas. 

11.  I  Busca  Y.  una  pluma  ?    No,  senor,  busco  una  gramatica. 

12.  I  Que  busca  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    Busca  los  ejercicios  en 
ingles. 

13.  I  Estudia  Y.  f ranees  6  aleman  ?    No  estudio  ni  f ranees,  ni 
aleman ;  estudio  espanol. 

14.  e  Necesita  Y.  mi  ejercicio  ?    Si,  senor,  necesito  su  ejercicio 
ingles. 

15.  t  Escribe  Y.  al  comerciante  6  al  abogado  ?    No  escribo  al 
comerciante,  ni  al  abogado  ;  escribo  a  su  padre  de  Y. 

16.  I  Escriben  ellas  los  ejercicios  de  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  escri^ 
ben  los  ejercicios  de  espanol. 

17.  I  Recibe  Y.  muchas  cartas  de  su  padre  ?    No,  senor,  recibo 
muy  pocas. 

18.  I  Recibe  el  comerciante  mucho  algodon  ?    Si,  senor,  recibe 
mucho. 

19.  i  Compra  Y.  muchos  panuelos  ?    Si,  senor,  compro  muchos. 

20.  I  Compra  su  padre  de  Y.  muchos  caballos  ?    No,  senor, 
compra  pocos. 

21.  I  Compra  Y.  la  gramatica  del  muchacho  ?    No,  senor,  com- 
pro el  cuaderno  de  la  muchacha. 

22.  e  Habla  mucho  el  f ranees  ?    No,  seiior,  habla  poco. 

23.  I  Escribe  Y.  bien  el  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  escribo  mal  el  in- 
gles, pero  escribo  bien  el  espanoL 


LESSOI^  YIIL 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Does  your  brother  write  English  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  writes 
English  wejl. 

2.  Do  you  write  to  my  brother  ?    No,  sir,  I  write  to  my  father. 

3.  Do  you  write  in  English  or  in  Spanish  ?   I  write  in  English. 

4.  Do  they  (fern.)  write  the  lessons  or  the  exercises  ?    They 
write  neither  the  lessons  nor  the  exercises ;  they  write  letters. 

5.  Do  you  receive  many  notes  ?    No,  sir,  I  receive  but  few. 

6.  Do  they  receive  gold  ?    No,  sir,  they  receive  silver. 

7.  Do  you  receive  many  letters  from  your  father  ?    Yes,  sir, 
I  i^ceive  many. 

8.  Do  you  eat  fish  ?    No,  sir,  I  eat  bread  and  cheese. 

9.  Do  the  Germans  drink  water  ?    No,  sir,  they  drink  beer. 

10.  Do  you  read  your  brother's  letter  ?    No,  sir,  I  read  my  sis- 
ter's letter. 

11.  Does  the  merchant  sell  French  paper  ?    No,  sir,  he  sells 
English  paper. 

12.  Does  your  brother  learn  German  and  English  ?    No,  sir, 
he  learns  neither  German  nor  English ;  he  learns  Spanish. 

13.  Do  you  need  silver  or  gold  ?    I  need  neither  gold  nor 
silver. 

14.  Do  you  look  for  my  father  ?    No,  madam,  I  look  for  the 
lawyer. 

15.  Do  you  buy  a  grammar  from  the  merchant  ?    Yes,  sir,  I 
buy  a  grammar  from  the  merchant. 

16.  Do  they  study  their  lessons  well  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  study 
their  lessons  well. 

17.  Do  you  speak  much  to  your  sister  ?    Yes,  madam,  I  speak 
much  to  my  sister. 

18.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  or  English  ?    I  speak  English. 

19.  Do  you  receive  French  books  ?    No,  sir,  I  receive  English 
books. 

20.  Does  the  merchant  receive  silver  or  gold  ?    He  receives 
gold  and  silver. 

21.  Do  you  write  your  exercises  ?     No,  sir,  I  write  my  letters. 

22.  Do  you  write  a  letter  to  your  father  ?    No,  sir,  I  write  to 
my  sister. 


30 

LESSON  IX. 

LESSON  IX. 

Vivir.     (Infinitive.) 

To  live. 

Vivo. 

I  live. 

Vives. 

Thou  livest. 

Vive. 

He  lives. 

Vivimos. 

We  live. 

Vivis. 

You  live. 

Viven. 

They  live. 

Residir. 

1                To  reside. 

Mis  (plural) 

. 

~        My. 

Sus  {plural) 

Your. 

Cuando. 

When. 

Donde  {without  motion).  ) 
Adonde  {with  motion).      ) 

Where. 

Campo,  pais. 

Country.* 

Flores.              Flowers. 

Dia. 

Day. 

Casa.                 House,  or  home. 

Dias. 

Days. 

Nueva  York.    New  York. 

Lapiz. 

Pencil. 

Francia.            France. 

Lapices. 

Pencils. 

Espaiia.             Spain. 

Aleli. 

Gilliflower. 

Inglaterra.        England. 

Alelies. 

Gilliflowers. 

Alemania.         Germany. 

Cortaplumas. 

Penknife. 

Tienda.              Store. 

Hotel. 

Hotel. 

Ciudad.             City. 

Flor. 

Flower. 

Fonda.              Restaurant 

Dias  de  la  semana.\ 

Days  of  the  week. 

Lunes. 

Monday. 

Martes. 

Tuesday. 

Miercoles. 

Wednesday. 

Jueves. 

Thursday. 

Viernes. 

Friday. 

Sabado. 

Saturday. 

Sabados. 

Saturdays. 

Domingc 

>. 

Sunday. 

Domingos. 

Sundays. 

*  Campo  refers  to  the  country,  as  distinguished  from  the  city ;  as,  ^l 
vive  en  el  campo,  He  Hves  in  the  country.  Pais  refers  to  one  country  as 
opposed  to  another ;  as,  Los  Estados  Unidos  es  el  pais  de  los  americanos. 
The  United  States  is  the  country  of  the  Americans. 

f  All  of  the  masculine  gender. 


LESSON  IX. 


31 


COMPOSITION. 


^  Vive  V.  en  el  campo  6  en  la  ciudad  ? 
Vivo  en  la  ciudad. 
I  En  donde  residen  sus  papas  de  V.  ? 
Papa  reside  en  Francia,  y  mama  en 

Nueva  York. 
I  Cuando  come  V.  en  casa  de  sus 

hermanos  de  V.  f 
Los  doraingos,  martes  y  jueves  como 

en  casa  de  mis  hermanos. 
^Y  en  donde   come   V.   los  lunes, 

miercoles,  viernes  y  sabados  ? 
Como  en  casa. 


Do  you  live  in  the  country  or  in  the 
I  live  in  the  city.  [city  *? 

Where  do  your  parents  reside  ? 
Father  resides  in  France,  and  motn- 

er  in  New  York. 
When  do  you  dine  at  your  brothers'  ? 

On  Sundays,  Tuesdays  knd  Thurs- 
days I  dine  at  my  brothers'. 

And  where  do  you  dine  on  Mondays, 
Wednesdays,  Fridays,  and  Satur- 

I  dine  at  home.  [days  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

32.  Papd^  papa ;  mama,  mamma ;  pie,  foot ;  are  excep- 
tions to  the  general  rule,  and  form  the  plural  by  the  addition 
of  s ;  as,  papas,  papas ;  mamas,  mammas ;  pies,  feet. 

33.  Nouns  of  more  than  one  syllable,  ending  in  s,  and  not 
accented  on  the  last  syllable,  are  the  same  in  singular  and 
plural ;  as,  lunes,  Monday,  or  Mondays ;  martes,  Tuesday,  or 
Tuesdays. 

34.  Words  which  are  compounds  of  two  nouns  differ  so  va- 
riously that  it  is  not  possible  to  give  rules  for  the  formation 
of  their  plurals ;  but  compounds  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the 
singular  number  form  the  plural  in  the  same  manner  as  sim- 
ple nouns ;  and  compound  words  of  a  verb  and  a  noun  in  the 
plural  are  the  same  in  both  numbers ;  as,  cortaplumas,  pen- 
knife, or  penknives. 

35.  The  days  of  the  week  always  take  the  article  when 
they  are  employed  to  mark,  or  express  time ;  as, 

Estudio  espaSol  el  lunes  y  el  vier-  1 1  study  Spanish  on  Monday  and 
nes.  I      Friday. 

36.  Donde,  where  (without  motion) ;  adonde,  where  (with 
motion) ;  cuando,  when.  These  adverbs  are  always  placed  be- 
fore the  verb ;  as, 

%  Donde  reside  V.  %  I  Where  do  you  reside  % 

%  Cuando  escribe  V.  ?  j  When  do  you  write  I 


32  ^  LESSON  IX. 

37.  Donde^  adonde^  and  cuando^  when  used  interrogatively 
require  an  accent ;  thus,  ^  Donde  vive  ?  Where  does  he  live  ? 
^  Cudndo  lee  F.  ?    When  do  you  read  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  i  En  donde  vive  V.  ?    Vivo  en  Nueva  York. 

2.  e  Donde  viven  sus  padres  de  V.  ?  Mi  padre  vive  en  la 
ciudad  y  mi  madre  en  el  campo. 

3.  I  Donde  viven  sus  hermanos  ?    Viven  en  Francia. 

4.  I  Donde  come  V.  los  sabados  y  los  domingos  ?  Como  en 
el  hotel  de  los  franceses. 

5.  e  Y  donde  come  V.  los  lunes  y  los  martes  ?  Como  en  el 
hotel  americano. 

6.  i  Donde  reside  V.  ?    Resido  en  el  campo. 

7.  ^  Y  donde  reside  su  mama  de  V.  ?  Reside  en  los  Estados 
Unidos  (United  States). 

8.  i  Cuando  estudia  V.  sus  lecciones  de  frances  ?  Los  mier- 
coles  y  los  jueves. 

9.  I  Y  que  estudia  V.  los  viernes  ?  Los  viernes  estudio  una 
leccion  de  frances. 

10.  e  Cuando  lee  V.  los  periodicos  ?  Yo  leo  los  periodicos  los 
domingos. 

11.  I  Compran  alelies  sus  hermanas  ?  Si,  senor,  ellas  compran 
alelies. 

12.  I  Estudia  V.  las  leyes  de  Inglaterra  ?  No,  senor,  estudio 
las  de  los  Estados  Unidos. 

13.  I  Aprende  bien  la  muchacha  el  ingles  ?  Si,  senor,  aprende 
bien  el  ingles. 

14.  I  Que  beben  los  espanoles  y  los  alemanes  ?  Los  espaiioles 
beben  buen  vino,  y  los  alemanes  buena  cerveza. 

15.  I  Donde  compra  el  comerciante  el  algodon  ?  Compra  el 
algodon  en  los  Estados  Unidos. 

16.  I  Y  donde  vende  el  oro  y  la  plata  ?    En  Inglaterra. 

17.  I  Cuando  necesita  su  hermano  de  V.  la  gramatica  ?  Mi 
hermano  necesita  su  gramatica  el  lunes. 

18.  I  En  que  hotel  come  V.  ?    Como  en  el  hotel  de  Inglaterra. 

19.  I  Que  compra  el  comerciante,  plata  li  oro  ?  El  comer- 
ciante no  compra  ni  oro  ni  plata,  compra  seda. 

20.  I  Que  estudia  V.  ?    Estudio  los  dias  de  la  semana  en  ingles. 

21.  i  Escribe  V.  a  Francia  ?    No,  senor,  escribo  a  Inglaterra. 


LESSO]^  IX.  >  33 

22.  I  Que  escribe  Y.  ?    Escribo  los  ejercicios  de  la  semana  en 
ingles. 

23.  I  Donde  reside  su  hermana  de  V.  ?    Eeside  en  el  campo. 

24.  i  En  que  pais  vive  su  papa  ?    Yive  en  Alemania. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  live  in  the  country  ?    No,  sir,  I  live  in  town. 

2.  Where  does  your  sister  live  ?    She  lives  in  New  York. 

3.  Where  do  your  parents  {padres)   live  ?    They  live  in 
France. 

4.  Where  does  your  brother  reside  ?    He  resides  in  Eng- 
land. 

5.  Do  you  not  reside  in  the  United  States  ?     No,  sir,  in 
Spain. 

6.  In  which  country  does  your  mother  live  ?    She  lives  in 
the  United  States. 

7.  Do  you  write  to  your  father  in  Spanish  or  in  English  ? 
I  write  in  English. 

8.  Where  does  the  merchant  buy  cotton  ?    He  buys  cotton 
in  England. 

9.  Which  do  you  sell,  silver  or  gold  ?    I  sell  gold. 

10.  Where  do  you  dine  on  Sundays  and  Mondays  ?    I  dine 
in  the  French  hotel. 

11.  And  where  on  Wednesdays,  Fridays,  and  Saturdays  ?    In 
the  German  hotel. 

12.  When  do  they  study  their  lesson  ?    On  {los)  Tuesdays. 

13.  Does  the  lawyer  study  the  laws  of  England  ?    No,  sir,  he 
studies  the  laws  of  the  United  States. 

14.  Where  does  your  mother  reside  ?    She  resides  in  Germany, 

15.  When  do  you  need  your  grammar  ?    On  Friday. 

16.  When  do  your  sons  study  the  French  lessons  ?    They 
study  the  French  lessons  on  Mondays  and  Saturdays. 

17.  Where  does  the  merchant  buy  the  good  penknives  ?    In 
England. 

18.  What  day  do  you  {fern)  leceive  the  newspapers  ?    We 
receive  the  newspapers  on  Sundays. 

19.  Does  your  sister  buy  gilliflowers  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  buys  gilli- 
flowers. 

20.  Where  do  you  buy  your  pencils  ?    In  the  French  store. 

21.  What  do  you  study  ?    I  study  the  days  of  the  week  in 
Spanish. 

5 


34 


LESSON  X. 


22.  Where  do  your  parents  reside  ?    My  mother  resides  in 
Spt  in,  and  my  father  in  Germany. 

23.  Where  does  your  sister  reside  ?    She  resides  in  the  country. 

24.  Do  you  need  my  books  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  need  your  books. 


lesso:n^  X. 


Tener. 
Tengo. 
Tienes. 
Tiene. 
Tenemos. 
Teneis. 
Tienen. 

Lo,  le,  los  (masc.  pi.). 
La,  las  {fern.  pi.). 
Lo  {neuter). 


I  To  have. 

I  have. 
Thou  hast. 
He  has. 
We  have. 
You  have. 
They  have. 

OBJECTIVE    CASE. 

It,  him,  them. 

It,  her,  them. 

It,  (sometimes)  so. 


I  Quien,  quienes  {pi.)  ? 

i  Cual,  cuales  {pi.)  ? 

^Que? 

i  De  quien,  de  quienes  {pi.)  ? 

Con. 


INTERROGATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Who? 

Which  one,  vsrhich  ones  ! 
What,  or  vrhich  ? 
Whose  ? 


Zapato. 
Chaleco. 
Baston. 
Sombrero. 


Shoe. 
Vest. 
Cane. 
Hat. 


With. 

Botas. 

Casaca. 

Corbata. 

Medias. 


Boots. 
Coat. 
Cravat. 
Stockings. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Quien  tiene  mi  bast6n  ? 

Yo  lo  tengo. 

i  Que  corbata  tiene  V.  % 

Tengo  la  bonita. 

I  Tienen  ellos  mi  chaleco  ? 

No,  senor,  tienen  la  corbata  de  V. 

4  De  quien  habla  V.  f 


Who  has  my  cane  f 

I  have  it. 

Which  cravat  have  you  f 

I  have  the  pretty  one. 

Have  they  my  waistcoat  ? 

No,  sir,  they  have  your  cravat. 

Of  whom  do  you  speak  I 


Hablo  de  los  franceses. 
^  Teneis  vosotros  casacas  ? 
Si,  senor,  las  tenemos. 
I  Quien  tiene  sombreros  ? 
Los  tiene  el  comerciante. 
I  Necesita  V.  a  mi  padre  ? 
Si,  senor,  lo  necesito. 
^  Tiene  V.  mi  casaca  ? 
Si,  senor,  la  tengo. 
I  Que  botas  tiene  V.  ? 
4 Que  tiene  v.? 


Lussojsr  X  35 

I  speak  of  the  Frenchmen. 

Have  you  coats  ? 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  (them). 

Who  has  hats? 

The  merchant  has  (them). 

Do  you  need  my  father  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  need  him. 

Have  yiou  my  coat  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  it. 

Which  boots  have  you  ? 

What  is  the  matter  with  you  1 


EXPLANATION: 

38.  Irregular  verbs  are  those  which  vary  from  the 
model  regular  conjugations,  either  in  terminations  or  root 
letters.  The  verb  tener,  to  have,  to  possess,  is  the  first  of 
the  irregular  verbs  introduced,  and  its  variations  are  so  nu- 
merous that  it  must  be  learned  independently. 

A  complete  list  of  the  irregular  conjugations  will  be  found 
near  the  end  of  the  book. 

39.  Personal  Pronouns  as  Direct  and  Indirect  Ob- 
jects.— While  there  is  still  some  uncertainty  in  the  Spanish 
language  as  to  the  use  of  the  pronouns  of  the  third  person, 
when  they  are  either  the  direct  or  indirect  object  of  the  verb, 
the  general  rules  are  as  follows :  The  direct  forms  correspond- 
ing to  him,  her,  and  it  (this  last  a  peculiar  neuter  whose  use 
will  be  explained  later),  are  lo,  la,  lo,  Le  is  the  indirect  form, 
corresponding  to  to  or  for  him,  and  to  to  or  for  her.  The  mas- 
culine plurals  are  los  for  the  direct,  and  les  for  the  indirect 
object,  and  for  the  feminine,  las  direct,  and  les  indirect. 

All  these  pronouns  usually  precede  the  verb  in  all  the 
tenses  of  the  indicative  mode,  in  all  the  tenses  of  the  sub- 
junctive mode,  except  the  present  used  hortatively,  and  the 
past  participle.  They  follow  the  infinitive,  and  the  pres- 
ent participle,  and  the  hortative  subjunctive*,  in  which 
cases  they  are  appended  to  the  verbs,  and  form  one  word 

*  The  hortative  subjunctive  is  the  subjunctive  of  command  or  exhor- 
tation ;  that  is,  the  subjunctive  used  as  an  imperative. 


36 


LESSON  X 


with  them,  causing  a  change   of  accent,  as  will  be  seen 
later;  as, 

PRONOUNS  AS   DIRECT  OBJECTS. 


!6l  lo  busca. 
Ella  la  busca. 
fil  lo  necesita. 
EUos  lo8  aman. 
Nosotros  las  necesitamos. 


He  looks  for  him. 
She  seeks  her. 
He  needs  it. 
They  love  them. 
We  need  them. 


PRONOUNS  AS   INDIRECT   OBJECTS. 

Yo  le  hablo.  I       I  speak  to  him  or  her. 

El  les  habla.  I        He  speaks  to  them  (masc.  or  f  em.). 

Certain  variations  from  these  rules  occur  in  poetry  and 
very  elevated  prose. 

Lo  is  sometimes  employed  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  a 
whole  or  part  of  a  sentence,  and  then  it  is  equivalent  to  50,  or 
it  Of  this,  however,  more  will  be  said  when  treating  of  the 
regimen  of  verbs. 

40.  The  interrogative  prokouxs  quien^  cudl^  que^  de 
quien^  who,  which,  what,  and  whose,  do  not  require  the  ar- 
ticle; as, 

^  Quien  habla  ? 
I  Cual  tengo  yo  ? 
I  Que  escribe  V.  ? 


j,  De  quien  son  los  caballos  ? 


Who  speaks  ? 
Which  one  have  I  ? 
What  do  you  write  f 
Whose  are  the  horses  ? 


41.  When,  in  a  question,  the  interrogative  pronoun  is 
governed  by  a  preposition,  that  preposition  must  also  be  re- 
peated in  the  answer  ;  as. 


i  Con  quien  vive  Y.  ? 
Con  mi  amigo. 
4  De  quien  es  el  caballo  ? 
De  mi  amigo. 


With  whom  do  you  live  ? 
With  my  friend. 
Whose  is  the  horse  ? 
My  friend's. 


42.  El  is  frequently  used  as  a  definite  pronoun,  meaning 
the  one^  referring  to  a  noun  already  expressed  or  understood ; 
as,  ^  Que  sombrero  tiene  V.  9  Which  hat  have  you  ?  Teiigo  el 
de  F.,  I  have  the  one  of  you,  i.  e.,  yours.  ^  Que  clase  de  pa- 
nuelo  tiene  V.  9  Tengo  el  de  seda.  What  kind  of  handker- 
chief have  you  ?    I  have  the  one  of  silk,  or  the  silk  one. 


Lussojsr  X  87 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Que  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  un  hermoso  baston. 

2.  e  Tienes  tii  un  buen  sombrero  ?    Si,  seiior,  lo  tengo. 

3.  i  Que  paiiuelo  tiene  ella  ?    Tiene  el  de  seda. 

4.  ^  Cual  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  mi  panuelo. 

5.  I  Teneis  vosotros  buenos  chalecos  ?    Si,  senor,  los  tenemos. 

6.  e  De  quieti  hablan  ellos  ?    Hablan  de  las  americanas. 

7.  ^  Tiene  V.  las  corbatas  ?    Si,  senor,  las  tengo. 

8.  I  Tienen  ellos  los  hermosos  paiiuelos  de  seda  ?    Si,  senor, 
los  tienen. 

9.  I  Quien  tiene  las  medias  ?    Yo  las  tengo. 

10.  I  Tiene  Y.  mi  chaleco  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  tengo. 

11.  i  Quien  tiene  mi  baston  ?    Su  hermano  lo  tiene. 

12.  I  Habla  V.  a  su  hermana  ?    Si,  seiior. 

13.  I  Busca  V.  a  su  hermana  ?    Si,  senorita,  la  busco. 

14.  ^  Estudia  V.  su  leecion  ?    Si,  seiior,  la  estudio. 

15.  e  Necesita  V.  a  su  papa  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  necesito. 

16.  I  Que  sombrero  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  el  de  V. 

17.  I  Que  botas  busca  V.  ?    Busco  las  buenas. 

18.  I  Con  quien  aprende  V.  el  ingles  ?    Con  un  americano. 

19.  I  A  quien  busca  V.  ?    Busco  al  abogado. 

20.  I  Que  compra  V.  ?    Compro  lapices  ingleses. 

21.  I  Tiene  V.  una  buena  gramatica  ?     Si,  senor  tengo  una 
muy  buena. 

22.  I  Tiene  V.  muchos  libros  ?    No,  senor,  tengo  pocos. 

23.  I  Tienen  ellas  mucha  seda  ?    No,  seiior,  tienen  muy  poca. 

24.  I  Donde  reside  V.  ?    Resido  en  el  campo. 

25.  I  Donde  vive  su  abogado  de  V.  ?    Vive  en  la  ciudad. 

26.  ^  Vive  en  Francia  su  hermano  de  V.  ?    No,  seiior,  vive  en 
Espana.  •  • 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Who  has  the  stockings  ?    I  have  them. 

2.  What  has  he  ?    He  has  my  grammar. 

3.  Have  they  my  vest  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  have  it. 

4.  Which  books  have  they  (fern.)  ?    They  have  yours. 

5.  Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  of  the  Frenchman. 

6.  Who  has  my  coat  ?    They  have  it. 

7.  Have  you  my  cravat  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  it  not. 

8.  Have  we  very  good  coats  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  have. 


38  LESSON  XL 

9.  Who  has  the  handsome  stockings  ?    They  {fern,)  have 
them. 

10.  Do  you  speak  to  the  Frenchman  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  speak  to  the 
Frenchman. 

11.  Do  you  need  my  hat  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  my  hat. 

12.  Whom  do  you  look  for  ?    I  look  for  your  father. 

13.  What  do  you  buy  ?    I  buy  English  books. 

14.  Which  shoes  do  you  buy  ?    I  buy  the  handsome  shoes. 

15.  Which  hats  have  you  ?    I  have  the  merchant's  hats. 

16.  With  whom  do  you  learn  English  ?    I  learn  with  an 
American. 

17.  Have  you  good  coats  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  good  coats. 

18.  Have  they  many  grammars  ?   No,  sir,  they  have  very  few. 

19.  Where  do  you  live  ?    I  live  in  the  country. 

20.  Does  your  father  reside  in  France  ?    No,  sir,  he  resides  in 
England. 

21.  Does  your  mother  live  in  Germany  ?    No,  sir,  she  lives  in 
the  United  States. 

22.  Do  you  buy  many  books  ?    No,  sir,  I  buy  very  few. 

23.  Who  has  my  handsome  boots  ?    I  have  them. 

24.  Which  hat  have  you  ?    I  have  yours. 

25.  What  have  you  ?    I  have  my  stockings. 

2^.  Of  whom  do  you  speak  ?    I  speak  of  your  father  ? 


LESSON    XI. 

lEREGULAR  AUXILIARY  VERB   OF   THE   SECOND   CONJUGATION, 


Ser^ 

(Infinitive.) 

To  be. 

Soy. 

I  am. 

Eres. 

Thou  art. 

Es. 

He  is. 

Somos. 

We  are. 

Sois. 

You  are. 

Son. 

They  are. 

*  One  of  the  six  verbs  whose  indicative  present  first  singular  does  not 
end  in  o. 


LESSON  XI. 


3» 


INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS. 


Alguien. 


Alguno. 

Nadie. 

Ninguno. 

Algo,  alguna  cosa. 

Nada,  ninguna  cosa. 

Todo. 

Todos. 


Some  one,  somebody,  anybody^ 

any  one. 
Some,  any,  somebod^?-,  anybody. 
No  one,  nobody. 
None,  no  one,  nobody. 
Something,  anything. 
Nothing,  not  anything. 
All,  everything. 
Every  one,  everybody. 


Librero.  Bookseller. 

Panadero.  Baker. 

Carnicero.  Butcher. 

Sastre.  Tailor. 


Libreria.  Bookstore. 

Panaderia.  Bakery. 

Carniceria.  Butcher's  shop 

Sastreria.  Tailor's  shop. 


COMPOSITION. 


j,  Son  Vds.  carniceros  f 

No,  senor,  somos  panaderos. 

^  Es  V.  carnicero  ? 

No,  senor,  yo  soy  sastre. 

J  Tiene  V.  algiin  pan  ? 

No,  senor,  no  tengo  ninguno. 

^  Tienen  Vds.  algo  f 

No,  senor,  no  teneraos  nada. 

^  Quien  tiene  el  sombrero  ? 

El  americano  lo  tiene. 

I  Donde  compra  V.  pan  ? 

En  la  panaderia. 

^  D6nde  compra  V.  sus  libros  ? 

En  la  libreria. 

I  Eres  tu  muy  estudioso  ? 

No,  seiior,  no  lo  soy. 

^  Tienen  todos  Vds.  buenas  grama- 

ticas  ? 
Si,  seiior. 

^  Quien  tiene  papel  ? 
Nadie  lo  tiene. 


Are  you  butchers  f 

No,  sir,  we  are  bakers. 

Are  you  a  butcher  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  a  tailor. 

Have  you  some  bread  1 

No,  sir,  I  have  none. 

Have  you  anything  ? 

No,  sir,  we  have  nothing. 

Who  has  the  hat? 

The  American  has  it. 

Where  do  you  buy  bread  ? 

In  the  bakery. 

Where  do  you  buy  your  books  t 

In  the  bookstore. 

Art  thou  very  studious  f 

No,  sir,  I  am  not  <so). 

Have  you  all  good  grammars  ? 

Yes,  sir. 

Who  has  paper  ? 

Nobody  has  (it). 


40  LESSON  XL 

EXPLANATION. 

43.  Alguien,  alguno. — Alguien  refers  to  persons  only, 
and  is  always  used  in  the  singular  number ;  as, 

Vivo  con  alguien.  l         I  live  with  some  one. 

Escribo  a  alguien.  |         I  write  to  somebody. 

When  some  one^  any  one  is  followed  by  the  preposition  o/, 
dlguno  is  used,  and  not  alguien ;  as,  alguno  de  ellos  escribe 
en  el  periodico,  Some  of  them  writes  in  the  newspaper. 

Any  one  or  anybody^  not  used  interrogatively,  is  translated 
by  cualquiera^  as  will  be  seen  when  we  introduce  the  indefi- 
nite pronoun. 

Alguien  may  not  be  used  in  the  negative.  Alguno  may, 
on  the  contrary,  be  employed  either  in  affirmative  or  negative 
sentences ;  in  the  afiBrmative  it  always  precedes  the  noun  to 
which  it  refers,  and  in  the  negative  it  invariably  comes  after 
it;  as. 

No  estudian  leccion  alguna.  i     They  study  no  lesson  (or  do  not 

I         study  any  lesson). 

44.  ^N'adie,  iq^iNGUNO. — Niyiguno  relates  to  persons  and 
things,  and  is  used  in  the  negative  in  the  same  manner  as  al- 
guno in  the  affirmative ;  nadie  relates  to  persons  only,  and  is 
used  in  the  negative  in  the  same  way  as  the  pronoun  alguien 
in  the  affirmative.  In  a  word,  nadie  and  ninguno  are  merely 
the  negative  forms  of  alguien  and  alguno. 

45.  Alguno  and  ninguno  lose  the  o  when  they  come  im- 
mediately before  a  masculine  noun ;  as,  ^  No  tiene  V,  algun 
lapiz  ?    Have  not  you  any  pencil  ? 

46.  Algo  and  alguna  cosa  are  used  in  the  affirmative; 
as, 

Como  algo,  or  alguna  cosa.  I         I  eat  something. 

^Recibe  V.  algo,  or  alguna  cosa 9  I         Do  you  receive  anything! 

Anything,  when  not  used  interrogatively,  is  translated 
cualquiera  cosa^  as  will  be  seen  in  its  proper  place. 

47.  Nada,  ninguna  cosa  are  used  in  the  negative  form. 

48.  Nada,  I5-INGUN0,  NADIE,  the  adverb  no,  as  well  as 
any  other  words  expressing  negation,  are  placed  before  the 


LESSON  XL 


41 


verb ;  but  when  no  precedes  the  verb,  another  negative  may 
be  placed  after  it,  as  has  been  stated  already,  and  the  two 
negatives  serve  to  strengthen  each  other,  contrary  to  the 
practice  of  the  English  language ;  as, 

No  estudio  nada.  I  study  nothing.      ^ 


No  hablo  a  nadie. 
No  recibo  ninguno. 


I  speak  to  nobody,  or  no  one. 
I  receive  none. 


But  in  omitting  the  negative  no,  the  words  which  express 
the  negation  must  be  placed  before  the  verb ;  as, 

Nada  estudio.  I  study  nothing. 

A  nadie  hablo.  I  speak  to  nobody. 

Ninguno  recibo.  I  receive  none. 

The  two  negatives  are  always  preferable. 

49.  The  indefinite  article  a  or  an  is  not  translated  into 
Spanish  when  accompanied  by  a  noun  which  expresses  na- 
tionality, profession,  &c. ;  as, 

^EsV.  ingles? 


No,  sefior,  soy  espanol. 

I  Es  el  sastre  ? 

No,  senor,  es  zapatero. 


Are  you  an  Englishman  ? 
No,  sir,  I  am  a  Spaniard. 
Is  he  a  tailor  ? 
No,  sir,  he  is  a  shoemaker. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Es  Y.  frances  ?    No,  sefior,  soy  americano. 

2.  I  Son  Vds.  alemanes  ?    No,  senor,  somos  ingleses. 

3.  i  Eres  (vl  buen  muchacho  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  soy. 

4.  I  Sois  vosotros  sastres  ?    No,  sefior,  somos  panaderos. 

5.  e  Es  bueno  el  libro  de  su  hermano  de  V.  ?    Si,  sefior,  lo  es. 

6.  I  Son  buenos  sus  zapatos  de  V.  ?    No,  sefior,  son  muy 
malos. 

7.  I  Tiene  alguno  mi  sombrero  ?    Si,  sefior,  alguien  lo  tiene. 

8.  I  Tiene  alguien  papel  ?    No,  sefior,  ninguno  tiene  papel. 

9.  e  Tiene  V.  alguna  cosa  ?    No,  senor,  no  tengo  nada. 

10.  8  No  tiene  Y.  cosa  alguna  ?    Si,  sefior,  tengo  alguna  cosa. 

11.  I  Compran  pan  todos  Yds.  ?    Si,  sefior,  todos  compramos 
pan. 

12.  i  Donde  compran  Yds.  todo  su  pan  ?    Lo  compramos  en 
la  panaderia. 

13.  e  Son  Yds.  panaderos  ?    No,  senor,  nosotros  somos  zapa- 
teros. 


42  LESSON  XL 

14.  e  Tiene  alguien  mi  sombrero  bueno  ?    Si,  senor,  alguien 
lo  tiene. 

15.  e  No  compra  V.  algo  ?    Si,  Senor,  compro  alguna  cosa. 

16.  g  Escribe  V.  algo  ?    No,  senor,  no  escribo  nada. 

17.  e  Necesita  V.  todo  el  papel  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  necesito  todo. 

18.  I  Necesita  V.  todas  las  plumas  ?    Si,  seiior,  las  necesito 
todas. 

19.  I  Es  V.  sastre  ?    Si,  senor,  yo  soy  sastre. 

20.  i  Donde  tiene  V.  su  sastreria  ?    La  tengo  en  Nueva  York. 

21.  I  Es  su  padre  de  V.  librero  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  es. 

22.  I  Vende  muchos  libros  ?    Si,  senor,  vende  muchos. 

23.  e  Donde  tiene  el  su  libreria  ?    La  tiene  en  Francia. 

24.  I  Tiene  V.  una  panaderia  ?    No,  senor,  tengo  una  carni- 
ceria. 

25.  I  Habla  V.  a  alguien  ?    No,  senor,  no  hablo  a  nadie. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Are  you  an  Englishman  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  an  American. 

2.  Are  you  good  boys  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  are  very  good  boys. 

3.  Is  Louisa  a  good  girl  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  is  a  very  good  girl. 

4.  Art  thou  a  Frenchman  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  a  German. 

5.  Is  yours  a  good  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  mine  is  a  very  good  one. 

6.  Are  they  {fern.)  studious  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  are  very  stu- 
dious. 

7.  Have  you  anything  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  nothing. 

8.  Have  you  nothing  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  something. 

9.  Has  anybody  a  good  grammar  ?    Yes,  sir,  the  Frenchman 
has  one. 

10.  Who  speaks  French  ?    The  American  speaks  French. 

11.  Do  you  write  an  exercise  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  write  an  exercise. 

12.  Where  do  you  buy  all  your  books  ?    I  buy  them  in  the 
bookstore. 

13.  Are  you  a  bookseller  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  a  baker. 

14.  Where  have  you  your  bakery  ?    I  have  it  in  New  York. 

15.  Where  do  you  buy  your  coats  ?    In  the  tailor's  shop. 

16.  Have  you  all  of  your  books  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  all. 

17.  Do  you  all  reside  in  the  United  States  ?    Yes,  sir,  we  re- 
side in  the  United  States. 

18.  Have  you  any  bread  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  none. 

19.  Do  you  speak  to  anybody  ?     Yes,  sir,   I   speak  to  the 
Americans. 


LESSON  XII. 


43 


20.  Do  you  buy  anything  ?    No,  sir,  I  buy  nothing. 

21.  Are  you  a  baker  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  a  tailor. 

22.  Are  they  French  ?    No,  sir,  they  are  English. 

23.  Art  thou  a  Spaniard  ?    No,  sir,  1  am  an  American. 

24.  Who  is  studious  ?    Emanuel  is  very  studious. 


LESSON    XII. 

IRREGULAR  AUXILIARY  OF  THE   SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


Haber.     (Infinitive.)      | 


To  have. 


He. 

I  have. 

Has. 

Thou  hast. 

Ha. 
Hemos. 

He  has. 
We  have. 

Habeis. 
Han. 

You  have. 
They  have. 

PAST 

PARTICIPLES.— 

-First  Conjugation. 

Hablado. 

Spoke. 

Estudiado. 

Studied. 

Comprado. 

Bought. 

Buscado. 

Looked  for,  sought. 

Necesitado. 
Aprendido. 

Second  oa 

Needed. 

rid  Third. 

Learned. 

Vendido. 

Sold. 

Leido. 

Read. 

Bebido. 

Drunk. 

Comido. 

Eaten,  dined. 

Eecibido. 

Received. 

Vivido. 

Lived. 

Residido. 

Resided. 

Escrito  (irregular  in  this 

Written. 

participle 

only). 

Hoy. 


To-day. 


44 


LESSON  XII. 

Paris. 

Londres. 

Madrid. 

Pano. 

Paris. 
London. 
Madrid. 
Cloth. 

Habana. 
Viena. 
Filadelfia. 
Esquela. 

Havana. 
Vienna. 
Philadelphi, 
Note. 

COMPOSITION. 

I  Cuando  ha  escrito  V.  a  su  padre  ? 

He  escrito  hoy  a  mi  padre. 

4  Ha  recibido  V.  sus  cartas  ? 

Si,  seSor,  las  he  recibido. 

I  Ha  vivido  V.  en  Paris  ? 

Si,  senor,  he  vivido  una  semana. 

^  Ha  residido  V.  en  Londres  ? 

Si,  senor,  he  residido  algunos  dias. 

^  Han  comido  ellos  1 

Si,  senor,  ban  comido. 

I  Hemos  leido  bien  nosotros  I 

Si,  senor,  Vds.  han  leido  muy  bien. 

^Habeis  vendido  vosotros  muchos 

panuelos? 
Hemos  vendido  muy  pocos. 
^Cuando  habeis  aprendido  vuestra 

leccion  ? 
La  hemos  aprendido  hoy. 
I  Habeis  comprado  pan  ? 
Si,  senor,  lo  hemos  comprado. 
^  Ha  estudiado  V.  aleman  ? 
No,  senor,  no  lo  he  estudiado. 
j,  Ha  hablado  V.  con  el  f ranees  ? 

Si,  sefior,  he  hablado  con  el. 


When  have  you    written  to   your 

father  ? 
I  have  written  to  my  father  to-day. 
Have  you  received  your  letters  1 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them. 
Have  you  lived  in  Paris  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  lived  a  week. 
Have  you  resided  in  London  ? 
Yes>  sir,  I  resided  some  days. 
Have  they  eaten  (or  dined)  ? 
Yes,  sir,  they  have  eaten. 
Have  we  read  well  ? 
Yes,  sir,  you  have  read  very  well. 
Have  you  sold  many  handkerchiefs  ? 

We  have  sold  very  few. 

When  have  you  learned  your  les- 
son? 

We  have  learned  it  to-day. 

Have  you  bought  bread  I 

Yes,  sir,  we  have  bought  it. 

Have  you  studied  German  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  not  studied  it. 

Have  you  spoken  with  the  French- 
man? 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  spoken  with  himo 


EXPLANATION. 

50.  Tenek  and  Habek.     To  have,  used  as  a  principal 
verb,  is  translated  by  tener,  as  an  auxiliary,  by  haber ;  as, 


Tener  caballos. 
Tengo  oro. 
Haber  hablado. 
Hemos  hablado. 


To  have  horses, 
I  have  gold. 
To  have  spoken. 
We  have  spoken. 


"When  the  auxiliaries  to  have  and  to  be,  followed  by  an  in^ 


LESSON  XIL  45 

finitive,  denote  some  future  action,  to  have  is  rendered  by 
tener  que^  and  to  be  by  haber  de ;  as, 

Tenemos  que  escribir.  I         We  have  to  write. 

Hemos  de  recibir  dinero.  |         We  are  to  receive  money. 

51.  Perfect. — The  action  of  the  verb  in  this  tense  is 
viewed  at  the  close  of  its  progress,  as  concluded  in  the  present 
time,  without  reference  to  introduction  or  continuance ;  as, 
Alejandro  ha  estudiado  el  espaSol.  .  |    Alexander  has  studied  Spanish. 

It  must  also  be  used  when  we  speak  indefinitely  of  any- 
thing past,  as  happening  or  not  happening  in  the  day,  year, 
or  age,  in  which  we  mention  it ;  as. 

He  escrito  hoy  muchas  cartas.        |    I  have  written  many  letters  to-day. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  sus  cartas  ?  No,  seiior,  he  escrito  los  ejer- 
cicios  de  la  leccion. 

2.  I  Ha  recibido  Y.  su  dinero  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he  recibido. 

3.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  a  su  hermana  ?  Si,  seiior,  he  escrito  hoy  a 
mi  hermana. 

4.  I  Cuando  ha  recibido  V.  los  periodicos  de  Paris  ?  Los  he 
recibido  hoy. 

5.  I  Ha  leido  V.  mi  libro  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he  leido. 

6.  I  Han  vivido  Yds.  en  Londres  ?  Si,  seiior,  hemos  vivido 
una  semana. 

7.  I  Ha  comido  Y.  ?    Si,  senor,  he  comido. 

8.  ^  Ha  leido  Y.  la  carta  de  mi  hermano  ?  Si,  senor,  la  he 
leido. 

9.  I  Ha  vendido  Y.  su  baston  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he  vendido  hoy. 

10.  I  Ha  necesitado  Y.  el  libro  de  mi  hermana  ?  No,  seiior,  no 
lo  he  necesitado. 

11.  I  Ha  buscado  Y.  bien  el  panuelo  ?  Si,  senora,  lo  he  bus- 
cado  bien. 

12.  I  Ha  comprado  Y.  pan  ?    No,  senor,  he  comprado  vino. 

13.  I  Ha  aprendido  Y.  su  leccion  de  espanol  ?  La  he  estudia- 
do, pero  he  aprendido  muy  poco. 

14.  e  Ha  hablado  Y.  con  mi  padre  ?  Si,  senor,  he  hablado  con  el. 

15.  I  Ha  estudiado  Y.  el  aleman  ?  Si,  senor,  lo  he  estudiado 
con  un  frances. 


46  l:esson  XII. 

16.  e  Ha  vivido  V.  en  la  Habana  ?    No,  senor,  he  vivido  en 
Filadelfia. 

17.  I  Ha  vendido  V.  muchos  lapices  ?    No,  senor,  he  vendida 
muy  pocos. 

18.  e  Ha  recibido  V.  sus  cartas  ?    No,  senor,  he  recibido  los 
periodicos  del  jueves. 

19.  g  Ha  leido  V.  mi  esquela  ?    No,  senor,  no  la  he  leido. 

20.  I  Ha  buscado  V.  bien  mi  baston  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he  buscado 
bien. 

21.  e  Ha  comprado  V.  un  sombrero  ?    Si,  senor. 

22.  e  Han  hablado  ellos  a  su  padre  ?    No,  senor. 

23.  g  Ha  aprendido  V.  el  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  lo  he  estudiado 
un  poco ;  pero  no  lo  he  aprendido. 

24.  I  Ha  leido  V.  el  periodico  de  hoy  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he  leido. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  received  your  letters  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  received 
them  to-day. 

2.  Have  you  read  the  newspapers  ?   Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  them. 

3.  Have  you  written  to  my  sister  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  not  writ- 
ten to  her  (Ze). 

4.  Have  you  received  your  letters  from  Vienna  ?    I  have 
received  them. 

5.  Have  you  read  the  English  newspapers  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
(read  them). 

6.  Have  you  dined  with  your  sister  ?    I  have  dined  with  her. 

7.  Have  you  bought  your  hat  ?    I  have  bought  it  to-day. 

8.  Have  you  looked  for  my  father  in  Paris  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
looked  for  him. 

9.  Have  you  spoken  with  him  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  spoken 
with  him. 

10.  Where  have  you  spoken  with  him  ?    I  have  spoken  with 
him  at  his  house. 

11.  Have  you  studied  your  Spanish  lesson  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
studied  it. 

12.  Have  you  learned  it  well  ?  No,  sir,  I  have  learned  it  little. 

13.  Have  the  bakers  sold  much  bread  ?    No,  sir,  they  have 
sold  very  little. 

14.  Has  the  tailor  bought  much  cloth  ?     Yes,  sir,  he  has 
(bought). 


LESSON  XIIL 


47 


15.  Have  they  (fern.)  dined  with  your  sister  ?    Yes,  sir,  they 
have  dined  with  my  sister. 

16.  Have  they  dined  with  your  brother  ?    Yes,  sir. 

17.  What  have  they  eaten  ?     They  have  eaten  bread  and 
meat. 

18.  What  have  they  drunk  ?    They  have  drunk  water,  wine, 
and  ale. 

19.  Have  you  spoken  with  the  Spaniard  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
spoken  with  him. 

20.  Have  you  spoken  with  him  in  Spanish  or  English  ?    I 
have  spoken  with  him  in  English. 

21.  Have  you  received  your  letters  from  Philadelphia  ?    Yes, 
sir,  I  have  received  them. 

22.  Have  you  received  them  all  ?     I  have  received  them 
all? 

23.  Have  you  lived  in  London  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  lived  in 
Vienna. 

24.  Have  you  lived  with  your  father  ?    No,  sir,  I  have  lived 
with  my  brother. 


LESSON    XIII. 


Querer.    (Irregular.) 

To  wish,  to  be  willing,  to  love. 

Querido. 

Wished,  loved,  dear. 

Quiero. 

I  wish,  or  am  willing. 

Quieres. 

Thou  wishest. 

Qui  ere. 

He  wishes. 

Queremos. 

We  wish. 

Quereis. 

You  wish. 

Quieren. 

They  wish. 

Desear. 

To  desire. 

POSSESSIVE 

PRONOUNS. 

Mio. 

My,  or  mine. 

Tuyo. 

Thy,  or  thine. 

Suyo. 

His,  hers,  or  its. 

Nuestro. 

Our,  or  ours. 

Vuestro. 

Your,  or  yours. 

48 


LUSSON  XIIL 


Util. 

Useful. 

Caro. 

Dear. 

Barato. 

Cheap. 

Viejo. 

Old. 

Joven, 

Young. 

Eico. 

Rich. 

Pobre. 

Poor. 

Amigo. 

Friend. 

Amiga. 

Friend. 

Primo. 

Cousin. 

Prima. 

Cousin. 

Dinero. 

Money. 

Moneda. 

Coin. 

COMPOSITION. 

I  Quiere  V.  un  sombrero  f 

No,  senor,  quiero  un  baston. 

I  Quiere  V.  mucho  a  su  primo  I 

Si,  senor,  lo  quiero  mucho. 

4  Quiere  V.  escribir  ? 

No,  senor,  quiero  leer. 

I  Quiere  V.  hablar  con  mi  hermana  ? 

Si,  sefior,  quiero  hablar  con  ella. 

J  Quiere  V.  comprar  el  caballo  de 
nuestro  amigo  ? 

Si,  senor,  quiero  comprar  el  caballo 
del  amigo  de  V. 

I  Quieres  escribir  a  mi  hermano  ? 

Si,  senor,  quiero  escribirle. 

J  Tiene  V.  mi  baston  ? 

No,  senor,  tengo  el  mio. 

4  Tienen  ellas  nuestros  libros  ? 

Si,  senor,  tienen  los  de  Vds. 

4  Es  viejo  su  padre  de  V.  ? 

Si,  senor,  es  un  poco  viejo. 

I  Es  joven  su  hermana  de  V.  f 

Si,  senor,  es  muy  joven. 

I  Es  pobre  el  comerciante  ? 
1  No,  seiior,  es  muy  rico. 
I  4  Ha  escrito  V.  a  su  amigo  ? 

Si,  senor,  he  escrito  hoy  a  mi  amigo. 

I  Ha  hablado  V.  con  su  prima  ? 
No,  senor,  he  hablado  con  mi  amigo. 

jDonde  vive  su  primo  de  V.I 
Vive  en  Filadelfia. 


Do  you  wish  a  hat  I 

No,  sir,  I  wish  a  cane. 

Do  you  love  your  cousin  much  t 

Yes,  sir,  I  love  him  much. 

Do  you  wish  to  write  ? 

No,  sir,  I  wish  to  read. 

Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  my  sister  f 

Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak  to  her. 

Do  you  wish  to  buy  our  friend's 

horse? 
Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  buy  your  friend's 

horse. 
Do  you  wish  to  write  to  my  brother  t 
Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  write  to  him. 
Have  you  my  cane  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  mine. 
Have  they  our  books  ? 
Yes,  sir,  they  have  yours. 
Is  your  father  old  ? 
Yes,  sir,  he  is  rather  old  ? 
Is  your  sister  young  ?  ' 

Yes,  sir,  she  is  very  young. 
Is  the  merchant  poor  ? 
No,  sir,  he  is  very  rich. 
Did  you  write  to  your  friend  ? 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  written  to  my  friend 

to-day. 
Have  you  spoken  with  your  cousin  f 
No,  sir,  I   have   spoken  with  my 

friend. 
Where  does  your  cousin  live  f 
He  lives  in  Philadelphia. 


ZESSOJS'  XIIL  49 

EXPLANATION. 

52.  Mio,  TUYO,  SUYO,  NUESTRO,  YUESTRO,  change  the  final 
0  into  a^  to  form  the  feminine  termination. 

63.  The  possessive  pronouns  agree  with  their  nouns  in 
gender  and  number ;  as, 

Nuestra  gramatica.  I  Our  grammar. 

Nuestros  libros.  I  Our  books. 

54.  When  used  as  pronominal  adjectives,  they  precede  the 
noun  with  jvhich  they  agree ;  and  it  is  to  be  observed  that,  in 
this  case,  mio^  tuyo^  and  suyo  drop  their  final  syllable ;  as, 

Nuestros  caballos.  ,  Our  horses. 

Mi  pluma.  My  pen. 

Tu  papel.  Thy  paper. 

Su  cuaderno.  His  copy-book. 

Mis  plumas.  My  pens. 

Tus  papeles.  Thy  papers. 

Sus  cuadernos.  His  copy-books. 

55.  Mio,  when  used  in  the  vocative  case — that  is,  in  ad^ 
dressing  persons — is  placed  after  the  noun  governing  it ;  as, 

Escribe,  hijo  mio.  |  Write,  my  son. 

56.  When  possessives  are  used  in  an  absolute  sense,  for 
nouns  not  repeated,  they  agree  with  them  in  gender  and 
number,  and  are  preceded  by  the  definite  article ;  as, 


Tu  gramdtica  y  la  mia. 
Be  mis  muchachos  y  los  iuyos, 
Su  hermano  y  el  nuestro. 
Sus  zapatos  y  los  nuestros, 
Tus  caballos  y  los  suyos. 


Thy  grammar  and  mine. 
Of  my  boys  and  thine. 
His  brother  and  ours. 
His  shoes  and  ours. 
Thy  horses  and  theirs^  &c. 

57.  Possessives  are  preceded  by  the  neuter  article,  when 
they  are  indefinitely  used ;  as, 

Lo  mio,  lo  tuyo,  lo  suyo.  I  That  which  is  mine,  that  which  is 

I     thine,  that  which  is  his. 

58.  When  the  possessive  pronoun  is  connected  with  the 
noun  by  the  verb  to  he^  the  article  is  omitted ;  as, 


Este  billete  es  mio. 
Esa  carta  es  tuya. 
El  caballo  es  suyo. 
Muchachos,  i  es  este  vuestro  libro  ? 
6 


This  note  is  mine. 
That  letter  is  thine. 
The  horse  is  his. 
Boys,  is  this  your  bookl 


50  LESSON  XIIL 

59.  VuESTRO,  VUESTRA,  is  also  used  in  addressing  a  single 
person  in  very  high  position,  and  in  public  speech  ;  as, 
Sefior,  vuestra  patria  lo  exige.  1  Sir,  your  country  demands  it. 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  I  Quiere  V.  vino  ?    No,  senor,  quiero  agua. 

2.  ^  Quieren  Yds.  mis  libros  ?    No,  senor,  queremos  los  nues- 
tros. 

3.  i  Tienen  alios  nuestros  periodicos  ?    No,  senor,  ellos  tie- 
nen  los  suyos. 

4.  e  Tiene  V.  nuestro  libro  ?    No,  senor,  yo  tengo  el  mio. 

5.  i  Teneis  vuestros  ejercicios  ?    Si,  senor,  tenemos  los  nues- 
tros. 

6.  e  Es  vieja  su  amiga  de  Y.  ?    No,  sefior,  es  joven. 

7.  g  Es  rico  el  comerciante  ?    Si,  senor,  es  muy  rico. 

8.  I  Yende  barato  ?    No,  senor,  compra  barato ;  pero  vende 
caro. 

9.  I  Es  litil  la  gramatica  ?    Si,  senor,  es  muy  litil. 

10.  I  Quiere  Y.  mucho  a  su  hermana  ?    Si,  senor,  la  quiero 
mucho. 

11.  I  Quiere  Y.  beber  vino  ?    No,  senor,  quiero  beber  agua. 

12.  e  Quiere  Y.  comprar  un  panuelo  de  algodon  ?    No,  senor, 
quiero  comprar  uno  de  seda. 

13.  I  Quiere  Y.  vivir  en  nuestra  casa  ?    No,  senor,  quiero  vivir 
en  la  mia. 

14.  e  Quiere  Y.  estudiar  espanol  ?    Si,  senor,  quiero  estudiarlo. 

15.  I  Que  quieren  ellos  ?     Quieren  hablar  con  Y. 

16.  I  Quiere  Y.  ir  (to  go)  a  mi  casa  el  martes  ?    No,  senor, 
quiero  ir  hoy. 

17.  I  Necesita  Y.  un  libro  ?    Si,  senor,  necesito  el  mio. 

18.  I  Desea   Y.    hablar   con   el   abogado  ?    No,   senor,   deseo 
hablar  con  el  comerciante. 

19.  I  Necesita  su  prima  un  lapiz  ?    No,  senor,  ella  no  lo  nece- 
sita. 

20.  I  Ha  querido  Y.  mucho  a  su  padre  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he  que- 
rido  mucho. 

21.  e  Ha   necesitado   Y.    dinero  ?    No,   senor,   he   necesitado 
amigos. 

22.  I  Ha  escrito  Y.  sus  cartas  ?    Si,  sefior,  las  he  escrito. 

23.  I  Ha  leido  Y.  los  periodicos  ?    Si,  sefior,  los  he  leido  hoy. 

24.  e  Quiere  Y.  aprender  espanol  ?    Si,  senor,  quiero  aprenderlo. 


LBSSON  XIIL  51 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  wish  to  eat  anything  ?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  drink. 

2.  What  do  you  wish  to  drink  ?    I  wish  to  drink  water. 

3.  Do  you  wish  to  speak  to  your  brother  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  wish 
to  speak  to  him  (le). 

4.  Do  you  wish  to  learn  Spanish  ?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  learn 
French. 

5.  Do  they  wish  to  live  in  New  York  ?    No,  sir,  they  wish 
to  live  in  Philadelphia. 

6.  Have  you  read  your  note  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  it. 

7.  Do  you  want  some  wine  ?    No,  sir,  I  want  some  water. 

8.  Do  they  want  my  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  want  your  book. 

9.  Does  your  brother  want  to  speak  to  my  father  ?    No,  sir, 
he  wants  to  speak  to  the  lawyer. 

10.  Did  you  want  my  father's  letter  ?    No,  sir,  we  did  not 
want  your  father's  letter. 

11.  Did  you  want  any  money  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  wanted  some. 

12.  Do  you  wish  to  live  in  France  ?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  live 
in  the  United  States. 

13.  Do  you  wish  to  speak  French  ?    No,  sir,  I  wish  to  speak 
Spanish. 

14.  Do  they  wish  to  buy  a  grammar  ?    No,  sir,  they  wish  to 
buy  newspapers. 

15.  What  do  you  wish  to  buy?    I  wish  to  buy  a  handker- 
chief. 

16.  What  do  you  wish  to  read  ?    I  wish  to  read  the  English 
newspapers. 

17.  What  do  you  wish  to  drink  ?    I  wish  to  drink  some  wine 
and  water. 

18.  What  do  they  want  to  sell  ?    They  want  to  sell  their 
horses. 

19.  When  did  you  receive  your  letters  from  England  ?    We 
have  received  them  to-day. 

20.  When  did  you  dine  with  your  friends  ?    I  have  dined 
with  them  to-day. 

21.  Have  you  a  useful  book  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  Spanish 
grammar. 

22.  Does  the  merchant  sell  his  hats  dear  ?    No,  sir,  he  sellar 
them  very  cheap. 

23.  Is  your  friend  young  ?    No,  sir,  he  is  old. 

24.  Are  you  rich  ?    No,  sir,  I  am  poor. 


52 


LFSSON  XIV, 


25.  Do  you  wish  to  have  money  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  wish  to  have  it. 

26.  Do  your  friend  and  cousin  live  in  New  York  ?    No,  sir, 
they  live  in  Philadelphia. 


LESSON    XIY. 

Llevar,  llevado. 

Carry,  carried. 

Enviar^  enviado.. 

To  send,  sent. 

Tomar,  tornado. 

To  take,  taken. 

Pagar,  pagado. 

To  pay,  paid. 

Traer,  traido. 

Bring,  brought. 

Cuanto. 

How  much. 

Cuantos. 

How  many. 

Bastante. 

Enough. 

Dollar. 
Centavo.         Cent. 
Cafe.  Coffee. 

Chocolate.      Chocolate. 

CARDINALS — USED   AS 

Uno,  una. 

Dos. 

Tres. 

Cuatro. 

Cinco. 

Seis. 

Siete. 

Ocho. 

Nueve. 

Diez. 

Once. 

Doce. 

Trece. 

Catorce. 

Quince. 

Diez  y  seis. 

Diez  y  siete. 

Diez  y  ocho. 

Diez  y  nueve. 


Silla. 
Mesa. 
Cama. 


Chair. 
Table. 
Bed. 


SUBST-^TIVES   AND  ADJECTIVES. 

One. 

Two. 

Three. 

Four. 

Five. 

Six. 

Seven. 

Eight. 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 


LUSSON  XIV. 


53 


CARDINALS—USED  AS   SUBSTANTIVES  AND  ADJECTIY^S— Continued. 


Yeinte. 

Veinte  y  uno,  etc.* 

Treinta. 

Cuarenta. 

Cincuenta. 

Sesenta. 

Setenta. 

Ochenta. 

Noventa. 

Ciento. 

Doscientos. 

Trescientos. 

Cuatrocientos. 

Quinientos. 

Seiscientos. 

Setecientos. 

Ochocientos. 

Novecientos. 

Mil. 

Dos  mil. 

Mil  ciento. 

Cien  mil. 

Un  millon. 


Twenty. 

Twenty-one,  &c. 

Thirty. 

Forty. 

Fifty. 

Sixty. 

Seventy. 

Eighty. 

Ninety. 

A  or  one  hundred. 

Two  hundred. 

Three  hundred. 

Four  hundred. 

Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 

Seven  hundred. 

Eight  hundred. 

Nine  hundred. 

A  or  one  thousand. 

Two  thousand. 

Eleven  hundred. 

A  or  one  hundred  thousand. 

A  or  one  million. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Han  llevado  mi  sombrero  al  som- 

brerero  ? 
Si,  seiior,  lo  han  Uevado. 
I  Ha  enviado  V.  la  carta  a  su  primo  ? 

La  he  enviado. 
i,  Ha  tornado  V.  cafe  ? 
No,  senor,  he  tornado  chocolate. 
^  Cuanto  dinero  tiene  V,  ? 
Tengo  bastante. 
^  Cuanto  tiene  V.  ? 
Tengo  diez  pesos. 

jHa  comido  V.  con    su  hermano 
hoy? 


Have  they  taken   my  hat  to  the 

hatter? 
Yes,  sir,  they  have  taken  it. 
Have  you  sent  the  letter  to  your 

cousin  ? 
I  have  sent  it. 
Have  you  taken  coffee  ? 
No,  sir,  I  have  taken  chocolate. 
How  much  money  have  you? 
I  have  enough. 
How  much  have  you  ? 
I  have  ten  dollars. 
Have  you  dined  with  your  brother 

to-day? 


'  The  forms  veintiuno  and  veintiun  are  sometimes  used. 


54 


LESSON  XIV. 


No,  senor,  no  he  comido  con  el. 
iCuanto  ha  pagado  V.  al  sombre- 

rero? 
Ocho  pesos  y  seis  centavos. 
4  Cuantas  sillas  ha  comprado  V.  ? 
He  comprado  seis. 


No,  sir,  I  have  not  dined  with  him. 
How  much  have  you  paid  to  the 

hatter? 
Eight  dollars  and  six  cents. 
How  many  chairs  have  you  bought  I 
I  have  bought  six. 


EXPLANATION. 

NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 

60.  In  the  formation  of  compound  numbers,  the  same 
order  is  observed  in  Spanish  as  in  English,  except  as  to  the 
place  of  the  conjunction ;  as, 

Mil  ochocientos  sesenta  y  seis.        j        1866. 

61.  All  these  numbers,  except  u7io^  one,  and  the  com- 
pounds of  ciento^  one  hundred,  are  indeclinable. 

62.  Uxo  agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun  to  which  it 
refers,  but  drops  the  o  when  it  comes  immediately  before  a 
masculine  noun,  and  is  sometimes  used  in  the  plural,  to 
mean  some  or  any ;  as. 


Uno  de  los  hombres. 
Una  mujer. 
Tin  hombre. 
Un  gran  caballo. 
Unos  zapatos. 


One  of  the  men. 

A  woman. 

A  man. 

A  great  horse. 

Some  or  any  shoes. 


63.  CiENTO  drops  the  last  syllable  when  it  comes  immedi- 
ately before  a  noun  of  either  gender.  Its  compounds  agree 
in  number  and  gender  with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify ;  as, 


Cien  hombres  y  cien  mujeres. 

Ciento  veinte  y  tres  caballos. 

Doscientos  libros. 
HxQ^cientas  cajas. 


One  hundred  men  and  one  hundred 

women. 
One     hundred    and    twenty-three 

horses. 
Two  hundred  books. 
Three  hundred  boxes. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  sus  cartas  ?    Si,  seiior,  las  he  escrito. 

2.  I  Las  ha  enviado  V.  al  correo  *  ?    Si,  seiior,  las  he  enviado 


hoy. 


Correo,  post-office. 


LESSO]^  XIV,  55 

3.  I  Ha  tornado  V.  cafe  6  chocolate  ?    He  tornado  cafe. 

4.  e  Tiene  V.  bastante  dinero  ?    Si,  senor,  tengo  bastante. 

5.  e  Cuanto  tiene  V.  ?      Tengo  veinte  pesos  y  treinta  cen- 
tavos. 

6.  I  Cuanto  ha  pagado  V.  a  su  sastre  ?    He  pagado  a  mi  sas- 
tre  veinte  y  cinco  pesos  y  cuarenta  centavos. 

7.  l  Cuando  ha  comido  V.  con  su  amigo  ?    He  comido  con 
el  hoy. 

8.  e  Cuantos    caballos    ha    comprado    V.  ?      He    comprado 
ocho. 

9.  I  Ha  comprado  V.  sillas  ?    Si,  seiior,  he  comprado  docei 

10.  I  Tiene  V.  mucho  dinero  ?    Tengo  cien  pesos  y  cincuenta 
centavos. 

11.  e  Cuanto    tiene    su    hermano  ?     Tiene   quinientos    (500) 
pesos. 

12.  I  Donde  vive  V.  ?    Vivo  en  Nueva  York. 

13.  I  Que  niimero  (number)  tiene  la  casa  de  V.  ?    Tiene  el  nii- 
mero  trescientos  treinta  y  ocho  (338). 

14.  ^  Ha  recibido  V.  sus  periodicos  de  Paris  ?    Si,  senor,  los  he 
recibido. 

15.  I  Que  niimeros  ha  recibido  V.  ?    He  recibido  el  once,  doce, 
trece,  catorce,  y  diez  y  ocho. 

16.  I  Los  ha  leido  V.  ?    No,  senor,  no  los  he  leido. 

17.  I  Cuantos  anos  (years)  ha  vivido  V.  en  Paris  ?    He  vivi- 
do  cinco. 

18.  e  Cuantas  lecciones  ha  aprendido  V.  ?     He    aprendido 
trece. 

19.  I  Cuantas  gramaticas  tiene  V.  ?    No  tengo  mas  que  una. 

20.  e  Quien  ha  recibido  hoy  periodicos  ?    Nadie  los  ha  recibi- 
do hoy. 

21.  i  Es  rico  el  amigo  de  V.  ?    Si,  senor,  tiene  quinientos  mil 
(500,000)  pesos. 

22.  I  Ha  llevado  V.  mis  cartas  al  correo  ?    No  he  llevado  mas 
que  dos. 

23.  I  Ha  enviado  V.  mis  zapatos  al  zapatero  ?    Si,  senor,  los 
he  enviado  hoy. 

24.  e  Ha  tomado  V.  muchas  lecciones  de  espanol  ?    He  toma- 
do  doce. 

25.  e  Cuanto  ha  pagado  Y.  a  su  amigo  ?    Tres  mil  ochocientos 
cuarenta  y  cuatro  pesos  (3,844). 


56  LESSON  XIV. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  wish  to  send  anything  to  your  cousin?    Yes,  sir,  I 
wish  to  send  money  to  my  cousin. 

2.  How  much  money  do  you  wish  to  send  ?    I  wish  to  send 
$317. 

3.  Who  has  taken  the  money  to  the  tailor  ?     My  cousin 
(fern.)  has  taken  it. 

4.  Where  have  you  sent  the  horses  ?    I  have  sent  them  to 
Paris. 

5.  How  many  have  you  sent  ?    I  have  sent  two  very  good 
ones. 

6.  My  son,  have  you  taken  the  $31.50  to  the  baker  ?    Yes,  sir, 
I  have  taken  it. 

7.  Has  your  brother  sent  some  chairs  to  your  house  ?    No, 
sir,  but  he  has  sent  some  to  his  own. 

8.  How  many  has  he  sent  ?    He   has  sent  ten  chairs  and 
three  tables. 

9.  Has  the  woman  bought  no  chairs  ?  Yes,  sir,  she  has  bought 
twenty-six. 

10.  How  many  letters  have  they  written  this  (esta)  week  ? 
They  have  written  three  hundred  and  ten  letters,  and  one  thou- 
sand and  one  notes. 

11.  Which  newspapers  have  you  sent  to  your  father  ?  I  have 
sent  him  numbers  three,  fifteen,  and  eighteen. 

12.  Has  he  read  them  all  ?     He  has  read  only  number  fifteen. 

13.  Has  the  butcher  much  money  ?    He  has  $1,000. 

14.  How  much  have  you  sent  to  jour  friend  (fern.)  ?  I  have 
sent  $111.17. 

15.  Whom  do  you  wish  to  pay  ?    I  wish  to  pay  my  tailor. 

16.  Where  does  your  tailor  reside  ?    He  resides  in  Vienna. 

17.  When  have  you  written  to  Alexander  ?  I  have  written 
to  Alexander  to-day. 

18.  Have  you  received  a  letter  from  him  to-day  ?  Yes,  sir,  I 
have  received  six. 

19.  What  day  do  you  receive  letters  from  France  ?  I  receive 
them  on  Tuesdays  and  Saturdays. 

20.  How  many  has  your  cousin  written  to  you  ?    None. 


LESSON  XT. 


57 


LESSON    XV. 


Pronunciar,  pronunciado. 
Tocar,  tocado. 

Cantar,  cantado, 
Beinar,  reinado. 


To  pronounce,  pronounced. 
To  touch,  touched ;  to  play, 

played. 
To  sing",  sung. 
To  reign,  reigned. 


Como. 

How,  like,  as. 

ORDINALS. 

Primero,  (primer 

before  a  mas- 

First. 

culine  noun). 

Segundo. 

Second. 

Tercero  (or  tercer  before  a  mas- 

culine noun). 

Third. 

Cuarto. 

Fourth. 

Quinto. 

Fifth. 

Sexto. 

Sixth. 

Septimo. 

Seventh. 

Octavo. 

Eighth. 

Noveno,  or  nono. 

Ninth. 

Decimo. 

Tenth. 

Piano. 

'  Piano. 

Cancion. 

Song. 

Violin. 

Violin. 

Palabra. 

Word. 

Miisico. 

Musician. 

Gruitarra. 

Gruitar. 

Pianista. 

Pianist. 

Historia. 

History. 

Cantor. 

Singer. 

Arpa. 

Harp. 

Tomo  or  volumen 

Volume. 

Obra. 

Work. 

Carlos. 

Charles. 

Miisica. 

Music. 

Luis. 

Louis. 

Cantora,  cantatriz. 

Singer. 

Enrique. 

Henry. 

Calle. 

Street. 

Key. 

King. 

Avenida. 

Avenue. 

Trabajo. 

Work,  labor. 

58 


LUSSON  XV. 


COMPOSITION. 


iComo  pronuncia  Manuel  el  espa- 

fioll 
Lo  pronuncia  bien, 
J  Toca  V.  la  guitarra  1 
No,  senor,  toco  el  violin  y  el  piano. 

4  Canta  V.  canciones  espanolas  f 

No,  senor,  canto  canciones  inglesas. 

j,  Quien  reina  en  Rusia  1 

Alejandro  Segundo. 

J  En  que  calle  vive  V.  I 

Vivo  en  la  calle  Once. 

|Y  v.,  donde  vive? 

Yo  vivo  en  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

j,  Que  toca  el  miisico  ? 

Toca  el  arpa,  el  violin  y  el  piano. 

jTiene  V.  el  primer  tomo  de  mi 

libro  ? 
No,  senor,  tengo  el  segundo. 
4  Ha  leido  V.  el  tomo  tercero  ? 
No,  senor,  he  leido  el  cuarto. 
4  Cuantos  afios  tiene  V. 


How  does  Emanuel  pronounce  Span- 
ish! 

He  pronounces  it  well. 

Do  you  play  the  guitar  ? 

No,  sir,  I  play  the  violin  and  the 
piano. 

Do  you  sing  Spanish  songs  ? 

No,  sir,  I  sing  English  songs. 

Who  reigns  in  Russia  ? 

Alexander  the  Second. 

In  which  street  do  you  live  f 

I  live  in  Eleventh  street. 

And  where  do  you  live  ? 

I  live  in  Twenty- third  street. 

What  does  the  musician  play  1 

He  plays  the  harp,  violin,  and  piano. 

Have  you  the  first  volume  of  my 
book? 

No,  sir,  I  have  the  second. 

Have  you  read  the  third  volume  ? 

No,  sir,  I  have  read  the  fourth. 

How  old  are  you  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

64.  The  ordinals  always  agree  in  gender  and  number  with 
the  noun,  expressed  or  understood,  to  which  they  refer,  and 
may  be  placed  either  before  or  after  that  noun ;  as. 


El  primer  tomo  (or  el  tomo  primero). 

El  primer  buen  libro. 

Los  primeros  cuadernos. 

Las  primeras  lecciones. 

El  segundo  tomo. 

Las  segundas  intenciones. 


The  first  volume. 
The  first  good  book. 
The  first  copy-books. 
The  first  lessons. 
The  second  volume. 
The  second  intentions. 


It  has  been  seen,  in  the  list  of  ordinal  numbers  at  the 
opening  of  the  present  lesson,  that  primero  and  tercero  lose 
the  final  letter  when  they  immediately  precede  their  noun, 
if  it  be  masculine,  or  if  they  are  separated  from  it  only  by 
an  adjective.     We  may  observe  here,  that  tercero  is  by  some 


LESSON  XV.  59 

written  entire ;  the  contracted  form,  however,  is  much  to  be 
preferred;  as, 

El  tercer  tomo.  |  The  third  volume. 

65.  The  ordinals  are  not  so  frequently  used  in  Spanish  as 
in  English ;  and,  except  primero^  first,  their  place  is  generally 
supplied  by  the  cardinal  numbers ;  as,  for  instance,  in  speak- 
ing of  the  days  of  the  month,  which  are  expressed  by  el  dos, 
tres^  cuatro^  etc.^  the  second,  third,  fourth,  &c.  The  follow- 
ing are  the  principal  cases  in  which  the  ordinals  are  em- 
ployed :  1st,  with  the  names  of  sovereigns,  popes,  &c. ;  2d,  in 
the  enumeration  of  books,  chapters,  lessons,  &c.,  and  in  a  few 
others ;  but,  even  in  these  cases,  after  decimo^  tenth,  they  are, 
by  reason  of  their  great  length,  generally  replaced  by  the 
numerals;  as, 

Charles  the  Fifth. 


Carlos  Quinto. 
Pio  ]*Cono. 
Capitulo  decimo. 
Calle  Veinte  y  tres. 
Luis  Catorce. 


Pius  the  Ninth. 
Chapter  tenth. 
Twenty-third  street. 
Louis  the  Fourteenth. 


N.  B. — The  definite  article  is  not  required  in  the  above 
examples. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Pronuncia  V.  bien  el  ingles  ?    No,  seiior,  lo  pronuncio 
mal. 

2.  I  Es  V.  cantor  ?    No,  senor,  pero  toco. 

3.  ^  Que  toca  Y.  ?    Toco  el  violin. 

4.  I  Canta  bien  su  hermana  de  V.  ?    No,  senor,  ella  canta 
mal  ;  pero  toca  bien  el  piano. 

5.  I  Que  leccion  estudia  V.  ?    Estudio  la  cuarta. 

6.  I  En  que  calle  vive  su  padre  de  V.  ?    Vive  en  la  calle 
Catorce. 

7.  h  Que  tomos  ha  leido  Y.  ?    He  leido  el  primero,  segundo, 
tercero  y  cuarto. 

8.  I  Cuantos  tomos  tiene  la  obra  ?    Tiene  seis. 

9.  e  Que  libro  lee  Y.  ?    Leo  la  historia  de  Carlos  Quinto. 

10.  i  Ha  leido  Y.  la  historia  de  Enrique  Octavo  de  Inglaterra  ? 
Si,  seiior,  la  he  leido. 

11.  e  Que  tomo  lee  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    Lee  el  noveno. 


60  LESSOJSr  XV, 

12.  I  Cuanto  dinero  ha  recibido  V.  hoy  ?    He  recibido  cin- 
cuenta  y  un  pesos. 

13.  e  Cuantos  hermanos  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  cinco. 

14.  i  Cuantos  anos  tiene  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    Tiene  quince. 

15.  I  Cuanto  tiempo  ha  vivido  V.  en  Paris  ?    He  vivido  seis 
anos. 

16.  I  Que  niimero  tiene  su  casa  ?    El  doscientos  seis  (206). 

17.  I  Que  dia  de  la  semana  es  hoy  ?    Hoy  es  miereoles. 

18.  e  Que  hora  tiene  V.  ?    Las  diez. 

19.  e  Cuantos  dias  tiene  una  semana  ?    Tiene  siete. 

20.  Ocho  y  doce  l  cuantos  son  ?    Son  veinte. 

21.  e  Cuantos  aiios  tiene  su  papa  de  Y.  ?    Tiene  sesenta. 

22.  I  Cuantos  dias  tiene  el  ano  ?    Tiene  trescientos  sesenta  y 
cinco  (365). 

23.  I  Como  ha  leido  Y.  ?    He  leido  despacio. 

24.  I  Ha  llevado  Y.  mi  piano  al  pianista  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  he 
llevado. 

25.  I  Ha  cantado  Y.  mucho  hoy  ?    Hoy  he  cantado  poco. 

2^.  I  Cuando  ha  vendido  Y.  su  caballo  ?    Lo  he  vendido  hoy. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  book  have  you  ?    A  music-book. 

2.  How  many  volumes  has  it  ?    Three. 

3.  Which  volume  have  you  read  ?    The  first. 

4.  Has  not  your  father  read  the  second  volume  ?    No,  sir ; 
but  my  cousin  has  read  it. 

5.  What  are  you  reading,  miss  ?    I  am  reading  the  History 
of  Charles  the  Fifth. 

6.  Who  has  sold  your  sister's  History  of  England  ?    She  has 
sold  it. 

7.  Who  has  bought  the  violin  ?    The  pianist. 

8.  Where  does  he  live  ?    In  Seventeenth  street. 

9.  In  what  street  does  the  butcher  live  ?    In  Sixth  avenue. 

10.  Have  you  bought  good  meat  in  the  butcher's  shop  ?    The 
meat  that  I  have  bought  is  very  bad. 

11.  What  things  have  you  sent  to  the  tailor  ?    I  have  sent 
stockings,  vests,  and  pocket-handkerchiefs. 

12.  What  day  of  the  week  is  to-day  ?    Monday. 

13.  Is  Monday  the  first  day  of  the  week  ?    No,  sir,  it  is  the 
second ;  Sunday  is  the  first. 


LESSON  XVL 


61 


14.  How  much  money  does  the  merchant  require  ?    He  re- 
quires $1,500. 

15.  How  much  money  do  you  wish  to  send  to  your  friend  ? 
I  wish  to  send  my  friend  $50. 

16.  Does  he  need  much  money  ?    Yes,  madam,  he  is  very  poor. 

17.  How  many  letters  have  your  brothers  written  to  Emanuel  ? 
Very  few. 

18.  How  do  your  sisters  pronounce  Spanish  ?    They  pronounce 
it  well  when  they  read,  but  not  when  they  speak. 

19.  When  do  they  write  their  exercises  ?    When  they  have 
studied  their  lessons. 

20.  And  you,  when  do  you  write  yours  ?    When  my  broth- 
ers write  theirs. 

21.  How  do  the  poor  buy  ?    The  poor  buy  dear,  and  the  rich 
buy  cheap. 

22.  Has  your  father  sold  his  old  horse  ?    He  has  sold  it. 

23.  Have  you  read  the  History  of  Louis  XVI.  ?    I  have  read 
volumes  first,  second,  and  third. 


LESSON    XVI. 

First  Conjugation — Preterit. 


TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  e. 

1.  am  OS. 

2.  aste. 

2.  asteis. 

3.  6. 

3.  aron. 

Hable. 

I  spoke. 

Hablaste. 

Thou  spokest. 

Hablo. 

He  spoke. 

Hablamos. 

We  spoke. 

Hablasteis. 

You  spoke. 

Hablaron. 

They  spoke. 

Second  Conjugation. 

TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  i. 

1.  imos. 

2.  iste. 

2.  isteis. 

3.  io. 

3.  ieron. 

62 


LUSSOJV  XVL 

Aprendi. 

I  learned. 

Aprendiste. 

Tbou  learnedst 

Aprendio. 

He  learned. 

Aprendimos. 

We  learned. 

Aprendisteis. 

You  learned. 

Aprendieron. 

They  learned. 

Third  Conjugation, 

TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  i 

1.  imos. 

2.  iste. 

2.  isteis.                  ' 

3.  io. 

3.  ieron. 

Escribi. 

I  wrote. 

Escribiste. 

Thou  wrote. 

Escribio. 

He  wrote. 

Escribimos. 

We  wrote. 

Escribisteis. 

You  wrote. 

Escribieron. 

They  wrote. 

Pasar. 

To  pass,  to  spend  (in  rela- 

tion to  time). 

Ayer.    Anocbe. 

Yesterday.     Last  night. 

Antes  de  ayer,  or  anteayer. 

The  day  before  yesterday. 

El  ano  pasado. 

Last  year. 

El  mes  pasado. 

Last  month. 

La  semana  pasada. 

Last  week. 

Ante  (prep.). 

Before,  in  the  presence  of. 

Ante  todas  cosas. 

Before  all  things. 

Ante  todo. 

Above  all. 

Ajites  (ad.). 

Before  (refers  to  time). 

Delante  (ad). 

Before  (refers  to  place). 

Despues  (ad.). 

Afterward,  after. 

Mas  (ad.).    Mas  (conj.). 

More.    But. 

Menos  (ad.). 

Less,  fewer. 

Que  (conj.). 

That,  than. 

LESSON  XVI. 


COMPOSITION. 


4  Hablo  V.  con  mi  padre  ? 

Si,  seiior,  hable  con  el  antes  de  ayer. 

j,  Han  aprendido  Vds.  su  leccion  ? 

Si,  senor,  la  hemos  aprendido  hoy. 

^  Cuando  escribio  V.  a  su  hermana  ? 

Escribi  la  semana  pasada  a  mi  her- 
mana. 

j,  Ha  recibido  V.  sus  periodicos  del 
mes  pasado  ? 

Si,  senor,  los  he  recibido  hoy. 
^  Cuando  vendio  Y.  su  caballo  ? 
Lo  vendi  el  afSo  pasado. 
^Estudia   Y.    antes   6   despues    de 

comer  ? 
Estudio  antes  de  comer. 
I  Hablo  Y.  mucho  ante  el  juez  f 

No,  senor,  hable  muy  poco. 
I  Que  libro  tiene  Y.  delante  ? 
Tengo  la  gramatica  espanola. 
j,  Escribio  Y.  sus  cartas  ? 
Si,  senor,  las  escribi  el  domingo  pa- 
sado. 
^  Come  Y.  menos  que  yo  ? 
No,  seiior,  como  mds  que  Y. 
^  Ha  visto  Y.  a  su  amigo  I 
Si,  seiior,  lo  vi  ayer. 
i  Donde  lo  vio  Y.  ? 
Lo  vi  delante  de  la  iglesia. 

g, Hablo  Y.  con  el? 

Si,  seiior ;  pero  muy  poco. 

^  Ha  comido  V.  ? 

&i,  seiiora,  he  comido  pan  y  he  be- 

bido  vino. 
^  Ha  leido  Y.  y  estudiado  sus  ejer- 

cicios  ? 
Si,  seiior,  los  he  leido  y  estudiado. 

i  Ha  escrito  Y.  a  su  padre  ? 
Si,  seiior,  escribi  ayer. 


Hid  you  speak  with  my  father! 
Yes,  sir,  I  spoke  with  him  the  day 

before  yesterday. 
Have  you  learned  your  lesson  I 
Yes,  sir,  we  have  learned  it  to-day. 
When  did  you  write  to  your  sister! 
I  wrote  to  my  sister  last  week. 

Have  you  received  your  newspapers 
of  last  month  (last  month's  news- 
papers) f 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  received  them  to-day  ! 

When  did  you  sell  your  horse  ! 

I  sold  it  last  year. 

Do  you  study  before  or  after  din- 
ing (or  dinner) ! 

I  study  before  dining. 

Did  you  speak  much  before  the 
judge? 

No,  sir,  I  spoke  very  little. 

What  book  have  you  before  you  ! 

I  have  the  Spanish  grammar. 

Did  you  write  your  letters! 

Yes,  sir,  I  wrote  them  last  Sunday. 

Do  you  eat  less  than  I ! 

No,  sir,  I  eat  more  than  you. 

Have  you  seen  your  friend  ! 

Yes,  sir,  I  saw  him  yesterday. 

Where  did  you  see  him  ! 

I  saw  him  before  (in  front  of)  the 

church. 
Did  you  speak  with  him  ! 
Yes,  sir ;  but  very  little. 
Have  you  dined  ! 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  eaten  bread  and 

drunk  wine. 
Have  you  read  and  studied  your 

exercises  ! 
Yes,  sir,  I  have  read  and  studied 

them. 
Have  you  written  to  your  father! 
Yes,  sir,  I  wrote  yesterday. 


64  LESSON  XVI. 


^Cuando  ha  recibido  V.  las  cartas 

deeU 
Las  he  recibido  hoy. 
4  Ha  enviado  V.  mis  cartas  despues 

de  las  suyas  ? 
Las  he  enviado  antes. 
I  Hablo  V.  ante  el  rey  ? 
No,  seiior,  hable  ante  el  juez. 
4  Cudnto  tiempo  ? 


When  have  you  received  the  letters 

from  him  ? 
I  have  received  them  to-day. 
Have    you    sent    my   letters  after 

yours  ? 
I  (have)  sent  them  before. 
Did  you  speak  before  the  king  ? 
No,  sir,  I  spoke  before  the  judge. 
How  long  ? 

EXPLANATION. 

66.  The  Preterit,  one  of  the  oldest  and  most  common 
forms  of  the  verb,  is  used  in  narrating  past  actions,  when 
thought  of  merely  as  events  or  single  facts^  without  reference 
to  the  time  they  occupied,  or  to  other  actions  going  on  at 
the  same  time ;  as,  Alejandro  compro  un  caballo^  Alexander 
bought  a  horse.  If  there  is  any  limitation  of  a  verb  in  this 
tense,  it  grows  out  of  the  context  of  the  sentence ;  as,  EscriM 
a  mi  padre  en  el  afLo  186Jf^  I  wrote  to  my  father  in  the  year 
1864.  This  tense  has  no  suggestion  of  continued^  repeated^ 
JiaMtual^  or  attempted  action,  as  we  shall  see  to  be  the  case 
with  the  imperfect^  or  of  completed  action,  as  we  have  seen  in 
the  perfect. 

In  colloquial  language  the  perfect  (which  has  been  treated 
of  in  Lesson  XII)  is  sometimes,  though  incorrectly,  substi- 
tuted for  the  preterit.  The  following  example  will  show  the 
impropriety  of  such  a  substitution : 

He  escrito  a  mi  padre  ayer.  1 1  have  written  to  my  father  yester- 

I     day. 

Nothing  remains  of  yesterday ;  it  is  time  past,  and  has  no 
connection  with  the  present ;  and,  as  it  has  been  already  seen 
that  the  perfect  implies  that  the  action  of  the  verb  is  con- 
cluded at  the  present  time,  the  incorrectness  of  the  foregoing 
example  is  at  once  apparent. 

67.  Ante. — This  preposition  means  before^  or  in  the  pres- 
ence of\  as, 

Hablo  ante  el  juez.  ]  He  spoke  before  the  judge. 

And  it  sometimes  denotes  priority,  antecedence,  &c. ;  as, 
Ante,  todas  cosas.  |  Before  all  things. 


LUSSON  XVL  gg 

68.  Mas,  more ;  Menos,  less,  fewer.-^Them  two  adverbs 
are  used  to  form  the  comparative  degree  of  several  adjec- 
tives, which  last  they  always  precede  in  the  sentence ;  as, 
El  vino  es  mds  caro  que  la  cerveza.  I  Wine  is  dearer  than  beer. 
Yo  soy  mds  rico  que  V.  1 1  am  richer  than  you. 

When  mds  means  more,  it  must  always  have  a  written 
accent.  When  used  to  express  some  degree  respecting  verbs, 
their  usual  place  in  the  sentence  is  immediately  after  them ; 
as, 

Yo  escribo  mds.  1 1  write  more. 

Tii  hablas  menos.  \  Thou  speakest  less. 

It  is  well  to  observe  here  that  mds  and  menos  are  them- 
selves the  comparatives  of  mucho  and  poco,  respectively. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Cuando  hablo  Y.  con  el  abogado  ?  Hable  con  el  an- 
teayer. 

2.  ^  Ha  hablado  V.  con  mi  hermana  ?  No,  senor,  hable  ayer 
con  su  ami  go  de  V. 

3.  e  Ha  hablado  V.  con  el  pianista  ?    Si,  senor,  le  hable  ayer. 

4.  i  Ha  aprendido  V.  su  leccion  ?  No,  senor ;  pero  he  escrito 
el  ejercicio. 

5.  ^  Han  aprendido  ellos  sus  lecciones  de  frances  ?  Si,  seiior, 
han  aprendido  las  de  frances  y  de  espanol. 

6.  I  Cuando  aprendio  su  hermana  a  tocar  el  piano  ?  Apren- 
dio  el  alio  pasado. 

7.  i  Ha  leido  V.  la  historia  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ?  He  leido 
el  tomo  primero  y  el  segundo. 

8.  I  Ha  leido  V.  la  carta  de  su  hermana  y  la  de  su  amiga  ? 
He  leido  la  de  mi  hermana ;  pero  no  la  de  mi  amiga. 

9.  I  Que  ha  leido  V.  hoy  ?  He  leido  los  ejercicios  de  la  se- 
mana  pasada. 

10.  I  Cuando  compro  V.  su  caballo  ?    Lo  compre  el  mes  pa- 
sado. 

11.  I  Donde  hablo  V.  con  mi  padre  ?    Delante  de  su  casa  de  V. 

12.  I  Leyo  Y.  la  carta  de  su  padre  antes  que  la  de  su  hermano  ? 
No,  senor,  la  lei  despues. 

13.  I  Cuando  residio  Y.  en  Paris  ?    Residi  antes  que  Y. 

14.  I  Cuantos  anos  tiene  su  hermana  ?    Tiene  veinte. 

7 


ee  LJSSSON  XVL 

15.  e  Cuantos  pesos  pago  V.  el  mes  pasado  al  comerciante  ? 
Quinientos. 

16.  I  Ha  llevado  V.  mis  zapatos  al  zapatero  ?    Si,  senor,  los 
lleve  ayer. 

17.  I  Cuando  ha  recibido  Y.  su  dinero  ?    Lo  recibi  anteayer. 

18.  I  Ha  escrito  V.  despues  que  escribio  mi  padre  ?    No,  seiior, 
escribi  antes. 

19.  I  Escribio  V.  su  carta  despues  que  recibio  la  de  su  her- 
mano  ?    Si,  senor,  la  escribi  mucho  despues. 

20.  i  Ha  hablado  V.  con  la  mad  re  antes  que  con  la  hija  ?    No, 
senor,  hable  antes  con  la  hija  que  con  la  madre. 

21.  I  Estudio  V.  su  leccion  de  ayer  ?    No,  senor,  estudie  la  de 
antes  de  ayer ;  pero  no  he  estudiado  la  de  ayer  ni  la  de  hoy. 

22.  i  Hablo  V.  ante  el  juez  ?    Si,  senor,  hable  ante  el  juez  y 
ante  el  rey. 

23.  e  Habla  V.  mas  que  yo  ?    No,  senor,  hablo  menos ;  pero 
escribo  mas. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  speak  more  yesterday  than  to-day  ?    I  spoke  less ; 
but  I  read  more. 

2.  How  many  newspapers  did  your  father  read  yesterday  ? 
Very  few. 

3.  How  old  is  your  sister  ?    She  is  nineteen. 

4.  Who  took  the  vest  to  the  tailor  last  year  ?    The  baker 
took  it. 

5.  How  much  did  the  tailor  pay  to  the  baker  afterward  ? 
$59.10. 

6.  Did  he  receive  the  vest  after  or  before  the  coat  ?    He  re- 
ceived it  after. 

7.  Did  your  sisters  sing  yesterday  ?    Yes,  sir,  they  sang  and 
played. 

8.  What  did   they  sing  ?    They  sang   Spanish  songs  and 
played  on  the  piano. 

9.  Have  you  {plural)  played  to-day  ?    No,  madam,  we  have 
not  played ;  but  we  have  written  our  French  exercises. 

10.  How  many  words  have  your  brothers  written  in  Spanish 
to-day  ?    Fewer  than  last  Thursday. 

11.  Do  they  speak  more  English  than  Spanish  ?    No,  madam, 
they  speak  more  Spanish. 

12.  What  have  the  singers  received  from  Paris  ?    They  have 
received  some  good  songs  and  French  music. 


LUSSON  XVII. 


67 


13.  Have  the  singers  (fem.)  enough  Spanish  music  ?    Yes, 
sir,  they  have  received  some  to-day. 

14.  Did  they  sing  well  last  month  ?    Not  very  well. 

15.  Who  sang  in  your  house  the  day  before  yesterday  ?    No- 
body sang. 

16.  How  long  did  you  reside  in  Vienna?    Five  years,  six 
months,  and  thirteen  days. 

17.  How  many  churches  has  Paris  ?    Paris  has  many  churches. 

18.  How  did  your  cousins  pronounce  their  Spanish  yester- 
day ?    Very  well. 

19.  Are  you  a  musician  ?    Yes,  madam. 

20.  Is  your  sister  a  pianist  or  a  singer,  or  does  she  play  on  the 
guitar  ?    She  sings  and  plays  on  the  piano. 

21.  When  did  you  speak  before  the  judge  ?    The  day  before 
yesterday  and  last  week. 

22.  Do  you  sing  much  with  the  musicians  ?    I  sing  a  little ; 
but  before  all  things  I  study  my  Spanish  lessons. 


LESSON    XYII. 


Trabajar. 
Mandar. 

(^uien,  quienes. 
A  quien,  a  quienes. 
I  Que  ?    Que. 

Cual,  cuales. 

Cuyo  (mdsc.  sing.),  cuya  (fem. 

sing.). 
Cuyos  (masG.  plural),  cuyas 

(fem,  plural). 
Varios.     Algunas  veces. 


To  work. 

To  command,  to  send. 


Who. 

Whom,  to  whom. 

What    (inter.),   who,    that,    or 

which. 
Which  one,  which  ones  (inter,). 

Whose,  which,  or  of  whom. 

Several.    Sometimes. 


Retrato. 

Portrait. 

Ultimo  (a). 

Last. 

Pantalones. 

Pantaloons. 

Criada. 

Servant. 

Concierto. 

Concert. 

Iglesia. 

Church. 

Teatro. 

Theatre. 

Plaza. 

Square,  market 

Mercado. 

Market. 

Compania. 

Company. 

Parque. 

Park. 

Juana. 

Jane. 

Trabajador. 

Workman. 

Cosa. 

Thinff. 

68 


LFSSON  XVIL 


COMPOSITION. 


jEs  viejo  el  caballero  a  quien  V. 

hablo  en  el  concierto  1 
No,  senor,  pero  lo  es  la  senora  que 

ha  hablado  con  V.  en  el  teatro. 
I A  quien  busca  V.  ? 
Busco  a  la  senorita  a  quien  V.  busca. 

i  Quien  es  el  joven  que  ha  hablado 

con  V.  1 
Es  un  criado  del  hotel. 
El  muchacho  que  lee,  j  al  cual  V. 

mando  trabajar,  es  mi  hermano. 
La  gramatica  que  el  tiene,  y  en  la 

cual  estudia,  es  mia. 
El  caballero  cuya  casa  V.  compro  es 

amigo  mio. 
El  comerciante  cuyo  vino  V.  com- 

pr6,  vende  muy  barato. 
El  libro  en  que  leemos. 

La  senora  d  quien  hable  es  mi  madre. 
/  Manda  V.   sus  nifios  al  Parque 

Central? 
J  A  quien  manda  V.  trabajar! 
A  mis  criados. 
; Juan ! 

;  SeSor !  i  que  manda  V.  ? 
Quiero  la  comida. 
%  En  donde  trabajan  hoy  los  traba- 

j adores  ? 
Trabajan  en  la  calle. 


Is  the  gentleman  to  whom  you  spoke 

at  the  concert  old  I 
No,  sir ;  but  the  lady  who  spoke  to 

you  at  the  theatre  is  (so). 
For  whom  do  you  look  i 
I  am  looking  for  the  young  lady 

that  you  look  for. 
Who  is  the  young  man  that  has 

spoken  with  you  f 
He  is  a  servant  in  the  hotel. 
The  boy  that  reads,  and  whom  you 

commanded  to  work,  is  my  brother. 
The  grammar  which  he  has,  and  in 

which  he  studies,  is  mine. 
The   gentleman  whose   house   you 

bought  is  my  friend. 
The    merchant    whose    wine    you 

bought  sells  very  cheap. 
The   book   in  which  we   read   (or 

which  we  read  in). 
The  lady  I  spoke  to  is  my  mother. 
Do  you  send  your  children  to  the 

Central  Park? 
Whom  do  you  command  to  work  f 
My  servants. 
John ! 

Sir !  what  do  you  wish! 
I  wish  my  dinner. 

Where  do  the  workmen  work  to- 
day? 
They  work  in  the  street. 


EXPLANATION. 

69.  Quien. — The  relative  pronoun  quien  refers  to  persons 
only,  and  is  always  preceded  by  the  preposition  d^  when  gov- 
erned by  a  verb ;  as, 


El  hombre  a  quien  V.  quiere. 


I  The  man  whom  you  love. 


70.  Who,  coming  immediately  after  its  antecedent,  is 
translated  by  que ;  when  it  stands  alone,  or  is  governed  by 


ZFSSON  XVIL 


69 


a  preposition,  or  is  used  interrogatively,  it  is  rendered  by 
qiiien\  as. 


El  muchacho  que  estudia. 

La  muchacha  con  quien  hablas. 

I  Quien  busca  el  jabon  ? 


The  boy  who  studies.     . 

The  girl  with  whom  you  speak. 

Who  seeks  the  soap  f 


71.  CuAL  and  que  relate  to  persons  and  things;  as. 

El  muchacho  que  lee,  y  al  cual  V. 

raando  trabajar,  es  mi  hermano. 
La  gramatica  qite  el  tiene,  y  en  la 

cual  estudia,  es  mia. 


The  boy  that  reads,  and  whom  you 
commanded  to  work,  is  my  brother. 

The  grammar  which  he  has,  and  in 
which  he  studies,  is  mine. 


Cual  may  be  regarded  as  slightly  more  delicate  and  indi- 
rect than  que^  and  is  more  specific,  answering  somewhat  to 
wliich^  while  ^^^ewDorresponds  more  nearly  to  what\  as, 

^  Cual  es  el  nomhre  de  V.  f  I  What  is  your  name  % 

^  Cual  de  sus  criados  trdbaja  mas  f  \  W^hichof  your  servants  works  morel 

72.  CuYO  also  refers  to  persons  and  things,  but  agrees 
with  the  word  by  which  it  is  immediately  followed ;  as. 

El  caballero  cuya  casa  V.  compro  es  The   gentleman   whose  house  you 

amigo  mio.  bought  is  my  friend. 

El  ccmerciante  cuyo  vino  V.  compro  The    merchant    whose    wine    you 

vende  muy  barato.  bought  sells  very  cheap. 

This  pronoun  partakes  of  the  nature  both  of  the  relatives 
and  the  possessives. 

73.  In  English  the  preposition  does  not  always  precede 
the  relative  pronoun ;  but  in  Spanish  it  is  indispensable  to 
place  the  preposition  before  the  relative ;  as. 

El  libro  en  que  leemos.  I  The  book  which  we  read  in  (or,  in 

I      which  we  read). 

74.  The  relative  pronoun  can  never  be  suppressed  in  Span- 
ish ;  so  that  we  cannot  say,  as  in  English,  the  lady  I  spoke  to, 
but,  in  full ;  as, 

La   senora   a  quien  hable,  es   mi  i  The  lady  to  whom  I  spoke  is  my 
madre.  I     mother. 


70  LESSOJ^  XVII. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  e  A  quien  mando  Y.  ayer  al  mercado  ?    Mande  a  mi  criado 
Juan. 

2.  i  Cual  de  sus  criados  trabaja  mas  ?    Juan  trabaja  mas  que 
todos. 

3.  I  Quien  es  el  hombre  a  quien  V.  busca  ?    EI  hombre  a 
quien  busco  es  trabajador. 

4.  I  Quien  es  el  caballero  con  quien  hablo  V.  ayer  en  el  con- 
cierto  ?    Es  un  discipulo  mio. 

5.  ^  A  quien  quiere  V.  hablar  ?    Quiero  hablar  a  la  senorita- 
que  toca  el  piano. 

6.  e  Como  pasaron  Vds.  el  tiempo  en  el  campo  ?    Lo  pasamos 
muy  bien  en  compania  de  nuestros  amigos. 

7.  I  Es  frances  el  comerciante  a  quien  compro  V.  el  caballo  ? 
Si,  senor,  es  el  frances  cuya  casa  compro  Y. 

8.  I  Manda  (en via)  Y.  sus  ninos  al  Parque  Central  (Central 
Park)  ?    Si,  senor,  los  mando  al  Parque  Central. 

9.  I  Con  quien  los  envia  Y.  ?     Con  sus  primos. 

10.  I  Que  libro  quiere  Y.  leer  ?    Quiero  leer  el  de  Manuel. 

11.  I  No  quiere  Y.  leer  el  que  yo  tengo  ?    No,  seiior,  quiero 
leer  el  de  Alejandro. 

12.  I  A  quien  manda  Y.  trabajar  ?    A  mis  criados. 

13.  i  Juan  !    j  Seiior  !     i  Que  manda  Y.  ?    Quiero  la  comida. 

14.  e  Canta  Y.  bien  ?    No,  seiior ;  pero  la  seiiorita  que  reside 
en  su  casa  de  Y.  canta  muy  bien. 

15.  I  Estudia  Y.  mucho  ?    No,  seiior,  pero  trabajo  mucho. 

16.  I  Ha  estudiado  Y.  hoy  su  leccion  ?    No,  senor,  la  estudie 
ayer ;  hoy  he  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

17.  I  Como  pronuncia  su  maestro  de  Y.  el  espaiiol  ?    Lo  pro- 
nuncia  bien ;  pero  pronuncia  muy  mal  el  ingles. 

18.  I  Toco  Y.  ayer  el  piano  en  casa  de  sus  amigos  ?    Si,  senor, 
tocamos  y  cantamos. 

19.  I  Que  cantaron  Yds.  ?    Cantamos  canciones  espanolas  y 
la  cancion  americana  llamada,  "The  Star-Spangled  Banner." 

20.  I  Caballeros !     i  Quieren  Yds.    tomar   chocolate  6  cafe  ? 
Queremos  beber  vino. 

21.  I  Cuantos  dias   paso  Y.   en  el  campo  ?    Pase  toda  una 
semana. 

22.  i  Por  que  no  pasa  Y.  un  mes  en  el  campo  con  nosotros  ? 
Porque  necesito  residir  en  la  ciudad. 


LESSOJSr  XYIL  71 

23.  I  Cual  de  sus  amigos  liabla  bien  espanol  ?  El  que  estudia 
mucho  habla  bien. 

24.  I  Cual  de  sus  hermanos  estudia  mas  ?    El  mas  pequeno. 

25.  I  De  quien  recibe  V.  cartas  ?    De  mi  padre  y  mis  hermanos. 
2^.  I  Es  de  V.  el  libro  en  el  cual  estudia  su  hermano  ?    No, 

seiior,  es  suyo. 

27.  h  Trabajo  V.  mucho  ayer  ?  No,  senor ;  pero  he  trabajado 
mucho  hoy. 

28.  I  Cuando  estudia  V.  sus  lecciones  ?  Las  estudio  los  mier- 
coles  y  los  sabados. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Whose  is  the  portrait  (which)  you  sent  me  yesterday  ?    It 
is  the  portrait  of  my  brother  who  lives  in  Germany. 

2.  Which  portrait  have  you  sent  to  Charles  ?    I  have  sent 
no  portrait  to  Charles ;  but  I  have  sent  mine  to  the  musician. 

3.  With  whom  did  you  spend  last  week  ?    I  spent  last  week 
with  my  cousin  John. 

4.  In  which  city  of  France  does  the  pianist's  brother  live  ? 
He  lives  in  the  city  in  which  your  sister  Jane  resides. 

5.  To  whom  did  you  send  the  first  volume  of  your  work  ? 
I  sent  it  to  Louis. 

6.  Whom  do  you  order  to  work  ?    My  servant  John. 

7.  Who  is  the  lady  you  are  looking  for  ?    She  is  the  mother 
of  the  singer  {fern.)  whose  piano  Charles  bought  last  year. 

8.  With  whom  did  you  send  your  children  to  the  concert 
last  night  ?    I  sent  them  with  a  servant. 

9.  With  which  servant  did  you  send  them  ?    With  one  of 
mine  (my  own). 

10.  In  which  church  does  Miss  Garcia  sing  ?  She  sings  in 
Twenty-eighth  street  church. 

11.  How  did  you  (plural)  pass  the  time  in  Philadelphia? 
Very  well. 

12.  Did  you  study  many  lessons  ?  We  studied  very  little,  and 
neither  read  nor  wrote  our  exercises. 

13.  How  much  did  you  write  the  day  before  yesterday  ?  I 
studied  a  good  deal,  but  wrote  little. 

14.  Which  volumes  of  Robertson's  History  has  your  son  ? 
He  has  received  the  first,  second,  third,  and  fourth. 

15.  Did  you  buy  any  books  at  the  bookstore  in  Walker  street  ? 
Yes,  madam,  I  bought  the  History  of  Charles  V.  and  some  musio 
books. 


72  LESSON  XVI IL 

16.  Whom  have  you  paid  with  the  money  I  sent  you  ?  I 
have  paid  the  man  who  worked  in  my  house  yesterday. 

17.  Does  your  servant  work  much  ?  No,  sir ;  but  she  reads  a 
great  deal. 

18.  From  whom  do  you  receive  letters  every  day  ?  I  receive 
letters  from  Henry  on  Mondays,  Wednesdays,  and  Fridays,  and 
from  my  father  on  Tuesdays. 

19.  Who  has  the  boots  that  I  bought  in  Fourth  avenue  ? 
John  has  taken  them  to  his  cousin  who  lives  in  Philadelphia. 

20.  Has  your  servant  bought  any  good  meat  in  the  market  ? 
He  has  not  bought  any  to-day. 

.  21.  How  many  songs  have  you  received  from  Spain  ?    I  have 
received  several  from  Spain  and  two  from  England. 

22.  Have  you  suug  any  of  them  ?  None ;  but  my  sister  sang 
t)ne  or  two  last  night  at  the  concert. 

23.  Are  they  very  good  ?  One  of  them  is  very  good,  and  my 
cousin  {fern.)  sings  it  very  well. 

24.  How  many  pencils  does  the  hatter  wish  ?  He  wishes 
twelve  pencils  and  three  penknives. 

25.  Does  Louisa  play  much  on  the  piano  ?  No,  sir ;  she  is  very 
lazy,  and  will  neither  play  nor  study. 

26.  The  tailor  has  a  handsome  vest,  very  cheap ;  will  you  buy 
it  ?    I  do  not  wish  to  buy  a  vest ;  but  I  wish  pantaloons. 

27.  Has  he  any  pantaloons  ?  He  has  none ;  he  sold  them  all 
last  week. 


LESSON    XVIII. 
IRREGULAR  VERBS   OF  THE  THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


Ir.     (Infinitive.) 

To  go. 

PRESENT. 

Voy. 
Vas. 
Va. 

I  go  (or,  am  going) 
Thou  goest. 
He,  or  she,  goes. 

Vamos. 

Vais. 

Van. 

We  go. 
You  go. 
They  go, 

LUSSOJSr  XVIIL 


73 


PRETEEIT. 

Fui. 

I  went. 

Fuiste. 

Thou  wentest. 

Fue. 

He,  or  she,  went. 

Fuimos. 

We  went. 

Fuisteis. 

You  went. 

Fueron. 

They  went. 

PRESENT. 

Venir.    (Injanitive.) 

To  come. 

Vengo. 

I  come  (or,  am  coming) 

Vienes. 

Thou  comest. 

Yiene. 

He,  or  she,  comes. 

VeDimos. 

We  come. 

Venis. 

You  come. 

Vienen. 

They  come. 

PRETERIT. 

Vine. 

I  came. 

Viniste. 

Thou  camest. 

Vino. 

He,  or  she,  came. 

Vinimos. 

We  came. 

Vinisteis. 

You  came. 

Vinieron. 

They  came. 

DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

Singular, 

Masculine.       Feminine. 

Neuter. 

Este.           Esta. 

Esto. 

This. 

Ese.            Esa. 

Eso. 

That. 

Aquel.        Aquella. 

Aquello. 

That  (yonder). 

Plural. 

Estos.         Estas. 

No  neuter. 

These. 

Esos.          Esas. 

u 

Those. 

Aquellos.  Aquellas. 

u 

Those  (yonder). 

Ella 

It. 

Aqui,  aca. 

Here. 

Ahi.                        ) 
Alii,  alia,  aculla.  \ 

There. 

74 


LESSON  XVIII. 


I  Por  que  ? 

Porque. 

Lejos. 

Cerca. 

Otro.     Ambos. 

Ni  uno  ni  otro  (ind.  pro.). 


Why. 

Because. 

Far. 

Near. 

Another.    Both. 

Neither. 


Profesor.         ) 

Catedratico.*  f 

Diseipulo. 

Lado. 

Jardin. 

Estudiante. 


Professor. 

Pupil. 
Side. 
Garden. 
Student. 


Juana.  Jane. 

Discipula.       Pupil. 

Zapateria.       Shoemaker's  shop. 

,^     ^  \  Butter  (in  Spain). 

Manteca.      i  ^     j  r     k         •     ^ 
(  Lard  (in  America). 

Mantequilla.  Butter  (in  Amer.) 


COMPOSITION. 


|De  quien  es  este  libro  que  tengo 

aq^ii  f 
Ese  que  tiene  V.  ahi,  y  este  que  yo 

tengo  aqui^  son  del  profesor. 

4  Quien  es  aquel  caballero  que  reside 
alii  del  otro  lado  de  la  calle  I 

Aquel  caballero  es  mi  diseipulo. 

i  Adonde  va  V.  f 

Voy  alia,  al  otro  lado  del  parque. 

4  No  quiere  V.  venir  aca  de  este  lado  I 

No,  senor,  voy  alia  del  otro  lado. 

i  Quiere  V.  comprar  aquel  libro  I 

No,  senor,  quiero  comprar  ese  otro. 

^  Quiere  V.  ir  al'teatro  con  nosotros  ? 

Eso  quiero. 

4  Llevo  V.  aquello  a  la  sastreria  f 

Lo  lleve. 

J  Manda  V.  algo  mas  f 

No,  eso  es  todo. 

4  Envio  V.  el  chaleco  a  la  sastreria,  y 

las  botas  a  la  zapateria  f 
Envie  ambos. 


Whose  book  is  this  which  I  have 

here? 
That  one  which  you  have  there  and 

this  one  which  I  have  here  are 

the  professor's. 
Who  is  that  gentleman  who  resides 

there  on  the  other  side  of  the 

street  f 
That  gentleman  is  my  pupil. 
Where  do  you  go  f 
I  go  there  to  the  other  side  of  the  park. 
Will  you  not  come  here  to  this  side  f 
No,  sir,  I  go  there  to  the  other  side. 
Do  you  wish  to  buy  that  book  ? 
No,  sir,  I  wish  to  buy  that  other  one. 
Will  you  go  to  the  theatre  with  us  ? 
That  (is  what)  I  wish. 
Did  you  take  that  (thing)  to  the  tai- 
lor's? 
I  did  (or  I  took  it). 
Do  you  command  anything  more  (or 

have  you  any  more  commands)  ? 
No,  that  is  all. 
Did  you  send  the  vest  to  the  tailor's, 

and  the  boots  to  the  shoemaker's  ? 
I  sent  both. 


Much  used  in  Mexico. 


LESSON  XVIII. 


76 


^  Fueron  a  su  casa  de  V.  el  medico 

f ranees  y  el  profesor  aleman  ? 
Fue  aquel,  pero  no  f  ue  este. 

I  Habl6  V.  de  aquello  a  mi  madre  ? 
No,  senor,  pero  hable  de  ello  a  su 

padre  de  V. 
En  mi  casa  y  en  Za  de  su  hermano 

de  V. 
El  jardin  de  esta  casa  y  el  de  la  que 

V.  compro. 
Este  caballo  y  el  de  mi  amigo. 


Did  the  French  physician  and  the 

German  professor  go  to  your  house! 

The  former  came,  but  the  latter  did 

not  come. 
Did  you  speak  of  that  to  my  mother  ! 
No,  sir,  but  I  spoke  of  it  to  your 

father. 
In  my  house  and  in  your  brother's. 

The  garden  of  this  house  and  that 
of  the  one  you  bought. 

This  horse  and  my  friend's  (that  of 
my  friend). 

EXPLANATION. 

75.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  este^  this,  ese^  aquel,  that, 
are  thus  declined : 

Este,  ese,  aquel  {masc.  sing.).         1  Estos,  esos,  aquellos  (masc.  plural). 

Esta,  esa,  aquella  (fern.  sing.).       \  Estas,  esas,  aquellas  (fern,  plural). 

Esto,  eso,  aquello  (neuter). 

76.  Este  is  used  to  point  out  that  which  is  near  to  us,  and 
corresponds  to  the  meaning  of  the  adverb  here ;  ese  points  out 
that  which  is  at  some  distance,  and  corresponds  to  the  adverb 
there ;  and  aquel  denotes  remoteness,  and  corresponds  to  the 
adverb  yonder ;  as. 


Uste  libro  que  tengo  aqui. 
^se  que  tiene  V.  ahi. 
Aquel  que  llevo  V.  alia. 


This  book  which  I  have  here. 
That  one  which  you  have  there. 
That  one  which  you  took  there. 


77.  The  adverb  ahi,  which  is  not  so  commonly  used  as 
aqui  and  alii,  stands  intermediate  between  them  as  to  re- 
moteness ;  as,  aqui,  here ;  ahi,  there ;  alii,  yonder.  Ahi  is 
much  used  in  the  phrase,  /  Ahi  vaf  There  he  goes ! 

78.  When  the  pronouns  este,  ese  precede  the  adjective  o/fro, 
another,  they  may  be  written  together,  so  as  to  form  a  single 
word,  in  the  following  manner : 


Estotro.  ^ 

Estotra.  |  This  other. 

Esotro.  I  That  other. 

Esotra.  J 


Estotros. 
Estotras. 
Esotros. 
Esotras. 


I  These  others. 
Those  others. 


These  forms,  however,  are  now  rarely  used. 


76  LUSSON  XVIIL 

79.  The  demonstrative  pronouns,  in  their  quality  of  adjec- 
tives, are  used  also  as  neuter.  Bso,  that,  is  the  most  used  of 
the  three,  and  almost  as  much  as  the  personal  pronoun  Zo, 
and  in  the  same  manner  ;  as, 

Fso  se  hara.  I    That  will  be  done. 

/  Uso  es !  I    That  is  it ! 

80.  The  former  and  the  latter  is  translated  in  Spanish  by 
aquel  and  este ;  thus. 


La  aplicacion  y  la  pereza  hacen  al 
hombre  muy  diferente ;  aquella 
lo  eleva  y  esta  lo  rebaja. 


Industry  and  sloth  fulness  have  a 
very  different  effect  upon  man  ; 
the  former  elevates  him,  the  lat- 
ter lowers  him. 

81.  When  in  English  the  demonstrative  pronoun  that  is 
followed  by  the  preposition  o/,  or  either  of  the  relatives  who^ 
which^  expressed  or  understood,  referring  to  a  noun  already 
mentioned,  the  definite  article,  in  the  corresponding  number 
and  gender,  is  employed  in  Spanish  ;  as. 


En  mi  casa  y  en  la  de  su  herma- 

no  de  V. 
El  jardin  de  esta  casa  y  el  de  la 

que  V.  com  pro. 
Este  caballo  y  el  de  mi  amigo* 


In  my  house  and  in  your  brother's. 

The  garden  of  this  house  and  that 
of  the  one  (which)  you  bought. 

This  horse  and  my  friend's  {i.  e., 
that  of  my  friend). 

82.  English  personal  pronouns,  followed  by  a  relative  not 
agreeing  in  case,  are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the 
demonstrative;  as, 

Quiero  comprar  a  aquellos  que  I    I  want  to  buy  from  them  who  sell 
venden  barato.  |       cheap. 

83.  Aqui,  alli,  aca,  alla. — Although  the  adverbs  aquiy 
here,  alli^  there,  are  employed  as  synonyms  of  acd^  here,  and 
aMd^  there,  respectively,  we  must  observe  that  aqui  and  alli 
refer  to  a  place  more  circumscribed  or  determinate  than  acd^ 
alld,  and  that  they  suggest  the  idea  of  resting  in  a  place ; 
while  acd  and  alia  convey  the  idea  of  motion  to  or  from  a 
place ;  for  the  same  reason  we  may  say,  mas  acd^  mds  alldj 
nearer,  farther ;  and  we  may  not  say,  mds  aqui^  more  here, 
mds  alliy  more  there. 


LESSON  XVIIL 


77 


84.  Vei^ir  e  ir.— The  various  modes  and  tenses  of  ir  are 
used  as  auxiliaries,  just  as  in  English;  as,  Voy  d  hablar,  I 
am  going  to  speak.  In  many  cases  where  in  English  the 
verb  to  come  is  employed,  the  Spanish  verb  ir,  to  go,  must  be 
used ;  as.  Will  you  come  to  my  house  to-morrow  ?  when  both 
the  persons  are  elsewhere,  is  rendered  thus  :  ^  Va  Yd.  mafla- 
na  a  mi  casa?  When  the  speaker  alludes  to  motion  from 
some  other  place  to  the  place  where  he  is,  the  verb  venir  is 
used ;  but  in  the  case  of  motion  from  where  he  is  to  some 
other  place,  the  verb  is  ir, 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Viene  V.  del  campo  ?    No,  senor,  voy  alia. 

2.  i  De  donde  viene  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Viene  de  Espana. 
%  I  Adonde  va  V.  este  ano  ?    Este  ano  quiero  ir  a  Paris. 

4.  I  De  quien  es  ese  retrato  que  tiene  V.  ahi  ?  Este  que  tengo 
aqui  es  el  de  mi  padre,  y  aqu^l  que  tiene  su  amigo  de  V.  alii,  es 
de  mi  madre. 

5.  I  Es  discipulo  de  V.  el  caballero  que  reside  en  aquella  her- 
mosa  casa  ?  No,  senor ;  pero  su  prima,  que  reside  de  este  otro 
lado  de  la  calle,  es  mi  discipula. 

6.  I  Va  V.  a  su  casa  todos  los  dias  ?  No,  senor,  voy  alia  los 
lunes,  miercoles  y  viernes. 

7.  I  Cuantas  lecciones  toma  el  caballero  que  vino  ayer  a  su 
casa  de  V.  ?    Toma  dos  a  la  semana. 

8.  I  Quien  trabaja  mas,  el  profesor  6  el  discipulo  ?  El  uno  y 
el  otro  trabajan  mucho. 

9.  ^  Es  este  nino  su  hijo  de  V.  ?    Si,  senor,  es  mi  hijo  Manuel. 

10.  j  Manuel !  i  quieres  venir  aqui  a  mi  lado  ?    No,  senor,  no 
quiero  ir. 

11.  I  Por  que  ?    Porque  quiero  ir  con  mi  padre. 

12.  t  Cuantos  ninos  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  cinco,  tres  niiias  y  dos 
ninos. 

13.  ^  Quiere  V.  ir  con  nosotros  al  Parque  Central  ?    No,  senor, 
porque  tengo  que  ir  con  mis  niiios  al  campo. 

14.  I  Ha  de  ir  V.  (tiene  V.  que  ir)  hoy  ?    Si,  senor,  tengo  que 
ir  hoy. 

15.  I  No  quiere  V.  venir  aca  de  este  lado  ?    No,  senor,  voy  alia 
del  otro  lado. 

16.  I  Llevo  V.  aquello  a  la  sastreria  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  lleve. 


78  LESSON  XVI I  I. 

17.  I  Manda  V.  algo  mas  ?    No,  eso  es  todo. 

18.  I  Hablo  V.  de  aquello  a  mi  amigo  ?  No,  senor ;  pero  hable 
de  ello  a  su  hermano. 

19.  i  En  donde  trabajo  V.  aver  ?  Trabaje  en  la  casa  de  V.  y 
en  la  de  su  hermano. 

20.  i  Trabajo  V.  en  mi  jardin  6  en  el  de  mi  amigo  ?  Trabaje 
en  el  uno  y  en  el  otro. 

21.  I  Adonde  va  V.  a  trabajar  hoy  ?  Voy  a  trabajar  en  el  jar- 
din  de  esta  casa  y  en  el  de  la  que  V.  compro  el  ano  pasado. 

22.  I  Llevo  V.  mis  botas  a  la  zapateria,  y  compro  V.  el  pan  que 
necesitamos  ?    Lleve  las  botas  ;  pero  no  he  comprado  el  pan. 

23.  e  Que  llevas  ahi,  Alejandro  ?    Llevo  mis  libros. 

24.  I  Que  quiere  tu  hermano  ?  Quiere  pan  y  manteca  (or  man- 
tequilla). 

25.  i  Pago  V.  al  sastre  ?  Si,  senor,  ayer  pague  al  sastre,  y  hoy 
he  pagado  al  zapatero. 

2^.  i  De  quien  son  esos  caballos  ?  Este  es  el  de  mi  padre,  y 
aquel  es  el  de  mi  hermano. 

27.  i  Cual  es  el  de  V.  ?    Yo  no  tengo  ninguno. 

28.  e  Quiere  V.  tener  uno  ?    Quiero  tener  muchos. 

29.  ^  Escribio  V.  la  carta  y  la  leccion  ?  Escribi  aquella,  pero 
no  he  escrito  esta. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  go  to  church  every  day  ?  I  only  {solo)  go  on  Sun- 
days. 

2.  Where  is  your  servant  Jane  going  ?  She  is  going  to  the 
bakery  to  buy  bread. 

3.  Do  your  music  teacher  {maestro)  and  your  Spanish  pro- 
fessor come  to  your  house  every  day  ?  The  former  comes  every 
day,  but  the  latter  only  comes  on  Tuesdays  and  Saturdays. 

4.  Which  of  the  two  works  the  more  ?  Both  have  to  work 
much. 

5.  Which  of  the  two  horses  is  the  older,  this  one  here  or  that 
one  there  f    This  one  here  is  the  younger. 

6.  Have  you  that  letter  which  you  received  last  Monday  ?  I 
have  not  that  one  ;  but  I  have  here  the  one  *  I  received  the  day 
before  yesterday. 

7.  Who  wrote  these  two  histories,  that  of  France  and  that  of 
America  ?    Rollin  wrote  the  former,  and  Robertson  the  latter. 

*  La  que. 


LESSON  XIX. 


79 


8.  Does  the  piano  teacher  live  far  from  here  ?  The  piano 
teacher  does  not  live  far  from  here ;  but  the  French  professor 
lives  very  far. 

9.  Is  that  all  (lo  que)  your  brother  has  studied  ?  Yes,  sir, 
that  is  all. 

10.  Which  lesson  have  you  studied  ?  I  have  studied  the  one 
(la  que)  we  read  the  other  day. 

11.  Which  did  we  read,  the  fifteenth  or  the  sixteenth  ?  We 
read  both. 

12.  Which  one  do  you  wish  to  read  first  ?  I  have  to  read  the 
former. 

13.  Why  do  you  have  to  read  the  former  ?  Because  I  have 
not  studied  it  well. 

14.  Which  exercise  have  you  there  ?  I  have  mine  and  my 
brother's. 

15.  Is  not  your  brother  coming  to  take  his  lesson  to-day  ?  No, 
sir,  he  has  to  take  his  music  lesson  to-day. 

16.  John !    Sir  ! 

17.  Have  you  taken  my  coat  to  the  tailor's  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  took 
it  last  nig'ht. 

18.  Have  you  paid  that  man  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  paid  him  to-day. 

19.  How  much  did  you  pay  him  ?  I  paid  him  three  dollars 
and  seventy-five  cents. 

20.  Why  did  you  pay  him  three  dollars  and  seventy-five  cents  ? 
Because  he  worked  one  day  in  this  garden,  and  two  in  that  of  the 
Twenty-third  street  house. 

21.  How  many  pupils  have  you  ?  I  have  thirty  :  seventeen 
learn  Spanish  and  the  thirteen  others  French. 

22.  Do  they  study  well  ?  Some  of  them  study  very  well ;  but 
none  w^rites  his  exercises  well. 

23.  When  do  you  sing  and  play  on  the  piano  ?  I  study  my 
lessons  before  singing  and  playing. 

24.  Who  is  that  gentleman  that  came  from  Vienna  last  month  ? 
That  gentleman  is  the  one  to  whom  I  spoke  last  week  at  the 
concert. 


Hacer.    (Infinitive.) 
Haciendo  {present  participle). 
Hecho  {past  participle). 


LESSON   XIX. 

To  do,  or  to  make. 
Doing,  making. 
Done,  made. 


80 

LESSON  XIX. 

PRESENT. 

Hago. 

I  do,  or  make. 

Haces. 

Thou  doest,  or  makest 

Hace. 

He  does,  or  makes. 

Hacemos. 

We  do,  or  make. 

Haceis. 

You  do,  or  make. 

Hacen. 

They  do,  or  make. 

PRETERIT. 

Hice. 

I  did,  or  made. 

Hiciste. 

Thou  didst,  or  madest. 

Hizo. 

He  did,  or  made. 

Hicimos. 

We  did,  or  made. 

Hicisteis. 

You  did,  or  made. 

Hicieron. 

They  did,  or  made. 

Partir. 

. 

To  set  out,  to  depart,  to  divide. 

Marchar. 

To  go,  set  out,  set  off,  to  march 

Cambiar. 

PREPOS 

Change. 

ITIONS. 

Para. 

For,  or  in  order  to. 

Asi. 

So,  thus. 

Por.     • 

By,  for,  through. 

Entre. 

Between,  among. 

Hasta. 

Until,  even. 

Hacia. 

Toward. 

Sin.    Hasta  donde. 

Without.    How  far. 

Pedro. 

Peter. 

Helena.         Helen. 

Escritor. 

Writer. 

Escritora.     Writer  (female). 

Escribano. 

Notary. 

Tienda.          Store,  shop. 

Estado. 

State. 

Provincia.     Province. 

Medico 

^  Physician. 
(  Doctor. 

Manera.         Manner. 

^l.L  V/V4.X  Vf'X^* 

Escritura.      Writing,  convey- 

Cuarto. 

Poom. 

ance. 

Aragon. 

Aragon. 

Comida.        Dinner. 

Tio. 

Uncle. 

Pieza.             Room.* 

*  Much  used  in  the  Americas. 


LESSON  XIX. 


81 


COMPOSITION. 


i  Que  hizo  V.  ayer  en  su  cuarto  ? 

Estudie  mi  leccion. 

^  Que  ha  hecho  V.  hoy  ■? 

He  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

^Que  hace  el  zapatero  en  la  zapa- 
teria  ? 

Hace  zapatos  y  botas  para  V. 

^  Tiene  V.  papel  para  escribir  una 
carta  ? 

Si,  senora,  lo  tengo. 

^  Quiere  V.  escribir  una  carta  por  mi 
hermano  ? 

^  Para  quien  es  la  carta  ? 

Es  para  Manuel. 

Yo  parto  para  Madrid. 

S  Para  donde  parte  V.  ? 

Parto  para  los  Estados  Unidos. 

j,  Hablo  V.  a  su  padre  por  mi  her- 
mano? 

Hable  por  el  a  mi  padre  y  a  mi  tio. 
»- 

^  Habla  V.  bien  el  f  ranees  ? 

Lo  hablo  muy  bien,  y  hasta  paso  por 

frances. 
S  Por  cudnto  vendio  V.  el  caballo  ? 

Lo  vendi  por  doscientos  cincuenta 

pesos. 
^  Necesita  V.  enviar  por  algo  ? 
Necesito  enviar  joor  el  medico. 
S  Por  que  envia  V.  ? 
Envio  por  vino. 
^  Vive  V.  para  comer  ? 
No,  senor,  como  j!?ara  vivir. 
4  Marcho  ayer  mucho  el  regimiento 

Septimo  1 
Marcho  hasta  el  Parque  Central. 


What  did  you  do  yesterday  in  your 

room? 
I  studied  my  lesson. 
What  have  you  done  to-day  t 
I  have  written  my  exercises. 
What  does  the  shoemaker  do  in  the 

shoe-shop  ? 
He  makes  shoes  and  boots  for  you. 
Have  you  paper  to  write  a  letter  t 

Yes,  madam,  I  have. 

Are  you  willing  to  write  a  letter  for 

my  brother  ? 
For  whom  is  the  letter? 
It  is  for  Emanuel. 
I  set  out  for  Madrid. 
Where  do  you  go  ? 
I  set  out  for  the  United  States. 
Did  you  speak  to  your  father  for  my 

brother? 
I  spoke  for  him  to  my  father  and  to 

my  uncle. 
Do  you  speak  French  well  I 
I  speak  it  very  well,  and  I  even  pass 

for  a  Frenchman. 
For  how  much  did  you  sell  the 

horse  ? 
I  sold  it  for  two  hundred  and  fifty 

dollars. 
Do  you  want  to  send  for  anything! 
I  want  to  send  for  the  physician. 
What  do  you  send  for  ? 
I  send  for  wine. 
Do  you  live  to  eat  ? 
No,  sir,  I  eat  to  live. 
Did  the  Seventh  Regiment  march 

far  yesterday  ? 
They  marched  to  Central  Park. 


EXPLANATION. 
85.  Para  and  Por.— As  both  these  prepositions  very  fre- 
quently answer  to  the  English  for,  they  are  apt  to  be  con- 
8 


82 


LESSON  XIX. 


founded  by  foreigners.  Such  confusion  may,  however,  be 
avoided  by  bearing  in  mind  the  following  rules  : 

Para  expresses  aim,  object,  destination. 

Por  conveys  the  idea  of  want  or  requirement,  substitu- 
tion, favor,  duration  of  time,  direction,  and  frequently  takes 
the  place  of  the  English  word  through,  &c.     Examples  : 


WITH   PARA. 

Papel  para  escribir. 
Paper  for  writing. 
Este  libro  es  para  V. 
This  book  is  for  you. 
Parto  para  Nueva  York. 
I  start  for  New  York. 
Comer  para  vivir. 
To  eat  to  live. 

Trabajo  para  ganar  la  vida. 
I  work  in  order  to  earn  a  living. 

Para  el  domingo. 

For  Sunday. 

Este  caballo  es  para  su  padre  de  V. 

This  horse  is  for  your  father. 

Jjo  hare  para  tu  hermano. 

I  shall  do  it  for  thy  brother. 


WITH   POR. 

Escribo  por  mi  hermano. 

I  write  for  my  brother. 

Gamble  mi  sombrero  por  el  suyo. 

I  changed  my  hat  for  his. 

Pasa  por  docto. 

He  passes  for  a  man  of  learning. 

Vendera  la  casa  por  diez  mil  pesos. 

He  will  sell  the  house  for  ten  thou- 
sand dollars. 

Trabajo  por  ganar  la  vida. 

I  work  to  (endeavor  to)  earn  my  liv- 
ing. 

Hable  por  tu  amigo. 

I  spoke  for  (in  favor  of)  thy  friend. 

Envio  por  pan. 

I  send  for  bread. 

Lo  hare  por  tu  hermano. 

I  shall  do  it  for  thy  brother  (for  thy 
brother's  sake). 

86.  EiS'TRE. — The  general  meaning  of  this  preposition  is 
hetvjeen  and  among^  and  it  is  followed  by  the  nominative  case 
of  the  pronoun,  and  not  by  the  objective,  as  is  the  case  with 
between  and  among  in  English ;  as, 

Entre  los  dos.  Between  the  two. 

Entre  V.  y  yo.  Between  you  and  me. 

Entre  todos.  Among  all. 

87.  Hast  A  signifies  till^  until,  even,  to,  as  many  as,  as  far 
as ;  as, 

Hasta  el  domingo.  Till  (or  until)  Sunday. 

Pasaron  hasta  mil.  As  many  as  a  thousand  passed. 

Voy  hasta  el  Parque  Central.  I  go  as  far  as  Central  Park. 

Estudio  el    espanol    hasta  que  lo   He  studied  Spanish  till  he  learned  it. 
aprendio. 


LESSON  XIX.  83 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Escribio  Y.  la  carta  para  su  padre,  y  los  ejercicios  de  la 
leccion  de  espafiol  ?    Hice  aquello  ;  pero  no  he  hecho  esto. 

2.  i  Tiene  V.  papel  para  escribir  una  carta  ?    Si,  senor ;  pero 
tengo  que  escribir  antes  mis  ejercicios. 

3.  I  Hizo  el  sastre  mi  casaca  ?    La  hizo. 

4.  e  Que  ha  hecho  el  zapatero  ?    Ha  hecho  unas  botas  para 
V.  y  unos  zapatos  para  Manuel. 

5.  I  Para  donde  parte  V.  ?    Parto  para  los  Estados  Unidos. 

6.  ^  Quiere  V.  escribir  una  carta  por  mi  hermano  ?    Si,  seiior, 
I  para  quien  es  la  carta  ?    Es  para  Dn.  Manuel. 

7.  i  Hablo  V.  a  su  padre  por  mi  hermano  ?    Hable  por  el  a 
mi  padre  y  a  mi  amigo. 

8.  I  Habla  V.  bien  el  frances  ?    Lo  hablo  muy  bien,  y  hasta 
paso  por  frances. 

9.  ^  Por  cuanto  vendio  V.  la  casa  ?    La  vendi  por  ocho  mil 


10.  I  Por  que  envia  V.  ?    Envio  por  mis  libros. 

11.  I  Vive  V.  para  comer  ?    No,  senor,  como  para  vivir. 

12.  I  Marcho  V.  ayer  con  el  regimiento  Septimo  ?  Marche 
hasta  el  Parque  Central. 

13.  e  Es  Dn.  Pedro  escritor  ?  No,  senor,  Dn.  Pedro  es  escri- 
bano. 

14.  I  De  que  manera  hace  V.  eso  ?    Lo  hago  asi. 

15.  I  Que  hizo  V.  ayer  ?  Estudie  la  leccion  de  espanol,  y  hoy 
he  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

16.  I  Tiene  V.  que  trabajar  mas  que  yo  ?  Tengo  que  escribir 
mas  que  V. ;  pero  no  tengo  que  trabajar  mucho. 

17.  I  Hacia  donde  van  Vds.  ?    Vamos  hacia  la  iglesia. 

18.  I  En  donde  vive  V.  ?  Vivo  en  la  Cuarta  avenida,  niimero 
trescientos  treinta  y  ocho,  entre  las  calles  Veinte  y  cinco  y  Veinte 
y  seis. 

19.  l  Para  que  quiere  V.  mi  libro  ?    Para  leerlo. 

20.  I  Quien  pago  la  comida  ?    La  pagamos  entre  todos. 

21.  i  Marchan  bien  estos  hombres  ?    Marchan  muy  bien. 

22.  I  Por  donde  pasaron  Vds.  cuando  fueron  a  la  iglesia  ?  Pa- 
samos  por  la  calle  Veinte  y  tres. 

23.  h  Es  esa  seiiora  escritora  ?  Si,  seiior,  y  escribe  muy 
bien. 

24.  I  De  que  pais  es  V.  ?    Soy  de  Espaiia. 

25.  I  De  que  provincia  ?    De  Aragon. 


84  LESSON  XIX. 

26.  e  Pronuncian  bien  el  espanol  en  Aragon  ?    Lo  pronuncian 
muy  bien. 

27.  I  Hablan  bien  el  ingles  en  los  Estados  Unidos  ?    Lo  ha- 
blan  bien. 

28.  I  Quiere  Y.  ir  a  mi  casa  para  comer  con  nosotros  ?    No, 
senor,  porque  tengo  que  ir  a  comer  a  casa  de  mi  amigo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  far  did  the  Seventh  Regiment  march  yesterday  ? 
They  (it)  marched  to  Central  Park. 

2.  Did  your  sister  set  out  yesterday  for  Philadelphia  ?    No, 
madam,  she  did  not  set  out  yesterday. 

3.  When  does  she  start  ?    She  starts  to-day. 

4.  What  does  your  servant  look  for  ?    He  looks  for  my  cou- 
sin's (fern.)  letter. 

5.  What  do  you  do  to  learn  Spanish  ?    I  study  the  lessons  of 
my  Spanish  grammar  and  read  good  writers. 

6.  To  whom  did  you  speak  last  night  at  the  concert  ?    I  spoke 
to  the  physician  for  Peter. 

7.  Who  is  that  man  who  came  to  your  house  last  night  ?    He 
is  my  brother's  servant. 

8.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  well  ?    No,  sir ;  but  I  speak  Italian 
very  well,  and  I  even  pass  for  an  Italian  (italiano). 

9.  How  did  your  uncle  spend  the  day  yesterday  ?    Studying 
his  lessons  and  writing  to  Madrid. 

10.  Is  your  uncle  willing  to  write  a  letter  for  (in  favor  of) 
Charles  ?    He  is  willing  to  write  it. 

11.  Do  the  young  ladies  want  to  send  for  anything  ?    They 
want  to  send  for  the  physician. 

12.  Why  do  they  send  for  the  physician  ?    To  speak  for  their 
servant  (fern.). 

13.  Where  does  he  live  ?    In  Fifth  avenue,  between  Twenty- 
fourth  and  Twenty-fifth  streets. 

14.  Where  do  you  send  ?    I  send  to  the  shoemaker's. 

15.  What  do  you  send  there  for  ?    For  some  boots  and  shoes 
for  Emanuel. 

16.  How  do  you  write  your  exercises  without  ink  ?    I  write 
them  with  a  pencil. 

17.  How  did  Louis  write  his  exercise  the  other  day  ?    He  and 
his  sister  wrote  it  between  them. 


LFSSON  XX. 


86 


18.  Have  you  sold  your  old  hat  ?    I  changed  it  for  Peter's 
new  one. 

19.  Will  you  pass  me  that  paper  to  write  a  letter  for  my 
brother  ?    This  paper  is  not  for  letters. 

20.  What  is  it  for  ?    It  is  for  my  exercises. 

21.  Whose  letter  is  that  ?    This  letter  is  for  your  mother. 

22.  Where  did  the  singer  go  last  year  ?    He  went  to  Aragon, 
a  province  in  Spain. 

23.  What  have  you  sent  for  ?    I  have  sent  for  nothing. 

24.  Will  you  go  for  wine  ?    I  do  not  wish  wine,  but  bread 
and  meat. 

25.  Do  you  live  to  eat  ?    No,  sir,  I  eat  to  live. 

26.  Have  you  read  the  newspapers  to-day  ?    No,  sir ;  but  I 
marched  with  my  regiment. 

27.  Has  the  tailor  made  my  vest  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  made  it  last 
week. 

28.  Will  you  go  to  the  pianist's  for  my  piano  ?    No ;  I  have 
to  study  my  lessons. 

29.  Do  you  write  before  studying  ?    No ;  I  study  first  and 
write  afterward. 


LESSON  XX. 

Salir. 
Saliendo  (pres.  part) 
Salido  (past.  part). 

To  go  out,  to  leave. 

Going  out. 
Gone  out. 

PRESENT. 

Salgo. 
Sales. 
Sale. 

I  go  out. 
Thou  goest  out. 
He  goes  out. 

Salimos. 

Sails. 

Salen. 

We  go  out. 
You  go  out. 
They  go  out. 

PRETERIT. 

Sail. 

Saliste. 

Salio. 

I  went  out. 
Thou  wentest  out. 
He  went  out. 

86 


LESSON  XX. 


Salimos. 
Salisteis. 
Salieron. 


Mexico. 


Mexico. 


We  went  out. 
You  went  out. 
They  went  out. 


Tanto. 

So,  so  much,  as  much. 

Cuanto. 

How  much. 

Como. 

As,  how. 

Presto. 

Soon,  speedily. 

Pronto. 

Promptly,  quickly. 

Temprano. 

Early. 

Tarde. 

Late. 

Mejor. 

Better. 

Peor. 

Worse. 

Mayor. 

Greater,  larger,  older. 

Menor. 

Smaller,  younger. 

Mejor. 

Better. 

Peor. 

Worse. 

Prudente. 

Prudent. 

Imprudente. 

Imprudent. 

Pronto. 

Prompt,  quick,  ready. 

Presto. 

Ready,  prepared. 

Callado. 

Silent,  taciturn. 

Hablador. 

Talkative. 

Limpio. 

Cleanly,  clean. 

Vivo. 

Lively,  alive. 

Situado. 

Situated. 

Cansado. 

Tiresome,  tired. 

Fecha. 


Date. 


COMPOSITION. 


jEs  Alejandro  tan  prudente  como 
su  hermano  ? 

No,  senor,  Alejandro  es  muy  impru- 
dente. Es  tan  imprudente  como 
hablador. 

I  Son  los  comerciantes  mas  ricos  que 
los  medicos  ? 

Algunos  son  mds  ricos;  pero  otros 
lo  son  menos  que  los  medicos. 

I  Es  Xue  va  York  mayor  que  Madrid  ? 

Madrid  es  menor  que  Nueva  York. 


Is  Alexander  as  prudent  as  his 
brother  ? 

No,  sir,  Alexander  is  very  impru- 
dent. He  is  as  imprudent  as 
talkative. 

Are  merchants  richer  than  physi- 
cians ? 

Some  are  richer;  but  others  are  less 
rich  than  physicians. 

Is  New  York  larger  than  Madrid  I 

Madrid  is  smaller  than  New  York. 


LESSON  XX. 


87 


J  Que  caballo  es  mefor^  el  de  V.  6  el 

miof 
El  de  V.  es  mayor ;  pero  es  peor  que 

el  mio. 
^  Tiene  V.  mas  de  cincuenta  pesos  ? 
No  tengo  mas  que  veinte  y  tres, 
fil  tiene  tanto  dinero  como  V. 
Yo  estudio  tanto  como  V. ;  pero  no 

aprendo  tanto. 
El  habla  espanol  tan  bien  como  V. ; 

pero  no  lo  escribe  tan  bien. 
!6l  tiene  tanto  cuanto  quiere. 
Tengo  tantos  libros  y  tanto  papel 

como  el. 
Yo  escribo  mds  que  V. ;  pero  V.  lee 

mas  que  yo. 
fil  habla  menos  que  V. 


Which  horse  is  the  better,  yours  or 

mine  ¥ 
Yours  is  larger ;  but  it  is  worse  than 

mine. 
Have  you  more  than  fifty  dollars  t 
I  have  not  more  than  twenty-three. 
He  has  as  much  money  as  you. 
I  study  as  much  as  you ;  but  I  do 

not  learn  as  much. 
He  speaks  Spanish  as  well  as  you ; 

but  he  does  not  write  it  as  well. 
He  has  as  much  as  he  wishes. 
I  have  as  many  books  and  as  much 

paper  as  he. 
I  write  more  than  you ;  but  you  read 

more  than  I. 
He  speaks  less  than  you. 


EXPLANATION. 

DEGREES  OF   COMPARISON. 

88.  The  adverbs  tafito  and  cuanto  lose  the  last  syllable, 
to^  before  an  adjective  or  another  adverb. 

89.  The  comparative  of  equality  is  formed  by  placing  the 
adverb  tan^  so  or  as,  before,  and  como,  as,  after  the  adjec- 
tive; as, 

Alejandro  es  tan  prudente  como  su  1  Alexander  is  as  prudent  as  his  sis- 
hermana.  I     ter. 

90.  CuAN  may  be  employed,  if  the  comparative  is  followed 
by  an  adjective  instead  of  a  noun ;  as, 

Es  tan  hablador  cuan  imprudente.    |  He  is  as  talkative  as  imprudent. 

However,  como  is  more  frequently  used. 

91.  The  comparative  of  superiority  is  formed  by  placing 
the  word  mds,  more,  before  the  adjective,  and  que,  than,  after 
it;  as, 

tl  es  mds  rico  que  V.  I  He  is  richer  than  you. 

92.  The  comparative  of  inferiority  is  formed  by  placing 
the  word  menos,  less,  before,  and  que  after;  as, 

tl  es  menos  rico  que  V.  I  He  is  less  rich  than  you. 


88  LESSON  XX. 

93.  Mayor,  greater  or  larger;  me]N"OR,  smaller;  mejor, 
better,  and  peor,  worse,  are  already  in  the  comparative  de- 
gree, and  do  not  take  7nds  or  menos  before  them ;  as. 

This  house  is  larger  or  smaller  than 

that  one. 
This  horse  is  better  or  worse  than 
mio.  mine. 


Esta  casa  es  mayor  6  menor  que  esa. 
Este  caballo  es  mejor  6  peor  que  el 


94.  Than^  after  comparatives  coming  before  numeral  ad- 
jectives, is  generally  translated  by  de  in  the  affirmative,  and 
que  in  the  negative ;  as, 

Tengo  mas  de  cincuenta  libros.  1 1  have  more  than  fifty  books. 

No  tengo  mas  que  veinte  pesos.  1 1  have  not  more  than  twenty  dollars. 

96.  Comparison  may  also  take  place  in  the  case  of  nouns, 
verbs,  and  adverbs ;  but  its  form  is  so  similar  to  that  laid  down 
for  the  adjectives  that  the  student  will  not  require  any  other 
explanation  than  the  examples  given  in  the  Composition. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  t  Sale' V.  tanto  como  su  hermano  ?  No,  senor,  mi  hermano 
sale  mas  que  yo. 

2.  t  Cuando  salimos  nosotros  ?    Nosotros  salimos  muy  pronto. 

3.  I  Salio  su  hermano  temprano  de  casa  ?  No,  senor,  salio 
tarde. 

4.  I  Salieron  Yds.  pronto  del  teatro  ?  Si,  seSor,  salimos  muy 
pronto. 

5.  I  Sale  V.  presto  a  la  calle  ?    Si,  senor,  salgo  muy  presto. 

6.  i  Salieron  Vds.  temprano  de  la  iglesia  ?    Salimos  tarde. 

7.  I  Cual  de  estas  dos  gramaticas  es  mejor  ?  La  que  V.  tiene 
delante  es  mejor  que  la  otra. 

8.  i  Es  malo  este  caballo  ?    Es  peor  que  el  de  V. 

9.  I  Es  buena  la  pluma  de  su  hermano  de  V.  ?  Es  mejor  que 
la  mia  y  peor  que  la  de  V. 

10.  I  Cuanto  dinero  tiene  Y.  ?    Tengo  cuarenta  pesos. 

11.  I  Cuantos  libros  tiene  su  hermana  ?  Tiene  tantos  como 
su  prima. 

12.  i  Cuanto  tiempo  vivio  Y.  en  Paris  ?    Yivi  euatro  anos. 

13.  I  Es  su  hermano  mayor  6  menor  que  Y.  ?    Es  mayor. 

14.  e  Quien  de  su  familia  de  Y.  habla  mejor  el  ingles  ?  Mi 
hermano  menor  lo  habla  mejor  que  todos. 


LESSON  XX, 


89 


15.  I  Donde  lo  aprendio  ?    En  Londres. 

16.  e  Cuanto  tiempo  vivio  alia  ?    Seis  anos. 

17.  e  Cuando  vino  de  alia  ?    Vino  el  ano  pasado. 

18.  ^  Cual  de  Yds.  dos  estudia  mas  ?    El  estudia  menos  que 
yo ;  pero  aprende  mas. 

19.  e  Cual  de  sus  hermanos  de  V.  es  mas  prudente  ?    El  mayor 
es  muy  callado  y  prudente ;  pero  el  menor  es  vivo  e  imprudente. 

20.  t  Salieron  Yds.  del  concierto  antes  que  nosotros  ?    No, 
senor,  salimos  despues. 

21.  I  Cuando  salio  su  amigo  de  Vds.  de  Nueva  York  ?    Salio 
el  mes  pasado  para  Paris. 

22.  i  Cuando   sale  V.  para   Filadelfia  ?    No  salgo  hasta  la 
semana  que  viene. 

23.  I  Hacia  donde  vive  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Vive  haeia  la  plaza. 

24.  I  Por  donde  vino  V.  de  Paris  ?    Vine  por  Inglaterra. 

25.  ^  En  donde  vive  V.  ?    En  la  Quinta  avenida  entre  las 
calles  Treinta  y  Treinta  y  una. 

26.  I  Que  caballo  es  mejor,  el  de  V.  6  el  mio  ?    El  de  V.  es 
mayor ;  pero  no  tan  bueno  como  el  mio. 

27.  I  Tiene  V.  mas  de  cien  pesos  ?    Tengo  mas  de  ciento. 

28.  I  No  tiene  V.  mas  que  tres  pesos  ?    No,  senor,  no  tengo 
mas  que  dos. 

29.  t  Habla  V.  espanol  mejor  que  Luisa  ?    No,  senor,  lo  hablo 
peor ;  pero  lo  escribo  mejor  que  ella. 

30.  I  Salio  V.  ayer  temprano  ?    Sali  temprano ;  pero  hoy  he 
salido  muy  tarde. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  written  your  letter  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  written  it. 

2.  What  is  the  date  of  it  (what  date  has  it)  ?    The  first  of  this 
month. 

3.  Do  you  (plural)  go  out  much  ?    We  go  out  this  year  as 
much  as  last  year. 

4.  Which  is  the  better  grammar,  mine  or  yours  ?    Yours  is 
better  than  mine,  but  not  so  large. 

5.  Which  of  you  two  goes  out  earlier,  you  or  your  cousin  ? 
I  go  out  earlier  than  he. 

6.  Are  merchants  as  rich  as  singers  ?    Some  singers  are  richer 
than  merchants. 

7.  Is  not  this  horse  as  lively  as  that  one  ?    That  one  is  a  little 
more  lively  than  this  one. 


90  LESSON  XX 

8.  Is  Mexico  as  large  as  the  United  States  ?    No,  miss,  the 
latter  is  much  larger  than  the  former. 

9.  When  do  the  musicians  leave  for  Havana  ?    They  leave 
next  week  (the  week  that  is  coming). 

10.  When  did  you  take  your  music  lesson  ?  I  took  it  the  day 
before  yesterday,  early. 

11.  Did  your  brothers  take  theirs  as  early  as  you  ?  No,  sir, 
they  took  theirs  very  late. 

12.  Which  of  you  two  speaks  Italian  better  ?  He  speaks  it 
better  than  I ;  but  I  write  it  better  than  he. 

13.  Do  you  sing  much  every  day  ?  I  do  not  sing  as  much  as 
I  did  last  month. 

14.  Does  the  notary  write  as  well  as  the  physician  ?  The 
former  writes  better  than  the  latter. 

15.  Is  not  that  man  very  tiresome  ?  He  is  very  talkative  and 
very  tiresome. 

16.  Is  Lewis  as  prudent  as  his  uncle  ?  He  is  more  prudent 
than  he  ;  but  not  so  taciturn. 

17.  Are  you  less  tall  (alto)  than  Louisa  ?  No,  she  is  less  tall 
than  I. 

18.  Is  your  uncle,  the  merchant,  as  rich  as  your  father  ?  No, 
sir,  my  father  is  richer  than  he. 

19.  When  do  your  cousins  leave  for  Paris  ?  They  leave  very 
soon. 

20.  Is  your  servant  as  cleanly  as  ours  ?  Ours  is  more  cleanly 
than  yours,  but  not  so  talkative. 

21.  Have  you  any  writing  paper  ?  I  have  as  much  paper  and 
as  much  ink  as  I  wish. 

22.  Is  Henry  very  prudent  ?    He  is  as  imprudent  as  talkative. 

23.  Who  goes  to  the  bakery  quicker  than  John  ?  Nobody 
goes  as  quick  as  he. 

24.  Have  the  merchants  sent  as  much  silver  to  France  as  to 
Spain  ?    They  have  sent  more  to  France. 

25.  Did  the  shoemaker  make  the  shoes  as  quickly  as  the  tailor 
made  the  coat  ?  The  former  made  the  shoes  quicker,  because  he 
worked  more  than  the  latter. 

2Q.  Which  works  the  later,  the  tailor  or  the  baker  ?  The 
latter  does  not  work  so  late  as  the  former. 

27.  Are  your  father's  books  larger  than  ours?  Yours  are 
smaller  than  his. 

28.  Are  those  horses  bad  ?    They  are  worse  than  the  others. 


LESSON  XXL 


91 


29.  Will  you  go  with  your  friend  {fern.)  to  the  concert  ?    I 
shall  not  go. 

30.  Why  will  you  not  go  ?    Because  it  is  very  late,  and  I  have 
to  play  on  the  piano. 

31.  Where  did  your  mother  learn  Spanish  ?    She  learned  it 
here. 

32.  And  does  she  speak  it  well  ?    She  does  not  speak  it  as  well 
as  she  writes  it. 

33.  How  much  money  have  you  ?    I  have  not  more  than  seven 
dollars. 

34.  Has  your  friend  as  much  as  you  ?    He  has  more  than  I ; 
he  has  received  more  than  two  hundred  dollars  from  Spain. 


LESSOIS^    XXI. 


Saber. 
Sabiendo. 
Sabido. 

To  know. 
Knowing. 
Known. 

Se. 

Sabes. 

Sabe. 

I  know. 
Thou  knowest. 
He  knows. 

Sabemos. 

Sabeis. 

Saben. 

We  know. 
You  know. 
They  know. 

Supe. 

Supiste. 

Supo. 

I  knew. 
Thou  knewest. 
He  knew. 

Supimos. 
Supisteis. 
Supieron. 

We  knew. 
You  knew. 
They  knew. 

Amar. 
Viajar. 

To  love. 
To  travel. 

Trinidad  (fem.). 

1  Trinity. 

92 


LESSON  XXL 


Sabio,  sapientisimo. 

Habil,  habilisimo. 
Dificil,  dificilisimo. 
Facil,  facilisimo. 
Corto,  cortisimo. 
Alegre,  alegrisimo. 
Triste,  tristisimo. 
Feliz,  felicisimo. 
Largo,  larguisimo. 
Fuerte,  fortisimo. 
Nuevo,  novisimo. 
Fiel,  fidelisimo. 
Alto,  altisimo. 


Wise,  learned ;  very,  most  or  ex 

tremely  wise. 
Clever,  skilful ;  very  clever. 
Difficult :  very  or  most  difficult. 
Easy ;  very  or  most  easy. 
Short ;  very  or  most  short. 
Cheerful ;  very  or  most  cheerful. 
Sad ;  very  or  most  sad. 
Happy  ;  very  or  most  happy. 
Long  ;  very  or  most  long. 
Strong  ;  very  or  most  strong. 
New  ;  very  or  most  new. 
Faithful ;  very  or  most  faithful. 
Tall ;  very  or  most  tall. 


IRREGULAR   COMPARATIVES   AND   SUPERLATIVES. 


Bueno,  mejor,  optimo. 
Malo,  peor,  pesimo. 
Grande,  mayor,  maximo. 
Pequeiio,  menor,  minimo. 

Alto,  superior,  supremo. 
Bajo,  inferior,  infimo. 


Good,  better,  best. 
Bad,  worse,  worst. 
Great,  greater,  greatest. 
Small,  smaller,  smallest 

High,  \  ^i^^^i''  liighest. 

(  superior,  supreme. 

Low,    ^^^r":-      [lowest 
( inferior,  ) 


Combinado. 


Combined. 


COMPOSITION. 


Es  el  mas  sabio  de  mis  discipulos. 
Esta  senorita  es  la  mas  amable. 
La  mayor  parte  del  regimiento. 
La  mayor  parte^  6  los  mds,  de  los 

soldados. 
La  mejor  casa  de  la  calle. 
Manuel,  |  cuales  son  los  profesores 

que  saben  mas  en  tu  escuela  ? 
El  profesor  de  aritraetica  sabe  mu- 

cho,  el  de  frances  sabe  mas  ;  pero 

el  profesor  de  historia  es  el  que 

mas  sabe. 


He  is  the  wisest  of  my  pupils. 

This  young  lady  is  the  most  lovable. 

The  greater  part  of  the  regiment. 

The  greater  part,  or  the  most,  of  the 
soldiers. 

The  best  house  in  the  street. 

Emanuel,  which  are  the  professors 
in  your  school  who  know  the  most? 

The  professor  of  arithmetic  is 
learned,  the  French  professor  is 
more  learned ;  but  the  professor 
of  history  is  the  most  learned. 


Lussojsr  XXI. 


93 


4  Es  bueno  este  caballo  I 

Este  caballo  es  muy  bueno  ;  pero  el 

de  V.  es  mejor,  y  el  mio  es  el  me- 

jor  de  los  tres. 
^  Es  esta  leccion  muy  f  acil  ? 


i  Es  su  casa  de  V.  tan  alta  como  la 

mia? 
La  raia  es  mas  alta  que  la  de  V.,  y 

la  de  su  hermano  de  Y.  es  la  mas 

alta. 
Ese  frances  es  muy  caballero, 

i  Es  alegre  6  triste  su  amigo  de  Y.  ? 
Es  alegrisimo  ;  pero  es  muy  niSo. 

^  Es  muy  joren  f 
No,  seSor,  es  viejo. 


Is  this  horse  good  I 

This  horse  is  very  good ;  but  yours 

is  better,  and  mine  is  the  best  of 

the  three. 
Is  this  lesson  very  easy  f 
It  is  most,  or  very  easy. 
Is  your  house  as  high  as  mine! 

Mine  is  higher  than  yours,  and  your 
brother's  is  the  highest. 

That  Frenchman  is  very  gentle- 
manly. 

Is  your  friend  cheerful  or  sad  t 

He  is  most  cheerful ;  but  he  is  very 
childish. 

Is  he  very  young  ? 

No,  sir,  he  is  old. 


EXPLANATION. 


96.  English  superlatives  ending  in  esty  or  formed  by  most, 
are  rendered  by  placing  the  definite  article  before  the  Span- 
ish comparative ;  as, 


El  mas  sabio. 
La  mas  amable. 


The  wisest. 

The  most  lovable. 


97.  Most,  or  most  of,  when  followed  by  a  noun  (singular), 
is  translated  by  la  mayor  parte  ;  as, 

La  mayor  parte  del  regimiento.     |     Most  of  the  regiment. 

But  if  the  noun  is  in  the  plural,  most  may  also  be  translated 
by  mdsy  with  the  corresponding  article  ;  as. 

La  mayor  parte,  6  los  mas,  de  los  I      Most  of  the  soldiers, 
soldados.  I 

98.  The  preposition  in,  after  the  English  superlative,  is 
translated  by  de  in  Spanish  ;  as. 

La  mejor  casa  de  la  calle.  I     The  best  house  in  the  street 

99.  Those  superlatives  which  in  English  are  formed  with 
the  aid  of  very,  most,  &c.,  may  in  Spanish  be  formed  either 


94  LESSON  XXL 

with  the  use  of  muy  before  the  adjective,  or  by  adding  to  the 
latter  the  termination  isiyno  ;  as, 

Muy  habil,  or  habilmmo.  i     Very  clever. 

Muy  facil,  or  faciKsimo.  I     Very,  or  most  easy. 

The  termination  isimo  is,  however,  more  expressive  of  the 
absolute  superlative  degree  than  the  adverb  muy. 

100.  Observe  that  adjectives  ending  in  a  vowel  drop  that 
vowel  on  taking  the  termination  isimo  ;  as. 


Corto,  covlisimo. 
Alegre,  alegrmmo. 
Triste,  tristismo. 


Short,  very  short. 
Cheerful,  most  cheerful. 
Sad,  very  sad. 


101.  There  are  other  superlatives  ending  in  errimo  ;  as, 
Celebre,  celeherrimo.  |      Celebrated,  most  celebrated. 
Salubre,  salubcVrimo.                      I     Salubrious,  very  salubrious. 

These  forms,  however,  are  seldom  used. 

102.  Adjectives  ending  in  the  following  letters  change 
them  before  taking  the  termination  isimo : 

Co  becomes  qu  ;  as,  rico,  rigwisimo. 
Go       "        gu  ;  as,  largo,  lar^wisimo. 
Ble      "        bil ;  as,  amable,  amaJi'Zisimo. 
Z         "        c;  as,  feliz,  felicisimo. 

103.  Superlatives  in  isimo  irregularly  formed : 

BuenOf  good,  makes  bonisimo,  very  good. 
Euerte,  strong,  makes  fortisimo,  very  strong. 
Nuevo,  new,  makes  novisimo,  very  new. 
Sdbio.  wise,  makes  sapientisimo,  very  wise. 
SacrOj  sacred,  makes  sacratisimo,  very  sacred. 
Eiel,  faithful,  makes  fidelisimo,  very  faithful. 

104.  Irregular  comparatives  and  superlatives : 

Bueno,  mejor,  optimo. 

Malo,  peor,  pesimo. 

Grande,  mayor,  maximo. 

Pequeno,  menor,  minimo. 

Alto,  superior,  supremo. 

Bajo,  inferior,  infimo. 

Mucho,  mas,  lo  mas. 

Poco,  menos,  lo  menos. 


LUSSOJV  XXL  95 

All  these  adjectives  form  also  a  superlative  in  isimo,  ac^ 
cording  to  the  rules  already  given ;  ^s,  maUsi7no,  poquisimo, 
muchisimo. 

They  admit  also  a  comparative  formed  with  mas  or  menos, 
and  a  superlative  with  muy ;  as, 

Menos  malo. 
Los  mas  grandes. 


Muy  pequenos. 


Less  bad. 
The  largest. 
Very  small. 


105.  Substantives  used  adjectively  admit  the  degrees  of 
comparison;  as, 


Es  mas  caballero  que  tii, 
Es  muy  hombre. 

Este  hombre  es  muy  nino. 


He  is  more  gentlemanly  than  thou. 
He  is  very  much  of  a  man,  or  very 

manly. 
This  man  is  very  childish. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Supo  V.  su  leccion  antes  de  ayer  ?    La  supe  muy  bien, 
y  la  se  todos  los  dias. 

2.  I  Ama  V.  a  su  hermano  ?    Lo  amo. 

3.  i  Le  ama  a  V.  su  hermano  ?    No  lo  se. 

4.  ^  A  quien  ama  V.  ?    Amo  a  mis  papas. 

5.  I  Ha  viajado  V.  mucho  ?    He  viajado  mucho  en  Europa ; 
pero  he  viajado  muy  poco  en  America. 

6.  I  Sabe  V.  el  espanol  ?    Muy  poco,  senorita ;  pero  lo  aprendo. 

7.  Y  v.,  senorita,  e  lo  sabe  V.  ?    No,  senor,  no  lo  se,  ni  lo 
aprendo. 

8.  i  Por  que  no  estudia  V.  el  espanol  ?    Porque  aprendo  la. 
miisica,  y  no  tengo  tiempo  para  estudiarlo. 

9.  i  Es  muy  habil  su  profesor  de  miisica  de  V.  ?    Es  habili- 
simo. 

10.  i  Sabe  V.  cantar  ?    No,  senora,  pero  se  tocar  un  poco  el 
piano. 

11.  I  No  sabe  V.  tocar  la  guitarra  ?    No,  senora,  toco  el  violin. 

12.  i  Aprende  bien  ese  caballero  el  espanol  ?    Estudia  mucho 
y  lo  aprende  muy  bien. 

13.  I  Quien  aprende  mas  pronto  el  espanol,  las  senoras  6  los 
caballeros  ?    Las  sefioras  aprenden  mucho  mas  pronto. 

14.  i  Quien  es  el  mas  sabio  de  sus  discipulos  de  V.  ?    La  seno- 
rita N.,  es  la  mas  sabia  de  todos  mis  discipulos. 


96  LESSON  XXL 

15.  e  Cual  de  estos  niiios  es  el  mejor  ?  El  que  ama  a  sus  pa- 
dres,  y  estudia  mas  sus  leceiones,  es  el  mejor. 

16.  I  Marcho  todo  el  re^imiento  septimo  por  Broadway  hasta 
el  Parque  Central  ?    No,  seiior,  pero  la  mayor  parte  de  el. 

17.  I  Fueron  al  campo  los  soldados  ?  Los  mas  de  los  soldados 
fueron  alia. 

18.  I  Es  esta  la  mejor  casa  de  la  calle  ?  No,  senor,  esta  casa 
es  muy  buena ;  pero  la  de  Astor  es  mejor  y  la  de  Stewart  es  la 
mejor  de  la  ciudad. 

19.  I  Sabe  V.  quien  paso  por  aqui  anoche  ?  No,  seiior,  pero  se 
quien  paso  por  la  Quinta  avenida. 

20.  I  Es  bueno  este  caballo  ?  Este  caballo  es  muy  bueno ;  pero 
el  de  V.  es  mejor,  y  el  mio  es  el  mejor  de  los  tres. 

21.  I  Es  caballero  ese  frances  ?    Si,  senor,  es  muy  caballero. 

22.  i  Es  ese  hombre  alegre  6  triste  ?  Es  muy  alegre ;  pero  es 
muy  nino. 

23.  i  Fue  V.  al  concierto  la  semana  pasada  ?    Fui  antes  de  ayer. 

24.  I  Quiere  V.  tocar  el  piano  ?     Quiero,  pero  no  se. 

25.  I  Ha  venido  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Ha  venido. 
2^.  i  Cuando  vino  ?    Vino  antes  de  ayer. 

27.  I  Cuando  sale  V.  ?    Quiero  salir  la  semana  que  viene. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  know  French  ?    No,  sir,  but  my  brother  knows  it. 

2.  Is  that  physician  clever  ?    He  is  most  clever. 

3.  Which  is  the  most  skilful  physician  ?  Ours  is  the  most 
skilful  in  the  city. 

4.  Is  Miss  Louisa  very  amiable  ?    Yes,  she  is  very  amiable. 

5.  Alexander,  which  is  the  most  learned  teacher  in  your 
school  ?  The  English  teacher  is  learned,  the  teacher  of  arith- 
metic is  more  learned ;  but  the  Italian  teacher  is  the  most 
learned  of  all. 

6.  Is  your  schoolmistress  cheerful,  Louisa  ?  Yes,  mamma, 
she  is  most  cheerful  and  very  happy. 

7.  Did  you  know  your  lessons  well  yesterday  ?  Yes,  I  knew 
them  very  well,  better  than  to-day's,  for  I  have  not  had  time  to 
study  them. 

8.  Does  your  brother  know  his  every  day  ?  I  do  not  know ; 
but  he  works  very  little. 

9.  Is  he  taciturn  ?    No,  sir,  he  is  very  talkative. 


LESSON  XXL 


or 


10.  Which  is  the  largest  church  in  New  York?  Trinity 
Church  is  the  largest  and  the  handsomest  in  the  city. 

11.  Whose  is  that  handsome  house  there  ?    It  is  my  uncle's. 

12.  Is  it  not  the  finest  in  the  street  ?  No ;  Mr.  Emanuers  is 
the  finest  in  the  city. 

13.  Did  the  12th  Eegiment  go  out  to  march  yesterday  ?  Not 
all,  but  the  greater  part  went  out. 

14.  Did  not  all  the  soldiers  march  through  Fourteenth  street 
last  Thursday  ?  The  most  of  them  marched  through  Fourteenth 
street,  but  not  all. 

15.  Is  your  Spanish  lesson  for  to-day  difficult  ?  Yes,  it  is  the 
most  difficult  (that)  I  have  had  this  month. 

16.  Is  your  French  lesson  very  difficult,  Charles  ?  No,  sir ; 
my  French  lesson  for  to-day  is  the  easiest  one  in  the  grammar. 

17.  Which  is  the  best  Spanish  grammar  ?  The  Combined 
Spanish  Grammar  is  the  best  and  the  easiest. 

18.  Is  not  your  table  very  low  for  writing  ?  Yes,  it  is  very 
low ;  I  write  better  on  a  higher  one. 

19.  Will  you  take  this  small  pen  to  write  your  exercise  ?  No ; 
I  do  not  write  well  with  my  own,  which  is  very  small,  but  larger 
than  yours. 

20.  Have  you  travelled  much  in  Europe  ?  I  have  travelled 
very  much  in  America,  but  very  little  in  Europe. 

21.  Which  is  the  longest  street  in  New  York  ?  Broadway  is 
the  longest  in  the  United  States. 

22.  Do  you  love  your  parents  ?    Yes,  I  love  them  very  much. 

23.  Why  does  not  Margaret  love  her  cousin  ?  She  does  not 
love  him  because  he  is  very  taciturn. 

24.  Which  of  your  pupils  is  the  wisest  ?  Henry  and  Louisa 
are  the  wisest  of  all  my  pupils. 

25.  Who  reads  the  most  newspapers  in  your  house  ?  I  do  not 
know ;  but  papa  reads  a  great  many. 

2Q.  To  whom  have  you  paid  the  most  money  to-day  ?  I  have 
paid  most  to  the  tailor,  because  he  has  worked  most  for  me. 

27.  Does  not  your  washerwoman  work  very  much  ?  Yes,  she 
works  very  much,  but  earns  (ganar)  very  little  money. 

28.  Whose  horse  is  the  most  lively,  yours,  Charles',  or  mine  ? 
Charles'  is  lively,  mine  is  more  lively,  but  yours  is  the  liveliest 
of  the  three. 

29.  On  what  street  do  you  live  ?    I  live  on  Twenty-third  street. 

30.  Is  that  a  fine  street  ?  Yes,  it  is  one  of  the  finest  streets 
up-town  (of  the  upper  part  (parte  alto)  of  the  city). 

9 


98 


LESSON  XXIL 

lesso:n-  XXII. 

Estar, 

To  be  (in  a  certain  place, 

state  or  condition). 

Estoy. 

I  am. 

Estas. 

Thou  art. 

Esta. 

He  is. 

Estamos. 

We  are. 

Estais. 

You  are. 

Estan. 

They  are. 

Prestar. 

To  lend. 

PRESENT   PAETICIPLES. 

Hablando. 

Speaking". 

Estudiando. 

Studying. 

Comprando. 

Buying. 

Buscando. 

Looking  for. 

Necesitando. 

Needing,  wanting,  requiring. 

Aprendiendo. 

Learning. 

Vendiendo. 

Selling. 

Leyendo. 

Reading. 

Bebiendo. 

Drinking. 

Comiendo. 

Eating,  dining. 

Escribiendo. 

Writing. 

Eecibiendo. 

Receiving. 

Viviendo. 

Living. 

Eesidiendo. 

Residing. 

Teniendo. 

Having,  holding.. 

Siendo. 

Being. 

Queriendo. 

Wishing,  desiring,  loving. 

Llevando. 

Carrying,  taking. 

Enviando. 

Sending. 

Tomando. 

Taking. 

Pagando. 

Paying. 

Pronunciando. 

Pronouncing. 

Cantando. 

Singing,  chanting. 

Tocando. 

Touching,  playing. 

Haciendo. 

Doing,  making. 

Pasando. 

Passing. 

LUSSOJH  XXII. 


99 


Trabajando. 

Mandando. 

Yendo. 

Viniendo. 

Estando. 

Norte,  sur,  este,  oeste. 


Working. 

Sending,  commanding. 

Going. 

Coming. 

Being  (in  a  certain  state  Sec), 

North,  south,  east,  west. 


COMPOSITION. 


^Es  grande  su  casa  de  V.  ? 

Us  grande ;  pero  estd  en  mal  estado. 

^  En  que  calle  estd  la  casa  de  su  her- 

mano  de  V.  ? 
Ustd  en  la  Cuarta'ayenida. 
^  Es  Luisa  bonita  ? 
Es  muy  bonita. 
^  Estd  ella  contenta  ? 
No  estd  contenta,  porque  estd  enf er- 

ma. 
^  Es  enf ermiza  ? 
Lo  es  mucho. 
^  De  quien  es  esta  casa  ? 
Es  de  mi  hermano. 
Estd  muy  bien  situada. 
Esta  carta  es  para  Margarita. 
Nueva  York  estd  entre  el  rio  del 

Norte  y  el  del  Este. 
El  senor  Walker  es  pintor. 
La  mesa  es  de  madera. 
Estuve  en  casa  hasta  que  V.  llego. 
Mi  amigo  estd  para  partir. 
Estoy  sin  comer. 
^  Que  estd  V.  haciendo  ? 
Estoy  escribiendo. 
l  De  quien  es  V.  amado  ? 
Soy  amado  de  mis  ninos. 
Manuel  es  bueno. 
Manuel  estd  malo. 
4  Estd  Pedro  cansado  ? 
Estd  cansado  y  es  cansado. 
I,  Por  que  estd  tan  callado  Alejandro? 
Porque  es  callado. 


Is  your  house  large  ? 

It  is  large ;  but  it  is  in  bad  condition. 

On  what  street  is  your  brother's 

house  % 
It  is  on  (the)  Fourth  avenue. 
Is  Louisa  pretty  ? 
She  is  very  pretty. 
Is  she  contented  ? 
She  is  not  contented,  because  she  is 

sick. 
Is  she  sickly  ? 
She  is  very  much  so. 
Whose  house  is  this  ? 
It  is  my  brother's. 
It  is  very  well  situated. 
This  letter  is  for  Margaret. 
New  York  is  between  the  North  and 

East  rivers. 
Mr.  Walker  is  a  painter. 
The  table  is  of  wood. 
I  was  at  home  until  you  arrived. 
My  friend  is  about  to  set  out. 
Ihavenotdined(Iamwithouteating). 
What  are  you  doing? 
I  am  writing. 
By  whom  are  you  loved  f 
I  am  loved  by  my  children. 
Emanuel  is  good. 
Emanuel  is  ill. 
Is  Peter  tired  ? 

He  is  tired,  and  he  is  tiresome. 
Why  is  Alexander  so  silent  I 
Because  he  is  taciturn. 


100  LESSON  XXII. 

EXPLANATION. 

106.  See  and  Estar. — These  two  verbs  have  in  English 
but  one  equivalent — to  be  ;  but  their  respective  significations 
and  uses  are  so  materially  different  as  to  constitute  one  of 
the  chief  diflSculties  of  the  Spanish  language.  By  careful 
observation,  however,  of  the  following  simple  rule  the  learn- 
er will,  we  are  assured,  be  enabled  to  overcome  that  difficulty, 
and  know  exactly  when  to  use  the  one  and  when  the  other  of 
these  two  verbs. 

107.  Whenever  we  wish  to  express  what  persons  or  things 
are^  and  their  mode  of  being,  in  their  essence,  see  is  the  verb 
to  be  employed  ;  but  if  we  desire  to  express  the  state,  condi- 
tion, or  location  of  persons  or  things,  and  the  mode  of  that 
state,  condition,  or  location  in  a  relative  manner,  then  estar 
must  be  used. 

The  following  examples  will  serve  to  render  the  applica- 
tion of  this  rule  more  clear : 


1st.  Esta  casa  es  grande. 

2d.  Esta  casa  esid  limpia. 

3d.  Esta  casa  eatd  en  Broadway. 

4th.  Luisa  es  bonita. 

5th.  Luisa  es  feliz. 

6th.  Luisa  esta  contenta. 

7th.  Luisa  esta  enferma. 

8th.  Luisa  es  enfermiza. 


This  house  is  large. 
This  house  is  clean. 
This  house  is  on  Broadway. 
Louisa  is  pretty. 
Louisa  is  happy. 
Louisa  is  content. 
Louisa  is  sick. 
Louisa  is  sickly. 


In  the  first  example  we  use  ser  to  express  what  kind  of  a 
house  the  one  referred  to  is — i.  e.  large ;  in  the  second,  estar, 
inasmuch  as  we  desire  to  express  hozo,  or  in  what  state  the 
house  is,  i,  e.  in  a  clean  state  ;  estar  is  also  employed  in  the 
third,  sixth  and  seventh  examples,  the  object  being  to  make 
known  respectively  where  the  house  is,  and  in  what  state  or 
condition  Louisa  is  or  finds  herself',  while  in  the  fourth,  fifth 
and  eighth  ser  again  comes  into  play,  seeing  we  wish  to  desig- 
nate Louisa's  mode  of  being  in  an  essential  mariner , 

From  the  above  general  rule  may  be  deduced  the  follow- 
ing observations : 

1st.  That  SER  must  be  used  whenever  we  wish  to  express 


LESSON  XXII 


101 


possession,  use,  purpose  or  destination  ;  to  point  out  the  na- 
tionality, profession  or  calling  of  persons ;  the  place  of  pro- 
duction of  things  or  the  materials  of  which  they  are  com- 
posed ;  the  simple  fact  of  existence,  and  the  occurrence  of 
events. 

2d.  That  estar  is  to  be  employed  in  speaking  of  situa- 
tion  or  position,  place,  state  or  condition,  in  making  the  pro- 
gressive form  in  ndo  (corresponding  to  the  English  mg)  of 
other  verbs ;  and,  lastly,  to  govern  verbs  in  the  infinitive 
mode  with  the  aid  of  a  preposition,  or  past  participles  with- 
out  such  aid.  ']  '  ^ ,  ^  ^ 

Examples  of  the  uses  of  ser  and  estar  i 


E'teTAR. 

Esta  casa  estd  bien  situada. 
This  house  is  well  situated. 
Nueva  York  estd  entre  el  rio  del 

Norte  y  el  del  Este. 
New  York  is  between  the  North  and 

East  rivers. 
Estuve  en  casa  hasta  que  Uego. 
I  was  at  home  until  he  arrived. 
fil  estd  escribiendo. 
He  is  writing. 
Mi  amigo  estd  para  partir. 
My  friend  is  about  to  set  out. 
Estoy  por  no  hacerlo. 
I  am  inclined  not  to  do  it. 
Estamos  sin  comer. 
We  have  not  dined  (or  eaten). 
Esta  carta  estd  fechada  en  Madrid. 
This  letter  is  dated  from  Madrid. 
Estoy  am  ado. 
I  am  loved. 

N.  B.— As  it  frequently  occurs  that,  in  perfect  accord- 
ance with  the  rules  of  grammar,  the  same  sentence  may  be 
construed  with  either  ser  or  estar,  though  conveying  en- 
tirely different  ideas,  it  is  essential  to  inquire  thoroughly  into 
the  respective  meaning  of  these  two  verbs,  in  order  to  avoid 
the  confusion  which  must  necessarily  arise  from  their  misap- 


La  casaca  es  de  mi  hermano. 

The  coat  is  my  brother's. 

La  carta  es  para  Margarita. 

The  letter  is  for  Margaret. 

El  senor  Walker  es  pintor. 

Mr.  Walker  is  a  painter. 

Este  vino  es  de  Espana. 

This  wine  is  from  Spain. 

La  mesa  es  de  madera. 

The  table  is  of  wood. 

Has  sido  prudente  en  hacerlo  asi. 

Thou  hast  been  prudent  in  so  doing. 

Hoy  es  la  celebracion. 

The  celebration  is  to-day. 

Son  las  diez. 

It  is  ten  o'clock. 

Fue  el  caso  como  yo  escribi  a  V. 

The  case  was  as  I  wrote  to  you. 


102 


LESSON  XXII. 


plication.     The  importance  of  this  remark  may  be  seen  from 
the  following  examples  : 


WITH   ESTAE. 

Manuel  estd  bueno. 

Emanuel  is  well. 

Juan  estd  malo. 

John  is  sick. 

Pedro  estd  cansado. 

Peter  is  tired. 

Juana  estd  viva. 

Jane  is  alive. 

Alejandro  estd  callado. 

Alexander  is  silent. 

Este  nino  estd  limpio. 

This  child  is  clean. 

Esta  naranja  estd  agria. 

This  (particular)  orange  is  sour. 


WITH   SER. 

Manuel  ea  bueno. 
Emanuel  is  good. 
Juan  es  malo. 
John  is  bad  (or  wicked). 
Pedro  es  cansado. 
Peter  is  tiresome. 
Juana  es  viva. 
Jane  is  lively.  -    " 
Alejaadn»  ea  C-ECllddo. 
Alexander  is  taciti^m. 
^Este  nino»e5  lirppjo.    c 
driiis  child  is  cleanly. 
Esta  naranja  es  agria. 
This  is  a  sour  orange  (i.  e.  of  the 
sour  species. 

What  is  said  in  the  course  of  the  present  lesson  relative 
to  SER  and  estar,  being  all  that  is  requisite  to  enable  the 
student  to  determine  which  of  the  two  is  to  be  used  in  any 
ordinary  case,  his  attention  will  not  be  again  called  to  them 
until  we  come  to  treat  of  their  idiomatic  uses. 

108.  The  PRESENT  PARTICIPLES  are  used  with  auxiliaries 
to  express  an  existing  state  or  condition,  or  a  continued  ac- 
tion. They  are  usually  regular ;  there  being  a  few  irregu- 
lar^ ones,  which  are  as  follows  :  diciendo^  from  decir^  to  say ; 
durmieiido^  from  dormir,  to  sleep  :  irguiendo^  from  erguir^  to 
hold  upright ;  oyendo^  from  oiV,  to  hear  ;  pidiendo^  from  pe- 
dir^  to  request ;  pudiendo^  from  poder^  to  be  able ;  riendo^ 
from  reir^  to  laugh  ;  trayendo^  from  traer,  to  bring  ;  vinien- 
do^  from  venir,  to  come  ;  yendo,  from  iV,  to  go ;  the  com- 
pounds of  these  and  of  verbs  on  pages  413,  414. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Que  esta  haciendo  el  muchacho  ?  Esta  estudiando  su 
leccion. 

2.  I  Ha  estudiado  V.  la  suya  ?    La  estudie  aver. 

3.  t  De  quien  es  V.  amado  ?    Soy  amado  de  mis  ninos. 


LJEJSSON  XXII. 


103 


4.  i  Esta  V.  escribiendo  sus  ejercicios  ?   No,  senor,  estoy  escri- 
biendo  una  carta. 

5.  eEsta  Margarita  cansada  ?    Margarita  no  esta  cansada; 
pero  es  cansada. 

6.  I  Por  que  esta  Pedro  tan  callado  ?    Porque  es  callado. 

7.  e  Para  quien  es  esta  carta  ?    Es  para  V. 

8.  I  En  donde  esta  situada  Nueva  York  ?    Esta  situada  entre 
el  rio  del  Norte  y  el  del  Este. 

9.  e  Es  Y.  espanol  ?    No,  senor,  soy  americano. 

10.  I  Es  ese  caballero  abogado  ?    No,  senor,  es  medico. 

11.  I  Como  esta  Alejandro  ?    Esta  bueno. 

12.  g  Es  Alejandro  buen  muchacbo  ?    Es  bueno. 

13.  I  Estuvo  Y.  ayer  en  mi  casa  ?  Estuve  alii  hasta  que  su 
padre  de  Y.  vino. 

14.  e  De  que  es  este  tintero  ?    Es  de  madera. 

15.  I  Es  grande  su  jardin  de  Y.  ?  Es  grandisimo ;  pero  esta 
en  mal  estado. 

16.  I  En  que  calle  esta  su  casa  de  Y.  ?  Esta  en  la  Cuarta 
avenida. 

17.  I  Es  hermosa  la  casa  de  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?    Es  hermosisima. 

18.  e  Es  Luisa  feliz  ?  Luisa  es  muy  feliz  ;  pero  no  esta  con- 
ten  ta,  porque  no  vino  Y.  a  verla  (to  see  her), 

19.  I  Es  Y.  enfermizo  ?    No,  seiior  ;  pero  estoy  enfermo. 

20.  g  De  quien  es  aquella  casa  tan  alta  ?  Es  de  un  amigo 
mio  ;  pero  quiere  venderla  porque  esta  mal  situada  en  esta  calle 
tan  fea. 

21.  h  Cuando  parte  Y.  ?  No  se,  quiero  partir  hoy,  porque 
tengo  mucho  que  hacer. 

22.  I  Partio  su  amigo  de  Y.  ayer  ?    No,  senor,  ha  partido  hoy. 

23.  I  Fue  Y.  a  la  iglesia  el  domingo  pasado  ?  Si,  senor,  voy  a 
la  iglesia  todos  los  domingos,  cuando  no  estoy  enfermo. 

24.  I  Yive  su  amigo  de  Y.  en  el  campo  ?  No,  senor,  reside  en 
la  ciudad. 

25.  I  Que  hace  en  la  ciudad  ?    Trabaja  de  abogado. 

2Q.  e  Que  hace  Y.  ?    Yo  vendo  y  compro  :  soy  comerciante. 

27.  g  Paso  Y.  por  Paris,  cuando  fue  a  Madrid  ?  Si,  seiior,  y 
por  otras  muchas  ciudades  de  Francia  y  Espana. 

28.  t  Yiaja  Y.  mucho  ?  He  viajado  mucho ;  pero  no  viajo 
mas, 

29.  i  Yiajo  Y.  en  Mexico  ?    Si,  seiior,  estuve  alii  el  ano  pasado. 
80.  I  Es  bonito  pais  ?    El  pais  es  hermosisimo. 


104  LESSON  XXlL 


EXERCISE. 


1.  Where  is  your  house  situated  ?    On  Eleventh  street. 

2.  Is  it  very  large  ?    No,  sir,  it  is  not  as  large  as  my  uncle's. 

3.  Which  of  the  three  languages*  English,  French  or  Span- 
ish, is  the  richest  ?  The  Spanish  is  much  richer  than  the  other 
two. 

4.  Do  you  speak  Spanish  ?  No,  madam ;  but  I  am  learn- 
ing it. 

5.  Do  you  and  your  sister  take  a  lesson  to-day  ?  No,  our 
teacher  is  not  coming  (does  not  come)  to-day ;  he  is  sick. 

6.  What  lesson  are  you  at  (in).  We  are  at  the  twenty- 
second,  one  of  the  most  difficult  in  the  grammar. 

7.  Is  Louis  very  taciturn  ?  he  speaks  very  little.  No,  sir,  he 
is  not  taciturn  ;  but  he  is  silent  to-day,  because  he  is  unwell. 

8.  Why  is  Henry  so  cheerful  to-day  ?  He  is  cheerful  be- 
cause he  has  received  letters  from  his  father  and  mother. 

9.  Is  he  a  good  boy  ?  He  is  a  very  good  boy ;  he  is  studying 
his  Italian  lesson. 

10.  How  is  your  friend  to-day  ?  He  is  much  better  than  yes- 
terday. 

11.  Where  is  that  wine  from  which  Charles  is  drinking  ?  It 
is  from  Spain. 

12.  Has  your  father  been  prudent  in  selling  his  horse  ?  He 
has  been  most  imprudent  in  selling  it. 

13.  Whom  do  you  love  ?  I  love  my  father  and  mother,  and 
I  am  loved  by  them. 

14.  Where  is  that  letter  from  ?    It  is  {comes)  from  Paris. 

15.  Have  you  {plural)  dined  to-day  ?  No,  sir,  we  have  not 
dined ;  our  servant  is  very  ill. 

16.  What  do  you  do  every  day  to  pass  the  time  ?  Sometimes 
I  sing  and  play  on  the  piano,  and  at  others  I  read  the  newspapers 
and  go  out  to  walk  {pasear). 

17.  What  does  Mr.  Emanuel  do  ?    He  is  a  merchant. 

18.  For  whom  is  that  letter  that  Louisa  is  writing  ?  It  is  for 
her  cousin  {fern.). 

19.  Is  Alexander  a  tiresome  boy  ?  No,  madam,  but  he  went 
to  walk  very  early,  and  he  is  tired. 

20.  Was  Louis  at  your  house  yesterday  ?  Yes,  sir,  he  was 
there  until  my  uncle  came. 

*  Lenguas. 


LESSON  XXIIL 


105 


21.  How  is  your  uncle  to-day  ?    He  is  very  well ;  lie  is  about 
to  set  out  for  Paris. 

22.  Is  Henry  tired  ?    No ;  but  he  is  very  tiresome. 

23.  Whose  book  is  that  ?    It  is  my  friend's  ;  but  he  wants  to 
sell  it,  because  it  is  very  badly  written. 

24.  How  much  does  he  want  for  it  ?    He  wants  five  dollars 
and  a  half.* 

25.  Is  it  in  French  ?    No,  sir,  it  is  in  Spanish. 

2^.  When  do  you  {plural)   leave  for  Europe  ?     We  leave 
very  soon. 

27.  Have  you  a  garden  at  your  house  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have  a  very 
fine  garden. 

28.  Is  it  very  large  ?    It  is  very  large. 

29.  What  is  your  friend  doing  in  Paris  ?    He  is  studjdng  law 
(for  a  lawyer). 

30.  And  you,  what  do  you  do  in  Philadelphia  ?    I  work  as  a 
notary. 

31.  From  whom  is  this  letter  ?     It  is  from  the  pianist,  and 
for  you. 


LESSON   XXIII. 

FUTURE. 

First  Conjugation. 

TERMINATIONS. 

Stng. 

PluraL 

1.  e. 

1.  emos. 

2.  as. 

2.  eis. 

3.  a. 

3.  an. 

Hablare. 

Hablaras. 

Hablara. 

I  shall  speak. 
Thou  wilt  speak. 
He  will  speak. 

Hablaremos. 

Hablareis. 

Hablaran. 

We  shall  speak. 
You  will  speak. 
They  will  speak. 

*  Medio. 


106 


LUSSOJ!^  XXIIL 


Second  Conjugation. 

Aprendere.  I  shall  learn. 

Aprenderas.  Thou  wilt  learn. 

Aprendera.  He  will  learn. 

Aprenderemos.  We  shall  learn. 

Aprondereis.  You  will  learn. 

Aprenderan.  They  will  learn. 

Third  Conjugation. 

Escrihire.  I  shall  write. 

Escribiras.  Thou  wilt  write. 

Escribira.  He  will  write. 

Escribiremos.  We  shall  write. 

Escribireis.  You  will  write. 

Escribiran.  They  will  write. 


Desear. 

To  desire. 

Practicar. 

To  practise. 

Bailar. 

To  dance. 

Principiar. 

To  commence,  to  begin. 

Acabar. 

To  finish. 

Medio. 

~~    Half. 

Proximo. 

Next. 

Entonces. 

Then. 

Anoche. 

Last  night. 

Antes  de  anoche. 

The  night  before  last. 

Mariana. 

To-morrow. 

Pasado  manana. 

The  day  after  to-morrow. 

La  manana. 

The  morning. 

Si                                        "" 

~~If. 

Gusto. . 

Deseo. 

Negocios. 

Oficio. 

Minuto. 

Segundo. 

Vals. 

Idioma. 

Lenguaje, 


Taste,  pleasure. 
Desire,  mind. 
Business,  occupa- 
tion. 
Office. 
Minute. 
Second. 
Waltz. 


\  Language. 


Noche. 

Gracias. 

Familia. 

Practica. 

Teoria. 

Hora. 

Polca. 

Lengua. 

Tarde. 


Night. 

Thanks. 

Family. 

Practice. 

Theory. 

Hour. 

Polka. 

Tongue,  language. 

Afternoon. 


LESSON  XXIIL 


107 


COMPOSITION. 


4  Estudiara  V.  maSana  su  leccion  de 

espanol ! 
Si,  seiior,  la  estudiare  maSana  por  la 

ma&ana. 
4  A  que  hora  principiara  V.  ? 
Principiare  a  las  tres  de  la  maSana. 

SeSorita,  4  quiere  V.  bailar  un  vals  ? 
Gracias,  caballero,  no  se  bailar  vals. 

I  Bailara  V.  una  polca  ? 
Si,  senor,  con  mucho  gusto. 
Hablo  mal  el  espanol,  porque  no  lo 

practico, 
V.  necesita  practicar  mucho  para 

aprender  una  lengua. 
Practicare   en  Espana,  porque  ire 

alii  muy  pronto. 
4  Que  dias  toma  V.  sus  lecciones  de 

piano  ? 
Las  tomo  los  lunes  y  los  viernes,  a 

las  once  de  la  maSana. 

4  A  que  hora  tomara  V.  las  lecciones 
de  f  ranees  ? 

Las  tomare  a  las  diez. 

I,  Que  hora  es  ? 

Es  la  una. 

Son  las  once  y  cuarto. 

Son  las  tres  menos  diez  minutos. 

MaSana  ire  al  campo,  y  pasado  ma- 
Sana tendre  el  gusto  de  pasar  el 
dia  con  V. 

Gracias ;  entonces  sere  muy  feliz. 

4  Bailaremos  en  su  casa  de  V.  ? 

Si,  seSor,  bailaremos,  cantaremos, 

tocaremos  y  practicaremos  el  es- 

paSol  toda  la  noche. 
Muy  bien,  muy  bien  ;  entonces  se- 

remos  mas  que  felices,  seremos  f e- 

licisimos. 


Will  you  study  your  Spanish  lesson 
to-morrow  ? 

Yes,  sir,  I  shall  study  it  to-morrow 
morning. 

At  what  hour  will  you  commence  t 

I  shall  commence  at  three  o'clock  in 
the  morning. 

Will  you  (dance  a)  waltz,  Miss  f 

Thank  you,  sir,  I  do  not  know  how 
to  waltz. 

Will  you  dance  a  polka  I 

Yes,  sir,  with  great  pleasure. 

I  speak  Spanish  badly,  because  I  do 
not  practise  it. 

You  need  to  practise  a  great  deal  in 
order  to  learn  a  language. 

I  shall  practise  in  Spain,  because  I 
shall  go  there  very  soon. 

On  what  days  do  you  take  your  pi- 
ano lessons  ? 

I  take  them  on  Mondays  and  Fri- 
days, at  eleven  o'clock  in  the 
morning. 

At  what  hour  will  you  take  your 
French  lessons  ! 

I  shall  take  them  at  ten  (o'clock). 

What  o'clock  is  it  ? 

It  is  one  (o'clock). 

It  is  a  quarter  past  eleven. 

It  is  ten  minutes  to  three. 

I  shall  go  to  the  country  to-morrow, 
and  shall  have  the  pleasure  of 
spending  the  day  after  to-morrow 
with  you. 

Thank  you;  then  I  shall  be  very 
happy. 

Shall  we  dance  at  your  house  1 

Yes,  sir,  we  shall  dance,  sing,  play 
and  practise,  Spanish  all  the  even- 
ing (the  whole  night). 

Very  well,  very  well ;  then  we  shall 
be  more  than  happy;  we  shall  be 
most  happy. 


108 


LESSON  XXIIL 


I  En  donde  paso  V.  ayer  la  noche  ? 

La  pase  con  mis  amigos  los  senores 

Martinez  y  su  familia. 
^Cuanto  tiempo  estuvo  Y.  en  su 

casa? 
Fui  a  las  siete  de  la  noche  y  sali  a 

los  ouce  V  media. 


Where  did  you  spend  the  evening 

yesterday  ? 
I  spent  it  with  my  friends,  Mr.  and 

Mrs.  Martinez  and  (their)  family. 
How  long  were  you  at  their  house  I 

I  went  at  seven  in  the  evening  and 
left  (went  out)  at  half -past  eleven 
o'clock. 


EXPLANATION. 

109.  The  Future  Tense.— This  tense  affirms  what  is  yet 
to  be  or  to  take  place  at  a  future  time  (mentioned  or  not) ;  as, 
Sere  comerciante.  I      I  sliall  he  a  merchant. 

Joan  estiidiard  manana.  I     John  will  study  to-morrow. 

It  is  also  used  as  a  softened  imperative,  as  will  be  seen 
when  that  mode  is  introduced. 

The  future  of  all  conjugations  is  formed  by  adding  the 
one  set  of  terminations  to  the  infinitives  ;  and  it  is  therefore 
very  regular.  There  are  a  few  irregular  features,  and  these 
add  the  regular  endings  to  the  stems  given  below  in  connec- 
tion with  the  first  person.     They  are  as  follows  : 


Future. 

Infinitive 

Future. 

Infinitive. 

Cabre, 

caber. 

to  contain. 

Querre, 

querer. 

to  wish. 

Dire, 

decir. 

to  say. 

Sabre, 

saber, 

to  know. 

Habre, 

haber, 

to  have. 

Saldre, 

salir. 

to  go  out. 

Hare, 

hacer, 

to  do. 

Tendre, 

tener. 

to  have. 

Podre, 

poder. 

to  be  able. 

Valdre, 

valer. 

to  be  worth. 

Pondre, 

poner, 

to  place,  to 

put. 

Vendre, 

venir, 

to  come. 

110.  The  definite  article  must  be  used  before  numer- 
als indicating  the  hour  of  the  day.  It  is  always  feminine, 
agreeing  with  hora,  hour.  The  word  o'clock  is  never  trans- 
lated into  Spanish  ;  as, 

A  las  tres  de  la  tarde.  |  Three  o'clock  in  the  afternoon. 

111.  Noche  (evening  or  night)  begins  at  sundown ;  so 
that  evening  and  night  are  both  noche  in  Spanish. 

112.  The  conjunction  si,  when  conditional,  does  not  re- 
quire a  subjunctive  in  Spanish  as  it  does  in  English,  unless 


LESSON  XXIU.  109 

the  latter  be  followed  by  should^Si^  will  be  seen  by  the  proper 
place ;  in  all  other  cases,  si  is  followed  by  the  present  indica- 
tive ;  as, 

Si  V.  tiene  papel,  4  escribird  f        |     If  you  have  paper,  will  you  write! 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  I  Cuando  principiara  V.  a  escribir  sus  ejercicios  'i    Prin- 
cipiare  manana. 

2.  I  A  que  hora  acabara  V.  ?    Acabare  a  las  diez  y  media. 

3.  Alejandro,  i  que  quieres  ser,  abogado  6  escritor  ?    No  ser6 
ni  abogado  ni  escritor,  sere  comerciante. 

4.  Senorita,  i  quiere  V.  bailar  una  polca  ?    Gracias,  caballero, 
no  bailare,  porque  estoy  muy  cansada. 

5.  I  Bailara  V.  la  proxima  ?    Si,  senor,  con  mucho  gusto. 

6.  I  Practicara  V.  el  piano  hoy  ?    No,  senor,  hoy  no  tengo 
tiempo ;  pero  practicare  manana  por  la  manana. 

7.  I  Que  hara  V.  manana  ?    Maiiana  por  la  manana  escribire 
mis  ejercicios  y  practicare  el  espaiiol  con  mi  hermano. 

8.  I  Que  dias  toma  V.  leccion  de  piano  ?    Los  lunes  y  viemes. 

9.  ^  A  que  hora  tomara  V.  su  leccion  manana  ?    A  las  once 
y  cuarto. 

10.  I  Ira  V.  a  mi  casa  en  el  campo  ?    Ire  pasado  manana  y 
tendre  el  gusto  de  pasar  el  dia  con  V. 

11.  I  Bailaremos  en  su  casa  de  V.  ?    Si,  seiior,  bailaremos,  can- 
taremos  y  practicaremos  el  espanol  toda  la  noche. 

12.  i  En  donde  pasara  V.  manana  la  noche  ?    La  pasare  con 
mis  amigos  los  senores  Martinez  y  su  f  amilia. 

13.  i  A  que  hora  iran  Vds.  alia  ?    Iremos  a  las  siete  de  la 
noche. 

14.  I  Hasta  que  hora  estaran  Yds.  ?    Hasta  la  una  y  media. 

15.  I  Estara  V.  maiiana  por  la  manana  en  su  cuarto  ?    Estare 
hasta  las  nueve  y  diez  minutos. 

16.  I  Es  triste  su  hermano  de  V.  ?    No,  senora,  no  es  triste ; 
pero  esta  triste. 

17.  t  Es  V.  f eliz  ?    Soy  felicisimo ;  pero  no  estoy  contento  esta 
tarde. 

18.  I  Es  V.  mayor  que  su  hermano  ?    No,  senora,  soy  el  menor 
de  toda  la  familia. 

19.  I  Quien  es  el  mayor  ?    Juan  es  el  mayor. 

20.  t  Sale  V.  de  casa  temprano  ?    Salgo  tempranisimo. 


110  LESSON  XXIIL 

21.  i  A  que  hora  ?    Salgo  a  las  ocho  y  media. 

22.  i  Salio  V.  ayer  tan  temprano  ?  No,  senor,  ayer  sali  mas 
tarde ;  pero  hoy  he  salido  temprano. 

23.  I  A  que  hora  saldra  V.  manana  ?  Manana  saldre  a  la  una 
de  la  tarde. 

24.  I  Para  quien  escribe  V.  una  carta  ?  Escribo  al  abogado, 
por  el  pobre  Juan,  que  lo  necesita  para  un  negocio. 

25.  i  Partira  V.  mafiana  para  la  Habana  ?  No,  seiior,  no  par- 
tire  hasta  la  semana  proxima. 

2^.  h  Es  este  caballo  muy  fuerte  ?  Es  fortisimo ;  pero  ese  que 
esta  ahi  es  mas  fuerte  y  el  que  esta  alii  al  otro  lado  es  el  mas 
fuerte. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  When  will  you  commence  to  study  music  ?    I  desire  to 
commence  next  month. 

2.  Do  you  know  how  *  to  dance  ?    I  do  not  dance  very  well ; 
but  I  am  going  to  take  lessons  soon. 

3.  Do  you  study  in  the  morning  or  in  the  afternoon  ?    I 
study  in  the  morning. 

4.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  take  your  lessons  ?    At  a  quarte^f 
to  three  in  the  afternoon  {tarde). 

5.  Does  your  teacher  come  so  late  ?    Yes,  he  has  a  great 
many  pupils  this  year. 

6.  Will  you  dance  a  waltz,  Miss  ?    Thank  you,  sir,  I  danced 
so  much  the  night  before  last  that  I  am  tired. 

7.  Then  it  will  be  better  to  talk.    I  shall  talk  with  much 
pleasure. 

8.  When  will   your  cousin  write   his  exercise  ?     He  will 
write  it  to-morrow  morning. 

9.  At  what  time  do  you  receive  your  newspapers  ?    I  receive 
them  every  day  at  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

10.  Mr.  Louis,  will  you  come  and  dine  at  my  house  ?  I  shall 
be  very  happy  to  go  with  you. 

11.  How  did  you  spend  the  evening  at  your  friend's  ?  Very 
well ;  his  wife  (lady)  is  most  amiable. 

12.  Has  not  she  travelled  in  Europe  ?  No,  sir ;  but  they  spoke 
last  night  of  travelling  very  soon. 

13.  Is  their  family  large  ?    No,  they  have  no  children. 

14.  Does  not  your  friend  speak  Spanish  very  well  ?  Yes,  sir, 
he  sometimes  even  passes  for  a  Spaniard. 

*  How  is  not  used  in  Spanish  in  such  cases. 


LESSON  XXIV. 


Ill 


15.  Did  you  practise  much  with  him  ?  No ;  his  cousin  speaks 
French  very  well,  and  so  we  spoke  that  language  all  the  evening. 

16.  Where  will  you  spend  this  evening  ?  I  do  not  know ;  but 
the  day  after  to-morrow  we  shall  go  to  your  house. 

17.  Thank  you  !  then  I  shall  be  more  than  happy  ;  I  shall  be 
most  happy. 

18.  How  many  seconds  make  a  minute  ?    Sixty. 

19.  How  many  minutes  make  an  hour  ?    Sixty  minutes  ? 

20.  And  how  many  hours  has  a  day  ?  A  day  has  twenty-four 
hours,  a  week  seven  days,  a  month  four  weeks,  and  a  year  twelve 
months. 

21.  Peter,  what  o'clock  is  it  ?    It  is  half -past  two. 

22.  Then  I  am  going  to  take  my  lesson :  will  you  come  ?  No, 
thank  you ;  I  wish  to  read  this  morning's  paper. 

23.  Until  what  hour  will  you  be  engaged  ?  I  shall  finish  at 
one. 

24.  Peter!    Sir! 

25.  Has  the  tailor  finished  my  vest  ?  Yes,  sir,  here  he  is  with 
the  vest  and  the  coat. 

26.  When  will  the  shoemaker  make  my  boots  ?  He.  will  make 
them  by  next  Tuesday. 

27.  Have  you  any  business  in  Philadelphia  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  am 
writing  the  history  of  Louis  XVI.,  for  a  gentleman  of  that  city. 

28.  Mr.  Henry,  are  you  happy  ?  Yes,  sir,  thank  you,  I  am 
very  happy;  but  I  am  not  very  contented  this  evening. 

29.  Why  are  you  not  contented  ?  Because  my  father  has  not 
written  to  me  this  week. 


LESSON    XXIV. 

FUTURE  PERFECT. 


Habre  escritb. 

Habras  escrito. 

Habra  escrito. 

Habremos  escrito. 

Habreis  escrito. 

Habran  escrito. 

Coser. 

Lavar. 

Barrer. 

Pasearse. 


I  shall  have 

Thou  wilt  have 

He  will  have 

We  shall  have 

You  will  have 

They  will  have 

To  sew. 

To  wash. 

To  sweep. 

To  walk  (take  a  walk) 


written. 


written. 


112 


LEssoir  xxir. 


Dedal. 

Thimble. 

Aguja. 

Needle. 

Hilo. 

Thread. 

Primavera. 

Spring. 

Verano. 

Summer. 

Accion. 

Action. 

Invierno. 

Winter. 

Nacion. 

Nation. 

Otono. 

Autumn  (Fall). 

Afectacion. 

Affectation. 

Enero. 

January. 

Navegacion. 

Navigation. 

Febrero. 

February. 

Agitacion. 

Agitation. 

Marzo. 

March. 

Aprobacion. 

Approbation. 

Abril. 

April. 

Aceptacion. 

Acceptation. 

Mayo. 

May. 

Atraccion. 

Attraction. 

Junio. 

June. 

Conversacion. 

Conversation. 

Julio. 

July. 

Direccion. 

Direction. 

Agosto. 

August 

Circunspeccion.  Circumspection 

Septiembre. 

September. 

Clasificacion. 

Classification. 

Octubre. 

October. 

Coleccion. 

Collection. 

Noviembre. 

November. 

Combinacion. 

Combination. 

Diciembre. 

December. 

Comparacion. 

Comparison. 

Composicion. 

Composition. 

Reputacion. 

Reputation. 

COMPO* 

3ITI0N. 

Habre  escrito  mi  leccion  antes  de  ir 

a  casa  del  profesor. 
Habre  acabado  a  las  diez. 
El  abogado  acaba  de  hablar. 
Yo  acabo  de  estudiar  mi  leccion. 
La  lavandera  habra  acabado  de  la- 

var  a  las  euatro. 
I A  cuantos  estamos  ? 
Estamos  a  seis. 
4  Que  dia  del  mes  es  hoy  ? 
Es  el  primero. 
4  Que  f echa  tiene  esa  carta  1 
El  primero  de  Enero  de  mil  ocho- 

cientos  sesenta  y  seis. 
j.  En  que  afio  f  ue  V.  a  Mexico  1 
Fui  en  Septiembre  de  mil  ochocien- 

tos  cincuenta  y  dos. 
I  Ira  Y.  este  verano  a  Europa  ? 
No,  senor,  ire  en  el  invierno. 
4  Paseara  V.  mucho  esta  primavera  ? 
No,  senor,  trabajare  mucho. 


I  shall  have  written  my  lessons  be^ 
fore  going  to  the  professor's. 

I  shall  have  finished  at  ten  o  clock. 

The  lawyer  has  just  spoken. 

I  have  just  studied  my  lesson. 

The  washerwoman  will  have  finished 
washing  at  four  o'clock 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  I 

It  is  the  sixth. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  f 

It  is  the  first. 

What  is  the  date  of  that  letter  f 

January  1st,  1866. 

In  what  year  did  you  go  to  Mexico! 
I  went  in  September,  1852. 

Will  you  go  to  Europe  this  summer  f 
No,  sir,  I  shall  go  in  the  winter. 
Will  you  walk  much  this  spring  f 
No,  sir,  I  shall  work  a  great  deal. 


LUSSON  XXIV.  11^ 

EXPLANATION. 
113.  The  FUTUKE  PERFECT  affirms  something  future  that 
will  have  taken  place  before  or  at  the  time  of  some  other 
future  action  or  event  or  state  expressed  in  the  sentence ; 
and  is  composed  of  the  future  of  the  verb  haber,  to  have,  and 
the  past  participle  of  another  verb ;  as, 

Habre  escrito  mi  ejercicio  antes  de 

ir  a  casa  del  profesor. 
Habre  acabado  a  las  diez. 


I  shall  have  written  my  exercise  be- 
fore going  to  the  professor's. 
I  shall  have  finished  at  ten  o'clock. 


114.  AcABAR  DE  is  employed  before  an  infinitive  in  the 
sense  of  to  have  just,  and  the  infinitive  is  translated  in  Eng-^ 
lish  as  a  past  participle ;  as, 

Acaba  de  hablar.  I         He  has  just  spoken. 

Acabo  de  estudiar.  I    •     I  have  just  studied. 

115.  In  order  to  facilitate  the  acquisition  of  words,  we 
shall  give  now  and  then  a  few  rules,  with  the  help  of  which 
the  learner  will  be  enabled  to  convert  several  thousand  Eng- 
lish words  into  Spanish;  and,  although  we  have  proposed 
not  to  introduce  many  new  words  or  elements  at  one  time, 
these  observations  will  enable  the  pupil  to  learn  a  greater 
number  of  words  with  little  or  no  difficulty  at  all,  from  the 
striking  resemblance  that  those  words  bear  to  the  English 
ones. 

The  greater  part  of  English  nouns  ending  in  tion  are  ren- 
dered into  Spanish  by  changing  the  letter  t  into  c ;  as,  appro- 
bation, aprobacion.  Those  ending  in  sion  do  not  undergo 
any  orthographical  change ;  as,  provision,  provision ;  those 
ending  in  ssion,  drop  one  s  to  form  the  Spanish  word ;  as, 
possession,  posesion.  Those  which  end  in  ction,  change  the 
t  to  c,  thus  leaving  double  c;  as  diction,  diccion.  It  is  to  be 
observed  that  the  only  consonants  that  can  be  doubled  in 
Spanish  are  c,  n  and  r.  All  nouns  of  the  above  termina- 
tion are  feminine,  and  their  last  syllable  must  have  a  written 
accent. 

116.  The  days  of  the  month  are  all  counted  in  Spanish  by 
the  cardinal  numbers,  preceded  by  the  article,  except  the  first 

10 


114 


LESSON  XXIV, 


What  day  of  the  month  is  it  f 


day ;  and  there  are  several  forms  of  asking  the  day  of  the 
month ;  e,  y., 

^  Que  dia  del  mes  tenemos  f     ^ 
^  Que  dia  es  hoy  ?  / 

I A  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ?  - 

There  is  no  preference  between  these ;  but  the  answer 
must  be  made  in  the  same  form  as  the  question ;  as, 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

It  is  the  sixth. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  f 

It  is  the  second. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  to-day  I 

It  is  the  first. 


^  Que  dia  tenemos  f 

Tenemos  el  seis. 

^  A  cuantos  estamos  ? 

Estamos  a  dos. 

^Que  dia  del  mes  es  hoy? 

Es  el  primero. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Habra  V.  acabado  de  escribir  su  leccion  a  las  diez  y  me- 
dia ?  No  se  ;  pero  la  habre  acabado  antes  de  ir  a  casa  del  pro- 
fesor. 

2.  i  Ha  hablado  aquel  abogado  ?  Si,  senor,  acaba  de  hablar 
este. 

3.  I  Ha  hablado  bien  ?    Muy  bien,  pero  con  afectacion. 

4.  I  Hara  V.  una  buena  composicion  para  la  leccion  proxima  ? 
Si,  senor,  si  tengo  tiempo,  la  hare. 

5.  I  Lava  bien  su  lavandera  de  V.  ?    Lava  muy  bien. 

6.  i  Adonde  en  via  V.  sus  ninos  ?  Los  envio  a  pasearse  con 
la  criada. 

7.  I  Adonde  ?    A  la  plaza  de  Madison. 

8.  I  Esta  cerca  de  su  casa  de  Y.  ?    Esta  muy  cerca. 

9.  I  Barrio  el  criado  ayer  mi  cuarto  ?  No,  senor,  no  lo  barrio 
ayer  pero  lo  ha  barrido  hoy. 

10.  i  Lo  barrera  manana  ?    Lo  habra  barrido  antes  de  las 
nueve. 

11.  I  Muchacho,   l  esta  el  sastre  en  la  sastreria  ?    No,  senor, 
acaba  de  salir. 

12.  I  A  que  hora  principiaron  Vds.  a  bailar  ?    Principiamos  a 
las  diez  de  la  noche. 

13.  I  Desea  V.  practicar  el  ingles  ?    Si,  senor,  si  tengo  tiempo 
principiare  pasado  manana. 

14.  i  Donde  esta  su  amigo  ?    Esta  viajando  por  Francia. 


LESSON  XXIV. 


115 


15.  I  Ama  su  hermana  de  V.  mucho  a  sus  hijos  ?    Si,  senor,  los 
ama  muchisimo. 

16.  e  Saldra  V.  muy  pronto  para  Europa  ?    Quiero  salir  ma- 
nana. 

17.  g  Sabe  V.  bailar  el  vals  ?    No,  senor,  pero  se  bailar  el  rigo- 
don  y  la  polca. 

18.  i  De  donde  vienen  Vds.  ?    Venimos  de  Francia,  y  vamos 
para  Filadelfia. 

19.  e  Quiere  V.  salir  a  pasear  ?    Muy  bien,  iremos  al  Parque 
Central. 

20.  e  Quien  lavo  estos  panuelos  ?    Estan  muy  mal  lavados. 
Su  lavandera  de  V.  los  lavo. 

21.  I  Donde  paso  Y.  el  verano  ?    Lo  pase  en  el  campo.    i  Y  el 
invierno  ?    En  la  ciudad. 

22.  I  Cuales  son  los  meses  mas  alegres  del  ano  ?    Los  de  la 
primavera. 

23.  i  Sabe  V.  la  direecion  de  la  casa  de  su  hermano  de  V.  ?    Si, 
senor,  calle  Catorce,  niimero  ciento  veinte  y  cinco. 

24.  e  A  que  hora  comen  Vds.  ?    Comemos  a  las  tres  de  la 
tarde. 

25.  I  (^ue  hora  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  las  dos  y  veinte. 

26.  t  A  que  hora  salieron  sus  hermanas.  para  el  parque  ?    Sa- 
lieron  a  las  seis  y  media  de  la  maiiana. 

27.  g  Y  a  que  hora  volvieron  ?    A  las  once  menos  cuarto. 

28.  i  Buenos  dias  ! — Buenos  dias.—g  Esta  V.   bueno  ?     Muy 
bueno,  gracias.    ^  Y  su  familia  de  Y.  ?    Muy  buena,  gracias. 

29.  e  Baila  Y.   la   polca  ?    No,  senor,  estoy  principiando  a 
aprenderla. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  When  will  your  uncle  have  finished  his  letter  ?    He  will 
have  finished  it  at  eight  o'clock. 

2.  When  will  you  have  your  letter  written  ?    I  shall  have  it 
written  before  going  to  the  professor's. 

3.  When  will  the  notary  make  the  conveyance  (writing)  ? 
He  has  just  made  it. 

4.  Will  your  servant  have  swept  my  room  before  the  lesson 
hour  to-morrow  ?    Yes,  sir,  she  will  have  swept  it  at  six  o'clock. 

5.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ?    It  is  the  thirteenth. 

6.  Does  your  washerwoman  come  to  wash  in  your  house  ? 
She  does  not,  but  she  washes  very  well. 


116  LESSON  XXIV. 

7.  How  many  lessons  do  those  gentlemen  take  every  month  ? 
They  take  four  every  week ;  that  makes  sixteen  every  month. 

8.  Which  are  the  best   months  for  walking  ?    The  three 
months  of  spring,  and  the  three  of  autumn. 

9.  Where  are  you  coming  (do  you  come)  from  ?    I  am  come 
from  walking. 

10.  Will  you  give  *  me  a  needle  and  thread  and  a  thimble  to 
sew  ?  Here  is  the  needle ;  I  am  going  to  look  for  the  thread  and 
thimble. 

11.  In  what  year  did  your  sister  Margaret  go  to  England  ? 
She  went  in  June,  1865. 

12.  What  is  the  date  of  that  letter  ?    Madrid,  7th  July,  1866. 

13.  Will  you  go  to  Europe  this  summer  ?  No,  madam,  I  shall 
not  go  before  next  spring. 

14.  Is  December  a  good  month  for  travelling  ?  No,  it  is  one 
of  the  worst  in  the  year. 

15.  How  did  you  {plural)  spend  the  day  yesterday  ?  We 
walked  in  Central  Park. 

16.  Did  you  walk  the  whole  day  ?  No,  we  walked  until  twelve 
o'clock,  and  then  we  read  and  played  on  the  piano. 

17.  Did  not  you  pass  the  afternoon  at  Mr.  Martinez's  ?  No, 
we  did  not  go  out  all  (in  all)  the  evening,  Margaret  was  a  little 
sick. 

18.  Do  you  know  which  are  the  longest  months  ?  Yes ;  they 
are  January,  March,  May,  July,  August,  October,  and  Decem- 
ber. 

19.  And  which  are  the  shortest  ?  A  pril,  June,  September,  and 
November. 

20.  But  what  do  you  do  with  February  ?  February  is  the 
shortest  of  all ;  it  has  but  twenty-eight  days. 

21.  Will  you  walk  much  this  spring  ?  No,  miss,  I  shall  work 
a  great  deal. 

22.  When  will  the  tailor  sew  my  vest  ?  He  will  sew  it  to- 
morrow evening. 

23.  Has  not  the  lawyer  spoken  ?    He  has  just  spoken. 

24.  Until  what  hour  did  he  speak  ?    Until  half -past  one. 

25.  Did  he  speak  in  Spanish  ?  No,  he  spoke  in  French  to-day ; 
but  to-morrow  he  will  speak  in  Spanish. 

2Q.  Do  you  not  wish  to  practise  Italian  ?  Yes,  sir,  and  I  shall 
practise  the  day  after  to-morrow,  if  I  have  time. 


LESSON  XXY, 


117 


27.  If  your  teacher  comes  to-day,  will  you  take  a  lesson  ?  I 
shall  take  it  if  he  comes. 

28.  Does  he  pronounce  well  ?  He  pronounces  very  well,  but 
with  some  aflPectation. 

29.  How  many  Spanish  words  do  you  know  that  end  in  cidn  ? 
I  know  very  many. 

30.  Which  are  they  ?  Conversation,  approbation,  agitation, 
complication,  classification,  intention,  desertion,  circumspection,, 
nation,  navigation,  and  very  many  others. 


Conocer, 

Conozco. 

Conoces. 

Conoce. 

Conocemos. 

Conoceis. 

Conocen. 

Conoci. 

Conociste. 

Conocio. 

Conocimos. 

Conocisteis. 

Conocieron. 

Conocere. 

Conoceras. 

Conocera. 

Conoceremos. 

Conocereis. 

Conoceran. 

He  conocido. 


LESSON    XXY. 

1  To  know,  to  be  acquainted  with. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

I  know. 
Thou  knowest. 
He  knows. 
We  know. 
You  know. 
They  know. 


PRETERIT. 


FUTURE. 


PERFECT. 


I  knew. 
Thou  knewest. 
He  knew. 
We  knew. 
You  knew. 
They  knew. 

I  shall  know. 
Thou  wilt  know. 
He  will  know. 
We  shall  know. 
You  will  know. 
They  will  know. 

I  have  known. 


118                                      LESSON  XXV. 

FUTURE 

PERFECT. 

Habre  conocido. 

I  shall  have  known. 

Gozar. 

To  enjoy. 

Prometer. 

To  promise. 

Una  vez. 

Once. 

Dos  veces,  &c. 

Twice. 

Alto. 

High,  loud. 

Bajo. 

Low. 

Siempre. 

Always. 

Nunca. 

Never. 

Jamas. 

Never. 

Ya. 

Already,  yet  (interrogatively) 

Ya  (with  a  negative). 

No  longer. 

Aiin.     Aun. 

Still,  yet.     Even. 

Todavia. 

Still,  yet,  even. 

A  menudo. 

Often. 

Demasiado. 

Too,  too  much. 

Bastante. 

Enough,  pretty. 

Frio.         Cold  (the). 

Vergiienza.    Shame. 

Calor.       Heat. 

Razon.            Eeason. 

Miedo.      Fear. 

Sed.                  Thirst. 

Sueno.      Sleep. 

Lastima.         Pity. 

Dolor.      Pain. 

Salud.             Health. 

Valor.      Courage,  worth,  value. 

Moda.              Fashion. 

Maestro.  Master,  teacher. 

Maestra.          Mistress  (school). 

Un  catarro.    A  cold. 

Hambre.         Hunger. 

COMPO. 

3ITI0N. 

^  Conoce  V.  a  ese  hombre  I 

No  lo  conozco ;  pero  se  quien  lo  co- 
noce. 

I  Por  que  no  aprende  V.  sus  leccio- 
nes? 

Conozco  que  he  hecho  mal  en  no 
aprendsrlas ;  pero  prometo  saber- 
las  para  manana. 

4  Sabe  V.  f ranees  ? 

No,  senor,  pero  voy  a  aprenderlo; 
I  conoce  V.  un  buen  maestro  ? 


Do  you  know  that  man! 

I  do  not  know  him  ;  but  I  know  who 

knows  him. 
Why  do  you  not  learn  your  lessons  I 

I  know  that  I  have  done  wrong  in 
not  learning  them ;  but  I  promise 
to  know  them  for  to-morrow. 

Do  you  know  French  ? 

No,  sir,  but  I  am  going  to  learn  it ; 
do  you  know  a  good  teacher  ? 


LMiSISON  XXV. 


119 


^Estudia  V.  aiin  (todavia)  el  espanol  ? 

Ya  no  lo  estudio. 

i,  Sabe  Y.  hablarlo  ya  ? 

Todavia  no. 

I  Ha  principiado  ya  su  hermano  de 

Y.  sus  lecciones  ? 
Ya   ha   principiado ;    pero   no   las 

aprendera  jamas,  porque  no  es- 

tudia  bastante. 
^Cuantas  veces  ha  estado  Y.  este 

mes  en  el  teatro  ? 
He  estado  una  vez ;  pero  el  mes  pa- 

sado  estuve  tres  veces. 
I  Tiene  Y.  miedo  de  su  maestro  ? 
No  tengo  miedo  de  el;  pero  tengo 

vergiienza  de  el. 
I  De  quien  tiene  Y.  lastima  ? 
Tengo  lastima  de  ese  pobre  hombre. 
^  Tiene  Y.  calor  6  frio  ? 
No  tengo  ni  calor  ni  frio ;  tengo 

hambre  y  sed. 
I  Tiene  razon  el  abogado  ? 
El  abogado  no  tiene  razon. 
I  Tiene  el  razon  alguna  vez  ? 
Tiene  razon  algunas  veces,  pero  no 

siempre. 
^  Hara  Y.  eso  otra  vez  ? 

No  lo  hare  jamas  (nunca). 

^  Amara  Y.  a  su  amigo  % 

Lo  amare  por  siempre  jamas. 

^  Ha  leido  Y.  jamas  ese  libro  ? 

Nunca  jamas  lo  hare. 

I  Tiene  su  madre  de  Y.  buena  salud? 

Si,  senor,  goza  de  muy  buena  salud. 

I  Tiene  Y.  hambre  6  sed  ? 

No  tengo  ni  hambre  ni  sed,  tengo 


Do  you  still  study  Spanish! 

I  study  it  no  longer. 

Do  you  know  how  to  speak  it  al- 
ready I 

Not  yet. 

Has  your  brother  commenced  his 
lessons  yet  ? 

He  has  (already)  commenced;  but 
he  will  never  learn  them,  for  he 
does  not  study  enough. 

How  many  times  have  you  been  in 
the  theatre  this  month  ? 

I  have  been  once ;  but  last  month  I 
was  there  three  times. 

Are  you  afraid  of  your  master  ? 

I  am  not  afraid  of  him ;  but  I  am 
ashamed  before  him. 

On  whom  do  you  take  pity? 

I  take  pity  on  that  poor  man. 

Are  you  warm  or  cold  ? 

I  am  neither  warm  nor  cold ;  I  am 
hungry  and  thirsty. 

Is  the  lawyer  right  ? 

The  lawyer  is  not  right. 

Is  he  right  sometimes  ? 

He  is  right  sometimes,  but  not  al- 
ways. 

Will  you  do  that  again  (another 
time)? 

I  will  never  do  it. 

Will  you  love  your  friend  ? 

I  shall  love  him  always  (for  ever). 

Have  you  ever  read  that  book  ? 

I  shall  never  do  it. 

Is  your  mother  in  good  health  (has 
your  mother  good  health)  ? 

Yes,  sir,  she  enjoys  very  good  health. 

Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  % 

I  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty,  I 
am  sleepy. 

EXPLANATION. 
117.  Saber,  to  know,  and  conocer,  to  be  acquainted  with. 
—It  must  be  observed,  in  order  not  to  confound  these  two 


120  LESSON  XXV. 

yerbs,  that  saher  is  employed  to  signify  the  act  of  knowing, 
heing  informed  of,  having  learned,  or  having  a  knowledge  of 
something ;  whereas  conocer  is  used  to  express  the  fact  of 
"being  acquainted  with,  perceiving,  or  being  able  to  distin- 
guish persons  or  things  ;  as, 

i  Sahe  V.  quien  conoce  a  este  horn- 1  Do  you  know  who  knows  that  man  I 
bre!  I 

118.  Auiq",  YA,  Tod  A  VIA. — The  adverb  aun  indicates  that 
the  subject  of  the  sentence  continues  in  the  same  state  as  be- 
fore ;  quite  the  reverse  with  the  adverb  ya^  which  always  sig- 
nifies discontinuance^  completion  of  a  former  state  (expressed 
or  understood) ;  e,  g,^ 

I  Escribe  Y.  aun  f  I  Do  you  write  yet  ? 

No  escribo  ya.  1 1  do  not  write  any  longer. 

Todavia^  yet,  still,  is  synonymous  with  aun ;  as, 
Esta  trabajando  todavia  (or  aun).     \  He  is  still  working. 

Once,  twice,  &c.,  are  rendered  in  Spanish  by  una  vez,  dos 
veces^  &c. 

Miedo^  valor.,  vergiienza.,  Idstima^  tiempo,  take  the  prepo- 
sition de  after  them ;  as, 

Tengo  miedo  de  salir.  1 1  am  afraid  to  go  out. 

Tengo  verguehza  de  ese  hombre.        1 1  am  ashamed  of  that  man. 

119.  When  in  English  the  verb  to  he  precedes  the  adjec- 
tives hungry.,  thirsty.,  afraid.,  ashamed.,  right.,  ivrong.,  ivarm., 
cold.,  sleepy.,  it  is  translated  by  the  Spanish  verb  tener  and  the 
corresponding  substantive ;  as. 

Are  you  afraid  I 
Are  you  thirsty  I 
Are  you  warm  ? 


I  Tiene  V.  miedo  ? 
I  Tiene  V.  sed  ? 
I,  Tiene  V.  calor  f 
i  Tiene  V.  friof 


Are  you  cold  f 


120.  Jamas  and  kui^ca  may  be  used  indiscriminately,  or 
one  for  the  other  ;  as, 

Jamas  (or  nunca)  lo  he  conocido.      1 1  have  never  been  acquainted  with 

him. 


LESSOJSr  XXV,  ' .  121 

Sometimes  they  are  used  together,  to  give  more  energy  to 
the  expression ;  as, 
Nunca  jamas  lo  hare.  |  Never,  no  never,  shall  I  do  so. 

But  jamas  has  the  peculiarity  of  being  used  after  the 
words  jt?or  siempre  3>Tid  para  siempre^  for  ever ;  where,  instead 
of  being  a  negative,  it  affirms,  meaning  eternally ;  as, 
Le  amare  por  siempre  Jamas.  1 1  will  love  him  forever. 

Sometimes  it  is  used  alone  interrogatively,  meaning  ever ; 
as, 
i  Ha  leido  V.  Jamas  ese  libro  ?  I  Have  you  ever  read  that  book  f 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Donde  conocio  V.  a  su  amigo  ?    Lo  conoci  en  Paris  el  in- 
vierno  pasado. 

2.  I  Sabe  V.  quien  conoce  a  ese  hombre  ?    Mi  padre  lo  conoce 
muy  bien. 

3.  e  Cuando  eonocere  a  su  hermano  de  V.  ?    En  el  otoiio  lo 
conocera  V. 

4.  I  Ha  conocido  V.  en  Londres  a  ese  caballero  ?    Si,  seiior, 
lo  conoci  alii  el  aiio  pasado. 

5.  I  Como  esta  su  hi  jo  de  V.  ?    Malo ;  no  goza  de  buena  salud. 

6.  I  Bailo  Y.  mucho  en  el  baile  de  anoche  ?    Si,  senor,  mu- 
chisimo. 

7.  I  Quien  es  ese  caballero  ?    Es  uri  escritor  de  gran  repu- 
tacion. 

8.  I  Tienen  mucha  aceptacion  sus  obras  ?   Tienen  muchisima. 

9.  e  Sabe  Y.  lo  que  ban  prometido  sus  amigas  de  Y.  ?    No  lo 
se. — Han  prometido  estudiar  sus  lecciones. 

10.  I  Yendra  Y.  mafiana  a  comer  con  nosotros  ?    No,  senor,  he 
prometido  comer  con  mis  amigos  los  alemanes. 

11.  I  Habla  ya  espanol  su  primo  de  Y.  ?    No  lo  habla  aiin,  y 
no  lo  hablara  jamas  (nunca),  porque  no  estudia  bastante. 

12.  e  Barrio  Y.  mi  cuarto  ?    No,  senor,  pero  prometo  barrerlo 
mafiana  temprano. 

13.  i  Cuantas  veces  prometio  Y.  buscar  mi  sombrero  ?    Jamas 
lo  prometi. 

14.  I  No  desea  Y.  ir  ya  a  su  pais  ?    Lo  deseo  muchisimo. 

15.  I  Sale  Y.  ya  a  pasear  todos  los  dias  ?    No  salgo  sino  algu- 
nas  veces. 


122  LESSON  XXV. 

16.  g  Llevo  Y.  ya  mi  carta  al  correo  ?    Todavia  no  la  he 
llevado. 

17.  e  No  ha  estado  V.  jamas  en  Paris  ?    No,  senor,  jamas  he 
estado. 

18.  e  No  ha  leido  V.  jamas  la  historia  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
Si,  la  he  leido  una  vez. 

19.  e  Habla  bien  el  abogado  ?    Habla  bien,  pero  muy  bajo. 

20.  I  Comprende  V.  ya  el  espanol  ?    Si  hablan  alto,  y  despacio, 
si,  seiior. 

21.  e  Tiene  V.  bastante  que  hacer  ?    Tengo  demasiado. 

22.  I  Cuantos  anos  tiene  V.  ?    Tengo  veinte  y  uno. 

23.  I  Cuando  vio  V.  por  ultima  vez  a  su  familia  ?    El  dia  seis 
de  Septiembre  del  ano  de  mil  ochocientos  eincuenta  y  cinco. 

24.  I  Cuando  conocio  V.  al  pianista  ?    Lo  conoci  ayer  por  pri- 
mera  vez. 

25.  I  Han  salido  sus  hermanas  para  el  campo  ?    Todavia  no, 
pero  saldran  muy  pronto. 

26.  I  Que  hace  su  padre  de  Yds.  ?    Esta  gozando  del  buen 
tiempo  en  el  campo. 

27.  I  Que  tiene  su  nino  de  Y.  ?    Tiene  frio  y  sueno. 

28.  I  Tienen  ellos  hambre  ?    No,  senor,  tienen  sed. 

29.  I  Tiene  Y.  valor  para  hacerlo  ?     Si,  senor,  pero  tengo  ver- 
giienza. 

30.  I  No  tiene  Y.  lastima  de  esa  mujer  ?    Si,  senor,  tengo  las- 
tima  de  ella,  porque  no  tiene  buen  a  salud. 

31.  I  Tiene  sueno  su  madre  de  Y.  ?    No,  senor,  pero  esta  muy 
cansada. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  know  that  man  ?  Yes,  sir,  that  gentleman  is  my 
uncle. 

2.  Are  you  still  writing  ?    No,  I  am  no  longer  writing. 

3.  Has  Charles  come  from  the  country  yet  ?  No,  he  has  not 
come  yet. 

4.  Have  you  (plural)  ever  read  the  History  of  Civilization 
by  Guizot  ?    No,  but  we  shall  read  it  next  spring. 

5.  Are  not  you  ashamed  of  not  having  read  the  History  of 
the  United  States  ?  I  am  not  ashamed,  because  I  am  too  young 
to  read  history. 

6.  When  will  you  commence  to  read  it  ?  I  shall  commence 
next  year. 

7.  Yery  well ;  it  is  a  useful  study  {estudio). 


LESSON  XXV.  123 

8.  Does  your  aunt  enjoy  good  health  ?    Yes,  sir,  thank  you, 
she  enjoys  very  good  health. 

9.  Are  you  cold,  madam  ?    No,  thank  you,  I  wish  to  go  out 
a  minute,  because  I  am  very  warm  in  this  room. 

10.  Is  it  ten  o'clock  yet  ?    No,  it  is  but  a  quarter  past  eight. 

11.  Who  is  that  gentleman  to  whom  your  cousin  spoke  last 
night  at  the  concert  ?    I  do  not  know  him. 

12.  And  that  gentleman  who  came  this  morning  to  your 
house,  who  is  he  ?  He  is  a  Spanish  writer  who  enjoys  a  great 
reputation. 

13.  Has  he  written  many  works  ?  He  has  already  written 
many  books,  and  he  is  going  to  write  a  history  of  Spain. 

14.  Do  you  know  Sir  Walter  Scott's  works  ?  Yes,  I  have  read 
them  all. 

15.  Are  not  they  much  esteemed  in  Europe  (have  they  not 
much  estimation)  ?    Yes,  very  much. 

16.  When  did  your  brother  become  acquainted  with  his  (el) 
Spanish  friend  ?    Last  year,  in  London. 

17.  Are  you  sleepy,  young  ladies  ?  Yes,  we  are  very  tired, 
thirsty  and  sleepy  (tener  sed  y  sueno). 

18.  Will  you  take  a  little  wine  ?  No,  thank  you,  we  never 
take  wine. 

19.  Does  your  mother  know  Emanuel's  address  (direction)? 
Yes,  here  it  is  in  this  letter. 

20.  Will  you  read  it  ?  With  much  pleasure.  Emanuel  Mar- 
tinez, Esq.,  113  Broadway.*    A  thousand  thanks. 

21.  Did  your  cousin's  (fern.)  friends  commence  their  lessons 
the  other  day  ?  Yes,  they  commenced,  and  are  much  pleased 
(content)  with  them. 

22.  Why  does  the  lawyer  speak  so  low  ?    I  do  not  know. 

23.  Does  not  he  speak  as  low  as  his  brother  loud  ?  He  speaks 
low  from  (by)  affectation. 

24.  Which  of  your  servants  (fern.)  sews  the  best  ?    None  of 

them  sews.  .  ,    i  o 

25.  How  many  conjugations    has    the    Spanish  language  ? 

Three  regular  (regular)  conjugations. 

26.  Have  you  ever  been  in  Philadelphia  ?  I  have  never  been 
there  yet ;  but  I  shall  go  next  year. ^ 

*  The  nearest  approach  which  Spanish  offers  to  the  title  Esquire  is 
Seftor  Don,  before  the  Christian  and  surname  ;  as,  Seftor  Don  Juan  Gm^ 
teras,  John  Guiteras,  Esq. 


124 


LESSON  XX  VL 


27.  Did  your  father  write  the  letter  for  Peter  yesterday  ?    No, 
but  he  promised  to  write  it  the  day  after  to-raorrow. 

28.  Has  your  shoemaker  enough  to  do  ?    Yes,  sir,  he  has  too 
much  to  do. 

29.  Will  you  always  love  your  brothers  and  sisters  ?    Yes,  I 
shall  love  them  forever. 

30.  Do  you  not  pity  that  man  ?    I  do  pity  him,  for  he  has 
nothing  to  do. 

31.  Have  you  money  enough  to  buy  a  house  ?    Yes,  sir,  I  have 
enough. 


LESSON    XXVI. 


Dar. 


Doy,  das,  da. 
Damos,  dais,  dan. 


Di,  diste,  dio. 
Dimos,  disteis,  dieron. 


I         To  give. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

I  give,  thou  givest,  he  gives. 
We  give,  you  give,  they  give. 

PRETERIT. 

I  gave,  thou  gavest,  he  gave. 
We  gave,  you  gave,  they  gave. 


Dare,  daras,  dara. 
Daremos,  dareis,  daran. 

He  dado,  has  dado,  &c. 


FUTURE. 

I  shall  give,  thou  wilt  give,  he 

will  give. 
We  shall  give,  you  will  give, 

they  will  give. 


PERFECT. 


I  have  given,  thou  hast  given, 
&c. 


Habre  dado,  &c. 

Ganar. 

Sing.  Nom.  Yo. 
1st  Obj.  Me. 
M  Obj.         A  mi. 


FUTURE   PERFECT. 

I     I  shall  have  given,  &;c. 


I     To  gain,  earn,  win. 
I. 
Me,  or  to  me. 


LESSOJSr  XXVI. 


125 


Plur.  Nom.     Nosotros. 

1st  Ohj.        Nos. 

2d  Ohj.         A  nosotros. 

Sing,  Nom.  Tii. 

1st  Ohj.  Te. 

2d  Ohj.  A  ti. 

Plur.  Nom.  Vosotros. 

1st  Ohj.  Os. 

2d  Ohj.  A  vosotros. 

Sing.  Nom.  El. 

1st  Ohj.  Le,  lo. 

2d  Ohj.  A  el. 

PZwr.  Nom.  Ellos. 

isf  06/.  Los,  les. 

2d  Ohj.  A  ellos. 

Sing.  Nom.  Ella. 

is/^  06/.  La,  le. 

2d  Ohj.  A  ella. 

Plur.  Nom.  Ellas. 

is^  Ohj.  Las,  les. 

:^c?  06/.  A  ellas. 
Sing,  and  Plur. 

1st  Ohj.  Se. 

2d  Ohj.  A  si. 
Neuter  Form. 

Nom.  Ello. 

isf  06/.  Lo. 

:^d:  Ohj.  A  ello. 


We. 

Us,  or  to  us. 

Thou. 

Thee,  or  to  thee. 

Ye,  you. 

Ye,  you,  or  to  you. 

He. 

Him,  or  to  him. 

They. 

Them,  to  them. 

She. 

Her,  to  her. 

They. 

Them,  to  them. 

'  Himself,  herself,  itself,  them- 
selves ;  or  to  himself,  to  her- 
^     self,  to  itself,  to  themselves. 

It. 
It. 
To  it. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Conoce  V.  a  aquellas  seiXoras  %    De- 

seo  conocerlas. 
Conociendolas  las  amara  V. 

i  Me  promete  V.  llevarme  a  su  casa? 

Doy  a  V.  mi  palabra. 
i  Que  le  dio  a  V.  mi  primo  I 
Quiso  darme  unas  flores ;  pero  yo  no 
quise  recibirlas. 


Do  you  know  those  ladies!   I  desire 

to  know  them. 
On  knowing   them  you  will   love 

them. 
Do  you  promise  me  to  take  me  to 

their  house  ? 
I  will  give  you  my  word. 
What  did  my  cousin  give  you  I 
He  wanted  to  give  me  some  flowers; 

but  I  would  not  receive  them. 


126 


LESSON  XXVI. 


I  Quieres  venir  conmigo  al  teatro  1 

No  ire  contigo,  porque  mi  padre 

quiere  llevarme  consigo. 
J  Son  estas  flores  para  ti  ? 
No  son  para  mi ;  son  para  V. 
Yo  te  necesito. 
Ella  nos  hablo  en  el  teatro. 
!6l  me  amara  con  el  tiempo. 
Nosotros  le  hablamos  en  el  concierto. 
Yo  le  escribi  una  carta. 
Ella  les  dio  un  libro. 


Wilt  thou  come  with  me  to  the  the- 
atre? 

I  will  not  go  with  thee,  because  my 
father  wants  to  take  ine  with  him. 

Are  these  flowers  for  thee  ? 

They  are  not  for  me,  they  are  for  you. 

I  want  thee. 

She  spoke  to  us  in  the  theatre. 

He  will  love  me  in  time. 

We  spoke  to  him  at  the  concert. 

I  wrote  him  a  letter. 

She  gave  them  a  book. 


EXPLANATION. 
121.  Subject  or  Nomii^atiye. — To  what  has  already  been 
said,  in  Lesson  X,  relative  to  pronouns  as  subjects  or  nomina- 
tive cases  to  verbs,  we  shall  here  simply  add,  that  they  may 
at  all  times  precede  their  verbs,  unless  the  latter  be  in  the 
imperative  mode,  or  be  used  interrogatively ;  examples  : 


Yo  estudio. 
Tu  escribes. 
Vengan  ellos, 
I  Lee  ella  f 


I  study. 
Thou  writest. 
Let  them  come. 
Does  she  read. 


122.  Peesonal  Pronouns. — In  Spanish  there  is  a  pecul- 
iarity to  be  observed  among  the  personal  pronouns :  that  is, 
that  they  have  two  objective  cases ;  one  of  which  can  never 
be  used  with  a  preposition,  and  the  other  never  without  one. 

123.  The  Objective  Case,  when  not  preceded  by  a  prepo- 
sition, is  affixed  to  infinitives,  imperatives,  and  present  parti- 
ciples; as. 


AmarZa. 
AmemosZo. 
AmandoZo5. 
HabiendoZa  amado. 
CompraZes  algo. 
HabiendoZos  hallado. 


To  love  her. 
Let  us  love  him. 
Loving  them. 
Having  loved  her. 
Buy  them  something. 
Having  found  them. 


124.  In  the  imperative  mode,  and  in  the  subjunctive  used 
hortatively,  the  verb  drops  the  final  letter  in  the  first  and 
second  persons  plural,  when  followed  by  nos  or  os ;  as, 
Amdmonos  instead  of  amdmosnos,    I         We  loved  each  other. 
Amdos  instead  of  amados.  Love  each  other. 


LESSON  XXVI.  127 

In  the  first  case,  this  is  for  the  sake  of  euphony ;  and  in 
the  second  the  d  is  dropped,  in  order  that  the  imperative  may 
not  be  confounded  with  the  past  participle.  Nevertheless, 
we  say  idos^  go,  and  not  ios ;  but  this  is  the  only  exception 
to  the  rule. 

125.  The  objective  case  may  sometimes  elegantly  follow 
the  verb,  even  when  the  verb  is  in  the  indicative  mode ;  as, 

Llevome  al  teatro.  I         He  took  me  to  the  theatre. 

126.  When  one  verb  governs  another  in  the  infinitive 
mode,  the  objective  case  referring  to  the  second  verb  may  be 
placed  either  before  the  governing  verb,  or  after  the  governed 
one;  as,  i||f? 

Quiero  llevarlo,  or  lo  quiero  Uevar.   |         I  wish  to  take  him. 

127.  Prepositions,  when  expressed,  always  govern  the 
seco7id  objective  case ;  as. 

Para  mi.  For  me. 

Sin  H.  Without  thee. 

Hacia  ellos.  Toward  them. 


128.  Ml,  Ti,  SI,  when  preceded  by  con,  take  go  after  them, 

and  are  joined  to  the  preposition ;  as. 

With  me. 

With  thee. 

With  him,  her,  them,  it. 


Conmigo. 

Contigo. 

Coiisigo. 


129.  Ektre  is  used  with  the  nominative  case  of  the  first 
person  singular,  in  this  expression, 

Untre  tii  y  yo.  I         Between  thee  and  me ; 

but  in  every  other  instance  it  governs  the  second  objective 
case  y  as, 

JEntre  si.  I         Between  themselves. 

Entre  nosotros.  I         Between  us. 

130.  The  second  objective  case  is  always  used  after  com- 
paratives;  as, 

Te  quiero  mas  que  ail  |         I  love  thee  better  than  him. 


128  LESSON  XXVI. 

131.  When  in  English  the  objective  case  of  the  first  or 
second  person  is  the  object  of  the  verb,  or  of  the  preposition 
to^  expressed  or  understood,  we  use  the  first  case ;  as, 

Yo  te  necesito.  I  want  thee. 

Ella  nos  hablo.  She  spoke  to  us. 

El  me  amara.  He  will  love  me. 

132.  In  Lesson  X.  we  explain  the  objective  case  of  the 
third  person  when  it  is  the  object  of  the  English  verb ;  but 
if  the  third  person  in  English  be  governed  by  the  preposition 
to^  expressed  or  understood,  we  render  it  by  le^  les,  for  both 
genders;  as, 


Nosotros  le  hablamos. 
Yo  le  escribi. 
Ella  les  dio. 


We  spoke  to  him. 
I  wrote  to  her. 
She  gave  them. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  e  Que  me  dara  V.  ?    Le  dare  a  V.  las  gracias. 

2.  e  Que  les  dio  V.  a  sus  ninos  ?    Les  di  veinte  centavos. 

3.  I  Me  daras  algo  por  mi  trabajo  ?    Algo  te  dare  si  lo  haces 
bien  y  si  no,  nada. 

4.  I  Que  cosa  os  dieron  en  casa  de  tu  primo  ?    Nos  dieron 
chocolate. 

5.  I  Que  le  has  prometido  a  tu  prima  ?    Bailar  hoy  con .  ella. 

6.  e  Como  seremos  mas  felices  ?    Amandonos  los  unos  a  los 
otros. 

7.  I  Cuando  vendra  el  con  nosotros  ?    Vendra  manana  tem- 
prano. 

8.  I  Cuando  saldra  V.  conmigo  a  paseo  ?     Tendre  ese  gusto 
pasado  maiiana. 

9.  I  Quien  ira  conmigo  al  teatro  esta  noche  ?    Yoire  contigo. 

10.  I  Donde  hablaste  a  mis  amigos  ?    Les  hable  en  el  Parque 
Central. 

11.  e  Les  leyo  V.  mi  carta  ?    No,  les  lei  la  de  su  hermana  de  V. 

12.  e  Me  envio  V.  los  libros  ?    No,  senor,  los  envie  a  su  her- 
mano  de  V. 

13.  I  Como  supo  Y.  de  sus  amigos  ?    Escribiendoles. 

14.  I  Como  conocio  V.  a  su  amiga  ?    Bailando  con  ella  en  casa 
de  su  hermano. 

15.  e  Que  le  prometio  V.  a  su  prima  ?    Le  prometi  llevarla  a 
la  opera. 


LUSSON  XXVI.  ;^29 

16.  ^  Nos  hablaron  ellos  alguna  vez  ?  Nos  hablaron  una  6 
dos  veces  en  el  paseo. 

17.  e  Por  que  no  les  hablo  V.  ?    Porque  no  los  conozco  bien. 

18.  6  Que  le  ban  escrito  a  V.  sus  amigos  ?  Que  vendran  a  ha- 
blarnos. 

19.  e  Quieres  salir  conmigo  a  paseo  ?    Si,  saldre  contigo. 

20.  I  Cuando  iremos  a  casa  de  tus  amigos  ?  Iremos  boy,  por- 
que ellos  tendran  mucho  gusto  en  conocerte. 

21.  I  Me  pasara  V.  el  pan  ?    Con  mucho  gusto.— Gracias. 

22.  I  Que  le  prometiste  a  tu  prima  ?  Le  prometi  ir  a  su  casa 
manana  y  llevarle  un  panuelo  de  seda. 

23.  i  Cuando  le  bablo  V.  ?  Le  hable  anocbe  en  casa  de  su 
madre. 

24.  I  Quiere  V.  venir  a  pasear  ?    Mejor  sera  estarnos  aqui. 

25.  ^  A  que  vienen  Yds.  ?    Veniraos  a  hablarle  a  V. 

26.  e  Cuando  iremos  al  campo  con  nuestros  amigos  ?  Iremos 
manana. 

27.  I  Como  les  gano  a  Vds.  la  lavandera  tanto  dinero  ?  Lavan- 
donos  los  vestidos  y  trabajando  mucbo. 

28.  I  Cuantas  veces  a  la  semana  babla  V.  con  sus  amigos  ? 
Nos  bablamos  todos  los  dias. 

29.  I  Vendra  boy  su  primo  de  V.  a  comer  con  nosotras  ?  Si, 
porque  quiere  conocerlas  a  Vds. 

30.  i  Le  dio  V.  los  buenos  dias  a  su  prima  ?  Le  di  los  buenos 
dias  ayer  en  la  plaza  y  le  bable  de  V. 

31.  Le  doy  a  Y.  las  gracias.  i  Tiene  buena  salud  abora  ?  Si, 
seiiora,  esta  muy  buena. 

32.  I  Le  dio  a  V.  los  periodicos  ?  No,  senora,  pero  prometio 
mandarlos  manana. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Wbat  was  *  that  you  gave  to  your  friend  last  night  at  the 
theatre  ?  I  gave  him  the  second  volume  of  Mr.  Romanos's  new 
work. 

2.  Why  do  not  you  give  him  the  first  volume  ?  I  have  al- 
ready given  it  to  my  cousin. 

3.  Did  not  you  promise  last  week  to  give  me  those  two  vol- 
umes ?    Yes  ;  and  you  shall  have  them  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

4.  Will  you  come  with  me  to  the  country  in  the  summer  ? 
I  will  go  if  you  set  out  on  the  first  of  July^ ^^^^ 

*See  the  conjugation  of  the  verb  Ser,  at  the  end  of  the  book. 
11 


130 


LESSON  XXVI. 


5.  Will  you  and  your  uncle  come  with  us  to  walk  this  after- 
noon ?    This  evening  we  have  to  go  to  the  concert. 

6.  When  will  you  go  out  with  us  ?  I  do  not  know;  but  I* 
think  (that)  to-morrow  (creo  que  manana). 

7.  Have  you  heard  (sabido)  from  your  father  this  week? 
No ;  but  we  heard  from  our  brother  John  last  week. 

8.  How  often  has  he  written  to  you  from  Boston  ?  We  have 
received  seven  or  eight  letters  from  him. 

9.  How  much  did  that  singer  make  (gain)  in  New  York  ? 
Which  one  ?    I  do  not  know  any  singer. 

10.  Do  not  you  know  the  singer  who  spent  last  week  at  your 
uncle's  in  the  country  ?  Yes  ;  but  it  was  in  Philadelphia  that  he 
sang,  not  in  New  York. 

11.  Are  you  cold  ?    No,  sir ;  but  I  am  hungry  and  thirsty. 

12.  W^hen  will  you  take  Emanuel  to  see  your  children  ?  I 
shall  take  him  to-morrow.— They  will  be  pleased  to  make  his  ac- 
quaintance. 

13.  How  many  languages  does  that  gentleman  speak  ?  He 
speaks  only  his  own ;  but  his  cousin  speaks  five. 

14.  Which  are  they  ?  He  speaks  French,  German,  Spanish, 
English,  and  Italian. 

15.  How  did  he  learn  so  many  languages  ?  By  studying  the 
grammar  of  each  one  of  them  {cada  una  de  ellas),  reading  the 
works  of  the  best  writers,  and  practising  with  the  natives  (natu- 
ral). 

16.  Does  he  write  all  those  languages  as  well  as  he  speaks 
them  ?    He  writes  them  better  than  he  speaks  them. 

17.  Did  not  I  see  you  {plural)  speaking  to  the  notary  yester- 
day in  the  park  ?    No,  it  was  the  day  before  yesterday. 

18.  What  has  he  done  in  that  afPair  (negocio)  of  your 
brother's  ?  He  has  done  nothing  yet ;  and  as  he  has  to  leave 
town  {la  ciudad)  this  afternoon,  he  wiU  do  nothing  all  this 
week. 

19.  Who  is  the  young  lady  who  danced  so  well  last  night  at 
your  house  ?    Do  not  you  know  her  ?  she  is  my  cousin. 

20.  When  did  you  see  our  friend  Mr.  Perez  ?  I  saw  him  the 
other  day  on  Twenty-sixth  street,  and  we  talked  for  more  than 
two  hours  about  {de)  theatres  and  concerts. 

21.  I  saw  him  the  night  before  last ;  but  we  did  not  talk  about 
theatres  and  concerts.  In  whose  house  did  you  see  him  ?  At 
Mr.  De  la  Rosa's. 


LESSON  XXVII.  131 

22.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  there  ?  I  went  at  a  quarter  to 
eight,  and  left  at  half -past  ten. 

23.  Did  you  see  many  Mexicans  there  ?  I  only  saw  one :  that 
Mexican  lawyer  who  has  just  written  a  history  of  his  country. 

24.  Does  he  leave  soon  for  Europe  ?  He  wishes  to  set  out  next 
week. 

25.  Did  John  write  to  his  father  the  day  before  yesterday  ? 
Yes,  and  he  has  heard  {saber)  since  that  he  set  out  last  week  foi* 
France. 

2Q.  Has  your  sister  read  the  books  yet  which  she  received 
from  Louisa  last  week  ?  Yes ;  and  she  wishes  to  read  them  again 
(otra  vez)  . 

27.  I  shall  see  her  this  evening  ;  and  if  you  wish  (it)  I  shall 
take  them  to  her  (se  los). 

28.  Thank  you.  Have  you  much  to  do  now  ?  No,  I  never 
have  much  to  do  in  summer. 

29.  Is  Peter  tired  ?  No ;  but  he  is  the  most  tiresome  boy  I 
know. 


LESSON    XXVII. 
Decir,  I  To  say,  to  tell. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE. 

Digo,  dices,  dice,  decimos,  I       I  say,  or  tell,  &;c. 
decis,  dicen.  J 

PRETERIT. 

Dije,  dijiste,  dijo,  dijimos,  I       I  said,  or  told,  &;c. 
dijisteis,  dijeron.  | 

FUTURE. 

Dire,   diras,   dira,   diremos,  I       I  shall  or  will  say,  or  tell,  &c. 
direis,  diran.  I 

PERFECT. 

He  dicho,  has  dicho,  &c.       I        I  have  said,  or  told,  &;c. 

FUTURE   PERFECT. 

Habre  dicho,  &c.  1       I  shall  or  will  have  said,  or 

I  told,  &c. 


132 


LESSON  XXVII. 


Dispensar.  ) 

To  excuse. 

Excusar.     ) 

Perdonar. 

To  pardon. 

Creer. 

To  believe,  to  think. 

Ofender. 

To  ofPend. 

Llamar. 

To  call,  to  knock. 

Ensenar. 

To  teach,  to  show. 

Ahora. 

Now. 

Mismo  {adverb). 

Just,  very. 

Mismo. 

Same,  self. 

Necesario. 

Necessary. 

Precise. 

Precise,  needful. 

Regular. 

Regular,  middling. 

Ramillete.    Bouquet. 

Parte.                   Part. 

Parte.           Despatch. 

Falta.                   Fault,  mistake. 

Estudio.        Study. 

Esperanza.           Hope. 

Humor.        Humor,  disposition. 

Puerta.                 Door. 

Sujeto.       ■  A  person,  subject. 

Noticia.                News. 

Asunto.        Subject,      business. 

matter. 

. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Le  compr6  un  ramillete,  y  se  lo 

He  bought  her  a  bouquet,  and  sent 

mando. 

it  to  her. 

Les  escribire  tres  cartas,  y  se  las 

I  shall  write  them  three  letters,  and 

mandare. 

send  them  to  them. 

Ella  86  lo  ha  prometido. 

She  has  promised  it  to  her. 

J  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  con  ese  librof 

What  are  you  doing  with  that  book! 

Estoy  ensefiandoseZo  a  Manuel. 

I  am  showing  it  to  Emanuel. 

i  Le  leiste  la  carta  t 

Did  you  read  the  letter  to  him  ? 

Ya  86  la  lei. 

I  did.     (I  read  it  to  him  already.) 

Ella  me  lo  dijo. 

She  told  it  to  me. 

Yo  86  lo  di. 

I  gave  it  to  him. 

Mi  madre  me  ama  a  mi. 

My  mother  loves  me. 

Tu  amigo  te  busca  a  ti. 

Thy  friend  looks  for  thee. 

Yo  les  di  las  noticias  d  ellos. 

I  told  them  the  news. 

Yo  se  las  dare  a  V. 

I  will  tell  them  to  you. 

A  ti  te  amo,  or  te  amo  a  ti. 

I  love  thee. 

i  Que  le  ha  dicho  a  V.  su  hermano  1 

What  has  your  brother  told  yout 

No  me  ha  dicho  nada. 

He  has  told  me  nothing. 

LESSON  XXV I  I. 


133 


^  Le  dije  yo  eso  a  V.  9 

V.  no  me  lo  dijo. 

^  Se  lo  ha  dicho  el  a  V.  f 

Me  lo  ha  dicho. 

^  Quiere  V.  decir  eso  a  sus  amigos  ? 

Quiero  decirseZo  a  ellos. 

I  Quien  llama  a  la  puerta  ? 

Soy  yo  mismo. 

I  Tiene  buen  humor  su  amigo  de  VJ 

Si,  senor,  tiene  buen  humor  cuando 

le  van  bien  los  negocios. 
^Gana  ese  sujeto  mucho  en  ese  ne- 

gocio  ? 
fil  no  gana  para  si  mismo;  pero 

gana  para  otros. 
Tengo  esperanza  de  que  me  per- 

donara. 


Did  I  tell  you  that? 

You  did  not  tell  it  to  me. 

Has  he  told  it  to  you  ? 

He  has  told  it  to  me. 

Will  you  tell  your  friends  that  f 

I  will  tell  it  to  them. 

Who  knocks  at  the  door  ? 

It  is  I  (myself). 

Has  your  friend  a  good  disposition? 

Yes,  sir,  he  is  good  humored  when 

business  goes  well  with  him. 
Does  that  man  make  (or  earn)  much 

in  that  business  % 
He  does  not  make  for  himself ;  but 

he  makes  for  others. 
I  have  hopes  he  will  pardon  me. 


EXPLANATION. 

133.  Objective  Pronouns,  continibed. — When  two  pro- 
nouns of  the  third  person,  one  as  direct  object  and  the  other 
as  indirect,  come  together  in  the  same  sentence,  the  indirect 
is  translated  by  se ;  as. 


Le  compro  un   ramillete,  y  se  lo 

mando. 
Les  escribire  tres  cartas,  y  se  las 

mandare. 
Mi  criado  se  lo  dara. 


He  bought  her  a  bouquet,  and  sent 

it  to  her. 
I  shall  write  them  three  letters,  and 

send  them  to  them. 
My  servant  will  give  it  to  him. 


This  is  done  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  changing  the  first  of 
the  two  pronouns,  whatever  its  full  form  may  be  (/e,  la  or  les)^ 
into  se.  This  rule  applies  to  all  pronouns,  after  as  well  as  be- 
fore the  verb ;  as, 

Ella  se  lo  ha  prometido  (instead  of  She  has  promised  it  to  her. 

ella  le  lo), 

Prometiendoselo  (instead  of  prome-  Promising  it  to  him. 

tiendolelo). 

^  Le  leiste  la  carta  ?  Did  you  read  the  letter  to  him  ? 

Ya  se  la  lei,  instead  of  ya  le  la  lei.  I  read  it  to  him  (already). 


134.  When  two  pronouns  of  the  third  person  are  the  ob- 


134  LESSON  XXYIL 

jects  of  a  verb,  and  one  of  them  is  direct  and  the  other  indi^ 
rect,  the  indirect  stands  first  in  order  of  position ;  as, 
Ella  me  lo  dijo.  I  She  told  it  to  me. 

Yo  se  lo  di.  1 1  gave  it  to  him. 

135.  But  if  the  object  of  the  verb  be  the  reflexive  pro- 
noun, it  must  be  placed  first ;  as, 

Luego  86  me  excuso.  I  He  excused  himself  immediately  to 

I      me. 

136.  The  use  of  a  double  objective  case,  one  either  be- 
fore the  verb  or  attached  to  the  end  of  it,  and  the  other  after 
it  and  preceded  by  the  preposition  «,  is  very  common  in 
Spanish,  and  is  used  for  the  sake  of  clearness  or  emphasis ;  as. 


Mi  madre  me  ama  d  mi. 
Tu  amigo  te  busca  d  ti. 
fil  se  lo  dijo  d  ellas. 
Yo  les  di  las  noticias  d  ellos, 
Yo  se  las  dare  d  Yds, 


My  mother  loves  me. 
Thy  friend  seeks  thee. 
He  told  it  to  them. 
I  told  them  the  news. 
I  will  tell  them  to  you. 


137.  The  second  objective  case  of  any  of  the  persons 
should  never  be  used  in  a  sentence  preceded  by  a,  as  the 
object  of  the  verb,  without  being  accompanied  by  the  first 
case  (except  after  comparatives).  Therefore,  such  expres- 
sions as  these  :  a  el  quiero,  a  ti  amo^  are  incorrect,  and 
should  be  thus  : 


A  el  le  quiero. 

A  ti  te  amo. 

A  ella  le  escribi  ayer. 

A  nosotros  nos  pagaron. 


Him  I  love. 

Thee  I  love. 

I  wrote  to  her  yesterday. 

They  paid  us. 


138.  If  the  first  objective  case  precedes  the  verb,  the  sec- 
ond may  be  placed  either  before  the  first  or  after  the  verb ;  as, 
A  ti  te  busco ;  or  te  busco  d  ti.  1      I  am  looking  for  thee. 

A  ella  la  quiero ;  or  la  quiero  d  ella.  \     I  love  her. 

If  the  first  objective  case  follows  the 'verb,  then  the 
second  must  be  placed  after  the  first ;  as. 


BuscoZo  d  el. 
EscribiendoZe  d  el. 
AraandoZa  d  ella. 
EscribiendoZe  d  ella. 
Hablando7W)s  a  nosotros. 


I  look  for  him. 
Writing  to  him. 
Loving  her. 
Writing  to  her. 
Speaking  to  us. 


LESSON  XXVIL  135 

Le^  les,  are  in  the  dative  case  for  both  masculine  and 
feminine.  Xo,  los^  are  in  the  accusative  case  for  masculine  ; 
la,  las,  feminine. 

139.  It  may  appear  that  the  personal  pronouns  el,  la,  lo, 
los  and  las,  might  be  confounded  with  the  articles  el,  la,  lo, ' 
los,  las,  having  the  same  form ;  but  they  are  easily  distin- 
guished, since  the  articles  must  always  be  accompanied  by 
and  precede  nouns ;  as,  el  tiempo,  la  salud,  los  soldados,  las 
ohras,  lo  hueno  ;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  the  personal  pro- 
nouns are  only  employed  with  verbs,  and  placed  before  or 
after  them ;  as. 

La  llevaron,  or  llevdronla,  i     They  carried  her. 

Lo  huscaron,  or  huscdronlo.  \     They  looked  for  him. 

The  adjective  suffix  mismo,  self,  is  placed  after  nouns  or 
pronouns  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as. 


]&1  no  ama  a  nadie  mas  que  a  si  mismo. 
Este  mismo  hombre  lo  hard. 
Yo  mismo  lo  hare. 


He  loves  no  one  but  himself. 
This  very  man  will  do  it. 
I  myself  shall  do  it. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Le  dijo  V.  eso.al  ingles  ?    Se  lo  dije. 

2.  i  Se  lo  dijo  V.  en  ingles  6  en  espaiiol  ?    Se  lo  dije  en  ingles. 

3.  I  Le  comprendio  a  V.  ?    Si,  senor,  muy  bien. 

4.  2  Y  que  le  enseno  a  V.  ?    Me  enseiio  el  retrato  de  su  her- 
mana. 

5.  I  Lo  tiene  V.  ?    No ;  se  lo  envie  ya. 

6.  I  Me  lo  ensenara  V.  ?    Se  lo  enseiiare  a  V.  la  semana 
proxima. 

7.  I  Ha  llamado  V.  a  la  criada  ?     La  he  llamado  y  no  ha  ve- 
nido. 

8.  I  No  le  perdonara  V.  esa  falta  ?    No  quiero  perdonarsela. 
f         9.  A  quien  llama  mi  padre  ?    Te  llama  a  ti. 

10.  I  Quieres  enseiiarme  tu  vestido  nuevo  ?    Te  lo  enseiiare 
con  mucho  gusto. 

11.  I  Vendran  tus  amigos  a  darnos  los  buenos  dias  ?    Creo  que 
vendran  a  darnoslos. 

12.  I  Nos  han  enviado  los  periodicos  ?    Os  los  enviaranmaiiana. 

13.  I  Cuanto  le  gano  V.  a  ese  sujeto  ?    Le  gane  dos  mil  tres- 
cientos  cincuenta  y  cuatro  pesos. 


i 


136  LESSON  XXVIL 

14.  I  Que  les  dieron  a  sus  amigas  de  Y.  ?    Prometieronles  lle- 
varlas  a  paseo ;  pero  no  les  dieron  nada. 

15.  I  Quien  dijo  eso  ?    Yo  mismo  lo  dije. 

16.  I  Para  quien  son  estos  libros  ?    Para  ti  mismo. 

17.  I  Han  mandado  mis  cartas  al  correo  ?    Si,  senor,  yo  mismo 
las  he  mandado. 

18.  i  Quien  me  ha  enviado  este  ramillete  ?    Su  amiga  misma 
se  lo  ha  enviado. 

19.  I  Le  leiste  a  tu  padre  las  noticias  de  Francia  ?    El  mismo 
las  ha  leido. 

20.  i  Quieres  ensenarme  tu  reloj  ?    Quiero  ensenartelo. 
t   21.  i  Quien  llamo  a  la  puerta  ?    Yo  mismo  llame. 

22.  i  Tiene  V.  esperanza  de  ver  su  pais  ?    Si,  senor,  tengo  espe- 
ranza  de  verlo  muy  pronto. 

23.  i  Cantaron  bien  anoche  en  el  concierto  ?    Cantaron  bien 
la  primera  parte  ;  pero  la  segunda  muy  mal. 

24.  I  Como  esta  su  tio  de  V.  ?     Esta  bueno ;  pero  de  muy  mal 
humor. 

25.  i  Es  h ombre  de  mal  humor  ?    No,  senor,  es  hombre  muy 
amable ;  pero  hoy  esta  de  mal  humor  por  asuntos  de  familia. 

26.  e  Creen  ellos  ganar  dinero  a  ese  hombre  ?    Green  ganar- 
selo. 

27.  i  Necesita  V.  enviar  este  periodico  a  su  hermano  ?    Nece- 
sito  enviarselo. 

28.  I  Cuando  quiere  V.  mandar  su  piano  al  pianista  ?    Se  lo 
quiero  mandar  ahora. 

29.  I  Cuando  necesita  V.  hablar  al  abogado  ?    Necesito  ha- 
blarle  ahora  mismo. 

30.  i  Es  esta  la  carta  que  V.  recibio  ayer  ?    Es  la  misma. 

31.  i  A  quien  ama  el  mexicano  ?    No  ama  a  nadie  mas  que  a 
si  mismo. 

32.  i  Para  quien  trabaja  esa  mujer  ?    Trabaja  para  si  misma. 

33.  I  Que  le  ha  dicho  Y.  hoy  a  su  padre  ?    Lo  mismo  que  le 
dije  ayer. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Good  morning,  sir ;  how  are  you  ?    Yery  well,  thank  you. 

2.  How  is  your  family  ?    Yery  well,  thank  you. 

3.  When  did  you  hear  from  your  cousin  Jane  ?  I  received 
a  letter  from  her  yesterday.  But  will  you  excuse  me  an  instant  ? 
some  one  is  knocking  at  the  door. 

4.  Have  you  sent  your  sister  the  bouquet  I  bought  for  her 


LESSON  XXVII,  137 

the  other  day  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  shall  send  it  to  her  to-morrow 
morning'. 

5.  Will  you  write  to  her  at  the  same  time  and  tell  her  what 
Charles  said  ?  I  am  going  to  write  to  her  at  once,  and  I  shall 
tell  her. 

6.  Do  you  think  my  father  will  pardon  us  ?  I  do  (I  think  so), 
because  Emanuel  -showed  me  a  letter  he  received  from  him,  in 
which  he  says  he  will  pardon  both  of  us. 

7.  And  what  does  Henry  think  of  the  matter  ?  He  thinks 
the  same. 

8.  Have  the  pupils  shown  their  new  books  to  their  teacher 
yet  ?    Yes,  they  showed  them  to  him  yesterday. 

9.  Does  he  think  they  are  good  ?  He  says  they  are  very 
good. 

10.  What  else  (more)  did  he  say  ?  He  said  that  if  they  study 
them  with  attention  they  will  very  soon  speak  Spanish. 

11.  Is  that  all  *  he  said  ?    That  is  all. 

/'       12.  Who  is  knocking  at  the  door  ?  is  it  thou,  Peter  ?    Yes, 
it  is  I. 

13.  Why  did  you  not  come  earlier  ?  I  was  (have  been)  read- 
ing the  news  from  Italy. 

14.  What  is  the  news  (what  news  have  we)  ?  The  papers  say 
that  the  Italians  have  gained  another  victory  (victoria). 

15.  What  did  that  man  promise  you  last  night  ?  He  promised 
to  bring  me  some  volumes  of  the  History  of  the  United  States. 

16.  Has  he  brought  (traido)  them  to  you  yet  ?    Not  yet. 

17.  When  do  you  think  he  will  bring  f  them  ?  He  has  to 
come  to  our  house  this  evening,  and  I  think  he  will  bring  them 
with  him. 

18.  What  do  you  wish  to  see  ?  I  wish  to  see  your  new  dress, 
if  you  will  have  the  goodness  (bondad)  to  show  it  to  me. 

19.  Will  you  tell  the  Englishman  what  I  have  told  you  ?  I 
shall  not  tell  it  to  the  Englishman;  but  I  shall  tell  it  to  the 
Frenchman  this  very  day. 

20.  Will  he  believe  it  ?  Yes,  he  will  (believe  it) ;  he  believes 
everything  I  tell  him. 

21.  Have  they  taken  my  letters  to  the  post-office  ?  I  took 
them  myself,  sir. 

22.  Who  is  my  father  calling  ?  He  is  calling  you  to  send 
you  to  the  bookstore  for  a  book.  

*  Lo  que.  t  Traera. 


138 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


23.  Do  you  know  why  Louis  does  not  send  us  the  papers  any 
more  (yd)  ?  He  promised  to  send  them ;  but  you  know  that  no 
steamer  (vapor)  has  arrived  *  this  week  yet. 

24.  When  does  the  merchant  want  to  see  the  notary  ?  He 
wants  to  see  him  just  now. 

25.  There  he  is  talking  to  a  gentleman ;  will  you  go  and  tell 
him  that  my  father  wishes  to  speak  to  him  a  moment  (momento)  ? 

26.  Good  morning,  sir ;  father  wishes  to  tell  you  something ; 
will  you  come  now  ?    Yes,  I  shall  go  at  once. 

27.  How  is  your  son,  Mr.  Alexander  ?  He  is  much  better, 
thank  you ;  but  he  would  not  come  out  this  morning,  because 
he  has  to  study  his  lesson. 

28.  What  language  is  he  learning  ?  He  is  not  learning  any 
now ;  he  commenced  to  learn  Spanish  in  the  winter. 

29.  What  is  he  studying,  then  ?  He  takes  lessons  in  (of) 
writing,  history,  and  music. 

30.  What  part  of  the  grammar  art  thou  in  now,  Peter  ?  I 
have  just  reached  (arrived  at)  f  the  twenty-seventh  lesson. 

31.  Do  you  have  to  send  this  paper  to  your  brother  ?  I  have 
to  send  it  to  him  this  very  day. 


LESSON    XXYIII. 
IMPERFECT  AND  PAST   PERFECT  TENSES. 


IMPERFECT. 

First  Conjugation, 

TERMINATIONS. 


Singular. 

1.  aba. 

2.  abas. 

3.  aba. 

Hablaba,  hablabas,  hablaba. 

Hablabamos,  hablabais,  habla- 
ban. 


Plural. 

1.  abamos. 

2.  abais. 

3.  aban. 

I  spoke,  was  speaking,  or  used 

to  speak,  &c.,  &c. 
We  spoke,  &c. 


^  Llegar. 


f  Acabo  de. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


139 


Second  Conjugation, 


TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  ia. 

1.  iamos. 

2.  ias. 

2.  iais. 

3.  ia. 

3.  ian. 

Aprendia,  aprendias,  aprendia. 
Aprendiamos,  aprendiais,  apren- 
dian. 


I  learned,  was  learning,  or  used 
to  learn,  (fee,  &c. 


Third  Conjugation, 


TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

1.  ia. 

1.  iamos. 

2.  ias. 

2.  iais. 

3.  ia. 

3.  ian. 

Escribia,  escribias,  escribia. 
Escribiamos,    escribiais,    escri- 
bian. 


I  wrote,  was  writing,  or  used  to 
write,  (Sec,  &c. 


PLUPERFECT. 


Habia 

Habias 

Habia 

Habiamos 

Habiais 

Habian 


I  hablado. 
■  aprendido. 

•  escrito. 

I  hablado. 

•  aprendido. 
>  escrito. 


I  had 

Thou  hadst 
He  had 
We  had 
You  had 
They  had 


^  spoken. 
>•  learned. 
)  written. 
\  spoken. 
>•  learned. 
)  written. 


Acabar. 

To  finish. 

Entrar. 

To  enter,  come  in,  go  in. 

Deber. 

To  owe. 

Deber. 

Should,  ought,  must,  to  be  to,  to 

be  one's  duty  to. 

Dudar. 

To  doubt. 

Temer. 

To  fear,  be  afraid  of. 

Abrir,  abierto  (irregular  in  this 

To  open,  opened. 

past  participle  only). 

Ambos. 


I  Both. 


140 


LESSON  XXVIII. 


Cuidado. 

Care. 

Cabeza. 

Head. 

Deber. 

Duty. 

Mano.* 

Hand. 

Projimo. 

Neighbor. 

Ropa. 

Clothes. 

Vecino. 

Neighbor. 

Ventana. 

Window. 

Reloj. 

Clock,  watch. 

Visita. 

Visit. 

Cuenta. 

Bill,  account 

Marido,  esposo. 

Husband. 

Esposa. 

Wife. 

COMPOSITION. 

Yo  escribia  cuando  V.  vino. 

£l  estudiaba  sus  lecciones  todos  los 

dias. 
Margarita  bailaba  mucho  cuando  era 

joven. 
Yo  acababa  de  salir  cuando  V.  entro. 

i  Abria  V.  la  puerta  6  la  ventana  en 
el  invierno  I 

En  el  invierno  no  abria  ni  la  una  ni 
la  otra;  pero  en  el  verano  abria 
arabas. 

I  Habia  V.  escrito  los  ejercicios  an- 
tes de  dar  su  leccion  ? 

No  los  habia  escrito  ;  pero  habia  es- 
tudiado  la  leccion. 

Debe  V.  tener  cuidado  no  solo  de 
estudiar  la  leccion,  sino  de  escribir 
los  ejercicios,  porque  si  no  V.  no 
aprendera  nada. 

i  En  donde  esta  su  vecino  de  V.  I 

Acaba  de  entrar. 

i  Que  hora  tiene  su  reloj  de  V.  ? 

Son  las  doce  y  cuarto. 

i  Tenia  su  vecino  de  V.  cuidado  de 
su  ropa  f 

Debia  hacerlo,  pero  no  lo  hacia. 

Debemos  amar  al  projimo  tan  to  co- 
mo  a  nosotros  mismos ;  pero  mi 
vecino  no  me  ama  a  mi  ni  yo  le 
amo  a  el. 

No  dudo  lo  que  V.  dice. 


I  was  writing  when  yoii  came. 

He  used  to  study  his  lessons  every 

day. 
Margaret  used  to  dance  much  when 

she  was  young. 
I  had  just  gone  out  when  you  came 

in. 
Used  you  to  open  the  door  or  the 

window  in  winter  ? 
In  winter  I  used  to  open  neither ;  but 

in  summer  I  used  to  open  both. 

Had  you  written  your  exercises  be- 
fore taking  your  lesson  I 

I  had  not  written  them  ;  but  I  had 
studied  my  lesson. 

You  must  take  care,  not  only  to 
study  your  lesson,  but  (also)  to 
write  your  exercises ;  for  if  not, 
you  will  learn  nothing. 

Where  is  your  neighbor  ? 

He  has  just  come  in  (entered). 

What  o'clock  is  it  by  your  watch 
(what  hour  has  your  watch)  ? 

It  is  a  quarter  past  twelve. 

Used  your  neighbor  to  take  care  of 
his  clothes  I 

He  should  have  done  so,  but  did  not. 

We  should  love  our  neighbor  as  our- 
selves ;  but  my  neighbor  does  not 
love  me,  nor  do  I  love  him. 

I  do  not  doubt  what  you  say. 


Mano  is  the  only  feminine  Spanish  common  noun  ending  in  o. 


LESSON  XXVIII.  141 

EXPLANATION. 

140.  The  IMPERFECT  is  used  (1)  especially  where  differ- 
ent  past  actions  are  conceived  of  as  going  on  at  the  same  time ; 
(2)  also  in  reference  to  past  SLction^  frequently  repeated,  and 
in  reference  to  continuing  past  states  or  conditions ;  (3)  it 
represents  action  as  attempted  merely,  and  not  as  accom- 
plished ;  (4)  habitual,  or  customary  past  action  or  state ;  as 
may  be  seen  by  the  following  examples  : 


Yo  escribia  cuando  V.  vino. 

fil  estudiaba  sus  lecciones  todos  los 

dias. 
El  hombre  vendia  un  caballo. 

Y  un  vapor  subia  de  la  tierra. 


/  was  writing  when  you  came. 
B^e  studied  his  lessons  every  day. 

The  man  was  selling  (went  trying  to 

sell)  a  horse. 
And  a  vapor  used  to  go  up  from  the 

earth. 

JS'ext  to  the  infinitive  the  imperfect  is  the  most  regular 
form  of  the  verb,  there  being  only  three  verbs  which  are 
irregular  in  this  tense ;  viz.,  iba,  from  ^V,  to  go,  era,  from 
ser,  to  be,  and  veia,  from  ver,  to  see. 

141.  The  PAST  PERFECT  is  used  to  express  what  is  past, 
and  took  place  before  some  other  past  action,  event,  or  state, 
expressed  or  understood ;  as, 

Yo  habia  leido  ya  los  periodicos  1 1  had  already  read  the  newspapers 
cuando  V.  me  los  dio.  I      when  you  gave  them  to  me. 

142.  AcABAR  DE. — The  English  expressions,  to  have  Just, 
and  to  be  just,  before  a  past  participle,  are  translated  into 
Spanish  by  acabar  de,  preceding  an  infinitive ;  as, 

Acaho  de  entrar.  1 1  have  just  come  in. 

fel  acaba  de  abrir  la  ventana.  I  He  has  just  opened  the  window. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Ha  hablado  V.  con  la  seiiorita  ?  No,  ella  acababa  de 
s^lir  cuando  yo  toque  a  la  puerta. 

2.  I  Dudaba  V.  entrar  ?    Si,  porque  temia  ofender  a  V. 

3.  No  senor ;  i  que  hora  es  ?    Mi  reloj  tiene  las  once  y  cuarto. 
4.^  ^  y  que  hora  tiene  V.  ?    Yo  tengo  las  once  y  media. 

5.  «  Sabe  V.  que  hora  es  en  el  reloj  de  la  iglesia  ?  Cuando 
yo'pasaba  estaban  dando  las  once. 


142  LESSON  XXVIII, 

6.  i  Entonces  ahora  no  deberan  ser  mas  que  las  once  y  veinte 
6  veinte  y  cinco  minutos  ?    Creo  que  seran  un  poco  menos. 

7.  I  Ha  hablado  V.  con  mi  vecino  ?    He  ido  a  hacerle  una 
visita,  pero  habia  salido. 

8.  I  No  hablo  V.  con  la  senora  ?    Si,  estaba  en  la  ventana 
cuando  yo  pase. 

9.  I  Tiene  una  mano  muy  hermosa  ?    Si,  pero  los  ojos  son 
mas  hermosos. 

'       10.  I  Que  tenia  en  la  cabeza  ?    Dos  flores. 

11.  I  Quien  llama  a  la  puerta  ?    La  lavandera,  que  viene  a 
buscar  la  ropa. 

12.  I  Cuanto  le  debo  a  V.  ?    Me  debe  V.  veinte  y  cinco  cen- 
tavos  de  la  ropa  de  la  semana  pasada. 

13.  I  No  se  los  ha  pagado  a  V.  mi  marido  ?    No,  senora,  no 
tenia  dinero. 

14.  I  Duda  V.  lo  que  le  digo  ?    No,  senora,  lo  creo. 

15.  I  Esta  bien  lavada  la  ropa  ?    Muy  bien ;  yo  misma  la  lave. 

16.  -i  Hizo  V.  la  visita  a  su  vecino  ?    Fui  a  su  casa ;  pero  habia 
salido. 

17.  I  Va  V.  muchas  veces  al  teatro  ?    Cuando  vivia  en  Paris 
iba  a  menudo ;  pero  aqui  voy  muy  pocas  veces. 

18.  I  Como  debemos  amar  al  projimo  ?    Tanto  como  a  noso- 
tros  mismos. 

19.  I  Quien  es  el  projimo  ?    Todos  los  hombres  son  nuestros 
projimos. 

20.  I  Esta  mala  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?    Si,  senora,  y  de  cuidado 
(seriously). 

21.  I  Cuantas  visitas  le  ha  hecho  el  medico  ?    Muchisimas. 

22.  I  Deben  Yds.  tener  mucho  cuidado  de  ella  ?    Si,  senora, 
ya  lo  tenemos. 

23.  I  Cuantas  visitas  le  debo  yo  a  V.  ?    Con  esta  son  tres. 

24.  ^  No  vendra  V.  a  comer  manana  con  nosotras  ?    Maiiana 
ire  al  campo  con  mis  vecinos. 

25.  I  Habia  V.  recibido  la  carta  del  f  ranees  cuando  recibio  la 
mia  ?    La  recibi  despues. 

26.  I  Por  que  trabaja  V.  tanto  ?    Porque  es  mi  deber. 

27.  I  Vendran  V.  y  su  hermana  a  pasar  una  semana  con  noso- 
tros  ?    Si,  seiiora,  la  semana  proxima  vendremos  ambos. 

28.  i  Quien  abrio  mi  ventana,  Juan  ?    Seiior,  yo  mismo  la  abri. 

29.  I  Hablo  V.  con  e]  sastre  ?    Fui  alia,  pero  habia  salido. 
SO,  I  Cunado  vino  V.  ?    Ahora  mismo  acabo  de  entrar. 


LESSON  XXVIII,  143 

31.  e  Donde  esta  mi  padre  ?    Acaba  de  salir  a  la  calle. 

32.  ^  Sabes  adonde  f  ue  ?    Fue  a  comprar  ropa. 

33.  i  Habra  ido  a  la  Cuarta  avenida  ?    No,  senor,  creo  que  fue 
a  Broadway. 

34.  e  Que  hora  es  ?    El  reloj  de  su  cuarto  de  V.  acaba  de  dar 
las  doce. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  were  you  doing  when  Alexander  went  into  your 
room  ?    I  was  talking  to  my  father. 

2.  I  thought  you  were  writing  your  exercises.  No,  I  had 
written  them  already. 

3.  Does  the  servant  take  care  to  sweep  your  room  every  day  ? 
Yes,  he  knows  very  well  it  is  his  duty. 

4.  Why  did  you  not  come  before  ?  you  were  to  come  at  nine 
o'clock.  I  know  I  have  done  wrong  in  not  coming  earlier ;  but 
I  have  been  writing  all  the  morning. 

5.  Does  your  sister  Margaret  dance  now  as  much  as  she 
used  ?  When  (she  was)  in  the  city  she  used  to  dance  very 
much,  but  now  she  has  no  time. 

6.  When  you  lived  in  the  country  did  you  open  both  the 
doors  and  the  windows  ?    I  opened  neither. 

7.  Had  you  finished  your  work  before  going  to  the  concert  ? 
I  had  (finished  it). 

8.  Do  you  doubt  what  I  tell  you  ?  No,  sir,  I  never  doubted 
anything  you  told  me. 

9.  Is  your  neighbor  afraid  to  open  his  windows  in  winter  ? 
He  is  not  afraid  to  open  them. 

10.  Who  was  it  that  went  out  last  night  after  ten  o'clock  ? 
No  one  went  out ;  my  brother  came  in  at  that  hour. 

11.  Did  Alexander  go  out  when  your  cousin  came  in  ?    He 
had  already  gone  out  when  my  cousin  came  in. 

12.  Where  is  he  now  ?    He  has  just  gone  out  to  walk. 

13.  Will  he  be  out  very  long  (much  time)  ?    He  will  not  be 
long ;  he  is  to  take  his  Spanish  lesson  this  evening. 

14.  Did  you  pay  (make)  a  visit  to  my  neighbor  last  week  ?    1 
went  to  his  house,  but  he  was  not  at  home. 

15.  When  did  you  see  the  pianist  ?    He  came  to  see  me  the 
other  day,  but  I  had  gone  out. 

16.  Do  you  think  we  shall  have  studied  our  lessons  before 
going  to  the  teacher's  ?    I  think  we  shall. 


144  LESSO^'  XXVIIL 

17.  What  o'clock  is  it  by  (in)  your  watch  ?  It  is  seventeen 
minutes  past  three  by  mine ;  what  time  have  you  ? 

18.  It  must  be  (deben  ser)  half-past  three;  has  the  music 
teacher  come  ?    Not  yet. 

19.  Will  you  have  the  kindness  to  go  to  his  house  and  tell 
him  I  shall  not  take  my  lesson  this  afternoon  ?  With  much 
pleasure. 

20.  So  soon !  Well,  did  you  see  the  teacher  ?  No,  madam, 
he  had  just  gone  out. 

21.  How  much  do  you  owe  the  tailor  now  ?  I  owe  him  very 
little  ;  you  know  I  sent  him  some  money  last  month. 

22.  I  know  (it) ;  but  did  he  not  send  (pasar)  in  another  bill 
on  Monday  ?    If  he  has  sent  in  another  I  have  not  seen  {visto)  it. 

23.  I  thought  you  were  in  the  country,  Mr.  Emanuel  ?  I  was 
there  last  week. 

24.  Why  did  you  not  come  yesterday  ?  I  saw  you  were  writ- 
ing and  I  feared  to  ofPend  you. 

25.  But  you  know  it  was  your  duty  to  come  in ;  you  knew  I 
wanted  you.  Well,  if  you  pardon  me  this  time  (vez),  I  shall 
come  in  the  next  time. 

26.  How  often  do  you  go  to  the  theatre  ?  Not  very  often 
now ;  I  used  to  go  every  night  in  the  week. 

27.  How  are  we  to  love  our  neighbor  ?    As  ourselves. 

28.  Who  is  our  neighbor  ?  All  mankind  (men)  are  our 
neighbors. 

29.  How  many  visits  has  the  physician  made  to  your  uncle  ? 
He  began  his  visits  on  the  30th  of  December,  and  visited  him 
twice  a  week  until  April  4th. 

30.  How  many  visits  do  I  owe  you  for  now  ?  You  owed  me 
for  twelve,  but  you  paid  me  for  nine,  and  so  you  only  owe  for 
three  now. 

31.  Whose  letter  did  you  receive  first,  mine  or  Jane's  ?  When 
yours  came  to  hand  (my  hands),  I  had  already  received  Jane's. 

32.  Will  you  take  your  lesson  to-day  ?  I  am  to  go  to  the 
Central  Park  this  afternoon  with  my  mother,  and  so  I  shall  not 
take  my  lesson  until  to-morrow. 


LESSOIi  XXIX. 


145 


LESSO]^^^    XXIX. 


PRETERIT   PERFECT. 


Hube 

Hubiste 

Hubo. 

Hubimos. 

Hubisteis 

Hubieron 


hablado. 

aprendido. 

escrito. 

hablado. 

aprendido. 

escrito. 


Yer. 

Mirar. 
Esperar. 

Asi  que. 

Apenas. 

No  bien. 

Tampoco  (conj.). 

Tambien  (adverb). 

Tambien  (conj.). 

Ademas. 

Primeramente,    or   en    primer 

lugar. 
Segundamente,  or  en  segundo 

lugar. 
Frecuente. 
Free  uentemente. 
Comodo. 
Comodamente. 


Incomodo. 

Incomodamente. 

Probable. 

Probablem  ente. 

Perfecto. 

Perfectamente. 

Correcto. 

Correctamente. 


Ojo. 
Correo. 

Lugar. 


Eye. 

Post,  post-office, 

courier. 
Place. 


I  had 

Thou  hadst 
He  had 
We  had 
You  had 
They  had 


spoken. 
■  learned. 

*  written, 
spoken. 

•  learned, 
written. 


To  see.  (See  Conjugation,  page 

Ut) 
To  look.       . 
To  hope,  to  wait  for. 

As  soon  as. 
Scarcely. 
No  sooner. 
Neither,  not  either. 
Also,  likewise. 
As  well,  moreover. 
Moreover,  besides. 
Firstly. 

Secondly,  &c. 

Frequent. 
Frequently. 

Convenient,  comfortable. 
Conveniently,  comfortably. 

Inconvenient,  uncomfortable. 

Inconveniently,  uncomfortably. 

Probable,  likely. 

Probably,  likely. 

Perfect. 

Perfectly. 

Correct. 

Correctly. 


Vista. 
Comodidad. 

Milla. 


Sight,  view. 
Convenience, 

comfort. 
Mile. 


12 


146 


LESSON  XXIX. 


COMPOSITION. 


Cuando  lo  hube  conocido  To  ame. 
Apenas  hubo  ealido  el  cuando  yo 

entre. 
No  bien  lo  hube  visto  cuando  lo  co- 

noci. 
Asi  que  hube  escrito  la  carta  la  lleve 

al  correo. 
Cuando  lo  conoci  lo  ame. 
i  Iba  V.  f recuentemente  al  teatro  el 

ano  pasado  ? 
Iba  f recuentisimamente,  or  muy  f  re- 
cuentemente. 
]6l  vive  en  esa  casa  comodamente,  or 

con  comodidad. 
J&l  escribe  correcta  y  perfectamente ; 

pero  V.  escribe  mas  facilmente. 


When  I  had  known  him  I  loved  him« 
Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I 

came  in. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I 

knew  him. 
As  soon  as  I  had  written  the  letter 

I  took  it  to  the  post-office. 
When  I  knew  him  I  loved  him. 
Did  you  go  often  to  the  theatre  last 

year? 
I  went  very  often. 

He  lives  comfortably,  or  with  com- 
fort, in  that  house. 

He  writes  correctly  and  perfectly; 
but  you  write  more  easily. 


EXPLANATION. 

143.  The  PRETERIT  PERFECT  is  used  to  express  a  past 
fiction  or  event  that  took  place  immediately  before  another 
action  or  event  also  past.  It  is  never  used  except  after  some 
of  the  adverbs  of  time  ;  cuando^  when  ;  asi  que^  as  soon  as  ; 
no  Men,  no  sooner  ;  apenas,  scarcely  ;  hcego  que,  immediately 
after ;  despues  que,  soon  after  ;  as, 


Cuando  lo  huhe  conocido. 

Apenas  huho  salido  cuando  yo  vine. 

No  bien  lo  huhe  visto  cuando  lo  co- 
nocL 


When  I  had  made  his  acquaintance. 
Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I 

came. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I 

knew  him. 


This  tense  is  very  little  used,  not  only  for  the  reason  al- 
ready mentioned,  of  its  being  preceded  by  an  adverb  of  time, 
but  also  because  its  place  may  be  elegantly  supplied  by  the 


PRETERIT ;  as, 

Oaando  lo  conoci. 

Apenas  salio  cuando  yo  vine. 

^o  bien  lo  vi  cuando  lo  conoci. 


When  I  had  known  him. 

Scarcely  had  he  gone  out  when  I 

came. 
No  sooner  had  I  seen  him  than  I 

knew  him. 


LUSSON  XXIX.  147 

144.  The  adverbs  of  manner  and  quality,  in  Spanish  as 
well  as  in  English,  are  generally  derived  from  adjectives. 

145.  To  form  an  adverb  from  an  adjective,  it  is  sufficient 
to  add  mente  to  the  adjective,  if  the  latter  has  the  same  ter- 
mination in  both  genders  ;  as, 

Frecuente,  f  recuentemcTi^e. 
Gramatical,  gramaticalmen^e. 

If  the  adjective  has  a  different  termination  for  each  gen- 
der, then  me7ite  is  added  to  the  feminine  ;  as, 

IncopQoda,  incomodawen^e. 
Perfecta,  perfectawe^i^e. 

When  two  or  more  of  these  adverbs  follow  each  other,  only 
the  last  one  takes  mente^  the  others  taking  the  feminine  ter- 
mination a ;  as, 

Ciceron    hablo   sabia  y  elocuente- 1  Cicero    spoke    learnedly    and    elo- 
mente,  I     quently. 

146.  These  adverbs  terminating  in  msnte^  being  derived 
from  adjectives,  admit  of  similar  comparison ;  as, 

Easily. 
More  easily. 
Less  easily. 


As,  or  so  easily. 

Very  easily,  or  most  easily. 


Facilmente. 

Mas  facilmente. 

Menos  facilmente. 

Tan  facilmente. 

Muy  facilmente,  or  facilisimamente. 

147.  Those  adverbs  may,  without  any  change  in  the  sense, 
be  substituted  by  a  substantive  governed  by  the  preposition 
con ;  as, 

t\  Vive  comodamente,  or  con  como- 1  He  lives  comfortably, 
didad.  ' 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 
1   ^  Ve  V.  aquella  fior  tan  hermosa  ?    Miro,  pero  no  la  veo. 

2.  I  Ye  Y.  que  hora  es  en  el  reloj  de  la  iglesia  ?    No,  pero 

mirare  en  mi  reloj.  .  , 

3.  I  Ha  visto  V.  a  su  hermano  ?    Si,  seiior,  lo  vi  apenas  hubo 

salido  del  teatro.  r,  i.i  j^ 

4.  I  Le  conocio  a  V.  mi  vecino  ?    No  bien  le  hube  hablado, 

me  conocio. 


148 


LESSON  XXIX. 


5.  I  Han  venido  mis  amigos  ?  Yinieron  asi  que  hubo  V.  salido. 

6.  I  Lie  dieron  a  V.  mis  libros  ?    Me  los  dieron,  no  bien  les 
hube  hablado  de  ello. 

7.  g  Y  se  marcharon  muy  pronto  ?    Se  marcharon  asi  que 
hubieron  escrito  sus  cartas. 

8.  i  Que  hizo  V.  despues  ?    Primeramente  {or  primero)  fui  al 
correo  j  despues  al  mercado. 

9.  I  Que  quiere  V.  hacer  ?    Primeramente  escribir  los  ejerci- 
cios  y  despues  estudiar  la  leccion. 

10.  I  Por  que  no  lo  hizo  Y.  antes  ?    En  primer  lugar  porque 
no  tenia  humor  j  en  segundo  porque  apenas  tuve  tiempo. 

11.  e  Habla  Y.  frances  frecuentemente  ?    Si,  senor,  lo  hablo 
con  f  recuencia. 

12.  I  Lo  escribe  Y.  correctamente  ?    Cuando  lo  estudiaba  lo 
escribia  con  mas  correccion  que  ahora. 

13.  e  Aprende  Y.  ingles  6  espanol  ?    Aprendo  ambos. 

14.  ^  Y  su  hermano  de  Y.  ?    Mi  hermano  los  aprende  tambien. 

15.  I  Los  hablan  Yds.  con  perfeccion  ?    Si,  senor,  el  ingles  lo 
hablamos  perf  ectamente ;  pero  el  espanol  ni  yo,  ni  el  tampoco. 

16.  I  Ha  enviado  Y.  su  carta  al  correo  ?    No,  senor,  la  enviare 
manana. 

17.  i  La  ha  escrito  Y.  ?    Tampoco  la  he  escrito,  porque  quiero 
hacerlo  con  comodidad. 

18.  I  Ha  aprendido  Y.  la  leccion  de  hoy  ?    He  aprendido  la 
de  hoy  y  la  de  manana  tambien. 

19.  I  Cuando  piensa  Y.  salir  para  Paris  ?    Probablemente  sal- 
dre  la  semana  proxima. 

20.  e  No  vive  Y.  comodamente  aqui  ?    Si,  senor,  pero  vivo  mas 
comodamente  en  Francia. 

21.  I  Yivia  Y.  comodamente  cuando  estaba  en  Londres  ?    No, 
senor,  vivia  incomodamente  porque  no  hablaba  ingles. 

22.  t  Tiene  Y.  otro  libro  ademas  de  ese  ?    Si,  senor,  tengo 
otros  dos. 

23.  i  Esta  Y.  malo  de  la  vista  ?    Si,  senor,  tengo  malo  un  ojo. 

24.  I  Por  que  no  ha  venido  aiin  su  primo  de  Y.  ?    Porque  quiere 
venir  con  comodidad. 

25.  I  Tiene  Y.  buena  vista  ?    Si,  senor,  pero  ahora  tengo  los 
ojos  malos. 

26.  I  Cuando  estudia  Y.  sus  lecciones  ?    Las  estudio  de  dia 
porque  el  estudio  de  noche  es  malo  para  la  vista. 


LFSSOJV  XXIX.  149 

27.  I  Donde  estan  sus  hermanos  de  V.  ?  Salieron  a  paseo  no 
bien  hubieron  escrito  sus  ejercicios. 

28.  8  Cuando  escribieron  las  cartas  ?  Asi  que  hubieron  apren- 
dido  sus  lecciones. 

29.  I  Llevo  V.  mis  cartas  al  correo  ?  Si,  senor,  asi  que  Y. 
hubo  salido. 

30.  e  Va  V.  con  frecuencia  al  correo  ?  Si,  senor,  voy  f recuen- 
temente :  voy  todos  los  dias. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  go  to  the  lawyer's  as  I  told  you  ?  I  went  as  soo^ 
as  you  told  me. 

•2.  Was  he  at  home  ?  did  you  see  him  ?  He  was  not  in  when 
I  went ;  but  I  waited  until  he  came. 

3.  Did  you  show  him  the  letter  ?  I  opened  it  and  showed  it 
to  him  ;  but  he  would  *  not  i-ead  it. 

4.  What  did  your  children  do  after  taking  their  lesson  ? 
They  had  scarcely  finished  their  lesson  when  they  went  to  bed. 

5.  Did  you  look  at  the  horses  your  brother  bought  on  Mon- 
day ?    I  did  (look  at  them),  and  I  think  they  are  very  fine. 

6.  Have  you  ever  taken  your  family  to  Italy  ?  Yes,  several 
times ;  last  year  we  travelled  in  Italy. 

7.  Did  you  spend  some  time  in  the  principal  cities  ?  Yes ; 
but  principally  in  Rome  {Roma),  Florence  (Florencia)  and 
Milan  (Milan). 

8.  Where  were  you  on  the  15th  of  December,  1865  ?  On  the 
15th  we  were  in  Florence  in  the  morning,  and  in  Rome  at  night. 

9.  Did  you  all  enjoy  good  health  in  Europe  ?  Yes,  all,  ex- 
cept (menos)  Alexander,  who  had  a  sore  (malo)  eye  the  greater 
part  of  the  time. 

10.  Did  you  go  often  to  the  theatre  ?  We  generally  went 
every  evening. 

11.  Had  you  any  difficulty  (diflcultad)  in  understanding  f  the 
language  ?  None  ;  you  know  Emanuel  speaks  Italian  very  cor- 
rectly ;  he  had  learned  it  before  setting  out  for  Europe. 

12.  Did  you  see  many  Americans  when  you  were  travelling  ? 
Very  many ;  some  of  them  we  knew  very  well,  and  others  were 
friends  of  ours. 

13.  Where  is  the  letter  you  were  writing  this  morning  ?  As 
soon  as  I  had  finished  it  John  took  it  to  the  post-office. 


*  Quiso.  t  Comprender. 


160  LESSON  XXIX. 

14.  Do  you  ever  write  to  your  uncle  ?  Very  little  since  we 
left  New  York ;  but  there  I  used  to  write  to  hini  very  frequently. 

15.  Which  of  you  three  writes  French  the  most  correctly  *  ? 
I  know  it  is  not  I ;  and  as  to  (en  cuanto  d)  Peter  and  Louis,  I 
think  Peter  writes  best,  but  Louis  writes  with  more  ease  (more 
easily). 

16.  Do  you  see  that  beautiful  flower  ?  I  am  looking ;  but  I 
do  not  see  it 

17.  Will  you  tell  me  what  time  it  is  by  the  church  clock  ?  I 
am  looking  at  the  church ;  but  I  see  no  clock. 

18.  Have  not  you  good  sight  ?  Yes,  very  good ;  but  I  have  a 
very  sore  eye. 

19.  Did  not  my  cousins  come  ?  They  came  as  soon  as  you 
went  out. 

20.  Did  you  show  them  my  portrait  ?  I  did ;  but  they  scarcely 
had  time  to  look  at  it. 

21.  Did  they  say  where  they  were  going  ?  They  said  they 
were  going  to  the  country. 

22.  How  long  are  they  to  be  there  ?    They  did  not  tell  me  that. 

23.  Are  not  they  coming  for  me  to-morrow  ?  Yes,  sir,  they 
are  coming  for  you  to  go  and  pay  a  visit  to  Mrs.  Penaverde. 

24.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  more  comfortable  little  room  than 
this  one  ?    Besides  being  comfortable  it  is  very  handsome. 

25.  Why  do  you  not  speak  Spanish  with  Mr.  Riberas  ?  In 
the  first  place,  because  I  do  not  speak  it  well  enough ;  and  in 
the  second,  because  he  speaks  English  very  correctly. 

26.  I  thought  you  were  studying  Spanish  ?  I  am  studying 
it ;  but  studying  and  speaking  are  two  distinct  (distinto)  things. 

27.  Did  you  tell  the  music  teacher  that  Louisa  wishes  to  take 
lessons  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  shall  see  him  to-morrow  and  tell  him. 

28.  Why  did  you  not  take  your  lesson  yesterday  ?    I  was  sick. 

29.  Have  you  studied  yesterday's  lesson,  and  to-day's  ?  I  have 
studied  both. 

30.  Will  you  come  to-morrow  at  the  same  hour  ?  Probably  I 
shall. 

*  Mejor^ 


LESSON  XXX. 


151 


LESSON    XXX. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

Llover.     • 

To  rain. 

Lloviendo. 

Raining. 

Llovido. 

Bained. 

Indicative, 

Present. 

Llueve. 

It  rains. 

Imperfect, 

Llovia. 

It  was  raining. 

Preterit. 

Llovio. 

It  rained. 

Future. 

Llovera. 

It  will  rain. 

Compoun 

d  Tenses, 

Perfect. 

Ha  llovido. 

It  has  rained. 

Past  perfect. 

Habia  llovido. 

It  had  rained. 

Preterit  perfect 

Hubo  llovido. 

It  had  rained. 

Future  perfect. 

Habra  llovido. 

It  will  have  rained. 

Amanecer. 

To  grow  light. 

Anochecer. 

To  grow  dark. 

Diluviar. 

To  rain  like  a  deluge,  to  rain  in 
*  torrents. 

Granizar. 

To  hail. 

Helar. 

To  freeze. 

Lloviznar. 

To  drizzle. 

Nevar. 

To  snow. 

Relampaguear 

, 

To  lighten. 

Tronar. 

To  thunder. 

PERSONAL  VERBS  U 

SED   IMPERSONALLY. 

Bastar. 

To  be  sufficient. 

Haber. 

(Signifying)  there  is,  was,  etc. 

Hacer. 

(Signifying)  it  is,  was,  etc. 

Ser. 

To  be. 

Convenir. 

To  suit,  to  be  proper. 

Parecer. 

To  seem,  to  appear. 

Brasil. 

Brazil. 

Habana.               Havana. 

Menester. 

Necessity. 

Nieve.                   Snow. 

Hielo. 

Ice. 

Lluvia.                 Eain. 

162 


LESSON'  XXX. 


Helado. 

Ice  cream. 

Tarde. 

Afternoon. 

Trueno. 

Thunder. 

La  maiiana. 

Morning. 

Medio  dia. 

Noon. 

Media  noche. 

Midnight. 

Viento. 

Wind. 

Especie. 

Kind. 

COMPOSITION. 

• 

I  Es  necesario  estudiar  mucho  para 

aprender  el  espanol  ? 
Es  menester  estudiar  mucho,  pero 

no  tanto  como  para  aprender  el 

ingles. 
En  Nueva  York  llueve  y  Uovizna 

mucho,  pero  no  diluvia  como  en 

la  Habana. 
En  Madrid  amanece  muy  temprano 

y  anochece  muy  tarde  en  el  verano. 
En  la  Habana  amanece  y  anochece 

siempre  a  la  misma  hora,  en  todos 

los  (lias  del  ano. 
En  el  Brasil  no  nieva ;  pero  truena 

y   relampaguea    mucho    siempre 

que  llueve. 
En  la  Habana  no  hay  hielo,  porque 

no  hace  bastante  f rio  para  helar ; 

yporeso  lo  llevan  de  Nueva  York. 

En  Nueva  York  ha  helado  y  nevado 
mucho  este  ano  ;  pero  en  el  pasa- 
do  nevo  y  helo  muy  poco. 

I  Hace  mucho  calor  en  este  pais  ? 

En  los  meses  de  Noviembre,  Diciem- 

,  bre  y  Enero  hace  mucho  f  rio ;  pero 
en  Junio,  Julio  y  Agosto  hace 
mucho  calor. 

i  Que  tiempo  hace  ? 

Parece  que  va  a  Hover,  porque  hay 
mucho  viento  y  hace  calor. 

Cuatro  anos  ha,  or  hay  cuatro  anos, 
que  no  veo  a  mi  padre. 

Pero  V.  tiene  esperanza  de  verle 
pronto,  porque  llegara  hoy  a  Nue- 
va York  en  el  vapor  "  Etna  "  que 
viene  de  Europa. 


Is  it  necessary  to  study  much  to 
learn  Spanish  ? 

it  is  necessary  to  study  a  great  deal, 
but  not  so  much  as  to  learn  Eng- 
Ush. 

In  New  York  it  rains  and  drizzles  a 
great  deal,  but  it  does  not  rain  in 
torrents  as  in  Havana. 

In  Madrid  day  breaks  very  early  and 
night  falls  very  late  in  summer. 

In  Havana  day  breaks  and  night 
falls  at  the  same  hours  every  day 
in  the  year. 

In  Brazil  it  does  not  snow ;  but  it 
thunders  and  lightens  much  when- 
ever it  rains. 

In  Havana  there  is  no  ice,  because 
it  is  not  cold  enough  to  freeze ; 
and  for  that  reason  they  take  it 
from  New  York. 

In  New  York  it  has  frozen  and 
snowed  much  this  year ;  but  last 
year  it  snowed  and  froze  very 
little. 

Is  it  very  warm  in  this  country  ? 

In  the  months  of  November,  Decem- 
ber and  January  it  is  very  cold ; 
but  in  June,  July  and  August  it 
is  very  warm. 

What  kind  of  weather  is  it  ? 

It  appears  it  is  going  to  rain,  be- 
cause it  is  very  windy  and  hot. 

I  have  not  seen  my  father  for  four 
years. 

But  you  (have)  hope  to  see  him  soon ; 
for  he  will  arrive  to-day  in  New 
York  by  the  steamer  "  Etna  "  (that 
is)  coming  from  Europe. 


LESSON  XXX. 


153 


En  verano  voy  a  pasear  todos  los 

dias  al  amanecer. 
^  Ya  V.  a  la  cama  temprano  ? 
No,  senor,  tarde  ;  a  la  media  noche. 
^  Come  V.  al  medio  dia  ? 
No,  senor,  como  al  anochecer. 
I  Va  V.  a  la  Habana  f 
No,  senor,  voy  a  Francia. 
La  Francia  es  mas  alegre  que  la  In- 

glaterra. 
El  muchacho  estudia  mucho. 
El  estudio  de  la  gramatica  es  nece- 

sario. 
El  hombre  necesita  trabajar. 
La  conversacion  es  muy  litil  para 

aprender  una  lengua. 


In  summer  I  go  to  walk  every  morn- 
ing at  daybreak. 

Do  you  go  to  bed  early  f 

No,  sir,  late  ;  at  midnight. 

Do  you  dine  at  noon  1 

No,  sir,  I  dine  at  nightfall. 

Are  you  going  to  Havana  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  going  to  France. 

France  is  more  pleasant  than  Eng- 
land. 

The  boy  studies  much. 

The  study  of  grammar  is  necessary. 

Man  needs  to  work. 
Conversation  is  very  useful  for  learn- 
ing a  language. 


EXPLANATION. 

148.  Impeksonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  used  only  in 
the  infinitive  mode  and  in  the  third  person,  singular  of  all 
the  tenses,  and  have  no  definite  subject ;  as, 


Llueve. 

Tronara. 

Nevaba. 


It  rains. 

It  will  thunder. 

It  was  snowing. 


149.  The  verbs  amanecer  and  anochecer  are  sometimes 
used  in  the  three  persons,  both  numbers  ;  but  then  they  are 
not  impersonal,  but  neuter  ;  as, 

Yo  amaneci  en  Nueva  York,  y  ano- 1 1  was  in  New  York  at  daybreak,  and 
checi  en  Filadelfia.  I     ^  Philadelphia  at  nightfall. 

150.  Haber  and  hacer  are  often  used  impersonally,  anrf^ 
are  in  such  cases  to  be  rendered  into  English  by  the  corre- 
sponding tenses  of  the  verb  to  be. 

The  verb  haher,  when  conjugsited  impersonally,  has  the  pe- 
culiarity of  taking  e^  y  in  the  third  person  of  the  present 
indicative ;  as. 

There  is  much  fruit. 

There  will  be  many  men. 

It  was  cold. 


Hay  mucha  f  ruta. 
Habra  muchos  hombres. 
Hizo  frio. 
Hace  muchos  anos. 


Many  years  ago. 


154  LESSON  XXX, 

In  this  case  Jidber  and  its  forms  correspond  to  the  Eng- 
lish there  is,  there  are,  there  were,  there  will  be,  there  may 
be,  &c.,  and  when  it  has  this  meaning  it  is  used  in  the 
singular  only  ;  as, 

I  No  hay  cartas!  I     Are  there  no  letters! 

\  Haya  luz !  I     Let  there  be  light. 

X.  B. — Ha  is  sometimes  elegantly  used  for  hay ;  as, 
Doce  alios  ha,  or  hay  doce  afios.     1      Twelve  years  ago ; 
but  it  is  to  be  observed  that  ha  always  follows  the  time,  while 
hay  precedes  it. 

There  are  many  other  verbs  which,  although  not  imper- 
sonal, are  sometimes  used  as  such ;  as. 


Es  muy  tarde. 
Es  preciso. 
Es  menester, 
Parece. 
Conviene. 
Basta. 


It  is  very  late. 

It  is  necessary. 

There  is  necessity. 

It  seems,  it  appears. 

It  suits,  it  is  proper. 

It  is  sufficient,  it  vrill  do. 


151.  As  it  may  have  been  observed,  the  pronoun  lY,  which 
accompanies  impersonal  verbs  in  English,  is  not  translated 
into  Spanish. 

152.  The  Article. — Xouns  taken  in  a  definite  sense  re- 
quire the  article ;  as, 

El  muchacho  estudia.  I  The  boy  studies. 

El  estudio  de  la  gramatica  es  util.     |  The  study  of  grammar  is  useful. 

Xouns  used  in  their  most  general  sense  are  preceded  by 
the  article ;  as, 


El  hombre  necesita  trabajar. 
La  conversacion  es  muy  util  para 
aprender  una  lengua. 


Man  needs  to  work. 
Conversation  is  very  useful  for  learn- 
ing a  language. 

INTames  of  nations,  countries,  provinces,  mountains,  rivers 
and  seasons,  generally  take  the  article ;  as. 


La  Espana. 
La  Inglaterra. 
El  invierno. 


Spain. 

England. 

Winter. 


LUSSOJV  XXX.  155 

153.  ^Nations,  countries,  and  provinces,  when  preceded  by 
a  preposition,  do  not  take  the  article  unless  they  are  per- 
sonified; as, 

Las  provincias  de  Espana.       I  The  provinces  of  Spain. 

El  valor  c!e  la  EspaSa.  |  The  courage  of  Spain. 

Nevertheless,  the  article  is  employed  under  all  circum- 
stances with  the  names  of  some  places ;  as, 


El  Brasil. 

Brazil. 

La  Habana. 

Havana. 

El  Ferrol. 

Ferrol. 

La  China. 

China. 

El  Japon. 

Japan. 

El  Peru. 

Peru. 

Los  Estados  Unidos. 

The  United  States. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Que  tiempo  hace  ?    Ahora  hace  calor ;  antes  hacia  frio. 

2.  i  Llovera  manana  ?    Creo  que  nevara. 

3.  i  Llueve  mucho  en  Nueva  York  ?  Llueve  y  llovizna  bas- 
tante  ;  pero  raramente  diluvia. 

4.  I  Hace  mucho  frio  en  la  Habana  en  el  mes  de  Enero  ? 
Hace  alguno,  pero  nunca  nieva  ni  hiela. 

5.  I  Relampaguea  ?    Relampaguea  j  llovizna. 

6.  I  Por  que  escribe  V.  tantos  ejercicios  ?  Porque  para  apren- 
der  una  lengua  no  basta  hablarla,  es  necesario  tambien  saber 
escribirla. 

7.  e  Nieva  mucho  en  el  Brasil  ?  En  el  Brasil  no  nieva,  mas 
que  en  las  montaiias,  donde  hay  nieve  todo  el  ano. 

8.  I  Quiere  V.  tomar  un  helado  ?  No,  senor,  los  helados  no 
son  buenos  en  este  tiempo, 

9.  e  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  no  ve  Y.  a  su  familia  ?  El  dos 
de  Septiembre  proximo  hara  once  anos. 

10.  I  Por  que  no  vino  V.  anoche  ?    Porque  llovia  y  hacia 
mucho  viento. 

11.  i  Tiene  V.  miedo  de  los  truenos  ?    Cuando  relampaguea 
mucho,  si  seiior. 

12.  I  Por  que  no  fue  V.  anoche  al  concierto  ?    Porque  lloviz- 
naba  y  estaba  nevando. 

13.  I  A  que  horas  come  Y.  ?    Al  amanecer  tomo  chocolate  ; 
al  medio  dia  como,  y  al  anochecer  tomo  el  te. 


156  LESSOy  XXX. 

14.  I  Se  levanta  V.  al  amanecer  todos  los  dias  ?    Cuando  es 
menester,  si  seiior. 

15.  e  AquehorasalioV.  delteatroelsabado?    A  media  noche. 

16.  I  Cuando  salieron  sus  hermanas  para  el  campo  ?    Ayer  al 
medio  dia. 

17.  t  Cuando  volveran  ?    Pasado  maiiana  por  la  noche. 

18.  I  A  que  hora  amanece  en  el  verano  ?    En  verano  amanece 
a  las  cinco  y  anochece  a  las  siete  y  media. 

19.  I  Por  que  se  march  a  V.  tan  pronto  ?    Porque  es  menester. 

20.  e  Es  menester  salir  al  amanecer  ?    No,  basta  salir  al  medio 
dia. 

21.  I  Hay  muchos  alemanes  en  Nueva  York  ?    Si,  senor,  hay 
muchisimos. 

22.  I  Cuantos  dias  hace  que  no  lo  ve  V.  ?    No  hace  mas  que 
uno. 

23.  e  Hay  algiin  frances  en  su  casa  de  Y.  ?    Hay  cuatro  fran 
ceses  y  una  francesa. 

24.  e  Cuando  vinieron  Yds.  ?    Ayer  al  medio  dia. 

25.  I  Cree  Y.  que  llovera  hoy  ?    Parece  que  si,  porque  hace 
mucho  viento  y  mucho  calor. 

26.  h  Llovio  mucho  aqui  el  ano  pasado  ?    Aqui  Uovio  mucho, 
pero  en  la  Habana  llovio  mas. 

27.  I  Nieva  mucho  en  este  pais  ?    En  el  invierno  nieva  mucho. 

28.  I  Se  hiela  el  agua  ?    Muchas  veces. 

29.  e  Habra  mucho  hielo  el  ano  proximo  ?    En  el  invierno 
habra  mucho  hielo. 

30.  e  Hace  mucho  f rio  ?    Si,  senor,  y  al  amanecer  llovia  y  gra- 
nizaba. 

31.  I  Por  que  hace  tanto  frio  hoy  ?    Porque  nevo  ayer. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  it  raining  ?    I  do  not  know. 

2.  You  do  not  know  ?  How,  are  you  still  in  bed  ? — Yes,  and 
I  shall  be  until  seven  o'clock. 

3.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  go  to  bed  ?    At  midnight. 

4.  What  is  it  necessary  to  do  in  order  to  learn  Spanish  ?  It 
is  necessary  to  study  a  good  grammar,  talk  a  great  deal  with  Span- 
iards, and  read  the  works  of  good  authors. 

5.  What  were  you  doing  in  the  garden  this  morning  at  day- 
break ?    I  was  walking. 


LESSON  XXX.  157 

6.  Have  you  read  the  Spanish  newspaper  yet  that  I  lent  * 
you  ?    Yes,  sir,  here  it  is.     Thank  you. 

7.  What  language  do  they  speak  in  Brazil  ?    Portuguese 
{portugues). 

8.  Do  you  see  that  lightning  f  ?    Yes,  it  is  lightening  and 
thundering  very  much. 

9.  Is  it  proper  to  have  the  windows  open  when  it  thunders  ? 
No,  it  is  better  to  have  them  shut  (cerradas). 

10.  I  think  (it  appears  to  me)  it  will  soon  rain.  Yes,  I  think 
so  too  ;  it  is  already  drizzling. 

11.  John  !  Sir.  Is  there  any  water  in  my  room  ? — No,  sir, 
hut  if  you  wish,  I  shall  take  some  there  now. 

12.  In  what  months  of  the  year  does  it  freeze  most  in  New 
York  ?    During  (durante)  the  months  of  January  and  February. 

13.  I  believe  there  is  a  great  deal  of  ice  used  (se  usa)  in  New 
York  during  the  summer.     A  great  deal,  and  it  is  very  cheap. 

14.  It  appears  that  there  will  be  little  ice  next  summer.  Very 
little,  the  winter  has  not  been  cold  enough  to  have  much. 

15.  What  watch  is  that  which  you  have  there  ?  It  is  the  one 
I  always  had. 

16.  I  thought  you  had  given  your  watch  to  Charles,  and 
bought  your  (the)  neighbor's  ?  No,  Charles  has  a  very  pretty 
little  watch. 

17.  What  o'clock  is  it  by  your  watch  ?  It  is  just  four  o'clock 
(son  las  cuatro  en  punto). 

18.  Who  knocked  at  the  door  just  now  ?  It  was  Mrs.  Mar- 
tinez ;  it  is  thundering,  and  you  know  she  is  afraid  of  the  light- 
ning. 

19.  Why  did  she  not  come  in  ?  She  did  not  like  to  (would 
not)  disturb  you  (molestarle  a  V.),  madam. 

20.  Do  you  know  whether  Alexander  has  sent  the  papers  to 
his  brother  yet  ?    I  think  he  has  (me  parece  que  si). 

21.  Did  you  take  him  the  two  volumes  I  showed  him  yester- 
day ?     I  took  them  to  him  this  morning. 

22.  Was  he  in  the  house  when  you  went  ?  No,  madam,  he 
had  just  gone  out. 

23.  Will  you  open  that  window,  if  you  please  ?  With 
pleasure. 

24.  And  this  one  also  ?  No,  thank  you  ;  it  is  better  to  have 
that  one  shut. 

*  Prestar.  t  Kelampago. 


158 


LUSSON  XXXL 


25.  What  kind  of  weather  is  it  to-day  ?  Very  bad  ;  it  has 
been  raining  and  hailing  ever  since  (desde)  daybreak. 

2Q.  Madam,  here  ai^e  two  beautiful  bouquets  that  Mrs.  Garcia 
has  sent  you  from  her  garden.     She  is  very  kind  (buena). 

27.  Who  brought  them  ?    Her  servant  (fern.). 

28.  When  did  she  bring  them  ?  You  had  no  sooner  gone  out 
than  she  came. 

29.  How  windy  it  was  last  night !  Yes,  and  it  rained  in 
torrents  the  whole  night,  from  nightfall  until  daybreak  this 
morning. 

30.  What  news  is  there  from  Europe  ?  I  do  not  know  ;  I 
have  not  yet  seen  the  newspapers. 


LESSO]^    XXXI. 


Gustar. 


To  like,  to  please. 


PRESENT. 


(A  mi)  me  gusta  or  gustan. 

(A  ti)  te  gusta  " 

(A  el)  le  gusta  '' 

(A  nosotros)  nos  gusta,  or  gustan. 

(A  vosotros)  OS  gusta,  " 

(A  ellos)  les  gusta,  " 


I  like  it  or  them. 
Thou  likest  it  or  them. 
He  likes  it  " 

We  like  it 
You  like  it  " 

They  like  it 


(A  mi)  me  gustaba  or  gustaban 
(A  ti)  te  gustaba,  &c. 
Gustar  de. 


IMPERFECT. 

I  liked  it  or  them. 

Thou  likedst  it,  &c. 

To  be  fond  of. 


Gusto  de. 
Gustas  de. 
Gusta  de. 
Gustamos  de. 
Gustais  de. 
Gustan  de. 


PRESENT. 

I  am  fond  of. 
Thou  art  fond  of. 
He  is  fond  of. 
We  are  fond  of. 
You  are  fond  of. 
They  are  fond  of. 


LESSON  XXXI. 


159 


IMPERFECT. 


Gustaba  de. 

I  was  or  used  to  be  fond  of. 

Gustabas  de 

&;c. 

Thou  wast  or  used  to  be  fond 

of,  Sec. 

Gustar. 

1     To  taste. 

Placer. 

To  please. 

Pesar  {impersonal). 

To  regret. 

Pesar  {in  all  its  persons). 

To  weigh. 

Faltar  or  hacer  f alta. 

To  want. 

Faltar. 

To  fail,  to  be 
ing. 

wanting  or  miss- 

Acorn  odar. 

To  suit,  to  accommodate. 

Convenir. 

To  suit,  to  be  convenient. 

Importar. 

To  be  important. 

Cerca. 

Near. 

Lejos. 

Far. 

Dentro. 

Within. 

Fuera. 

Without. 

Bella 

Beautiful,  fine 

. 

Posible. 

Possible. 

Imposible. 

Impossible. 

Poeta. 

Poet. 

Poesia. 

Poetry,  poem. 

Pintor. 

Painter. 

Pintura. 

Painting. 

Escultor. 

Sculptor. 

Escultura. 

Sculpture. 

Placer. 

Pleasure. 

Prosa. 

Prose. 

Dios. 

God. 

Fruta. 

Fruit. 

Pesar. 

Eegret,  sorrow. 

Manzana. 

Apple. 

Melon. 

Melon. 

Naranja. 

Orange. 

Melocoton.  ) 
Durazno.*^    ) 

Peach. 

Artes  {plu.). 

Arts. 

Arroba. 

Arroba. 

Arte. 

Art,  skill. 

*  Durazno,  peach,  the  word  most  commonly  used  in  many  parts  of 
the  Americas. 


160 


LESSON  XXXL 


COMPOSITION. 


4  Le  gusta  d  V.  la  f ruta  I 

Si,  senor,  me  gustan  las  naranjas  y 

los  melones. 
A  mi  me  gustan  los  melocotones  y 

las  manzanas. 
4  Cual  de  las  bellas  artes  le  gusta  a 

V.  mas? 
Me  gustan  todas,  la  miisica,  la  poe- 

sia,  la  pintura  y  la  escultura. 
|Va  V.  a  la  opera  muy  a  menudof 
Voy  dos  6  tres  veces  por  semana. 
Me  parece  que  llovera  pronto,  y  me 

gusta  porque  tengo  un  gran  placer 

en  ver  Hover. 

I  Es  posible !    A  mi  no  me  gusta  ver 
Hover ;  pero  me  gusta  muchisimo 
ver  nevar. 
%  Le  acomoda  a  V.  ese  caballo  f 
No  me   conviene,  porque  es  muy 
viejo,  asi  que  no  lo  comprare. 

4  Vive  V.  cerca  6  lejos  de  aquil 
Vivo  muy  cerca. 

4  Vive  V.  dentro  6  f  uera  de  la  ciudad  ? 
Ahora  en  la  ciudad ;  pero  en  el  ve- 

rano  vivo  en  el  campo. 
4  Que  le  f alta  a  V.  para  ser  f  eliz  I 

No  me  falta  nada,  gracias  a  Bios. 
Deseo  conocer  al  pintor  cuya  pin- 
tura tiene  V.  en  su  cuarto. 

4  Le  pesa  k  V.  no  haber  estado  en 

el  concierto  i 
Me  pesa  mucho  no  haber  estado, 

porque  no  tuve  el  placer  de  ver  a 

su  amigo  de  V. 
A  mi  me  pesa  tambien. 


Do  you  like  fruit  f 

Yes,  sir,  I  like  oranges  and  melons. 

I  like  peaches  and  apples. 

Which  of  the  fine  arts  do  you  like 
best  ? 

I  like  them  all,  music,  poetry,  paint- 
ing, and  sculpture. 

Do  you  go  to  the  opera  very  often  T 

I  go  two  or  three  times  a  week. 

It  appears  to  me  that  it  will  soon 
rain,  and  I  am  glad  of  it  (I  like 
it),  because  I  find  (have  a)  great 
pleasure  in  seeing  it  rain. 

Is  it  possible !  I  do  not  like  to  see 
it  rain ;  but  I  like  to  see  it  snow. 

Does  that  horse  suit  you  ? 

It  does  not  suit  (or  answer)  me,  be- 
cause it  is  very  old,  so  that  I  shall 
not  buy  it. 

Do  you  live  near  here,  or  far  away  ? 

I  live  very  near. 

Do  you  live  in  or  out  of  town  ? 

In  town  now,  but  in  the  country  in 
summer. 

What  do  you  want  (is  wanting  to 
you)  to  be  happy  ? 

I  want  nothing,  thank  God. 

I  desire  (or  wish)  to  know  the  painter 
whose  painting  you  have  in  your 
room. 

Do  you  regret  not  having  been  at 
the  concert  ? 

I  deeply  (very  much)  regret  not  hav- 
ing been  there,  for  I  had  not  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  your  friend. 

I  regret  it  too  (also). 


LESSON  XXXL 


161 


EXPLANATION. 

154.  GusTAE,  derived  from  the  noun  gusto ^  pleasure,  and 
signifying  literally  to  give  pleasure  to^  is  the  verb  by  which  we 
translate  to  like ;  but  in  passing  from  English  to  Spanish,  the 
nominative  case  or  subject  becomes  the  objective,  and  the 
latter  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  d ;  as, 

%  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  poesia  ?  I  Do  you  like  poetry  ? 

Me  gusta  {or  a  mi  me  gusta)  mucho.  1 1  like  it  very  much. 

155.  GusTAR,  followed  by  the  preposition  de^  means  to  le 
fond  of  and  sentences  in  which  it  is  used  are  constructed  as 
in  English ;  as. 


Yo  gusto  de  la  musica. 
fil  gusta  de  la  poesia. 


1 1  am  fond  of  music. 
I  He  is  fond  of  poetry. 


156.  GuSTAR,  used  as  an  active  verb,  means  to  taste,  and 
governs  the  objective,  without  the  aid  of  any  preposition 
whatever ;  as. 


j,  Gusta  V.  la  sopa  *? 

No,  senor,  gusto  la  came. 


I  Do  you  taste  the  soup  ? 
I  No,  sir,  I  taste  the  meat. 


157.  The  verbs  pesar,  to  regret ;  faltar,  in  the  sense  of 
to  want,  or  Jiacer  falta,  to  have  need  of  ;  acomodar,  to  suit ; 
convenir,  to  suit ;  importar,  to  be  important ;  placer,  to  please, 
and  some  others,  require  the  same  idiomatic  construction  of 
the  sentence  as  that  explained  in  the  case  of  gustar  ;  as. 


Nos  falta  {or  nos  hace  falta)  dinero. 
k.  V.  le  importa  ese  negocio. 
Mucho  me  place. 


We  want  {or  are  in  want  of)  money. 
That  business  is  important  to  you. 
It  pleases  me  much. 


This  last  verb  is  defective,  and  is  very  little  used,  except 
in  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  mode,  as  will 
be  seen  in  the  proper  place. 

158.  The  verb  pesar,  when  meaning  to  regret,  sometimes 
takes  the  preposition  de  after  it,  when  followed  by  an  in- 
finitive ;  as, 

Me  pesa  de  haber  venido.  |  I  regret  having  come. 

13 


jg2  LESSON  XXXL 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  I  Le  gusta  a  V.  la  opera  ?    Cuando  era  joven  me  gustaba 

mas  que  ahora. 

2.  i  Vendra  V.  manana  a  comer  con  nosotros  ?    fei,  senor,  no 

faltare.  ,         .  ,, 

3.  ^  Necesita  V.  hoy  su  relo j  ?    Hoy  no  me  h^Q  f  alta,  manana 

me  con  vendra  tenerlo. 

4.  i  Quiere  V.  saber  lo  que  he  hecho  hoy  ?    No  me  importa 

saberlo 

5.  [  Compra  V.  el  cabaUo  del  ingles  ?    No,  senor,  no  me  con- 

viene  :  es  muy  caro. 

6   Dicen  que  es  muy  bueno.    No  importa. 

7.  i  Por  que  vive  V.  tan  lejos  de  la  ciudad  ?  Porque  no  me 
gustan  vecinos.  ., 

8.  Antes  vivia  V.  comodamente  cerca  de  la  poblacion.     bi ; 

pero  ahora  no  me  gusta. 

9.  I  Cuantas  arrobas  pesa  V.  ?    Peso  ocho  arrobas  y  cinco 

libras. 

10.  I  Ha  visto  V.  a  su  prima  ?  No,  seiior,  y  me  pesa  mucho 
no  haberla  visto. 

11.  I  Cuanto  pesa  su  nino  de  V.  ?  No  se,  porque  no  lo  hemos 
pesado  aiin. 

12.  i  Quiere  V.  ir  a  paseo  con  D.  Carlos,  nuestro  vecino  ?  No 
quiero  ir  con  el  porque  habla  mucho,  y  no  me  gustan  los  habla- 
dores. 

13.  No  obstante,  el  ano  pasado  estaba  V.  en  buena  amistad 
con  el.    Si ;  pero  ahora  me  pesa  y  me  pesara  siempre. 

14.  I  Nunca  seran  Vds.  amigos  otra  vez  ?  Jamas :  es  im 
posible. 

15.  I  Por  que  ?    No  puedo  decirselo  a  V. 

16.  I  Eso  no  le  gustara  a  el  ?    Nada  me  importa. 

17.  I  Estan  Vds.  comiendo  pan  ?  No,  senor,  estamos  comiendo 
fruta. 

18.  I  Gusta  V.  ?  *    Si,  comere  una  manzana. 

19.  I  No  le  gustan  a  V.  los  melones  ?  Si,  senor  ;  pero  me  gus- 
tan mas  los  melocotones  y  las  naranjas. 

20.  I  Quien  es  aquella  senorita  tan  bella  que  paseaba  ayer  con 
V.  en  el  parque  ?    Es  una  amiga  mia. 

♦  Literally,  do  you  wish;  but  it  means,  would  you  Uke  somef  will  you 
have  some  f 


LESSON  XXXI.  163 

21.  8  Que  son  los  hombres  que  vinieron  antes  de  ayer  con  V.  ? 
El  uno  es  poeta,  el  otro  pintor  y  escultor  el  otro. 

22.  I  Cual  de  las  bellas  artes  le  gusta  a  V.  mas  ?    Todas  me 
gustan  ;  pero  la  poesia  mas  que  las  otras. 

23.  i  Le  gusta  a  V.  leer  una  bella  poesia  ?    Si,  senor,  me  gusta 
mucho. 

24.  g  Hace  mucho  frio  hoy  ?    Fuera  hace  bastante  ;  pero  den- 
tro  de  casa  hace  muy  poco. 

25.  I  Por  que  no  f  ue  V.  al  baile  anoche  ?    Porque  no  me  gus- 
tan los  bailes. 

26.  e  Es  posible  que  siendo  tan  joven  no  le  gusten  a  V.  ?    A 
mi  me  importa  estudiar  ;  no  bailar. 

27.  e  Por  que  no  quiere  V.  bailar  ?    Porque  estoy  cansado. 

28.  I  Que  es  lo  que  le  hace  falta  a  V.  para  ser  f eliz  ?    Nada  me 
hace  falta  por  ahora,  gracias  a  Dios. 

29.  t  Que  le  falta  a  V.  ?    Me  falta  el  sombrero. 

30.  Aqui  esta.    i  Se  marcha  V.  ? — Si,  seiior,  si  V.  no  manda 
otra  cosa. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Are  your  brothers  and  sisters  fond  of  study  ?    They  are 
not  so  fond  of  it  as  some  children  I  have  known. 

2.  Do  they  ever  read  poetry  ?    Sometimes,  but  not  very  often. 

3.  Do  you  understand  Spanish  poetry  ?    Not  yet ;  but  I  un- 
derstand prose  perfectly  well. 

4.  Do  you  ever  eat  fruit  ?    Yes,  I  am  very  fond  of  apples, 
oranges,  peaches  and  melons. 

5.  Is  that  gentleman  a  sculptor  ?    No,  madam,  he  is  a  painter, 
and  enjoys  a  high  reputation. 

6.  Do  you  know  that  it  is  raining  ?    Eaining  !  no,  I  did  not 
(know  it). 

7.  Do  you  think  it  is  going  to  thunder  ?     I  think  it  is  (I 
think  so). 

8.  Then  it  is  impossible  to  go  out  ?    By  no  means  (de  ningun 
modo) ;  we  are  not  afraid  of  lightning. 

9.  Does  it  always  lighten  when  it  rains  ?    Not  always. 

10.  Good  morning,  Mr.  Retortillo,  how  do  you  do  ?     Very 
well,  thank  you ;  and  how  are  you  (and  you)  ? 

11.  What  do  you  wish  ?    I  have  come  to  see  if  this  letter  is 
correctly  written  ?    It  is  perfectly  correct. 


164  LESSON  XXXI. 

12.  Who  wrote  that  letter  ?  A  friend  of  mine,  who  writes 
Spanish  very  well. 

13.  Why  do  you  not  learn  Spanish  yourself  ?  I  have  no  time, 
and  I  regret  it  very  much. 

14.  What  profession  (profesidn)  do  you  like  best  ?  Of  all 
professions  I  like  that  of  a  physician  best. 

15.  When  did  you  see  Miss  Melendez  ?  I  had  the  pleasure  of 
seeing  her  the  other  day. 

16.  How  do  you  like  (que  tal)  your  new  piano  ?    Very  much. 

17.  Who  is  your  music  teacher  ?  I  have  none  just  now ;  but 
I  used  to  have  a  German  teacher. 

18.  How  much  do  you  weigh  ?  I  weigh  a  hundred  and  sixty- 
five  pounds  (libras). 

19.  Does  Charles  weigh  as  much  as  Alexander  ?  No,  sir, 
Alexander  weighs  twenty  pounds  more. 

20.  Is  Mr.  Martinez  at  home  ?    No,  sir,  he  is  out. 

21.  When  will  he  be  in  ?  I  do  not  know ;  he  did  not  say  (it) 
when  he  was  going  out  (al  salir). 

22.  Does  your  uncle  live  in  or  out  of  town  ?  In  summer  he 
lives  out  of  town. 

23.  When  he  is  in  town  where  does  he  live  ?  On  Twenty- 
second  street,  near  Fifth  avenue. 

24.  How  did  you  spend  your  time  when  you  were  in  the 
country  ?  I  walked  morning  and  evening,  and  during  the  day  I 
read  the  beautiful  poems  of  Zorrilla  and  Espronceda. 

25.  Have  you  ever  read  any  of  Martinez  de  la  Rosa's  poems  ? 
Yes,  but  I  do  not  like  them  so  well  as  those  of  Melendez. 

26.  Which  is  the  greatest  Spanish  painter  ?  Spain  has  had  a 
great  number  of  excellent  painters,  but  the  most  celebrated  of  all 
are  Murillo  and  Velazquez. 

27.  Are  your  cousins  pleased  with  their  new  house  ?  I  believe 
so ;  but  they  say  they  liked  the  old  one  better. 

28.  Where  did  they  live  before  taking  the  house  in  which 
they  reside  now  ?    On  Fourteenth  street,  near  Seventh  avenue. 

29.  Are  they  not  comfortable  in  the  new  one  ?  It  is  not  for 
that ;  but  they  are  very  fond  of  flowers,  and  they  have  no  gar- 
den now. 

30.  Will  you  come  out  and  take  a  walk  with  me  ?  Yes,  if 
Emanuel  comes  with  us ;  if  not,  I  shall  go  and  practice  on  the 
piano. 


LESSON  XXXII. 


165 


LESSON    XXXII. 


Poder.    {See  this  verb  at  the 

To  be  able ;  may,  Sec. 

end  of  the  book.) 

Esperar. 

To  expect,  to  wait  for,  to  hope. 

Castigar. 

To  punish. 

Enganar. 

To  deceive,  to  cheat. 

Quemar. 

To  burn. 

Tratar. 

To  treat;  to    have  intercourse 

with. 

Tratar  de. 

To  endeavor,  to  try,  to  treat  of. 

Tratar  en. 

To  deal  in. 

Seguir.     (See  this  verb  at  the 

To  follow. 

end  of  the  book.) 

ADVERBS   AND   ADVERBIAL   PHRASES. 

Casi. 

Almost,  nearly. 

I  Cuanto  tiempo  ? 

How  long  ? 

Cuanto  antes. 

As  soon  as  possible. 

De  moda. 

Fashionable. 

De  balde.       ) 
Gratis.           ) 

Gratis;  for  nothing. 

De  cuando  en  euando. 

From  time  to  time ;  now  and 

then. 

De  improviso. 

Suddenly,     unexpectedly,    un- 

awares. 

De  veras.               ; 
Verdaderamente.  )  ' 

Indeed,  truly. 

En  lo  sucesivo.    i 

En  el  porvenir.   " 

In  future. 

En  lo  future.      ) 

Hasta  no  mas. 

To  the  utmost,  to  the  extreme. 

Poco  a  poco. 

Little  by  little,  by  degrees,  gen- 

tly. 

Por  supuesto. 

Of  course. 

Tal  vez.  ) 
Acaso.    ) 

Perhaps. 

Picaro.         Eogue  (roguish). 

Coqueta.            Coquette. 

Bribon.         Kascal. 

Sociedad.          Society. 

Ejemplo.      Example;  instance. 

Politica.            Politics. 

166 


LFSSON  XXXIL 


COMPOSITION. 


Mi  hermano  esta  castigado  algunas 
veces  por  no  saber  sus  lecciones. 

Y  su  amigo  de  V.  Alejandro,  4  lo  es 
alguna  vez  ? 

Lo  es  de  cuando  en  cuando ;  pero 
mi  hermana  no  ha  sido  castigada 
jamas,  porque  sabe  siempre  sus 
lecciones. 

I  Ha  sido  V.  engaSado  alguna  vez  ? 

Hasta  no  mas,  porque  hay  muchos 
picaros  en  la  sociedad. 

Esta  casa  esta  bien  situada. 

La  carta  estaba  mal  escrita. 

Manuel  es  am  ado  de  {or  por)  Mar- 
garita. 

El  libro  ha  sido  escrito  por  un  f ran- 
ees. 

Se    quemo     {or  fue   quemada)    la 

casa. 

Esta  casa  se  hizo  en  seis  meses. 

I  En  cudnto  tiempo  se  hizo  la  de  V.  ? 

En  cosa  de  tres  meses. 

I  Cuanto  tiempo  necesita  V.  para  es- 

cribir  esa  carta  ? 
Esta  casi  acabada ;  estoy  con  V.  en 

un  minuto. 
Poco  a  poco  ;  ra  V.  muy  aprisa. 
Tal  vez ;  pero  tengo  prisa  y  quiero 

acabar  pronto. 
I  De  veras  ? 
Por  supuesto :  tengo  que  ir  al  correo. 

Dios  estd  en  todas  partes,  lo  sabe  y 
lo  puede  todo,  y  nos  perdonara  si 
tratamos  de  hacer  nuestro  deber. 


i  Es  su  reloj  de  V.  de  moda  ? 
Si,  se3or ;  pero  no  me  gusta,  porque 
es  muy  pequeiio. 


My  brother  is  sometimes  punished 
for  not  knowing  his  lessons. 

And  your  friend  Alexander,  is  he 
ever  punished  (ever  so)  ? 

He  is,  now  and  then ;  but  my  sister 
has  never  been  punished,  because 
she  always  knows  her  lessons. 

Have  you  ever  been  deceived  f 

To  the  utmost,  for  there  are  a  great 

many  rogues  in  society. 
This  house  is  well  situated. 
The  letter  was  badly  written. 
Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret. 

The  book  was  written  by  a  French- 
man. 
The  house  was  burnt. 

This  house  was  built  (made)  in  six 
months. 

How  long  was  yours  in  building 
(making)  ? 

About  three  months. 

How  long  shall  you  be  in  writing 
that  letter? 

It  is  almost  finished ;  I  shall  be  (am) 
with  you  in  a  moment  (minute). 

Gently  :  you  go  very  quick. 

Perhaps  so  ;  but  I  am  in  haste,  and 
I  want  to  get  done  (finish)  soon. 

Indeed?  . 

Of  course :  I  have  to  go  to  the  post- 
ofiice. 

(xod  is  everywhere ;  He  knows  all 
things,  and  nothing  is  impossible 
for  Him  (can  do  all) ;  and  He  will 
pardon  us,  if  we  endeavor  to  do 
our  duty. 

Is  your  watch  fashionable  f 

Yes,  sir;  but  I  do  not  like  it,  be- 
cause it  is  too  small. 


LJESSON  XXXIL  167 

EXPLANATION. 
159.  Passive  Voice.— The  past  tenses  of  this  voice  are 
usually  formed  by  the  different  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  ser 
added  to  the  past  participle  of  the  verb,  care  being  taken  that 
the  participle  agree  with  the  subject,  in  gender  and  number, 
like  an  adjective  ;  as, 


Soy  amado. 
Hemos  sido  amados. 
Habeis  sido  amadas. 
Seras  amada. 


I  am  loved. 
We  have  been  loved. 
You  have  been  loved. 
Thou  wilt  be  loved. 


When,  however,  the  action  of  the  verb  is  conceived  of  as 
in  the  present,  or  when  allusion  is  made  to  a  state  or  condi- 
tion, the  forms  of  estar  are  more  common ;  as. 

La  carta  estaba  mal  escrita.  I  The  letter  was  badly  written. 

Esta  casa  estd  bien  situada.  I  This  house  is  well  located, 

160.  The  passive  verb  formed  by  ser  is  used  in  Spanish  in 
the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mode,  only  when 
it  is  designed  to  express  a  mental  act ;  as, 

Manuel  es  amado  de  Margarita.        |  Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret. 

When  a  mental  act  is  not  expressed,  the  passive  verb  be- 
ing in  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  indicative  mode,  estar 
is  the  auxiliary  to  be  used,  and  not  ser ;  as. 

El  libro  ha  sido  escrito  por  un  Iran-    The  book  was  written  by  a  French- 
ces,  or  el  libro  estd  escrito  por  un       man. 
frances  (instead  of  es  escrito). 

161.  When  the  action  of  the  verb  refers  to  the  mind,  the 
preposition  de  or  por  may  be  used  after  the  passive  verb,  be- 
fore the  agent,  and  por  only,  when  otherwise  ;  as, 

Manuel  es  amado  de  (or  por)  Marga- 1  Emanuel  is  loved  by  Margaret, 
rita.  I 

162.  The  Spanish  language  very  often  makes  use  of  the 
reflexive  se  where  in  English  the  passive  voice  is  employed ; 
as, 

Se  quemo  la  casa.  The  house  was  burnt. 

Esta  casa  se  hizo  en  seis  meses.  This  house  was  built  (made)  in  six 

months. 


168  LESSOJSr  XXXII. 

163.  This  form  is  preferred  when  the  subject  is  an  inani- 
mate thing,  or  when  it  is  undetermined. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  i  No  puede  V.  esperar  ?    Esperai'e  un  poco. 

2.  I  No  me  enganara  V.  ?  Por  supuesto  que  no ;  yo  no  soy 
ningiin  picaro. 

3.  Buenos  dias.  l  De  que  estan  Yds.  tratando  ?— Estabamos 
hablando  de  modas. 

4.  i  Puede  V.  decirme  si  mi  sombrero  es  de  moda  ?  No  es 
de  la  ultima  (moda). 

5.  I  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  paso  esta  moda  ?  Habra  ya  un 
mes,  poco  mas  6  menos. 

6.  e  Quiere  V.  quemar  las  cartas  de  esa  senorita  ?  Si,  senor, 
porque  es  una  coqueta. 

7.  I  De  veras  ?  Yo  creia  que  era  una  senorita  de  mucha  cir- 
cunspeccion.  Hace  algiin  tiempo  lo  era;  pero  poco  a  poco  ha 
ido  siguiendo  el  ejemplo  de  otras. 

8.  e  Tal  vez  el  ser  coqueta  es  de  moda  en  la  sociedad  del  dia  ? 
Asi  lo  creo. 

9.  Y.  debe  excusar  a  las  niiias ;  ellas  son  inocentes  y  no  creen 
hacer  mal  en  eso. 

10.  I  Ha  sido  Y.  enganado  alguna  vez  ?  Hasta  no  mas ;  por- 
que hay  muchos  picaros. 

11.  I  Han  sido  castigados  sus  ninos  de  Y.  ?  Si,  senor,  ban  sido 
castigados  por  no  saber  sus  lecciones. 

12.  I Y  aquel  criado  tan  bueno  que  Y.  tenia  ?  Es  im  bribon ; 
no  lo  quiero  ni  de  balde. 

13.  I  De  veras  ?  Y.  lo  trataba  muy  bien.  Acaso  por  lo  mismo 
que  yo  lo  trataba  bien,  me  ha  tratado  el  tan  mal. 

14.  i  Le  gusta  a  Y.  la  sociedad  ?  Si,  senor,  de  cuando  en 
cuando. 

15.  I  Por  que  pues  no  vive  Y.,  en  la  ciudad  ?  Porque  se  me 
quemo  la  casa. 

16.  i  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  ?    Casi  un  mes. 

17.  Y  ahora,  i  no  va  Y.  alia  nunca  ?  Yoy  de  cuando  en 
cuando. 

18.  Eso  es  verdaderamente  un  gran  mal ;  pero  en  lo  sucesivo 
tendra  Y.  mas  cuidado.— Por  supuesto  que  si. 

19.  I  No  pudo  Y.  saber  quien  le  quemo  la  casa  ?  No ;  pero 
creo  que  fue  im  bribon,  que  me  queria  mal. 


LESSON  XXXII.  169 

20.  i  Quiere  Y.  acabar  ya  ?  Si,  cuanto  antes ;  no  puedo  espe- 
rar  mas. 

'  21.  I  Que  piensa  V.  hacer  ahora  ?    Trato  de  castigar  al  que  me 
quemo  la  easa. 

22.  I  Y  despues  ?    Despues  vere  si  puedo  hacer  otra. 

23.  I  Y  no  tiene  Y.  ahora  ninguna  alia  ?  Tengo  una  hecha 
de  improviso. 

24.  Poco  a  poco  ira  Y.  haciendo  otra.    Asi  lo  espero. 

25.  I  Por  supuesto  que  su  seiiora  vivira  en  la  ciudad  ?  Si ; 
pero  va  alia  de  cuando  en  cuando ;  el  otro  dia  llego  de  impro- 
viso, cuando  menos  la  esperaba. 

2Q.  i  No  puede  Y.  volver  manana  por  aqui  ?  Manana  tal  vez 
no,  pero  pasado  si. 

27.  Entonces  le  espero  a  Y.  sin  f alta.  Puede  Y.  esperarme  ; 
no  f altare. 

28.  i  Ira  Y.  hoy  a  la  comedia  6  a  la  opera  ?  Tal  vez  ire  a  la 
opera,  porque  es  mas  de  moda. 

29.  I  Nunca  va  Y.  a  la  comedia  ?  Si ;  voy  de  cuando  en 
cuando. 

30.  I  Sabe  Y.  que  se  ha  quemado  la  Academia  {academy)  de 
Miisica  ?    Si ;  anoche  lo  lei  en  los  periodicos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Papa,  may  I  go  out  ?    Yes,  you  may  go  out  for  half  an 
hour. 

2.  How  long  is  it  since  your  house  was  burnt  ?    Only  three 
weeks. 

3.  Why  does  that  woman  punish  her  children  so  much  ? 
She  always  punishes  them  when  they  do  wrong  (obrar  mal). 

4.  Does  she  reward  (recompensar)  them  when  they  do  right  ? 
I  believe  she  does. 

5.  Why  do  you  burn  all  that  young  lady's  letters  ?    Because 
she  is  only  a  coquette. 

6.  I  think  you  are  wrong ;  I  have  known  her  a  long  time, 
and  I  believe  she  is  very  circumspect  (circunspecta). 

7.  Why  does  your  family  always  live  in  the  country  ?    Be- 
cause we  do  not  like  society. 

8.  And  is  it  not  possible  to  live  in  town  without  going  into 
society  ?    It  is  impossible. 

9.  We  always  live  in  town,  and  yet  (sin  embargo)  we  never 
go  into  society. 


170  LESSON  XXXII. 

10.  Peter,  can  you  write  that  letter  for  me  now  ?    I  can. 

11.  When  do  you  want  it  ?    As  soon  as  possible. 

12.  Have  you  ever  been  deceived  by  that  man  ?  Yes,  ve^ 
often ;  he  is  a  rascal. 

13.  How  long  have  you  known  him  ?  Not  long ;  but  each 
time  I  have  had  business  with  him,  he  has  deceived  me. 

14.  Indeed  !    What  business  is  he  in  ?    I  cannot  tell  you. 

15.  Do  you  often  go  to  the  theatre  ?  Never  to  the  theatre ;  I 
go  to  the  opera  now  and  then. 

16.  Can  you  tell  me  whether  my  hat  is  fashionable  ?  Yes,  it 
is  in  the  latest  fashion. 

17.  Is  Peter's  the  fashion  too  ?  No,  those  hats  went  out  of 
fashion  last  year. 

18.  Where  is  your  old  servant  ?  He  lives  with  us  no 
longer. 

19.  Did  you  give  Charles  the  fruit  you  were  to  buy  for 
him  ?  No,  he  came  for  it  the  other  day,  but  I  had  not  had 
time  to  buy  it. 

20.  Why  did  you  come  so  late  to-day  to  your  lesson  ?  My 
exercise  was  very  difficult,  and  I  could  not  finish  it  in  time. 

21.  Well,  I  hope  you  will  come  in  time  in  future  ?  Yes,  in 
future  I  shall  come  at  four  o'clock  precisely. 

22.  I  hope  you  will  not  deceive  me  ?  Of  course  I  shall  not ; 
I  never  deceive  anybody. 

23.  Will  that  young  gentleman  *  be  at  the  concert  with  you 
to-morrow  night  ?    Perhaps  he  will  go  with  us. 

24.  Does  he  not  go  every  night  ?    Indeed  I  do  not  know. 

25.  How  long  is  it  since  you  began  to  take  lessons  ?  About 
{cerca  de)  four  months. 

2Q.  And  do  your  brother  and  sister  take  their  lessons  at  the 
same  hour  as  you  ?  No,  my  brother  takes  his  at  ten  o'clock,  and 
my  sister  at  twelve. 

27.  Where  did  you  become  acquainted  with  the  gentleman 
who  danced  last  with  your  cousin  (fern.)  yesterday  evening  ?  I 
made  his  acquaintance  in  Madrid  the  year  before  last  (hace  dos 
afios), 

28.  Has  this  young  man  deceived  you  as  often  as  his  father  ? 
He  has ;  you  know  children  almost  always  follow  the  example 
of  their  parents  {padres). 


*  Caballerito. 


LESSON  XXXIIL 


171 


29.  Do  you  think  Charles  is  loved  by  Louisa  ?    I  think  she 
loves  him  as  much  as  it  is  possible  to  love. 

30.  What  did  you  tell  the  tailor  ?    I  told  him  you  wanted 
your  coat  and  vest  for  the  day  after  to-morrow. 


LESSON-    XXXIII. 


REFLEXIVE  VERBS. 


INFINITIVE   MODE. 


Lavarse. 
Haberse  lavado. 
Haberse  de  lavar. 


To  wash  one's  self. 
To  have  washed  one's  self. 
To  have  to  wash  one's  self. 


PEESENT   PARTICIPLE. 


Lavandose. 
Habiendose  lavado. 
Habiendose  de  lavar. 


Washing  one's  self. 
Having  washed  one's  self. 
Having  to  wash  one's  self. 


INDICATIVE  PEESENT. 


(Yo)  me  lavo. 
(Tii)  te  lavas. 
(El)  se  lava. 

(Nosotros)  nos  lavamos. 
(Vosotros)  OS  lavais. 
(EUos)  se  la  van. 


I  wash  myself. 
Thou  washest  thyself. 
He  washes  himself. 
We  wash  ourselves. 
You  wash  yourselves. 
They  wash  themselves. 


(The  other  simple  tenses  are  conjugated  in  like  manner,) 


(Yo)  me  he  lavado. 
(Tii)  te  has  lavado. 
(El)  se  ha  lavado. 
(Nosotros)  nos  hemos  lavado. 
(Vosotros)  OS  habeis  lavado. 
(Ellos)  se  han  lavado. 

{The  other  compound  tenses 

Cortar. 

Cortarse. 

Afeitar. 


I  have  washed  myself. 
Thou  hast  washed  thyself. 
He  has  washed  himself. 
We  have  washed  ourselves. 
You  have  washed  yourselves. 
They  have  washed  themselves. 
are  conjugated  in  like  manner.) 

To  cut. 

To  cut  one's  self ;  to  be  ashamed 

To  shave. 


172 


LESSON  XXXIIL 


Afeitarse. 

Levantar. 

Levantarse. 

Cansar. 

Cansarse. 

Descansar.      ) 

Descansarse.  ) 

Contentar. 

Contentarse. 

Burlar. 

Burlar«e. 

Preguntar. 
Responder. 
Enganar. 
Enganarse. 
Temer.    Reir. 


To  shave  one's  self. 

To  raise,  to  lift. 

To  get  up,  to  rise. 

To  weary,  to  fatigue,  to  tire. 

To  tire  one's  self,  to  get  tired. 

To  rest. 

To  content,  to  please. 

To  content  one's  self. 

To  mock,  to  jest. 

To  jest,  to  make  jest  of,  to  laugh 

at. 
To  question,  to  ask,  to  enquire. 
To  answer. 
To  deceive. 
To  deceive  one's  self. 
To  fear.    To  laugh. 


Arriba. 

Up. 

Abajo. 
Detras. 

Down. 
Behind. 

Encima. 

Upon,  above. 

Debajo. 
Luego. 
i  Que  tal  ? 

Under. 

Presently. 

How ;  how  do  you  do  ? 

Descansadamente. 

Easily. 

De  burlas. 

In  jest. 

Descansado. 

Rested. 

Contento. 

Content 

Barbero. 
Cansancio 

Descanso. 
Contento. 
Respondon. 

Cuchillo. 
Pelo  6  cabello. 


fa- 


Barber. 
Weariness^ 

tigue. 
Rest. 

Contentment. 
Ever  ready  to 

reply. 
Knife. 
Hair. 


Pregunta. 
Respuesta. 

Burla. 

Declinacion. 

Derivacion. 

Disposicion. 
Una. 


Question,  query. 
Answer. 

Jest. 

Declination. 

Derivation. 

Disposition. 
Nail  (finger). 


LUSSOJS-  XXXIIL 


173 


COMPOSITION. 


j,  A  que  hora  se  levanto  V.  ayer  ? 

Me  levante  temprano ;  me  levanto 

al  amanecer  todos  los  dias. 
J  Que  hizo  V.  entonces  f 
Me  af  eite  y  sali. 
i  Se  lava  V.  antes  de  af eitarse  I 

Me  afeito  antes  de  lavarme. 

(  Son  f  aciles  de  aprender  las  palabras 

declinacion,   derivaci6n  y  dispo- 

sicion  ? 
Son  facilisimas,  porque  casi  todas 

las  palabras  que  acaban  en  cibn 

son  lo  mismo  en  ingles,  cambiando 

la  c  en  t, 
Tengo  un  barbero  que  afeita  muy 

bien,  pero  es  carisimo ;  j,  que  tal 

afeita  el  de  V.  f 
El  mio  no  afeita  muy  bien ;  pero  es 

baratisimo,  porque  me  afeito  yo 

mismo. 
Ahora  me  afeita  el  barbero,  porque 

me  he  cortado  la  mano  y  no  pue- 

do  afeitarme  yo  mismo. 
I,  Por  que  se  burla  V.  de  su  amigo  I 
Me  burlo  de  el  porque  se  levanta 

muy  tarde. 
%  Se  ha  cansado  V.  de  estudiar  ? 
No,  seSor,  porque  cuando  me  canso 

de  estudiar,  descanso  escribiendo. 
I  Ama  V.  a  su  hermano  ? 
Nos  amamos  el  uno  al  otro. 
J  Le  gusta  a  V.  mas  preguntar  que 

responder  ? 
No,  senor,  yo  no  soy  pregunt6n,  y 

me  gusta  hacer  ambas  cosas. 
Yo  no  trabajo  mucho,  lo  hago  des- 

cansadaraente. 
jSe  engaSa  V.  a  si  mismo  alguna  vez? 
V.  habla  de  burlas ;  ^  puede  uno  en- 

gaflarse  a  si  mismo  jamas  ? 


At  what  o'clock  did  you  get  up  yes- 
terday ? 

I  rose  early;  I  rise  at  daybreak 
every  morning. 

What  did  you  do  next  (then)  % 

I  shaved  myself  and  went  out. 

Do  you  wash  yourself  before  shaving 
(yourself)  ? 

I  shave  before  washing  myself. 

Are  the  words  declination,  deriva- 
tion and  disposition  easy  to  learn  1 

They  are  very  easy,  because  all  words 
ending  in  cion  are  the  same  in 
English,  changing  the  c  into  t. 

I  have  a  barber  that  shaves  very 
well,  but  he  is  exceedingly  high 
(dear) ;  how  does  your's  shave  % 

Mine  does  hot  shave  very  well ;  but 
he  is  very  cheap,  for  I  shave  my- 
self. 

The  barber  shaves  me  at  present 
(now),  because  I  (have)  cut  my 
hand,  and  I  cannot  shave  myself. 

Why  do  you  make  fun  of  your  friend? 

I  make  fun  of  him  because  he  gets 
up  very  late. 

Have  you  got  tired  of  studying  I 

No,  sir  ;  because  when  I  get  tired  of 
studying,  I  rest  myself  by  writing. 

Do  you  love  your  brother  ? 

We  love  each  other. 

Do  you  like  to  ask  questions  better 
than  to  answer  them  f 

No,  sir,  I  am  not  inquisitive;  I 
like  to  do  both. 

I  do  not  work  much ;  I  do  it  at  my 
ease. 

Do  you  ever  deceive  yourself  ? 

You  speak  in  jest ;  can  one  ever  de- 
ceive himself  i 


174 


LESSON  XXXUL 


Por  supuesto  que  si. 

I  Esta  su  amigo  de  V.  arriba  6  aba- 

jof 
4  Est4  mi  libro  encima  6  debajo  de 

la  mesa? 
f  Que  tal  le  gusta  k  V.  Nueva  York  ? 


Certainly  (so). 

Is  your  friend  up-stairs  or  down- 
stairs ? 

Is  my  book  upon  the  table  or  un- 
der it? 

How  do  you  like  New  York  ? 


EXPLANATION. 

164.  Eeflexiye  Verbs. — Almost  all  active  verbs  may  be- 
come reflexive  in  Spanish,  and  be  used  pronominally.  The 
objective  pronoun  must  be  of  the  same  person  as  the  subject, 
and  each  person  is  conjugated  with  a  double  personal  pro- 
noun. However,  the  nominative  pronoun  is  almost  always 
included  in  the  verb  in  Spanish,  while  in  English  it  is  ex- 
pressed; as, 


Infinitive. 
Part,  Pres, 


Am  arse. 
Amandose. 


To  love  one's  self. 
Loving  one's  self. 


INDICATIVE   PRESENT. 


Me  amo.  I  love  myself. 

Te  amas.  Thou  lovest  thyselt 

Se  ama.  He  loves  himself. 

Nos  amamos.  We  love  ourselves. 

Os  amais.  You  love  yourselves. 

Se  aman.  They  love  themselves. 

And  in  the  same  manner  in  all  the  other  tenses. 

166.  When  an  agent  performs  an  action  upon  a  part  of 
himself,  the  verb  is  made  reflexive  ;  and  the  possessive  pro- 
nouns, my^  Ai5,  etc.,are  translated  into  Spanish  by  the  article 
cZ,  ?a,  Zos,  las  ;  as. 


Me  corto  el  cabello. 
Se  corta  las  unas. 


I  cut  my  hair. 
He  cuts  his  nails. 


166.  When  the  verb  denotes  a  reciprocity  of  action  be- 
tween two  or  more  individuals,  it  is  formed,  in  Spanish,  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  plural  of  reflexive  verbs  ;  as. 


Nos  amamos. 
Os  engaftasteis. 
Se  tem^rdn. 


We  love  one  another. 
You  deceived  each  other. 
They  will  fear  each  other. 


LESSON  XXXIIL  175 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION.  . 

1.  I  Se  ha  afeitado  Y.  ?    Ni  me  he  lavado  ni  afeitado. 

2.  I  Cuantas  veces  lava  la  criada  a  los  ninos  ?    Los  lava  por 
la  manana,  al  medio  dia  y  a  la  noche. 

3.  i  Cuando  les  corta  las  unas  ?    Se  las  corta  los  miercoles  y 
los  sabados. 

4.  I  Se  levantan  temprano  ?    A  las  seis  en  verano,  y  a  las 
siete  en  invierno. 

5.  i  Por  que  no  se  levanto  V.  hoy  mas  temprano  ?    Porque  el 
criado  no  me  desperto. 

6.  e  No  despierta  V.  temprano  ?    Cuando  estoy  cansado,  no. 

7.  I  Estaba  V.  muy  cansado  ayer  ?    Si,  seiior,  el  paseo  me 
canso  mucho. 

8.  Entonces,  i  querra  V.  descansar  hoy  todo  el  dia  ?    No,  he 
descansado  ya  bastante  durante  la  noche. 

9.  e  Con  cuanto  dinero  se  contenta  V.  ?    Yo  me  contento  con 
poco. 

10.  i  Se  contentara  V.  con  diez  pesos  ?    Se  burla  V.  de  mi. 

11.  No,  yo  solo  pregunto.— V.  me  pregunta  y  yo  respondo 
que  no. 

12.  e  Habla  V.  de  burlas  6  de  veras  ?    Hablo  de  veras  ;  yo  no 
me  contento  con  menos  de  cien  pesos. 

13.  i  Se  burla  V.  de  mi  ?    No,  seiior,  yo  nunca  hablo  de  burlas ; 
y  V.  tendra  que  contentarse  con  lo  que  se  le  ha  dado  ya. 

14.  V.  es  quien  se  engaiia. — El  engaiiado  sera  V.,  yo  no. 

15.  e  Para  que  llama  V.  al  barbero  ?    Para  afeitarme. 

16.  I  Por  que  no  se  afeita  V.  mismo  ?    Porque  tengo  miedo  de 
cortarme. 

17.  i  Donde  esta  el  cuchillo  ?    Esta  sobre  la  mesa. 

18.  I  Adonde  va  V.  ?    Voy  a  cortarme  el  pelo. 

19.  I  Donde  vive  su  barbero  ?    Vive  detras  de  la  iglesia. 

20.  i  Pregunto  V.  al  criado  por  mis  botas  ?    Si,  seiior,  me  dijo 
que  estaban  debajo  de  la  cama. 

21.  I  Sale  V.  ahora  a  paseo  ?    No,  senor,  saldre  despues. 

22.  i  Que  tal  esta  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Ahora  esta  mas  contento. 

23.  I  Que  tal  es  el  criado  que  tiene  V.  ahora  ?    Es  muy  res- 
pondon. 

24.  i  Donde  esta  su  padre  de  V.,  arriba  6  abajo  ?    Antes  estaba 
abajo,  ahora  me  parece  que  esta  arriba. 

25.  I  Que  tal  ha  pasado  V.  la  noche  ?    Muy  descansadamente ; 
he  dormido  muy  bien. 


176  LESSON  XXXIIL 

2^.  I  Como  estan  escritos  los  ejercicios  de  su  gramatica  de  Y.  ? 
Estan  por  preguntas  y  respuestas. 

27.  i  Hizo  Y.  la  pregunta  que  le  dije  ?  Si ;  pero  no  me  dieron 
respuesta. 

28.  i  De  que  trata  la  leccion  de  hoy  ?  De  la  declinacion  y  de- 
rivacion  de  los  nombres,  y  de  la  disposicion  de  las  palabras  en  la 
composicion. 

29.  i  Que  esta  Y.  leyendo  ?  Las  disposiciones  del  rey  Car- 
los III. 

30.  I  Aprende  bien  el  espanol  su  amigo  de  Y.  ?  No,  senor, 
tiene  muy  poca  disposicion  para  las  lenguas. 

31.  I  Que  hizo  Y.  ayer  despues  que  se  levanto  ?  Me  lave  y  me 
afeite. 

32.  I  Se  canso  Y.  mucho  ayer  ?  Si,  senor,  me  canso  mucho  el 
paseo  al  parque. 

33.  e  Necesita  Y.  descanso  ?    Descanso  bastante  de  noche. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Where  do  you  sleep  ?    In  the  small  room  on  the  third  floor 
(piso). 

2.  What  time  do  you  get  up  every  morning  ?    I  generally 
rise  at  six  o'clock. 

3.  At  what  hour  do  your  children  rise  in  summer  ?    They 
rise  at  daybreak. 

4.  At  what  time  do  they  go  to  bed  ?    At  nightfall. 

5.  Where  do  you  wash  yourself  ?    I  wash  myself  in  my  own 
room. 

6.  Do  you  wash  yourself  in  hot  {caliente)  or  cold  water  ?    I 
wash  myself  always  in  cold  water. 

7.  Why  do  you  not  wash  sometimes  with  warm  water  ?    Be- 
cause cold  water  is  much  better  for  the  skin  (cutis). 

8.  Where  do  you  go  to  be  shaved  ?    I  go  to  the  barber's. 

9.  Where  does  your  barber  live  ?    In  Broadway,  near  Broome 
street. 

10.  Are  you  tired  ?    No,  sir,  I  never  tire  myself  writing. 

11.  Are  you  speaking  in  earnest  or  in  jest  ?  In  earnest ;  I  am 
not  in  a  humor  to  jest. 

12.  It  seemed  to  me  you  were  in  a  humor  to  jest  a  while  ago  ? 
Not  at  all ;  on  the  contrary,*  it  was  my  brother  that  was  making 
fun  of  me  because  I  had  cut  my  hand. 

*  De  ningiin  modo,  al  contrario. 


LEssojsr  XXXIII.  177 

13.  Well,  no  Inatter ;  I  know  you  are  fond  of  jesting  and 
laughing  at  everybody.  You  deceive  yourself,  my  dear  sir 
(sefior  mid). 

14.  Charles,  can  you  go  to  the  tailor's  to  tell  him  I  wish  to  see 
him  ?  It  is  impossible  for  me  to  go  out  now,  I  am  expecting  Mr. 
Valero. 

15.  Do  not  mind,  I  shall  send  John.  John  cannot  go  either ; 
he  has  to  be  here  at  the  same  time  as  I. 

16.  Will  you  go  to  the  post-office  and  ask  if  there  are  any  let- 
ters for  me  ?  I  asked  this  morning  when  I  took  father's  letters, 
and  they  told  me  there  were  none. 

17.  Did  you  see  the  newspaper  I  was  reading  when  your  cousin 
came  in  ?    There  it  is  on  the  table  behind  the  dictionary. 

18.  Why  did  you  get  your  hair  cut  (hacerse  cortar)  ?  Be- 
cause it  was  too  long  (largo). 

19.  Indeed  !  I  thought  you  liked  long  hair  ?  On  ladies,  yes  r 
but  it  is  not  very  suitable  for  a  man. 

20.  Where  is  Peter  ?    I  think  he  is  up-stairs. 

21.  Will  you  do  me  the  favor  to  call  him  ?  Certainly  (cier^ta- 
mente). 

22.  Was  the  musician  satisfied  with  what  you  gave  him  ?  He 
did  not  appear  to  be  content. 

23.  How  do  you  like  the  vest  that  my  tailor  made  for  you  ? 
Pretty  (bastante)  well ;  but  I  like  the  work  of  my  own  tailor 
better. 

24.  How  is  your  uncle  to-day  ?  The  physician  came  to  see 
him  this  afternoon,  and  he  said  he  was  much  better. 

25.  What  are  those  gentlemen  doing  over  there  ?  Do  you  pot 
see  that  they  are  resting  ? 

26.  How  do  you  know  they  are  tired  ?  They  have  been  walk- 
ing all  the  morning. 

27.  Then  they  are  very  wise  (hacer  muy  bien)  to  rest.  Of 
course  ;  rest  is  agreeable  (grato)  when  one  is  tired  (se  estd^ 
cansado). 


u 


178 


LESSON  xxxir. 


LESSON    XXXIV, 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


Acertar. 

To  guess,  to  make  out, 

hit  the  mark. 

INDICATIVE — Present. 

Acierto. 

I  guess. 

Aciertas, 

Thou  guessest. 

Acierta. 

He  guesses. 

Acertamos. 

We  guess. 

Acertais. 

You  guess. 

Aciertan, 

They  guess. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Acierta  tri. 

Guess  thou. 

Acertad  vosotros 

Guess. 

SUBJUNCTIVE— P!re«en/. 

Acierte. 

I  may  guess. 

Aciertes. 

Thou  mayest  guess. 

Acierte. 
Acertemos. 

He  may  guess. 
We  may  guess. 

Acerteis. 

You  may  guess. 

Acierten. 

They  may  guess. 

Verba' conjugated  like  acertar. 

Calentar. 

To  v^arm,  to  heat. 

Cerrar. 

To  shut,  to  close. 

Confesar. 

To  confess. 

Despertar. 

To  awake,  to  wake. 

Gobernar. 

Acer 

car. 

To  govern.    To  approach. 

Merendar. 

To  lunch. 

Negar. 

To  deny. 

Pensar. 

To  think,  to  intend. 

Quebrar. 

To  break. 

Sentarse. 

To  sit  down. 

hs  that  are  regular. 

although  small  changes  are  made  to  preserve 

pronunciation  of  the  infinitive. 

Veneer. 

To  vanquish,  to  overcome. 

Resarcir. 

To  indemnify. 

Pagar. 

To  pay. 

to 


LESSON  XXXIV, 


179 


Delinquir. 

Escoger. 

Poseer. 

Proveer. 

Huir. 

Argiiir. 


To  commit  a  fault,  to  transgress. 

To  choose. 

To  possess. 

To  provide. 

To  flee,  to  fly. 

To  argue. 


Aver. 

Let  us  see. 

Quiza. 

Perhaps. 

Delincuente. 

Delinquent,  offender,  transgres- 

sor. 

Inocente. 

Innocent. 

Franco. 

Frank,  open. 

Cualquiera.* 

Any,  any  one,  some  one,  what- 

ever, whatsoever. 

Cualquiera  parte. 

Any  place. 

Fuego. 
Jardinero. 
Motive. 
Sofa. 


Fire. 

Gardener. 
Motive. 
Sofa. 


Consecuencia. 

Prudencia. 

Verduras. 

Deuda. 


Consequence, 
conclusion. 
Prudence. 
Vegetables. 
Debt. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Le  gusta  d.  V.  calentarse  al  fuego  ? 

Si,  seiior,  me  gusta  calentarme  al 
fuego  en  el  invierno  cuando  hace 
mucho  frio. 

i  Que  calienta  el  criado  ? 

Esta  calentaudo  el  cafe. 

^  A  que  hora  desperto  V.  ayer  ? 

4  A  ver  si  acierta  V.  ? 

No  se,  quiza  desperto  V.  a  las  cinco. 

Despierto  todas  las  maflanas  a  las 
cuatro  y  media. 


Do  you  like  to  warm  yourself  at  the 
fire? 

Yes,  sir,  I  like  to  warm  myself  at 
the  fire  in  winter  when  it  is  very 
cold. 

What  is  the  servant  warming? 

He  is  warming  the  coffee. 

At  what  hour  did  you  awake  yester- 
day? 

Let  us  see  if  you  can  f  guess  ? 

1  do  not  know ;  perhaps  you  awoke 
at  five  o'clock. 

I  awake  every  morning  at  half-past 
four. 


*  Cualquiera  drops  the  final  a  when  it  precedes  a  masculine  singular 
noun. 

f  Words  printed  in  italics  are  not  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 


180 


LESSON  XXXIV, 


I  Cierra  V.  la  puerta  6  la  abre  I 

He  cerrado  la  puerta  y  abierto  la 

ventana. 
i  Es  delincuente  aquel  hombre  I 
Lo  creo,  porque  huye. 
Niego  la  consecuencia ;  V.  no  afguye 

bien,  el  puede  ser  inocente  y  huir 

por  prudencia. 

I  Se  proveyo  V.  de  flores  I 

Me  provei  de  fruta  y  mi  hermana 

de  verduras. 
i  Pago  V.  por  ellas  al  jardinero  ? 
Yo  le  pague  la  fruta  y  mi  hermana 

le  pago  las  verduras. 
I  Piensa  V.  ir  a  Europa  este  verano  ? 

Deseo  irme  a  alguna  parte,  porque 
confieso  que  tengo  mucho  miedo 
del  colera. 

Hay  muchos  que  niegan  tener  mie- 
do ;  pero  yo  tengo  el  valor  de  con- 
fesarlo  francamente. 

I A  qu6  hora  se  desayuna  V.  f 

Me  desayuno  a  las  ocho,  meriendo  a 
las  dos  y  como  a  las  seis. 

I  Me  promete  V.  ir  a  comer  conmigo 
hoy! 

Entre  comer  6  merendar  con  V.  es- 
cojo  el  merendar,  porque  Y.  come 
demasiado  temprano.  ' 


Are  you  shutting  the  door  or  open- 
ing it  ? 

I  have  shut  the  door  and  opened  the 
window. 

Is  that  man  a  transgressor  ? 

I  think  so,  for  he  flees. 

I  deny  the  conclusion ;  you  do  not 
argue  correctly  (well) ;  he  may  be 
innocent  and  flee  (or  fly)  for  pru- 
dence. 

Did  you  provide  yourself  with  flow- 
ers? 

I  provided  myself  with  fruit,  and 
my  sister  with  vegetables. 

Did  you  pay  the  gardener  for  them  ? 

I  paid  him  for  the  fruit,  and  my  sis- 
ter paid  him  for  the  vegetables  f 

Do  you  intend  to  go  to  Europe  this 
summer  ? 

I  wish  to  go  somewhere,  for  I  con- 
fess 1  am  very  much  afraid  of  the 
cholera. 

There  are  many  who  deny  being 
afraid ;  but  I  have  the  courage  to 
confess  it  freely. 

At  what  hour  do  you  breakfast  ? 

I  breakfast  at  eight,  lunch  at  two, 
and  dine  at  six. 

Will  you  (do  you)  promise  to  come 
and  dine  with  me  to-day  ? 

Between  lunching  and  dining  with 
you,  I  choose  lunching,  for  you 
dine  too  early. 


EXPLANATION. 

167.  Irregtjlae  Verbs. — All  verbs  that  are  not  conju- 
gated throughout  according  to  the  model  verbs  already  given 
{Jiablar^  aprender^  escrihir)  are  called  irregular. 

168.  It  is,  however,  to  be  observed,  that  although  some 
verbs  vary  slightly  in  their  radical  letters,  they  are  not  to  be 
considered  as  irregular  on  that  account,  inasmuch  as  those 
changes  take  place  in  order  to  preserve  throughout  the  whole 


LESSON  XXXIV.  181 

conjugation  the  sound  of  the  root  consonants.  This  obser- 
vation should  be  carefully  borne  in  mind,  so  as  not  to  take 
for  irregular  verbs  those  which  are  really  not  so. 

Many  verbs  ending  in  car,  cer,  cir,  gar,  for  instance,  un- 
dergo respectively  the  variations  mentioned  above  :  those  in 
car  change  the  c  into  qu  before  e  ;  as, 

Tocar.  I     To  touch. 

Toque  (instead  of  toce).  I     I  touched  ; 

those  in  cer  and  cir  change  the  c  into  z  before  a  and  o  ;  as, 
Veneer.  To  vanquish. 

Ven^^o  (instead  of  venco).  I  vanquish. 

Resarcir.  To  indemnify. 

Resar2:o  (instead  of  resarco).  I  indemnify  ; 

and  lastly,  those  in  gar  take  u  after  the  g  before  e ;  as, 
Pagar.  i     To  pay. 

Pagwe  (instead  of  page).  I     I  paid. 

For  the  same  reason  delinquir  changes  qu  into  c,  before  a 
and  0  ;  as,  delinco,  delinca,  delincamos ;  and  escoger,  to  choose,, 
changes  the  g  into  /  before  a  and  o  ;  as,  escojo,  escoja, 

169.  The  verbs  which  terminate  in  eer,  as  creer,  to  be- 
lieve ;  leer,  to  read ;  poseer,  to  possess ;  proveer,  to  provide,, 
in  those  terminations  which  contain  an  i,  change  it  into  y 
whenever  it  is  to  be  joined  with  another  vowel ;  as,  crei,. 
creyo ;  lei,  leyeron  ;  posei,  poseyere  ;  provei,  proveyeremos,  &c. 

170.  The  same  change  is  made  in  the  verbs  ending  in  uir, 
when  the  u  and  the  i  make  a  part  of  two  different  syllables. 
Thus  Mdr,  to  fly,  makes,  in  the  third  person  of  the  preterit 
definite,  huyo  ;  argilir,  to  argue,  makes  arguyo,  &c. 

171.  The  regularly  irregular  verbs,  about  j^t;^  hundred  and 
fifty  in  number,  may  be  divided  into  seven  classes,  presenting 
each  a  certain  regularity  in  its  irregularity ;  that  is  to  say,, 
whose  irregularities  occur  in  the  same  persons  and  tenses,, 
so  that  when  the  pupil  has  learned  seven  verbs,  or  one  of 
each  of  those  groups,  he  will  be  able  to  conjugate  all  the  regu- 
larly irregular  verbs,  leaving  only  the  few  that  confine  their 
irregularities  to  themselves  and  their  compounds,  the  major- 
ity of  which  have  already  been  introduced  in  previous  les- 


182 


LESSON  XXXIV, 


sons,  such  as  haher,  tener,  &c. ;  but  the  student  can  find  them 
all  conjugated  near  the  end  of  the  book. 

Acer  tar  may  serve  as  a  model  for  the  conjugation  of  the 
first  of  these  seven  classes  of  irregular  verbs,  just  as  hablar 
does  for  the  first  conjugation  of  the  regular  verbs.  The 
irregularity  of  acertar^  and  of  all  those  conjugated  like  it, 
consists  in  its  taking  an  i  before  the  last  e  of  the  stem,  in  the 
firsts  second  and  third  persons  singular,  and  the  third  person 
plural  of  the  indicative  present,  of  the  subjunctive  present, 
and  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative.  {See 
list  of  the  irregular  verbs  near  the  end  of  the  hook,)  In  all 
the  other  modes  and  tenses  those  verbs  are  regular,  and  the 
pupil  can  easily  form  them  according  to  their  respective  con- 
jugations. 

172.  Pagar  may  take  for  its  direct  object  either  the  value 
paid  or  the  thing  paid  for,  while  the  person  paid  is  the  indi- 
rect object.     Por  may  be  used  before  the  thing  paid  for  ;  as, 


Pago  los  caballos,  or  pago  por.  los 

caballos. 
Pago  mil  pesos  por  los  caballos. 

Pago  al  comerciante  mil  pesos  por 
los  caballos. 


I  pay  for  the  horses. 

I  pay  a  thousand  dollars  for  the 
horses. 

I  pay  the  merchant  a  thousand  dol- 
lars for  the  horses. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Acertara  Y.   la  casa  de  su  prima  ?     Si,   senor,  yo  la 
acertare. 

2.  I  Podra  V.  acertar  quien  estuvo  aqui  ayer  ?    No  acierto. 

3.  I  No  entiende  su  hermano  de  V.  lo  que  le  digo  ?    Si,  senor ; 
pero  no  acierta  a  responder. 

4.  I  Se  calienta  V.  al  fuego  ?    Si,  senor,  porque  hace  mucho 
frio. 

5.  i  Por  que  no  cierra  V.  entonces  la  puerta  ?    Confieso  que 
no  habia  pensado  en  alio. 

6.  i  A  que  hora  desperto  V.  esta  maiiana  ?    Desperte  a  las  diez. 

7.  I  El  que  gobierna  una  casa  y  una  familia,  no  debe  levan- 
tarse  temprano  ?    No  lo  niego. 

8.  i  Piensa  V.  merendar  hoy  ?    Si,  senor,  nosotros  merenda- 
mos  todos  los  dias. 


LESSON  XXXIV.  183 

9.  e  Por  que  no  se  sienta  V.  en  aquella  silla,  que  es  mejor  ? 
Porque  tengo  miedo  de  romperla. 

10.  t  Le  pago  V.  a  su  eriado  ?  Si,  seiior,  le  pague  ayer  y  hoy 
se  ha  huido. 

11.  g  No  le  perdonara  Y.  ?  No,  seiior,  porque  quien  delinquio 
una  vez  delinquira  dos. 

12.  ^  Y  no  se  resarcio  de  su  trabajo  ?  Si,  seiior,  antes  se  pro- 
veyo  de  ropa  en  mi  casa. 

13.  i  Que  lenguas  posee  el  ?  El  ingles,  el  frances  y  el 
italiano. 

14.  I  Quien  posee  ahora  la  casa  de  campo  de  V.  ?  El  ameri- 
cano  la  posee. 

15.  e  Se  la  ha  pagado  a  V.  ?    No,  senor,  no  me  pago  nada. 

16.  e  Compro  V.  flores  al  jardinero  ?  Le  compre  verduras  y 
mi  hermana  le  compro  flores. 

17.  I  Le  pagaron  Vds.  al  jardinero  por  ellas  ?  Yo  le  pague 
las  verduras  y  mi  hermana  pago  por  las  flores. 

18.  I  A  quien  le  gustan  mas  las  flores,  a  V.  6  a  su  hermana  ? 
Creo  que  a  ella  le  gustan  mas  las  flores ;  pero  a  mi  me  gusta  mas 
la  fruta. 

19.  e  Que  fruta  le  gusta  a  V.  mas  ?  Me  gustan  las  naranjas  y 
las  manzanas. 

20.  I  Paga  V.  siempre  sus  deudas  ?  Las  pago  cuando  tengo 
dinero. 

21.  g  Piensa  V.  ir  al  campo  este  verano  ?  Deseo  ir  a  cual- 
quiera  parte,  porque  confieso  que  tengo  mucho  miedo  del 
colera. 

22.  I  No  tiene  V.  vergiienza  de  confesarlo  ?  Hay  muchos  que 
niegan  tener  miedo ;  pero  yo  tengo  el  valor  de  confesarlo  fran- 
camente. 

23.  I  A  que  hora  desperto  V.  ayer  ?  Ayer,  creo  que  desperte 
a  las  cinco.    Despierto  todos  los  dias  a  las  cuatro  y  media. 

24.  e  Y  a  que  hora  se  desayuna  Y.  ?  Me  desayuno  a  las  siete, 
meriendo  a  las  dos  y  como  a  las  seis. 

25.  I  Me  promete  Y.  venir  hoy  a  comer  conmigo  ?  No  puedo 
prometerselo,  porque  no  se  si  tendre  tiempo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  cold  it  is  this  morning !    Yes,  it  is  very  cold. 

2.  Will  you  not  come  and  warm  yourself  at  the  fire  ?    No, 
thank  you ;  I  do  not  like  to  warm  myself  at  the  fire. 


184  LESSON  XXXIV, 

3.  In  that  case  it  is  better  to  shut  the  doors  and  the  win- 
dows.   Perhaps  it  is.^ 

4.  Do  you  intend  remaining  (estarse)  here  during  the  win- 
ter ?    If  my  uncle  remains,  I  shall  too. 

5.  Will  you  not  choose  other  rooms  if  you  remain  ?  Yes,  I 
intend  to  do  so. 

6.  Good  evening,  Charles ;  wilt  not  thou  sit  down  for  a  few 
minutes  ?    With  pleasure. 

7.  Did  you  find  out  (make  out)  the  musician's  house  yester- 
day ?  I  made  out  the  house  without  much  difficulty,  but  I  did 
not  see  him. 

8.  How  was  that  ?  He  must  have  been  out,  for  I  knocked 
at  his  door. 

9.  At  what  hour  do  you  dine  ?  I  generally  dine  at  six 
o'clock. 

10.  Then  you  lunch  at  noon  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  generally  lunch 
about  that  hour. 

11.  Do  you  eat  fruit  every  day  at  dinner  ?    Not  every  day. 

12.  Did  your  brother  pay  for  the  fruit  he  bought  last  week  ? 
No ;  but  he  has  to  go  out  to-morrow,  and  perhaps  he  will  go  and 
pay  for  it. 

13.  Let  us  go  and  take  a  walk.    Where  do  you  wish  to  go  ? 

14.  We  can  go  to  Central  Park.  Very  well ;  let  us  go  there ; 
I  think  it  is  the  finest  promenade  in  the  city. 

15.  At  what  time  do  they  open  the  park  in  the  morning  ?  I 
believe  it  is  open  in  summer  at  five  o'clock. 

16.  And  at  what  time  is  it  shut  ?  At  eleven  o'clock,  I  believe, 
or  perhaps  a  little  later. 

17.  In  that  case  it  will  be  better  not  to  ^o  there  until  to- 
morrow ;  it  is  now  rather  too  late  (algo  tarde). 

18.  How  too  late  ?  It  is  only  half -past  seven,  so  that  we  have 
three  hours  and  a  half  for  walking. 

19.  Where  are  they  taking  that  man  to  ?  They  are  taking 
him  to  prison  (la  cdrceT). 

20.  What  are  they  taking  him  to  prison  for  ?  He  must  be 
guilty  of  some  misdemeanor  {delinquir). 

21.  Has  the  servant  taken  the  letter  to  the  pianist  yet  ?  He 
took  it  to  him  yesterday  afternoon. 

22.  Have  you  seen  the  new^s  this  morning  ?  No ;  what  news 
is  there  ? 

♦  English  words  printed  in  italics  are  not  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 


LESSON  XXXV,  185 

23.  There  was  a  great  fire  last  night  on  Fourth  street,  and 
twelve  houses  were  burned. 

24.  Where  is  Alexander  ?    He  is  up-stairs. 

25.  Have  any  of  you  seen  my  Spanish  dictionary  ?  Yes,  I 
had  it  this  morning  in  my  room. 

2^.  What  were  you  doing  with  it  ?  I  was  looking  for  a  new 
word  which  I  met  with  *  while  reading  the  history  you  lent  me. 

27.  How  did  you  manage  (acertar)  to  wake  so  early  this  morn- 
ing ?  My  brother  awoke  me  by  singing  in  my  room,  at  five 
o'clock. 

28.  At  what  time  do  you  generally  wake  ?  If  no  one  comes 
to  interrupt  (interrumpir)  my  sleep,  I  never  wake  before  nine. 

29.  Is  it  not  better  for  the  health  to  rise  early  ?  Certainly ; 
but  then  it  is  necessary  to  go  to  bed  early  also. 

30.  Why  do  you  not  go  to  bed  early  ?  I  am  fond  of  reading 
and  study,  and  so  I  rarely  go  to  bed  before  two  o'clock  in  the 
morning  (de  la  madrugada). 


LESSON    XXXY. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS— Continued, 

Acostar.  I         To  put  to  bed. 

INDICATIVE — Present. 
Acuesto,  acuestas,  acuesta.        I     I  put  to  bed,  &c. 
Acostamos,  acostais,  acuestan.    I     We  put  to  bed,  &c. 

IMPERATIVE. 

,    , ,  ,  J  ,  I      J  Put  (thou)  to  bed. 

Acuesfa  tu,acostadvosotros.      |     |  p^t  (you)  to  bed. 

SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. 


Acueste,  acuestes,  acuueste,  acos- 
temos,  acosteis,  acuesten. 


I  may,  or  can,  put  to  bed,  &;c. 


VERBS   CONJUGATED  LIKE  ACOSTAR. 


Acostarse. 

Aprobar. 

Almorzar. 


To  go  to  bed,  to  lie  down. 
To  approve. 
To  breakfast. 


'  English  words  in  italics  are  not  to  be  translated. 


186 


LESSON  XXXV. 


Contar. 

Consolar. 

Encontrar. 

Mostrar. 

Probar. 

Recordar. 

Reprobar. 

Rogar. 

Sonar. 


To  count ;  to  relate,  or  tell. 

To  console. 

To  meet. 

To  show. 

To  prove  ;  to  try  ;  to  taste. 

To  remind  ;  to  remember. 

To  reprove. 

To  entreat. 

To  dream. 


Delicioso. 

Delicious. 

Espacioso. 

Spacious. 

Industrioso. 

Industrious. 

Religioso. 

Religious. 

Aristocratico. 

Aristocratic. 

Clasico. 

Classic. 

Fanatico. 

Fanatic. 

Monarquico. 

MonarchicaL 

Tiranico. 

Tyrannical. 

Tragico. 

Tragic. 

Poetico. 

Poetical. 

Analitico. 

Analytical. 

Satirico. 

Satirical. 

Filosofico. 

Philosophical. 

Comico. 

Comic,  comical. 

Economic©. 

Economical. 

Laconico. 

Laconic. 

Metodico. 

Methodical. 

Cronico. 

Chronic. 

Vaso. 

Sermon. 

Mundo. 

Capitulo. 

Perro. 


Tumbler,  glass. 

Sermon. 

World. 

Chapter. 

Bog. 


Taza.  Cup. 

Moral.  Moral. 

Repiiblica.  Republic. 

Independencia.  Independence. 

Religion.  Religion. 


COMPOSITION. 


Manuel,  acuestate  temprano  y  levan- 

tate  temprano  tambien. 
Alejandro,  cuentame  lo  que  te  dijo 

Luisa. 


Emanuel,  go  to  bed  early  and  rise 

early  too. 
Alexander,  tell  me  what  Louisa  told 

thee. 


LESSON  XXXV. 


187 


Ayudate  y  Dios  te  ayudara. 

Ama  a  tu  projimo  como  a  ti  mismo. 
Se  religiose,  pero  no  seas  fanatico. 
Se  industrioso  y  economico  y  no  se- 

ras  pobre. 
Sentemonos,  que  estoy  cansado. 
Amaos  como  hermanos  y  no  hableis 

mal  uno  del  otro. 
Entre  V.,   Dn.   Pedro,   y  tome  V. 

asiento,  or  sientese  V. 
No  puedo,  estoy  de  prisa. 
Juan,  cierra  la  puerta,  pero  no  cierres 

la  ventana. 
Caballeros,  entren  Vds.,  y  les  mos- 

trare  mis  libros. 
Alejandro,  confiesa  tu  falta  y  te  la 

perdonare. 
No  los  ofendamos. 
Amigos,  cantemos  y  bailemos  y  sea- 

raos  felices. 
No  tomaras  en  vano  el  nombre  del 

Seiior.tu  Dios. 


Help  thyself,  and    God  will  help 

thee. 
Love  thy  neighbor  as  thyself. 
Be  religious,  but  not  fanatical. 
Be  industrious  and  economical  and 

thou  wilt  not  be  poor. 
Let  us  sit  down,  for  I  am  tired. 
Love  each  other  as  brothers,  and 

speak  no  evil  one  of  another. 
Come  in,  Mr.  Peter,  take  a  seat,  or 

be  seated, 
I  cannot,  I  am  in  a  hurry. 
John,  shut  the  door,  but  do  not  shut 

the  window. 
Come  in,  gentlemen,  and  I  shall 

show  you  my  books. 
Alexander,  confess  thy  fault,  and  I 

shall  pardon  thee. 
Let  us  not  offend  them. 
My  friends,  let  us  sing,  dance  and 

be  merry. 
Thou  shalt  not  take  the  name  of  the 

Lord  thy  God  in  vain. 


EXPLANATION. 

173.  The  verb  acostar  is  irregular  in  the  same  forms  as 
acertar^  and  changes  the  o  of  the  stem  to  ue.  {See  this  verb 
and  those  conjugated  like  it  near  the  end  of  the  book.) 

174.  The  IMPERATIVE  MODE  is  used  for  commanding  or 
inciting,  and  its  only  true  forms  are  the  second  persons,  sin- 
gular and  plural.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  take  the  place 
of  the  first  and  third  persons,  as  will  be  seen  more  fully  later. 
The  IMPERATIVE  may  not  be  used  with  negatives,  but,  instead, 
the  SUBJUNCTIVE  ;  as, 


No  lo  hagas.   ) 
No  lo  hagais.  f 


Do  not  do  it. 


175.  As  has  already  been  said,  the  s  of  the  first  person 
plural,  and  the  d  of  the  second,  are  suppressed  before  nos  and 
OS ;  as. 


Amemonos. 
Amaos. 


Let  us  love  each  other. 
Love  one  another. 


188  LUSSOj!^  XXXV. 

176.  When  the  subjunctive  is  substituted  for  the  nega« 
tive  imperative,  the  objective  pronouns  are  placed  before 
it ;  as, 

No  lo  digas.  I  Do  not  tell  it. 

No  los  ofendamos.  '  Let  us  not  offend  them. 

177.  The  future  of  the  indicative  is  often  used  as  a  soft- 
ened imperative  in  stating  commands  ;  as, 

No  tomaras  en  vano  el  nombre  del  i  Thou  shalt  not  take  the  name  of  the 
Senor  tu  Dios.  '  •  Lord  thy  God  in  vain. 

178.  Many  English  adjectives  ending  in  otcs  are  rendered 
into  Spanish  by  changing  this  termination  into  oso ;  as, 
Delicioso.  I  Delicious. 

Espacioso.  I  Spacious,  &c. 

179.  Many  English  nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  ic  or 
ical  have  in  Spanish  the  termination  ico ;  as, 

Fanatico.  I  Fanatic,  fanatical. 

Poettco.  I  Poetic,  poetical. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Luisa,  estudia  bien  tu  leceion  de  espanol  y  escribe  los 
ejercicios. 

2.  e  Que  me  dara  V.,  papa,  si  la  estudio  bien  y  no  hago  faltas 
en  los  ejercicios  ?    Te  llevare  conmigo  al  Parque  Central. 

3.  Papa,  I  no  lie  vara  V.  a  Alejandro  y  a  Manuel  con  noso- 
tros  ?    Si  son  buenos  muchachos  y  estudiosos  los  llevare  tambien. 

4.  Alejandro,  ven  aca  y  cuentame  que  hiciste  ayer  en  el 
campo. — Con  mucho  gusto.  Por  la  maiiana  me  levante  tem- 
prano,  me  lave  y  almorce  y  despues  fui  a  pasearme.  Volvi  muy 
cansado  y  me  acoste  a  las  nueve. 

5.  i  Juan !  i  Senor  ?  Manana  me  despertaras  a  las  cinco, 
me  limpiaras  las  botas  y  me  traeras  el  caballo  temprano,  porque 
quiero  ir  a  dar  un  paseo  y  tomar  un  vaso  de  leche  en  el  hotel  del 
Parque  Central. 

6.  Amigo  mio,  no  seas  fanatico,  pero  se  religioso.  No  seas 
satirico  ni  hablador,  pero  se  prudente,  economico  e  industrioso  y 
seras  feliz. 

7.  Por  Dios,  Don  Pedro,  no  hable  V.  mas,  le  prometo  a  V. 
estudiar  y  ser  buen  muchacho. 


LESSON  XXXV,  189 

8.  No  seas  respondon,  haz  tu  deber,  ayiidate  y  Dios  te  ayu- 
dara. 

9.  Don  Pedro,  a  mi  no  me  gustan  los  sermones  largos,  sien- 
tese  V.  y  hablemos  de  otra  cosa. 

10.  Mire  V.,  Dn.  Juan,  a  aquella  senorita  que  esta  en  la  ven- 
tana  del  vecino ;  i  la  conoce  V.  ?  Si,  senor,  la  conoci  en  Fila- 
delfia. 

11.  I  Que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  ?  Muchisimo ;  es  una  senorita  per- 
f ecta,  y  habla  el  espanol  tan  bien  como  el  ingles. 

12.  I  Quiere  V.  llevarme  a  su  casa  ?  Tengo  deseo  de  conocerla. 
— Con  mucho  gusto,  pero  antes  necesito  la  aprobacion  de.  ella. 

13.  I  Le  aman  a  V.  mucho  sus  ninos  ?  Me  aman  y  yo  los 
amo ;  y  toda  la  familia  nos  amamos  los  unos  a  los  otros,  asi  es 
que  somos  felicisimos. 

14.  i  Se  aman  Vds.  los  unos  a  los  otros  tanto  como  se  aman 
Vds.  m  ism  OS  ?    Creo  que  si. 

15.  Hable  Y.  alto  y  despacio  si  V.  gusta  y  entonces  entendere 
todo  lo  que  V.  dice. — Asi  lo  hare ;  pero  V.  no  pensara  en  otra 
cosa  que  en  lo  que  yo  digo,  porque  si  no,  no  hablare  mas. 

16.  I  Le  conviene  a  V.  comprar  aquella  casa  ?  No  me  con- 
viene,  porque  es  muy  cara  y  esta  muy  lejos  de  la  ciudad. 

17.  I  Que  le  parece  a  V.  del  tiempo  ?  Hoy  es  el  cuatro  de 
Julio  de  1866,  y  por  supuesto  hace  calor ;  pero  hace  muy  buen 
tiempo  para  la  celebracion  de  la  independencia  de  esta  gran 
Repiiblica. 

18.  I  Cuantos  aiios  hace  hoy  que  los  Estados  Unidos  celebran 
su  independencia  ?    Ciento  veinte  y  dos  alios. 

19.  I  Parece  imposible  !  En  un  poco  mas  de  cien  anos  ha  lle- 
gado  esta  nacion  a  ser  una  de  las  potencias  {powers)  mas  grandes 
del  mundo. 

20.  Eso  debia  ser  asi,  y  no  dude  V.  que  llegara  un  dia  en  que 
la  libertad  y  la  religion  reinaran  en  el  mundo  haciendo  felices  a 
todas  las  naciones  como  a  otras  tantas  familias  que  tienen  un 
mismo  padre. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  get  up  late  to-day  ?  No ;  I  got  up  at  daybreak  to 
go  to  walk  in  the  country. 

2.  Where  did  you  walk  ?  I  went  first  to  Central  Park,  and 
then  to  Harlem. 

3.  What  is  the  first  thing  we  read  in  Telemachus  ?    We  read 


190  LESSON  XXXV. 

that  Calypso  could  not  console  herself  for  the  departure  {par- 
tida)  of  Ulysses. 

4.  Where  have  you  been  all  this  time,  sir  ?  it  is  more  than  a 
week  since  you  last  came  to  see  us ;  that  is  not  right  {estar  hien), 
I  confess  I  am  rather  negligent  (negligente)  sometimes. 

5.  You  have  doubtless  already  gone  to  see  your  old  friend  ? 
Yes,  and  he  wanted  to  make  me  spend  a  month  with  him  at  his 
country  house. 

6.  What  part  of  the  country  does  he  live  in  ?  On  Long 
Island,  about  ten  miles  from  the  city. 

7.  Was  not  he  glad  to  see  you  ?  We  looked  at  each  other 
for  about  ten  minutes  without  being  able  to  say  a  word ;  at  last 
(en  fin)  he  broke  the  silence  (rompio  el  silencio),  and  said  to 
me:  "What!  is  it  you,  my  dear  friend?  After  seven  years' 
absence  (ausencia) !    How  glad  I  am  ! " 

8.  Did  he  know  you  as  soon  as  he  saw  you  ?  Yes,  and  I  knew 
him,  though  I  met  him  at  some  distance  from  his  father's  house. 

9.  Doubtless  he  asked  you  about  your  travels  ?  Of  course. 
"  Where  have  you  been  ? "  said  he.  "  What  have  you  done  ? 
what  have  you  seen  ?  are  you  rich  ?  are  you  happy  ?  Tell  me 
all  you  have  done  since  you  went  away  (irse) ;  all  your  adven- 
tures. I  wish  it ;  I  desire  it ;  I  beg  it  of  you ;  it  will  give  (you 
will  do)  me  the  greatest  pleasure." 

10.  All  that  proves  his  joy  at  seeing  you.  Yes,  I  know  that ; 
but  how  many  questions  ! 

11.  Did  he  wish  an  answer  to  each  one  of  them  ?  Of  course ; 
and  I  answered  them  as  well  as  I  could. 

12.  What  did  you  tell  him  ?  I  told  him  that  after  having 
left  France,  I  went  to  Spain,  and  from  there  into  Portugal  (Por- 
tugaT),  and  that  after  a  few  months  passed  in  Lisbon  (Lishod)  I 
went  on  to  Italy,  where  I  remained  four  years. 

18.  What  are  the  hours  for  breakfast  and  dinner  among  the 
Italians  ?  The  Italians,  like  the  French,  usually  (generally) 
breakfast  at  eleven  o'clock,  and  dine  between  five  to  seven  in 
the  evening. 

14.  And  do  they  never  eat  anything  before  the  breakfast 
hour  ?  Almost  everybody  takes  a  cup  of  cofPee  or  chocolate 
in  the  morning  soon  after  rising. 

15.  What  kind  of  governments  are  there  in  Europe  ?  In 
Europe  we  find  almost  every  form  (forma)  of  government, 
republican  and  monarchical. 


LFSSON  XXX  VL  191 

16.  What  is  that  book  you  have  in  your  hand  ?  An  analyt- 
ical treatise  (tratado)  on  Spanish  poetry  that  I  was  going  to 
show  to  your  cousin. 

17.  Have  you  seen  Boileau's  satirical  poems  ?  My  uncle  has 
promised  to  bring  me  that  work  from  Paris. 

18.  Are  you  fond  of  reading  ?  Yes,  I  take  (find)  great  pleas- 
ure in  reading  books  of  all  kinds,  classical,  poetical,  religious, 
analytical,  satirical,  philosophical,  &c. 

19.  Do  you  remember  the  peaches  our  friend  sent  us  from  the 
country  last  year  ?  Of  course  I  remember  them,  and  that  they 
were  delicious. 

20.  Charles,  go  and  have  your  breakfast ;  I  wish  to  take  you 
to  see  the  fine  horse  your  uncle  has  bought  for  Alexander. 

21.  Will  you  not  buy  one  for  me,  too,  papa  ?  If  you  are  a 
good  boy  I  probably  shall. 

22.  Do  you  ever  dream  ?  Very  often ;  last  night  I  dreamed  I 
was  travelling. 

23.  Indeed !  Where  were  you  going  ?  I  do  not  remember 
now. 

24.  What  was  your  father  saying  to  Peter  when  I  came  in  ? 
He  was  reproving  him  for  not  having  written  his  exercise  yes- 
terday. 

25.  Can  you  tell  me  what  day  this  is  ?  To-day  is  Wednesday, 
July  4th,  of  the  year  1866,  and  the  ninety-first  of  the  Independ- 
ence of  the  United  States. 


LESSON    XXXYI. 


Respetar. 

Parar. 

Mover. 


To  respect. 
To  stop. 
To  move. 


INDICATIVE — Present. 
Muevo,  mueves,  mueve,  move- 1         I  move,  &;c. 
mos,  moveis,  mueven.  I 

IMPERATIVE. 

Mueve  tii,  moved  vosotros.  |         Move,  &;c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. 
Mueva,  muevas,  mueva,  mova- 1         I  may  move,  &;c. 
mos,  movais,  muevan.  I 


192 


LESSON  XXXVI. 


Verbs  conjugated 

like  MOVER. 

Llover. 

To  rain. 

Morder. 

To  bite. 

Doler. 

To  grieve,  to  ] 

3ain,  to  ache. 

Volver. 

To  turn,  to  re 
Before. 

turn. 

Antes  que. 

Aunque. 

Although. 

Como. 

Since,  provided. 

Para  que. 
Afinde.    ' 

io. 

In  order  that, 
Everybody. 

in  order  to. 

Todo  el  mun< 

Principalmei 

ite. 
Antagonist. 

Principally,  c 
Atrocidad. 

hiefly. 

Antagonista. 

Atrocity. 

Artista. 

Artist. 

Capacidad. 

Capacity. 

Materialista. 

Materialist. 

Claridad. 

Clearness, 

Naturalista. 

Naturalist. 

light. 

Organista. 

Organist. 

Crueldad. 

Cruelty. 

Violinista. 

Violinist. 

Dificultad. 

Difficulty. 

Purista. 

Purist. 

Eternidad. 

Eternity. 

Escritorio. 

Office. 

Facilidad. 

Facility.    ' 

Clima. 

Climate. 

Noticias. 

News. 

Dolor. 

Grief,  pain, 

ache. 

Guerra. 

War. 

COMPO 

sn 

:iON. 

Se  dice  que  Maximiliano  ha  partido 

de  Mexico. 
i  Se  eree  eso  ? 
Aqui  lo  eree  todo  el  mundo;  pero 

en  Francia  no  se  eree. 
I  Cree  V.  que  se  podra  pagar  pronto 

la  deuda  de  los  Estados  Unidos  ? 
No  se  hara  muy  pronto ;  pero  se 

hara. 
Aqui  se  habla  espafiol. 
Aqui  se  vende  buen  vino. 
Se  perdona  algunas  veces  a  los  de- 

lincuentes,  pero  no  siempre. 
El  hombre  se  engana  a  si  mismo. 
jEnvio  V.  el  violin  al  violinista? 

Se  lo  en  vie. 


It  is  said  that  Maximihan  has  left 
Mexico. 

Is  that  believed  ? 

Here  everybody  believes  it ;  but  in 
France  it  is  not  believed. 

Is  it  thought  that  the  United  States 
debt  can  soon  be  paid  ? 

It  will  not  be  done  very  soon ;  but 
it  will  be  done. 

Spanish  spoken  here. 

Good  wine  sold  here. 

Transgressors  are  pardoned  some- 
times, but  not  always. 

Men  deceive  themselves. 

Did  you  send  the  violin  to  the  vio- 
linist ? 

I  sent  it  to  him,  or  did  send  it  to  him. 


LESSOJSr  XXXVI. 


193 


I  Tocan  bien  el  piano  en  Espana  ? 

En  Espana  se  toca  bien  la  guitarra. 
^Se  habla   bien  el   espanol   en  la 

America  del  Sur? 
Lo  hablan  y  pronuncian  bien. 

I,  Le  duele  a  V.  la  cabeza  1 

Si,  senor,  mucho. 

^  Como  se  llama  V.  ? 

Me  llamo  Juan. 

I  Como  se  llama  eso  en  espafiol  ? 

^  Como  se  dice  eso  en  espanol  ? 

Lo  mismo  qu^  <;n  ingles. 


Do  they  play  well  on  the  piano  in 

Spain  ? 
They  play  the  guitar  well  in  Spain. 
Do  they  speak  Spanish  well  in  South 

America  ? 
They   speak  it  and   pronounce  it 

well. 
Does  your  head  ache  ? 
Yes,  sir,  very  much. 
What  is  your  name  1 
My  name  is  John. 
What  is  that  called  in  Spanish  1 
How  do  you  (or,  do  they)  say  that 

in  Spanish  ? 
The  same  as  in  English. 


EXPLANATION. 

180.  MovEE,  to  move,  is  irregular  in  the  same  forms  as 
acostar ;  i.  e.,  in  the  first,  second,  and  third  persons  singular, 
and  the  third  person  plural,  of  the  indicative  and  subjunc- 
tive modes,  and  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  impera- 
tive. {See  this  verh^  and  those  conjugated  Mice  it^  at  the  end 
of  the  hooh.) 

181.  Se  is  an  indefinite  personal  pronoun  referring  to  a 
personal  agency  in  such  a  manner  as  to  leave  undetermined 
both  the  sex  and  the  number  of  the  subject.  It  corresponds, 
in  this- respect,  to  the  English  we^  they.,  people^  one  or  it\  in 
fact,  with  all  expressions  that  mention  persons  thus  vaguely 
and  indefinitely.  It  is  used  with  the  third  person  singular 
of  the  verb  ;  as, 

It  is  said,  or  they  say. 

It  is  believed,  or  they  believe. 

They  (people)  will  not  do  it,  or  it 

will  not  be  done. 
Good  wine  is  sold  here. 
Spanish  is  spoken  here. 


Se  dice. 
Se  cree. 
No  se  hard. 

Aqui  se  vende  vino  bueno. 
Aqui  se  habla  espaSol. 


182.  The  four  uses  of  the  pronoun  se  have  now  been  illus- 
trated ;  and  it  may  be  well  to  state  them  all  again,  in  order 
that  its  various  functions  may  be  well  understood  so  as  to 
avoid  all  confusion.     They  are  the  following : 
15 


194  LESSON  XXXVI. 

1st.  As  an  indefinite  subject,  as  has  been  seen  in  the  pres- 
ent lesson ;  as, 
Se  dice.  I  They  say. 

2d.  To  form  the  passive  voice  of  verbs  (see  Lesson 
XXXII.) ;  as, 

Se  perdona  algunas  veces  a  los  de- 1  Transgressors   are    sometimes   par- 
lincuentes.  I     doned. 

3d.  As  a  reflexive  pronoun ;  as, 

Manuel  se  engana.  1  Emanuel  deceives  himself. 

4th,  and  lastly,  the  objective  pronoun  se,  for  the  sake  of 
euphony,  takes  the  place  of  the  objectives  le,  la,  lo,  les  (see 
Lesson  XXVII.) ;  as, 
Se  lo  pagare  a  V.  manana.  1 1  will  pay  it  to  you  to-morrow. 

183.  Many  English  nouns  ending  in  ty  may  be  changed 
into  Spanish  by  substituting  dad  for  this  syllable ;  as, 

AciiYidad,  ('Activity. 

CapacicZa^Z.  I  Capacity. 

!N".  B. — All  nouns  of  this  termination  are  feminine.  Many 
English  nouns  ending  in  ist,  are  rendered  into  Spanish  by 
adding  to  these  letters  an  a ;  as, 

Artista.  |  Artist. 

Organista.  I  Organist,  &c. 

184.  DoLEK. — This  verb  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  verb  gustar,  to  like  (see  Lesson  XXXI.) ;  as, 

I,  Le  duele  a  V".  la  cabeza  ?  |         Does  your  head  ache  ? 

The  same  may  be  expressed  in  the  following  manner : 
i  Tiene  V.  dolor  de  cabeza  ?         1         Have  you  a  headache  ? 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  i  Se  vende  buen  vino  en  Nueva  York  ?  Se  vende  bueno 
y  male ;  pero  muy  caro. 

2.  I  Que  noticias  hay  ?  Se  dice  que  la  Alemania  y  la  Italia 
estan  en  guerra. 

3.  I  Se  cree  eso  ?  No  solo  se  cree,  sine  que  se  sabe  que  la 
guerra  ha  principiado  ya. 


LESSON  XXX  VL  195 

4.  i  Se  habla  espanol  en  Nueva  York  ?  En  Nueva  York  se 
hablan  todos  los  idiomas,  pero  principalmente  el  ingles,  el  ale- 
man,  el  frances  y  el  espanol. 

5.  I  Se  aman  los  franceses  y  los  ingleses  ?  Creo  que  no  se 
aman  como  hermanos  ;  pero  se  respetan. 

6.  ^  A  quien  se  ama  mas  en  este  pais,  a  los  franceses  6  a  los 
ingleses  ?    Es  cosa  que  no  sabre  decir. 

7.  I  En  los  Estados  Unidos  se  respetan  las  iglesias  de  todas 
las  religiones  ?  Si,  senor,  porque  hay  libertad  de  religion ;  es 
una  cosa  muy  buena  para  el  pais,  y  yo  la  deseo  para  todas  las 
naciones  del  mundo. 

8.  Hablemos  de  otra  cosa,  porque  todos  no  son  tan  liberales 
como  V. ;  y  no  se  hara  Y.  amigos  si  habla  tan  francamente. 

9.  Convengo  con  V.  en  eso,  ademas  no  se  debe  decir  todo 
lo  que  se  piensa ;  pero  para  aprender  una  lengua  se  debe  prac- 
ticar  mucho  y  se  debe  hablar  de  todo  un  poco. 

10.  Y.  tiene  razon  en  eso,  y  una  conversacion  en  que  no  se 
habla,  sino  de  **  si  hace  calor  6  frio,  si  ha  estado  Y.  en  el  teatro, 
en  el  concierto,  6  en  la  iglesia,  y  de  si  tiene  Y.  el  sombrero  y  el 
fusil,  y  el  vino,  y  el  dinero  de  Y.  6  del  vecino  "  es  muy  cansada. 

11.  Por  supuesto ;  pero  Y.  debe  saber  que  lo  que  se  llama  en 
ingles  small  talk  *  es  muy  de  moda. — Lo  se,  es  muy  de  moda,  y 
hasta  necesario  algunas  veces. 

12.  I  Le  dijo  Y.  eso  a  su  amigo  ?  No  se  lo  dije,  porque  mi 
hermana  se  lo  habia  dicho  ya. 

13.  I  Por  que  no  me  lo  dijo  Y.  a  mi  ?  Porque  mi  hermano 
me  ha  dicho  que  se  lo  dira  a  Y.  maiiana. 

14.  i  Toca  Dn.  Pedro  bien  el  piano  ?  No,  seiior,  pero  se  en- 
gaiia  a  si  mismo  y  cree  tocarlo  muy  bien. 

15.  Yengase  Y.  esta  tarde  por  aqui,  e  iremos  a  dar  un  paseo. 
— Bien,  si  Y.  me  espera  hasta  las  seis,  vendre,  pero  no  antes,  por- 
que no  puedo  salir  del  escritorio  hasta  esa  hora. 

16.  I  Que  tal  tiempo  ha  hecho  hoy  en  la  ciudad  ?  Hoy  ha 
hecho  buen  tiempo  y  ayer  hizo  buen  tiempo  tambien ;  pero  ma- 
iiana hara  mal  tiempo. 

17.  I  Como  sabe  Y.  que  hara  mal  tiempo  maiiana  ?  Porque 
en  Nueva  York  no  hace  nunca  buen  tiempo  por  tres  dias. 

18.  i  Y.  cree  que  no  hace  buen  tiempo  mas  que  (sino)  en  la 
Habana  ?  Perdone  Y.  no  me  gusta  el  clima  de  la  Habana  ni  el 
de  Nueva  York. 

*  Charla, 


196  LESSON  XXXVI. 

19.  Entonces,  ^  que  clima  le  gusta  a  V.  ?  El  de  Espana,  por- 
que  alii  tenemos  verdaderamente  las  cuatro  estaciones. 

20.  I  Que  quiere  V.  decir  ?  Quiero  decir  que  en  Espana  hace 
calor  en  verano  aunque  no  muchisimo ;  en  invierno  hace  frio, 
pero  no  nos  helamos ;  en  otono  hace  un  excelente  tiempo  de 
otoiio,  y  en  la  primavera  tenemos  primavera. 

21.  I  Bien,  j  no  es  lo  mismo  en  Nueva  York  ?  Dispense  V.  ; 
en  Nueva  York  no  he  conocido  la  primavera ;  hay  muy  pocos 
dias  de  otoiio,  un  invierno  larguisimo  y  un  verano  calurosisimo. 

22.  e  Y  en  ]a  Habana  ?  En  la  Habana  hay  todo  el  aiio  el 
Verano  de  Nueva  York. 

23.  I  Yo  pensaba  que  a  V.  no  le  gustaba  hablar  del  tiempo  ? 
V.  no  me  ha  entendido ;  creo  que  debe  hablarse  de  todo,  pero  no 
siempre  del  tiempo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Why  do  you  not  come  more  quickly  vrhen  I  call  you  ?  I 
cannot  come  any  more  quickly,  my  head  aches. 

2.  Where  do  you  think  Spanish  is  spoken  best  ?  In  Madrid, 
and  in  all  parts  of  Old  and  New  Castile  (Castilla). 

3.  And  is  it  not  spoken  well  in  South  America  ?  There  is 
some  difPerence  in  the  pronunciation ;  but,  in  general,  people  of 

.  education  speak  correctly,  whether  they  be  *  South  Americans 
or  Spaniards. 

4.  William,  will  you  be  good  enough  to  take  this  letter  to 
the  post-office  as  you  go  to  take  your  lesson  ?  I  shall  take  it  in 
the  afternoon  ;  I  have  not  time  now. 

5.  Are  there  many  organists  in  the  United  States  ?  Yes ; 
and  in  New  York,  principally,  there  are  a  great  many  excellent 
organists  and  pianists. 

6.  Do  you  like  that  man's  manner  of  speaking  ?.  No,  I  do 
not ;  he  is  too  much  of  ai  purist. 

7.  Is  your  brother  studying  natural  history  ?  I  cannot  tell 
you  whether  (si)  he  is  studying  it  or  not ;  but  I  know  he  has 
just  bought  the  complete  works  of  Buffon. 

8.  Who  is  Buifon  ?    A  celebrated  French  naturalist. 

9.  What  did  that  man  do  who  was  taken  to  prison  this 
morning  ?  They  say  he  was  arrested  (arrestar)  for  cruelty  to 
animals. 

*  Ya  sean. 

f  English  words  in  italics  are  not  to  be  translated  into  Spanish. 


LESS  ON  XXX  VL  '  197 

10.  Will  he  be  punished  for  it  ?  Of  course ;  transgressors  of 
that  kind  are  rarely  let  off  unpunished  (pardoned). 

11.  What  is  the  matter  with  Alexander  ?  A  dog  bit  him  on 
the  hand. 

1,2.  Come  here,  Alexander ;  show  me  your  hand.  Is  this  the 
cne  ?    No,  it  is  the  other. 

13.  Does  it  pain  you  much  ?  It  was  very  painful  (pained) 
when  I  was  first  bitten,  but  now  it  is  less  so. 

14.  I  have  always  told  you  how  necessary  it  is  to  be  careful 
with  dogs.     I  know  that ;  and  I  shall  do  so  in  future. 

15.  Does  your  new  watch  run  well  ?  Not  very  well ;  it  stops 
three  or  four  times  a  day. 

16.  Is  your  son  getting  on  well  in  his  studies  ?  Fairly  well ; 
he  has  a  great  deal  of  ability,  and  is  fond  of  study. 

17.  Look  here,  Charles.     What  do  you  wish  ? 

18.  Count  from  one  to  a  thousand  in  Spanish.  Oh !  I  can  do 
that  with  the  greatest  ease. 

19.  Well,  let  us  see  ?  One,  two,  three,  four,  five,  six,  seven, 
eight,  nine,  ten,  eleven,  twelve,  thirteen,  fourteen,  fifteen,  sixteen, 
seventeen,  eighteen,  nineteen,  twenty,  twenty -one,  thirty,  forty, 
fifty,  sixty,  seventy,  eighty,  ninety,  a  hundred,  a  hundred  and  one, 
two  hundred,  three  hundred,  four  hundred,  five  hundred,  six  hun- 
dred, seven  hundred,  eight  hundred,  nine  hundred,  a  thousand. 

20.  How  do  they  write  that  last  word  in  Spanish  ?  I  do  not 
remember. 

21.  What  is  that  ?  you  do  not  remember !  Did  you  not  learn 
in  the  lesson  on  pronunciation,  at  the  beginning  of  the  gram- 
mar, that  in  Spanish  every  word  is  written  just  as  it  is  pro- 
nounced ?    Oh,  yes,  now  I  remember. 

22.  Tell  me,  if  you  please,  Mr.  R,  is  French  as  easy  to  pro- 
nounce as  Spanish  ?  They  say  that,  on  the  contrary,  it  is  much 
more  difficult. 

23.  But  it  is  not  impossible  to  learn  French  pronunciation  ? 
I  did  not  say  that;  I  only  said  that  they  say  it  is  more  difficult 
than  Spanish  pronunciation. 

24.  How  do  I  pronounce  ?  Very  well ;  but,  in  reading  or 
speaking,  take  a  little  more  care  with  the  z. 

25.  Please  pronounce  the  name  of  that  letter  again  (to  return 
to  pronounce)  ?    With  the  greatest  pleasure ;  it  is  called  z. 

26.  What  other  letter  (letra)  is  pronounced  like  (the)  z  ?  C, 
when  it  comes  (finds  itself)  before  an  e  or  an  i. 


198 


LESSON  XXX  VIL 


lesso:n:  xxxvii. 


Subir. 
Atender. 


I  To  go  up,  or  come  up,  to  ascend. 
I  To  attend. 


INDICATIVE — Present, 


I  attend,  &;c. 


Atiendo,  atiendes^  atiende, 
atendemos,  atendeis,  atien- 
den. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Atiende  tii,  atended  vosotros.      |  Attend,  &;c. 

SUBJUNCTIVE — Present. 
Atienda,  atiendas,  atienda,  aten- 1 1  may,  or  can,  attend,  &;c. 
damos,  atendais,  atiendan.        I 

Verbs  conjugated  like  atender. 


Ascender. 

To  ascend,  to  mount. 

Descender. 

To  descend. 

Defender. 

To  defend. 

Entender. 

To  understand. 

Encender. 

To  light,  to  kindle. 

Perder. 

To  lose. 

Alegrarse. 

To  be  glad,  to  rejoice. 

Charlar. 

To  prattle,  to  chat. 

Hallar. 

To  find. 

Llegar. 

To  arrive. 

Enviar. 

To  send. 

Preparar. 

To  prepare. 

COXJUN 

CTIONS. 

Con  tal  que. 

On    condition    that;    provided 

(that). 

Puesto  que. 

Since,  inasmuch  as;  supposing 

that. 

Dado  caso  que. 

In  case. 

Hasta. 

Until,  till. 

Aun  cuando. 

Even,  although. 

Por  tanto. 

Therefore. 

Por  cuanto. 

Seeing  that,  for. 

A  menos  de.    ) 
A  menos  que.  ) 

Unless. 

LESSON  XXXVII. 


199 


Tambien. 
Ademas. 

Also,  too. 
Moreover,  besides. 

Ya. 

Tampoco. 

Whether,  either. 
Neither. 

Ojala. 

Would  to  God,  God  grant. 

Vapor. 

^  Vapor. 
(  Steamer. 

Altura.                Height. 
Friolera.              Trifle. 

Globo. 
Resfriado, 

Balloon. 
Cold. 

Estada,  perma-'Stay,    pern 
nencia.                nence. 

COMPOSITION. 

Deseo  que  este  estudiando  su  leccion. 
Creo  que  la  esta  estudiando. 
I  Piensa  V.  que  tiene  razon  ? 
No  pienso  que  la  tenga.  ' 

No  lo  creere  aunque  me  lo  digan 

mil. 
Lo  creo  aunque  el  lo  niega. 
Dudo  que  venga  hoy. 
Dudo  que  haya  venido. 
Dado  caso  que  V.  no  me  encuentre 

en  casa,  aguardeme  V.  hasta  que 

venga. 
Asi  lo  hare  con  tal  que  V.  me  pro- 

meta  volver  pronto. 

Volvere  tan  pronto  com^  pueda. 
Temo  que  no  haya  recibido  mi  carta. 
;  Ojala  que  no  la  reciba !   pero  yo 

temo  que  la  recibira. 
A  menos  que  V.  venga  primero  a 

verme,  yo  no  ire  a  verle  a  V. 
Puesto  que  el  haya  venido,  i  le  ha- 

blara  V.  ? 
Aunque  haya  venido  no  le  hablare 

antes  qua  el  me  hable. 


I  wish  him  to  study  his  lesson. 

I  think  he  is  studying  it. 

Do  you  think  he  is  right  f 

I  do  not  think  he  is. 

I    shall  not  believe   it   though    a 

thousand  tell  it  to  me. 
I  believe  it,  although  he  denies  it. 
I  doubt  whether  he  will  come  to-day. 
I  doubt  his  having  come. 
In  case  you  should  not  find  me  at 

home,  wait  for  me  till  I  come. 

I  shall  do  so,  on  condition  you  prom- 
ise me  to  come  back  soon  (or 
quickly). 

I  shall  return  as  soon  as  I  can. 

I  fear  he  has  not  received  my  letter. 

God  grant  that  he  may  not  receive 
it !  but  I  fear  he  will  (receive  it). 

Unless  you  come  first  to  see  me,  I 
shall  not  go  to  see  you. 

Supposing  him  to  have  come,  will 
you  speak  to  him  ? 

Although  he  have  come  I  shall  not 
speak  to  him  before  he  speaks  to  me. 


EXPLANATION. 

185.  Ateistdek,  to  attend,  and  all  the  verbs  conjugated 
like  it,  take  an  i  before  the  last  e  of  the  radical  letters  in  the 
same  form  as  acertar ;  i.  e.,  in  the  first,  second  and  third  per- 


200  LESSON  XXX  VIL 

sons  singular,  and  third  plural  of  the  present  indicative,  and 
the  present  subjunctive,  and  in  the  second  person  singular  of 
the  imperative.     {See  page  394.) 

186.  The  SUBJUNCTIVE  mode  is  that  form  of  the  verb  by 
which  are  expressed  condition^  hypothesis^  contingency^  and 
which  is  generally  used  in  a  clause  subjoined  or  subordinate 
to  another  clause  or  verb,  and  is  preceded  by  certain  conjunc- 
tions ;  as,  que^  aunque^  a  fin  de  que^  con  tal  que^  antes  que^  &c. 

As  none  of  the  modes  of  the  English  verb  correspond  ex- 
actly to  the  Spanish  subjunctive ;  and  as  the  tenses  of  the 
latter  are  often  employed  to  express  ideas,  which,  in  English, 
are  conveyed  by  those  of  the  indicative  or  the  potential,  and 
not  unfrequently  by  the  infinitive,  pupils  experience  much 
difficulty  in  determining  when  the  subjunctive  is  to  be  used. 
Were  we  to  give  all  the  rules  necessary  for  the  correct  use  of 
this  mode,  a  whole  volume  might  be  filled  ;  we  shall  therefore 
give  here  those  most  needed  to  guide  the  student  in  all  ordi- 
nary cases. 

187.  The  subordinate  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  when 
the  leading  verb  means  admiratio7i^  wish^  willy  desire^  consent ^ 
prohibition^  hinderance,  necessity^  command^  douht^  regret^ 
joy^  usefulness^  contentment^  hope^  fear^  surprise^  ignorance^ 
prefer ence^  negation^  permission^  sorrotv,  &c. 

The  subjunctive  mode  is  here  required  because  we  are 
not  positive  that  what  we  wish,  command,  &c.,  will  be  accom- 
plished ;  but  the  same  verb  which  governs  the  subordinate 
one  in  any  of  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  when  the  accom- 
plishment of  the  action  is  doubtful,  governs  it  in  any  of  those 
of  the  indicative  when  the  action  is  regarded  as  certain  to 
take  place ;  as, 

Deselo  V.  a  los  que  ) 

hayan  Tenido.         \  doubtful. 
Deselo  V.  a  los  cuatro  ) 

que/ianyenido.         \  Oertain. 

In  the  first  example,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive, 
because  the  speaker  is  not  positive  how  many  have  come,  or 
whether  any  have  as  yet  come.     In  the  second,  the  indicative 


Grive  it  to    those  who  (may)  have 

come. 
Give  it  to  the  four  who  have  (or  are) 

come. 


LESSON  XXXVII.  201 

is  employed,  because  the  speaker  is  certain  that  the  persons 
alluded  to  have  arrived,  and  is  also  informed  as.  to  their 
number. 

188.  There  are  in  Spanish  certain  conjunctions  which  re- 
quire the  subjunctive  mode  after  them,  on  account  of  the  in- 
definite and  uncertain  meaning  which  they  commonly  have. 
Some  of  them,  however,  it  will  be  seen,  occasionally  occur 
with  a  positive  signification,  and  may,  in  that  case,  take  the 
indicative ;  as, 


No  lo  creere  aunque  )  ^     ,. 

,     , .  ./      y  Contingent. 

me  lo  digan  mil.       )  ^ 

Lo    creo    aunque    el  \ 

me  lo  niega. 


y  Certain. 


I  will  not  believe  it  though  a  thou- 
sand tell  it  to  me. 

I  believe  it,  although  he  denies  it 
(to  me). 


189.  Finally,  there  are  other  parts  of  speech,  and  even 
whole  phrases,  which,  on  account  of  their  indeterminate  and 
doubtful,  or  contingent,  meaning,  require  the  subjunctive 
after  them. 

190.  The  PEESEN^T  TEN^SE  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  marks  a 
contingent  action  as  going  on  at  the  present  moment,  or  to 
take  place  at  some  future  time ;  as, 

Dudo  que  venga.  1 1  doubt  whether  he  will  come. 

N.  B. — Another  use  of  this  mode  and  tense  has  been 
noticed  already  in  treating  of  the  imperative.  (See  Lesson 
XXXY.) 

191.  The  PERFECT  TENSE  expresscs  a  doubtful  or  contin- 
gent action  or  event,  as  having  been  completed  some  time 
past,  or  that  will  have  taken  place  before  the  completion  of 
another  future  action  or  event ;  as, 

I  doubt  whether  he  has  come. 

I  shall  give  him  his  book  when  he 


Dudo  que  haya  venido. 

!'o  le  dare  su  librc 

haya  dado  el  mio. 


Yo  le  dare  su  libro  cuando  el  ^me 


will  have  given  me  mine. 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  i  Espera  Y.  que  Hague  hoy  el  vapor  de  Europa  ?  Creo 
que  ha  llegado  esta  maiiana. 

2.  Yo  dudo  que  haya  llegado  todavia.  l  Quiere  V.  enviar  su 
criado  para  preguntar  si  ha  llegado  el  vapor  ?  Con  mucho  gusto, 
porque  yo  tambien  deseo  tener  noticias  de  Europa. 


202  LESSOJ^  XXXVIL 

3.  i  Cree  T.  que  llegara  un  dia  en  que  podamos  ir  a  Europa 
en  globos  aereostaticos  ?  Mucho  me  alegrare  que  llegue  ese  dia, 
pero  creo  que  no  lo  veremos  nosotros,  porque  es  muy  dificil,  j 
quiza  imposible,  el  hallar  la  direceion  de  los  globos. 

4.  I  Suben  muy  alto  los  globos  ?  No  creo  que  suban  a  mas 
de  dos  6  tres  mil  pies,  pero  si  se  quiere  pueden  subir  hasta  la 
altura  de  quince  6  diez  y  seis  mil  pies. 

5.  Dado  caso  que  llegue  hoy  el  vapor ;  g  espera  V.  a  su  amigo  ? 
For  supuesto  que  si,  puesto  que  me  escribe  que  llegara  en  este 
mismo  vapor. 

6.  Ojala  que  llegue,  pero  temo  mucho  que  haya  tornado  otro 
vapor  y  que  no  llegue  liasta  la  semana  proxima. 

7.  I  Duda  V.  que  haya  estudiado  su  leccion  ?  Dudo  que  la 
haya  estudiado,  porque  es  muy  holgazan. 

8.  A  menos  que  V.  estudie  bien  las  lecciones  y  haga  con 
mucho  cuidado  los  ejercicios  de  la  gramatica,  no  aprendera  V. 
el  espanol. 

9.  Si,  pero  yo  creia  que  se  podia  aprender  una  lengua  con 
solo  la  practica. — Asi  es ;  pero  entonces  se  necesita  practicar 
todos  los  dias  con  quien  la  hable  muy  bien. 

10.  I  En  cuanto  tiempo  piensa  V.  que  hablare  yo  el  espanol  ? 
V.  lo  hablara  cuando  sepa  bien  todas  las  lecciones  de  la  grama- 
tica, y  haya  practicado  y  escrito  los  ejercicios. 

11.  Y  despues  que  haya  aprendido  toda  la  gramatica,  practi- 
cado, y  escrito  los  ejercicios,  i  hablare  perfectamente  el  espanol  ? 
No,  senor;  pero  hablara  Y.  bastante  correctamente  para  llevar 
una  conversacion,  escribir  una  correspondencia,  y  poder  hacer 
negocios  en  esta  lengua. 

12.  Yo  pensaba  que  el  espaiiol  era  una  lengua  muy  facil. — 
Verdaderamente  lo  es  para  aprender  lo  que  acabo  de  decirle  a 
V. ;  pero  para  hablarlo  perfectamente  como  V.  quiere,  todas  las 
lenguas  son  dificiles. 

13.  Y  si  V.  no  lo  cree,  hagame  el  favor  de  decirme  si  habla 
V.  su  propia  lengua  y  la  escribe  perfectamente. — Yo  confieso  que 
todavia  tengo  algo  que  aprender  en  el  ingles. 

14.  Creame  V.,  amigo  mio,  el  estudio  de  una  lengua  no  es 
una  friolera. — Creo  que  tiene  V.  mucha  razon ;  pero  hay  muchos 
que  quieren  aprenderlo  todo  y  muy  pocos  que  qfuieran  estudiar. 

15.  i  Me  promete  V.  venir  a  verme  cuando  venga  a  la  ciudad  ? 
Aunque  venga  a  la  ciudad  no  podre  venir  a  ver  a  V.  a  menos 
que  acabe  temprano  mis  negocios. 


LESSON  XXX  VIL  203 

16.  i  Sabe  V.  hacer  frases  (phrases)  en  espaiiol  con  todos  los 
tiempos  del  modo  indicative  ?  Si,  seiior,  y  tambien  con  el  im- 
perativo,  el  presente  y  el  perfecto  de  subjuntivo. 

17.  Muy  bien,  entonces  hagame  V.  ocho  frases  con  los  ocho 
tiempos  de  indicativo,  una  con  el  imperativo  y  dos  con  el  pre- 
sente y  perfecto  de  subjuntivo  de  cualquier  verbo. 

18.  I  Esta  V.  malo  ?  i  Ha  estado  V.  hoy  en  el  escritorio  ? 
g  Estaba  V.  en  su  casa  cuando  su  amigo  fue  a  verlo  ?  e  Habia 
V.  estado  en  el  teatro  antes  de  ir  al  baile  ?  i  Estuvo  Y.  ayer  en 
la  ciudad  ?  i  Que  hizo  V.  asi  que  hubo  estado  algiin  tiempo  en 
el  hotel  ?  I  Estara  V.  en  casa  manana  todo  el  dia  ?  i  Habra 
escrito  V.  su  ejercicio  antes  de  las  cuatro  ?  Estudia  tus  leccio- 
nes  y  escribe  los  ejercicios.  No  pierdas  el  tiempo.  i  Duda  V. 
que  yo  sepa  mi  leccion  ?    i  Duda  V.  que  yo  la  haya  estudiado  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  John,  there  is  some  one  at  the  door ;  go  and  see  who  it  is. 
Yes,  sir. 

2.  Is  Mr.  Retortillo  in  ?  Yes,  sir ;  who  shall  I  say  wishes  to 
see  him  ?  Tell  him  that  Mr.  Perez  wishes  to  speak  to  him  a 
moment. 

3.  Mr.  Perez  wishes  to  see  you  a  moment,  sir.  Let  {que)  him 
come  up. 

4.  Oh !  I  am  so  glad  to  see  you  !  How  are  you  ?  how  have 
you  been  ?  when  did  you  return  ? — I  arrived  by  the  steamer 
Napoleon  III.,  on  Wednesday  last. 

5.  Did  you  receive  all  the  letters  I  wrote  you  during  {du- 
rante) my  absence  ?    I  received  one  in  March,  dated  at  Rome. 

6.  How  did  you  spend  the  time  ?  did  you  pass  through  Spain, 
as  you  had  intended  ?  No ;  while  I  was  still  in  Paris,  and  pre- 
paring to  set  out  for  Madrid,  I  learned  that  my  brother  was  very 
ill  in  Florence. 

7.  Indeed !  I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  that.  What  was  the 
matter  with  him  (what  had  he)  ?  A  heavy  (strong)  cold,  that 
he  had  caught  on  his  way  from  Turin  to  Florence. 

8.  He  had  not,  I  believe,  enjoyed  very  good  health  for  a  long 
time  before  leaving  home  ?  No,  he  has  always  been  sickly ;  but 
principally  for  about  a  year  before  his  voyage  to  Europe,  he  had 
colds  almost  every  month,  and  I  may  say  that  he  was  never 
without  headaches,  day  or  night. 

9.  Had  he  an  Italian  physician  to  attend  him  ?    No,  Dr. 


204  LFSSO^''  XXX  VIL 

Perez,  his  family  physician,  who  was  travelling  through  Italy 
that  same  winter,  just  arrived  at  Florence  the  same  day  as  my 
brother,  and,  hearing  of  his  illness,  went  at  once  {inmediata- 
mente)  to  see  him. 

10.  How  long  was  he  ill  ?    Nearly  three  weeks. 

11.  How  ?  Are  you  going  away  so  soon  ?  Sit  down  and  let 
us  chat  for  half  an  hour  about  your  family.  Thank  you  ;  I  can- 
not stay  any  longer  now,  but  I  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
you  again  to-morrow. 

12.  Where  are  your  brothers  ?  They  are  gone  to  see  the  bal- 
loon that  is  to  go  up  this  afternoon. 

13.  Indeed  ?  I  thought  the  balloon  was  not  to  go  up  until 
Saturday.  It  was  not  to  have  gone  up  until  Saturday ;  but,  on 
account  of  the  fine  weather,  it  is  to  go  up  this  afternoon. 

14.  Will  many  persons  go  up  in  it  ?  Very  few,  I  think ;  peo- 
ple in  general  do  not  like  to  go  to  such  a  height. 

15.  Do  you  understand  all  that  is  said  in  Spanish  ?  I  under- 
stand more  and  more  every  day ;  but  there  are  still  many  words 
and  constructions  that  I  do  not  know.    • 

16.  How  long  do  you  think  it  will  be  before  I  can  understand 
all,  and  speak  like  a  native  ?  That  is  a  hard  question  to  answer ; 
provided  you  study  with  attention,  read  a  great  deal,  and  prac- 
tice with  Spaniards,  you  will  soon  understand  and  speak  with 
ease ;  but  it  is  difficult  for  a  foreigner  to  speak  any  language  ex- 
actly like  a  native. 

17.  But  do  you  believe  it  to  be  impossible  ?  No,  I  do  not  say 
it  is  impossible,  but  it  is  very  difficult ;  and,  besides,  I  do  not 
think  it  is  necessary.  All  that  is  required  (wanted)  is  correct- 
ness, and  the  ability  to  converse  with  ease. 

18.  Has  John's  servant  lighted  the  fire  ?  Not  yet ;  John  does 
not  wish  it  to  be  lighted  until  he  returns. 

19.  Well,  Charles,  have  you  found  out  *  the  meaning  of  the 
word  you  asked  me  about  yesterday  ?  No,  sir ;  I  have  searched 
for  it  in  all  the  dictionaries,  and  it  is  not  to  be  found  in  any  of 
them. 

20.  Why  do  you  not  ask  your  teacher  ?  he  can  tell  you  im- 
mediately. Yes,  I  know  that  very  well ;  but  I  do  not  like  to  ask 
him  so  many  questions :  every  day  he  comes  I  have  a  new  one 
to  ask  him. 

21.  Do  not  stop  at  trifles  of  that  kind ;  your  teacher  is  very 

*  English  words  italicized  are  not  to  be  translated^ 


LESSON  XXXVIIL 


205 


glad  to  be  able  to  answer  all  questions,  knowing  that  by  that 
means  (medio)  you  will  learn  better  and  more  quickly. 

22.  I  am  very  glad  to  see  you  defend  him,  for  Alexander 
said  he  was  not  fond  of  answering  questions,  and  did  not  like 
inquisitive  persons. — Nor  does  he ;  but  an  inquisitive  person  is 
one  thing,  and  a  person  who  asks  questions  in  order  to  gain 
knowledge  is  another. 


LESSON    XXXYIII, 


Sentir.     {See    conjugation    of  \ 

To  feel,  to  be  sorry  for,  to  re- 

this verb  near 

end  of 

gram- 

gret. 

mar.) 

Verbs 

conjugat 

^d  like  SENTIR. 

Arrepentirse. 
Consentir. 

To  repent. 
To  consent. 

Preferir. 

To  prefer. 

Asegurar. 
Animar. 

To  secure,  to  insure,  to  assure. 
To  animate,  to  encourage,  to  in- 
duce. 

Desanimar. 

To  dishearten,  to  discourage. 

Ayudar. 
Lnfermar. 

To  aid,  to  help. 

To  fall  (or  get)  sick,  to  make 
sick. 

Exigir. 

To  exact,  to  require. 

Quedar. 
Perfeccionar. 

To  remain. 

To  perfect,  to  finish. 

Usar. 

To  use,  to  wear. 

Generalmente. 
De  memoria. 

Generally. 
By  heart. 

Ambos. 

De  continuo. 

Both. 
Continually. 

Perezoso. 

Exami] 
Trade, 

Albert. 

Lazy. 

Examen. 

Oficio. 

Alberto. 

aation. 
office. 

1  Elena.              Ellen. 
Persona.           Person. 
Lectura.           Reading,  lecture. 

206 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 


Norte. 

North. 

Profesion.        Profession. 

Sur,  or  sud 

South. 

Escuela.           School. 

Este,  oriente.     East. 

Muerte.            Death. 

Oeste. 

I     West. 

Vida.                Life. 

Occidente. 

Promesa.          Promise. 

List  of  the  active  participles  or  verbal  nouns  and  adjectives  formed  from 

the  verbs  already  introduced. 

Viviente. 

Living  being. 

Paseante.       Walker,  passer-by, 

Estudiante. 

Student. 

promenader. 

Escribiente. 

A  lawyer's  clerk, 

Creyente.        Believer. 

a  writer    in  a 

Conveniente.  Convenient,  suita- 

commercial 

ble. 

house 

Importante.  Important. 

Residente. 

Resident. 

Tratante.        Dealer. 

Tocante  (en 

Concerning. 

Cortante.        Sharp,  edged. 

orden  a). 

Gobernante.  Governing. 

Reinante. 

Reigning. 

Contante.       Ready. 

Saliente. 

Salient. 

Doliente.        Sad,  afflicted, 

Amante. 

Lover. 

mournfuL 

Practicante. 

Practitioner. 

Principiante. 

Beginner. 

* 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Tocante  a  lo  que  V.  me  dijo  el  otro 

dia,  deseo  que  no  se  hable  mas  de 

ello. 
Entraron  cantando. 
Lo  encontraron  leyendo. 
4  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ? 
Estoy  leyendo. 
Vengo  de^comer. 
Trabaja  sin  descansar. 
El  trabajar  es  bueno  para  muchas 

cosas. 
El  descansar  despues  de  trabajar  es 

necesario. 
La  vimos  bailar. 

Manuel  es  estudiante  industrioso. 
^Es  V.   residente   de    los   Estados 

Unidos  ? 
]fcl  es  buen  creyente. 


Concerning  what  you  told  me  the 
other  day,  I  wish  no  more  to  be 
said  about  it. 

They  came  in  singing. 

They  found  him  reading. 

What  are  you  doing. 

I  am  reading. 

I  am  coming  from  dinner. 

He  labors  without  resting. 

Work  is  good  for  many  things. 

Rest  after  labor  is  necessary. 

We  saw  her  dancing. 

Emanuel  is  an  industrious  student. 

Are  you  a  resident  of  the  United 

States  ? 
He  is  a  good  believer. 


LUSSOM  XXXVIII.  207 

EXPLANATION. 

192.  Active  Participles.— Many  Spanish  verbs  have, 
besides  the  present  and  past  participles,  another  called  the 
active  participle  which  is  sometimes  a  verbal  adjective  and 
^gain  a  verbal  noun.  Those  formed  from  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation  end  in  aiite ;  as,  amante^  loving,  lover  ;  and  those 
formed  from  the  second  and  third  end  in  iente  or  ente ;  as, 
asistente^  assistant,  obediente^  obedient. 

Participles  of  this  kind  cannot  be  formed  from  all  verbs, 
and  indeed  those  already  in  existence  can  only  be  regarded  as 
mere  verbal  nouns  or  adjectives,  inasmuch  as,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  a  very  limited  number  to  be  found  in  use,  such  as  to- 
cmite^  they  do  not  follow  the  regimen  of  the  verbs  from  which 
they  are  derived. 

193.  Present  Participle. — This  form  of  the  verb,  cor- 
responding exactly  to  the  English  participle  ending  in  ing, 
never  varies  its  termination  in  the  construction  of  sentences. 
In  the  first  conjugation  it  ends  in  ando,  and  in  the  second 
and  third  in  iefido.  It  is  the  best  means  for  conveying  the 
idea  of  a  progressing  action  or  state ;  as, 

Entraron  cantando.  I  They  came  in  sinking. 

Le  encontraron  leyendo.  |  They  found  him  reading. 

194.  The  verb  estar^  as  has  already  been  mentioned,  is 
used  with  the  present  participle  in  Spanish,  as  the  verb  to  be 
with  the  same  participle  in  English ;  as, 

Yo  estoy  leyendo.  1 1  am  reading. 

Ellos  estdn  escrihiendo.  I  They  are  writing. 

195.  The  infinitive  is  used  in  Spanish  when  in  English 
the  present  participle,  preceded  by  a  preposition,  is  used ;  as 
Se  fue  sin  verlo,  I  He  went  away  without  seeing  him. 
Trabaja  sin  descansarse.  I  He  labors  without  resting. 

196.  The  INFINITIVE  is  also  used  as  a  verbal  noun  or  pres- 
ent participle,  in  which  case  it  takes  the  masculine  definite 
article  before  it ;  as, 


El  trahajar  es  bueno  para  la  salud. 
'El  descansar  despues  de  trabajar 
mucho  es  necesario. 


Work  is  good  for  the  health. 
Rest  is  necessary  after  much  work. 


208  LESSON  XXXVI I  I. 

197.  The  Spanish  language  has  a  very  peculiar  but  deli- 
cate use  of  the  present  participle  and  the  infinitive  where 
one  or  the  other  of  these  occurs  in  immediate  connection 
with  a  governing  verb,  corresponding  to  such  English  phrases 
as,  They  entered  singing^  We  saw  her  dancing.  In  such  a 
case,  when  the  subject  of  the  governing  verb  is  represented 
as  continuing  its  state  or  action  through  the  appended  clause, 
as  in  the  first  of  these  sentences,  it  is  rendered  into  Spanish 
by  the  present  participle;  as,  Ellos  entraron  cantando^  They 
entered  singing ;  but  if  the  subject  is  represented  or  under- 
stood as  not  continuing  its  state  or  action  through  the  ap- 
pended clause,  but  another  person  or  thing  is  introduced,  the 
subjoined  clause  is  rendered  by  the  infinitive ;  as,  La  vimos 
bailar,  We  saw  her  dancing. 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  I  Le  gusta  a  Y.  mas  leer  que  escribir  ?  Me  gustan  ambas 
cosas,  pero  creo  que  leyendo  se  aprende  mas  que  escribiendo. 

2.  I  Es  estudioso  ese  muchacho  ?  No,  senor,  pero  hoy  estu- 
dia  mucho  porque  manana  tienen  examenes  en  su  escuela. 

3.  I  Piensa  V.  que  sea  conveniente  ese  negocio  ?  Yo  pienso 
que  lo  es,  pero  quiza  no  lo  sea. 

4.  e  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  ?  Estoy  estudiando  mi  leccion  de 
espanol. 

5.  I  Sintio  Elena  mucho  la  muerte  de  su  amiga  ?  La  sintio 
tanto  que  se  enfermo. 

6.  I  Como  se  siente  ahora  ?  Esta  un  poco  mejor. — Me  alegro 
que  este  mejor,  porque  es  muy  buena  muchacha. 

7.  I  Puede  V.  prestarme  trescientos  pesos  ?  Puede  prestar- 
selos  a  v.,  pero  no  me  gusta  prestar  dinero  (to  lend). 

8.  I  Como  se  aprende  a  hablar  el  espaiiol  ?  Hablando  se 
appende  a  hablar ;  del  mismo  modo  que  bailando  se  aprende  a 
bailar  y  haciendo  zapatos  se  aprende  a  ser  zapatero. 

9.  I  Se  arrepintio  aquel  hombre  de  su  mala  accion  ?  No  lo 
creo  porque  es  un  picaro  que  vive  de  enganar. 

10.  e  Qne  profesion  li  oficio  tiene  ?  No  tiene  ni  oficio,  ni  pro- 
fesion  ninguna,  es  un  paseante. 

11.  I  De  donde  viene  V.  ?    Vengo  de  comer. 

12.  i  I^e  donde  viene  el  viento  ?  Viene  del  Sur,  pero  esta  ma- 
nana venia  del  Este. 


LESSON  XXXVIII.  209 

13.  I  Llueve  en  Nueva  York  cuando  esta  el  viento  al  Este  ? 
No,  seiior,  generalmente  llueve  cuando  el  viento  esta  al  Oeste. 

14.  Alberto,  animate,  se  estudioso  j  aprende  de  memoria  la 
leccion  para  manana.  Papa,  hace  mucho  calor  j  estoy  can- 
sado. 

15.  Bien,  no  te  desanimes,  descansa  un  poco  y  vuelve  a  tra- 
bajar  despues. — Y.  quiere  que  yo  este  trabajando  continuamente. 

16.  No,  querido,  no  quiero  que  trabajes  demasiado ;  pero 
aeuerdate  que  en  este  mundo  no  se  logra  nada  sin  trabajar. — 
Bien,  papa,  yo  se  que  V.  tiene  siempre  razon,  descansare  un 
poco  ahora  y  despueS  acabare  de  estudiar  mi  leccion. 

17.  I  Se  quedo  mucho  tiempo  su  amigo  de  V.  en  el  concierto  ? 
Ambos  nos  quedamos  hasta  que  se  acabo. 

18.  e  Tuvieron  Vds.  ayer  examenes  en  la  escuela  ?  Ayer  tuvi- 
mos  examen  de  gramatica,  antes  de  ayer  de  historia,  hoy  de  espa- 
nol  y  maiiana  lo  tendremos  de  aritmetica. 

19.  Manuel,  levantate  y  vete  a  la  escuela.  g  No  sabes  que 
hora  es  ?    No,  seiior,  yo  pensaba  que  era  temprano. 

20.  e  Como,  temprano  ?  Ya  son  las  siete  y  media  y  todavia 
tienes  que  lavarte  y  almorzar ;  \  vamos,  vamos,  perezoso,  arriba ! 
— Alia  voy  papa,  alia  voy;  y  dispenseme  V.,  no  sabia  que  era 
tan  tarde. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Have  you  heard  any  more  concerning  the  matter  about 
which  we  were  speaking  the  other  day  ?  Nothing  further ;  but 
I  expect  by  to-morrow  to  be  able  to  tell  you  something  more. 

2.  When  does  your  friend  intend  setting  out  *  on  his  trip  to 
the  South  ?  Probably  by  the  end  {ultimos)  of  November,  or  be- 
ginning of  December. 

3.  Is  he  to  be  long  absent  ?  He  knows  nothing  as  yet  of 
how  long  he  may  be  absent  (ausente). 

4.  Concerning  books  to  be  read  in  order  to  perfect  one's  self 
in  a  language,  what  kind  do  you  think  the  best  ?  There  is  little 
di£Perence  in  books  to  be  used  for  that  purpose  (proposito). 

5.  Are  there  not  some  better  than  all  the  others  ?  Not  that 
I  know  of :  each  student  will  prefer  those  that  treat  of  the  sub- 
ject he  likes  best. 

6.  But  beginners  cannot  do  so,  for  there  are  many  books 
too  difficult  for  them,  are  there  not?    Certainly;  I  thought  it 

*  Emprender, 
16 


210  LESSON  XXXVIIL 

needless  to  say  that  beginners  must  needs  search  for  books  easy 
to  be  read. 

7.  It  seems  to  me  that  newspaper  reading  is  very  useful; 
what  do  you  think  ?  Yes ;  and  especially  for  those  who  take 
pleasure  in  studying  politics  of  the  day. 

8.  Do  you  think  I  shall  be  able  to  understand  Cervantes's 
great  work  after  I  have  gone  through  (recorrer)  the  whole  of 
the  grammar  ?  No,  sir,  you  will  not ;  you  will  have  to  read  and 
study  a  great  deal  before  you  will  be  able  to  understand  thor- 
oughly the  writings  of  any  of  the  Spanish  classic  authors. 

9.  Who  is  that  young  man  we  met  while  walking,  and  to 
whom  you  spoke  ?    He  is  a  lawyer's  clerk. 

10.  Does  he  make  much  money  at  that  occupation  ?  I  can 
not  tell  you ;  but  he  is  undoubtedly  a  man  of  talent  {talent o). 

11.  Are  the  children  gone  to  school  yet,  Louisa  ?  All  but 
Henry,  who  wishes  not  to  go  to-day,  if  you  will  consent 
to  it. 

12.  I  am  afraid  he  is  a  very  lazy  boy ;  he  is  continually  ask- 
ing not  to  be  sent  to  school. 

13.  How  can  he  expect  to  learn  if  he  neither  goes  to  school 
nor  studies  at  home  ?  He  wishes  to  study  at  home ;  he  says  that 
if  you  consent  to  his  staying  at  home,  he  will  study  anything 
you  please. 

14.  Well,  I  shall  give  him  something  to  learn  by  heart,  and 
we  shall  see  what  he  does. — Very  well ;  but  do  not  give  him  too 
much  to  do  at  the  beginning,  for  he  is  easily  disheartened. 

15.  I  never  require  of  any  one  more  than  he  is  able  to  do. — 
That  is  perfectly  right. 

16.  Tell  Charles  and  Albert  that  I  wish  to  see  them,  and  that 
I  have  two  books  for  them. — I  need  not  go  to  tell  them ;  here 
they  are  coming. 

17.  Come  here,  boys. — Well,  papa,  what  do  you  want  with  us  ? 

18.  To  give  you  these  two  books :  one  for  each. — How  beau- 
tiful ! — Yes,  that  is  true ;  but  they  are  something  more  than 
beautiful :  they  are  good. 

19.  What  are  they  about  ?  This  one  treats  of  man  in  life  and 
of  all  living  bein^-s ;  and  that  one  of  man's  state  after  death. 

20.  Now,  I  wish  you  to  read  a  chapter,  each  one  in  his  book 
every  day,  after  your  lessons;  and  then  you  may  go  out  and 
walk  for  an  hour. — Thank  you,  sir ;  and  we  can  assure  you  that 
we  shall  do  so  with  the  greatest  pleasure. 


LESSON   XXXIX, 


211 


21.  Tell  me,  Albert,  where  did  you  buy  that  hat  ?  That  is 
one  of  those  hats  that  were  worn  three  summers  ago.  I  know 
that  very  well,  for  I  bought  it  at  the  time  they  were  being  worn, 
and  I  have  worn  it  ever  since. 

22.  This  author  seems  to  have  travelled  a  great  deal;  have 
you  read  any  of  his  travels  ?  Yes,  and  I  like  them  exceedingly 
{muchisimo). 

23.  I  am  going  to  read  them,  too,  as  soon  as  I  have  time.  In 
what  countries  did  he  travel  principally  ?  He  has  been  in  nearly 
every  country  of  the  globe.  East,  West,  North,  and  South. 

24.  What  is  the  trade  or  profession  of  that  person,  just  gone 
out  ?  He  is  a  physician ;  he  has  been  in  this  city  for  nearly  five 
years.    He  is  an  excellent  practitioner. 


LESSON    XXXIX. 

Pedir.     {See  conjugation  near  I  To  petition,  to  ask  for. 
end  of  grammar.)  I 

Verbs  conjugated  like  pedir. 


Competii*. 

Elegir. 

Medir. 

Renir. 

Seguir. 

Rendir. 

Repetir. 
Servir. 
Tenir. 
Yestir. 

Divertirse. 

Casarse. 

Besar. 

Enamorarse. 

Celebrar. 

Cenar. 


To  contend,  to  compete. 

To  elect,  to  choose. 

To  measure. 

To  quarrel,  to  scold. 

To  follow. 

To  render ;  to  exhaust,  to  do  out, 

to  wear  out. 
To  repeat. 
To  serve. 
To  dye. 
To  dress. 


To  amuse  one's  self. 

To  marry ;  to  get  (or  be)  married 

To  kiss. 

To  fall  in  love. 

To  celebrate,  to   praise,  to  be 

glad. 
To  take  supper. 


212 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


Presentar. 


Reconocer. 

Estimar. 

Agradecer. 


To  present,  to  introduce  one 
person  to  the  acquaintance 
of  another. 

To  recognize,  to  examine  closely. 

To  estimate,  to  value,  to  esteem. 

To  thank,  to  be  thankful,  to  be 
obliged. 


En  hora  buena. 

It  is  well,  well  and  good. 

Asi  asi. 

So  so. 

Tal  cual. 

Middling,  so  so. 

Hasta  la  vista. 

Till  I  see  you  again. 

Hasta  luego. 

Good-bye  for  a  while. 

Sin  novedad. 

Well,  in  a  good  state  of  health. 

Medianamente. 

Middling. 

I  Ah!  (int.) 

Ah! 

iOh!  (int.) 

Oh! 

Respetable. 

Respectable. 

Delicado. 

Delicate,  weak. 

Infinito. 

Infinite. 

Junto. 

Near,  close  to,  together. 

Discreto.    Encantador. 

Discreet.     Charming. 

Favor. 
Beso. 

Servidor. 

Pie. 

Honor. 

Vestido. 

Esposo. 

Asiento. 

Capitulo. 

Sobrino. 


Favor. 

Kiss. 

Servant. 

Foot. 

Honor. 

Dress. 

Husband. 

Seat. 

Chapter. 

Nephew. 


Tertulia. 

Novedad. 

Celebracion. 

Servidora. 

Ocasion. 

Complacencia. 

Bondad. 


Party,  soiree. 

Novelty. 

Celebration. 

Servant. 

Occasion. 

Complaisance. 

Goodness,    kind- 


ness. 
Esposa.  Wife. 

Orden.  Order,  command. 

Memorias.         Regards. 
Enhorabuena.  Congratulation. 


COMPOSITION. 


4  Que  le  pide  d  V.  ese  hombref 
No  me  pide  nada ;  me  pregunta  que 
hora  es. 


What  is  that  man  asking  for  f 
He  is  asking  me  for  nothing ;  he  is 
asking  me  what  o'clock  it  is. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


213 


Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballero. 


Beso  a  V.  la  suya. 

%  Como  esta  su  f amilia  de  V.  ? 
Todos  estan   bien,  gracias;   ^y  la 

deV.? 
Asi  asi ;  los  ninos  estan  muy  buenos, 

pero  mi  esposa  no  se  siente  bien. 
A  los  pies  de  V.,  senora. 


Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballero. 

A  la  orden  de  V.,  Don  Pedro. 
Vaya  V.  con  Dios,  Don  Juan. 
Buenos  dias,  Dofia  Luisa,  ^  como  lo 

pasa  V.  hoy  *? 
Bien,  para  servir  a  V. ;  iy  V.  ? 
Sin  novedad  a  la  disposicion  de  V. 
Senor  D.  M.,  tengo  el  honor  de  pre- 

sentarle  al  Sr.  D.  P. 
Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de  cono- 

cer  a  V. 
Tenga  Y.  la  bondad  de  darme  el  cu- 

chillo. 
Con  mucho  gusto. 
Mil  gracias. 
Hagame  V.  el   favor  de   decirme, 

como  se  llama  esto  en  espanol. 
Sirvase  V.  tomar  asiento. 
Lo  siento  mucho,  pero  no  puedo, 

tengo  que  marcharme. 
Tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  ponerme  a 

los  pies  de  su  esposa  de  V. 


I  kiss  your  hand,  sir  (a  Spanish  ex- 
pression of  courtesy y  used  on  meet- 
ing or  parting). 

And  1  kiss  yours  {reply  to  the 
above). 

How  is  your  family  ? 

All  are  well,  thank  you ;  and  yours  f 

So  so;  the  children  are  very  well, 
but  my  wife  does  not  feel  Well. 

At  your  feet,  madam  {Spanish  ex* 
pression    of    courtesy,    used    to 


I  kiss  your  hand,  sir  {ladies''  reply 
to  the  above). 

At  your  service,  Mr.  Peter. 

God  be  with  you,  Mr.  John. 

Good  morning.  Miss  Louisa,  how  do 
you  do  to-day  ? 

Well,  thank  you ;  and  you  I 

I  am  very  well  too,  thank  you. 

Mr.  M.,  I  have  the  honor  to  intro- 
duce (or  present)  you  to  Mr.  P. 

I  am  happy  to  make  your  acquaint- 
ance, sir. 

Have  the  goodness  to  give  me  the 
knife. 

With  much  pleasure. 

Thank  you. 

Be  kind  enough  to  tell  me  what  you 
call  this  in  Spanish. 

Please  to  take  a  seat. 

I  am  very  sorry,  but  I  cannot,  I 
must  be  off. 

Have  the  goodness  to  present  my 
regards  to  your  lady  (or  wife). 


EXPLANATION. 

198.  Pedir. — A  paradigm  will  be  found  near  the  end  of 
the  grammar,  showing  how  this  verb,  and  all  those  conju- 
gated like  it,  change  the  e  of  their  stem  into  i. 

199.  The  USUAL  forms  of  salutations,  among  gentle- 
men in  greeting  each  other,  are  the  following : 


214 


LESSON  XXXIX. 


Beso  a  y.  la  mano. 

Servidor  de  V.,  caballero. 

A  la  orden  de  V. 

Vaya  V.  con  Dios. 

Servidor  de  V. 

Para  servir  a  V. 

Tenga  V.  muy  buenos  dias. 


I  kiss  your  hand. 

Your  servant,  sir. 

Your  most  obedient. 

Adieu,  or  God  be  with  you. 

Your  servant. 

At  your  service. 

Good  day  to  you. 

This  last  expression  is  used  from  the  earliest  part  of  the 
morning  till  mid-day ;  from  which  time  till  dark  this  expres- 
sion is  used, 

Buenas  tardes.  |         Good  afternoon ; 

and  from  dark  until  the  following  morning,  both  on  meeting 
and  taking  leave, 

Buenas  noches.  I         Good  night. 

All  these  expressions  are  used  in  the  plural  number. 
In  saluting  a  lady,  or  on  introduction,  the  expressions 
most  frequently  used  are  : 

K  los  pies  de  V.,  sefiora.  I 

Para  servirle  a  V.,  senora.  | 

The  lady's  reply  is  : 

Beso  a  V.  la  mano,  caballero,      j 

To  inquire  after  another's  health : 

I  Como  lo  pasa  V.  ?  or  coma  esta  ^ 

V.  ?  j-  I  How  do  you  do  f 

^  Como  le  va  a  V.  f 

To  answer : 


Madam,  at  your  feet. 
At  your  service,  madam. 


I  kiss  your  hand,  sir. 


Medianamente  bien. 

Perfectamente  bien. 

Para  servir  a  V. 

Muy  bien,  gracias. 

Asi  asi,  or  tal  cual ;  y  V.,  i  como  lo 

pasa? 
Sin  novedad. 
A  la  disposicion  de  Y. 


Fairly  well. 

Perfectly  well. 

At  your  service. 

Very  well,  thank  you. 

So  so ;  and  how  do  you  do  T 

Oh !  nothing  new. 
At  your  service. 


For  introducing  one  person  to  another : 

Seiior  Don  M.,  tengo  el  honor  de  I  Mr.  M.,  I  have  the  honor  of  intro- 
presentarle  al  Senor  Don  P.  |      ducing  Mr.  P.  to  you. 


LESSOJSr  XXXIX.  215 


And  the  reply  is : 
Caballero,    celebro    la    ocasion    de 

conocer  a  V.,  or 
Reconozcame  V.   por  un   servidor 

suyo. 

For  asking  or  requesting : 
Tenga  V.  la  bondad  de  darme. 
Hagame  V.  el  favor  de  decirme. 
Sirvase  V.,  or  tenga  V.  la  compla- 
cencia  de. 

And  for  returning  thanks : 

Mil  gracias,  or 

Muchisimas  gracias. 

Se  lo  agradezco  d  V.  infinito. 


Sir,  I  am  happy  to  make  your  ac- 
quaintance. 
I  am  entirely  at  your  service. 


Have  the  goodness  to  give  me. 
Do  me  the  favor  to  tell  me. 
Have  the  kindness  to. 


A  thousand  thanks. 

Many  thanks. 

I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Senor  D.  Juan,  i  que  le  pide  a  V.  mi  muchacho  ?  No  me 
pide  nada ;  me  pregunta  que  hora  es. 

2.  Yo  creia  que  le  pedia  a  V.  dinero,  porque  el  esta  siempre 
pidiendo  centavos  a  todo  el  mundo. — Vaya !  no  lo  riiia  V. ;  a 
todos  los  niiios  les  gusta  que  les  den  centavos. — Verdad  es,  pero 
a  mi  no  me  gusta  que  los  mios  los  pidan. 

3.  Digame  V.,  D.  Pedro,  i  quien  es  aquella  senorita  que  esta 
sentada  en  el  sofa  junto  a  su  esposa  de  Y.  ?  Esa  es  una  seiiorita 
muy  amable,  hija  del  Senor  D.  Luis  Martinez,  familia  muy  res- 
petable  a  quien  conoci  hace  muchos  aiios. 

4.  I  Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  presentarme  a  ella  ?  Con 
mucho  gusto ;  pero  le  advierto  que  no  se  enamore  de  la  Seiiorita 
Martinez,  porque  esta  para  casarse. 

5.  Pierda  V.  cuidado ;  yo  solo  deseo  conocerla  para  gozar  de 
su  disereta  conversacion. — En  hora  buena,  venga  V.  y  lo  pre- 
sentare. 

6.  Senorita  Martinez,  tengo  el  honor  de  presentar  a  V.  el 
Sefior  Don  Juan  McLaren. — Caballero,  celebro  la  ocasion  de 
conocer  a  V. — Seiiorita,  reconozcame  V.  por  su  servidor. 

7.  I  Ah  !  aqui  viene  Don  Alberto  y  su  esposa.— Sirvanse  Vds. 
pasar  adelante. 

8.  i  Oh  !  Sefior  Don  Pedro,  me  alegro  mucho  de  encontrar  a 
V.  por  aca.  Mil  gracias,  seiiora,  soy  muy  feliz  en  volver  a  ver 
a  Vds. 


216  LESSOJ^  XXXIX. 

9.  A  los  pies  de  V.,  Senorita  Martinez. — Beso  a  V.  la  mano, 
caballero. 

10.  Dona  Margarita,  i  como  esta  su  f  am  ilia  de  V.  ?  Todos 
estan  bien,  g-racias,  g  y  la  de  V.  ?  Asi,  asi ;  los  nifios  estan  muy 
buenos,  pero  mi  esposa  esta  delicada. 

11.  Sirvase  V.  tomar  asiento,  D.  Alberto. — Lo  siento  mucho, 
pero  no  puedo;  he  prometido  a  mi  madre  volver  pronto  para 
cenar  con  ella. 

12.  Seiioras,  a  los  pies  de  Yds.    Beso  a  Vds.  la  mano  caballeros. 

13.  A  la  orden  de  V.,  D.  Pedro.    Vaya  V.  con  Dios,  D.  Juan. 

14.  Tenga  V.  muy  buenas  noches,  Dona  Luisa,  i  como  lo  pasa 
V.  hoy  ?  Bien,  para  servir  a  V.,  e  y  Y.  ?  Sin  novedad,  a  la  dis- 
posicion  de  Y. 

15.  Buenas  noches,  D.  Pedro ;  hasta  manana.  Hasta  manana, 
pongame  Y.  a  los  pies  de  su  senora. 

16.  De  Y.  memorias  de  mi  parte  a  toda  la  familia. — De  su 
parte  de  Y.  lo  estimaran  mucho. 

17.  Adios,  Manuel,  i  adonde  vas  tan  de  prisa  ?  Yoy  a  acom- 
panar  a  mi  hermana  al  teatro,  y  desde  alii  iremos  a  la  tertulia 
del  Senor  Marraci. 

18.  Celebrare  que  te  diviertas  mucho.  Yo  tambien  pienso  ir 
a  la  tertulia  del  Senor  Marraci ;  con  que,  asi  no  te  digo  adios,  ya 
nos  veremos. — Hasta  la  vista. — Hasta  luego. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Good  morning,  Charles  !  Are  you  never  going  to  get  up  ? 
— Why,  how  late  is  it  ? 

2.  It  is  nearly  nine  o'clock ;  but  it  is  nothing  new  to  see  you 
in  bed  at  that  hour.  Ah  !  you  are  always  making  fun  of  me  for 
lying  in  bed  so  long  in  the  morning,  and  I  think  I  rise  very  early. 

3.  Up,  then,  and  dress  yourself  as  quickly  as  possible ;  I  wish 
you  to  come  and  breakfast  with  me. 

4.  Indeed  !  What  good  things  are  you  going  to  give  me  ? 
You  will  have  a  first-rate  breakfast,  with  excellent  wine,  followed 
by  delicious  chocolate. 

5.  Tell  me,  my  dear  felloiv :  I  can  never  remember  the  name 
of  that  young  lady  that  I  met  at  your  sister's  party  ;  what  is  her 
name  ?  Oh,  no  matter :  my  sister  has  invited  *  her  to  dine  this 
evening,  and  if  you  wait  for  dinner  with  us  I  will  introduce  you 
to  her. 

*  Invitar, 


LUSSON  XXXIX.  217 

6.  Papa,  here  is  my  friend  Mr.  N.,  whom  I  have  the  pleasure 
of  presenting  to  you.     I  am  very  happy  to  know  you,  sir. 

7.  Be  kind  enough  to  take  a  seat,  and  excuse  me  an  instant ; 
I  shall  be  back  immediately.     Certainly,  sir. 

8.  How  are  your  old  friends  the  Retortillos  ?  They  are  very 
well,  thank  you ;  they  are  to  be  here  this  evening,  so  you  can 
have  a  chat  with  them. 

9.  Why  did  you  not  introduce  me  long  ago  to  your  father  ? 
I  am  very  sorry  for  not  having  done  so,  and  my  father  has  often 
scolded  me  for  my  neglect  (negligencid). 

10.  Do  you  expect  your  uncle  to-day  ?  I  do  not ;  but  if  he 
comes,  well  and  good ;  we  shall  be  glad  to  see  him. 

11.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  give  me  that  newspaper  that 
is  on  the  chair  next  the  window  ?    With  the  greatest  pleasure. 

12.  What  news  is  there  this  morning  ?  I  see  that  a  new  presi- 
dent (presidente)  has  been  elected  in  one  of  the  provinces  of 
South  America. 

13.  They  might  have  chosen  another  occasion  for  electing  hiiKi, 
I  think.     Ah,  of  course  ;  they  are  at  war  with  Spain. 

14.  How  much  do  they  ask  for  the  hoiise  that  is  for  sale  on 
Fifteenth  street  ?  Father  was  saying  yesterday  that  they  are 
asking  a  very  high  price. 

15.  What  do  you  understand  by  a  high  price  ?  More  than 
the  house  is  worth  (valer). 

16.  You  seem  greatly  dissatisfied  at  the  price ;  have  you  any 
intention  of  buying  the  house  ?  Yes,  unless  it  has  been  sold 
already. 

17.  What  news  have  you  from  Boston  ?  is  Miss  Guevara 
married  yet  ?  I  have  not  heard  from  the  family  for  a  month ; 
but  I  suppose  she  must  be  married  by  this  time  ;  she  was  to  have 
been  married  in  July. 

18.  Will  you  come  and  take  a  walk  before  dinner  ?  Ah,  you 
must  excuse  me  ;  believe  me,  I  am  worn  out  with  fatigue. 

19.  What  is  that  you  said,  Emanuel  ?  I  have  told  you  once, 
and  I  shall  not  repeat  it. 

20.  Do  you  know  that  young  lady  who  is  sitting  on  the  sofa 
beside  your  niece  ?  Yes ;  I  shall  introduce  you  to  her,  if  you 
wish. 

21.  When  will  you  introduce  ine  ?  At  once,  on  condition 
that  you  will  not  fall  in  love  with  her. 

22.  Well,  will  you  promise  ?    I  will ;  you  know  I  am  going 


218 


LUSSON  XL. 


to  get  married,  and  I  only  wish  to  enjoy  her  charming  *  conver- 
sation. 

23.  Miss  Veleta,  permit  me  to  have  the  honor  of  introducing 
to  you  Mr.  Romelio.  How  do  you  do,  sir  ?  I  am  very  happy  to 
know  you,  miss. 

24.  Well,  John,  what  do  you  think  of  her  ?  That  she  is  charm- 
ing :  and  I  am  exceedingly  obliged  to  you  for  introducing  me. 

25.  Oh,  Louisa !  come  and  look  at  this  beautful  dress.— Oh, 
how  beautiful !    How  much  did  it  cost  ?— Only  a  trifle  of  $120. 

26.  How  much  did  you  pay  for  that  last  coat  of  yours,  Alex- 
ander ? — Only  eighty  dollars. — Not  so  very  much  {no  se  me  hace 
caro). 


LESSON    XL. 

To  conduct,  to  lead,  to  drive. 


Conducir.  (See  conjugation  of 
this  verb  near  end  of  gram- 
mar.) 

Verbs  conjugated  like  conducir. 


Producir. 

To  produce. 

Traducir. 

To  translate. 

Introducir. 

To  introduce. 

Obrar. 

To  act. 

Envidiar. 

To  envy. 

Olvidar. 

To  forget. 

Existir. 

To  exist. 

Segiin  (prep.) 

According  to. 

Siquiera  (conj.). 

At  least,  even. 

Colectivo. 

Collective. 

Particular. 

Private,  particular. 

COLLECTI^ 

^E   NOUNS. 

Ejercito. 

Army. 

Tropa.                   Troop. 

Gentio. 

Crowd. 

Gente.                   People. 

Eebaiio. 

Flock,  herd. 

Multitud.              Multitude. 

Par. 

Pair,  couple. 

Docena.                Dozen. 

Centenares. 

Hundreds. 

Centena.               A  hundred. 

Millares. 

Thousands. 

Mitad.                    Half. 

*  Encan 

tadora. 

LUSSOJSr  XL, 


219 


El  tercio. 
El  cuarto. 
El  dozavo. 
El  doble. 

Higo. 

Caracter. 

Habitante. 

Gobierno. 

Recurso. 

Monte. 

Bosque. 

Rio: 

Lago. 

Nombre. 

Carnero  merino. 

Rincon,  esquina. 


The  third. 
The  fourth. 
The  twelfth. 
The  double. 


La  tercera.  The  third. 

La  cuarta  parte.  The  fourth,  &c. 

Una  infinidad.     An  infinity. 


Fig. 

Character. 
Inhabitant. 
Grovernment. 
Recourse,    re- 
sources. 
Mountain. 
Wood  (forest). 
River. 
Lake. 

Noun,  name. 
Merino  sheep. 
Corner. 


Conciencia. 

Circunstancia. 

Uva. 

Especie. 

Naranja. 

Castana. 

Nuez. 

Cuestion. 

Produccion. 

Libertad. 

Causa. 

Irlanda. 

Naturaleza. 


Conscience. 

Circumstance. 

Grrape. 

Species,  kind. 

Orange. 

Chestnut. 

Nut. 

Question. 

Production. 

Liberty. 

Cause. 

Ireland. 

Nature. 


COMPOSITIOlSr. 


Obro  segun  su  conciencia. 
Habla  segun  las  circunstancias. 

Lo  cuento  segiin  me  lo  han  contado. 
Entro  (or  entraron)  en  la  ciudad  una 

tropa  de  soldados. 
En  el  eiercito  de  los  Estados  Unidos 

habia  soldados  de  todas  las  nacio- 

nes. 
El  tercio  (or  la  tercera  parte)  de 

esos  hombres  no  saben  escribir. 
El  gentio  era  tan  grande  que  no  pu- 

dimos  pasar. 
Un  par  de  caballos  americanos  vale 

por  dos  pares  de  caballos  mexica- 

nos. 


He  acted  according  to  his  conscience. 

He  speaks  according  to  circum- 
stances. 

I  tell  it  as  it  was  told  me. 

A  troop  of  soldiers  came  into  the 
city. 

In  the  United  States  army  there 
were  soldiers  of  all  nations. 

The  third  of  those  men  do  not  know 

how  to  write. 
The  crowd  was  so  great  that  we 

could  not  pass. 
A  pair  of  American  horses  are  worth 

two  pairs  of  Mexican  horses. 


EXPLAITATION. 

200.  CoNDUCiR,  to  conduct,  and  the  verbs  conjugated 
like  it,  take  a  z  before  the  radical  c  in  the  terminations  begin- 
ning with  0  or  a.     They  also  take  the  terminations  je^  Jiste, 


220  LESSOJ^  XL, 

;o,  jimos,  jisieis,  feron,  in  the  preterit,  &e.,  as  may  be  seen  in 
the  conjugation  of  conducir^  near  the  end  of  the  grammar. 

201.  Segu^^. — We  class  this  word  among  the  prepositions, 
in  conformity  to  the  general  practice  among  Spanish  gramma- 
rians, and  because  it  sometimes  has  the  character  of  such ;  as, 

Obro  segun  su  conciencia.  i  He  acted  according  to  his  conscience. 

Habla  segun  las  circunstancias.  He    speaks    according    to  circum- 

I     stances. 

Nevertheless,  in  other  cases  it  is  employed  as  an  adverb ;  as, 
Jjo  cuento  segun  me  lo  han  contado.  |  I  tell  it  as  it  was  told  to  me. 

202.  Singular  collective  nouns  usually  take  a  singular 
verb;  but  when  the  individuals  composing  the  collective 
noun  are  prominent  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker,  the  verb 
may  be  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Entro  (or  entraron)  en  la  ciudad  I  A  troop  of  soldiers  came  into  the 
una  tropa  de  soldados.  I     city. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Produce  Espana  buena  fruta  ?  Espana  produce  excelente 
fruta  de  todas  especies. 

2.  I  Cual  es  la  major  fruta  de  Espana  ?  No  sabre  decir  a  Y., 
porque  toda  es  buena,  y  hay  centenares  de  especies^  por  ejemplo : 
las  uvas  son  de  las  mejores  del  mundo ;  los  melocotones  y  los  me- 
lones  son  tambien  muy  buenos,  sin  con  tar  con  las  naranjas,  los 
higos,  las  castaiias,  las  nueees  y  otra  infinidad  de  frutas. 

3.  I  Es  Espana  un  pais  caro  6  barato  ?  Es  demasiado  barato. 
Con  un  peso  se  puede  vivir  mejor  en  Espana  que  en  Nueva  York 
con  cuatro. 

4.  I  Bien,  entonces  por  que  vino  V.  a  vivir  en  los  Estados 
Unidos  ?  Esa  ya  es  otra  cuestion.  Espana  no  tiene  que  envidiar 
a  ningiin  pais  del  mundo  en  cuanto  a  su  clima  ni  a  sus  produccio- 
nes,  ni  menos  en  cuanto  al  caracter  de  sus  habitantes ;  pero  bajo 
su  gobierno  no  se  goza  de  la  misma  libertad  que  se  goza  bajo  el 
de  la  Republica  de  los  Estados  Unidos. 

5.  e  Es  esta  la  causa  por  la  cual  V.  vino  a  residir  en  este  pais  ? 
Hay  muchas  otras.  Por  ejemplo,  es  verdad  que  en  Espana  no  se 
conocen  las  hambres  que  hay  en  Irlanda,  Alemania  y  otros  paises, 
y  que,  como  he  dicho,  se  vive  mejor  alii  con  un  peso  que  aqui  con 
cuatro ;  pero  tambien  es  verdad,  que  en  cualquiera  profesion  li 


LESSON  XL,  221 

oficio  es  mas  facil  ganar  cuatro  pesos  en  los  Estados  Unidos,  que 
uno  en  Espana. 

6.  I  Por  tanto  V.  cree  que  los  recursos  de  los  Estados  Unidos 
son  mas  grandes  que  los  de  otros  paises  ?  Por  supuesto  que  si. 
Aqui  la  nacion  es  grande  ;  la  libertad  es  grande  :  los  montes,  los 
rios,  los  lagos,  los  bosques  son  grandes ;  la  naturaleza  es  grande ; 
todo  es  grande ;  Nueva  York  es  grande  y  los  hombres  mismos 
son  tambien  grandes;  pero  no  mas  grandes  que  los  espanoles. 

7.  Hablando  de  esto,  V.  se  olvida  que  en  este  ejercicio  tiene 
V.  que  practicar  con  los  nombres  colectivos. — V.  tiene  razon,  se 
me  habian  olvidado  los  nombres  colectivos  hablando  de  las  dos 
naciones  que  mas  amo  en  el  mundo. 

8.  En  cuanto  a  los  nombres  colectivos,  su  practica  es  muy 
facil  J  todo  se  reduce  a  decir :  que  en  Nueva  York  hay  multitud 
de  gentes  de  diferentes  naciones,  millares  de  mujeres  y  cosas 
buenas  y  centenares  de  hombres  y  cosas  malas. 

9.  i  Pero  y  que  dice  V.  con  respecto  a  los  rebanos,  ejercitos, 
etc.  ?  Que  en  Espaiia  hay  rebaiios  de  carneros  merinos  que,  asi 
como  su  ejercito,  no  tienen  superiores  en  el  mundo. 

10.  i  Segiin  eso  V.  cree  que  todo  lo  mejor  existe  en  Espana  ? 
Todo  no,  puesto  que  mis  niiios  son  americanos. 

11.  Yamos,  V.  se  burla. — No,  seiior,  yo  hablo  de  veras  para 
practicar  el  espafiol. 

12.  V.  habla  segiin  las  circunstancias. — No,  senor,  yo  hablo 
segun  mi  conciencia. 

13.  Acuerdese  V.  que  segun  Y.  obre  con  los  demas  asi  obra- 
ran  ellos  con  Y. — Muy  bien  y  asi  como  yo  hable  de  ellos,  asi 
hablaran  ellos  de  mi ;  pero  yo  no  debo  hablar  de  ellos  mejor  que 
de  mi  mismo. 

14.  I  Quiere  Y.  pagarme  la  mitad,  el  tercio  6  el  cuarto  de  lo  que 
Y.  me  debe  ?    Ni  lo  uno  ni  lo  otro,  porque  no  tengo  dinero  ahora. 

15.  Deme  Y.  a  lo  menos  un  par  de  pesos. — Manana  le  dare  a 
Y.  una  docena  de  pesos,  pero  hoy  ni  tan  siquiera  un  centavo. 

16.  Adios,  Carlos,  me  canso  de  charlar  y  me  voy  a  acostar. 
Buenas  noches,  Luis,  no  olvide  Y.  de  pagar  sus  deudas. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  is  the  name  given  to  a  large  number  of  sheep  to- 
gether ?    It  is  called  a  flock. 

2.  What  were  you  doing  so  long  in  the  street  ?  I  went  to 
see  the  cause  of  the  great  crowd  at  the  corner  of  the  next  street. 


222  LESSON  XL. 

3.  Well,  what  was  it  ?  I  could  not  see  anything ;  but  it 
seems  there  was  a  fire  in  some  of  the  streets  near  here. 

4.  You  seem  to  be  very  much  of  a  Spaniard ;  why  did  you 
ever  come  to  the  United  States  ?  I  shall  not  deny  that  I  like 
the  government ;  yet  that  is  not  the  only  reason  I  had  for  com- 
ing here. 

5.  Can  you  tell  me  some  of  the  others  ?  Certainly ;  although 
living  is  higher  here  than  there,  business  of  all  kinds  is  better, 
and  it  is  easier  to  make  money  here,  not  only  than  in  Spain,  but 
than  in  any  other  country  in  Europe. 

6.  I  am  very  glad  you  think  so ;  how  long  have  you  been 
here  ?    It  will  be  four  years  next  September. 

7.  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  tell  me  something  of  your 
country  ?    That  will  give  me  much  pleasure. 

8.  You  talk  so  much  about  Europe  in  general,  and  about 
Spain  in  particular,  that  I  cannot  help  {no  puedo  menos  de) 
thinking  you  intend  to  go  there.  You  are  quite  right ;  it  is  pos- 
sible that  my  brother  and  I  shall  take  a  trip  (viaje)  to  Spain  next 
faU. 

9.  Well,  in  order  to  be  able  to  enjoy  yourselves  as  much  as 
possible,  it  will  be  necessary  for  you  to  know  how  to  speak  the 
language  perfectly  before  starting.     We  intend  to  do  that. 

10.  Do  you  think  all  the  soldiers  in  the  army  are  Americans  ? 
No,  nor  even  the  half,  and  perhaps  not  even  the  third. 

11.  How  many  inhabitants  are  there  in  this  city  ?  I  am  not 
able  to  tell  you  exactly ;  but  there  cannot  be  much  less  than  a 
million. 

12.  Which  city  in  the  world  has  the  most  inhabitants  ?  Lon- 
don ;  it  has  about  three  millions  of  inhabitants. 

13.  Ah !  you  are  jesting ;  or  else  you  are  an  Englishman.  I 
am  not  jesting,  neither  am  I  an  Englishman,  but  a  Frenchman ; 
after  London  comes  New  York. 

14.  By  whom  is  that  book  ?  This  is  the  celebrated  Don 
Quixote  (Quijote),  by  Cervantes. 

15.  In  how  many  parts  is  it  ?  Two ;  the  first  containing  (con- 
tener)  some  fifty-two  chapters,  and  the  second  about  eighty-four. 

16.  What  effect  {efecto)  does  the  reading  of  Don  Quixote 
produce  upon  you  ?  It  makes  me  admire,  and  even  leads  me 
to  envy  the  genius  (genio)  of  its  author. 

17.  Ah  !  I  see  ;  you  say  that  to  please  me,  because  you  know 
that  I  too  admire  the  grand  work  of  Cervantes.     Pardon  me,  sir ; 


LESSON  XLL 


223 


I  never  speak  according  to  circumstances,  but  always  according 
to  my  conscience. 

18.  But,  have  you  forgotten  your  promise  already  ?  What 
promise  is  that  ?    I  do  not  remember  any. 

19.  No  matter ;  I  see  you  have  completely  forgotten  it.  I  am 
very  sorry. 

20.  What  are  the  best  fruits  that  Spain  produces  ?  Spain  pro- 
duces so  many  kinds  of  fruit,  and  such  delicious  ones,  that  it  is 
almost  impossible  for  me  to  mention  them  all :  you  have  excellent 
grapes,  melons,  peaches,  apples,  oranges,  and  an  infinity  of  others. 

21.  Have  the  soldiers  that  came  into  the  city  last  night  gone 
away  yet  ?    They  marched  this  morning  at  daybreak. 

22.  How  was  our  old  friend  Harnero  when  you  last  heard 
from  him  ?  He  was  in  Boston,  entirely  without  means,  having 
been  deceived  by  a  bad  man  who  took  the  whole  of  his  money 
from  him,  and  from  whom  he  was  unable  to  recover  (recobrar) 
even  the  fourth  part. 


LESSON    XLI. 

Soler. 

To  be  accustomed  to,  to  do. 
or  be,  usually. 

Bendecir. 

To  bless. 

Caer. 

To  fall,  to  see  (understand). 

Dormir. 

To  sleep. 

Morir. 

To  die. 

Errar. 

To  err. 

Jugar. 

To  play. 

Oir. 

To  hear. 

Oler. 

To  smell. 

Contradecir. 

To  contradict. 

Poner. 

To  put. 

Pudrir.* 

To  rot. 

Eeir. 

To  laugh. 

Valer. 

To  be  worth. 

Yacer. 

To  lie. 

{See  the  conjugation  of  these  verbs  near  the  end  of  the  grammar.) 

*  The  verb  pudrir  was  formerly  written  podrir ;  but  the  Academy 
now  adopt sthe  spelling  pudrir:  and  thus  this  verb  has  changed  from 


224 


LESSON  XLL 


Reposar. 
Premiar. 
Examinar. 


To  rest,  to  repose. 
To  reward. 
To  examine. 


Desde. 

Since,  from. 

Contra. 

Against,  toward. 

Sobre. 

Above,  over,  about. 

Tras. 

After,  behind,  besides. 

Pues. 

Well,  then ;  therefore,  &c. 

Helo  aqui. 

Here  he  (or  it)  is. 

Desde  ahora. 

Henceforward,   from   now, 

just  now. 

Desde  aqui. 

From  here. 

En  efecto. 

Indeed,  in  effect,  in  fact, 

really. 

Eterno.              Eternal. 

Afortunado.  Fortunate. 

Convicto.           Convicted. 

Desgraciado.  Unfortunate. 

Infortunio. 

Reo. 

Grito. 

Coche. 

Vicio. 

Fraile. 

Diego. 

Verbo. 

Principio. 


Misfortune. 
Criminal. 
Cry,  scream. 
Carriage. 
Vice. 

Fray,  friar. 
James. 
Verb. 

Beginning,  prin- 
ciple. 


Carlota. 
Creacion. 
Caridad. 
Prenda. 

Virtud. 
Tristeza. 
Experiencia. 
Pagina. 


Charlotte. 

Creation. 

Charity. 

Pledge,  quality,  ac«= 

complishment. 
Virtue. 
Grief,  sorrow. 
Experience. 
Page. 


COMPOSITION. 


I  Suele  V.  levantarse  temprano  f 

Suelo  levantarme  tarde. 

j,  Soha  V.  ir  a  pasearse  a  caballo  el 

ano  pasado  ? 
No,  senor,  solia  pasearme  en  coche. 
Plegue  a  Dios  que  tengamos  pronto 

lo  que  deseamos. 


Do  you  usually  rise  early  f 

I  usually  rise  late. 

Were  you  accustomed  to  ride  horse- 
back last  year  ? 

No,  sir,  I  used  to  ride  in  a  carriage. 

God  grant  we  may  soon  have  what 
we  desire. 


being  one  of  the  most  irregular  of  verbs  to  an  almost  entirely  regular 
verb,  being  irregular  in  the  past  participle  only,  podrido. 


LESSON  XLL 


225 


Desde  ahora  prometo  servirle  a  V 

en  lo  que  pueda. 
El  hombre  ha  obrado  mal  para  con 

Dios  y  consigo   mismo  desde  la 

creacion  del  mundo. 
Desde  Nueva  York  a  Filadelfia  hay 

ochenta  y  ocho  millas. 
Yo  juego  contra  ti. 
Esta  casa  esta  contra  el  Este. 
La  ciudad  esta  sobre  un  monte. 
La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  vir- 

tudes. 
Voy  tras  ti. 
Sufre  la  pena  pues  lo  quieres. 

Tras  la  primavera  viene  el  verano. 
Tras  ser  culpado,  el  es  el  que  levant  a 

el  grito. 
Leere  este  libro  pues  V.  me  dice  que 

es  bueno. 


Prom  this  moment  I   promise  to 

serve  you  as  far  as  I  can. 
Man  has  acted  wrongly  before  God 

and  to  himself  since  the  creation 

of  the  world. 
It  is  eighty-eight  miles  from  New 

York  to  Philadelphia. 
I  play  against  thee. 
This  house  faces  the  East. 
The  city  is  built  upon  a  mountain. 
Charity  is  above  all  the  virtues. 

I  go  after  thee. 

Suffer  the  consequences  (pain),  since 

such  is  thy  will. 
After  spring  comes  summer. 
In  spite  of  his  being  guilty,  it  is  he 

who  raises  the  cry. 
I  shall  read  this  book  since  you  tell 

me  it  is. good. 


EXPLANATION. 

203.  Defectiye  yerbs  are  those  which  lack  some  of  their 
modes,  tenses,  or  persons.  Placer^  to  please,  and  yacer^  to  lie, 
belong  to  this  class,  and  are  found  used  in  the  following 
tenses  and  persons  : 

PLACER. 

Place. 

Placia. 

Plugo. 

Plegue. 
(  Pluguiera. 
\  Pluguiese. 

Pluguiere. 

These  persons  of  the  subjunctive  mode  in  this  verb  are 
only  used  in  the  following  expressions  :  plegue,  or  pluguiera^ 
or  pluguiese  a  JDios,  would  to  God;  and  si  me  pluguiere,  if  it 
should  please  me. 

204.  Yacer. — Xo  part  of  this  verb  is  used  except  the 
third  persons  of  the  present  indicative,  yace  and  yacen,  chiefly 
at  the  beginning  of  epitaphs. 

17 


Indicat.  Pres.  3d  person  sing. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect  ind. 
Subjunc.  Present. 

Imperfect. 

Future  imp. 


a.. 

e.  S 


It  pleases. 
It  did  please. 
It  pleased. 
It  may  please. 

It  might  please. 

It  may  please. 


226  LESSON  XLL 

205.  SoLER  is  used  only  in  the  present  and  imperfect  of 
the  indicative  mode.  This  verb  has  the  peculiarity  of  never 
being  employed  except  as  a  determining  verb,  governing  the 
determined  verb  without  the  aid  of  any  preposition,  and  al- 
ways in  the  present  infinitive  ;  as, 

Suelo  pasear  temprano.  1      I  usually  go  early  to  walk. 

206.  Desde,  from,  points  out  the  source  of  time  or  place ; 
as, 

Desde  la  creacion  del  mundo.        i      From  the  creation  of  the  world. 
Desde  Nueva  York  a  Filadelfia.     1      From  New  York  to  Philadelphia. 

For  this  reason  it  forms  a  part  of  several  adverbial  expres- 
sions which  signify  time  or  place ;  as, 

Desde  ahora.  I      From  this  time. 

Desde  aqui.  I      From  hence. 

207.  Contra  is  used  in  all  cases  as  the  English  against 

208.  SoBRE,  upon,  above,  &c.,  serves  to  denote  the  super- 
imposition  of  some  things  with  respect  to  others,  either  by 
their  location  or  by  their  excellence  or  power ;  as. 


La  ciudad  esta  sobre  un  monte. 
La  caridad  es  sobre  todas  las  vir- 
tudes. 


The  city  is  on  a  mountain. 
Charity  is  above  all  virtues. 


It  has  also  the  signification  of  ademds,  moreover,  or  ade- 
mas  de^  besides ;  as, 

Sobre  ser  reo  convicto  quiere  que  I  Besides  being  a  convicted  crimi- 

le  premien.                                    |  nal,  he  wishes  to  be  rewarded. 

It  also  signifies  time ;  as, 

Hablar  sobre  mesa.                           I  To  talk  over  the  table. 

Surety;  as, 

Prestar  sobre  prendas.                     1  To  lend  upon  pledge. 

209.  Tras,  behind,  after,  &c.,  signifies  the  order  in  which 
some  things  follow  others ;  as, 

Voy  tras  ti.                                       i  I  follow  thee. 

Tras  la  primavera  viene  el  verano.  I  After  spring  comes  summer. 

It  also  signifies  besides ;  as, 

Tras  ser  culpado,  el  es  el  que  le- 1  Besides  being  guilty,  he  remon 

vanta  el  grito.                              |  strates. 


LJEJSSON  XLI.  227 

210.  The  conjunction  pues,  since,  is  used  to  account  for 
a  proposition  brought  forward  ;  as, 

Leere  este  libro  pues  V.  me  dice  I     I  shall  read  this  book  since  you 
que  es  bueno.  |         tell  me  it  is  good. 

211.  Pues  is  often  used  in  a  sense  similar  to  wM^  or 
tJien\  as, 

Ya  me  voy  pues.  1     I  am  going  then. 

;  Pues,  si !  |     Well,  yes ! 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  e  Sobre  que  quiere  V.  que  hablemos  hoy  ?  No  se ;  de  cual- 
quiera  cosa,  con  tal  que  practiquemos  con  los  verbos  def ectivos  y 
las  preposiciones  contra,  desde,  sobre  y  tras. 

2.  Que  me  place,  pero  digame  V.,  e  cree  V.  que  tenemos  mu- 
cho  que  practicar  con  el  verbo  yacer  f  No,  senor,  puesto  que  es 
un  verbo  que  solo  sirve  para  ponerse  en  los  epitafios. 

3.  Pues  si  V.  gusta  le  haremos  un  epitafio  y  pasaremos  a 
practicar  con  otro  verbo  que  no  sea  tan  triste. — Soy  de  su  opinion 
de  v.,  porque  no  me  gustan  las  cosas  tristes. 

4.  Helo  aqui : 

"  Aqui  yace  el  verbo  yacer, 
Otra  cosa  no  sabiendo  hacer." 

5.  Ese  epitafio  me  hace  recordar  a  mi  otro,  oigalo  V. : 

"  Aqui  Fray  Diego  reposa, 
Y  jamas  hizo  otra  cosa." 

6.  Hombre,  tenga  V.  caridad  de  mi  y  no  me  haga  V.  reir 
hablando  de  epitafios,  que  es  cosa  mas  bien  para  hacer  llorar  que 
para  hacer  reir.  e  Suele  V.  tener  siempre  tan  buen  humor  ?  No 
siempre ;  pero  no  se  gana  nada  con  estar  triste. 

7.  En  efecto,  mas  vale  estar  alegre  que  triste,  pero  no  siem- 
pre se  puede  estar  alegre,  i  y  entonces  que  hace  V.  ?  Entonces 
mando  a  pasear  el  mal  humor. 

8.  Eso  es  mas  f  acil  de  decir  que  de  hacer ;  i  quiere  V.  decirme 
como  lo  hace  Y.  ?  Convengo  con  V. ;  pero  cuando  el  hombre 
quiere  verdaderamente  una  cosa  la  logra  casi  siempre. 

9.  Plegue  a  Dios  que  yo  logre  estar  siempre  contento  puesto 
que  estar  contento  es  ser  feliz.  i  Que  es  lo  que  V.  hace  para  estar 
siempre  eontento  ?  Yo  no  le  he  dicho  a  V.  que  estoy  siempre 
contento,  pero  procuro  estarlo  y  asi  logro  no  estar  triste. 


228  LESSON  XLL 

10.  I  Como  lo  hace  Y.  ?  Obro  segun  las  circunstancias.  Exa- 
mino  la  causa  de  mi  tristeza  6  mal  humor ;  si  es  mi  falta  me  con- 
suelo  porque  creo  que  Dios  me  castiga  para  que  yo  me  corrija,  y 
me  haga  mejor  con  la  experiencia. 

11.  Bien,  i  y  cuando  V.  es  inocente  y  le  sucede  un  infortunio  ? 
Entonces  me  consuelo  tambien,  porque  creo  que  todo  lo  que  Dios 
nos  envia  es  para  nuestro  bien. 

12.  Entonces  es  V.  filosofo.  No,  senor,  mejor  que  eso ;  soy 
religioso. 

13.  i  Tiene  V.  miedo  de  la  muerte  ?  No,  senor,  porque  se  que 
todos  hemos  de  morir,  y  que  tras  la  muerte  viene  la  vida  eterna. 

14.  I  Cuantos  ninos  tiene  V.  ?    Cinco ;  dos  niiios  y  tres  ninas. 

15.  I  Como  se  llaman  ?  El  mayor  de  los  ninos  se  llama  Ale- 
jandro y  el  menor  Manuel. 

16.  I  Y  las  ninas  ?    Las  ninas  son  Luisa,  Carlota  y  Margarita. 

17.  i  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  que  no  ha  estado  V.  en  Espaiia  ? 
Hace  veinte  anos  que  sali  de  Espana. 

18.  e  Y  no  ha  vuelto  V.  ?  No,  senora,  y  creo  que  nunca  vol- 
vere. 

19.  i  Por  que  ?  No  porque  no  lo  haya  desoado,  sino  porque 
las  circunstancias  no  me  lo  han  permitido. 

20.  i  Por  que  habla  V.  tanto  de  si  mismo  en  sus  conversa- 
ciones  ?  e  no  piensa  V.  que  eso  puede  cansar  a  sus  oyentes  ?  Asi 
es  la  verdad,  senora ;  pero  para  mi  es  la  materia  de  conversacion 
mas  interesante  que  puedo  encontrar. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  James,  do  you  know  where  Charlotte  has  gone  ?  I  saw 
her  going  out.  but  I  do  not  know  where  she  has  gone. 

2.  Can  not  you  help  your  brother  in  his  misfortune  ?  you 
know  he  relies  (contar)  upon  your  aid.  I  shall  do  all  in  my 
power  to  serve  him ;  but  you  know  that  is  not  much. 

3.  Margaret,  go  and  call  Charles ;  tell  him  he  has  played 
enough,  and  that  I  want  him  to  attend  to  his  music  lessons. 
Why,  he  has  been  at  his  lessons  for  the  last  half  hour ! 

4.  Ah !  that  is  another  thing.  Where  is  he  then  ?  Here 
he  is. 

5.  Well,  Charles,  how  are  you  getting  on  with  your  music  ? 
Very  well,  papa ;  but  I  think  Jane  will  have  to  help  me  with  my 
Spanish  exercise. 

6.  My  dear  boy,  always  do  your  own  exercises,  then  you  will 


LESSOJSr  XLIL 


229 


be  sure  they  are  done.    Oh,  yes,  I  know ;  as  they  say :  "  Help 
yourself  and  Heaven  will  help  you." 

7.  How  beautiful  that  lady  is !  Yes ;  but,  my  dear  sir,  her 
accomplishments  far  surpass  her  beauty. 

8.  I  do  not  doubt  it  at  all ;  but  how  do  you  know  that  ?  have 
you  known  her  long  ?  Long  enough  to  find  out  her  good  quali- 
ties, which,  in  my  opinion,  are  of  more  value  than  all  the  beauty 
in  the  world. 

9.  Have  you  found  time  yet  to  examine  the  books  I  put  on 
your  table  the  other  day  ?  I  have,  and  the  examination  caused 
(produced)  me  a  great  deal  of  sadness. 

10.  How  so  ?  From  the  beginning,  page  after  page,  I  found 
that  the  author  had  not  the  least  experience  of  the  world ;  and 
besides,  he  contradicts  toward  the  end  what  he  has  given  as  a 
general  rule  at  the  opening  of  his  work. 

11.  I  am  very  much  grieved  (sorry)  that  such  is  your  opinion, 
So  am  I ;  but  you  know  it  is  better  (worth  more)  to  tell  the  truth, 
even  though  it  should  offend  the  author  himself. 

12.  Can  you  read  that  epitaph  ?  I  believe  it  is  in  English. 
Yes ;  it  says :  "  Here  lies  Pedro  Gutierrez." 

13.  Is  that  all  it  says  ?  No,  there  is  a  great  deal  more ;  but  I 
can  not  read  it. 

14.  Ah,  indeed !  I  see ;  you  do  not  read  English  as  well  as 
you  thought.  I  do  not ;  and  I  promise  you  that  from  this  mo- 
ment I  shall  study  it  attentively  until  I  know  it  thoroughly. 

15.  What  do  you  smell  ?  The  book  that  Charles  has  just 
bought. 

16.  What  odor  has  it  ?    It  smells  like  new  paper. 

17.  What  was  that  man  rewarded  for  ?  For  having  returned 
(devolver)  five  hundred  dollars,  which  he  found  in  the  park,  to 
the  person  that  had  lost  it. 

18.  I  am  very  glad  that  he  has  been  rewarded  ;  but  virtue  is 
always  rewarded,  sooner  or  later  (tarde  que  temprano). 


LESSON    XLII. 

Adquirir. 

To  acquire. 

Asir. 

To  seize. 

Caber. 

To  contain, 

to  hold. 

Cocer. 

To  cook. 

230 


LUSSOir  XLII. 


Erguir. 

To  erect. 

Satisfacer. 

To  satisfy. 

Traer. 

To  bring,  to  carry. 

{See  conjugation  of  these  verba  near  the  end  of  the  grammar,) 

Conseguir. 

To  succeed,  to  get. 

Callar. 

To  be   silent,   to   hold  one's 
tongue. 

Eeprender. 

To  reprehend,  to  chide. 

Divisar. 

To  perceive,  to  descry,  to  espy. 

Fumar. 

To  smoke. 

Establecer. 

To  establish. 

Saber  {imp. 

verb). 

{In  the  signification  of)  to 
taste,  or  to  savor. 

Sorprender. 

To  surprise. 

Entrambos. 

Both. 

Solo. 

Alone. 

Ir  a  caballo. 

To  ride  on  horseback. 

Ir  en  coche. 

To  ride  in  a  carriage. 

De  todos  modos. 

At  all  events,  by  all  means. 

De  ningun  modo. 

By  no  means,  not  at  all. 

Manos  a  la  obra. 

To  work ! 

Por  mi  parte. 

For  my  part. 

Asi  sea. 

nt). 

So  be  it,  let  it  be  so. 

1  Caspita !  {ii 

Wonderful !  too  bad ! 

I  Vaya !  {int). 

Come,  now !  indeed !  go  away ! 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

They  are  classified  as  follows  : 

Copulative. 

Que. 

That. 

Ademas.           Moreover. 

Tambien. 

Also. 

Y  or  e.              And. 

Ni.                     Neither,  nor. 

Disjunctive. 

6,  u,  ya. 

Or,  either, 

Por  cuanto.       W  hereas. 

whether. 

Para  que.          So  that,  in  order 

Sea  que. 

Whether. 

that. 

Tampoco. 

Neither. 

A  fin  de.            In  order  that 

LESSON  XLIL 


231 


Adversative, 
Mas,  pero.         But. 
Aun  cuando.     Even. 
Aunque.  Although, 

though. 


Causal. 
Porque,  que.     Because. 
i  Por  que  ?        Why  ? 
Pues,pues  que.  Since. 
Por.  For. 

Por  tanto.         Therefore. 


Conditional, 
If. 


But. 
Provided. 

Unless. 


Si. 

Sino. 

Con  tal  que. 

A  menos  de. 

Amenosque. 


Continuative, 
Pues,  puesto         Since,       inas- 
que.  much  as. 

Comparative. 
Como,  asi  como.   As. 
Asi.  So. 


Antes  de. 

Before. 

Lejos  de. 

Far  from. 

En  lugar  de. 

Instead  of,  in  place  of. 

Por  f  alta  de. 

For  want  of. 

De  miedo  de.  ) 
Por  temor  de.  ) 

For  fear  of. 

Como  quiera  que. 

However. 

Fuera  de  que. 

Besides. 

Al  instante  que,  or 

luego  que, 

As  soon  as. 

or  tan  pronto  como. 

De  manera  que. 

So  that. 

Desde  que. 

Since. 

Acuerdo. 

Dafio. 

Ajedrez. 

Cigarro. 

Cigarrillo. 

Tabaco. 

Jaque. 

Caso. 


Advice,  or  opin- 
ion. 
Harm,  damage. 
Chess. 
Cigar. 
Cigarette. 
Tobacco. 
Check. 
Case. 


Marca. 

Fortuna. 

Partida. 

Opinion. 
Pipa. 

Compania. 


Brand,  mark. 
Fortune. 
Party,  game, 

departure. 
Opinion. 
Tobacco-pipe, 

pipe. 
Company. 


COMPOSITION. 
Conjunctions  governing  the  subjunctive. 
Dado  que  me  escriba  no  le  respon-  I  Granted  that  he  should  write  me,  I 
dere.  will  not  answer  him. 


232 


LESSON  XLIL 


Con  tal  que  el  trabaje. 

A  menos  que  me  pague. 

Sea  que  se  vaya  6  que  se  quede. 

Calie  V.  no  sea  que  nos  oiga. 


Provided  he  work. 

Unless  he  pay  me. 

Whether  he  set  out  or  remain. 

Be  silent  lest  he  should  hear  us. 


Conjunctions  governing  the  indicative. 


Al  instante  que  recibi  la  carta  le 

respond!. 
De  suerte  que  (or  de  modo  que)  no 

pudo  conseguirlo. 
De  manera  que  no  esta  nada  satis- 

fecho. 
4  Que  ha  hecho  Y.  desde  que  le  he 

visto  a  V.  I 
Llegue  tan  pronto  como  pude. 

Mientras  que  V.  juega  el  estudia  su 

leccion. 
Yo  reprendo  a  V.  sus  faltas  porque 

le  quiero. 


As  soon  as  I  received  the  letter  I 

answered  him. 
So  that  he  could  not  bring  it  about. 

So  that  he  is  not  pleased  at  all. 

What  have  you  been  doing  since  I 
saw  you  t 

I  got  here  (or  there)  as  soon  as  I 
could. 

While  you  play,  he  studies  his  les- 
son. 

I  reprove  you  for  your  faults  be- 
cause I  love  you. 


Conjunctions  governing  the  infinitive. 


Yo  trabajo  a  fin  de  ganar  dinero. 
No  le  visitare  antes  de  conocerle. 

Lejos  de  amarlo  lo  aborrece. 


I  work  in  order  to  earn  money. 

I  shall  not  visit  him  before  making 

his  acquaintance. 
Far  from  loving  him,  he  abhors  him. 


EXPLANATION. 

212.  Conjunctions. — The  student  is  already  acquainted 
with  the  greater  part  of  the  conjunctions ;  but  in  this  lesson 
they  are  again  given,  so  that  he  may  see  how  they  are  classified. 
Besides  the  conjunctions  introduced  in  this  lesson,  there  may 
be  formed  a  variety  of  expressions  which  answer  the  same  end 
as  conjunctions ;  as, 

Como  quiera  que,  I  However ; 

Fuera  de  que,  |  Besides; 

and  a  large  number  of  others. 

213.  It  would  require  too  much  space  to  specify  all  the 
conjunctions  that  govern  verbs  in  a  given  mode ;  more  is  to 
be  learned  from  the  teacher,  and  by  constant  practice  in 
reading  and  conversation,  than  from  all  the  rules  that  could 
be  given. 


LESSON  XLIL  233 

214.  The  subjunctive  should  be  used  after  the  following 
conjunctive  expressions  :  Dado  que,  granted  that ;  co7i  tal  que, 
provided  that ;  a  menos  que,  unless ;  no  sea  que,  lest,  for  fear ; 
antes  que,  sin  que,  sea  que,  &c. ;  as, 
Dado  que  me  escriba  no  le  respon- 

dere. 
Con  tal  que  el  trabaje. 


Granted  that  he  should  write  to  me, 

I  shall  not  answer  him. 
Provided  that  he  work. 
Unless  he  pay  me. 


A  menos  que  me  pague. 

215.  Other  expressions  having  de,  instead  of  que,  require 
the  verb  in  the  infinitive  mood ;  such  as,  a  fin  de,  in  order  to ; 
a  menos  de,  unless,  &c. 

216.  Finally,  other  compound  conjunctions  govern  the 
indicative;  as,  al  instante  que,  as  soon  as;  de  manera  que, 
so  that,  &c. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Buenos  dias,  Don  Carlos. — Tengalos  V.  muy  felices,  Don 
Enrique ;  al  instante  que  lo  divise  desde  la  ventana  lo  reconoci. 

2.  I  Como  esta  toda  la  familia  ?  Todos  buenos ;  acaban  de 
salir. 

3.  I  De  manera  que  esta  V.  solo  ?  Si,  seiior,  en  lugar  de  salir 
quise  quedarme  a  esperar  a  V.  pues  sabia  que  habia  V.  de  venir. 

4.  I  Quien  se  lo  dijo  a  Y.  ?  A  que  no  acierta  Y. — Yerdadera- 
mente  no  se  quien  puede  haberselo  dicho  a  Y. 

5.  Fue  Elena,  su  hija  de  Y.,  que  acaba  de  salir  a  pasear  con 
mi  esposa  y  Margarita,  mi  hija. 

6.  Y  nosotros,  i  que  haremos  ?    Lo  que  Y.  guste. 

7.  Mi  opinion  es  que  juguemos  una  partida  de  ajedrez,  que 
fumemos  un  cigarro,  bebamos  un  vaso  de  vino  de  Carinena,  y 
vayamos  despues  a  sorprender  a  las  senoras  al  parque.  l  Esta 
Y.  de  acuerdo  ?    Perfectisimamente. 

8.  Pues  bien,  manos  a  la  obra ;  l  juega  Y.  raucho  ?  Mediana- 
mente  ;  pero  como  no  lo  practico  temo  que  me  gane  Y. 

9.  i  Que  hombre  !  si  hace  a  lo  menos  dos  anos  que  no  he 
jugado,  fuera  de  que  jamas  he  sido  muy  fuerte. 

10.  I  Cuales  quiere  Y.,  las  negras  6  las  blancas  ?  Cualesquiera, 
de  todos  modos  he  de  perder. 

11.  Jaque  a  la  reina  Don  Enrique.— Pues  creo  que  esta  per- 
dida.— Si,  senor,  no  puede  huir— vaya  puesle  doy  a  Y.  la  partida, 
puesto  que  sin  reina  es  casi  imposible  ganar. 


234  ^    LESSON  XLIL 

12.  I  Quiere  V.  que  en  lugar  de  jugar  mas  vayamos  a  ver  las 
senoras  ?    Si,  senor,  luego  que  bebamos  del  vino  de  Carinena. 

13.  I  Hombre,  si,  lo  habia  olvidado  !  aqui  esta,  y  aqui  tiene  V. 
tambien  pipas,  cigarros  de  la  Habana,  cigarrillos  de  la  marca  de 
la  Honradez  y  tabaco  de  Virginia  para  la  pipa ;  i  que  prefiere 
V.  ?    Yo  prefiero  los  cigarrillos. 

14.  A  su  salud  de  V.,  Don  Carlos. — A  la  de  V.,  Don  Enrique. 
— I  Caspita  !  i  que  bien  sabe  el  de  Carinena  ! 

15.  e  Le  gusta  a  V.  ?  ;  Que  si  me  gusta  !  desde  que  vivo  en 
Nueva  York  no  he  probado  vino  mejor. 

16.  Puesto  que  le  gusta  i  por  que  no  repite  V.  ?  Por  temor  de 
que  me  haga  daiio,  no  suelo  beber  mucho,  y  temo  que  me  ponga 
un  poco  alegre. 

17.  Aqui  tiene  V.  fuego  ;  I  que  tal  le  gustan  a  V.  esos  cigarri- 
llos ?    Excel  entes. 

18.  Senor  ;  i  Que  quieres  Juan  ?    Los  caballos  estan  listos. 

19.  i  Que  !  i  Vamos  a  caballo  ?  Si,  senor,  las  senoras  ban  ido 
en  coche. 

20.  I  Que  camino  tomaremos  ?    Iremos  por  la  Quinta  avenida, 
.  que  es  la  calle  mas  bermosa  de  Nueva  York. 

21.  Tenemos  buen  tiempo,  D.  Enrique. — Hermosisimo,  y  con 
esto,  buena  salud,  amigos  fieles,  una  larga  familia  y  una  buena 
fortuna,  l  que  mas  podemos  desear  ? 

22.  Tiene  V.  razon,  Don  Carlos,  por  mi  parte  soy  feliz  y  solo 
deseo  que  Dios  me  de  una  larga  vida  para  ver  a  todos  mis  bijos 
bien  establecidos. — Asi  sea,  Don  Enrique,  lo  deseo  para  entram- 
bos. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  your  brother  never  go  out  on  horseback  ?  Some- 
times ;  but  not  very  often. 

2.  What  can  be  the  reason  of  that  ?  I  thought  he  was  very 
fond  of  horses  and  riding  on  horseback.  So  he  is  ;  but  he  does 
not  often  take  exercise  of  that  kind  for  fear  of  falling  off. 

3.  How  does  he  go  to  Central  Park,  then  ?  Why,  in  a  car- 
riage of  course. 

4.  Fie  !  What  carriage  does  he  go  in  ?  In  his  cousin's,  of 
course,  for  want  of  one  of  his  own. 

5.  Who  will  give  me  a  cigarette  ?  No  one  here ;  there  is 
nobody  here  that  smokes  any  thing  but  cigars  or  pipes. 

6.  Too  bad  !  May  I  ask  why  none  of  you  use  cigarettes  ? 
Certainly ;  and  we  shall  tell  you  with  the  greatest  pleasure  :  at 


LESSON  XLIIL  236 

one  time  we  all  smoked  what  you  call  "  cigarette,"  but  what  we 
call  a  "  poor  man's  cigar,"  until  one  day  Henry  came  (you  know 
Henry  is  something  of  a  doctor),  and,  with  his  head  erect,  said 
with  a  voice  of  thunder  :  "  What's  this  ?  smoking  cigarettes  ? " 

7.  Well !  what  more  did  he  say  ?  "  Don't  you  know  that 
what  you  are  smoking  there  is  nothing  but  paper  ?  You  will 
all  be  sick  !  " 

8.  What  did  you  do  then  ?  We  were  surprised  at  first :  but 
very  soon  we  promised  never  to  smoke  such  a  thing  again,  as  it 
was  good  for  nothing,  and  only  tasted  of  paper. 

9.  Be  that  as  you  please  ;  for  my  part  I  shall  always  prefer 
the  cigarette  to  the  cigar  (tabaco  puro).  Perhaps  you  are  right ; 
each  one  has  his  own  liking,  and  so  we  shall  say  no  more 
about  it. 

10.  What  news  do  you  bring  from  Boston  ?  Some  good,  and 
some  bad  :  my  cousin  has  been  very  fortunate  in  that  affair  I 
spoke  of  to  you ;  but  he  met  with  an  unfortunate  accident  last 
week. 

11.  Ah  !  how  was  that  ?  He  was  out  riding  in  company  with 
some  friends,  and  in  returning  home  he  fell  from  his  horse. 

12.  I  am  very  sorry  indeed  ;  and  I  hope  he  may  soon  be  able 
to  attend  to  his  business. 

13.  What  do  you  think  of  playing  a  game  of  chess  ?  I  am 
ready  to  play  one,  if  you  wish  ;  but  you  will  not  find  my  game 
very  good. 

14.  Why  do  not  you  practise  more  than  you  do  ?  I  have 
practised  very  much,  with  a  desire  to  become  perfect  in  the 
game,  but  have  not  been  able  to  succeed. 


LESSON    XLIII. 


Advertir. 

Conjugar. 

Desconfiar. 

Cometer. 

Distinguir. 

Formar. 

Devolver. 


To  take  notice,  to  observe,  to 

warn. 
To  conjugate. 
To  distrust,  to  mistrust. 
To  commit. 
To  distinguish. 
To  form,  to  shape. 
To  return,  to  give  back. 


236 


LESSON  XLIIL 


Descuidar.  To  neglect,  to  be  at  ease  in  one's 

mind. 

Pertenecer.  To  belong. 

Molestar.  To  molest,  to  trouble. 

Resultar.  To  result,  to  turn  out. 

{The  student  ought  hy  this  time  to  know  almost  all  the  conjugations, 
hath  of  the  regular  and  the  irregular  verbs  ;  should  he  at  any  time  be  at 
a  loss  for  some  part  of  a  verb,  he  may  refer  to  the  conjugations  near  the 
end  of  the  grammar.) 

Cada.  I  Every,  each. 


Sin  duda. 

Certainly,  without  doubt. 

I  Adelante ! 

Go  on  !  go  ahead  !  come  in ! 

En  adelante. 

Henceforth. 

Compuesto. 

Compound. 

Irregular. 

Irregular. 

Completo. 

Complete. 

Yarios. 

Various,  divers,  several. 

Simpl 

e. 

Simple. 

Seguro. 

Secure,  sure. 

Obvio 

Obvious. 

Lo  demas. 

The  rest. 

Conoci- 

j  Bill  of  lading. 

Condicion. 

Condition. 

miento. 

(  Knowledge. 

Navidad,  or  ) 

Nativity,  Christ* 

Jose. 

Joseph. 

Natividad.     ) 

mas. 

Articulo. 

Article,  section. 

Relacion. 

Relation. 

Pronombre. 

Pronoun. 

Duda. 

Doubt. 

Participio. 

Participle. 

Ventaja. 

Advantage. 

Adjetivo. 

Adjective. 

Frase. 

Phrase. 

Adverbio. 

Adverb. 

Prontitud. 

Promptitude. 

Presente. 

Present. 

Sentencia. 

Sentence. 

Imperfecto. 

Imperfect. 

Conjugacion. 

Conjugation. 

Perfecto. 

Perfect. 

Verdad. 

Truth. 

Futuro. 

Future. 

Imprudencia. 

Imprudence. 

Pluscuamper- 

Pluperfect. 

Preposicion. 

Preposition. 

fecto. 

Conjuncion. 

Conjunction. 

Infinitivo. 

Infinitive. 

Interjeccion. 

Interjection. 

Indicativo. 

Indicative. 

Paz. 

Peace. 

Imperativo. 

Imperative. 

Molestia. 

Bother. 

Subjuntivo. 

Subjunctive. 

LESSON  XLIIL 


237 


COMPOSITION. 


Descuide  V. 


I  Cuantos  tiempos  tiene  el  modo  in- 
dicative ? 

Ocho :  cuatro  simples  y  cuatro  com- 
puestos. 

Bueno  seria  no  descuidarse. 

Convendria  que  se  hiciese  la  paz. 

Aunque  dijeras  {or  dijeses)  la  ver- 

dad,  no  te  creeria. 
\  Ojala  que  cesara  {or  cesase)  la  gue- 

rra !  asi  serlamos  mas  felices. 

Pense  que  estudiaras. 
No  crei  que  estudiase  V. 

Juzgue  que  estudiaria  V. 
Dije  que  leyeras. 

Dijo  que  leerias. 

Dijimos  que  leyese. 

Deseaba  que  ganaras  {or  ganases). 

Quiso  que  te  casaras  {or  casases). 

No  se  si  iria  6  no. 

Si  tuviera  {or  si  tuviese)  buenos  li- 

bros  leeria. 
Seria  imprudencia  ir  con  este  tiem- 

po. 
No  quiso  ir. 
Debemos  perdonar  a  nuestros  ene- 

migos. 
V.  puede  hablar,  pero  yo  no  lo  puedo. 
%  Si  hubiera  {or  hubiese)  V.  recibido 

los  libros  me  los  habria  V.  pres- 

tado? 
Si  los  hubiera  {or  hubiese)  recibido 

se  los  habria  prestado;  pero  no 

los  he  recibido  aiin. 
En  lugar  de  venir  a  verme  me  escri- 

bio. 


Make  yourself  easy  (or  be  at  ease  in 
your  mind). 

How  many  tenses  has  the  indicative 
mood? 

Eight:  four  simple  and  four  com- 
pound. 

It  were  well  not  to  be  off  one's  guard. 

It  would  be  well  if  peace  were 
made. 

Though  thou  shouldst  tell  the  truth, 
he  would  not  believe  thee. 

Would  that  the  war  would  come  to 
an  end !  we  should  then  be  hap- 
pier. 

I  thought  thou  wouldst  study. 

I  did  not  think  you  would  study  (or 
were  studying). 

I  judged  you  would  study. 

I  said  thou  wert  to  read  (or  wouldst 
read). 

He  said  thou  wouldst  read. 

We  said  he  was  to  read. 

He  wished  thee  to  win. 

He  wished  thee  to  marry. 

I  do  not  know  whether  he  would  go 
or  not. 

Had  I  (or  if  I  had)  good  books  I 
should  read. 

It  were  imprudent  to  go  in  this 
weather. 

He  would  not  go. 

We  ought  to  forgive  our  enemies. 

You  can  speak,  but  I  can  not. 

Had  you  received  (or  if  you  had  re- 
ceived) the  books,  would  you  have 
lent  them  to  me  ? 

If  I  had  received  them  I  should  have 
lent  them  to  you ;  but  I  have  not 
received  them  yet. 

Instead  of  coming  to  see  me,  he 
wrote  to  me. 


238 


LESSON  XLIIL 


fil  no  jugara  por  temor  de  perder  su 

dinero. 
;  Quiera  Dios  que  se  corrija ! 
\  Asi  sea !    Lo  deseo  para  entram- 

bos. 
Bebo  a  la  salud  de  V.,  Don  Enrique. 
A  la  de  v.,  Don  Carlos. 
Senores,  manos  a  la  obra,  no  sea  que 

no  podamos  acabar  a  tiempo. 

De  todos  modos  creo  que  no  lo  con- 
seguiremos. 


He  will  not  play,  for ,  fear  of  losing 

his  money. 
God  grant  that  he  may  change ! 
So  be  it!     That    is  my  desire  for 

both. 
I  drink  to  your  health,  Mr.  Henry. 
Your  health,  Mr.  Charles. 
To  work,  gentlemen,  for  fear  we 

should  not  be  able  to  finish  in 

time. 
At  all  events,  I  do  not  think  we 

shall  succeed. 


EXPLANATION. 

217.  Imperfect  and  Past  Peefect  Subjunctive. — 
Although  it  has  been  deemed  expedient,  in  the  example  of 
the  conjugation  of  verbs  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  to  give 
but  one  English  equivalent  for  each  of  the  three  termina- 
tions r^«,  ra,  se^  it  is  not  to  be  inferred  therefrom  that  they 
may  be  used  indiscriminately.  Indeed,  the  correct  applica- 
tion of  each  of  these  terminations  presents  as  much  difficulty 
to  the  student  of  Spanish  as  does  that  of  the  English  signs 
mighty  could^  should^  would  to  the  foreigner  learning  Eng- 
lish. The  following  rules  will,  however,  serve  as  a  guide  in 
all  ordinary  cases,  and  enable  the  pupil  to  surmount  not  a 
few  of  the  most  serious  obstacles  to  the  right  use  of  the  ter- 
minations in  question : 

1st.  When  the  sentence  begins  without  a  conditional  con- 
junction, the  verb  may  take  either  the  first  or  the  second 
termination  {ria  or  ra),  though  in  this  case  the  form  ria  is 
preferable  ;  as. 


It  would  be  well  not  to  be  off  one's 

guard. 
It  would  be  well  if  peace  were  made. 


Bueno  seria  {or  tuera)  no  descui- 

darse. 
Convendria  {or  conviniera)  que  se 

hiciese  la  paz. 

2d.  In  sentences  beginning  with  si,  sino,  aunque.  Men 
que,  dado  que,  &c.,  or  with  an  interjection  expressive  of  de- 
sire, either  the  second  or  third  termination  may  be  employed 
(ra  or  se) ;  and  in  expressing  the  fulfilment  of  the  condition 


Aunque  dijeras  (or  dijeses)  la  ver- 
dad,  no  te  creeria. 


LESSOJSr  XLIIL  239 

which  may  have  been  stated  in  a  prior  verb  the  forms  in  Ha 
are  used ;  as, 

Though  thou  toldest  (or  wert  to 
tell)  the  truth,  he  would  not  be- 
lieve thee. 

3d.  When  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  preceded 
by  a  verb  in  the  preterit  indicative,  such  as  pensar^  to  think, 
decir^  to  say,  &c.,  any  of  the  terminations  may  be  used ;  but 
it  must  be  observed  that  the  idea  conveyed  will  be  different, 
according  to  the  termination  employed ;  as, 


Pense  que  estudiara  V.,  or  que  estu- 

diarm  V. 
No  crei  que  estudiase  V.   {or  estu- 

diara)  V. 
Juzgue  que  estudiaria  {or  estudiara) 

V. 
Dije  que  ley  era  {or  leerm)  Y. 
Dijo  que  leyese  {or  leyera)  V. 
Dijimos  que  leyera  (or  leyese). 


I  thought  you  might  study,  or  I 
thought  you  would  study. 

I  did  not  think  you  were  studying, 
or  I  did  not  think  you  would  study, 

I  judged  you  would  study,  or  might 
study. 

I  said  you  might  read,  or  would  read. 

He  said  you  were  to  read. 

We  said  he  was  to  read. 


4th.  But  if  this  tense  be  preceded  or  governed  by  a  verb 
in  any  of  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative,  such  as  desear^  to 
desire,  querer^  to  wish,  then  the  second  termination  {ra)  or 
the  third  {se)  must  be  used,  and  never  the  first  (ria) ;  as, 
Deseaba  que  ganara  {or  ganase)  V.  I  He  was  desirous  that  you  might  win. 
Quiso  que  V.  se  casara  {or  casase).     I  He  wished  you  to  get  married. 

A  glance  at  the  foregoing  rules  and  examples  will  suffice 
to  show  that  the  second  and  third  terminations  ra  and  se 
may  be  used  one  for  the  other  without  any  change  in  the 
sense  of  the  phrase.  Ria^  on  the  other  hand,  is  entirely 
different  from  the  other  two,  and  may  not  be  substituted  for 
them,  since  it  alters  the  meaning  of  the  sentence. 

5th.  When,  in  translating  into  Spanish,  whether  is  to  be 
rendered  by  si^  would  or  should  must  be  rendered  by  the  ter- 
mination ria  ;  as. 
No  se  si  iria.  I  do  not  know  whether  he  would 

go. 
No  sabia  si  el  vendria.  I  did  not  know  whether  he  would 


240  LESSON  XLIIL 

6th.  The  inverted  forms  had  /,  had  he^  &c.,  meaning  if  I 
hady  if  he  had^  &c.,  are  always  to  be  turned  into  Spanish  by 
verbs  with  either  of  the  terminations  ra  or  se^  preceded  by 
the  conjunction  si ;  as, 

Si  tuviera  {or  tuviese)  buenos  libros,  1  Had  I  (or  if  I  had)  good  books,  I 
leeria.  1     would  read. 

7th.   Were^  used  in  the  place  of  would  he^  is  to  be  trans- 
lated by  -r/«,  occasionally  by  -ra,  but  never  by  -se  ;  as, 
Seria  {or  fuera)  imprudencia  ir  con  I  It  were  imprudent  to  go  in  this 
este  tiempo.  j     weather. 

218.  The  English  auxiliaries  may^  mighty  can^  could^  will, 
would  and  should  are  sometimes  to  be  translated  into  Span- 
ish by  principal  verbs  of  the  same  meaning  ;  as. 

No  quiso  ir.  ( He  would  not  go. 

V,puede  hablar,  pero  yo  no  lopuedo.  \  You  may  (or  can)  speak,  but  I  cannot. 

In  the  first  example  we  see  that  by  would  not  is  conveyed 
the  idea  of  the  lack  of  willingness  or  desire  on  the  part  of 
the  person  alluded  to,  and  not  the  idea  that  the  lack  of 
action  was  contingent  as  an  unfulfilled  condition.  Had  the 
latter  been  the  sense  intended,  we  should  then  have  ren- 
dered would  by  the  form  in  ria  of  the  verb  ir,  to  go ;  thus, 
fil  no  iria.  |  He  would  not  go  ; 

for,  in  that  case,  the  object  would  have  been  simply  to  pre- 
dict that  he  would  not  go,  as  dependent  on  some  stlch  condi- 
tion as,  if  I  did  not  go  too,  si  yo  no  fuese  tambien.  Hence, 
the  closest  attention  is  required,  in  order  to  find  the  real 
meaning  of  the  auxiliaries  above  mentioned,  before  attempt- 
ing to  translate  them. 

219.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  describes  a  contingent 
action  that  took  place  some  time  ago,  or  that  is  taking  place 
at  the  present  time,  or  that  will  take  place  after  the  com- 
pletion of  the  action  expressed  by  the  determining  verb. 

220.  The  past  perfect  subjunctive  represents  a  contingent 
action  as  completed  before  some  period  of  time  already  past, 
or  before  some  other  action  which  is  now  also  completed, 
or  which  would  be  now  completed  had  it  taken  place. 


LESSON  XLIIL  241 

The  closest  attention  to  the  foregoing  remarks  is  essen- 
tial, in  order  to  avoid  the  improper  substitution  of  the  tenses 
of  the  indicative  for  those  of  the  subjunctive,  which  all  for- 
eigners, and  especially  those  of  English  speech,  are  liable  to 
make. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Duda  V.  que  se  haga  la  paz  este  verano  ?  Convendrfa 
que  se  hiciese  la  paz  ;  pero  temo  que  no  se  haga. 

2.  I  Iria  V.  a  Europa  si  tuviera  {or  tuviese)  tiempo  ?  No  iria 
aunque  tuviera  tiempo,  si  no  tuviese  dinero. 

3.  i  Ojala !  que  tuviera  V.  {or  tuviese)  mucho  dinero,  porque 
entonces  me  prestaria  Y.  alguno  ;  ^  no  es  asi  ?  Si  tuviera  mucho 
le  prestaria  a  V.  alguno ;  pero  con  la  condicion  de  que  me  lo 
devolviese  pronto. 

4.  I  Teme  V.  acaso  que  no  se  lo  devolviera  ?  Todo  pudiera 
suceder,  amigo  mio. 

5.  Si  V.  me  hubiera  {or  hubiese)  prestado  algo,  y  yo  no  se  lo 
hubiese  {or  hubiera)  devuelto,  V.  tendria  razon  en  desconfiar. 
—Todo  eso  esta  muy  bien  ;  pero  si,  en  lugar  de  ser  V.,  fuera  yo 
el  que  necesitara  dinero,  y  V.  el  que  lo  tuviera,  i  me  lo  prestaria  ? 
Por  supuesto  que  si. 

6.  Pues  con  todo  eso  yo  no  se  si  Y.  lo  haria.— e  Por  que  piensa 
Y.  tan  mal  de  mi  ? 

7.  I  Ha  olvidado  Y.  ya  que  el  aiio  pasado,  por  Navidad,  fui  a. 
pedirle  a  Y.  cien  pesos  y  me  los  nego  Y.  ?  Mal  pudiera  yo  pres- 
tarselos  a  Y.  cuando  yo  no  los  tenia ;  pero  este  Y.  seguro,  Don 
Jose,  que  yo  hubiera  tenido  un  gran  placer  en  haberselos  pres- 
tado a  Y.  si  los  hubiera  {or  hubiese)  tenido. 

8.  I  Si  Y.  supiera  usar  correctamente  los  tiempos  y  modos 
del  verbo,  sabria  Y.  hablar  espaiiol  ?  Si,  senor,  con  los  cono- 
cimientos  que  ya  tengo  de  las  demas  partes  de  la  oracion,  creo 
que  hablaria  bien  el  espaiiol  si  supiera  usar  bien  los  tiempos  y 
modos  del  verbo. 

9.  I  Que  es  lo  mas  importante  al  aprender  una  lengua  ?  El 
conocimiento  de  todo  lo  que  hace  relacion  al  verbo. 

10.  I  Por  que  cree  Y.  que  el  verbo  es  lo  mas  importante?  Por- 
que sin  los  verbos  no  se  puede  formar  una  sola  sentencia. 

11.  8  Luego,  segiin  eso,  bastara  aprender  la  conjugacion  de  los 
verbos  regulares  e  irregulares  para  hablar  una  lengua  ?  No, 
Benor,  si  uno  sabe  conjugar  los  verbos  como  regularmente  se 

18 


242  LESSON  XLIII. 

conjugan  en  las  gramaticas  ;  pero  si  sabiendolos  conjugar  como 
se  debe. 

12.  I  Pues  que,  hay  algiin  otro  modo  de  conjugar  los  verbos  ? 
Los  verbos  deben  conjugarse  formando  sentencias  completas  en 
todos  sus  modos  y  tiempos. 

13.  I  Que  ventajas  resultan  de  esto  ?  Las  ventajas  son  obvias, 
pues  formando  sentencias  completas  con  cada  tiempo  y  modo  se 
aprende  a  distinguir  estos  tiempos  y  modos,  acabando  por  usar- 
los  correctamente. 

14.  e  Y  cree  Y.  que  hablaria  bien  el  espaiiol  si  pudiese  hacer 
sentencias  en  todos  los  tiempos  y  modos  del  verbo  ?  Sin  duda 
alguna,  una  vez  que  V.  forme  estas  sentencias  con  prontitud  y 
sin  cometer  faltas,  hablara  V.  espanol. 

15.  Pues  manos  a  la  obra,  i  quiere  V.  que  haga  algunas  en  el 
modo  indicativo  ?  No,  senor,  en  las  lecciones  pasadas  ha  prac- 
ticado  V.  bastante  con  ese  modo,  haga  V.  algunas  ahora  con  el 
modo  subjuntivo. 

16.  Presente :  i  Desea  V.  que  yo  aprenda  el  espanol  ?  i  Es 
correcta  ?    Perfectamente ;  adelante. 

17.  Perfecto  de  subjuntivo  :  Temo  que  la  guerra  no  hay  a  aca- 
bado  en  Europa.  l  Esta  bien  ?  Si,  senor,  esta  muy  bien ;  pero 
no  necesita  Y.  preguntarme  a  cada  sentencia  que  haga,  si  esta 
correcta,  porque  yo  tendre  buen  cuidado  de  advertirselo  a  Y. 
cuando  no  sea  asi. 

18.  Pluscuam  perfecto :  Si  yo  hubiera  creido  que  esto  le  moles- 
taba  a  Y.  no  se  lo  habria  preguntado. — Esto  no  me  molesta  de 
ningiin  modo  y  espero  que  Y.  no  se  moleste  tampoco  por  lo  que 
yo  acabo  de  decir. 

19.  Imperfecto :  i  Seria  suficiente  hacer  una  frase  en  cada 
tiempo  ?  Seria  suficiente  si  cada  tiempo  se  usase  en  un  solo 
caso ;  pero  como  hay  muchos  y  muy  varios,  convendria  practi- 
car  en  todos  tanto  como  f  uese  posible. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Before  going  out,  Henry,  I  wish  to  give  you  a  piece  of 
advice.    Well,  go  on ! 

2.  What  is  that  advice  *  you  have  to  give  me  ?    Be  quiet, 
and  listen  to  what  I  have  to  tell  you. 

*  Consejo, 


LESSON  XLIII.  243 

3.  Did  you  warn  your  cousin  not  to  lend  his  carriage  to  that 
young  man  who  asked  him  for  it  ?  Yes,  but  he  said  he  would 
do  so,  and  that  he  did  not  distrust  that  young  man  at  all. 

4.  Do  you  now  know  how  to  conjugate  all  the  verbs  in  the 
Spanish  language  ?  I  am  not  sure ;  my  memory  is  not  very 
good ;  and  so  I  always  like  to  look  at  my  grammar,  for  fear  of 
making  (committing)  mistakes. 

5.  Can  you  tell  me  how  many  conjugations  of  regular  verbs 
there  are  in  Spanish  ?    Yes,  sir,  there  are  three. 

6.  When  you  see  a  new  verb,  how  do  you  know  to  what  con- 
jugation it  belongs  ?    By  the  termination  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

7.  Can  you  tell  me  to  what  conjugation  the  verb  comprar 
belongs  ?    Certainly ;  it  belongs  to  the  first. 

8.  How  do  you  know  that  ?  I  see  the  characteristic  termi- 
nation of  the  first  conjugation,  which  is  ar. 

9.  And  of  which  conjugation  is  entender  f  The  second ;  its 
termination  being  er. 

10.  Very  well.  Now,  if  I  say  existio,  can  you  tell  me  all 
about  that  verb  ?  Yes,  sir,  it  is  a  regular  verb,  third  person  sin- 
gular, of  the  preterit  tense  of  the  indicative  mode ;  it  belongs  to 
the  third  conjugation,  its  infinitive  being  existir. 

11.  Are  there  in  Spanish  no  conjugations  other  than  those 
about  which  you  have  just  told  me  ?  Yes,  very  many.  Those 
I  have  mentioned  {mencionar)  already  are  the  three  regular 
ones. 

12.  What  do  you  understand  by  "  regular  verbs  "  ?  Regular 
verbs  are  those  which  are  conjugated  in  all  their  modes  and 
tenses  exactly  like  the  models  (modelos)  given  in  different  parts 
of  the  grammar. 

13.  And  "  irregular  verbs,"  what  are  they  ?  Those  whose  con- 
jugation is  different  from  the  models. 

14.  If  you  could  speak  Spanish  as  well  as  English,  do  you 
think  you  would  prefer  it  to  your  own  language  ?  I  should  like 
to  be  able  to  speak  it  as  well ;  but  there  is  no  language  in  the 
world  that  I  should  prefer  to  my  own. 

15.  If  I  were  to  lend  you  this  phrase  book  would  you  return 
it  to  me  next  week  ?  I  should  if  you  wanted  it,  and  I  promised 
to  return  it  to  you  at  that  time. 


^M 


LESSON  XLIV. 


LESSON    XLIV. 


Aproximar. 

To  approach,  to  draw  near. 

Apurar. 

To  perplex,  to  press. 

.     AuUar. 

To  howl. 

Ladrar. 

To  bark. 

Cuidar. 

To  take  care  of. 

Dejar. 

To  leave,  to  let. 

Emplear. 

To  employ 

Matar. 

To  kill. 

Permitir. 

To  permit. 

Robar. 

To  rob,  to  steaL 

Imponer. 

To  impose. 

Tantico. 

Somewhat ;  a  little. 

Yaya  de  cuento. 

To  begin  my  story. 

Oomo  iba  diciendo  de  mi 

As  I  was  saying  (in  my  story). 

cuento. 

A  mi  costa. 

At  my  expense,  to  my  cost. 

Ta  le  veo  a  V.  venir. 

I  see  what  you  are  at. 

Yenir  a  pelo. 

To  suit  exactly,  to  be  apropos. 

De  sopeton. 

Unexpectedly. 

Cuanto  mas. 

The  more. 

\  Por  Dios ! 

For  Heaven's  sake  I 

I  He! 

Ho  !  hoa !    What  ? 

lOiga! 

Indeed  !    Just  listen  ! 

Chico.     , 

Little,  small. 

Revoltoso. 

Noisy. 

Caliente. 

Hot,  warm. 

Apurado. 

Embarrassed. 

Burlon. 

Jester,  scofPer. 

Natural. 

Natural. 

Aumentativo. 

Augmentative. 

Dim.inutivo. 

Diminutive. 

Picaro. 

Rogue,  rascal. 

Satisfecho. 

Satisfied,  contented. 

Cuento                    Tale,  story. 

Anecdota.               Anecdote. 

Corro.                      Group  of  per- 

Casuca.                  Miserable 

sons. 

house. 

LESSON  XLIV. 


245^ 


Cojo. 

Lame. 

Mosca. 

Fly ;  tiresome- 

Brazo. 

Arm. 

person. 

Ademan. 

Attitude. 

Necesidad. 

Necessity, 

Francisco,  Paco 

Francis, 

need. 

{dim.). 

Frank. 

Pierna. 

Leg. 

Jose,  Pepe  (dim.) 

Joseph,  Joe. 

Boca. 

Mouth. 

Caldo. 

Broth. 

Maria,  Mariqui- 

Mary. 

Calducho. 

Poor  broth. 

ta  {dim.). 

Pistoletazo. 

Pistol  shot. 

Concepcion, 

{No  English 

Poetastro. 

Poetaster. 

Concha  {dim). 

equivalent,. 

Lugar. 

Place. 

Pistola. 

Pistol. 

Garrote. 

Bludgeon. 

Estratagema. 

Stratagem. 

Garrotazo. 

Blow     of     a 

Josefa,  Pepa 

Josephine. 

bludgeon. 

{dim.). 

Canon. 

Cannon. 

Francisca,  Paca 

Frances, 

Canonazo. 

Cannon-shot 

{dim.) 

Fanny. 

Ladron. 

Thief,  robber. 

Costumbre. 

Custom. 

Clase. 

Class. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Lo  aprendi  a  mi  costa. 

Antes  no  le  habia  comprendido  a 

v.,  ahora  ya  le  veo  venir. 
fil  me  dio  la  noticia  de  sopeton. 
i  Por  Dios !  D.  Francisco,  no  hable 

V.  de  esc. 
%  Conoce  V.  a  aquel  hombron  % 
Si,  senor,  es  el  marido  de  mi  veci- 

nita  Mariquita. 
V.  me  sorpende.    ;  Es  posible  que 

sea  aquel  hombronazo  el  marido 

de  esa  mujercita ! 
I  Es  ese  hombre  cojo  ? 
Si,  senor  ;  en  la  ultima  guerra  reci- 

bio  un  pistoletazo  en  una  pierna. 
I  Ha  matado  V.  alguna  vez  a  alguno  i 
Si,  senor,  el  ano  pasado  mate  de  un 

garrotazo  al  perro  de  mi  vecino, 

porque  no  me  dejaba  dormir,  au- 

llando  todita  la  noche. 
Ese  hombre  es  un  picaronazo,  que  no 

hace  sino  beber  y  no  atiende  a  las 

necesidades  de  su  familia. 


I  learned  it  to  my  cost. 

I  did  not  understand  you  before,. 

but  now  I  see  what  you  are  at. 
He  gave  me  the  news  unexpectedly. 
For  Heaven's  sake !  Mr.  Francis,  do 

not  speak  of  that. 
Do  you  know  that  big  man  ? 
Yes,  sir,  he  is  the  husband  of  my 

little  neighbor  Mary. 
You    surprise    me.    Is    it  possible^ 

that  that  enormous  man  is  that 

little  woman's  husband. 
Is  that  man  lame  ? 
Yes,  sir ;  in  the  last  war  he  received 

a  pistol  shot  in  one  of  his  legs. 
Did  you  ever  kill  any  one  ? 
Yes,    sir ;  last    year    I    killed    ray 

neighbor's  dog  with  a  bludgeon, 

for  he  would  not  let  me  sleep — 

howling  the  whole  night  through. 
That  man  is  a  great  rascal  who  does 

nothing  but  drink,  and  does  not 

attend  to  the  wants  of  his  family.. 


LESSON  XLIK 


Este  perro  es  chiquito,  pero  yo  tengo 

uno  chiquitito. 
Carlotita,  ve  a.  cuidar  de  tu  her- 

manita. 
Ese  nino  es  un  picarillo. 
Esta  nina  es  una  coquetilla. 
Mi  pobrecico  hijo  esta  muy  malo. 
Pepe,  i  has  visto  mi  caballito  f 
Si ;  pero  yo  en  tu  lugar,  Paco,  le 

llamaria   caballejo,  porque    creo 

que  no  merece  el  nombre  de  caba- 

Uito. 
Pepe  vino  callandito. 
Mi  amigo  esta  apuradillo. 
Esa  niiia  esta  muertecita  de  frio. 

Tu  casa  esta  lejitos. 

61  no  es  poeta,  sino  poetastro. 


This  dog  is  pretty  small,  but  I  have 

a  very  little  one. 
Charlotte,  go  and  take  care  of  your 

little  sister. 
This  child  is  a  little  rogue. 
This  little  girl  is  a  little  coquette. 
My  poor  little  son  is  very  sick. 
Joe,  have  you  seen  my  pony. 
I  did ;  but  if  I  were  you,  Frank,  I 

would  call  it  a  nag,  for  I  think  it 

is  not  worthy  the  name  of  pony. 

Joe  came  in  softly. 

My  friend  is  a  little  embarrassed. 

That  little  girl  is  almost  dead  with 

cold. 
Your  house  is  pretty  far  away. 
He  is  no  poet,  but  a  poetaster. 


EXPLANATION. 

221.  Augmentative  and  diminutive  i^ouns  are  those 
derivatives  which  serve  to  augment  or  diminish  the  significa- 
tion of  their  primitives ;  not  only  in  regard  to  size,  but  also 
esteem,  character,  dignity,  importance,  &c. 

They  are  formed  by  adding  various  terminations  to  the 
primitive  nouns,  dropping  generally  the  vowel,  if  it  end  in 
one.  The  terminations  which  are  used  are  very  numerous  ; 
but  those  most  frequently  adopted  are  azo^  on^  ote  for  the 
augmentative  masculine,  and  aza^  ona^  ota  for  the  augmen- 
tative feminine  nouns.  These  terminations  are  equivalent 
in  their  meaning  to  the  English  words  hig^  large^  stout^  tall^ 
and  such  like  ;  as, 

DERIVATIVES. 

Hombron,  hom-  A  tall,  or  large, 
br«20,  hombro^e.        man. 

MujeroTia,  muje-  A  tall,  or  large, 
raza,  mujero^a.  woman. 

But  the  nouns  which  have  those  terminations  are  not  always 
augmentatives,  since  the  nouns  pistoletazo,  pistol  shot ;  cano- 
nazo,  cannon  shot;  garrotazo,  blow  of  a  bludgeon,  do  not 


PRIMITIVES. 

Hombre.  A  man. 

Mujer.  A  woman. 


LESSON  XLIY. 


247 


augment  the  signification  of  their  primitives,  pistola^  canoUy 
and  garrote^  and  consequently  are  not  augmentatives. 

Familiar  use  has  introduced  many  other  augmentative  and 
diminutive  terminations ;  as, 

Hombrona^o.  i     A  very  large  man. 

Picarona^^o.  |     A  very  great  rascal. 

The  terminations  most  used  as  diminutives  are  m,  illOy 
ito,  icOy  ete^  uelo  or  ejo^  for  the  masculine ;  the  feminine  are 
formed  by  adding  a  to  the  termination  m,  and  by  changing 
the  final  vowel  of  the  others  into  a. 

Many  of  the  diminutive  terminations  may  acquire  a  still 
further  diminutive  signification  by  adding  other  terminations 
to  them ;  thus, 


Chtco. 

Chiqui^o. 

ChiquiU'^o. 


Small. 
Very  small. 
Very,  very  small. 


The  manner  of  applying  these  terminations,  as  much  for 
their  different  meanings  as  for  their  various  orthographical 
accidents,  admits  of  so  much  variety  that  practice  seems  the 
only  means  of  acquiring  the  proper  use  of  them ;  as, 


Mi  herman^7o. 

Un  hombreci^o. 

Un  viejeci^o. 

!fil  es  un  picart'ZZo. 

Coxloiita. 

Una  pobre  viejec^7a. 

Ella  es  una  coqueU7/a. 

Mi  pobrec*co  hi  jo  {or  mi  pobre 

h.\]ito). 
Un  caballeyo. 
Un  pobre^e. 
Un  ladronzt^eZo. 
Un  vejezuelo. 


My  dear  little  brother. 

A  dear  little  man. 

A  dear  little  old  man. 

He  is  a  dear  little  rogue. 

Dear  little  Charlotte. 

A  poor  dear  little  old  woman. 

She  is  a  dear  little  coquette. 

My  poor  little  son. 

A  miserable  little  horse,  a  nag. 
A  poor  useless  creature. 
A  petty  young  thief. 
A  petty  king. 


222.  Besides  the  terminations  mentioned,  there  are  many 
others  which  may  be  called  irregular,  inasmuch  as  they  can 
be  affixed  to  certain  nouns  only,  among  them  the  most  irregu- 
lar are  those  of  persons  ;  as, 

Francisco,  Paco,  etc.  I      Francis,  Frank. 

Concepci6n,  Concha,  etc.  |     {No  equivalent  in  English.) 


^48  LESSON  XLIV. 

Jose,  Pepe,  etc.  i     Joseph,  Joe. 

Maria,  Mariquita,  etc.  I      Mary. 

223.  Although  the  diminutives  proceed  in  general  from 
substantive  nouns,  as  we  see  by  the  preceding  examples,  they 
are  also  formed,  in  familiar  style,  from  adjectives,  participles, 
gerunds,  and  even  from  adverbs ;  thus  we  not  unfrequently 


Revoltost7Zo  es  el  muchacho. 
MuertectYo  de  frio. 
Todito  el  dia. 
Pan  calenti7o. 
.  Apuradi7Zo  estuvo. 
Vino  calland^7o. 
Leji7os  esta  tu  casa. 


The  boy  is  rather  turbulent. 

Half  dead  with  cold. 

The  whole  day  over. 

Warm  bread  (slightly  warm). 

He  was  somewhat  embarrassed. 

He  came  softly. 

Your  house  is  pretty  far  away. 


224.  Primitive  words,  ending  of  themselves  in  any  di- 
minutive termination  (such  as  cept'ZZo,  brush ;  abanico,  fan ; 
esp^/o,  looking-glass,  &c.),  cannot  take  an  additional  termi- 
nation similar  to  their  own,  without  producing  a  disagree- 
able sound,  which  ought  always  to  be  avoided.  Words  end- 
ing in  ito  or  ifa  are  excepted. 

The  same  termination  may  often  serve  to  express  affection, 
pity^  contempt^  &c.,  being  in  this  respect  like  the  interjec- 
tions, and  it  is  consequently  very  difficult  to  classify  them. 
Very  often  their  real  meaning  can  be  distinguished  only  by 
the  nature  of  the  conversation  and  the  intonation  of  the 
voice.  They  are,  nevertheless,  not  to  be  used  too  profusely, 
because  when  they  come  too  close  together  they  render  the 
discourse  monotonous,  in  consequence  of  the  similarity  ex- 
isting between  them. 

226.  There  are  in  Spanish  other  derivatives,  formed  more 
or  less  at  fancy,  and  which  are  not  augmentatives  or  diminu- 
tives, although  they  may  appear  to  be  such ;  these  might  be 
called  depreciatives  (despreciativos)^  because  there  is  always 
in  them  something  of  censure,  maliciousness,  or  mockery ;  as. 


Casa,  casuca. 
Poeta,  poetastro. 
Caldo,  calducho. 
Pueblo,  poblacho. 


House,  miserable-looking  house. 
Poet,  poetaster. 
Broth,  poor  broth. 
Miserable  little  village. 


LUSSOJSr  XLIV,  249 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  i  Tiene  V.  lastima  de  aquel  pobrete  ?  No  tengo  lastima 
de  el,  porque  es  un  ladronzuelo. 

2.  i  Le  ha  robado  a  V.  algo  ?  No,  senor,  el  sabe  muy  bien 
que  si  se  atreviese  a  robarme  yo  lo  mataria  de  un  pistoletazo. 

3.  Y  I  por  que  no  de  un  garrotazo,  6  un  canonazo  ?  i  Por 
que?  No  se  porque,  probablemente  he  empleado  la  palabra 
pistoletazo  porque  tengo  una  pistola  j  no  tengo  ni  garrote,  ni 
canon. 

4.  No,  senor,  esa  no  es  la  razon ;  i  quiere  Y.  que  yo  se  la 
diga  ?    Bien,  veamos. 

5.  Y.  no  tiene  valor  para  matar  una  mosca  cuanto  mas  a  un 
hombre ;  pero  Y.  queria  practicar  eon  las  palabras  matar  y  pis- 
toletazo y  esta  es  la  sola  razon  por  la  cual  Y.  iba  a  cometer  un 
homicidio. 

6.  Yaya,  Don  Francisco,  Y.  es  poeta,  hombre  de  ingenio  y 
de  buen  humor  y  quiere  divertirse  a  costa  mia,  i  no  es  verdad  ? 
Ya  lo  veo  a  Y.  venir,  Y.  quiere  hacerme  decir  que  no  soy  poeta 
sino  poetastro  introduciendo  esta  palabrita  mas  de  la  leccion. 

7.  Solo  le  faltaba  a  Y.  llamarse  Quevedo  para  serle  parecido 
en  todo,  hasta  en  el  nombre. — Mil  gracias  por  el  honor  de  la  com- 
paracion,  pero  volviendo  a  lo  del  pistoletazo. 

8.  I  Por  Dios !  D.  Francisco,  no  sea  Y.  tan  burlon  y  dejeme 
Y.  estar  en  paz. — Lo  dejare  a  Y.,  Don  Pepe,  si  me  permite  con- 
tarle  un  cuentecito ;  y  para  que  le  parezca  a  Y.  mas  interesante, 
se  lo  contare  a  Y.  introduciendo  tantos  aumentativos  y  diminu- 
tivos  como  me  sea  posible. 

9.  Con  esa  condicion  le  escucho  a  Y. — Pues  bien :  vaya  de 
cuento :  Habia  un  hombrecillo  en  cierto  lugarcillo. — Y  observe 
Y.,  D.  Pepito,  que  para  el  cuentecito  lo  mismo  hubiera  dado  que 
el  hombre  hubiera  sido  hombron  y  el  lugar  lugaron. — Adelante 
con  el  cuentecillo  que  me  va  gustando  un  tantico.  Pues  es  el 
caso  que  este  hombron,  hombrecito,  hombrecillo,  hombrote,  hom- 
brecico,  hombrazo,  hombron azo,  hombracho,  6  como  Y.  quiera 
llamarle.  .  .  . 

10.  Yo  no  quiero  llamarle  nada,  Y.  le  ha  llamado  ya  sufi- 
ciente;  pero  al  cuento,  al  cuento  6  se  acabara  el  ejercicio  sin 
que  lleguemos  al  fin.— Pues  este  hombrezuelo  no  sabia  mas  que 
un  cuentecillo ;  pero  lo  contaba  a  todo  el  mundo  que  encontraba. 

11.  Pero  yo  no  comprendo  como  podia  hacer  que  su  cuento 
viniese  a  pelo  y  Y.  sabe  que  no  se  cuenta  un  cuento  asi  de  sope- 


250  LESSON  XLIY, 

ton,  como  se  dan  los  buenos  dias. — Al  principio,  el  viejote  se  en- 
contraba  apuradillo  para  conseguirlo ;  pero  el  picaruelo  invento 
despues  una  estratagema  por  medio  de  la  cual  hizo  que  su  anec- 
dotilla  viniera  a  pelo  siempre. 

12.  I  Oiga !  I  J  que  estratagema  f  ue  esa  ?  Oigala  V. ;  pero  antes 
debo  advertir  a  V.  que  en  su  anecdota  habia  algo  que  bacia  rela- 
cion  a  caiionazos  y  pistoletazos. 

13.  I  Eh !  i  Ya  vuelve  V.  a  los  pistoletazos !  Pues  bien,  como 
iba  diciendo  de  mi  cuento,  se  aproximaba  el  buen  viejecito  ca- 
llandito  a  cualquier  corrillo  que  encontrase  y  poniendose  el  dedo 
indice  sobre  la  boca  en  ademan  de  imponer  silencio,  les  pregun- 
taba.  "  i  Han  oido  Vds.  un  canonazo  ? "  No,  senor,  era  natural- 
mente  la  respuesta ;  pues  bien,  respondia  mi  hombre  muy  satis- 
fecho. — Ahora  que  hablamos  de  canonazos  les  contare  a  Yds.  una 
anecdota  .  .  .  y  aqui  contaba  su  cuento. 

14.  Yo  no  veo  la  aplicacion  de  su  cuento  de  V.  todavia,  Sr.  D. 
Francisco. — j  Como !  D.  Pepe,  i  no  ha  oido  V.  un  pistoletazo  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  did  you  like  that  story  by  Fernan  Caballero  which 
1  lent  you  ?  Very  much  indeed ;  it  gives  a  very  good  idea  of 
the  manners,  customs,  and  language  of  the  low  classes  in  Anda- 
lusia {Andalucia). 

2.  What  did  that  man  want  ?  He  is  a  poor  lame  man  ask- 
ing for  a  piece  of  bread,  or  a  few  cents  to  buy  some. 

3.  He  is  lame,  you  say ;  how  did  that  happen  to  him  ?  He 
says  he  was  at  the  war  and  received  a  pistol  shot  in  the  leg. 

4.  What  does  the  physician  give  to  your  cousin  since  he  has 
been  sick  ?  He  has  given  him  some  medicine  (medicina),  and 
says  he  must  take  broth  three  times  a  day. 

5.  Do  you  like  broth  ?  Yes,  very  well ;  but  not  such  poor 
broth  as  they  make  for  my  cousin. 

6.  How  does  that  poor  man  make  his  living  since  he  lost 
both  his  arms  ?  He  can  do  nothing  in  the  world,  and  lives  on 
what  little  money  he  gets  from  his  brother,  who  is  himself  rather 
embarrassed  just  now. 

7.  Come  nearer  to  the  fire,  Louisa ;  it  is  a  little  cold  this 
morning.  Thank  you,  I  do  not  feel  the  cold  much  ;  but  I  should 
be  obliged  to  you  if  you  would  call  Fanny  in  to  warm  herself ; 
she  is  half  dead  with  cold. 

8.  Is  Henry  going  to  be  employed  by  that  merchant  to  whom 


LESSON  XLV.  251 

you  spoke  for  him  some  time  ago  ?  Yes,  I  think  it  is  probable- 
and  I  shall  be  very  glad,  for  the  poor  fellow  *  is  a  little  embar- 
rassed, and  has  been  so  for  a  long  time. 

9.  If  I  were  in  your  place  I  should  not  allow  that  dog  to 
howl  so  the  whole  night  through.  My  father  will  not  let  me 
speak  about  it  to  our  neighbor,  who  lives  in  that  miserable  old 
house  next  to  ours ;  it  is  his  dog,  and  he  ought  not  to  let  it 
howl  in  such  a  manner. 

10.  Just  listen  to  him  !  as  if  I  could  not  go  and  kill  it  with  a 
bludgeon. — Kill  it !  There  would  be  no  necessity  for  killing  it ; 
just  give  him  one  good  blow  with  the  bludgeon  you  talk  of  and 
he  would  let  you  sleep  in  future. 

11.  Have  you  ever  read  Don  Quixote  ?  No  ;  why  ?  If  you 
take  the  trouble  to  read  it  you  will  find  a  very  good  anecdote  of 
a  madman  (loco)  and  a  dog,  in  the  first  chapter  of  the  second 
part  of  that  justly  celebrated  work. 

12.  Have  you  paid  attention  to  what  is  said  in  to-day's  lesson 
on  augmentatives  and  diminutives  ?  Yes,  madam ;  and  it  seems 
to  me  that  the  proper  use  of  them  must  make  a  language  expres- 
sive and  elegant  in  a  high  degree  (grado). 

13.  Is  Concepcion  a  very  common  name  for  ladies  in  Spain  ? 
There  are  a  great  many  called  by  that  name ;  the  diminutive  is 
Concha. 

14.  Is  your  mother  satisfied  with  her  new  servant  ?  Very 
much  so. 

15.  Why  did  she  let  the  other  one  go  away  ?  She  was  very 
glad  to  see  her  go  away,  because  she  used  to  steal  everything 
that  came  to  her  hand. 

16.  Is  that  coffee  warm  ?  No,  sir ;  but  I  could  warm  it  in  a 
few  minutes,  if  you  wished. 


LESSON    XLV. 


Avisar. 

Admirar. 
Aconsejar. 


To  advise,  to  notify,  to  let  one 

know. 
To  admire. 
To  counsel,  to  advise. 


*  Remember  that  English  words  italicised  are  not  to  be  translated. 


252 


LESSON  XLV. 


Apremiar. 

Afectar. 

Compadecer. 

Convertir. 

Desertar. 

Empenar. 

Explicar. 

Fusil  ar. 

Guardar. 

Librar. 

Mentir. 

Mencionar. 

Permanecer. 

Relatar. 

Santificar. 

Suceder. 

Sonar. 

Volar. 


De  todo  corazon. 
En  su  interior. 
Ya  caigo. 
Bien  venido. 
A  cual  mas. 
De  buena  fe. 
Esto  es. 
Ya  lo  ve  V, 


To  urge,  to  compel  one  to  do  sluj 

thing  by  order  of  court. 
To  feign,  to  affect. 
To  pity. 
To  convert. 
To  desert. 

To  pledge,  to  engage. 
To  explain. 
To  shoot. 

To  guard,  to  observe,  to  keep. 
To  free,  to  liberate,  to  deliver. 
To  lie. 
To  mention. 
To  remain. 
To  relate. 
To  sanctify. 
To  happen,  to  succeed. 
To  sound. 
Toflv. 


I  Ah  bah ! 

Oh,  pshaw ! 

i  Toma ! 

Indeed ! 

Ancho. 

Wide,  broad. 

Falso. 

False. 

Calvo. 

Bald. 

Famoso. 

Famous. 

Notorio. 

Notorious,  well  known. 

Credulo. 

Credulous. 

Critico. 

Critical. 

Formal. 

Formal,  straightforward. 

Supersticioso. 

Superstitious. 

Esceptico. 

Skeptic,  skeptical. 

With  all  my  heart. 

In  his  mind. 

I  see  (or  understand). 

Welcome. 

Yieing  with  each  other. 

In  good  faith. 

That  is. 

So  you  see. 


LESSON  XLV, 

253 

Sol. 

Sun. 

Oracion. 

Prayer. 

Amor. 

Love. 

Tierra. 

Earth,  land. 

Cielo. 

Sky,  heaven. 

Calva. 

Baldness,  the  bald 

Reino. 

Kingdom. 

part. 

Fin. 

End,  purpose. 

Ana. 

Ann. 

Deudor. 

Debtor. 

Voluntad. 

Will,  choice. 

General. 

General. 

Profecia. 

Prophecy. 

Cuervo. 

Raven,  crow. 

Fisonomia. 

Physiognomy, 

Agiiero. 

Omen. 

countenance. 

Interior. 

Interior. 

Tentacion. 

Temptation. 

Espiritu. 

Spirit. 

Sinceridad. 

Sincerity. 

Lodo. 

Mud. 

Injusticia. 

Injustice. 

El  padre  nuestro.  The        Lord's 

Ridiculez. 

Ridicule. 

Prayer. 

Compasion. 

Compassion. 

Tren. 

Train. 

Materia. 

Matter. 

Parroquiano. 

Parishioner, 

Fe. 

Faith. 

customer. 

Bolsa. 

Purse. 

Lector. 

Reader. 

Excepcion. 

Exception. 

Frente. 

Forehead. 

Formalidad 

Formality. 

COMPO. 

3ITI0N. 

Dios  te  lo  premie. 

Si  para  fines  de  ano  no  hubiere  pa- 

gado,  lo  apremias  {or  apremialo, 

or  lo  apremiaras). 
Si  viene  {or  como  venga)  sera  bien 

recibido. 
Quien  tai  diga  miente. 
Si  asi  lo  haces,  Dios  te  lo  premie. 
Si  al  salir  de  tu  casa  vieres  volar 

Cuervos,  dejalos  volar  y  mira  tii 

donde  pones  los  pies. 

Todo  hombre  calvo  no  tendra  pelo ; 

y  si  tuviere  alguno  no  sera  en  la 

calva. 
Le  perdonaran  todo  lo  que  hiciere. 

Le  escribire  a  V.  lo  que  me  dijere. 

Si  permaneciere  aqui  algiin  tiempo 
se  lo  avisare. 


May  God  reward  you  for  it. 
If  at  the  end  of  the  year  he  has  not 
paid  you,  compel  him  to  do  so. 

If  he  comes,  he  will  be  well  re- 
ceived. 

Whoever  says  such  a  thing,  lies. 

If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you. 

If  on  going  out  of  your  house  you 
should  see  crows  fly,  let  them  fly, 
and  look  where  you  put  your  own 
feet. 

Every  bald  man  is  without  hair;  or 
if  he  should  have  any,  it  would 
not  be  on  the  bald  part. 

They  will  forgive  him  every  thing 
he  may  do. 

I  shall  write  to  you  what  he  may 
(happen  to)  say  to  me. 

If  I  should  (or  should  I)  remain  here 
any  time,  I  shall  let  you  know. 


254 


LUSSON  XLV. 


Le  escribire  d  V.  lo  qae  me  diga. 

Le  perdonaran  lo  que  haga. 

Si  hubiere  salido  cuando  V.  llegue. 

Aunque  hubiere  Uegado  antes  que 
reciba  la  carta. 

Aunque  haya  llegado  antes  que  re- 
ciba la  carta. 

El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
desertaran  fuesen  fusilados. 

El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
hubieran  desertado  fuesen  fusila- 
dos. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos 
los  que  desertaren  sean  fusilados. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos 
los  que  hubieren  desertado  sean 
fusilados.  . 

Quien  lo  dijere  miente. 

Si  yiniere,  sera  bien  recibido. 

Si  asi  lo  hicieres. 


I  shall  write  you  what  he  may  say 
to  me. 

They  will  forgive  him  every  thing 
he  may  do. 

If  he  should  have  left  when  you  ar- 
rive. 

Although  he  may  have  arrived  be- 
fore he  receive  the  letter. 

Although  he  may  have  arrived  be- 
fore he  receive  the  letter. 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  might  (happen  to)  desert 
should  be  shot. 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  might  have  deserted  should 
be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all 
those  who  may  desert  {i.  e.  may 
happen  to  desert)  should  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all 
those  who  may  have  deserted  be 
shot. 

Whoever  should  say  so  would  lie. 

If  he  should  come,  he  would  be  well 
received. 

If  you  should  do  so. 


EXPLANATION. 
226.  The  putuke  of  the  subjunctive  mode  represents  a 
contingent  action  to  take  place  some  time  hence  ;  as, 

I  shall  write  to  you  what  he  may 
(happen  to)  say  to  me. 


Le  escribire  a  V.  lo  que  me  dijere, 
Le  perdonaran  todo  lo  que  Mciere, 


Si  permaneciere  aqui  algiin  tiempo 
se  lo  avisare. 


They  will  forgive  him  every  thing 
he  may  do  in  future. 

If  I  should  (or  should  I)  remain 
here  any  time  I  shall  let  you 
know. 

227.  The  peeseis't  subjunctive  may  be  substituted  for 
the  foregoing  tense,  except  when  the  verb  is  preceded  by  the 
conditional  si ;  as,  Le  escribire  a  V.  lo  que  diga ;  Le  perdo- 
naran lo  que  haga, 

228.  The  future  perfect  subjunctive,  which  is  not  so 


LESSOX  XLY. 


255 


much  used  as  the  future  subjunctive,  describes  a  contingent 
action  dependent  on  a  future  event ;  as, 
Si  huhiere  salido  cuando  V.  llegue. 


Aunque  huhiere  llegado  antes  que 
reciba  la  carta. 


If  he  should  have  left  when  you  ar- 
rive. 

Although  he  may  have  arrived  be- 
fore he  receive  the  letter. 


229.  The  perfect  subjuj^ctive  may  be  substituted  for 
the  above  tense,  except  when  the  verb  is  preceded  by  the 
conditional  si ;  as,  aunque  haya  llegado  antes  que  reciba  la 
carta, 

230.  In  order  that  the  imperfect  and  past  perfect  sub- 
junctive, which  also  express  a  future  contingent  action  or 
event,  be  not  misapplied,  as  too  frequently  they  are,  and  con- 
founded with  the  future  simple  and  compound  future  of  the 
same  mode,  the  following  distinction  must  be  attentively  ob- 
served : 

1st.  That  the  imperfect  qh^l  past  perfect  may  be  employed 
when  the  actions  or  events  expressed  in  the  sentence  are  fu- 
ture only  in  reference  to  some  other  time  expressed,  or  merely 
implied,  in  the  sentence. 

2d.  That  the  subjunctive  future  and  subjunctive  future 
perfect  must  be  used  when  the  contingent  action  or  event  im- 
plied in  the  sentence  is  future  with  regard  to  the  action  ex- 
pressed by  the  determining  verbs  ;  as. 

El  general  man  do  que  todos  los  que   The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
desertaran  fuesen  fusilados. 


El  general  mando  que  todos  los  que 
hubieran  desertado  fuesen  fusila- 
dos. 

El  general  ha  mandado  que  todos 
los  que  desertaren  sean  fusilados. 

Bl  general  ha  mandado  que  todos 
los  que  hubieren  desertado  sean 
fusilados. 


who  should  (might  happen  to)  de- 
sert should  be  shot. 

The  general  ordered  that  all  those 
who  had  (might  have)  deserted 
should  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all 
those  who  desert  (^.  e.  may  hap- 
pen to  desert)  shall  be  shot. 

The  general  has  ordered  that  all 
those  who  have  deserted  shall  be 
shot. 


231.  The  future  and  the  future  perfect  subjunctive  also 
act  as  determining  verbs ;  but  they  govern  the  subordinate 


256  LIJSSON  XLV. 

verb  only  in  the  present  or  the  future  indicative,  and  in  the 
imperative ;  as, 


Quien  lo  dijere,  miente. 

Si  viniere  sera  bien  recibido. 

Si  asi  lo  hiciereSf  Dios  te  lo  premie. 


Whoever  should  say  so  will  lie. 

If  he  should  come,  he  will  be  well 

received. 
If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you 

for  it. 
If  at  the  end  of  the  year  he  has  not 

paid  you,  compel  him  to  do  so. 


Si  para  fines  de  ano  no  te  hubiere  pa- 
gadOy  lo  apremiaSy  or  apremialo, 
or  lo  apremiards. 

These  determining  sentences  of  the  future  simple  of  the 
subjunctive  may  be  turned  to  the  present  indicative  in  cer- 
tain cases,  and  to  the  present  subjunctive  in  others  ;  as. 


Si  vienej  or  como  venga^  sera  bien 

recibido. 
Quien  tal  diga  miente. 
Si  asi  lo  haces,  Dios  te  lo  premie, 

etc. 


If  he  comes,  he  shall  be  well  re- 
ceived. 

Whoever  says  so  lies. 

If  you  do  so,  may  God  reward  you 
for  it. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Jose,  me  han  dicho  que  es  mal  agiiero  al  salir  uno  de 
su  casa  ver  volar  cuervos  ;  i  que  piensa  V.  sobre  ello  ?  Yo  pienso 
como  Don  Francisco  de  Quevedo. 

2.  e  Y  que  es  lo  que  pensaba  ese  famoso  escritor  sobre  esta 
materia  ?    Oiga  V.  lo  que  el  decia. 

3.  Si  al  salir  de  tu  casa  vieres  volar  cuervos,  dejalos  volar,  y 
mira  tii  donde  pones  los  pies. 

4.  i  Ah  !  i  bah  !  Quevedo  era  un  criticon  que  no  perdonaba 
nada,  pero  alia  en  su  interior  quiza  creia  un  poquito  como  todo 
el  mundo  en  los  agiieros  ;  i  no  cree  V.  asi  ?  i  Que  si  creia  ?  Por 
supuesto  que  si.     Vea  V.  aqui  otro  de  los  a^eros  en  que  creia. 

5.  Si  vas  a  comprar  algo,  y  al  ir  a  pagar  no  hallares  la  bolsa 
adonde  llevabas  el  dinero,  es  agiiero  malisimo,  y  no  te  sucedera 
bien  la  compra. 

6.  i  Toma  !  Esa  es  una  verdad  de  Perogrullo,  y  ya  veo  que 
V.  no  cree  en  los  agiieros  pero  al  menos  V.  creera  en  las  profecias ; 
i  no  es  verdad,  Don  Jose  ?  j  O  !  si,  senora,  mucho,  sobre  todo  en 
las  de  Perogrullo. 

7.  I  Que  profecias  son  esas,  que  nunca  las  he  oido  ?  Senora, 
no  podre  relatarselas  a  V.  todas,  pero  le  dire  a  V.  algunas  si  V.  lo 
desea. 


LESSON  XLV,  257 

8.  Con  mucho  gusto,  hagame  Y.  el  favor.  Pues  bien,  oiga 
V.  :  "  Si  lloviere  habra  lodos."     "  El  que  tuviere  tendra." 

9.  i  Ah  !  ya  caigo  ;  es  por  esto  que  se  llama  cualquiera  verdad 
que  es  muy  notoria,  verdad  de  Perogrullo.  j  Vamos  !  aqui  viene 
Don  Enrique,  puede  ser  que  el  crea  en  algo,  porque  V.  no  cree 
en  nada. 

10.  A  los  pies  de  V.,  Dona  Anita. — Beso  a  Y.  la  mano  Don 
Enrique. 

11.  A  las  ordenes  de  Y.,  Don  Jose. — Bien  venido,  Don  Enri- 
que.— Aqui  tiene  Y.  a  Doiia  Anita  empenada  en  hacerme  super- 
sticioso. 

12.  g  Y  Y.  es  tambien  esceptico  ?  i  No  cree  Y.  en  sueiios,  en 
espiritus,  en  fisonomias  ?  e  en  que  cree  Y.,  Don  Enrique  ?  Yo, 
senorita,  soy  un  hombre  muy  credulo,  creo  en  todo,  creo  hasta 
en  las  mujeres. 

13.  Mil  gracias,  Don  Enrique  ;  yo  creia  que  la  sinceridad  esta- 
ba  siempre  de  parte  de  la  mujer  y  no  del  hombre,  pues  son  Yds. 
tod  OS  a  cual  mas  falso. — Seiiorita,  6  Y.  nos  hace  una  injusticia,  6 
yo  soy  una  excepcion  ;  pero  volviendo  a  lo  de  las  creencias,  con- 
fieso  de  buena  fe  que  soy  un  poco  supersticioso. — Me  alegro  mu- 
cho, de  ese  modo  me  ayudara  Y.  a  convertir  a  Don  Jose  que  no 
cree  en  nada. 

14.  Perdone  Y.,  senorita,  yo  creo  en  una  de  las  cosas  que  Y. 
ha  mencionado,  esto  es,  en  las  fisonomias. — j  Bien,  bien !  expli- 
quenos  Y.,  entonces,  su  significado. 

15.  El  que  tuviere  la  frente  ancha  tendra  los  ojos  debajo  de  la 
frente,  y  vivira  todos  los  dias  de  su  vida. — \  Por  Dios  !  Don  Jose, 
hable  Y.  formalmente. 

16.  Pues  bien,  con  toda  formalidad.  Todo  hombre  calvo  no 
tendra  pelo,  y  si  tuviere  alguno  no  sera  en  la  calva. 

17.  i  Ya  lo  ve  !  Y.  se  burla  de  todo,  y  no  cree  en  nada,  es  un 
esceptico  completo.  Defiendase  Y.,  amigo  Don  Jose,  6  quiza  es 
verdad  que  no  cree  Y.  en  nada.  Entonces  le  compadozco  a  Y.  de 
todo  corazon. 

18.  i  Hombre !  dejeme  Y.  en  paz,  y  guarde  Y.  su  compasion 
para  todas  esas  pobres  gentes  que  creen,  6  afectan  creer,  todas 
esas  ridiculeces  ;  yo  creo  lo  que  veo  ;  creo  lo  que  siento,  y  creo  lo 
que  mi  razon  me  aconseja  creer  ;  por  eso  creo  en  el  sol,  en  el  amor, 
en  Dios. — i  Yamos !  ahora  va  a  hacernos  creer  que  es  hombre  muy 
religioso. 

19.  Senor  Don  Jose,  esta  senorita  y  yo  tenemos  grandes  deseos 

19 


258  LESSON  XLV. 

de  aprender  el  Padre  nuestro  en  espanol ;  l  lo  sabe  V.  ?    No  sola- 
mente  lo  se,  sino  que  es  una  oracion  que  me  gusta  mucho. 

20.  I  Nos  hara  V.  el  favor  de  decirnosla  ?  Con  mucho  gusto, 
helo  aqui. 

21.  "  Padre  nuestro,  que  estas  en  los  cielos,  santificado  sea  tu 
nombre,  venga  a  nos  el  tu  reino.  Hagase  tu  voluntad,  asi  en  la 
tierra  como  en  el  eielo.  El  pan  nuestro  de  cada  dia  danoslo  hoy. 
Perdonanos  nuestras  deudas,  como  nosotros  perdonamos  a  nues- 
tros  deudores.  Y  no  nos  dejes  caer  en  tentacion.  Y  libranos  de 
mal.''     Amen. 

22.  Mil  gracias,  Don  Jose  ;  voy  a  aprenderlo  de  memoria  por- 
que  me  suena  muy  bien  en  espanol. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  At  what  time  does  the  sun  rise  at  New  York  in  the  month 
of  September  ?  The  sun  rose  here  this  morning  at  twenty-seven 
minutes  past  five  o'clock. 

2.  What  did  your  teacher  say  to  you  to-day  when  your  les- 
sons were  finished  ?  Nothing  to  me  in  particular  ;  he  spoke  to 
all  of  us  about  reading  good  books,  as  very  necessary  in  order  to 
acquire  the  love  of  truth  and  sincerity  in  all  our  actions. 

3.  Here  are  the  works  of  Francis  de  Quevedo ;  have  you  ever 
read  them  ?  Yes,  very  often  ;  and  I  very  much  admire  his  pro- 
found knowledge  of  the  human  heart. 

4.  He  is  also  somewhat  of  a  jester  ;  is  he  not  ?  Yes,  but  for 
a  very  wise  end  ;  he  shows  the  ridiculousness  of  belief  in  augu- 
ries, omens — for  instance,  the  flight  {vuelo)  of  crows,  &c. 

5.  What  do  you  think  of  his  prophecies  ?  The  only  end  of 
his  prophecies  seem  to  be  to  divert  his  readers,  telling  them  that 
all  bald  persons  have  no  hair,  or  if  they  should  have  any,  it  would 
not  be  on  the  bald  place. 

6.  Do  you  know  what  the  general  has  ordered  ?  He  has 
given  orders  that  all  soldiers  that  desert  shall  be  shot. 

7.  Do  you  pity  that  poor  soldier  who  is  to  be  shot  ?  I  did  not 
know  there  was  one  to  be  shot ;  what  crime  did  he  commit  ?  He 
deserted. 

8.  What  will  they  do  to  that  robber  if  they  find  him  ?  He 
will  be  shot. 

9.  Do  you  not  think  he  deserves  to  be  shot  ?  There  can  be 
no  doubt  of  it:  he  who  kills  a  man  must  die  by  the  hand  of 
man. 


LESSON  XLVL 


259 


10.  Are  there  still  superstitious  people  in  the  world  ?  Yes,  a 
great  many  ;  and  I  must  say,  that,  even  among  the  learned,  we 
find  a  large  number  whose  education  ought  to  lead  *  us  to  have 
a  higher  opinion  of  them. 

11.  Has  that  gentleman  yet  paid  you  the  money  he  owed  you 
such  a  long  time  ?  Not  yet ;  indeed  I  begin  to  fear  he  will  never 
pay  me. 

12.  If  he  should  not  pay  you  before  he  leaves  the  country,  com- 
pel him  to  do  so.     So  I  intend  to  do. 

13.  How  long  does  your  father  intend  to  remain  in  Germany  ? 
Perhaps  two  or  three  months  ;  but  should  he  remain  longer,  he 
will  write  for  me  to  go  to  him. 

14.  Welcome,  Mr.  Martinez !  how  long  have  you  been  in  town  ? 
Only  a  few  days ;  and  I  shall  return  home  as  soon  as  I  hear  from 
my  brother. 

15.  What  a  fine  forehead  that  young  lady  has  !  I  have  never 
seen  such  a  beautiful  countenance,  with  the  exception  of  that  of 
a  lady  whom  I  met  in  Spain  a  few  years  ago. 


LESSON    XLYI. 


Adivinar. 

To  guess. 

Acordar. 

To  agree,  to  tune. 

Acordarse. 

To  recollect,  to  remember. 

Colocar. 

To  lay,  to  place. 

Meter. 

To  put  in,  to  make  (noise). 

Peinar. 

To  comb. 

Picar. 

To  prick,  to  chop,  to  hash. 

Persistir. 

To  persist. 

Komper. 

To  break. 

Coger. 

To  take,  to  catch. 

Esconder. 

INTERJE 

To  hide,  to  conceal. 

CTIONS. 

lAy! 

Ay! 

iZape!                      Heaven  pre- 

lEal 

Cheer  up 

!  come, 

serve  us ! 

come! 

i  Victoria  I               Victory ' 

I  Eh  I 

Oh! 

ah! 

i  Como !                    How  ! 

* 

Deberia 

hacernos. 

260 


LESSON  XL  VI. 


iHuy! 

I  Ox! 

iSus! 

iUf  (or  huf)! 

I  Hola ! 

iTate! 

iCa! 

i  Viva ! 


Whew! 
Gret  you  gone ! 
Come !  come ! 
Ugh! 
Halloa ! 
Take  care  ! 
Pshaw  ! 
Hurrah ! 


iDale!  Go! 

i  Que  horror  !    O  horror ! 


Ah^. 

Cambio. 

Alfiler. 

Atlantico. 

Exito. 

Buen  exito. 

Cable. 

Peine. 

Presidente. 

Ruido. 

Chasco. 

Patio. 

Tratado. 

Dolor. 

Asombro. 

Maullido. 

Gato. 


j  Anda ! 
i  Calle ! 

i  Chito   (or  chi- 
ton) ! 
j  Diantre ! 

i  Cuidado ! 

i  Dios  nos  libre ! 

i  Vamos ! 
i  Vuelta ! 


Go!  go  away! 
Strange ! 
Hush! 

The  deuce ! 
^  Look  out ! 
(  Take  care ! 
Heaven  pre- 
serve us ! 
Come ! 
Turn    about 
{or  round) ! 


Finalmente. 

Finally. 

Llevar  a  cabo. 

To  accomplish. 

Llevarse  chasco. 

To  be  disappointed. 

Cabal. 

Just,  exact. 

Fresco. 

Cool,  fresh. 

Listo. 

Ready,  quick. 

Restante. 

Remaining,  remainder. 

Telegrafico. 

Telegraphic. 

Extraordinario. 

Extraordinary. 

Dichoso. 

Happy. 

Air. 

Change. 

Pin. 

Atlantic. 

Result. 

Success. 

Cable. 

Comb. 

President. 

Noise. 

Disappointment. 

Yard,  pit  (theatre). 

Treaty,  treatise. 

Pain,  grief. 

Amazement. 

Mewing. 

Cat. 


Camisa. 

Cuenta. 

Empresa. 

Cualidad. 

Austria. 

Palangana. 

Prusia. 

Procesion. 

Constancia. 

Prueba. 

Tranquilidad. 

Victoria. 

Gaceta. 


Shirt,  chemise. 

Account 

Enterprise. 

Quality. 

Austria. 

Wash-basin, 
wash-bowl. 

Prussia. 

Procession. 

Constancy. 

Proof,  trial. 

Tranquillity. 

Victory. 

Gazette,    news- 
paper. 


LESSON  XL  VI. 


COMPOSITION. 

Ah  !  how  unfortunate  I 

Woe  is  me ! 

Ah  !  how  sad ! 

Ha !  rascal ! 

Ah !  what  joy  ! 

Oh !  wonder ! 

Let  me  get  hold  of  him  I 

Oh  !  I  shall  see  you  again ! 

Pshaw !  don't  talk  that  way  I 

Whew !  I  have  burned  myself  with 
the  cigarette! 

Oh !  how  warm  it,  is  I 

Come  to  work ! 

Take  care !  don't  go  that  way ;  I  see 
a  man  hiding ! 

Heaven  preserve  us!  that  con- 
founded cat  will  not  let  me  sleep 
with  its  mewing ! 

That's  all,  eh !  I  knew  that  much 
myself. 

Hurrah  for  liberty ! 

Did  you  ever  hear  such  children? 
what  a  noise  they  make  I 

Halloa  !  Mr.  Francis  !  it  is  good  for 
sore  eyes  to  see  you  ! 

How  can  I  tell  ? 

The  account  is  exact  (correct). 

I  hope  not  to  be  disappointed,  and 
that  I  shall  carry  out  my  under- 
taking. 

EXPLANATION. 

232.  Intekjectioks  are  words  which  serve  to  express  the 
different  emotions  and  affections  of  the  soul.  There  should 
be  a  separate  interjection  to  express  each  passion  or  emotion ; 
but  this  not  being  the  case,  we  often  use  the  same  ones  to  ex- 
press joy,  grief,  affright,  astonishment,  mockery,  anger,  &c., 
the  signification  of  each  interjection  changing  according  to 
the  voice,  gesture,  and  manner  of  the  speaker. 

The  exclamations  that  are  properly  called  interjections  in 
Spanish,  inasmuch  as  they  have  no  other  use,  and  because 


Ah  !  que  desgracia ! 

Ay  de  mi ! 

Oh !  dolor ! 

Ah !  bribon  ! 

Ah  !  que  alegria ! 

Oh !  asombro ! 

Ay,  si  le  cojo ! 

Oh !  ya  nos  veremos  ! 
I  Bah  !  no  hables  de  esa  manera ! 
i  Huy  !  me  queme  con  el  cigarrillo  ! 

;  Uf !  que  calorazo ! 

i  Ea !  a  tr  aba  jar  ! 

i  Tate  !  tate  !  no  pase  V.  por  ahi,  que 

veo  un  horabre  escondido ! 
;  Zape  !  ese  gatazo  no  me  deja  dor- 

mir  con  sus  maullidos  ! 

i  Toma !  toma  !  eso  ya  lo  sabia  yo. 

;  Viva  la  libertad  ! 

I  Diantre  de  muchachos !  y  que  rui- 

do  meten ! 
I  Hola  !  D.  Francisco  !  dichosos  los 

ojos  que  lo  ven  a  V ! 
I  Que  me  se  yo  ? 
La  cuenta  estd  cabal. 
Espero  no  Uevarme  chasco,  y  que 

llevare  a  cabo  mi  empresa. 


262  LESSON  XL  VI, 

they  consist  of  only  one  word,  are  the  following :  Ah,  ay,  bah, 
ca,  eh,  huy,  oh,  ox,  sus,  uf,  ea,  hola,  ojald,  tate,  zape,  and  a  few 
others. 

Ah,  ay  and  oh  are  used  indijfferently  to  express  pain,  joy, 
mockery,  surprise,  scorn,  anger,  or  admiration  ;  as. 


Ah  !  que  desgracia  I 

Ay  de  mi ! 

Oh  !  dolor ! 

Ah  !  bribon  ! 

Ah  I  que  alegria  I 

Oh  !  asombro ! 

Ah  !  que  necio  ! 

Ay  si  le  cojo  ! 

Oh  !  j&  nos  veremos  !  &c. 


Ah  !  what  misfortune  ! 

Woe  is  me ! 

Ah  !  how  sad  I 

Ha !  rascal ! 

Oh  !  what  joy  I 

Oh !  wonder ! 

Ah  !  what  a  fool ! 

Let  me  get  hold  of  him  ! 

Oh  !  I  shall  see  you  again  ! 


233.  /  Bah  I  expresses  displeasure,  and  sometimes  wonder 
and  admiration.  /  Bh  I  besides  being  used  to  attract  the  at- 
tention, is  often  employed  in  the  sense  of  alas !  /  Sus  I  serves 
only  to  encourage.  /  Huy  !  is  an  exclamation  expressive  of 
pain.  /  Ea  !  serves  to  encourage,  and  sometimes  to  call  the 
attention.  We  use  /  hola  !  to  call  our  inferiors,  and  intimate 
friends,  and  to  manifest  joy  and  surprise.  /  Tate  I  expresses 
surprise,  and  serves  to  warn  any  one  of  some  danger.  /  Ojald  ! 
serves  to  manifest  ardent  desire  for  something. 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION.      * 

1.  i  Ea !  ea !  muchachos,  arriba !  que  ya  es  hora  de  levan- 
tarse. — i  Pues  que  hora  es,  papa  ?  Ya  son  las  seis  y  quiero  que  os 
vistais,  laveis  y  tomeis  el  cafe  prontito,  para  ir  a  tomar  el  aire 
fresco  de  la  manana  en  la  plaza  de  Madison. 

2.  I  Sus !  arriba !  y  el  que  se  me  presente  primero  listo  ira  a 
comprarme  el  Heraldo  y  tendra  el  centavo  del  cambio. — Elena, 
ponme  agua  para  lavarme. — No,  Elena,  no  ayudes  a  Alejandro 
que  ese  ya  puede  vestirse  solo,  ayuda  a  Carlotita  y  a  Manolito. 

3.  Luisa,  dame  mis  zapatos  y  mis  medias. — Biiscalos  tii  mis- 
mo,  yo  no  voy  a  ayudarte  para  que  te  vistas  antes  que  yo. 

4.  i  Cuidado !  i  no  veis  que  vais  a  romper  esa  palangana  ? 
Es  este  Manuel  que  todavia  no  se  ha  puesto  mas  que  una  media 
y  un  zapato  y  se  quiere  lavar  antes  que  yo,  que  me  he  puesto  ya 
la  camisa,  los  zapatos  y  el  pantalon. 


LESSON  XL  VI.  '  263 

5.  i  Ay  !  i  ay  !— ^  Que  es  eso,  Luisa  ?  Me  he  picado  con  el  al- 
filer  que  estaba  poniendo  en  mi  vestido. 

6.  I  En  donde  esta  el  jabon  ?    Que  me  se  yo. 

7.  I  Carlota,  me  quieres  dar  el  peine,  6  te  vas  a  estar  peinando 
todo  el  dia  ?    Dejame  en  paz,  ahora  acabo  de  principiar. 

8.  Mama,  mire  V.  que  Alejandro  no  me  deja  ayudar  a  vestir 
a  Manuel,     l  Mama,  donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ? 

9.  Papa,  ya  estoy  listo,  deme  V.  el  dinero  para  comprar  el 
Heraldo. — No,  no,  papa ;  mire  V.  que  se  ha  puesto  el  sombrero 
sin  peinarse. 

10.  i  Como !  eso  no,  Alejandro,  no  se  sale  a  la  calle  sin  pei- 
narse.— Papa,  ya  estoy  listo. — Y  yo. — Y  yo. 

11.  I  Chiton  !  \  Diantre  de  muchachos  y  que  ruido  meten  ! 
Aqui  teneis  diez  centavos,  cuatro  para  el  Heraldo  y  de  los  seis 
restantes  uno  para  cada  uno,  cuenta  cabal,  me  traeis  el  Heraldo 
y  despues  os  vais  a  la  plaza  y  no  volvais,  a  lo  menos  en  un  par 
de  horas. 

12.  Margarita,  ahora  que  tenemos  tranquilidad  traeme  la  pipa, 
antes  de  ponerme  a  escribir,  fumare  un  poco  y  leere  las  noticias 
en  el  patio  al  fresco. 

13.  i  Hola !  grandes  noticias !  I  Que  hay  de  nuevo  ?  El  Great 
Eastern  ha  llegado,  y  se  dice  que  el  gran  cable  telegrafico  ha  sido 
finalmente  colocado,  uniendo  asi  la  Europa  y  la  America. 

14.  i  Es  posible  !  entonces  pronto  tendremos  noticias  todos  los 
dias  de  Europa. — Asi  lo  espero,  pero  no  debemos  estar  muy  segu- 
ros  de  ello,  porque  ya  te  acordaras  del  chasco  que  llevamos  aiios 
pasados. 

15.  i  Ah  !  si,  ya  me  acuerdo ;  en  1858,  cuando  se  celebro  el  exi- 
to  del  cable  telegrafico  con  aquella  grande  procesion,  y  se  vendia 
por  la  calle  la  gaceta  extraordinaria  con  el  parte  telegrafico  de  la 
Reina  Victoria  al  Presidente  de  los  Estados  Unidos.~Espero  que 
no  nos  llevemos  ahora  el  misrao  chasco. 

16.  i  i  La  extraordinaria ! !  I  i  La  gaceta  extraordinaria  I !  j  Eh  I 
muchacho,  aqui,  aqui. 

17.  I  Cuanto  vale  ?    Diez  centavos. 

18.  I  Victoria  !  Viva  !  Viva  !  i  Que  dice  de  nuevo  ?  El  ca- 
ble del  Atlantico  ha  tenido  buen  exito,  el  primer  parte  recibido 
por  el  es  el  tratado  de  paz  entre  el  Austria  y  la  Prusia. 

19.  Esta  es  una  prueba  mas  de  lo  que  puede  llevar  a  cabo  el 
hombre,  si  tiene  constancia  y  persiste  en  una  empresa. — i  Cree  V. 
que  yo  tambien  tendre  buen  exito  en  mi  empresa  ? 


264:  LESSON  XLVL 

20.  i  Que  empresa  es  esa  ?  i  Como  !  e  no  la  adivina  V.  ?  La 
empresa  de  aprender  el  espanol. 

21.  i  Ah  !  No  dudo  que  Y.  hablara  espanol  si  persiste  y  tiene 
constancia ;  puesto  que  con  estas  cualidades  se  ha  logrado  que 
hable  el  cable  del  Atlantico. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Can  you  tell  me  what  kind  of  weather  we  shall  have  to- 
morrow ?  Oh,  what  a  question  !  Do  you  suppose  that  I  can  de- 
cide as  to  the  weather  we  shall  have  before  it  comes  ? 

2.  Did  the  pianist  say  he  would  come  to  tune  the  piano  ?  He 
said  he  would  come  to-morrow,  but  that  he  could  not  come  to- 
day. 

3.  Have  you  seen  that  the  Atlantic  telegraphic  cable  is  laid 
at  last  ?  Yes  ;  I  am  glad  to  see  that  the  undertaking  has  been  so 
successful. 

4.  Do  you  know  who  sent  the  first  dispatch  by  the  cable  ?  I 
am  not  sure ;  but  I  remember  that  the  first,  at  the  time  of  the 
former  cable,  in  1858,  was  that  sent  by  the  President  of  the  United 
States  to  the  Queen  of  England. 

5.  What  was  the  occasion  for  laying  a  second  cable  ?  Ah, 
come  now !  do  you  not  know  that  the  first  one,  having  broken 
shortly  after  it  was  laid,  became  entirely  useless  (inutil)  ? 

6.  Have  you  seen  the  news  to-day  by  Atlantic  telegraph  ? 
No ;  what  is  the  news  ?  That  a  treaty  of  x>eace  has  been  signed 
(celebrar)  between  Prussia  and  Austria. 

7.  Charles,  go  and  look  for  the  comb,  where  you  put  it  when 
you  finished  with  it.  I  have  not  seen  it  since  Henry  was  using 
it ;  and  even  if  I  had,  I  should  not  tell  you  where  it  is. 

8.  Ah,  you  little  rogue !  there,  you  have  broken  the  wash- 
basin. It  is  not  my  fault,  Henry  wanted  it  first,  and  I  had  al- 
ready commenced  to  wash  myself  ;  but  he  persisted  and  wished 
to  take  it  from  me.* 

9.  O  horror  !  just  see  what  a  state  his  hair  (pelo)  is  in  !  Go 
this  instant  and  get  the  comb  and  comb  your  hair  before  you  dare 
to  appear  before  me. 

10.  Have  you  a  pin  to  give  me  ?  Yes,  here  is  a  paper  of  pins ; 
take  all  you  want  and  give  me  back  the  rest. 

11.  Did  you  know  your  lessons  well  this  morning  ?   Yes,  very 

♦  Persistio  en  quitarmela. 


LESSON  XLVL  265 

well,  and  the  proof  is  that  papa  allowed  me  to  go  to  see  the  pro- 
cession. 

12.  Why  did  you  kill  that  poor  little  fly  ?  Have  I  not  told 
you  many  times  that  I  don't  wish  you  to  catch  or  kill  flies  ? 

13.  Is  that  bread  fresh  ?  Yes,  sir,  the  baker  brought  it  only  a 
few  minutes  ago. 

14.  We  were  to  have  gone  to  the  yard  to  play  at  twelve  o'clock. 
You  may  go  now  ;  but  do  not  make  much  noise. 

15.  Where  were  you  going  when  I  met  you  ?  We  were  com- 
ing home  to  dine. 

16.  Has  the  shoemaker  sent  you  his  bill  ?  Yes,  but  it  is  not 
"correct. 

17.  Has  not  your  uncle  written  to  you  since  he  went  away  ? 
He  has  sent  several  telegraphic  dispatches  to  my  father  on  busi- 
ness ;  but  he  has  not  written  to  us  once  {una  sola  vez). 

18.  Is  not  there  to  be  a  new  opera  to-night  ?  No  ;  but  I  un- 
derstand there  is  to  be  a  new  play  (comedia)  at  the  theatre. 

19.  That  is  nothing  extraordinary  ;  there  are  new  pieces  very 
often  now. 

20.  If  Louisa  were  a  little  taller  would  not  she  be  handsomer 
than  Jane  ?    She  would  be  at  least  quite  as  handsome, 

21.  Would  you  desire  to  have  the  window  open  ?  I  think  it 
would  be  much  cooler  if  it  were  open. 

22.  Would  you  not  like  me  to  repeat  to  you  that  story  I  told 
you  the  other  day  ?  If  you  had  time  I  should  be  much  obliged 
to  you  for  telling  it  to  me  once  more. 

23.  Would  not  quietness  be  much  better  for  that  gentleman 
than  so  much  noise  ?    He  could  not  live  without  noise. 

24.  Might  you  not  have  broken  your  arm  or  your  leg  when 
you  fell  out  of  your  carriage  ?    Yes,  if  I  had  not  taken  care. 

25.  If  I  had  wanted  money  when  I  was  in  the  country  would 
you  not  have  brought  me  some  ?  If  I  could  have  gotten  {conse- 
guir)  it  I  would. 

26.  Would  not  your  aunt  have  been  disappointed  if  she  had 
not  been  in  time  to  take  the  three  o'clock  train  ?  She  would  have 
been  terribly  disappointed,  for  she  was  going  to  spend  the  day  at 
a  friend's,  about  ten  miles  out  of  town. 


266 


LESSON  XLVII. 


LESSON    XLVII. 


Acompanar. 

To  accompany. 

Cargar. 

To  load,  to  charge. 

Curar. 

To  cure,  to  attend  (as  a  physi- 

cian). 

Danar. 

To  injure,  to  damage. 

Deleitar. 

To  delight. 

Incomodar. 

To  incommode. 

Incomodarse. 

To  get  out  of  temper. 

Equivocar. 

To  mistake. 

Evitar. 

To  avoid,  to  shun. 

Instruir. 

To  instruct. 

Ocupar. 

To  occupy. 

Padecer. 

To  suffer. 

Solicitar. 

To  solicit,  to  apply  for,  to  urge. 

Dimes  y  diretes. 

Ifs  and  ands. 

El  no  se  que. 

An  inexplicable  something. 

Dolor  de  cabeza. 

Headache. 

Masculino. 

Masculine. 

Amable. 

Amiable. 

A^adable. 

Agreeable. 

Extranjero. 

Foreign,  foreigner. 

Interesante. 

Interesting. 

Moribundo. 

Dying. 

Valiente. 

Valiant,  arrant. 

Femenino. 

Feminine. 

Acento.         Accent. 

Alma.                       Soul. 

Bolsillo.        Purse. 

Comedia.                 Comedy. 

Autor.            Author. 

Vara.                        Rod,  yard 

Esfuerzo.       Effort,  bravery. 

{measure). 

Efecto.           Effect. 

Libra.                       Pound. 

Fastidio.       Unease,  uneasiness. 

Manteca,  or  Man-  Butter. 

Ciudadano.  Citizen. 

tequilla.* 

Hospital.       Hospital. 

Calidad.                    Quality. 

In  the  Americas  manteca  is  lard,  and  mantequilla,  butter. 


LESSON  XLVII. 


267 


Metodo. 

Method. 

Cantid 

Trabajo. 

Labor,  work. 

Napoles. 

Naples. 

Eeal. 

Real. 

Sonido. 

Sound. 

Chelin. 

Shilling. 

COMPOSITION. 

Quantity. 


El  porqu6  de  todas  las  cosas. 

Los  ayes  del  moribundo. 

Los  dimes  y  diretes. 

El  cuando. 

El  no  se  que. 

El  tener  amigos  no  dana. 

Hay  hombres  de  un  saber  extraor- 

dinario. 
Una  nada  le  incomoda. 
La  const ancia  y  el  trabajo  son  nece- 

sarios  al  hombre  en  todas  sus  em- 

presas. 
La  America  es  mayor  que  la  Europa. 
La  Francia  es  una  nacion  muy  po- 

blada. 
El  clima  de  Espana. 
Los  esf uerzos  de  la  Espafla,  * 
Cuatro  pesos  la  vara. 
Dos  reales  la  libra. 
Treinta  centavos  la  docena. 
Dos  veces  al  dia. 
La  fe,  la  esperanza  y  la  caridad. 
El  Senor  de  Vargas  tiene  tres  ninos. 
La  Senora  Martinez  esmuyprudente. 
Ella  me  dio  la  mano. 
Puso  la  mano  en  el  bolsillo. 
Muchos   caballeros    solicitaron  mi 

mano. 
El  caballero  a  quien  vio  V.  ayer  en 

mi  casa. 


The  why  and  the  wherefore  of  all 
things. 

The  groans  of  the  dying. 

The  ifs  and  ands. 

The  time. 

I  know  not  what. 

It  is  hurtful  to  no  one  to  have 
friends. 

There  are  men  of  extraordinary 
knowledge. 

A  mere  nothing  puts  him  out. 

Constancy  and  labor  are  necessary 
for  mankind  in  all  their  enter- 
prises (or  undertakings). 

America  is  larger  than  Europe. 

France  is  a  very  populous  nation. 

The  climate  of  Spain. 

The  efforts  of  Spain. 

Four  dollars  a  yard. 

Two  reales  a  pound. 

Thirty  cents  a  dozen. 

Twice  a  day. 

Faith,  hope,  and  charity. 

Mr.  Vargas  has  three  children. 

Mrs.  Martinez  is  very  prudent. 

She  shook  hands  with  me. 

He  put  his  hand  in  his  pocket. 

Many  gentlemen  have  solicited  my 
hand. 

The  gentleman  whom  you  saw  yes- 
terday in  my  house. 


*  The  article  is  here  used  with  the  name  of  a  country  even  though 
following  the  preposition  (see  §  236),  as  the  noun  is  personified. 


268  LESSON  XLVIL 

EXPLANATION. 

234.  Use  of  the  Article. — Any  of  the  parts  of  speech, 
and  sometimes  even  whole  sentences,  may  be  used  as  nouns, 
and  as  such  may  take  the  article,  as  has  just  been  observed 
in  the  Composition  of  the  present  lesson,  in  which  we  see 
examples  of  verbs,  adverbs,  and  interjections  preceded  by  the 
article,  and  treated  in  every  respect  as  substantives. 

235.  The  defi^^ite  article  is  to  be  used  before  all  ab- 
stract nouns,  taken  in  a  general  sense,  and  in  the  full  extent 
of  their  signification ;  as. 

La  constancia  y  e?  trabajo  son  nece-    Constancy  and  labor  are  necessary 
sarios  al  hombre  en  todas  sus  em-       to  mankind  in  all  undertakings. 
presas. 

236.  The  article  is  used  before  the  names  of  the  four  parts 
of  the  globe  :  before  the  names  of  empires,  kingdoms,  prov- 
inces, and  countries  ;  and  before  the  four  seasons  of  the  year, 
and  the  days  of  the  week  ;  as. 


La  America  es  mayor  que  la  Europa. 
La  Francia  es  una  nacion  muy  po- 

blada. 
El  invierno  en  el  Sur  es  mas  agra- 

dable  que  el  verano. 
Yo  ire  a  visitarle  k  Y.  el  lunes. 


America  is  larger  than  Europe. 
France  is  a  very  populous  nation. 

The  winter  in  the  South  is  more 

agreeable  than  the  summer. 
I  shall  come  to  see  you  Monday. 


But  it  is  omitted  before  the  names  of  kingdoms,  provinces, 
&c.,  when  they  are  preceded  by  a  preposition  ;  unless  they  be 
personified,  as  has  been  observed  in  Lesson  XXX. ;  as. 

El  clima  de  Espafta.  I  The  climate  of  Spain. 

Los  esfuerzos  de  la  Espafla.  \  The  bravery  of  Spain. 

Kingdoms  bearing  the  same  name  as  their  capitals  do  not 
admit  the  article  ;  as,  Ndpoles^  Naples. 

237.  Nouns  of  measure,  weight,  &c.,  when  preceded  by 
the  indefinite  article  in  English,  as  an  equivalent  to  each^  re- 
quire the  article ;  as, 


Cuatro  pesos  la  vara, 
Dos  reales  la  libra, 
Treinta  centavos  la  docena, 
Dos  veces  al  dia. 


Four  dollars  a  yard. 
Two  reales  a  pound. 
Thirty  cents  a  dozen. 
Twice  a  day. 


LUSSOJ^  XL  VII. 


269 


If  the  preposition  por  be  used,  we  omit  the  article ;  as, 
cuatro  pesos  por  vara^  &c. 

238.  The  article  is  generally  repeated  before  every  noun 
enumerated,  especially  if  they  differ  in  gender  ;  as. 

La  fe,  la  esperanza  y  la  caridad.       I  Faith,  hope  and  charity. 
Los  dias  y  las  noches.  I  The  days  and  nights. 

239.  The  definite  article  is  used  before  nouns  indicating 
rank,  office,  profession  or  titles  of  persons,  when  these  are 
spoken  of,  but  not  when  spoken  to  ;  as. 

El  General  Sheridan  es  valiente.        General  Sheridan  is  brave. 
El  Senor  De  Vargas  tiene  tres  ninos. 
La  Seiiora  Martinez,  es  muy  pru- 
dente. 


Mr.  De  Vargas  has  three  children. 
Mrs.  Martinez  is  very  prudent. 


Puso  la  mano  en  el  bolsillo. 


240.  The  definite  article  is  used  instead  of  the  possessive 
pronoun  when  the  latter  refers  to  parts  of  our  own  body ; 
as. 

Me  he  cortado  la  mano,  1 1  have  cut  my  hand. 

Me  duele  la  cabeza.  \  My  head  aches. 

This  applies  even  to  parts  of  the  body  of  other  persons  ;  as, 
Ella  me  dio  la  mano.  She  gave  me  her  hand  (or  shook 

hands  with  me). 
He  put  his  hand  in  his  pocket. 

But  the  pronoun  must  be  used  when  the  use  of  the  article 
would  occasion  ambiguity ;  as, 

Muchos   caballeros    solicitaron   mi  |  Many  gentlemen  solicited  my  hand, 
mano.  j 

241.  The  definite  article  is  also  employed,  as  in  English, 
before  nouns  taken  in  a  particular  or  definite  sense  ;  as. 

El  caballero  a  quien  vio  V.  ayer  en  I  The  gentleman  whom  you  saw  yes- 
mi  casa.  I      terday  in  my  house. 

We  restrain  ourselves  from  adding  the  many  other  rules 
which  we  might  give,  if  they  were  not  subject  to  numerous 
exceptions,  and,  especially,  if  we  were  not  of  the  opinion  that 
practice  and  reading  are  of  more  value  to  the  student  than 
any  rules  as  to  when  to  employ  and  when  to  omit  the 
article. 


270  LESSON  XLVIL 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Cual  de  las  partes  del  mundo  es  la  mayor  ?  El  Asia  es 
la  mayor. 

2.  e  Es  Asia  nombre  masculino  ?    No,  senor,  es  femenino. 

3.  Entonces,  l  por  que  le  pone  V.  el  articulo  masculino  ?  Por 
evitar  el  mal  sonido  que  resultaria  de  poner  dos  aes  juntas. 

4.  I  Luego,  V.  pone  siempre  el  articulo  masculino  delante  de 
todo  nombre  femenino  que  empieza  por  a  ?  No,  senor  ;  esto  solo 
sucede  en  singular,  y  cuando  sobre  dicha  vocal  carga  el  acento 
de  la  palabra. 

5.  I  Ha  leido  V.  el  "  Si  de  las  Ninas  "  de  Moratin  ?  Si,"  senor, 
lo  lei  hace  muchos  anos  ;  pero  a  mi  me  gusta  mas  la  "  Comedia 
Nueva  "  del  mismo  autor. 

6.  Que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  su  nueva  vecinita  ?  Dicen  que  es 
muy  bonita. — En  efecto  lo  es ;  pero  a  mi  no  me  gusta,  porque 
anda  siempre  en  dimes  y  diretes,  y  una  nada  la  incomoda. 

7.  I  Cuales  son  las  virtudes  del  alma  ?  La  fe,  la  esperanza  y 
la  caridad. 

8.  I  Tiene  V.  alguna  cosa  interesante  que  decirme  hoy  ?    Mu- 

chisimas  interesantisimas  e  importantisimas para  practi- 

car  y  aprender  el  espanol. 

9.  I  Uf !  ya  va  Y.  a  principiar  con  sus  adverbios,  preposicio- 
nes  y  articulos ;  va  V.  a  decirme,  por  supuesto,  que  estas  partes 
de  la  oracion  unas  veces  se  ponen  antes  las  unas  que  las  otras,  y 
vice  versa ;  que  las  unas  gobiernan  a  las  otras  y  las  gobernadas 
gobiernan  a  su  vez  a  otras,  que  se  acuerden  6  no  entre  si.  i  Cree 
V.  que  todo  eso  sera  interesante  para  mi  con  el  fastidio  que  tengo, 
y  el  dolor  de  cabeza  que  padezco  ?  i  Calle  !  entonces,  caballerito, 
V.  ha  equivocado  la  casa. 

10.  i  Que  quiere  V.  decir  con  eso  de  equivocar  la  casa  ?  Quiero 
decir  que,  en  lugar  de  venir  a  la  clase,  debio  V.  ir  hoy  al  hospital 
y  de  alii  al  teatro. 

11.  I  Para  que  ?  Para  que  le  curasen  en  una  parte  de  sus  do- 
lores  y  en  la  otra  del  fastidio. 

12.  Si;  pero,  Seiior  Profesor,  yo  siempre  creia  que  el  mejor 
metodo  de  ensenanza  es  aquel  que  "instruye  deleitando."  V. 
tiene  mil  razones,  pero  ha  olvidado  una  pequena  circunstancia 
que  requiere  su  metodo. 

13.  I  Y  cual  es  esa  circunstancia  ?  Que  no  puede  aplicarse 
sino  con  aquellos  discipulos  que  se  deleitan  aprendiendo. 


LESSON  XL  VIL  271 

14.  Y  ahora  volviendo  al  articulo. — Seiior  Profesor,  V.  me 
excusara,  pero  no  volvamos  al  articulo  porque  no  puedo  que- 
darme  mas  aqui  hoy. 

15.  I  Como  es  eso  ?  el  tiempo  de  la  leccion  no  ha  acabado 
todavia. — Y.  tiene  razon ;  pero  hoy  es  necesario  que  me  vaya 
temprano,  porque  he  prometido  acompanar  a  unas  senoritas  a 
la  opera. 

16.  i  Oh !  entonces  es  necesario  no  faltar  a  su  palabra. — Senor 
Profesor,  buenas  noches  (este  buen  senor  me  fastidia  con  sus  ex- 
plicaciones). — Diviertase  V.  mucho,  Senor  Don  Pepito  (este  ama- 
ble  joven  aprendera  espanol,  para  el  tiempo  que  yo  compre  una 
casa  en  la  Quinta  Avenida,  enseiiandolo). 

EXERCISE. 

1.  If  I  should  come  for  you  this  evening,  would  you  come 
with  me  to  see  the  Martinez  family  ?  I  should,  with  great  pleas- 
ure, if  Charlotte  would  accompany  us. 

2.  How  well  does  that  lady  speak  French  ?  They  say  she 
speaks  it  very  correctly,  though  with  a  slightly  foreign  accent. 

3.  Might  he  not  be  cured  if  he  called  in  a  good  physician  ? 
He  is  of  the  opinion  that  physicians  do  more  injury  than  good 
to  mankind. 

4.  Do  you  know  anything  of  the  author  of  that  play  ?  Yes, 
I  have  read  or  seen  all  his  plays ;  they  are  very  interesting,  and 
delighted  me  exceedingly. 

5.  What  is  death  ?    The  separation  of  soul  and  body. 

6.  Can  one  be  a  citizen  of  the  United  States  without  having 
been  born  (nacer)  in  the  country  ?  Yes,  after  having  resided  in 
the  United  States  a  certain  number  of  years  one  may  become  a 
citizen. 

7.  Where  is  that  poor  man  going  ?  To  the  hospital ;  he  has 
broken  his  leg. 

8.  Pardon  me,  I  think  you  are  mistaken ;  it  is  rather  his  arm 
that  is  broken ;  for  if  his  leg  were  broken  he  could  not  walk. 

9.  Do  you  remember  the  name  of  the  principal  city  of 
Naples  ?  Yes,  the  name  of  the  principal  city  is  that  of  the 
kingdom  also. 

10.  Did  you  shake  hands  with  that  young  lady  ?  Yes,  as  soon 
as  she  saw  me  she  came  toward  me  and  gave  me  her  hand. 

11.  Is  that  cloth  (pano)  sold  very  high  ?  Not  very;  it  costs 
only  three  dollars  a  yard. 


272 


LESSON  XL  VII L 


12.  How  often  dc  you  take  your  Spanish  lessons  ?  Twice  a 
week. 

13.  Would  you  not  learn  faster  if  you  took  a  lesson  every 
other  day  (un  dia  si  y  otro  no)  ?  My  teacher  says  I  should ; 
but  I  have  not  time  to  take  lessons  so  often. 

14.  Would  you  like  the  summer  to  return  again  ?  No,  thank 
you,  I  am  glad  it  is  past,  for  I  assure  you  I  have  suif ered  enough 
with  the  heat. 

15.  How  sad  it  is  on  the  field  of  battle  {campo  de  batalld)  to 
hear  the  groans  of  the  dying !  Yes ;  and,  notwithstanding,  men 
will  persist  in  killing  each  other  for  a  foot*  of  ground  (terreno). 

16.  How  much  a  pound  is  butter  ?  Thirty  cents  for  one  kind, 
and  forty  cents  a  pound  for  the  best. 

17.  Do  you  think  it  can  injure  any  one  to  have  friends  ?  No, 
it  can  injure  nobody  to  have  friends. 

18.  Is  not  that  man  very  amiable  and  agreeable  ?  Very  rarely, 
for  a  mere  nothing  irritates  him. 

19.  Are  there  many  learned  men  in  that  country  ?  There  have 
been,  and  there  are  at  present  men  of  extraordinary  learning. 

20.  Which  are  the  three  principal  virtues  ?  Faith,  hope,  and 
charity. 

21.  Is  Miss  Cabargas  married  yet  ?  Not  yet,  although  a  large 
number  of  gentlemen  have  solicited  her  hand. 

22.  I  suppose  you  have  all  read  some  Spanish  comedies  ?  Sev- 
eral Spanish  and  some  French  comedies,  by  the  best  dramatists. 

23.  Which  of  all  the  French  comedies  that  you  have  read  do 
you  like  best  ?    Those  of  Moliere. 


LESSON    XLVIII. 


Afirmar. 

Afligir. 

Admitir. 

Atreverse. 

Criticar. 

Condescender. 

Convencer. 

Declarar. 


To  affirm. 

To  afflict. 

To  admit,  to  accept. 

To  dare. 

To  criticise. 

To  condescend,  to  consent. 

To  convince. 

To  declare. 


*  Palmo  (literally  a  span). 


LESSON  XLVIIL 


273 


Depender. 

To  depend. 

Disponer. 

To  dispose,  to  arrange. 

Diferenciar. 

To  differ. 

Edificar. 

To  edify,  to  build. 

Entretenerse. 

To  amuse. 

Fabricar. 

To    construct,    to    make,    to 

build. 

Suponer. 

To  suppose. 

Nombrar. 

To  name,  to  appoint. 

Influir. 

To  influence,  to  affect. 

Ocultar. 

To  conceal,  to  hide. 

Observar. 

To  observe. 

Obedecer. 

To  obey. 

Proporcionar. 

To  proportion,  to  procure,  to 

offer,  to  afford. 

Pretender. 

To  pretend,  to  lay  claim  to,  to 

aspire  to,  to  sue  for. 

Publicar. 

To  publish. 

Quejarse. 

To  complain,  to  moan. 

Regularizar. 

To  regulate. 

Refiexionar. 

To  reflect. 

Ridiculizar. 

To  ridicule. 

Reformar. 

To  reform. 

Lo  que  se  decir. 

What  I  can  say. 

Sin  que  Y.  me  lo  diga. 

Without  your  telling  me. 

Yolver  a  las  andadas. 

To  do  so  again,  to  return  to 

(one's)  old  habits. 

Para  mi  tengo. 

In  my  opinion. 

A  trueque. 

On  condition. 

Sin  embargo. 

Nevertheless,     notwithstand- 

ing. 

Candidamente. 

Candidly. 

De  modo. 

In  such  a  manner,  that,  so 

that,  therefore. 

i  Bravo ! 

Very  good !    Bravo  I 

Bruto. 

Brutish. 

Cierto. 

Certain. 

Aereo. 

Airy,  aerial. 

Angelical. 

Angelic,  angelical. 

20 

274 


LESSON  XL  V III. 


Ideal. 

Ideal. 

Interior. 

Interior. 

Incompleto. 

Incomplete. 

Imperfecto. 

Imperfect. 

Exterior. 

Exterior. 

Extrano. 

Strange. 

Igual. 

Equal. 

Humano. 

Human. 

Positivo. 

Positive. 

Real. 

Heal,  royal. 

Arquitecto. 

Architect. 

Carrera. 

Career. 

Anciano. 

Old  man. 

Desgracia. 

Misfortune. 

Ciego. 

Blind. 

Diferencia. 

Difference. 

Cal  J  canto. 

Stone.* 

Curiosidad. 

Curiosity. 

Bruto. 

Brute. 

Exageracion. 

Exaggeration. 

Idiota. 

Idiot. 

Franqueza. 

Frankness. 

Espacio. 

Space. 

Juventud. 

Youth. 

Complemento. 

Complement. 

Ilusion. 

Illusion. 

Goce. 

Enjoyment. 

Felicidad. 

Happiness. 

Mai. 

EvH. 

Risa. 

Laugh,  laughter. 

Material. 

Material. 

Realidad. 

Reality. 

Objeto. 

Object. 

Ruindad. 

Meanness. 

Palacio. 

Palace. 

Riquezas. 

Riches. 

Pajaro. 

Bird. 

Enfermo. 

Sick. 

Prisionero. 

Prisoner. 

Pensamiento. 

Thought. 

Castillos  en  el 

Castles  in  the 

aire. 

air. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Adivino  el  motivo  por  el  cual  nos  ha- 
bian  adulado  los  mismos  que  des- 
pues  nos  critican,  criticaban,  cri- 
ticaron,  ban  criticado,  criticaran. 

Leiamos  una  noticia  que  acababa  {or 
acaba)  de  publicarse. 


I  guess  the  reason  why  those  same 
persons  who  had  flattered  us  be- 
fore, criticise,  did  criticise,  criti- 
cised, have  criticised,  will  criticise 
us  afterward. 

We  were  reading  the  news  just  pub- 
lished (that  had  just  been  pub- 
lished, or  has  just  been  published). 


*  Cal  y  canto,  literally,  lime  (mortar)  and  stone,  comes  to  mean  what 
is  solid,  substantial. 


LUSSOJSr  XLVIIL 


275 


Contaba  la  desgracia  que  los  ailigio. 

No  sere  yo  el  primero  que  se  atreva. 
Aprended  vosotros,  los  que  os  que- 

jais,  quejabais,  quejasteis,  habeis 

quejado,  quejareis. 
El  quiers  jugar. 
Nosotros  queremos  estudiar. 
El  hubo  de  condescender. 
Tengo  que  callar. 
Ellos  deben  estar  muy  ocupados. 
Quiero  {or  pienso)  salir. 
Afirmo  {or  declaro)  que  saldre. 

Digo  que  saldre. 

Es  litil  estudiar  las  lenguas. 

Conviene  a  los  hombres  instruirse. 

El  estudio  de  las  lenguas  es  litil. 

La  instruccion  conviene  a  los  hom- 
bres. 

Conviene  que  yo  estudie. 

Es  litil  que  los  hombres  se  instru- 
yan. 

Les  mando  callar.  ) 

Les  mando  que  callasen.  ) 

Impedir  que  se  cometan  injusticias 
es  el  objeto  de  las  leyes. 

Deseo  que  me  comprendas. 

No  lograras  que  lo  castiguen. 

Se  le  ayudara  si  f uere  necesario. 

He  sentido  que  no  se  convenza  (con- 

venciera  or  convenciese). 
Habra  llamado  para  que  le  abran 

(abrieran  or  abriesen)  la  puerta. 
Creo  que  lo  convencere  facilmente. 
Reflexionare  lo  que  he  de  hacer. 

Pense  que  el  iba  a  matarla. 
Pense  que  enviara  {or  enviaria)  la 
carta. 


He  was  telling  the  misfortune  that 
afflicted  them. 

I  shall  not  be  the  first  to  dare. 

Know,  you  who  complain,  were  com- 
plaining, complained,  had  com- 
plained, will  complain. 

He  wishes  to  play. 

We  will  study. 

He  had  to  consent. 

I  have  to  be  silent. 

They  must  be  very  busy. 

I  wish  (or  am  minded)  to  go  out. 

I  affirm  (or  declare)  that  I  will  go 
out. 

I  say  that  I  shall  go  out. 

It  is  useful  to  study  languages. 

It  is  to  man's  interest  to  acquire 
knowledge. 

The  study  of  languages  is  useful. 

Knowledge  is  useful  to  man. 

It  is  to  my  interest  to  study. 
It  is  useful  to  mankind  to  possess 
knowledge. 

He  ordered  them  to  be  silent. 

To  prevent  the  doing  of  injustice, 
such  is  the  object  of  laws. 

I  wish  you  to  understand  me. 

You  will  not  succeed  in  having  him 
punished. 

He  shall  have  help  if  it  be  neces- 
sary. 

I  was  sorry  that  he  might  not  be 
convinced. 

He  will  have  knocked  that  the  door 
might  be  opened. 

I  think  I  shall  convince  him  easily. 

I  shall  reflect  as  to  what  I  shall 
do. 

I  thought  he  was  going  to  kill  her. 

I  thought  he  might  or  would  send 
the  letter. 


276 


LESSON  XLVIIL 


EXPLANATION. 

242.  Correspondence  of  the  Tenses  with  each 
OTHER. — When  one  verb  is  connected  with  another  by  a 
relative,  there  are  many  combinations  in  which  the  deter- 
mining and  the  determined  verbs  may  be  found ;  both  may 
be  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive  mode,  or  one  in 
the  indicative  and  the  other  in  the  subjunctive;  but  both 
cannot  be  in  the  infinitive  or  in  the  imperative ;  as, 


Adivino  el  motivo  por  el  cual  nos 
habian  adulado  los  mismos  que 
nos  critican,  criticaban,  critica- 
ron,  han  criticado,  criticardn, 

Leiamos  una  noticia  que  acahdba 

(or  acaba)  de  publicarse. 
Contaba  la  desgracia  que  los  afligib. 

No  sere  yo  el  primero  que  se  atreva, 

Aprended  vosotros  los  que  os  que- 
JdiSy  quejabais,  quejasteis,  habeis 
quejadoj  quejareis. 

243.  The  determined  verb  is  put  in  the  infinitive  when- 
ever it  has  the  same  subject  as  the  determining  verb ;  as, 

^l  quiere  jugar.  i  He  wishes  to  play. 

Nosotros  queremos  estudiar.  \  We  wish  to  study. 

This  is  the  reason  why  the  auxiliaries  haher  de,  tener  que, 
deber,  always  take  the  governed  verb  in  the  infinitive,  because 
the  subject,  or  nominative,  is  the  same  for  both  verbs ;  as. 


I  guess  the  reason  why  those  same 
persons  who  have  flattered  us  be- 
fore,  criticise,  did  criticise,  criti- 
cised, have  criticised,  will  criti- 
cise us  afterward. 

We  were  reading  some  news  that  had 
(or  has)  just  been  published. 

He  was  telling  the  misfortune  that 
afflicted  them. 

I  shall  not  be  the  first  to  dare. 

Learn,  you  who  complain,  were  com- 
plaining, complained,  had  com- 
plained, will  complain. 


fil  hubo  de  condescender. 

Tengo  que  collar. 

EUos  deben  estar  muy  ocupados. 

An  exception  to  this  rule  occurs  when  the  determining 
verb  expresses  a  positive  and  decided  affirmation ;  and  so  we 


He  had  to  consent. 
I  have  to  be  silent. 
They  must  be  very  busy. 


Quiero  (or  pienso)  salir.  I  wish  (or  intend)  to  go  out. 

Afirmo  (declaro)  que  saldre,  I  affirm  (or  declare)  that  I  shall  go 

out. 
We  must  also  except  the  verb  decir,  which  cannot  govern 
another  verb  in  the  infinitive,  because  whenever  we  employ 


LESSON  XLYIIL  277 

it  to  announce  our  own  actions  it  is  not  with  the  purpose 
of  relating  them,  but  to  manifest  our  resolution  to  execute 
them;  as, 
Digo  que  saldre,  1 1  say  I  shall  go  out. 

244.  When  the  determining  verb  is  ser^  or  any  impersonal 
verb,  and  the  governed  verb  has  no  subject,  the  latter  is 
placed  in  the  infinitive  ;  as, 

Es  ntil  estudiar  las  lenguas.  It  is  useful  to  study  languages. 

Conviene  a  los  hombres  instruirse.      It  is  to  the  interest  of  mankind  to 

acquire  knowledge. 

And  such  is  the  natural  construction,  because  the  true 
subject  of  this  proposition  is  the  very  infinitive  itself,  which 
stands  there  as  a  noun,  an  office  that  cannot  be  performed 
by  the  other  modes.  The  above  sentences  are  equivalent  to 
these : 


El  estudio  de  las  lenguas  es  util. 
La  instruccion  conviene  a  los  hom- 
bres. 


The  study  of  languages  is  useful. 
It  is  to  the  interest  of  mankind  to 
acquire  knowledge. 


245.  But  if  the  determined  verb  also  has  a  nominative, 
then  it  must  be  placed  in  the  subjunctive ;  as. 


Conviene  que  yo  estudie. 
Es  util  que  los  hombres  se  instru- 
yan. 


It  is  to  my  interest  to  study. 
It  is  useful  to  mankind  to  possess 
knowledge. 


Those  verbs  that  express  command,  govern  either  of  the 
two  forms,  since  we  say  equally  well : 

Les  mando  callar,  )  I  g^  ordered  them  to  be  silent. 

Les  mando  que  callasen,  )  1 

246.  When  the  determining  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  in 
the  present  or  future  of  the  indicative,  or  in  the  imperative, 
connected  with  the  governed  verb  by  a  conjunction,  this  lat- 
ter verb  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  mode,  ordinarily  in  the 
present  or  in  the  future  ;  as, 
Impedir  que  se  cometan  injusticias   To  prevent  the  doing  of  injustice, 

es  el  objeto  de  las  leyes.  such  is  the  object  of  the  laws. 

Deseo  que  me  comprendas.  I  wish  you  to  understand  me. 

No  logrards  que  le  castiguen.  You  will  not  succeed  in  having  him 

punished. 
Se  le  ayudard  si  fuere  necesario.        He  shall  have  help  if  it  be  necessary. 


278  LUSSON  XLYIIL 

247.  When  the  governing  verb  in  the  indicative  has  one 
subject,  and  the  determined  verb  another,  the  latter  may  not 
be  in  the  infinitive,  but  must  take  some  form  of  the  subjunc- 
tive; as. 


He  senfido  que  no  se  convenza  {con- 

venciera  or  conveiiciese). 
Habra  llamado  para  que  le  dbran 

(abrieran  or  ahriesen)  la  puerta. 


I  was  sorry  he  should  not  be  (or  was 

not)  convinced. 
He  knocked,  of  course,  in  order  that 

the  door  may  (or  might)  be  opened. 


248.  When  the  determining  verb  is  in  the  indicative,  it 
generally  governs  the  determined  one  in  the  same  mode,  if 
the  nominative  is  the  same  for  both  verbs ;  as, 

Creo  que  le  convencere  facilmente.     1 1  think  I  shall  convince  him  easily. 
Reflexionare  lo  que  he  de  hacer.        1 1  shall  reflect  on  what  I  have  to  do. 

But  if  each  verb  has  a  different  nominative,  the  second 
verb  may  be  placed  in  the  indicative  or  in  the  subjunctive ;  as. 


Pense  que  iha  a  matarla. 
Pense  que  me  enviara  (or  enviaria) 
la  carta. 


I  thought  he  was  going  to  kill  her. 
I  thought  he  would  send  me  the 
letter. 


Much  more  might  be  said  upon  this  subject,  did  we  not 
fear  to  exceed  the  limits  prescribed  by  the  nature  of  the 
present  work. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Dona  Luisita,  i  Le  gusta  a  V.  formar  castillos  en  el  aire  ? 
Mucho ;  pero  creo  que  f ormo  demasiados. 

2.  Me  alegro  mucho  que,  como  a  mi,  le  guste  a  V.  el  mundo 
de  las  ilusiones,  y  tambien  apruebo  su  franqueza  de  V.  en  confe- 
sarlo. — Y  i  por  que  lo  habia  de  ocultar  ?    i  Que  mal  hay  en  eso  ? 

3.  No  se  si  hay  mal  6  no,  lo  que  se  decir  es,  que  todo  el  mundo 
afecta  no  f ormarlos  y  con  cierta  risita  burlona  pretenden  ridicu- 
lizar  a  los  que,  como  V.  y  yo,  confesamos  candidamente  que  los 
hacemos. 

4.  I  Y  cree  V.,  D.  Jose,  que  esas  gentes  vivan  sin  ilusiones 
de  ninguna  especie  ?  No,  senorita,  no  lo  creo.  Dios  ha  dado  a 
todo  hombre,  a  diferencia  del  bruto,  un  mundo  ideal  interior 
ademas  del  mundo  positivo  exterior,  a  excepcion  de  los  idiotas. 

5.  I  Cuanto  me  alegro  de  oirlo !  j  porque  yo  tenia  tanta  ver- 
giienza  de  mis  pobres  castillos  en  el  aire !    i  De  modo  es  que  V. 


"*^  LESSON  XLVIIL  279 

cree  que  yo  no  soy  sola  ?    De  ningiin  modo,  todo  el  mundo  los 
forma,  la  diferencia  solo  existe  en  la  manera. 

6.  I  Ah  !  Don  Jose,  V.  me  va  pareciendo  un  buen  arquitecto 
de  castillos  en  el  aire  y  uno  de  estos  dias  voy  a  pedirle  que  me 
muestre  uno  de  los  muchos  que  habra  edificado. — Con  mucho 
gusto,  senorita,  a  trueque,  sin  embargo,  de  que  Y.  me  admita  en 
uno  de  sus  palacios  aereos. 

7.  No,  eso  no,  jamas  podria  yo  poner  en  evidencia  mis  cas- 
tillos ;  pero-  Y.  dice  que  la  diferencia  solo  existe  en  la  manera  de 
formarlos;  expliqueme  Y.  esto,  quiza  asi  lograre  reformar  los 
mios,  porque  lie  observado  que  son  incompletos;  siempre  les 
falta  algo. — Pues  es  extraiio,  senorita,  porque  yo  creia  que  solo 
las  cosas  humanas  eran  imperfectas  y  sus  ilusiones  de  Y.  sien- 
do.  .  .  . 

8.  Por  supuesto,  \  angelicales !  \  Yamos !  dejese  Y.  de  cum- 
plimientos,  ya  sabe  Y.  que  no  me  gustan,  y  respondame  Y.  a  mi 
pregunta  si  Y.  gusta,  porque  tengo  curiosidad  de  saber  como  for- 
man  otros  sus  castillos. — Obedezco,  senorita,  y  para  principiar, 
debo  decir  que  yo  me  equivoque  cuando  dije  que  solo  se  diferen- 
ciaban  en  la  manera,  porque  tambien  influye  mucho  el  material. 

9.  I  Como  el  material  ?  i  si  se  f  abrican  en  el  aire !  i  Espero 
que  no  los  fabrique  Y.  de  cal  y  canto  ! — No,  senorita,  no  de  cal  y 
canto ;  pero  se  f abrican ;  y  si  se  f abrican,  de  algo  se  f abrican. 

10.  I  Pero  de  que,  senor,  de  que  ?  Yo  formo  castillos,  pero  no 
necesito  nada  para  hacerlos ;  vuelo  mas  que  los  pajaros,  mando 
hasta  en  las  voluntades  de  los  otros,  hago  volver  al  tiempo  en  su 
carrera,  dispongo  del  espacio,  de  la  fortuna,  y  hago  que  me  obe- 
dezca  hasta  el  amor. — Eso  lo  creo  sin  que  Y.  me  lo  diga,  senorita. 

11.  jDale!  no  vuelva  Y.  a  las  andadas,  y  cuenteme  Y.  que 
materiales  son  esos  de  que  Y.  me  hablaba. — Y.  misma  acaba  de 
nombrar  algunos. 

12.  I  Cuales  ?  i  Como !  l  que  mas  materiales  quiere  Y.  para 
formar  un  castillo  en  el  aire,  que  poder  disponer,  como  Y.  dice 
que  puede,  de  las  voluntades  de  los  otros,  del  tiempo,  del  espacio, 
de  la  fortuna  y  hasta  del  amor  ? 

13.  i  Toma  !  Pero  yo  no  poseo  ninguna  de  esas  cosas  en  reali- 
dad,  y  sin  embargo  mis  castillos  me  entretienen  y  divierten  mu- 
cho.— Perdone  Y.,  seiiorita,  Y.  las  posee  y  con  ellas  forma  Y.  ese 
bonito  mundo  interior,  que  le  proporciona  a  Y.  los  goces  que  no 
le  da  el  exterior. 

14.  Y  en  eso  tiene  Y.  razon,  que  mis  ilusiones,  6  sea  como  Y. 


280  LESSON  XLVIIL 

las  llama,  mi  mundo  interior,  me  consuelan  mucbas  veces  de  la 
ruindad  del  mundo  exterior. — Eso  sucede  a  todo  el  mundo,  de 
ese  modo,  el  ciego  ve,  el  enfermo  goza  de  salud,  el  prisionero  de 
libertad,  el  pobre  de  las  riquezas  y  el  anciano  de  la  juventud,  las 
ilusiones  bacen  los  males  menores.  En  este  mundo  ideal  es  en 
donde  los  bombres  son  verdaderamente  iguales,  y  para  mi  tengo 
que  no  es  ilusorio,  sino  real,  puesto  que  de  el  depende  nuestra 
felicidad. 

15.  i  No  cree  V.  que  bay  alguna  exageracion  en  lo  que  V. 
dice  ?  No,  senora,  pero  si,  creo,  que  debemos  tener  buen  cui- 
dado  de  regularizar  nuestros  pensamientos  y  de  basar  siempre 
nuestros  castillos  en  el  aire  en  la  virtud  y  la  religion. 

16.  I  Bravo !  bravo !  muy  bien,  asi  me  gustan  a  mi  los  castillos 
en  el  aire. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Wbo  built  tbe  bouse  in  wbicb  you  are  living  at  present  ? 
An  excellent  architect,  a  friend  of  my  father's. 

2.  Are  you  certain  it  was  an  old  man  tbat  was  suing  for  her 
hand  ?    I  cannot  affirm  that  it  was  an  old  man. 

3.  What  a  misfortune  that  he  will  not  study !  It  would  be 
a  real  misfortune  if  it  were  true ;  I  think  it  is  not  true. 

4.  Do  you  ever  build  castles  in  the  air  ?  Seldom ;  for,  in 
my  opinion,  real  castles,  built  of  stone,  are  to  be  preferred  to 
the  aerial  ones  of  which  you  speak. 

5.  What  a  pretty  bird  you  have  there !  does  it  sing  ?  It 
sings  the  whole  day  long. 

6.  Do  you  think  our  young  friend  is  really  as  happy  as  he 
appears  to  be  ?  No,  there  must  be  some  exaggeration  in  what 
he  says. 

7.  In  what  respect  do  these  two  authors  dijffer  from  each 
other  ?  Read  the  works  of  both,  and  you  will  observe  for 
yourself. 

8.  Do  they  both  write  equally  well  ?  No,  one  of  them 
arranges  his  thoughts  in  a  very  strange  manner,  so  that  it  is 
sometimes  impossible  to  understand  his  meaning,*  and  it  is  at 
all  times  disagreeable  to  read  him. 

9.  Is  Peter  now  punished  in  school  as  often  as  formerly  ? 
As  often  as  ever ;  but  it  is  useless  to  punish  him  ;  for  though  he 
is  good  for  a  few  days,  he  always  goes  back  to  his  old  habits. 

*  Lo  que  quiere  decir. 


LESSON  XLIX. 


281 


10.  Does  that  man  always  say  what  he  thinks  ?  I  am  sure 
I  cannot  say;  but  it  seems  to  me  that  there  is  in  his  manner 
of  speaking  a  something  I  cannot  explain  that  hides  his  real 
thoughts. 

11.  Is  he  generally  liked  by  those  who  know  him  ?  On  the 
contrary,  everybody  hates  him  and  ridicules  him  for  his  mean- 
ness. 

12.  Have  you  any  curiosity  to  see  the  interior  of  a  royal 
palace  ?  If  the  occasion  offered  (presented  itself),  I  should  like 
to  see  it;  otherwise  I  am  perfectly  content  with  the  interior  of 
my  own  house. 

13.  You  are  wise  in  that ;  happiness  is  not  always  to  be  found 
in  palaces.    Ah  !  I  see  you  are  *  something  of  a  philosopher. 

14.  How  is  this,  sir  ?  your  exercise  is  incomplete.  I  confess 
that  had  I  wished  I  might  have  finished  it ;  but  you  will  find 
that,  as  far  as  it  goes,  it  is  not  imperfect. 

15.  That  is  to  say  that  the  quality  does  not  depend  on  the 
quantity.  Precisely  so;  you  may  complain  of  my  not  having 
done  the  whole  of  the  exercise,  but  I  do  not  think  you  can  criti- 
cise the  part  I  have  brought  to  you. 

16.  What  size  f  is  the  book  your  friend  has  just  published  ? 
The  same  size  as  the  one  he  published  before. 


Acudir. 

Sumar. 

Agregar. 

Anadir. 

Componer. 

Contener. 

Incluir. 

Facilitar. 

Ofrecer. 


LESSOlSr    XLIX. 

I     To  hasten  (to  a  place),  to  refer. 
To  add  up. 
To  add. 
To  add. 

To  compose,  to  mend,  to  fix. 
To  contain. 
To  include. 
To  facilitate. 
To  offer. 


Por  instruido  que  sea. 

Anteriormente. 
Comparativamente. 


However  learned  he  may  be. 

Formerly,  previously. 
Comparatively. 


*  Tiene  V. 


\  Tamaflo, 


282 


LESSON  XLIX. 


Corri  entemente. 

Fluidamente. 

Suficiente. 

En  general. 

Generalmente. 

Considerablemente. 

Particularmente. 

En  cuanto  a. 

Artificial. 

Anterior. 

Aborreeible. 

Celeste,  azul  celeste. 

Celestial. 

Celico. 

Chinesco. 

Creible. 

Despreciable. 

Familiar. 

Gigantesco. 

Terrestre. 

Territorial. 

Terroso. 

Terrado,  terrero. 

Terrenal. 

Terron. 

Ricacho. 

Picaresco. 

Patronimico. 

Propio. 

Mudable. 

Verbal. 


Arenal. 

Ascenso. 

Alvarez. 

Calvinista. 

Catolicismo. 

Diccionario. 

Escobajo. 


Sandy  (ground). 

Promotion. 

Alvarez. 

Calvinist. 

Catholicism. 

Dictionary. 

A  bad  broom. 


Currently,  fluently. 

Fluently. 

Sufficient. 

In  general. 

Generally. 

Considerably. 

Particularly,  privately. 

As  to,  as  for. 

Artificial. 

Anterior,  previous. 

Hateful. 

Celestial,  sky-blue. 

Celestial,  heavenly. 

Celestial,  heavenly. 

Chinese. 

Credible. 

Despicable. 

Familiar. 

Gigantic. 

Terrestrial,  earthly. 

Territorial. 

Terreous,  earthy. 

Terrace. 

Terrestrial,  earthly. 

Lump  (or  clod)  of  earth. 

Very  rich. 

Roguish. 

Patronymic. 

Proper,  own. 

Changeable. 

Verbal. 


Arboleda. 

Ascension. 

Carnuza. 

Creencia. 

Ciencia. 

Gentualla. 

Madrastra. 


Grove- 
Ascension. 
Bad  meat. 
Belief,  credence. 
Science. 
Rabble. 
Step-mother. 


LESSON  XLIX. 

283 

Boticario. 

Druggist,  apothe- 

Terminacion. 

Termination. 

cary. 

Dicha. 

Happiness. 

Dominguez. 

Dominguez. 

Isla. 

Island. 

Fernandez. 
Idiotismo. 

Fernandez. 
Idiom. 

Educacion. 

Education,  rear- 
ing. 
Broom. 

Filosofastro. 

Philosophaster. 

Escoba. 

Hijastro. 

Step-son. 

Excusa. 

Excuse. 

Hermanastro 

.  Step-brother. 

Explicacion. 

Explanation. 

Hombracho. 

Corpulent. 

Espada. 

Sword. 

Libraco. 

A     contemptible 

Exclamacion. 

Exclamation. 

book. 

Firma. 

Signature. 

Pajarraco. 

An  ugly  bird. 

Gota. 

Drop. 

Latinajo. 

Dog  Latin. 

Figura. 

Figure,   appear- 

Manzanar. 

Apple  orchard. 

ance. 

Pinar. 

Pine  grove. 

Faccion. 

Feature. 

Protestante. 

Protestant. 

Factura. 

Invoice. 

Padrastro. 

Step-father. 

Facultad. 

Faculty,  power. 

Significado. 

Signification, 

Adquisicion. 

Acquirement. 

meaning. 

Astronomia. 

Astronomy. 

Vinacho. 

Bad  wine. 

Afluencia,  flui 

-  Fluency. 

Protestantis- 

Protestantism. 

dez. 

mo. 
Habanero. 

Havanese. 

Madrileno. 

Madrilenian. 

Rodriguez. 

Rodriguez. 

Sanchez. 

Sanchez. 

Amante. 

Lover,  sweet- 
heart. 

Arbol. 

Tree. 

Amador. 

Lover. 

COMPOS 

5ITI0N. 

I  Por  que  lee  V.  ese  libraco  ? 

Porque  no  tengo  otro ;  pero  V.  se 

equivoca,  es  un  libro  clasico  exce- 

lente. 
I  Conoce  V.  a  aquel  ricacho  ? 
Lo  conozco ;  pero  no  lo  trato,  porque 

es  un  hombracho  que  solo  le  gusta 

tratarse  con  gentualla. 


Why  do  you  read  that  miserable 
book? 

Because  I  have  no  other ;  but  you 
are  mistaken,  it  is  an  excellent 
classic  (book). 

Do  you  know  that  rich  man  f 

I  know  him ;  but  I  have  no  inter- 
course with  him,  because  he  is  a 
low  man,  whose  taste  it  is  to  asso- 
ciate with  the  rabble  only. 


284 


LESSON  XLIX. 


Juan,  no  barras  con  ese  escobajo, 
que  ensucia  mas  que  limpia. 

La  came  buena  se  vende  a  treinta 
centavos  la  libra ;  la  carnuza  a 
veinte. 

Ese  estudiante  suele  decir  latinajos, 
pero  no  sabe  latin. 

En  la  America  del  Norte  hay  mas 
protestantes  que  catolicos. 

Los  boticarios  en  los  Estados  Unidos 
no  solo  venden  medicinas,  sino 
perfumeria,  cigarros  y  otras  mu- 
chas  cosas. 

j,Vive  el  Senor  Fernandez  con  su 
padre  ? 

No,  senor,  porque  no  quiere  vivir 
con  su  madrastra  y  hermanastros. 

I  Es  V.  madrileno  ? 

No,  senor,  soy  Habanero. 

Aquel  filosofastro  es  despreciable. 

Esa  senorita  es  muy  am  able ;  pero 
muy  mudable. 


John,  do  not  sweep  with  that  stump 
of  a  broom  ;  it  dirties  more  than 
it  cleans. 

Good  meat  sells  at  thirty  cents  a 
pound,  poor  (bad)  meat  at  twenty. 

That  student  is  in  the  habit  of  re- 
citing dog  Latin,  but  he  does  not 
know  Latin. 

There  are  more  Protestants  than 
Catholics  in  North  America. 

In  the  United  States  the  druggists 
sell  not  only  medicines,  but  per- 
fumery, cigars,  and  many  other 
things. 

Does  Mr.  Fernandez  live  with  his 
father? 

No,  sir,  because  he  does  not  wish  to 
live  with  his  step-mother  and 
step-brothers. 

Are  you  a  Madrilenian  ? 

No,  sir,  I  am  a  Havanese. 

That  philosophaster  is  a  despicable 
(man). 

That  young  lady  is  very  amiable, 
but  very  changeable. 


EXPLANATION. 

249.  Deeivative  Xouns. — These  nouns  constitute  one 
of  the  chief  sources  of  the  richness  of  the  Spanish  language ; 
we  have  already  introduced  some  of  them  in  previous  lessons, 
when  treating  of  augmentative  and  diminutive  terminations. 

These  terminations  are  very  numerous,  both  for  the  sub- 
stantives and  adjectives,  and  each  one  of  them  determines 
the  general  signification  of  the  derivative  noun.  As  it  would 
be  impossible  to  give  in  this  case  a  complete  list  of  all  these 
terminations,  we  shall  endeavor  to  lay  before  the  student 
such  of  them  as  are  to  be  found  in  most  common  use. 

250.  The  terminations  aco^  acho^  alia,  and  uza,  denote  in- 
feriority ;  as, 

Libraco.  I         A  contemptible  old  book. 

Pajarroco.  I         An  ugly  bird. 


LESSON  XLIX, 


285 


Yinac^o. 
GentuaZZa. 


Bad  wine. 
Rabble. 
Bad  meat. 


The  termination  acho  is  sometimes  augmentative  ;  as, 
RicacAo.  l         Very  rich. 

HombracAo.  I         A  big  (or  corpulent)  man. 

261.  Ajo  implies  meanness,  and  the  consequent  contempt 
inspired  by  it ;  as, 

Escoba/o.  I         An  old  stump  of  a  broom. 

Latina/o.  |         Dog  Latin.   . 

252.  The  terminations  aZ,  ar^  ego^  ico,  il,  isco^  in  adjec- 
tives, commonly  denote  the  quality  of  the  thing ;  as, 


Artificial. 

Familiar. 

Gigantesco. 

Picaresco. 

Clasico. 

Chinesco. 


Artificial. 

Familiar. 

Gigantic. 

Roguish, 

Classic. 

Chinese. 


253.  In  substantives  the  same  terminations,  al^  ar^  and 
also  eda  and  edo^  serve  to  form  collective  nouns ;  as. 


Axboleda. 
ArenaZ. 
Manzanar. 
Pinar. 


Grove. 

Sandy  ground. 
Apple  orchard. 
Pine  grove. 


254.  The  terminations  ante,  ario,  ente,  ero,  ista  and  or  are 
for  the  most  part  expressive  of  use,  sect,  profession,  trade,  or 
occupation ;  as, 


EstudiaTi^e. 

Student 

Boticano. 

Druggist. 

Zapatero. 

Shoemaker. 

Organ^'s^a. 

Organist. 

Protestaw^e. 

Protestant. 

Calvini^^a. 

Calvinist. 

Pintor. 

Painter. 

255.  The  termination  astro  signifies  inferiority  in  a  super- 
lative degree ;  as, /Zo50>5/^ro,  a  despicable  philosopher;  poetas- 
tro,  poetaster ;  and  it  is  curious  to  observe  that  it  also  serves 


286  LESSON  XLIX, 

to  express  the  degrees  of  relationship  existing  between  those 
persons  who  more  generally  hate  than  love  each  other ;  as, 


Hermanas/ro. 

Step-brother. 

Rijastro. 

Step-son. 

F&diastro. 

Step-father. 

Madiastra. 

Step-mother. 

256.  Ble  corresponds  to  the  same  termi 

lish;  as, 

AborreciZ>Ze. 

Hateful. 

Creible. 

Credible. 

Mndsible, 

Changeable. 

AmMe. 

Amiable. 

257.  /5mo  corresponds  to  the  English  termination  t5^;  as, 

Catoliczsmo.  i         Catholicism. 

Protestantismo.  |         Protestantism. 

258.  The  names  of  nationalities  are  also  derivatives,  and 
have  their  terminations  in  ero,  es^  eno ;  as, 


Habanero. 

Frances. 

Madrile7?;o. 


Havanese. 

French,  Frenchman. 

Madrilenian. 


259.  Many  patronymic,  or  family,  names  are  also  deriva- 
tives; for  instance,  Alvarez^  Dominguez^  Fernandez^  Rodri- 
guez^ Sanchez^  &c.,  were  the  names  that  were  given  to  the 
sons  of  the  Alvaros,  Domingos,  Eernandos,  Kodrigos,  San- 
chos,  &c.,  changing  the  final  o  in  ez, 

CONVERSATION   AND  VEESION. 

1.  I  Es  necesario  para  hablar  una  lengua  aprender  todas  las 
palabras  que  contiene  dicha  lengua  ?  De  ningiin  mode,  ademas, 
yo  no  creo  que  exista  un  hombre,  per  instruido  que  sea,  que  las 
sepa  todas. 

2.  I  Cuantas  palabras  piensa  V.  que  sean  suficientes  para  po- 
der  hablar  el  espanol  corrientemente  ?  De  tres  a  cuatro  mil 
palabras  primitivas  con  sus  derivados  es  todo  lo  que  se  requiere, 
para  hablar  una  lengua  fluidamente. 

3.  Si,  pero  probablemente  los  derivados  seran  en  tanto  6  ma- 
yor mimero  que  los  primitives. — Asi  es,  pero  una  vez  que  se  cono- 


LESSON  XLIX.  287 

cen  las  terminaciones,  es  muy  facil  el  formarlos,  aunque  nunca 
se  hayan  visto  anteriormente. 

4.  I  Es  posible  !  entonces  esto  debe  facilitar  mucho  el  estudio 
de  la  lengua.— Muchisimo,  porque,  como  ya  hemos  dicho,  sabien- 
do  los  primitivos  no  hay  mas  que  anadirles  las  terminaciones, 
segiin  el  significado  que  quiera  darseles. 

5.  I  Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  formar  algunos  deriva- 
dos  ?    Si,  senor,  con  mucho  gusto  ;  deme  V.  los  primitivos. 

6.  I  Cuales  son  los  derivados  de  cielo  ?    Celeste  y  celestial. 

7.  I  De  tierra  ?    Terrestre,  terrenal,  y  otros. 

8.  i  Por  que  no  me  los  da  V.  todos  ?  Porque  me  parece  mejor 
que  aprenda  V.  primeramente  los  de  mas  uso,  pues  sobre  haber 
muchos,  los  hay  de  poco  uso  comparativamente. 

9.  i  Cuales  otros  se  pudieran  formar  de  cielo  y  tierra  ?  Celi- 
co,  terroso,  terron,  y  otros  muchos. 

10.  i  Se  pueden  formar  derivados  de  los  verbos  ?  Si,  senor,  y 
a  estos  se  les  da  el  nombre  de  verbales. 

11.  i  Cuales  se  derivan  del  verbo  amar  ?  Amador,  amante, 
amado,  amable. 

12.  i  De  ascender  ?    Ascenso,  ascension. 

13.  I  De  creer  ?    Creyente,  creencia,  creible,  credulo,  credito. 

14.  I  De  estudiar  ?  Estudiante,  estudio ;  pudiendo  agregar 
ademas  los  aumentativos  y  diminutivos  que  tambien  son  deriva- 
dos, como  estudiantillo,  estudianton,  &c. 

15.  I  De  que  se  derivan  los  nombres  de  familia  Gonzalez,  Do- 
minguez,  &:c.  ?  Se  derivan  de  los  nombres  propios  Gonzalo, 
Domingo,  &c. 

16.  I  Cuantas  palabras  cree  Y.  que  contendra  esta  gramatica  ? 
Mas  de  tres  mil  palabras  primitivas  y  un  gran  mimero  de  deri- 
vadas. 

17.  I  En  acabando  la  gramatica  podre  traducir  y  hablar  sobre 
cualquiera  materia  que  se  ofrezca  ?  Podra  V,  hablar  de  todo  y 
seguir  una  conversacion  en  general  como  V.  ve  que  ya  lo  hace- 
mos ;  pero  para  traducir  y  hablar  de  cualquiera  ciencia,  arte  u 
oficio  en  particular,  tendra  V.  que  acudir  al  diccionario,  porque 
es  imposible  introducir  en  una  gramatica  todas  las  palabras  nece- 
sarias  para  poder  hacer  esto. 

18.  Y  en  cuanto  a  los  idiotismos  de  la  lengua,  l  se  hallaran 
todos  en  esta  gramatica  ?  Tampoco,  puesto  que  se  podrian  com- 
poner  tres  6  cuatro  voliimenes  como  este  y  quiza  no  incluirian 
todos  los  de  la  lengua. 


288  LESSON  XLIX. 

19.  i  Como  los  aprendere  entonces  ?  En  la  conversacion  de 
personas  instruidas  y  en  la  lectura  de  buenos  libros. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  Charles  go  to  another  regiment  at  the  time  of  his  pro- 
motion ?    Yes,  he  left  the  71st  and  went  to  the  7th. 

2.  What  do  you  know  about  the  names  Sanchez,  Dominguez, 
and  all  those  ending  in  ez  ?  That  they  mean  son  of  Sancho,  son 
of  Domingo,  and  are  formed  from  those  names  by  adding  the 
termination  you  have  just  mentioned. 

3.  To  whom  does  that  magnificent  pine  grove  belong  ?  To 
the  step-son  of  the  gentleman  who  owns  that  pretty  little  house 
you  see  over  there  in  the  distance  (d  lo  lejos). 

4.  What  miserable  book  is  that  you  are  reading  so  atten- 
tively ?  It  is  no  miserable  book  at  all  {ninguno),  it  is  the  diction- 
ary ;  I  always  go  to  the  dictionary  for  a  word  the  meaning  of 
which  I  do  not  know. 

5.  Do  you  know  the  names  of  all  the  heavenly  bodies  ?  No, 
nor  you  either  ;  the  science  of  astronomy  is  still  imperfect,  and 
there  are  besides  many  of  the  heavenly  bodies  hidden  from  hu- 
man sight. 

6.  Is  not  that  young  gentleman  a  great  lover  of  the  sciences  ? 
Yes,  but  most  particularly  of  the  exact  sciences. 

7.  Why  do  you  sweep  with  that  stump  of  a  broom  ?  It  is 
the  best  I  have. 

8.  Did  you  say  he  was  a  philosopher  ?  No,  on  the  contrary, 
I  said  he  was  but  a  philosophaster. 

9.  How  does  that  rich  fellow  amuse  himself  ?  Eeading  his- 
tory in  general,  and  that  of  his  own  country  in  particular. 

10.  I  observe  that  you  speak  German  very  fluently  now ; 
have  you  changed  your  book  ?  No,  I  have  the  same  one  still, 
but  I  myself  study  more  than  I  did  formerly. 

11.  Do  you  know  whether  your  cousin  speaks  as  fluently  as 
your  sister  ?  Mrs.  Alvarez  says  that  in  familiar  conversation 
they  speak  equally  fluently. 

12.  Do  you  write  any  compositions  ?  Yes,  our  father  requires 
us  to  write  two  compositions  a  week  on  the  idioms  of  the  lan- 
guage. 

13.  Is  it  not  a  despicable  habit  to  ofi'er  to  do  things  we  never 
intend  to  perform  (llevar  a  cabo)  ?  I  should  say  it  is  more  than 
despicable,  it  is  even  hateful. 


LESSON  L. 


289 


14.  Does  not  the  study  of  grammar  considerably  facilitate  the 
acquisition  of  a  language  ?  Yes,  but  that  alone  is  not  siifficient : 
something  more  is  required. 

15.  Have  you  much  fruit  at  your  home  in  the  country  ?  We 
have  a  very  fine  orchard  of  apples. 

16.  What  language  was  that  your  young  friend  spoke  in  a 
moment  ago  ?  What  he  takes  for  Latin ;  but  what  is  not  in 
reality  anything  but  dog  Latin. 

17.  Would  not  that  letter  have  been  better  if  you  had  not 
aaded  that  last  word  ?  It  appeared  to  me  to  be  necessary  to  add 
that  to  what  I  had  already  said,  so  that  the  meaning  might  be 
more  easily  understood. 


LESSON    L. 

Amenazar. 

To  threaten,  to  menace. 

Apoyar. 

To  lean  upon,  to  support. 

Disgustar. 

To  displease,  to  disgust,  to 
grieve. 

Eecurrir. 

To  recur,  to  have  recourse. 

Sacar. 

To  take  out. 

A  pesar  de. 

In  spite  of. 

Y  diciendo  y 

haciendo. 

And  suiting  the  action  to  the 
word. 

i  Todo  sea  por 

Dios! 

I  hope  all  will  be  for  the  best  I 

Tomar  las  de  villadiego. 

To    take    to     one's  heels,  to 

make  off. 

Sobre  todo. 

Above  all. 

Desproporcionadisimamente. 

Without  any  proportion. 

Adverbial. 
Antisocial. 
Antepeniiltima. 
Iniitil. 

Componente. 
Izquierdo. 
Derecho. 
Penultima. 
Superlativo. 
21 


Adverbial. 

Antisocial. 

Antepenultimate. 

Useless. 

Component. 

Left. 

Eight. 

Penultimate. 

Superlative. 


290 


LESSON  L, 


Anteojos. 

Aguardiente. 

Barbilampino. 

Correveidile. 

Bienhechor. 

Director. 

Dolor  de  mue- 

las. 
Dentista. 
Disgusto. 
Hazmereir. 
Condiscipulo. 
Pisaverde. 
Pormenor. 
Puntapie. 
Parasol. 
Paraguas. 
Quitasol. 
Socialismo. 
Sacamuelas. 
Pueblo. 
Vicerector. 


Spectacles. 

Brandy. 

Beardless. 

Tell-tale. 

Benefactor. 

Director. 

Toothache. 

Dentist. 

Disgust,  grief. 

Laughing-stock. 

Schoolmate. 

Fop,  coxcomb. 

Detail. 

Kick. 

Parasol. 

Umbrella. 

Parasol. 

Socialism. 

Tooth-drawer. 

People,  town. 

Vice-rector. 


Equivocacion. 
Ganapierde. 

Barberia. 
La  derecha. 
La  izquierda. 
Sinrazon. 
Particula. 
Quidjada. 
Las  damas. 


Mistake. 

A  game  in  check- 
ers. 
Barber-shop. 
The  right  hand. 
The  left  hand. 
Injustice. 
Particle. 
Jaw. 
Draughts,  check- 


COMPOSITION. 


No  le  esta  bien  a  un  anciano  el  ser 
pisaverde,  eso  es  propio  de  barbi- 
lampinos. 

\  Quien  ha  dado  un  puntapie  a  aquel 
muchacho  % 

Yo  se  lo  he  dado,  porque  es  un  corre- 
veidile. 

Este  hombre  juega  muy  bien  a  las 
damas,  sobre  todo  a  la  ganapierde. 

I  Tiene  V.  un  quitasol  6  un  paraguas  % 

Tengo  ambos. 

Ese  ]oven  bebe  mucho  aguardiente 
y  no  hace  caso  de  los  consejos  de 
su  bienhechor. 

fisa  es  la  razon  porque  es  el  haz- 
mereir de  todo  el  mundo. 

4  Tiene  V.  buena  vista  t 


It  is  not  becoming  to  an  old  man  to 
be  a  fop ;  that  belongs  to  beard- 
less boys. 

Who  gave  that  boy  a  kick  f 

I  did,  for  he  is  a  teU-tale. 

This  man  plays  very  well  at 
draughts,  and  especially  at  gana- 
pierde (give  away). 

Have  you  a  parasol  or  an  umbrella  ? 

I  have  both. 

That  young  man  drinks  a  great  deal 
of  brandy,  and  gives  no  heed  to 
the  admonition  of  his  benefactor. 

That  is  the  reason  why  he  is  the 
laughing-stock  of  every  one. 

Have  you  good  sight  t 


LESSOir  L. 


291 


No,  senor,  y  esta  es  la  razon  porque 

uso  anteojos. 
Mi  condiscipulo  Manuel  me  ha  ayu- 

dado  a  hacer  la  composicion. 
Es  iniitil  que  me  cuente  Y.  los  por- 

menores. 
El  director  y  el  vicerector  de  la  es- 

cuela  son  hombres  excelentes. 
Me  disgustan  las  sinrazones. 
El  socialismo,  a  pesar  de  la  opinion 

de  los  que  lo  apoyan,  es  antisocial 

e  imposible. 


No,  sir,  and  that  is  the  reason  why  I 

use  spectacles. 
My     school- fellow     Emanuel     has 

helped  me  to  do  my  composition. 
It  is  useless  for  you  to  tell  me  the 

details. 
The  director  and  sub-rector  of  the 

school  are  excellent  men. 
Unreasonableness  disgusts  me. 
Socialism,  in  spite  of  the  opinion  of 

those  who  support  it,  is  antisocial 

and  impossible. 


EXPLANATION. 
260.  Compound  !N"ouns. — These  are  very  numerous  in  the 
Spanish  language  ;  some  are  formed  of  two  nouns,  as  barbi- 
lampinOy  beardless  ;  puntapie,  a  kick  ;  aguardierite^  brandy ; 
others  are  formed  of  a  noun  and  a  verb,  as  quitasol^  parasol ; 
sacamuelas^  tooth-drawer ;  others  of  an  adjective  and  a  verb, 
as  pisaverde^  coxcomb ;  others  of  a  noun  and  an  adverb,  as 
hienhecJior^  benefactor ;  others  of  a  noun  and  a  preposition, 
as  anteojos^  spectacles ;  others  of  two  verbs,  as  ganapierde^  a 
mode  of  playing  draughts ;  others  of  two  verbs  and  a  pro- 
noun, as  Jiazmereir^  laughing-stock ;  three  verbs,  a  pronoun 
and  a  conjunction  enter  into  the  formation  of  correveidile^ 
tale-bearer ;  and,  finally,  others  are  composed  of  a  noun  and 
some  one  of  the  following  component  particles  :  a^  ab^  abs^  ad^ 
ante^  ant%  circum  or  circun^  cis^  citra^  co,  com^  con,  contra^ 
de,  des,  di,  dis,  e,  em,  en,  entre,  equi,  es  or  ex,  extra,  im,  in, 
infra,  inter,  intro,  o,  ob,  per,  por,  pos,  pre,  preter,  pro,  re, 
retro,  sa  or  za,  se,  semi,  sesqui,  sin,  so,  sobre,  son,  sos,  su,  suh 
super,  sus,  tra,  trans  or  tras,  ultra,  and  vice  or  vi ;  as, 


Antisocial. 

Composicion. 

Condiscipulo. 

Z)^rector. 

Z)^sgusto. 

Jmposible. 

Iniitil. 

Pormenor. 


Antisocial. 

Composition. 

School-fellow. 

Director. 

Displeasure. 

Impossible. 

Useless. 

Detail. 


292  LESSON  L. 


Pospuesto. 

/Smrazou. 

Ficcrector. 


Post-fixed. 

Unreasonableness. 

Vice-rector. 


We  call  them  component  particles^  because  the  majority 
of  them — although  they  are  true  Latin  and  Greek  preposi- 
tions— have  no  signification  in  Spanish,  except  as  prefixes, 
in  which  case  they  serve  to  augment,  diminish,  or  modify  the 
signification  of  the  simple  word  in  proportion  to  the  strength 
or  value  they  have  in  the  languages  from  which  we  have 
taken  them. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Don  Jose,  g  sabe  Y.  el  significado  de  las  palabras  pemiltima 
y  antepenultima  ?  Si,  senor,  porque  corresponden  a  las  palabras 
inglesas  penultimate  y  antepenultimate. 

2.  Pues  bien,  ahora,  que  hablamos  de  "  canonazos,"  quiero 
deeir,  ahora  que  hablamos  de  estas  palabras,  le  contare  a  V.  un 
cuentecito. — Muy  bien,  a  mi  me  gustan  mucho  los  cuentos,  sobre 
todo  cuando  no  son  largos  y  vienen  a  pelo. 

3.  Pues  este  viene  a  pelo  y  no  es  largo. — Entonces  cuente- 
melo  v.,  Don  Pedro,  escucho  con  la  mayor  atencion. 

4.  Pues  vaya  de  cuento  :  Un  caballero  tenia  un  f uerte  dolor 
de  muelas,  y  f  ue  a  un  sacamuelas  para  que  le  sacase  una. 

5.  i  Hombre !  e  y  por  que  no  fue  a  casa  de  un  dentista  ?  Por- 
que en  aquel  pueblecito  no  habia  dentistas  y  tuvo  que  ir  a  una 
barberia,  cuyo  barbero  unia  a  su  oficio  el  de  sacamuelas. 

6.  I  Pobre  hombre !  adelante. — Este  barbero,  6  sea  sacamuelas, 
pero  que  de  ningun  modo  era  dentista,  le  pregunto  : 

7.  "  I  Que  muela  le  duele  a  V.  ? "  "  La  penultima  del  lado 
izquierdo  de  la  quijada  inferior." 

8.  "  Muy  bien,"  y  diciendo  y  haciendo  le  saco,  no  la  pemil- 
tima, sino  la  ultima. 

9.  "  I  Huy !  I  que  ha  hecho  V.,  hombre  ?  yo  le  dije  a  V.  que 
me  sacase  la  penultima,  y  Y.  me  ha  sacado  la  ultima." — "  i  Calle ! 
pues  yo  creia  que  penultima  y  ultima  era  todo  una  misma  cosa." 

10.  "  No,  hombre,  no  ;  la  penultima  es  la  que  esta  antes  de  la 
ultima." — "  i  Diantre !  Mil  perdones,  y  sientese  Y.  que  esta  vez  no 
me  equivocare." 

11.  "jYamos,  y  todo  sea  por  Dios!"  "lAy!  ay!  hombre 
dado  a  Barrabas  !  " 


LESSON  L.  293 

12.  "  i  Toma !  i  j  ahora  por  que  se  queja  ?  i  no  acabo  de  sacarle 
la  que  estaba  antes  de  la  ultima  ? "  *'  Si ;  pero  V.  olvido  contar  la 
que  me  saco  anteriormente,  de  modo  que  ahora  me  ha  sacado  la 
antepenultimay—Lai  ante  .  .  .  .  i  que  ?  Pero  no  importa,  deje- 
mos  estos  malditos  nombres,  que  han  sido  causa  de  mi  equivoca- 
cion,  J  sientese  V.  que  yo  le  aseguro  a  V.  que.  ..." 

13.  Pero  el  parroquiano,  dandolo  a  todos  los  diablos,  tomo  las 
de  villadiego,  y  se  cree  que  nunca  mas  recurrio  a  un  sacamuelas 
para  que  le  saease  la  peniiltima  muela. 

14.  e  Cual  es  la  palabra  compuesta  mas  larga  en  espanol  ? 
Desproporcionadisimamente. 

15.  ^  De  que  palabras  se  compone  ?  De  la  particula  compo^ 
nente  des,  el  nombre  proporcion,  la  terminacion  superlativa 
sima  y  la  terminacion  adverbial  mente. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  use  spectacles  because  it  is  fashionable  with  some 
people  to  wear  them,  or  because  you  cannot  see  without  them  ? 
Because  I  cannot  see  without  them. 

2.  My  toothache  is  not  any  better  yet.  Then  you  had  better 
go  to  the  dentist's  and  get  him  to  extract  (sacar)  the  tooth. 

3.  Do  you  often  see  the  beardless  youth  who  came  to  walk 
with  us  without  being  asked  *  last  evening  ?  Not  often,  nor  do 
I  care  to  see  him  very  often,  he  is  too  much  of  a  fop  for  my  taste. 

4.  Which  way  do  I  turn  here  to  go  to  the  new  hotel  ?  Turn 
to  the  right ;  it  is  not  more  than  two  squares  to  the  hotel. 

5.  What  did  he  do  when  you  said  that  ?  He  took  to  his 
heels,  and  I  have  neither  heard  of  nor  seen  him  since. 

6.  What  were  your  two  school-fellows  doing  at  the  door  a 
few  minutes  ago  ?  One  of  them  had  told  the  director  of  a  mis- 
take in  the  other's  exercise,  and  this  one  threatened  to  punish 
him  for  his  trouble  (molestia)  ;  so,  suiting  the  action  to  the 
word,  he  gave  him  a  kick,  and  called  him  a  despicable  tell-tale. 

7.  Has  your  brother  bought  the  house  yet  that  he  intended 
to  buy  ?  No ;  when  he  came  to  examine  the  details  he  found 
the  price  of  the  house  entirely  out  of  proportion  to  the  value. 

8.  Do  you  always  take  an  umbrella  when  it  rains  ?  I  sel- 
dom use  an  umbrella ;  when  it  rains  I  never  go  out,  if  I  can 
avoid  it. 


*  Invitasen. 


294 


LESSON  LI. 


9.  What  a  strange  man  that  is!    Yes,  he  is  the  laughing- 
stock of  every  one  who  knows  him. 

10.  What  kind  of  wine  do  they  give  you  in  your  hotel  ? 
They  give  us  very  poor  wine,  and  so  I  drink  very  little  of  it ;  I 
prefer  water. 

11.  Do  you  often  play  at  draughts  (or  checkers)  ?  Very 
often  ;  but  I  prefer  the  give-away  game. 

12.  What  is  that  man's  business  ?  He  keeps  a  barber's  shop 
in  Sixth  or  Seventh  avenue. 

13.  I  wish  you  to  be  good  enough  to  translate  this  letter  for 
me.  Oh !  it  is  useless  to  talk  to  me  of  translating  anything  just 
now  {por  ahora),  for  I  have  a  headache. 

14.  Where  is  that  family  living  now  ?  In  a  small  town  in 
the  western  part  of  the  state. 


LESSOR    LI, 


Atravesar. 
Atropellar. 

Causar. 

Correr. 

Calcular. 

Dividir. 

Exponer. 

Extranar. 

Hospedar. 

Incendiar. 

Llorar. 

Manifestar. 

Ordenar. 

Oponer. 

Proponer. 

Parar. 

Procurar. 

Resistir. 

Rivalizar. 

Simpatizar. 

Ni  con  mucho. 
A  decir  verdad. 


To  traverse,  to  cross.  , 

To  run  over,  to  hurry  one's  self 

too  much. 
To  cause. 
To  run. 
To  calculate. 
To  divide. 
To  expose. 
To  wonder  at. 
To  lodge  and  entertain. 
To  set  fire  to. 
To  cry,  to  weep. 
To  manifest,  to  show,  to  inform. 
To  order,  to  arrange. 
To  oppose. 
To  propose. 
To  stop. 

To  procure,  to  try. 
To  resist. 
To  rival. 
To  sympathize. 


Far  from,  far  from  it 
To  tell  the  truth. 


LESSON-  LL                                     29f 

En  lo  que  respecta. 

With  respect  to. 

En  marcha. 

Let  us  go,  let  us  start. 

A  lo  largo. 

Lengthwise. 

A  esta  parte. 

Within  the  last. 

A  pie. 

On  foot. 

En  frente. 

In  front,  opposite. 

Continuamente. 

Continually. 

Perpendicularmente. 

Perpendicularly. 

Alrededor.    ) 
Alderredor. 

Around. 

Admirable. 

Admirable. 

Apto. 

Apt. 

Curioso. 

Curious. 

Desocupado. 

Disengaged,  unoccupied. 

Directo. 

Direct. 

Indirecto. 

Indirect. 

Figurado. 

Figurative. 

Inepto. 

Inapt,  unsuitable. 

Gramatical. 

Grammatical. 

Complemento.  Complement. 

Academia.         Academy. 

Cosmopolita.     Cosmopolite. 

Admiracion.      Admiration, 

Carruaje.           Carriage. 

wonder. 

Delito.                Crime. 

Arquitectura.    Architecture. 

Dibujo.               Drawing. 

Construccion.    Construction. 

Individuo.         Individual, 

Belleza.               Beauty. 

member. 

Frase.                 Phrase. 

Literato.             Man  of  letters. 

Distancia.          Distance. 

Grozo.                  Enjoyment. 

Esquina.             Corner. 

Museo.               Museum. 

Lagrima.           Tear. 

Paseo.                Promenade. 

Laboriosidad.    Industry. 

Punto.                Point,  place. 

Marcha.              March. 

Edificio.             Edifice. 

Metropoli.          Metropolis. 

Peligro.              Danger. 

Madurez.            Eipeness,  matu- 

Omnibus.          Omnibus. 

rity,  prudence. 

Soltero.               Bachelor. 

Permanencia.    Permanence, 

Publico.              Public. 

stay. 

Trascurso.          Course  of  (time). 

Sorpresa.            Surprise. 

Rincon.              Corner. 

Vista.                  Sight,  view. 

Tablero  de  da-  Checker-board. 

Orilla.                 Bank,  border. 

mas. 

Batalla.      '        Battle. 

Remuneracion.  Remuneration. 

296 


LESSON  LI. 


COMPOSITION. 


Oriente  y  Occidente. 

Cielo  y  tierra. 

El  hombre  discrete  ordena  siempre 

las  cosas  con  madurez. 
La  casa  de  Juan  se  ha  incendiado. 
Un  individuo  inepto  para  escribir 

puede  ser  apto  para  otras  cosas. 
El  reo,  a  quien  se  castiga,  ha  come- 

tido  grand es  delitos. 
Un  hombre  pobre  es  muy  diferente 

de  un  pobre  hombre. 
Hemos  dado  un  gran  paseo. 
Hemos  dado  un  paseo  grande. 
Lo  que  V.  dice  es  una  cosa  cierta. 
Yo  he  observado  cierta  cosa. 
Madrid,  a  23  de  Agosto  de  1866  {or 

Madrid,   Agosto  23   de   1866,  or 

Madrid  y  Agosto  23  de  1866). 
Yo  soy  quien  probare   que  tii   te 

equivocas. 
Dios  es  admirable  en  todos  sus  obras, 

pues  todas  ellas  raanifiestan  su 

poder  y  su  bondad  {or  admirable 

se  muestra  Dios  en  todas  sus  obras ; 

su  poder  y  su  bondad  manifiestan 

todas  ellas). 
Solo  Dios  es  grande,  hermanos  mios. 
Buenos  dias,  Juan  ;  |,  que  tal  ? 

Hasta  maiiana.     Adios. 

Nueva  York,  ciudad  de  los  Estados 

Unidos. 
Yo  mismo  le  vi  Uorar  lagrimas  de 

gozo. 
Pronto  se  calmaran   las   borrascas 

que  agitan  la  nave  del  estado. 

I  Ha  estado  V.  alguna  vez  en  el  Mu- 
seo  de  Nueva  York  ? 


East  and  West. 

Heaven  and  earth. 

The  sensible  man  always  arranges 

his  affairs  with  prudence. 
They  have  set  fire  to  John's  house. 
An  individual  that  is  unsuited  for 

writing  may  be  apt  at  other  thing^^ 
The  culprit  that  is  being  punished 

has  committed  great  crimes. 
A  poor  man  (a  man  in  poverty)  is 

very  different  from  a  poor  fellow. 
We  have  had  an  excellent  walk. 
We  have  taken  a  long  walk. 
What  you  say  is  certain. 
I  have  observed  a  certain  thing. 
Madrid,  August  23d,  1866. 


It  is  I  who  shall  prove  that  you  are 

mistaken. 
God  is  wonderful  in  all  His  works, 

for  they  all  set  forth  his  power 

and  His  goodness. 


God  only  is  great,  my  brethren. 
Good  morning,  John;  how  do  you 

do? 
I  shall  see  you  to-morrow. 
New   York,  a  city  of  the  United 

States. 
I  myself  saw  him  shed  tears  of  joy. 

The  tempests  by  which  the  ship 
of  state  is  tossed  shall  soon  be 
calmed. 

Have  you  ever  been  in  the  New 
York  Museum  ? 


EXPLANATION.  ^ 

Notwithstanding  the  fact  that  we   have   already  made 
some  general  observations  relative  to  the  place  each  part  of 


Li;ssoN  LI.  297 

speech  occupies  in  sentences,  we  deem  it  expedient  to  add 
here  a  few  rules  which  the  student  will  find  of  considerable 
service  in  composition. 

261.  The  i^ATURAL  construction^  demands  that  the 
substantive  be  placed  before  the  adjective  ;  that  the  govern- 
ing word  precede  the  one  governed ;  that  the  subject  p;re- 
cede  the  verb  ;  that  the  verb  precede  the  adverb  by  which  it 
is  modified ;  that  the  complement  come  after  the  verb  and 
the  adverb,  if  there  be  one ;  and  that  when  two  or  more 
things  are  to  be  expressed,  of  which  one,  from  its  nature, 
comes  before  the  other,  this  order  be  preserved ;  as, 


Oriente  y  Occidente. 
Cielo  J  tierra. 
Norte  y  Sur. 
Este  y  Oeste. 


East  and  West. 
Heaven  and  earth. 
North  and  South. 
East  and  West. 


262.  Figurative  Construction. — The  genius  of  the 
Spanish  language  permits  us  to  depart  in  some  cases  from 
the  above  rules ;  thus  avoiding  the  monotonous  uniformity 
which  would  otherwise  exist,  and  leaving  the  writer  more 
latitude  for  the  construction  and  arrangement  of  his  periods. 
So  long  as  sense  and  perspicuity  do  not  sujffer,  there  is  ordi- 
narily no  fixed  position  for  any  of  the  parts  of  speech. 
Therefore  : 

1st.  Personal  pronouns  subjects  of  verbs  may,  with  a  few 
exceptions,  be  expressed  or  suppressed  at  will. 

2d.  When  the  pronominal  subject  is  expressed,  it  may 
be  placed  either  before  or  after  the  verb. 

3d.  The  same  liberty  may  be  taken  with  the  verb,  adverb 
and  complement. 

4th.  :Nrevertheless,  for  the  sake  of  clearness  in  our  sen- 
tences, it  is  essential  that  certain  words  which  together  form 
a  whole  (such  as  adjectives  with  the  substantives  they  qual- 
ify, or  parts  of  sentences,  acting  the  part  of  subject  or  com- 
plement) should  be  arranged  in  the  same  order  as  that  in 
which  the  ideas  they  express  are  naturally  presented  to  the 
mind. 

5th.  There  are  also  certain  words  which,  when  placed 


298  LESSON  LI. 

before  certain  others,  have  a  signification  very  different  from 
that  which  they  have  when  placed  after  them. 

Of  all  the  modern  languages  the  Spanish  is  certainly  the 
most  flexible ;  indeed,  in  no  other  can  the  same  idea  be  ex- 
pressed with  the  same  words  in  so  endless  a  variety  of  con- 
structions. 

Let  the  following  sentence  serve  as  a  proof  of  the  truth 
of  this  assertion : 

Esta  senorita  era  hija  de  Don  Ma- 1  This  young  lady  was  the  daughter 
nuel  Sanchez.  |     of  Mr.  Emanuel  Sanchez. 

263.  Words  which,  from  their  nature,  cannot  be  separa- 
ted :  Esta  senorita.    De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

Natural  Construction.     Esta  sefiorita  era  hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sdnchez. 

Ifi^  inversion.  Era  esta  sefiorita  hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sdnchez. 

2d        "  Era  hija  esta  senorita  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

Zd        "  Era  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  hija  esta  senorita. 

4th       "  De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  era  hija  esta  senorita. 

5^^       "  Hija  era  esta  senorita  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez. 

^th       "  Hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  era  esta  sefiorita. 

11th       "  Hija  de  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  esta  senorita  era. 

8/^       "  De  Don  Manuel  Sanchez  hija  era  esta  senorita. 

264.  The  natural  construction  is,  of  course,  the  most  gram- 
matical, but  the  best  writers  generally  seek  for  rhetorical 
rather  than  grammatical  effect,  and  this  is  often  achieved  by 
inversion,  as  being  more  easy  and  elegant,  and  as  giving  at 
the  same  time  more  freedom  to  imagination  and  genius. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  i  Oh  !  amigo  mio,  V.  por  Nueva  York  !  \  Cuanto  lo  cele- 
bro !  Si,  senor,  aqui  me  tiene  V.,  Don  Fernando,  no  he  podido 
resistir  la  tentacion  de  venir  a  ver  la  America. 

2.  i  Me  alegro  infinite !  i  Pero  por  que  no  vino  V.  a  hospe- 
dar  a  mi  casa  ?  En  primer  lugar,  porque  llegue  anoche  muy 
tarde ;  y  en  segundo,  porque  a  los  solteros  nos  gusta  la  libertad  y 
la  vida  del  hotel. 

3.  Bien,  no  me  opongo,  a  condicion  de  que  vendra  V.  a  pasar 
con  nosotros  algunos  dias. — Lo  hare  asi  con  mucho  gusto,  ade- 
mas,  Don  Fernando,  que,  como  no  se  hablar  ingles  y  esta  ciudad 


LESSON  LI, 


299 


es  tan  grande,  tengo  miedo  de  perderme  si  salgo  solo,  y  quisiera 
que,  durante  mi  permaneneia  en  ella,  tuviese  V.  la  bondad  de  ser 
mi  cicerone,  de  modo  es  que  me  propongo,  pasar  la  mayor  parte 
del  tiempo  en  su  compania. 

4.  En  eso  me  dara  V.  mucho  placer,  ademas  de  que  yo  goza- 
re  tanto  como  V.  con  la  sorpresa  y  admiracion  que  le  causaran  a 
V.  las  vistas  de  esta  metropoli.  i  Ha  estado  V.  jamas  en  Londres 
6  en  Paris  ?    No,  senor,  jamas  he  salido  de  Espana  hasta  ahora. 

5.  e  Cuando  quiere  V.  que  principiemos  nuestros  paseos  ? 
Cuando  V.  guste ;  ahora  mismo  si  esta  V.  desocupado,  porque,  a 
decir  verdad,  tengo  una  gran  curiosidad. 

6.  I  Quiere  V.  que  vayamos  a  pie  6  en  coche  ?  A  pie,  si  V. 
gusta;  me  parece  que  podremos  ver  mas  comodamente;  pero 
tomaremos  un  coche  cuando  haya  que  salir  de  la  ciudad. 

7.  Pues  en  marcha,  venga  el  brazo. — Yo  temo  que  voy  a  mo- 
lestar  a  V.,  Don  Fernando,  porque  soy  muy  curioso,  como  dicen 
los  franceses,  soy  un  fldneur^  y  me  llaman  la  atencion  hasta  las 
cosas  mas  pequenas. 

8.  Entonces  simpatizaremos,  porque  a  mi  me  gusta  obser- 
yarlo  y  criticarlo  todo. — i  Que  calle  es  esta  en  que  estamos  ahora  ? 
Esta  es  la  Cuarta  avenida,  y  esa  que  la  atraviesa  es  la  calle 
Veinte  y  tres. 

9.  I  Como  es  eso  ?  Las  calles  en  Nueva  York  estan  divididas 
en  avenidas,  que  son  las  que  atraviesan  la  ciudad  a  lo  largo,  y  en 
calles,  que  la  atraviesan  de  occidente  a  oriente,  cortando  las  ave- 
nidas en  angulos  rectos  y  formando  toda  la  ciudad  como  un  ta- 
blero  de  damas,  de  modo  que  sabiendo  el  niimero  de  la  calle 
6  avenida  y  el  de  la  casa  adonde  se  va,  puede  calcularse  facil- 
mente  la  distancia. 

10.  Y  este  edificio  de  arquitectura  tan  curiosa  de  la  esquina, 
I  que  es  ?  Esta  es  la  nueva  academia  de  dibujo,  donde  se  exponen 
al  publico  muy  buenas  pinturas. 

11.  i  Hay  aqui  tan  buenas  pinturas  como  en  el  museo  de  Ma- 
drid ?  No,  ni  con  mucho ;  este  pais  es  aiin  nuevo,  y  aunque  pue- 
dan  hacerlo  en  otras  cosas,  toda  via  no  pueden  rivalizar  en  lo  que 
respecta  a  las  bellas  artes  en  Europa. 

12.  I  Hombre,  que  hermosa  plaza  I  Esta  es  la  plaza  de  Madi- 
son y  todos  estos  bellos  edificios  que  V.  ve  a  su  alrededor,  y 
la  plaza  misma,  han  sido  hechos  de  veinte  anos  a  esta  parte. 

13.  i  Que  edificio  es  aquel  de  enf  rente  que  es  tan  grande  como 
un  palacio  ?    fise  es  el  hotel  de  la  Quinta  avenida,  y  en  efecto 


300  LESSON  LI. 

V.  tiene  razon  en  compararlo  a  un  palacio,  porque  los  hoteles  son 
en  realidad  los  palacios  de  los  Estados  Unidos,  y  se  dice  que  son 
los  me j ores  del  mundo. 

14.  I  Cuidado  !  hombre,  por  poco  se  deja^V.  atropellar  por  el 
omnibus. — \  Caspita  !  j  que  mu'jer  tan  hermosa  ! 

15.  Si ;  pero  no  debe  V.  pararse  a  admirar  las  bellezas,  en  me- 
dio de  Broadway  en  su  punto  de  reunion  eon  la  Quinta  avenida, 
porque  corre  V.  peligro  de  ser  atropellado  por  los  earruajes  de 
todas  especies  que  continuamente  lo  atraviesan. 

16.  Don  Fernando,  i  son  todas  las  senoras  en  Nueva  York  tan 
hermosas  como  esa  que  acaba  de  pasar  ?  No  se,  porque  yo  solo 
mire  donde  ponia  los  pies,  procurando  escapar  al  mismo  tiempo 
de  los  earruajes  ;  pero  si  pod  re  deeirle  a  V.  que  mujeres  mas  her- 
mosas que  las  que  he  visto  yo  en  Nueva  York  no  creo  que  se  en- 
cuentren  en  ninguna  parte  del  mundo. 

17.  I  Oiga  V. !  e  no  hablan  espanol  esos  que  van  delante  de 
nosotros  ?  Eso  no  debe  V.  extraiiarlo  ;  esta  es  una  ciudad  cosmo- 
polita ;  en  ella  hay  gentes  de  todas  las  naciones  y  V.  oira  en  el 
trascurso  de  poco  tiempo  hablar  aleman,  espafLol,  frances  y  otras 
muchas  lenguas. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  What  do  you  understand  by  the  complement  of  a  verb  ? 
It  is  a  phrase  or  a  part  of  a  phrase  that  serves  to  complete  the 
idea  expressed  by  the  verb. 

2.  Can  you  tell  me  what  a  cosmopolitan  is  ?  A  cosmopoli- 
tan is  one  who  is  not  a  stranger  in  any  country,  a  citizen  of  the 
world. 

3.  Where  does  that  gentleman  live  ?  On  Fifth  avenue,  at 
the  corner  of  Twenty-second  street. 

4.  How  long  has  your  uncle  been  a  member  of  the  Eoyal 
Academy  of  Madrid  ?  He  is  not  a  member  of  the  Royal  Acade- 
my of  Madrid ;  but  he  has  been  a  member  of  the  Academy  of 
Sciences  for  the  last  ten  years. 

5.  Take  that  book  from  Charles  and  give  it  to  Peter.  I  shall 
give  him  some  other  book,  because  if  I  took  that  one  from  Charles 
he  would  cry. 

6.  Is  your  friend  married  ?    No,  sir,  he  is  a  bachelor. 

7.  Have  you  ever  seen  Da  Vinci's  celebrated  painting,  "  The 
Last  Supper"?*    No;  but  I  have  seen  the  engraving  of  that 

*  La  cena. 


LESSON  LIL 


301 


painting,  made  by  Morghen,  and  it  is  a  fact  admitted  by  every 
one,  that,  notwithstanding  the  absence  of  color,  that  engraving 
is  a  true  reproduction  of  the  original. 

8.  How  long  does  it  take  to  go  from  here  to  Central  Park  ? 
But  a  short  time ;  the  distance  is  not  very  great. 

9.  Could  you  run  there  in  as  short  a  time  as  one  could  go  in 
a  carriage  ?  I  do  not  doubt  that  I  could,  if  I  started  from  the 
same  place  and  at  the  same  time  as  the  carriage. 

10.  How  are  the  several  States  of  the  Union  divided  ?  Into 
Northern,  Southern,  Eastern,  and  Western. 

11.  Is  that  not  the  tallest  man  you  have  ever  seen  ?  Far  from 
it ;  I  have  seen  several  much  taller. 

12.  Have  they  been  able  to  fill  that  position  yet  ?  I  believe 
not ;  I  understand  that  one  of  our  friends  was  about  to  apply  for 
it  (pretenderlo),  but  his  father  was  opposed  to  his  doing  it,  and 
so  he  would  not  persist. 

13.  How  far  did  you  go  before  finding  him  ?  I  walked  about 
half  an  hour  by  the  river  side,  inquiring  of  every  one  I  met, 
whether  he  had  seen  a  young  man  on  horseback ;  and  at  last  an 
old  man  told  me  that  he  had  seen  him  cross  the  river,  nearly 
opposite  the  new  building  which  they  are  putting  up  (erecting) 
at  a  short  distance  from  the  entrance  to  the  public  promenade. 

14.  Are  there  any  fine  public  walks  in  the  metropolis  ?  Some 
seven  or  eight  beautiful  ones,  the  most  of  which  have  been  made 
within  the  last  five  years. 


LESSON    LII. 


Aconsejar. 

Aprovechar. 

Consistir. 

Colorir. 

Citar. 

Costar. 

Comunicar. 

Demostrar. 

Deteriorar. 

Expresar. 

Freir. 

Grabar. 


To  counsel,  to  advise. 
To  profit,  to  embrace  (profit  by) 
To  consist. 
To  color  (paintings). 
To  quote,  to  cite. 
To  cost. 

To  communicate. 
To  demonstrate,  to  point  out. 
To  deteriorate. 
To  express. 
To  fry. 

To  engrave,  to  impress  on  the 
mind. 


302 


LESSON  LIL 


Tomarse  (el  trabajo). 

Prender. 

Perfeccionar. 

Merecer. 

Reiinir. 

Remunerar. 
Visitar. 


To  take  the  trouble. 
To  take  up,  to  arrest. 
To  perfect. 
To  merit,  to  deserve. 
To  gather,  to  assemble,  to  re- 
unite. 
To  remunerate. 
To  visit,  to  search. 


Por  ejemplo. 

For  instance. 

Que  yo  sepa. 

For  all  I  know. 

List  of  the  Irregular  Past  Participl 

es  and  Participial  Adjectives  of  all 

the  Verbs  already  introduced. 

Abierto.                Opened. 

Frito. 

Fried. 

Bendito.               Blessed. 

Hecho. 

Done. 

Contradicho.       Contradicted. 

Impuesto. 

Imposed. 

Convicto.             Convicted. 

Muerto. 

Died. 

Compuesto.         Composed. 

Manifiesto. 

Manifested. 

Dicho.                  Said,  told. 

Oculto. 

Hidden,  con- 

Devuelto.           Given  back,  re- 

cealed. 

turned. 

Opuesto. 

Opposed. 

Dispuesto.            Disposed. 

Preso. 

Taken,  arrested. 

Escrito.                Written. 

Puesto. 

Placed,  put. 

Electo.                 Elected. 

Provisto. 

Provided. 

Expreso.              Expressed. 

Koto. 

Broken. 

Expuesto.            Exposed. 

Satisfecho. 

Satisfied. 

Visto.                   Seen. 

Yuelto. 

Returned. 

Amplio. 

Ample. 

Actual. 

Present. 

Antiguo. 

Ancient,  old 

Contemporaneo. 

Contemporary. 

Enemistado. 

At  variance, 

on  bad  terms. 

Dramatico. 

Dramatic. 

Moderno. 

Modern. 

Honroso. 

Honorable. 

Politico. 

Political. 

Cocinero. 
Capitan. 
Acierto. 
Colorido. 


Cook. 
Captain. 
Success. 
Coloring. 


Amenidad.     Agreeableness, 

amenity. 
Biblioteca.      Library. 
Cena.  Supper. 


LESSOJS'  LIL 

302 

Grabado. 

Engraving. 

Comedia. 

Comedy,  play. 

Fresco. 

Cool,  refreshing 

Costumbre. 

Custom,  habit. 

air. 

Erudicion. 

Erudition. 

Empleo. 

Employment. 

Fuente. 

Fountain,  source. 

Drama. 

Drama. 

Existencia. 

Existence. 

Estilo. 

Style. 

Elegancia. 

Elegance. 

Joven. 

Youth. 

Instriiccion. 

Instruction,  learn- 

Mercader. 

Dealer. 

ing. 

Paisano. 

Countryman. 

Ignorancia. 

Ignorance. 

Hecho. 

Action,  fact. 

Mencion. 

Mention. 

Siglo. 

Century. 

Literatura. 

Literature. 

Verso. 

Verse. 

Mediania. 

Moderation,     me- 

Soldado. 

Soldier. 

diocrity. 

Prosa. 

Prose. 

Novela. 

Novel. 

Politica. 

Politics. 

Tragedia. 

Tragedy. 

Vasija. 

Vase,  vessel. 

COMPOS 

5ITI0N. 

Esta  enemistado  con  su  primo. 
Colocado  en  vasijas. 
Ha  cantado  una  cancion  espanola. 
Los  caballos  que  han  comprado  los 

mercaderes  no  son  buenos. 
Los  caballos  que  fueron  comprados 

por  los  mercaderes  son  buenos. 
Estan  {or  quedan)  demostradas  estas 

verdades. 
La  cocinera  habia  f rito  {or  f reido)  el 

pescado. 
Han  prendido  {or  preso)  al  culpable. 
No  se  si  habran  ya  proveido  {or  pro- 

visto)  el  empleo. 

Has  roto  el  vaso. 

i  Ha  visto  V.  un  caballo  muerto  f 

No,  pero  he  visto  un  caballo  matado. 

%  Quien  ha  muerto  a  ese  caballo  ? 
Un  paisano  le  ha  muerto. 
El  capitan  fue  muerto  por  sus  sol- 
dados. 


He  is  on  bad  terms  with  his  cousin. 

Placed  in  vases  (or  vessels). 

He  has  sung  a  Spanish  song. 

The  horses  that  the  dealers  have 
bought  are  not  good. 

The  horses  that  were  bought  by  the 
dealers  are  good. 

These  truths  are  (or  stand)  demon- 
strated. 

The  cook  had  fried  the  fish. 

They  have  arrested  the  offender. 

I  do  not  know  whether  they  have 
already  arranged  for  (a  person  to 
fill)  the  position. 

You  have  broken  the  glass. 

Have  you  seen  a  dead  horse  ? 

No,  but  I  have  seen  a  horse  with  a 
sore  back. 

Who  killed  that  horse  ? 

A  countryman  killed  it. 

The  captain  was  killed  by  his  sol- 
diers: 


304 


LESSON  LIL 


]&1  se  ha  matado. 
£l  se  ha  muerto. 

Ese  es  un  joven  muy  leido,  muy  apro- 
vechado  y  muy  callado. 

Es  un  hecho  que  la  Cena  de  da 
Vinci  esta  felizmente  expresada 
en  el  grabado  de  Morghen,  no 
obstante  que  le  falta  el  colorido 
de  la  pintura. 

Aunque  el  fresco  de  la  Cena,  hecho 
por  da  Vinci,  esta  mal  colorido  y 
deteriorado,  ha  sido  grabado  con 
acierto  por  Morghen. 


He  killed  himself. 

He  died. 

That  young  man  is  well  read,  makes 
the  most  of  his  opportunities,  and 
talks  little. 

It  is  a  fact  that  Da  Vinci's  "  Last 
Supper"  is  happily  represented 
in  Morghen's  engraving,  notwith- 
standing the  fact  that  the  latter 
lacks  the  coloring  of  the  painting. 

Although  the  fresco  of  the  "Last 
Supper,"  made  by  Da  Vinci,  is 
badly  colored,  and  time  worn,  it 
has  been  engraved  with  success 
by  Morghen. 


EXPLANATION. 

265.  Past  Participles. — Some  past  participles  retain  the 
regimen  of  their  verbs ;  as, 

Enemistado  con  su  primo.  1  On  bad  terms  with  his  cousin. 

266.  The  past  participle  must  agree  in  gender  and  num- 
ber with  its  subject,  except  when  used  in  a  compound  tense 
with  the  verb  haber  alone,  in  which  case  it  is  unchangeable ; 
as. 


Ha  cantado  una  canci6n. 
Los  caballos  que  han  comprado  los 
mercaderes. 


He  has  sung  a  song. 
The  horses  that  the  dealers  have 
bought. 


But  the  past  participle,  if  it  comes  after  the  verbs  seVy 
estar,  quedar^  or  any  other,  except  haber,  agrees  with  the 
subject  in  gender  and  number ;  as, 


Los  caballos  que  fueron  comprados 

por  los  mercaderes. 
Estan  (or  quedan)  demostrados  estas 

verdades. 


The  horses  that  were  bought  by  the 
dealers. 

These  truths  are  (or  remain)  demon- 
strated. 


267.  Some  verbs  have  two  past  participles,  one  regular  and 
the  other  irregular.  These  are  used  quite  differently,  since 
the  irregular  one,  regarded  as  a  substantive,  is  employed  in 
an  absolute  sense  only,  and  never  signifies  motion,  whether  in 
the  active  or  in  the  passive  form.     For  this  reason  the  ir- 


LUSSON  LIL  305 

regular  participles  may  be  accompanied  by  the  verbs  9er, 
estar^  quedar^  and  others,  but  never  by  the  auxiliary  haber ; 
inasmuch  as  it  would  be  improper  to  say :  Jiuho  convido^  he 
contractor  instead  of,  Jmho  convencido^  he  contraido, 

268.  The  irregular  participles  frito^  fried ;  preso^  taken 
prisoner;  provisto^  provided,  and  roto^  broken,  may  be 
used  with  the  verb  haher^  to  form  the  compound  tenses; 
as, 


La  cocinera  habia  frito  (or  freido) 

el  pescado. 
Han  prendido  (or  preso)  al  culpable. 

No  se  si  habrdn  ya  proveido  (or  pro- 
visto)  el  empleo. 

Has  roto  el  vaso  {sounds  better  than 
has  rompido  el  vaso). 

269.  The  verb  matar,  in  the  sense  of  to  take  away  life, 
has  the  extraordinary  irregularity  of  appropriating  for  its 
past  participle  that  of  the  verb  morir  ;  the  participle  matado 
being  used  to  express  wounds  or  sores  in  animals,  resulting 
from  the  rubbing  of  the  harness,  or  from  cruel  treatment ;  as, 


The  cook  had  fried  the  fish. 

They  have  taken  (or  arrested)  the 

offender. 
I  do  not  know  whether  they  have 

already  provided  (a  person  to  fill) 

the  office. 
You  have  broken  the  glass. 


Un  caballo  matado. 
Un  caballo  muerto. 
Un  paisano  le  ha  muerto. 
El  capitan  fue  muerto  por  sus  sol- 
dados. 


A  horse  with  a  sore  back. 
A  dead  horse. 
A  countryman  killed  him. 
The  captain  was  killed  by  his  sol- 
diers. 


But  in  speaking  of  a  person  that  has  committed  suicide,  we 
must  say  : 

Se  ha  matado  (and  not  Se  ha  muer- 1  He  has  killed  himself. 
to),  I 

270.  Many  past  participles  are  used  as  adjectives  in  con- 
nection with  persons  ;  as, 

Un  joven  leido,  aprovechado,  calla- 1  A  well  read,  thrifty  and  silent  youth. 
do.  I 

271.  Past  participles  are  sometimes  used  as  substantives, 
and  the  difference  can  be  known  only  by  the  context,  as  seen 

in  this  sentence  : 
23 


306 


LESSON  LIL 


Es  un  hecho  que  la  Cena  de  da  Vinci 
esta  felizmente  expresada  en  el 
grahado  de  Morghen,  no  obstante 
que  le  f alta  el  colorido  de  la  pin- 
tura. 


It  is  a  fact,  that "  The  Last  Supper" 
by  Da  Vinci  is  happily  expressed 
in  the  engraving  of  Morghen,  not- 
withstanding the  latter  lacks  the 
coloring  of  the  painting. 


Where  the  words  hecho ^  grahado  and  colorido^  are  substan- 
tives, the  same  words  appear  as  participles  in  the  following 
phrases ; 


Aunque  el  fresco  de  la  Cena,  hecho 
por  da  Vinci,  estd  mal  colorido  y 
deteriorado,  ha  sido  grahado  con 
acierto  por  Morghen. 


Although  the  fresco  of  "  The  Last 
Supper,"  made  by  Da  Vinci,  is 
badly  colored  and  deteriorated,  it 
has  been  engraved  with  success  by 
Morghen. 


272.  Other  grammarians  add  one  more  tense  in  the  infini- 
tive mood ;  as, 

Haber  de  amar.  I  To  have  to  love. 

Habiendo  de  amar.  »  Having  to  love. 

Such  a  classification,  however,  is  no  longer  essential,  nor  even 
correct.  In  early  Spanish  literature  that  form  frequently  oc- 
curred, performing  the  office  now  almost  exclusively  filled  by 
the  regular  terminations  of  the  tenses,  and  chiefly  those  of 
the  future  indicative  and  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 

COXVERSATIOX  AND  VERSION. 

1.  i  Que  le  gusta  a  V.  mas,  la  conversacion  6  la  lectura  ? 
Ambas  cosas  me  gustan  mucho. 

2.  I  Que  genero  de  lectura  le  gusta  a  Y.  mas  ?  La  historia, 
la  comedia,  y  la  novela. 

3.  i  Prefiere  V.  la  prosa  al  verso  ?  No,  seiior,  la  poesia  me 
gusta  mas ;  pero  ha  de  ser  muy  buena,  porque  en  poesia  no  me 
gusta  la  mediania. 

4.  i  Que  autores,  en  la  literatura  moderna,  me  aconseja  V. 
que  lea  para  perfeccionarme  en  el  espanol  ?— En  historia  y  po- 
litica  lea  V.  a  Lafuente,  y  a  Minano. 

5.  i  Y  para  la  comedia  ?  A  Moratin,  Breton  de  los  Herreros 
y  Don  Ventura  de  la  Vega. 

6.  I  No  tienen  Yds.  otros  ?  Si,  senor ;  pero  yo  le  cito  a  V. 
solamente  los  mejores  y  solamente  a  los  contemporaneos. 


LESSON  LIL  307 

7.  I  Y  poetas  ?  Zorrilla,  Espronceda,  Hartzenbusch,  y  otros 
muchos. 

8.  I  Tienen  Vds.  algiin  buen  critico  contemporaneo  por  el 
estilo  del  antiguo  Quevedo  ?  Yo  creo  que  no  pueden  encon- 
trarse  dos  Quevedos ;  pero,  sin  embargo,  tenemos  criticos  de  cos- 
tumbres  muy  buenos,  tales  como  Larra  (Figaro),  Don  Ramon  de 
Mesonero  Romanos,  Pelegrin,  y  otros. 

9.  e  Tienen  Vds.  buenos  autores  para  la  tragedia  y  el  drama  ? 
Si,  seiior,  muy  buenos,  por  ejemplo,  Martinez  de  la  Rosa,  Garcia 
Gutierrez,  Gil  y  Zarate,  &c. 

10.  Yo  no  sabia  que  tuviesen  Yds.  tantos  autores  buenos  en  la 
literatura  actual. — Yo  pudiera  citarle  a  V.  otros  muchos ;  pero  si 
V.  reune  las  obras  de  los  catorce  mencionados  lograra  V.  tener 
una  pequeiiita  biblioteca  de  literatura  moderna,  que  le  ensenara 
a  V.  mas  espanol  que  todas  las  gramaticas  y  metodos  que  se  ban 
compuesto  para  enseiiar  esta  lengua  hasta  el  dia,  y  que  le  remu- 
neraran  a  Y.  ampliamente  por  el  trabajo  que  le  ha  costado  el 
aprenderla,  con  el  placer  y  la  instruccion  que  le  comunicaran. 

11.  I  Es  posible  !  Yo  habia  oido  decir,  y  asi  lo  habia  llegado 
a  creer  yo  mismo,  que  Espaiia  no  poseia  nada  que  mereciese  men- 
cion  en  su  literatura  moderna,  y  a  decir  verdad,  los  linicos  libros 
buenos  que  creia  que  Vds.  poseian  eran  el  Don  Quijote  de  Cer- 
vantes y  las  obras  dramaticas  de  Calderon  de  la  Barca. — Asi  lo 
he  oido  yo  decir  tambien,  y  en  verdad  que  es  una  cosa  que  no 
puedo  comprender,  esa  general  ignorancia  de  la  existencia  de 
una  literatura  espanola  contemporanea,  que  ha  producido  mas 
y  mejores  obras  que  las  que  se  ban  producido  en  algunos  siglos 
no  solamente  en  Espaiia  sino  en  otras  naciones. 

12.  I  Se  conocen  en  Espaiia  nuestros  autores  ingleses  contem- 
poraneos  ?  Se  conocen  mucho  mas  de  lo  que  aqui  son  conocidos 
los  espaiioles ;  la  prueba  es  que  la  mayor  parte  estan  traducidos 
al  castellano,  y  Vds.  no  tienen  ninguna  traduccion,  que  yo  sepa, 
de  todos  esos  autores  que  acabo  de  citarle  a  V. 

13.  Probablemente  consiste  en  que  los  americanos  e  ingleses 
no  aprenden  mucho  el  espaiiol.— Entre  los  americanos  debo  hacer 
tres  honrosas  excepciones,  que  son  :  Washington  Irving,  Prescott, 
y  Ticknor.  Estos  distinguidos  escritores  no  solo  aprendieron  el 
espanol,  sino  que  viajaron  en  Espaiia,  visitaron  nuestras  mejores 
bibliotecas  y  quiza  adquirieron  en  aquellas  fuentes  mucho  del 
saber,  la  erudicion,  el  gusto  y  la  elegancia  en  el  decir  que  comu- 
nican  a  sus  obras  tan  to  in  teres  y  amenidad. 


308  LESSON  LIL 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Ought  we  not  to  make  the  most  of  (profit  by)  every  occa- 
sion that  offers  for  acquiring  knowledge  ?  That  is  the  only  way 
to  arrive  at  the  possession  of  knowledge. 

2.  Tell  the  cook  that  I  wish  that  fish  not  to  be  fried.  It  is 
too  late  to  tell  her  so ;  she  has  already  fried  it. 

3.  Has  that  work  been  translated  into  Spanish  ?  Not  that 
I  know  of ;  but  it  was  finely  translated  into  French,  by  M.  de 
rOrme,  a  few  years  ago. 

4.  Is  not  that  gentleman  to  whom  you  introduced  me  a  short 
time  since  a  dramatist  ?  He  is,  and  his  plays  might  serve  as  a 
model  of  elegance  for  many  dramatists  of  greater  pretensions 
{pretensiones). 

5.  Have  they  found  out  yet  who  set  fire  to  your  uncle's 
house  ?  Yes ;  and  the  offender  has  been  arrested  and  convicted 
of  the  crime. 

6.  Would  you  be  good  enough  to  lend  me  that  novel  a 
chapter  of  which  you  read  me  the  day  before  yesterday  ?  I 
should  with  great  pleasure  if  it  were  mine;  but  it  belongs  to 
Alexander ;  and,  as  we  are  on  bad  terms  at  present,  I  should  not 
like  to  ask  any  favors  of  him. 

7.  Would  that  painting  be  injured  *  by  being  exposed  to  the 
heat  of  the  sun  {sol)  ?  Certainly ;  and  the  heat  of  a  strong  fire 
would  produce  the  same  effect  upon  it. 

8.  Did  your  friend,  the  captain,  return  with  his  regiment 
from  the  war  ?  No ;  he  was  killed  in  the  first  battle  that  took 
place  after  his  arrival  at  the  seat  (teatro)  of  war. 

9.  I  saw  no  mention  made  of  his  death  in  the  newspapers. 
No :  I  believe  his  name  did  not  appear  in  the  list  (lista)  of  the 
killed;  but  the  sad  news  was  communicated  to  his  brother  by 
an  oflftcer  of  the  same  regiment. 

10.  Do  you  like  to  walk  in  the  garden  in  the  morning  before 
breakfast  ?  I  generally  go  to  the  garden  every  morning  and 
evening  to  read  and  smoke  in  the  cool  air. 

11.  I  wish  you  had  bought  that  work  on  English  literature. 
So  do  I ;  it  would  have  been  very  useful  to  Louisa,  who  is  so 
desirous  of  becoming  perfect  in  that  language. 

12.  Did  your  father  think  Peter  merited  the  remuneration  he 
received  ?    I  do  not  know  whether  he  did  or  not ;  but,  at  all 

*  Deteriorar, 


LESSON  LIIL 


309 


events,  Peter  must  have  merited  some  remuneration,  or  other- 
wise he  would  not  have  gotten  any. 

13.  Are  you  going  to  have  your  name  engraved  on  your 
watch  ?    I  shall  have  only  my  initials  {inicial)  engraved  on  it. 

14.  What  kind  of  literature  does  your  aunt  like  best  ?  Ha  I 
you  ask  me  more  than  I  can  tell  you ;  I  really  cannot  say  whether 
she  has  any  opinion  in  the  matter ;  for  the  fact  is,  that  never  hav- 
ing regarded  her  as  a  woman  of  much  erudition,  I  have  not 
taken  the  trouble  to  ask  her. 


LESSOR    LIII. 


Agradar. 

To  please. 

Aguantar. 

To  bear  with,  to  put  up  with,  to 

suffer. 

Alcanzar. 

To  reach,  to  overtake,  to  catch. 

Alimentar. 

To  feed. 

Armar. 

To  arm. 

Bajar. 

To  go  (or  come)  down. 

Corretear. 

To  run  about. 

Conceder. 

To  concede,  to  grant. 

Distar. 

To  be  distant. 

Descomponer. 

To  decompose,  to   put   out   of 

order. 

Determiner. 

To  determine,  to  induce. 

Echar. 

To  throw,  to  put  (in). 

Exceder. 

To  exceed. 

Hinchar. 

To  swell. 

Nadar. 

To  swim. 

Prohibir. 

To  prohibit. 

Qui  tar. 

To  take  off,  to  take  away. 

Contrario. 

Contrary. 

Descompuesto. 

Decomposed,  out  of  order. 

Dotado. 

Endowed,  gifted. 

Excelente. 

Excellent. 

Indigno. 

Unworthy. 

Improviso. 

Improvised,  unexpected. 

Terrible. 

Terrible. 

310 

LESSON  LIIL 

Antojo. 

Desire,  longing, 

Alabanza. 

Praise. 

whim. 

Apariencia. 

Appearance. 

Alcance. 

Reach. 

Estocada. 

Thrust. 

Consejo. 

Counsel. 

Busca. 

Search. 

Discurso. 

Speech,  discourse. 

Comida. 

Dinner. 

Gatillo. 

Pincers  (dentist's). 

Custodia. 

Keeping. 

Juicio. 

Judgment,  trial. 

Edad. 

Age. 

Juramento. 

Oath,  affidavit. 

Hermosura. 

Beauty. 

Mar. 

Sea. 

Obligacion. 

Duty. 

Navio. 

Ship. 

Vela. 

Sail,  candle. 

Piso. 

Floor,  story. 

Travesura. 

Trick,  pertness. 

Tiro. 

Shot. 

Corrida  de  toros.  Bull-fight. 

Precepto. 

Precept. 

Oposicion. 

Opposition. 

Torero. 

Bull-fighter. 

Toro. 

Bull. 

Tribunal 

Tribunal,  court. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Correr  por  las  calles. 

Hablo  de  {or  sobre)  ese  negocio. 

I  Que  esta  V.  haciendo  f 

Estaba  para  decirselo  a  V. 

No  aleanzo  a  comprenderlo. 

Hace  las  cosas  a  su  antojo. 

Iba  en  busca  de  un  amigo. 

Me  opuse  a  ello. 

A  lo  largo  del  rio. 

Venga  V.  conmigo. 

No  se  que  determinar. 

De  ningun  modo. 

Esta  comiendo. 

Entro  por  la  ventana. 

Delante  de  mi  ventana. 

Ante  el  juez. 

Antes  de  ahora. 

Tales  acciones  son  indignas  de 

caballero. 
Parecia  fuera  de  si. 
Excede  a  toda  alabanza. 
Sin  duda  alguna.  • 

De  dia. 
Uno  a  uno. 
I  Por  donde  le  vino  d  V.  f 


To  run  about  the  streets. 
He  spoke  about  that  affair. 
What  are  you  doing  f 
I  was  about  to  tell  you. 
It  is  above  my  comprehension. 
He  does  things  after  his  own  fancy. 
I  was  in  search  of  a  friend. 
I  set  my  face  against  it. 
By  the  river  side. 
Come  along  with  me. 
I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act. 
Not  at  all. 
He  is  at  dinner. 
He  came  in  by  the  window. 
Before  my  window. 
Before  the  judge. 
Before  now. 

Such  actions  are  beneath  a  gentle- 
man. 
He  appeared  to  be  beside  himself. 
It  is  beyond  all  praise. 
Beyond  all  doubt. 
By  day. 
One  by  one. 
i  How  did  you  come  by  it  f 


LESSON  LIU. 


«11 


Luego. 

Por  mar. 

k.  la  mano. 

]&chelo  V.  en  tierra. 

En  cuanto  a  mi. 

Digaselo  V.  de  mi  parte. 

A  consecuencia  de  eso. 

De  acuerdo  con. 

Tenia  esperanza  de  que  serviria. 

Bajar  al  jardin. 

Todos  nosotros. 

Le  pido  a  V. 

t  Cuanto  distaf 

De  improviso. 

Quitese  V.  el  sombrero, 

Se  la  llev6. 

Le  deje  ir, 

Por  ese  motive. 

Adelante. 

Sobre  mi  palabra. 

Al  contrario. 

No  se  tratan. 

Les  impuso  esa  obligacion. 

Alimentarse  de  esperanzas. 

Venga  V.  el  doce  de  Mayo. 

Al  (or  del)  otro  lado. 

Se  acab6. 

Vuelva  V.  a  leerlo. 

De  miedo. 

Fuera  de  peligro. 

Fuera  de  casa. 

Esta  sin  dinero. 

Descompuesto. 

Perdio  el  juicio. 

Por  curiosidad. 

Estar  de  mal  humor. 

Pasare  a  su  casa  de  V. 

Pasamos  por  Francia. 

Le  atraveso  de  parte  a  parte, 

Por  el. 

Por  medio  de  el. 

De  dia  en  dia. 

Segun  las  aparienciar. 


By  and  by. 

By  sea. 

At  hand. 

Throw  it  down. 

As  for  me. 

Tell  him  that  for  me. 

In  consequence  of  that. 

In  accordance  with. 

I  was  in  hopes  it  would  do. 

To  go  down  to  the  garden. 

All  of  us. 

I  beg  of  you. 

How  far  is  it  ? 

Off-hand. 

Take  off  your  hat. 

He  carried  her  off. 

I  let  him  off. 

On  that  account. 

Go  on. 

On  my  word. 

On  the  contrary. 

They  are  not  on  good  terms. 

He  imposed  that  obligation  upon 

them. 
To  live  on  hope. 
Come  on  the  12th  of  May. 
Over  the  way,  on  the  other  side. 
It  is  all  over. 
Read  it  over  again. 
From  fear,  for  fear. 
Out  of  danger. 
Out  of  doors. 
He  is  out  of  money. 
Out  of  order. 
She  is  out  of  her  mind. 
Out  of  curiosity. 
To  be  in  bad  humor. 
I  shall  go  to  your  house. 
We  passed  through  France. 
He  ran  him  through. 
Through  {i.  e.,  on  account  of)  him. 
Through  (*.  e.,  by  means  of)  him. 
From  day  to  day. 
According  to  appearances. 


312 


LESSON  LIIL 


Eso  esta  aun  por  venir. 

Diez  contra  uno. 

Hasta  hoy. 

El  navio  esta  a  la  vela. 

Es  menor  de  edad. 

Bajo  juraraento. 

Hacia  alia. 

4  Estan  levantados  f 

Al  segundo  piso. 

Que  suban  la  comida. 

Le  pusieron  en  custodia. 

Hincharse  de  soberbia. 

No  la  puedo  agnantar. 

Armese  V.  de  paciencia. 

Su  hermosura  me  sorprendio. 

No  la  conozco. 

Dotado  de  virtudes. 

Me  agrado  su  discurso. 

A  tiro  de  pistola. 

A  mi  alcance. 

No  hay  nadie  en  casa. 

Asomado  a  una  ventana. 


That  is  yet  to  come. 

Ten  to  one. 

To  this  day. 

The  ship  is  under  sail. 

He  is  under  age. 

Under  oath. 

Up  that  way. 

Are  they  up  ? 

Up  two  flights  of  stairs. 

Let  them  bring  up  the  dinner. 

He  was  taken  into  custody. 

To  be  puffed  up  with  pride. 

I  cannot  put  up  with  her. 

Arm  yourself  with  patience. 

I  was  struck  with  her  beauty. 

I  am  not  acquainted  with  her. 

Endowed  with  virtues. 

I  was  pleased  with  his  discourse. 

Within  pistol-shot. 

Within  my  reach. 

There  is  nobody  within. 

At  a  window. 


EXPLANATION. 

273.  Idioms  are  certain  peculiar  modes  of  expression 
which  cannot  be  translated  literally  into  another  language. 
We  have  already  introduced  some  Spanish  as  well  as  English 
idioms ;  but  they  are  very  numerous  in  all  languages,  and  it 
would  be  as  unnecessary  to  give  within  the  compass  of  a 
grammar  all  those  peculiar  to  the  Spanish  language,  as  it 
would  be  to  introduce  all  its  words.  The  student  will  find 
them  in  the  several  dictionaries,  and  principally  in  the  works 
of  good  writers. 

However,  we  have  introduced  in  the  "Composition"  of  this 
lesson  as  many  as  the  limits  of  this  book  would  permit ;  giving 
examples  of  phrases  in  which  the  English  preposition  differs 
in  meaning  from  that  which  most  generally  constitutes  its 
proper  signification,  and  consequently  must  be  translated  by 
words  correspondingto  those  in  the  place  of  which  it  stands;  as, 

No  se  que  determinar.  i         I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act. 

De  ningiin  mode.  I         Not  at  all. 


LESSON  LIIL  313 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  e  Donde  esta  Alejandro  ?    Esta  corriendo  por  las  calles. . 

2.  i  Por  que  no  me  lo  dijiste  antes  ?  Estaba  para  decirselo 
aV. 

3.  Yo  no  quiero  que  ande  correteando  calles. — Creo  que  iba 
en  busca  de  su  amigo. 

4.  Se  lo  tengo  prohibido ;  pero  el  no  me  obedece,  y  hace  las 
cosas  a  su  antojo. — Yo  me  opuse  a  ello,  y  le  dije  que  V.  queria  ir 
a  paseo  con  todos  nosotros. 

5.  Don  Carlos,  si  V.  desea,  ire  a  buscarlo. — De  ningiin  modo, 
V.  no  lo  encontraria ;  lo  que  temo  es  que  haga  alguna  travesura 
que  le  cueste  cara. 

6.  Yo  creo  que  subiendo  a  lo  largo  del  rio  lo  encontrare,  por- 
que  si  no  me  engano  le  oi  decir  que  queria  ir  a  nadar. — No  se  que 
determinar,  pero  no,  mejor  sera  dejarlo,  vamonos  nosotros  a  paseo 
(or  vamos). 

7.  Su  hermano  Manuel  es  muy  diferente,  excede  a  toda  ala- 
banza  y  siempre  obedece  los  preceptos  de  su  papa. — Sin  duda 
alguna  Manuel  es  un  mucbacho  excelente. 

8.  i  Hola !  aqui  viene  Juanito.  l  Va  Y.  al  campo  con  noso- 
tros ?  Con  mucho  gusto ;  pero  antes  tengo  que  pedir  a  V.  un 
favor. 

9.  Delo  V.  por  concedido.— ^  Palabra  de  honor  ?— Sobre  mi 
palabra.    e  Que  es  ? 

10.  Que  perdone  V.  a  Alejandro.— I  Vaya !  sea  asi,  puesto  que 
di  mi  palabra ;  i  pero  donde  esta  ?  Se  escondio  y  no  se  atreve  a 
presentarse  de  miedo,  pero  ahora  lo  veo  asomado  a  una  ventana 
en  el  segundo  piso  de  su  casa  de  Y. 

11.  Yo  creo  que  ha  perdido  el  juicio  ese  muchacho ;  venga  Y 
aca,  senor  mio,  y  cuentenos  que  ha  hecho  en  todo  este  tiempo 
que  ha  estado  fuera  de  casa.— Papa,  perdoneme  Y.,  que  no  lo  vol- 
vere  a  hacer  otra  vez. 

12.  Bien,  bien,  dejemoslo  asi  por  esta  vez. 

13.  i  Don  Jose,  como  esta  su  hermana  de  Y.  ?  Esta  mejor  y 
esperamos  que  ya  esta  fuera  de  peligro. 

14.  ^  Mato  el  torero  al  toro  a  la  primera  estocada  ?  Si,  seiior, 
a  la  primera  estocada  lo  atraveso  de  parte  a  parte. 

15.  i  No  se  trata  Y.  con  su  vecino  ?  No,  seiior,  es  un  hombre 
lleno  de  soberbia,  a  quien  no  puedo  aguantar. 

16.  i  Se  dio  el  navio  a  la  vela  para  la  Habana  ?  Si,  senor,  el 
navio  esta  a  la  vela. 


314  LESSON  LIIL 

17.  I  Pusieron  al  culpable  en  custodia  ?  No,  seiior,  le  dejaron 
bajo  juramento  de  que  se  presentaria  en  el  tribunal. 

18.  i  Conoce  V.  a  la  Senorita  Sanchez  ?  Hace  poco  tiempo 
que  hice  su  conocimiento,  su  hermosura  me  sorprendio  y  es  una 
senorita  dotada  de  grandes  virtudes. 

19.  e  Viajo  V.  el  verano  pasado  por  mar  6  por  tierra  ?  Por 
supuesto  por  mar,  puesto  que  fui  a  Europa. 

20.  i  Pasaron  Yds.  por  Francia  ?  Si,  senor,  pasamos  por  Fran- 
cia,  y  el  doce  de  Mayo  entramos  en  Paris. 

21.  i  Esta  Y.  de  mal  humor  ?  Si,  senor,  malisimo,  porque 
tengo  un  terrible  dolor  de  muelas. 

22.  Le  aconsejo  a  V.  que  se  arme  de  paciencia.— Mil  gracias, 
por  su  buen  consejo,  pero  creo  que  sera  mejor  armarse  de  un 
buen  gatillo. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  How  does  that  man  spend  his  time  ?  He  seems  to  do 
nothing  but  run  about  the  streets. 

2.  Is  not  your  uncle's  sight  good  ?  No,  sir ;  and  that  is  the 
reason  why  he  wears  spectacles. 

3.  Is  that  the  way  you  spell  (escribir)  that  word  ?  Oh,  no, 
of  course  not ;  I  must  take  out  one  of  the  e's. 

4.  Does  your  watch  keep  good  time  (andar  bien)  ?  Yes, 
when  it  goes,  which  occurs  very  rarely  * ;  it  gets  out  of  order 
about  twice  a  month. 

5.  Did  you  see  the  Spanish  man-of-war  (ship  of  war)  that 
came  into  port  (puerto)  last  month  ?  Yes,  I  saw  it  the  day  it 
set  sail  {darse  d  la  vela)  to  return  to  Spain. 

6.  Did  you  go  to  see  a  bull-fight  during  your  stay  at  Madrid  ? 
I  did;  and  although  I  do  not  like  it  myself,  I  could  not  help 
(no  poder  menos  de)  admiring  the  amazing  dexterity  of  the  men 
(bull-fighters)  who  dared  to  expose  their  lives  in  attacking  the 
furious  animal. 

7.  How  many  stories  are  there  to  the  house  in  which  you 
live  ?    Three ;  I  generally  sleep  on  the  third  floor. 

8.  Cannot  you  induce  him  to  stay  at  home  ?  No,  he  wishes 
to  go ;  it  is  a  whim  of  his,  and  he  will  not  bear  any  opposition. 

9.  Were  you  in  court  at  the  time  of  the  trial  ?  No,  I  could 
not  go  down  town  that  day. 

*  Mara  vez. 


LESSON  LIV, 


315 


10.  How  far  had  he  gone  before  you  overtook  him  ?  I  caught 
tip  with  him  at  the  corner  of  the  street. 

11.  How  is  your  cousin  getting  on  ?  Pretty  well ;  but  his  arm 
is  still  swollen,  and  to  all  appearance  it  pains  him  very  much. 

12.  I  wonder  how  he  can  bear  up  under  so  much  suffering* 
He  lives  in  the  hope  of  getting  better  one  day  or  other. 

13.  Did  that  man  swear  he  had  not  been  there  ?  He  made 
(prestar)  affidavit  that  he  had  never  set  (put)  his  foot  in  the 
house. 

14.  What  a  beautiful  young  lady  that  is  !  That  is  true ;  but 
her  learning  by  far  exceeds  her  beauty. 


LESSON    LIV. 

Apegarse. 

To  adhere  to,  to  be  attached. 

Criar. 

To  raise  (breed),  to  bring  up. 

Concebir. 

To  conceive. 

Continuar. 

To  continue. 

Encerrar. 

To  shut  up. 

Guardar. 

To  guard,  to  take  care,  to  keep. 

Pintar. 

To  paint. 

Presidir. 

To  preside. 

Ponderar. 

To  make  much  of,  to  praise. 

Combatir. 

To  combat. 

Peducir. 

To  reduce. 

Rodar. 

To  roll. 

Sacudir. 

To  shake,  to  shake  off. 

Tirar. 

To  pull,  to  draw,  to  throw,  to 

throw  out  (or  away). 

Llenar. 

To  fill. 

Entusiasmar. 

To  render  enthusiastic. 

Al  cabo. 

After  all,  finally,  at  the  end. 

De  repente. 

Suddenly,  on  a  sudden. 

No  obstante. 

Notwithstanding. 

Si  acaso. 

If  at  all,  in  case. 

Si  bien. 

Although. 

Amarillo. 

Yellow. 

Azul. 

Blue. 

316 

LESSON  LIV. 

Anaranjado. 

Orange. 

• 

Atento. 

Attentive. 

Confuso. 

Confused. 

Feroz. 

Fierce. 

Bondadoso. 

Kind. 

Favorite 

Favorite. 

Griego. 

Greek. 

Anil. 

Indigo. 

Ligero. 

Light,  slig 

ht,  speedy. 

Lleno. 

Full. 

Montaraz. 

Mountaineer,  wild. 

Vistoso. 

Conspicuous,  showy. 

Colorado,  rojo. 

Red. 

Eomano. 

Roman. 

Particular. 

Particular 

,  private,  rare. 

Picante. 

Pungent. 

Temerario. 

Daring,  rash. 

Violado. 

Violet  (color). 

Verde. 

Green. 

Prismatico. 

Prismatic. 

Cabo. 

End. 

Algazara. 

Shouts  (of  joy). 

Circo. 

Siege,  circus. 

Autoridad. 

Authority. 

Color. 

Color. 

Confusion. 

Confusion. 

Bullicio. 

Purapus,  noise, 

Carcajada. 

Burst  of  laughter. 

bustle. 

Corrida. 

Fight  (bull),  race. 

Ceremonial. 

Ceremony. 

Violeta. 

Violet  (flower). 

Espectro  solar. 

Solar  spectrum. 

Diversion. 

Diversion. 

Goce. 

Delight,  joy. 

Clase. 

Class. 

Dicho. 

Saying. 

Infancia. 

Infancy. 

Desierto. 

Desert. 

Idea. 

Idea. 

Interes. 

Interest. 

Fiesta. 

Feast,  festival. 

Guante. 

Glove. 

Guinada. 

Wink. 

Leon. 

Lion. 

Ocupacion. 

Occupation. 

Local. 

Situation. 

Corrida  de 

Bull-fight 

Entusiasmo. 

Enthusiasm. 

toros. 

Enemigo. 

Enemy. 

Pelota. 

Ball. 

Lloro. 

Tears,  cry. 

Plaza  de 

Arena. 

Paso. 

Step,  pace. 

toros. 

Prisma. 

Prism. 

Proeza. 

Prowess,  exploits. 

Rumor. 

Rumor. 

Sonrisa. 

Smile. 

LESSON  LIV, 

Ser. 

Being. 

Valentia. 

Bravery. 

Traje. 

Dress,  costume. 

Jaula. 

Cage. 

Recibimiento. 

Reception. 

Suelo. 

Ground. 

Grito. 

Shout,  cry. 

COMPOSITION. 

317 


Los  vimos  cuando  entrabamos. 

Si  no  hubiera  sido  por  mi,  lo  habrian 

matado. 
Yo    iria  si  no  creyera  que    f uese 

iniitil. 
Diga  V.  si  vendra  6  no. 
Que  venga  6  que  no  venga.» 
Dudo  que  lo  sepa. 
Por  atentos  y  bondadosos  que  sean 

{or  no  obstante  lo  atentos  que  son) 

y  por  bondadosos  que  sean. 
Es  raenester  que  se  cuide  V.,  porque 

si  no  se  enfermara. 
Es  menester  que  obedezca  V.  las  6r- 

denes ;  de  lo  contrario  suf rira  las 

consecuencias. 
6  yo  tengo  razon  6  el  la  tiene. 
Ni  prometas  ni  obres  sin  pensar. 

No  lo  haria  si  me  iraportara  la  vida 
{i.  6.,  aunque,  or  por  mas  que  me 
importara  la  vida. 

Valiente,  si  los  hay. 

Tuvo  el  valor,  si  tal  nombre  merece 
una  accion  temeraria  de  combatir 
solo  contra  tantos  enemigos. 

Quiero  saber  si  emplea  bien  el  tiem- 
po. 

^  Si  habra  Uegado  el  correo  ? 

Mira  si  viene. 

No  se  si  lo  hago. 

Si  (es  que)  acabo  de  entrar. 

Si  (cuando)  el  al  cabo  ha  de  venir. 

Si  (es  que)  no  es  eso. 

Si  (ya)  lo  dije. 


We  saw  them  as  we  were  entering. 

But  for  me,  they  would  have  killed 
him. 

I  should  go,  did  I  not  think  it  use- 
less. 

Say  whether  you  will  come  or  not. 

Whether  he  come  or  not. 

I  doubt  whether  she  knows  it. 

However  attentive  they  are,  and 
however  kind  they  may  be. 

You  must  take  care  of  yourself,  for 

if  you  do  not  you  will  be  ill. 
You  must  obey  the  orders ;  for  if  you 

transgress  them,  you  will  suffer 

the  consequences. 
Either  I  am  right  or  he  is. 
Neither    promise  nor  act  without 

thinking. 
I  would  not  do  it,  though  my  life 
were  at  stake. 

A  valiant  man,  if  there  are  any  in 

the  world. 
He  had  the  courage,  if  the  rash  action 

of  fighting  alone  against  so  many 

enemies  is  worthy  of  such  a  name. 
I  wish  to  know  whether  he  employs 

his  time  profitably. 
If  the  mail  should  have  arrived  ? 
See  if  he  is  coming. 
I  do  not  know  whether  to  do  it  or  not. 
I  have  but  just  come  in. 
For,  after  all,  he  must  come. 
But  that  is  not  it. 
But  I  said  so. 


318  LESSON  LIY, 

Si  (porque)  no  hay  cosa  que  yo  haga.  I  For  I  do  nothing  at  all. 


Apenas  si  se  ola  el  confuso  rumor 
de  los  pasos. 


The  confused  tramping  of  feet  could 
scarcely  be  heard. 


EXPLANATION. 

274.  There  are  several  conjunctions  in  English  that  are 
frequently  used  as  substitutes  for  other  words ;  these  conjunc- 
tions are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  words  which 
they  stand  in  the  place  of ;  as, 

Los  vimos  cuando  entrabamos.  i  We  saw  them  as  we  were  going  in, 

Diga  V.  si  quiere  venir  6  no.  |  Say  whether  you  will  come  or  not. 

275.  The  Spanish  conjunctions  are  also  often  used  as 
substitutes  for  other  words  of  very  different  meanings.  Let 
si  and  que  serve  as  examples  : 

Si^  as  an  adverb,  is,  as  we  have  already  observed,  affirma- 
tive, except  when  employed  ironically. 

/SV,  as  a  conjunction,  may  be  employed  in  a  variety  of  sig- 
nifications.    The  following  are  some  of  its  principal  uses : 

1st.  To  denote  the  condition  on  which  depends  the  accom- 
plishment of  an  action  ;  as, 

Si  quieres  acompafiarme,  voy  a  sa- 1  If  you  will  accompany  me,  I  am 
lir.  I     going  out. 

2d.  To  express  indispensable  conditions ;  as, 

Tendras  el  caballo  si  lo  pagas.  I  You  will  have  the  horse  if  you  pay 

I     for  it. 

3d.  In  the  sense  of  although,  or  even  though  ;  as, 
No  lo  haria  si  me  importara  la  vida 
{i.  e.,  aunqtie  or  por  mas  que,  me 
importara  la  vida). 


I  should  not  do  it,  even  though  my 
life  were  at  stake. 


4th.  In  familiar  conversation  this  conjunction  is  oftex 
employed  in  meanings  very  different  from  those  we  have  just 
explained.  For  instance,  it  is  often  used  instead  of  es  que,  it 
is  because ;  cuando,  when ;  porque,  because  ;  and  not  unfre- 
quently  instead  of  ya,  already,  as  we  read  in  one  of  Moratin's 
comedies : 

Si  (es  que)  acabo  de  entrar.  1 1  have  just  entered. 

Si  (cuando)  el  al  cabo  ha  de  venir.      I  For,  after  all,  he  must  come. 


LESSOJS   LIV,  319 


But  that  is  not  it. 

But  I  said  so  (or  did  say  so). 

For  I  do  nothing  at  all 


Si  (es  que)  no  es  eso. 
Si  (ya)  lo  dije. 

Si  (porque)  no   hay  cosa   que  yo 
haga. 

5th.  It  is  often  used  redundantly ;  as, 
Apenas  si  se  oia  el  confuso  rumor  de  |  The  confused  tramping  of  feet  could 
los  pasos.  I     scarcely  be  heard. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  ^  Iria  V.  a  ver  a  su  hermano  si  tuviera^tiempo  ?  Yo  iria  si 
no  creyera  que  fuese  iniitil. 

2.  Diga  V.  si  vendra  6  no. — Amigo  mio,  temo  salir,  porque 
hace  mal  tiempo,  y  es  menester  que  me  cuide  porque  si  no  enfer- 
mare. 

3.  i  Estuvo  V.  ayer  a  ver  el  recibimiento  del  Presidente  ? 
No,  seiior,  mis  ocupaciones  no  me  lo  permitieron. 

4.  I  Cuales  son  los  colores  en  que  se  descompone  el  espectro 
solar  ?    Viol  ado,  anil,  azul,  verde,  amarillo,  anaranjado  y  rojo. 

5.  ^  De  que  color  tine  V.  sus  guantes  ?    Los  tiiio  de  amarillo. 

6.  I  Que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  este  ejercicio  ?  No  me  gusta  de  nin- 
giin  modo,  y  si  continua  tan  interesante  como  hasta  aqui,  creo 
que  me  hara  dormir. 

7.  ^  Que  costumbres  le  gustan  a  V.  mas,  las  de  Espana  6  las 
de  los  Estados  Unidos  ?  Naturalmente,  como  espanol,  me  gustan 
mas  las  de  Espana. 

8.  Pero  i  cuales  son  las  mejores  ?  No  sabre  decirselo  a  V., 
cada  nacion  tiene  las  suyas  y  cada  individuo  se  apega  desde  su 
infancia  a  las  de  su  propio  pais. 

9.  I  Cual  es  la  diversion  favorita  del  pueblo  espanol  ?  Las 
corridas  de  toros  ;  esto  se  entiende  hablando  del  pueblo  en  gene- 
ral y  aun  de  muchos  caballeros  de  la  primera  clase  de  la  socie- 
dad  ;  pero  no  de  todos,  porque  hay  muchos,  principalmente, 
seiioras,  que  jamas  han  visto  una  corrida  de  toros. 

10.  Debe  ser  una  diversion  muy  cruel  y  muy  peligrosa. — No 
deja  de  ser  peligrosa,  pues  los  toros  de  Espana  son  mas  feroces  y 
ligeros  que  los  de  ninguna  parte  del  mundo,  criados  con  este  ob- 
jeto  montaraces,  de  modo  que  cuando  de  improviso  se  encuen- 
tran  en  la  plaza  muestran  una  ferocidad  y  una  valentia  en  nada 
inferior  a  la  de  un  leon  de  los  desiertos  del  Africa,  que  se  encon- 
trase  de  repente  en  estos  circos  llenos  de  seres  humanos. 

11.  I  Quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  relatarme  una  corrida  de 


320  LESSON  LIY. 

toros  ?  Lo  haria  con  mucho  gnsto  ;  pero  se  que  no  podria  hacerlo 
como  merece  esta  antigua  diversion,  en  algo  semejante  a  los  cir- 
cos  de  los  griegos  y  romanos. 

12.  i  Vamos !  prnebe  V. — Pero  si  es  imposible,  y  aunque 
llegara  a  pintarle  a  V.  el  local,  los  vistosos  trajes,  tan  to  del 
pueblo  como  de  los  toreros,  los  curiosos  ceremoniales  de  la  fiesta, 
las  autoridades  que  la  presiden,  las  tropas  que  la  guardan ;  la 
miisica,  el  bullicio,  los  dichos  picantes,  las  sonrisas,  las  guinadas, 
los  lloros  y  carcajadas,  todo  esto  no  serviria  de  nada  para  ha- 
cerle  a  V.  concebir  una  pequena  idea  del  gozo  y  entusiasmo  que 
anima  al  pueblo  espanol  en  una  corrida  de  toros. 

13.  I  Es  posible  I  i  Con  que  todo  eso  hay  !  pues  yo  creia  que 
se  reducia  a  una  carniceria  de  vacas  y  caballos. — Pues  si  V.  estu- 
viera  en  Madrid  le  sucederia  como  a  todos  los  extranjeros,  que  a 
pesar  de  criticarnos  esta  diversion,  jamas  pierden  una  corrida  de 
toros. 

14.  Pero  I  en  que  puede  consistir  esegoce  que  Y.  me  pondera? 
i  Goce  !  hombre,  he  visto  yo  tirar  a  la  plaza  el  baston,  el  bolsillo 
y  hasta  el  reloj,  entusiasmado  de  la  proeza  de  algiin  toreador. 
Eso  era  lo  que  yo  le  decia  a  V.  que  no  era  facil  de  pintar,  porque 
no  consiste  en  la  cosa  misma  por  mas  interes  que  tenga  sino  en 
la  disposicion  particular  y  el  entusiasmo  de  cada  uno.  Y  si  no, 
digame  V.  en  el  juego  del  fragata  *  americano  en  que  no  se  ve 
otra  cosa  que  una  pelota  que  rueda  por  el  suelo,  6  se  eleva  por  el 
aire,  despedida  por  un  garrote.  .  .  .  j  j  j  Que  es  lo  que  mueve  toda 
aquella  algazara  y  ruido  y  confusion  y  gritos  de,  Hola  ! ! !  Wil- 
lie !! !  Charley  ! ! !  Here  ! ! !  Here  ! ! !  Kun  ! ! !  James  ! ! !  Hurra  I !  I 
Hurra  ! ! ! 

15.  Ha,  ha,  ha ;  V.  me  hace  reir  con  su  corrida  de  toros. 
I  Vaya !  me  alegro,  algo  se  ha  ganado,  porque  al  principio  yo 
creia  que  V.  se  iba  a  dormir. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Had  not  you  better  leave  a  line  for  him  in  case  he  should 
come  ?  I  think  it  would  be  better  ;  notwithstanding  the  fact 
that  it  seems  impossible  for  him  to  reach  here  to-night. 

2.  Do  the  boys  still  continue  to  take  lessons  ?  One  of  them 
still  continues,  although  he  is  the  least  studious  of  the  three  ;  the 
other  two  gave  up  all  of  a  sudden  last  month. 

*  Base  ball. 


LESSON  LIV,  321 

3.  What  shouts  are  those  I  hear  up-stairs  ?  Charles  has 
some  friends  with  him,  and  they  are  getting  enthusiastic  on  the 
occasion  of  the  President's  visit  to  the  city. 

4.  Do  you  know  how  to  keep  a  secret  ?  I  wish  to  know  that 
before  I  tell  you  this  one.— I  do. — Well,  so  do  I. 

5.  I  suppose  *  they  gave  the  General  a  grand  reception  when 
he  returned  from  the  war  ?  A  magnificent  f  one,  fit  for  a  king ; 
it  was  Peter's  uncle  that  presided  at  it. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  how  many  prismatic  colors  there  are, 
and  what  are  their  names  ?    I  shall  try  ;  let  me  see :  Green, 

'  blue,  violet,  red,  orange,  yellow,  indigo. 

7.  What  is  the  best  time  for  learning  a  language  with  the 
least  trouble  ?  During  childhood  ;  at  that  age  the  study  of  lan- 
guages is  reduced  to  its  simplest  expression. 

8.  What  would  the  earth  be  without  the  light  and  heat 
which  we  receive  from  the  sun?  A  complete  desert;  neither 
man  nor  any  living  being  could  exist,  and  there  would  be  no 
vegetation ;  for  all  animated  nature  is  sustained  by  the  vivify- 
ing {vivificador)  effects  of  the  sun. 

9.  What  is  the  use  of  the  prism  ?  It  possesses  the  power  of 
decomposing  a  sunbeam  {rayo  del  sol),  thus  enabling  (poder)  ug 
to  see  separately  the  rays  of  the  different  colors  which  unite  to 
form  what  is  called  light. 

10.  Where  are  you  going  now  ?  it  is  not  yet  time  for  the 
theatre.  Why,  it  is  half-past  seven,  and  the  play  begins  at  eight 
sharp. 

11.  If  my  friend  should  have  come  while  I  was  out  ?  Oh,  I 
imagine  that  if  he  had  come  he  would  have  left  some  word 
(dejar  dicho)  for  you. 

12.  What  is  that  confused  tramping  of  feet  I  that  I  hear  in  the 
street  ?  A  crowd  of  people  running  to  see  a  fire  in  the  next 
street. 

13.  Do  you  hear  how  that  lady  praises  *  the  courage  of  the 
man  who  has  just  gone  into  the  lion's  cage  (jauld)  ?  I  do,  and 
I  was  just  thinking  that  she  might  find  an  occupation  of  more 
interest ;  besides,  I  do  not  see  any  proof  of  courage  in  such  a  rash 
action  as  that  of  shutting  one's  self  up  with  a  ferocious  animal 
like  the  lion. 

*  Suponer.  f  Magnifico. 

X  Rumor  de  pasos.  *  Aplaudir. 

23 


822 


LESSON  LV. 


14.  What  sort  of  dress  did  Miss  H.  wear  at  the  ball  ?  A  blue 
silk  dress,  with  violet  and  orange  trimmings  {guarniciones).  Can 
you  conceive  of  anything  more  detestable  ? 


LESSOR    LY. 

Afianzar. 
Conquistar. 
Construir. 
Fundar. 

Medir. 

To  secure,  to  fasten,  to  prop. 
To  conquer. 
To  construct,  to  build. 
To  found,  to  go  upon  (a  prin- 
ciple). 
To  measure. 

Portarse. 

To  conduct  one's  self,  to  be- 

have. 

Tirar. 

To  throw. 

Desigual. 
Extremado. 

Unequal. 
Extreme. 

Horrendo. 

Horrific. 

Distinto. 

Distinct. 

Ridiculo. 

Ridiculous. 

Inmemorial. 

Immemorial. 

Recto. 

Right,  straight. 

Auxilio. 

Castellano. 

Arabe. 

Crimen. 

Catalan 

Cimiento. 

Dialecto. 

Fulano. 

Gallego. 

Modelo. 

Defecto. 

Merito. 

Reino. 

Terreno. 

Titulo. 


Help. 

Castilian. 

Arab. 

Crime. 

Catalonian. 

Foundation. 

Dialect. 

Such    a    one, 

and  so. 
Galician. 
Model. 
Defect. 
Merit. 
Kingdom. 
Ground. 
Title. 


so 


Andalucia. 

Castilla. 

Cataluna. 

Corona. 

Avila. 

Galicia. 

Isabel. 

Imperfeccion. 

Irregularidad. 

Guipiizcoa. 

Igualdad. 

Medida. 

Pesa 

Nobleza. 


Andalusia. 

Castile. 

Catalonia. 

Crown. 

Avila. 

Galicia. 

Elizabeth,  Isa- 
bella. 

Imperfection. 

Irregularity. 

Guipuzcoa. 

Equality. 

Measure. 

Weight  (for 
weighing). 

Nobility. 


LESSON  LV, 


323 


Vascuence. 

Zutano. 

Escritorio. 


Basque. 
Such  a  one. 
Office. 


Persona. 

Regularidad. 

Valencia. 

Vizcaya. 

Universidad. 


Person. 

Regularity. 

Valencia. 

Biscay. 

University. 


COMPOSITION. 


Tratemos  ahora  de  descansar,  que 

sera  lo  mejor. 
Si  no  hay  virtudes,  que  son  el  ci- 

miento  de  la  libertad,  no  se  afian- 

zara  esta  en  los  pueblos. 
I  Que  hermosa  que  estas ! 
Ese  si  que  es  un  modo  de  portarse 

con  honor. 
Que  llaman. 
Que  me  deje  en  paz. 
J  Que  me  matan  ! 
En  much  as  obras  no  se  encuentra 

otro  (or  mas)  merito  que  el  estilo. 
Es  que  estoy  ocupado. 
Es  que   se  encuentra   sin    ningiin 

auxilio. 
Con  la  perdida  de  su   madre  esta 

todo  el  dia  llora  que  llora. 
;  Que  no  lo  hubiera  yo  sabido ! 
j,  Que  siempre  has  de  ser  un  holga- 

zanf 
Que  hermoso  cielo ! 
Que  horrenda  noche ! 
Que  cielo  tan  hermoso  I 
A  que  si. 
A  que  no. 
A  que  lo  digo. 
A  que  lo  hago. 
;  Que  de  crimenes  se  vieron ! 
i  Que  de  injusticias  no  se  cometen  ! 

I  Que !  ^  no  vienes  ? 
I  Fulano  !— ^  Qu6  ? 
Ire  a  paseo,  que  no  estare  siempre 

metido  en  casa. 
Que  quiera  que  no  quiera. 
No  es  hi  jo  mio,  que  si  lo  fuera . . . 


Let  us  try  to  rest  now  ;  that  will  be 

best. 
If  there  be  no  virtues,  which  are  the 

foundation  of  liberty,  it  will  have 

no  firm  foothold  among  nations. 
How  beautiful  you  are  ! 
That,  now,  is  an  honorable  way  of 

acting. 
Some  one  is  calling  (knocking). 
Let  him  leave  me  alone. 
Murder ! 
Many  works  are  void  of  all  merit 

save  that  of  style. 
Well,  but  I  am  busy. 
Well,  but  he  is  entirely  forsaken. 
She  does  nothing  the  whole   day 

through  but  lament  the  loss  of 

her  mother. 
Ah  !  could  I  but  have  known  it ! 
Are  you  always  to  be  a  sluggard  ? 

What  a  beautiful  sky ! 

What  a  horrible  night ! 

What  a  beautiful  sky  I 

I  wager  it  is. 

I  wager  it  is  not. 

I  wager  I  can  say  it. 

I  wager  I  can  do  it. 

How  much  crime  there  was ! 

How  much   injustice  is  not  there 

committed ! 
What !  are  you  not  coming  ? 
Such  a  one!     What? 
I  shall  go  and  take  a  walk,  for  I  will 

not  be  always  stuck  in  tl;ie  house. 
Whether  he  will  or  not. 
He  is  no  son  of  mine,  for  if  he  were . . . 


S2J:  LESSON  LV. 

EXPLANATION. 

276.  Que,  as  a  conjunction,  is  employed  in  so  many  dif- 
ferent ways  and  meanings,  tending  to  perplex  the  learner, 
that  we  deem  it  essential  to  mention  here  some  of  its  prin- 
cipal uses : 

It  is  employed  as  a  copulative ;  as, 

Tratemos  ahora  de  descausar,  que  I  Let  us  go  to  rest  now ;  that  will  be 
sera  lo  major.  |      best. 

It  sometimes  serves  to  introduce  an  incidental  proposi- 
tion dependent  on  the  principal  one ;  as, 


.Si  no  hay  virtudes,  que  son  el  ci- 
miento  de  la  libertad,  no  se  afian- 
zara  esta  en  los  pueblos. 


If  there  are  no  virtues,  which  are 
the  foundation  of  liberty,  the  lat- 
ter will  have  no  firm  foothold 
among  nations. 

It  is  employed  instead  of  sino^  but,  after  either  of  the 
adjectives  otro  or  mas ;  as. 

En  muchas  obras  no  se  encuentra  I  Many  works  are  void  of  all  merit 
otro  (or  mas)  merito  que  el  estilo.   I      except  the  style. 

It  is  employed  instead  of  pero^  but,  in  the  phrase  es  que^ 
ivith  which  we  convey  the  reason  why  something  is  or  is  not 
done ;  as. 


But  I  am  busy. 

But  he  is  entirely  forsaken. 


Es  que  estoy  ocupado. 
Es  que  se  encuentra  sin    ningiin 
auxilio. 

The  conjunction  que^  placed  between  two  words  of  the 
same  meaning,  besides  uniting  them  as  a  conjunction,  gives 
more  energy  to  the  expression  ;  as. 

Con  la  perdida  de  su  madre  esta  1  She  is  the  whole  day  over  lamenting 
todo  el  dia  llora  que  llora.  |     the  loss  of  her  mother. 

At  other  times  it  serves  to  confirm  more  and  more  the 
expression;  as. 


/  Que  hermosa  que  estas !  {instead 
of,  I  Que  hermosa  estas  !) 

I  Ese  si  que  es  un  modo  de  portarse 
con  honor !  {instead  of^  \  Ese  si  es 
un  modo  de  portarse  con  honor !) 


How  beautiful  you  are ! 

That,  now,  is  an  honorable  mode  of 
acting ! 


Some  one  is  calling. 
Let  him  leave  me  alone. 
Murder ! 


LESSON  LV,  325. 

The  conjunction  que,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  im- 
plies a  word  or  clause  going  before  it ;  as, 

Que  llaman. 

Que  me  deje  en  paz. 

/  Que  me  matan  ! 

In  all  these  examples  a  word  or  clause  is  understood  be- 
fore the  que ;  as,  mirad^  in  the  first ;  deseo  or  quiero,  in  the 
second ;  and  reparad  or  sabed,  in  the  third. 

When  the  sentence  is  interrogative  or  exclamatory,  que 
denotes  desire  and  expostulation ;  as. 

Ah  !  could  I  but  have  known  it ! 
Are  you  always  to  be  a  sluggard  ? 


/  Que  no  lo  hubiera  yo  sabido ! 
^  Que  siempre  has  de  ser  un  holga- 
zan? 

In  an  exclamatory  sentence,  and  when  it  precedes  a  noun 
and  an  adjective,  or  an  adjective  alone,  it  is  equivalent  to< 
cudn;  as, 

/  Que  hermoso  cielo  I  I  What  a  beautiful  sky ! 

/Que  horrenda  noche  I  |  What  a  horrible  night ! 

But  if  in  these  sentences  the  substantive  comes  first,  the 
particle  tan  must  be  put  between,  because  we  cannot  say :: 
/  Que  cielo  hermoso  I  but,  /  Que  cielo  tan  hermoso  ! 

In  some  sentences  a  determining  verb  is  understood ;  as. 


k  que  si. 
A  que  no. 
A  que  lo  digo. 
k  que  lo  hago. 


I  wager  it  is. 
I  wager  it  is  not. 
I  wager  I  can  say  it. 
I  wager  I  can  do  it, 


in  which  is  understood  the  present  indicative  apuesto,  I  ven- 
ture or  wager. 

In  other  sentences  it  is  equivalent  to  a  collective  noun  or 
a  plural  adjective,  and  must  be  followed  by  the  preposition 
de\  as. 


/  Que  de  crimines  se  vieron  ! 

/  Que  de  injusticias  no  se  cometen  ! 


How  much  crime  there  was  ! 
How   much   injustice  is   there  not: 
committed ! 


instead  of  saying  :  /  Cudntos  crimenes  !    /  Cudntas  injusti- 
cias I  or,  /  Que  multitud  de  crimenes  S  injusticias  ! 


326  LESSON  L  V. 

It  also  denotes  surprise,  and  is  used  as  an  interrogative, 
and  for  answering ;  as, 

/  Que  !  4  no  vienes  ?  I  What !  are  you  not  coming  f 

and  is  equivalent  to  an  entire  proposition  answering  ;  as,. 

I  Fulano !    s  Que  9  (i.  e.,  s  Que  quie- 1  So  and  so !    What  ?  (i.  e.,  What  do 
res !  I      you  wish  f) 

At  other  times  it  is  employed  instead  of  the  adversative 
sino^  and  the  copulative  «/,  in  sentences  where  the  second 
member  denotes  opposition  to  what  is  expressed  in  the 
first ;  as. 


He  will  not  get  it,  but  will  remain 
with  the  desire. 

I  shall  go  out  to  walk,  for  I  will  not 
be  always  stuck  in  the  house. 


No  lo  conseguira;  que  se  quedara 

con  el  deseo  {instead  of  sino  que 

se  quedara,  etc.). 
Ire  a  paseo,  que  no  estare  siempre 

metido  en  casa  (instead  of  y  no 

estare,  etc.). 

It  is  not  unfrequently  used  in  the  place  of  a  disjunctive 
conjunction;  as, 

Que    quiera    que    no    quiera  {i,  e.,  I  Whether  he  will  or  not. 
quiera  6  no  quiera.  | 

It  is  sometimes  substituted  for  one  or  other  of  the  causals, 
pues^  porque^  pues  que\  as. 

No  es  hijo  mio,  que  si  lo  fuera  ...  I  He  is  no  son  of  mine,  for  if  he 
(i.  e.,  porque  or  pues,  si  lo  fuera).    |      were  .  .  . 

In  this  meaning  it  is  more  used  in  poetry  than  in  prose  ; 
as, 

"  Que  quien  se  opone  al  cielo, 
Cuanto  mas  alto  sube,  viene  al  suelo." 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Se  habla  el  castellano  en  todas  las  provincias  de  Espaiia  ? 
En  Ids  tribunales,  universidades,  y  oficinas  publicas,  si  senor ; 
pero  el  pueblo  habla  diferentes  dialectos. 

2.  i  Que  dialectos  son  estos  ?  El  Catalan,  que  se  habla  en 
Cataluna ;  el  valenciano,  en  Valencia  ;  el  gallego,  en  Galicia :  y 
el  vascuence  que  se  habla  en  las  provincias  vascongadas,  que  son 
Alava,  Guipiizcoa  y  Yizcaya  ;  se  cree  que  este  ultimo  es  lengua 
madre  y  una  de  las  mas  antiguas  de  Europa. 


LESSON  LV.  32  T 

3.  I  En  donde  se  habla  el  castellano  ?  En  las  demas  provin- 
cias,  Castilla,  Aragon  j  Andalucia. 

4.  I  Por  que  no  se  habla  el  espafiol  en  toda  Espana  ?  Porque 
Espaiia  estuvo  anteriormente  dividida  en  varios  reinos  ;  de  estos 
algunos  fueron  conquistados  por  los  arabes,  otros  pertenecieron 
a  Francia,  y  otros  finalmente  permanecieron  independientes  por 
muchos  siglos,  hasta  que  Fernando  e  Isabel,  echando  a  los 
arabes  de  Espana,  reunieron  las  coronas  de  Aragon  y  Castilla. 

5.  ^  Son  diferentes  las  costumbres  de  las  provincias  de  Es- 
pana ?  Mucho  ;  no  sol  am  en  te  no  se  habla  la  misma  lengua  en 
todas,  sino  que  hasta  poco  tiempo  hace  cada  provincia  tenia  leyes 
diferentes,  y  aun  hoy  dia  tienen  pesas,  medidas,  traje  y  hasta 
caracteres  muy  distintos. 

6.  Pues  eso  debe  ser  muy  incomodo  ;  en  los  Estados  Unidos 
tenemos  la  ventaja  de  hablar  una  misma  lengua  y  tenemos  las 
mismas  pesas,  medidas  y  monedas. — Verdad  es,  pero  tambien  es 
cierto  que  Vds.  han  hecho  todo  esto  con  la  experiencia  adquirida 
en  el  antiguo  mundo. 

7.  I  Y  por  que  no  la  hacen  Vds.  asi  en  Espaiia  ?  Porque  nos- 
otros  tenemos  ya  establecidas  estas  cosas  de  tiempo  inmemorial^ 
y  no  es  facil  cambiar  costumbres  arraigadas  por  tantos  siglos. 

8.  Cuando  Vds.  fundan  una  ciudad  en  este  nuevo  mundo, 
eligen  el  terreno  necesario,  tiran  Vds.  lineas  rectas  y  trazan 
calles  y  plazas ;  para  esto  no  siguen  el  modelo  de  una  antigua 
ciudad  de  Europa,  pero  las  antiguas  ciudades  de  Europa  con  sus 
imperfecciones  e  irregularidades  les  han  mostrado  a  Vds.  el 
modo  de  construir  ciudades,  cuyo  solo  defecto  consiste  en  su  ex- 
tremada  regularidad. 

9.  g  Y  no  cree  V.  que  de  esta  igualdad  resultan  grandes  ven- 
tajas  ?  Sin  duda  alguna,  y  seria  de  desear  que  en  todo  el  mundo 
se  hablase  la  misma  lengua,  hubiese  la  misma  moneda,  pesas  y 
medidas,  y,  tanto  como  el  clima,  las  costumbres  y  otras  circuns- 
tancias  lo  permitiesen,  las  mismas  leyes. 

10.  Tambien  me  han  dicho  que  hay  en  Espaiia  varias  clases 
de  sociedad  ;  ^  no  es  asi  ?  Si,  senor ;  pero  eso  sucede  en  todas  las 
naciones  del  mundo. 

11.  No  en  los  Estados  Unidos.  V.  ve  que  aqui  no  se  dan 
titulos  de  nobleza,  no  hay  diferencia  en  el  traje,  y  decimos  Mr. 
Johnson,  hablando  del  presidente,  and  Mr.  Johnson,  hablando 
de  un  carnicero,  y  el  mismo  Presidente  Johnson  era  antes  sastre, 
de  modo  que  la  igualdad  existe  en  las  personas  como  en  las  cosas. 


328  LESSOl\  LV. 

12.  No  olvide  Y.,  sin  embargo,  que  Dios  no  ha  hecho  dos 
cosas  iguales  en  el  mundo,  y  que  los  hombres  son  quiza  mas 
desiguales  entre  si  que  las  mismas  cosas. — Concedido,  y  no  hay 
cosa  que  mas  ridicula  me  parezca  que  las  lavanderas  vestidas  de 
senoras,  y  los  rowdies  del  Bowery  afectando  ser  caballeros. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Did  you  meet  them  as  you  were  going  in,  or  as  you  were 
coming  out  ?    As  we  were  entering. 

2.  What  is  the  name  of  the  province  in  Spain  in  which  they 
speak  the  Catalonian  language  or  dialect  ?    Catalonia. 

3.  In  which  province  do  they  speak  the  Basque  ?  In  the 
three  Basque  provinces. 

4.  And  do  these  dialects  differ  very  materially*  from  the 
Castilian  language  ?  Yes,  very  materially ;  in  general  they  are 
more  like  the  French  than  the  Spanish. 

5.  Have  you  ever  heard  the  Spanish  name  for  the  natives  of 
Galicia  ?  Yes,  sir,  for  I  am  well  acquainted  with  several  Gali- 
cians  living  in  New  York. 

6.  Can  you  tell  me  the  weights  and  measures  principally 
used  in  the  Peninsula  {Peninsula)  ?  The  principal  weight,  en- 
tirely different  from  all  those  of  the  United  States,  is  the  arroba. 

7.  How  many  Isabellas  have  there  been  on  the  throne  of 
Spain  ?  Two ;  the  first  was  Isabella  the  Catholic,  and  the  present 
queen  is  Isabella  II. 

8.  By  what  event  is  the  reign  of  Isabella  the  Catholic  dis- 
tinguished from  all  other  reigns  ?  By  the  discovery  of  America 
by  Christopher  Columbus  {Cristobal  Colon),  in  the  year  1492. 

9.  Was  not  there  some  other  very  important  event  that 
•occurred  about  the  same  time  ?  Ah !  yes ;  at  the  commence- 
ment of  that  queen's  reign  ;  you  mean,  I  suppose,  the  conquest 
of  the  Arabs,  and  union  of  the  crown  of  Castile  and  Aragon. 

10.  Are  railroads  very  common  in  the  Peninsula  ?  Not  so 
common  as  in  other  European  countries;  but  of  late  years  the 
spirit  of  enterprise  seems  to  be  revived  in  Spain,  and  to  the  few 
which  now  exist  we  shall  soon  see  a  large  number  of  others 
added. 

11.  Let  us  sit  down  and  rest  for  half  an  hour,  for  I  am  very 
tired,  and  you  must  be  so  too. 


*  Mucho. 


LESSON  LVL 


12.  How  beautiful  the  sky  looks  (is)  to  night !     That  is  true  ; 
but  how  it  rained  all  day  ! 

13.  How  long  has  that  newspaper  been  published  ?     Ten 
years,  for  it  was  established  (founded)  in  1856. 


LESSOR    LYI. 

Apreciar. 

To  appreciate. 

Apresurar. 

To  haste. 

Favorecer. 

To  favor. 

Invitar. 

To  invite. 

Apreciable. 

Appreciable. 

Corriente. 

Current,  fluent. 

Estimado. 

Esteemed. 

Excel  en  tisimo. 

Very  (or  most)  excellent. 

Favorecido. 

Favored. 

Invariable. 

Invariable. 

Intimo. 

Intimate. 

Fino. 

Fine. 

Servidor. 

Servant. 

Mercantil. 

Mercantile. 

Comercio. 

Corazon. 

Convite. 

Formulario. 

Eespeto. 

Sobrescrito. 

Corresponsal. 

Giro. 

Giros. 


Commerce,  trade. 
Heart. 

Invitation,    feast, 
banquet,  party. 
List  of  formulas. 
Respect. 
Address. 
Correspondent. 
Draft  (money). 
Turn. 
Manner  (of  style). 


Atencion. 
Corresponden- 

cia. 
Esquela. 
Formula. 
Expresion. 
Estructura. 
Intimidad. 
Inicial. 
Eesidencia. 


Attention. 
Correspondence 

Note. 

Form,  formula 

Expression. 

Structure. 

Intimacy. 

Initial. 

Residence. 


COMPOSITION. 


Senor  D.  Jose  Romero. 
Muy  Sr.  mio. 
Muy  Sr.  nuestro. 
Muy  Sres.  mios. 
May  Sres.  nuestros. 


Mr.  Joseph  Romero. 
Dear  Sir,  My  Dear  Sir. 
Dear  Sir. 
Sirs;  Gentlemen. 
Sirs;  Gentlemen. 


330 


LESSON  LVL 


^ 


'J 


Senora  Da.  Isabel  Jimenez. 

Muy  Sra.  mia. 

Muy  Sra.  nuestra. 

Hemos  recibido  su  ap^^*,  apreciable 

(or  su  est^*,  estimada,  or  su  favoi^* 

favorecida). 
Las  de  V.  del  2  del  corriente  {or 

cor*®). 
4  del  pp**o  (proximo  pasado). 
Se  repite  a  las  ordenes  de  V. 

s.  s.  s. 

(Su  seguro  servidor). 
Q.  S.  M.  B. 
(Que  su  mano  besa). 

M.  De, 
Q.  S.  P.  B. 
(To  ladies,  que  sus  pies  besa). 
Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo. 
Mi  querido  amigo. 
Mande  V.  con  toda  franqueza  a  su 

invariable  amigo  y  S.  S. 
El  Sr.  A.  De  L.  presenta  {or  ofrece) 
sus  respetos  al  Sr.  D.  I.  De  H.,  y 
le  hace  saber  que. 
Sr.  D.  Jose  Martinez, 

Del  Comercio  de  Madrid. 
Sres.  D.  Francisco  Sanchez, 

Hermanos  y  Ca.,  Cadiz. 

Sefiora  Da.  Teodora  Jimenez  y 
Arteta,      Calle  Mayor  N°.  10, 
Zaragoza. 
Al  Ex"^  (Excelentisimo), 

Sr.  D.  Juan  Valero  y  Arteta. 
B.  L.  M., 

Al  Sr.  De  V. 

s.  s.  s., 

A.  De  T. 


Mrs.  Isabella  Jimenez. 
My  Dear  Madam. 
Dear  Madam. 

We  have  received  your  favor  {or 
your  esteemed  favor). 

Your  favors  of  the  2d  instant. 

4th  ult. 


Yours  very  truly,  who  kisses  your 
hand,  or  who  kisses  your  feet. 


My  Dear  Sir  and  Friend. 

My  Dear  Friend. 

Command  with  freedom  your  true 

friend  and  faithful  servant. 
Mr.  A.  De  L.  presents  his  compli- 
ments to  Mr.  I.  De  H.,  and  begs 
to  inform  him  that. 
Mr.  Joseph  Martinez, 

Merchant,  Madrid. 
Messrs.  Francis  Sanchez  Bros.  &  Co., 
Cadiz. 
Mrs.  Theodora  Jimenez  y  Arteta, 
10  Mayor  Street, 

Saragossa. 
To  His  Excellency,  John  Valero  y 

Arteta. 
(Form  of  addressing  letters,  notes, 
&c.,  to  persons  living  in  the  same 
place  as  the  writer. 


EXPLANATION. 
277.  Epistolary  Correspondence. — We  could  not,  with- 
out overstepping  the  limits  of  a  grammar,  give  here  all  the 
terms  peculiar  to  mercantile  correspondence ;  those  desirous 
to  become  perfect  in  that  branch  may  consult  the  several 


LESSON  LVI. 


331 


My  Dear  Sir. 
Sir ;  Dear  Sir. 

Gentlemen. 


works  written  on  the  subject,  among  which  we  particularly 
recommend  Mr.  De  Veitelle's  "  Mercantile  Dictionary,"  pub- 
lished by  D.  Appleton  &  Co.  We  merely  give  here  the  gen- 
eral forms  for  beginning  and  ending  letters. 

In  addressing  persons  of  different  classes  of  society,  except 
those  having  titles,  letters  begin  as  follows : 

Muy  Senor  mio. 
Muy  Senor  nuestro. 

»u  Muy  Senores  mios.        ) 
Muy  Senores  nuestros.  J 

And  to  ladies : 
Muy  Senora  mia.  1     My  Dear  Madam. 

These  expressions  are  most  generally  abbreviated  thus : — 
Muy  Sr,  mio ;  Muy  Sr,  W'^ ;  Muy  Sres,  mios ;  Muy  Sres  nX^^ ; 
Muy  Sra,  mia ;  Muy  Sra.  n^^\  Muy  Sras,  W^^^. 

In  the  body  of  the  letter,  su  ap^^^  (su  apreciable),  or  su 
est^^  (su  estimada),  or  sic  favor^^  (su  f avorecida) — carta^  letter, 
being  understood — are  equivalent  to  your  favor  or  your  es- 
teemed letter. 

Such  expressions  as  these  are  translated  thus : 


Las  de  Y.  del  2  del  cor*«  (corriente) ; 
4  del  pp<^o  (proximo  pasado) ;  8  de 
Mayo,  etc. 


Yours  of  the  2d  inst. ;  4th  ult. ; 
8th  of  May,  &c. 


The  following  forms  are  employed  at  the  end  of  letters.: 


Se  repite  a  las  ordenes  de  Y., 

s.  s.  s. 

(Su  seguro  servidor). 
Q.  S.  M.  B. 

(Que  su  mano  besa). 
Manden  Yms.  cuanto  gusten  a 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  M.  B. 

To  a  lady,  the  form  is  the  same,  only  changing  the  letter 
M.  into  P.,  thus : 


I  am,  Dear  Sir, 

Yours  respectfully. 

Command  at  pleasure  your  faith- 
ful servant. 


s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  P.  B. 

(Que  sus  pies  besa). 


Your  faithful  servant,  who  kisses 
your  feet. 


332 


LESSON  LVL 


In  a  more  familiar  style  : 

Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo. 
Mi  querido  amigo. 
Mande  V.  con  toda  franqueza  a  su 
invariable  amigo  y  S.  S. 


My  Dear  Sir  and  Friend. 
My  Dear  Friend. 
Command  with  freedom  your  true 
friend  and  faithful  servant. 


Esquelas^  notes,  are  also  written  in  Spanish,  as  in  English, 
in  the  third  person ;  as. 


Mr.  A.  De  L.  presents  his  respects  to 
Mr.  I.  De  H.,  and  begs  to  acquaint 
him  that,  &c. 


El  Sr.  A.  De  L.  presenta  (or  ofrece) 
sus  respetos  al  Sr.  Dn.  I.  De  H.,  y 
le  hace  saber  que,  &c. 

The  most  usual  manner  of  addressing  letters  is : 
Sr.  Dn.  Jose  Martinez,  del  Comercio  de  Madrid. 
Sres.  Dn.  Fran*®  Sanchez,  Hermanos  y  Ca.,  Cadiz. 
Sra.  Dna.  Teodora  Jimenez  y  Arteta,  Calle  Mayor  N°.  10. 
Al  Ex"<>  Sr.  D.  Juan  Valero  y  Arteta,  Madrid. 

In  the  city  : 

TO   A   GENTLEMAN.  TO   A   LADY. 

B.  L.  M.,  B.  L.  P., 

Al  Sr.  D.  P.,  k  la  Sra.  Da.  F.  V., 

s.  s.  s.,  s.  s.  s., 

A.  T.  A.  T. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Le  gusta  a  Y.  escribir  cartas  ?  Me  gusta  escribir  a  mis 
amigos  intimos ;  pero  me  gusta  mas  recibir  cartas  que  escribir- 
las. 

2.  Yo  no  se  bien  el  ceremonial  6  formulario  de  cartas,  i  quiere 
Y.  hacerme  el  favor  de  decirme  como  se  principia  una  carta  ? 
Con  mucho  gusto,  pregunteme  Y.  aquello  que  no  sepa. 

3.  I  Como  se  principia  una  carta  dirigida  a  una  persona  cual- 
quiera  con  quien  no  tenemos  intimidad  ?  Si  es  un  caballero, 
principiamos  con  la  formula  de  Muy  Sr.  mio,  j  si  es  una  senora 
con  la  de  Muy  Senora  mia. 

4.  e  Y  para  acabar  ?  Escribiendo  a  un  caballero  solemos 
decir  entre  otras  muchas  expresiones, 

"QuedadeY., 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  M.  B., 

Fulano  de  tal." 


1  'LESSON  LVI.  333 

5.  I  Y  si  es  una  senora  a  quien  escribimos  ?    Lo  mismo,  solo 
"  cambiamos  la  inicial  de  mano,  M.,  en  la  inicial  de  pies^  P.,  asi, 

"  Queda  de  Y., 

s.  s.  s., 

Q.  S.  P.  B, 

Fulano  de  tal." 

6.  ^  Y  cuando  es  a  un  intimo  amigo  ?  Entonces  es  mas  pare- 
cido  al  ingles  y  principiamos  diciendo  :  "  Querido  amigo,"  y  para 
acabar,  cualquiera  de  las  muchas  expresiones  que  se  usan,  como  : 

''  Tu  amigo  que  te  ama  de  corazon, 

Fulano  de  tal." 

7.  e  Como  se  escriben  las  esquelas  de  invitacion,  &c.,  a  las . 
personas  que  viven  en  la  ciudad  ?    Se  escriben,  como  en  ingles, 
en  la  tercera  persona. 

8.  I  Quiere  Y.  escribirme  una  esquela  invitandome  a  comer  ? 
Si,  seiior,  vea  Y.  asi :  "  Los  Sres.  de  Y.  presentan  sus  respetos  a 
los  Sres.  de  T.,  y  les  suplican  que  les  hagan  el  honor  de  venir  a 
comer  con  ellos  el  martes  a  las  cinco.     Lunes,  Abril  8  de  1866." 

9.  Yeamos  si.  Y.  puede  responderme  en  espanol. — Yea  Y., 
*'  Los  Sres.  de  T.  se  apresuraran  a  acudir  al  amable  convite  de 
los  Sres.  de  Y.,  y  les  presentan  sus  mas  finas  atenciones." 

10.  Muy  bien,  muy  bien,  ahora  solo  falta  poner  la  direccion 
(el  sobre). — Estando  la  persona  a  quien  me  dirijo  en  la  ciudad, 
creo  que  el  sobrescrito  debe  ponerse  asi : 

**B.  L.  M. 

Al  Sr.  de  Y. 

s.  s.  s., 

A.  de  T.^' 
11.  e  Cree  Y.  que  podre  ahora  traducir  una  carta  mercantil  en 
ingles  ?  Si,  sefior,  y  escribirla  tambien,  puesto  que  Y.  sabe  ya  la 
estructura  de  la  lengua,  ademas  de  poseer  un  gran  numero  de 
sus  giros,  idiotismos  y  palabras  mas  necesarias  ;  pero  todavia 
tendra  Y.  necesidad  de  acudir  al  diccionario,  porque  no  es  posible 
introducir  en  una  gramatica  todas  las  palabras  y  f rases  que 
requiere  una  correspondencia  mercantil. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Do  you  ever  do  any  of  the  correspondence  in  your  office 
{escritorio)  ?  Not  often,  for  I  do  not  know  how  to  write  letters 
in  Spanish,  and  the  greater  part  of  our  correspondence  is  carried 
on  (Jlevar)  in  that  language. 


334  LESSON  LVZ. 

2.  You  ought,  in  that  case,  to  make  that  branch  the  ob- 
ject of  particular  study  for  a  time.  That  is  what  I  desire  to 
do;  and  I  should  be  obliged  if  you  would  give  me  some 
instruction  (instruir)  in  the  forms  most  observed  by  Spanish 
houses. 

3.  I  shall  take  much  pleasure  in  teaching  you  all  I  know 
myself ;  but  as  I  have  never  been  in  business,  there  are  many 
points  of  which  I  am  ignorant  (ignorar). 

4.  What  is  the  first  thing  to  write  in  a  letter  ?  In  Spanish, 
as  in  English,  the  date  is  generally  the  first  thing ;  it  is  written 
thus : 

Cadiz,  Dec.  1, 1898. 

5.  What  comes  next  ?  The  name  and  residence  of  the  per- 
son to  whom  we  are  writing,  thus  : 

Messrs.  Lafuekte,  Sons  Sc  Co.,  Malaga: 

6.  So  far  there  is  little  difference  between  the  two  languages. 
Very  little  ;  we  next  go  on  to  say  (luego  se  pone)  : 

Gentlemen  (or  Sir,  or  My  dear  Sir,  or  Dear  Sirs,  or,  if  we  write 
to  a  lady.  Madam) : 

7.  Ah !  there  I  observe  a  decided  difference :  is  that  the 
form  always  followed  in  beginning  letters  ?  For  business 
letters,  yes ;  but  for  familiar  correspondence  we  have  many 
others ;  indeed,*  they  are  usually  in  conformity  with  the  taste 
of  the  writer. 

8.  Be  good  enough  to  tell  me  one  or  two.  With  the  greatest 
pleasure  :  My  Dear  Friend :  My  Very  Dear  Alexander :  Esteemed 
Friend  :  My  Ever  Dear  Mother,  &c. 

9.  How  do  you  acknowledge  (acusar)  the  receipt  of  a  letter  ? 
In  this  manner :  I  have  duly  received  your  esteemed  favor  (or 
letter)  of  the  17th  instant. 

10.  As  for  the  body  of  the  letter,  the  form  depends  entirely 
on  the  nature  of  the  business ;  and,  in  general,  all  that  is  required 
is  to  say  just  what  is  necessary  and  nothing  more,  and  to  avoid 
obscurity  (obscuridad)  in  order  that  our  ideas  may  be  completely 
understood  by  our  correspondent  (corresponsal). 

11.  The  usual  ways  to  close  a  letter  are  : 

I  am,  dear  sir, 

Your  most  obd't  ser't ;  or, 

I  am,  sir, 

Yours  very  truly. 

*  M  hecho  es. 


LESSON  LYIL 


12.  And  for  familiar  letters : 
I  am,  dear  Charles, 

Your  true  friend  and  loving  cousin ;  or, 
With  kindest  expressions  to  your  brother. 

Believe  me  to  remain  your  ever  faithful  and  loV' 
ing  friend. 


lesso:n"  lvii. 

Abalanzar. 

To  balance,  weigh,  throw,  thrust. 

Abalanzarse. 

To  spring. 

Concordar. 

To  agree. 

Cumplir. 

To  fulfil,  to  keep,  to  do  (duty). 

Conversar. 

To  converse. 

Entregar. 

To  give,  to  hand,  to  deliver. 

Escapar. 

To  escape. 

Honrar. 

To  honor. 

Participar. 

To  participate 

,  to  partake. 

Eegir. 

To  govern. 

Auxiliar. 

To  help. 

Honrado. 

Honest,  honored. 

Plural. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Singular. 

Baron.               Baron. 

Alhaja. 

Jewel. 

Credito.              Credit. 

Agudeza. 

Wit,  witty  say. 

Encargo.            Commission, 

ing. 

charge,  order. 

Cocina. 

Kitchen. 

Genero.              Kind,  cloth. 

Confianza. 

Confidence. 

Empleo.             Employment, 

Espada. 

Sword. 

office. 

Fuga. 

Flight. 

Plato.                 Plate,  dish. 

Grracia. 

Favor,  good 

Niimero.            Number. 

graces. 

Regimen.           Regimen. 

Mania. 

Mania. 

Tema.                 Theme,  exercise. 

Promesa. 

Promise. 

Diptongo.          Diphthong. 

Pretension. 

Pretension, 

Triptongo.         Triphthong. 

claim. 

Varon.                Man. 

Concordancia. 

Concord,  agree- 

Error.                Error,  mistake. 

ment. 

Version. 

Version. 

Tema. 

Whim. 

336 


LESSON  LVIL 


COMPOSITION. 


Acordarse  con  alguno. 
Acordarse  de  alguno. 
Caer  a  la  plaza. 

Caer  en  la  plaza. 

Caer  de  la  gracia  de  alguno. 

Caer  en  gracia  a  alguno. 

Contar  una  cosa. 
Contar  con  una  cosa. 
Convenir  a  uno. 

Convenir  con  uno. 
Cumplir  con  uno. 
Cumplir  por  uno. 
Dar  algo. 
Bar  con  algo. 
Dar  en  una  cosa. 
Dar  por  algo. 
Dar  credito. 
Dar  a  credito. 
Dar  la  mano. 

Dar  de  mano. 

Dar  en  manos  de. 

Dar  con  el  pie. 

Dar  por  el  pie. 

Dar  fin  [or  cabo)  a  una  cosa. 

Dar  fin  de  una  cosa. 

Declararse  a  alguno. 

Declararse  por  alguno. 

Dejar  hacer  algo. 
Dejar  de  hacer  algo. 
Deshacerse  alguna  cosa. 
Deshacerse  de  alguna  cosa. 

Disponer  sus  alhajas. 
Disponer  de  sus  alhajas. 
Echar  tierra  a  una  cossu 


To  agree  with  any  one. 
To  remember  any  one. 
To  front  on  the  square  (said  of  a 

house). 
To  fall  in  the  square. 
To  fall  from  any  one's  favor  (or  good 

graces). 
To  get  into  any  one's  favor  (or  good 

graces). 
To  relate,  to  tell  a  thing. 
To  count  upon  a  thing. 
To  suit  (to  be  convenient  for)  any 

one. 
To  agree  with  any  one. 
To  do  one's  duty  toward  any  one. 
To  act  in  the  place  of  any  one. 
To  give  anything. 
To  find  anything. 
To  be  obstinate. 
To  give  for  anything. 
To  give  credit,  to  believe. 
To  give  on  credit. 
To  give   the    hand    (or   to   shake 

hands). 
To  lay  aside,  to  abandon. 
To  fall  into  the  hands  of. 
To  despise,  to  scorn,  to  make  light  of 
To  overthrow. 

To  bring  to  an  end,  to  finish. 
To  destroy. 

To  confide  one's  secrets  to  any  one. 
To  side  with  any  one,  to   declare 

one's  self  in  favor  of  any  one. 
To  let  anything  be  done. 
To  leave  anything  undone. 
(Speaking  of  things)  to  be  destroyed. 
To  dispose  of   (or  part   with)  any- 
thing. 
To  arrange  one's  jewelry. 
To  dispose  of  one's  jewelry. 
To  forget  anything,  to  cast  it  into 

oblivion. 


LESSON  LVIL 


337 


Echar  un  genero  en  tierra. 

Entender  una  cosa. 
Entender  en  una  cosa. 
Entregarse  al  dinero. 
Entregarse  del  dinero. 
Escapar  a  buenas. 
Escapar  de  buenas. 
Estar  en  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  sobre  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  a  todo. 
Estar  en  todo. 
Estar  con  cuidado, 
Estar  de  cuidado. 
Estar  en  si. 
Estar  sobre  si. 
Estar  con  alguno. 

Estar  por  alguno. 

Estar  en  hacer  alguna  cosa. 

Estar  para  hacer  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  por  hacer  alguna  cosa. 
Estar  alguna  cosa  por  hacer. 
Oustar  un  plato. 

Gustar  de  un  plato. 
Hacer  confianza  a  una  persona. 
Hacer  confianza  de  una  persona. 
Hacer  una  cosa  con  tiempo. 

Hacer  una  cosa  en  tiempo. 

Hacerse  a  una  cosa. 
Hacerse  con  una  cosa. 
Hacerse  de  una  cosa. 
Hallarse  algo. 
Hallarse  con  algo. 

Ir  con  alguno, 

Ir  sobre  alguno. 
Mayor  de  edad. 
Mayor  en  edad. 
24 


To  throw  anything  on  the  ground 

(or  down). 
To  understand  a  thing. 
To  be  a  judge  of  a  thing. 
To  make  a  god  of  one's  money. 
To  receive,  to  take  charge  of  money. 
To  make  the  best  of  one's  escape. 
To  make  a  happy  escape. 
To  be  aware  of  anything. 
To  push  an  affair. 
To  be  ready  for  whatever  may  come. 
To  pay  attention  to  every  matter. 
To  be  anxious,  solicitous. 
To  be  dangerously  ill. 
To  be  at  himself  or  herself. 
To  be  proud. 
To  be  with  any  one,  to  be  of  any 

one's  opinion. 
To  favor  any  one. 
To  bjB  resolved  (or  disposed)  to  do 

anything. 
To  be  about  to  do  anything. 
To  be  inclined  to  do  something. 
To  remain  to  be  done. 
To  taste  a  dish  (of  any  kind  of 

food). 
To  be  fond  of  a  dish. 
To  make  a  confidant  of  any  one. 
To  put  confidence  in  any  one. 
To  do  a  thing  at  one's  leisure  (so  as 

not  to  be  pressed  for  time). 
To  do  a  thing  in  time,  at  a  suitable 

time. 
To  get  used  to  a  thing. 
To  get  (or  procure)  a  thing. 
To  provide  one's  self  with  a  thing. 
To  find  anything. 

To  be  in  possession  of  (or  have)  any- 
thing. 
To  go  with  anybody,  to  be  on  any 

one's  side,  to  listen  to  any  one. 
To  fall  upon  (or  attack)  any  one. 
To  be  of  age. 
To  be  older. 


338 


LESSON  LVIL 


Participar  una  cosa. 

Participar  de  una  cosa. 
Poner  una  cosa  en  tierra. 
Poner  una  cosa  por  tierra. 
Poner  con  cuidado. 
Poner  en  cuidado. 
Preguntar  a  uno. 
Preguntar  por  uno. 
Quedar  en  hacer  una  cosa. 
Quedar  una  cosa  por  hacer. 

Responder  una  cosa. 

Responder  de  una  cosa. 
Saber  a  cocina. 
Saber  de  cocina. 

Salir  con  una  empresa. 
Salir  de  una  empresa. 
Salir  a  su  padre. 
Salir  con  su  padre. 
Salir  de  su  padre. 

Salir  por  su  padre, 
Ser  con  alguno. 
Ser  de  alguno. 
Ser  para  alguno. 
Tener  consigo. 
Tener  para  si. 
Tener  de  hacer  algo. 
Tener  que  hacer  algo. 
Tirar  la  espada. 

Tirar  de  la  espada. 
Tratar  de  vinos. 
Tratar  en  vinos. 
Vender  al  contado. 
Vender  de  contado. 
Volver  a  la  razon. 
Volver  por  la  razon. 

Volver  en  razon  de  tal  cosa. 


To  communicate  anything  (to  an- 
other). 

To  participate  in  anything. 

To  lay  anything  on  the  ground. 

To  make  little  of  a  thing. 

To  put  (or  place,  or  lay)  with  care. 

To  alarm,  to  give  anxiety. 

To  ask  any  one  (interrogate). 

To  ask  (or  inquire)  for  anything. 

To  agree  to  do  anything. 

To  remain  to  be  done  (speaking  of 
things). 

To  answer  something  (giving  an 
answer). 

To  answer  for  anything. 

To  smell  (or  taste)  of  the  kitchen. 

To  be  skilful  in  (or  to  understand) 
cooking. 

To  carry  out  an  enterprise. 

To  give  up  an  enterprise. 

To  resemble  one's  father. 

To  go  out  with  one's  father. 

To  be  released  from  the  wardship  of 
one's  father. 

To  go  bail  for  one's  father. 

To  be  of  any  one's  opinion. 

To  belong  to  any  one's  party. 

To  be  for  any  one  (of  things). 

To  have  with  (or  about)  one. 

To  be  persuaded. 

To  be  going  to  do  anything. 

To  have  to  do  anything. 

To  throw  down  (or  away)  one's 
sword. 

To  draw  one's  sword. 

To  talk  about  wines. 

To  deal  in  wines. 

To  sell  for  cash. 

To  sell  on  the  instant. 

To  recover  one's  reason. 

To  stand  up  for  reason  (or  what  is 
right). 

To  return  for  such  a  reason  (or  mo- 
tive). 


LESSON  LVlir  339 

EXPLANATION. 

278.  It  is  a  general  custom,  amongst  authors  of  Spanish 
grammars  and  Spanish  methods,  to  copy  entire  the  forty- 
pages  devoted  by  the  Spanish  Academy  in  its  Grammar  to  a 
list  of  verbs  requiring  certain  prepositions  after  them.  But 
we,  notwithstanding  our  most  profound  respect  for  the  body 
just  mentioned,  refrain  from  following  in  the  footsteps  of 
our  predecessors,  and  that  not  merely  on  account  of  the  use- 
lessness  of  the  list,  but  for  the  more  potent  reason  that  we 
believe  it  likely  to  misguide  the  student  at  every  step.  An 
example  : — Any  one  not  thoroughly  acquainted  with  Span- 
ish syntax  would,  on  reading  the  very  first  article  in  the 
list  above  referred  to,  Ahalanzarse  a  los  peligros,  natu- 
rally conclude  therefrom  that  the  verb  ahalanzar  governs 
at  all  times  and  under  all  circumstances  the  preposition  a, 
Now  that  would  be  absurd,  for  nothing  is  more  usual  than 
to  see  and  hear  the  expressions : — Ahalanzarse  contra 
{or  sobre)  su  eneniigo^  ahalanzarse  con  {or  sin)  juicio^ 
ahalanzarse  para  sacudir,  de  repente,  &c.  And  so  of 
all  the  other  verbs,  each  of  which  may,  according  to  the 
idea  to  be  conveyed,  govern  almost  any  preposition  in  the 
language. 

It  would  be  vain  to  attempt  to  give,  in  a  work  of  the 
nature  of  the  present  one,  a  complete  set  of  rules  for  deter- 
mining the  various  significations  of  every  verb  as  decided  or 
modified  by  the  attendant  preposition ;  but,  since  much  can 
be  done,  even  here,  toward  helping  the  student  through  the 
most  difficult  parts,  we  could  not  resist  giving  in  this  day's 
Composition  a  list  composed  of  those  verbs  which  are  at  the 
same  time  of  most  frequent  occurrence  in  general  every-day 
conversation,  and  susceptible  of  the  greatest  diversity  of 
meaning,  according  to  the  preposition  by  which  they  are 
followed. 

Before  dismissing  this  subject  we  deem  it  fitting  to  re- 
mark that  a  large  number  of  English  verbs,  to  determine  the 
meaning  of  which  a  preposition  is  indispensable,  are  ren- 
dered in  Spanish  by  a  verb  alone.     For  example : 


340  LESSON  LVIL 

Bajar.  To  go  down. 

Entrar.  To  come  in. 

Salir.  To  go  out. 

Subir.  To  go  up. 

Sacar.  To  draw  out. 

Partir.  To  set  out. 

Caer.  To  fall  down. 

This  may  be  the  reason  why  many  Spanish  grammarians 
have  thought  that  in  Spanish  the  same  thing  does  not  exist. 
We  regret  that  the  dimensions  of  our  book  will  not  permit 
us  to  give  a  more  complete  list  in  corroboration  of  the  fact 
that  Spanish  verbs  too  enjoy  that  transition  of  signification 
which  is  so  frequent  in  English  verbs. 

CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  I  A  que  lado  caen  las  ventanas  de  su  cuarto  de  V.  ?  Tres 
caen  a  la  plaza  de  Madison  y  las  otras  tres  caen  a  la  calle  Veinte 
y  cinco. 

2.  I  Le  cae  a  V.  en  gracia  ese  muchachito  ?  Si,  seiior,  porque 
responde  con  mucha  agudeza. 

3.  I  Puedo  con  tar  con  su  promesa  de  V.  ?  Y.  puede  con  tar 
con  ella,  porque  yo  cumplo  siempre  lo  que  prometo. 

4.  I  Da  V.  credito  a  todo  lo  que  oye  ?  No,  seiior,  a  menos 
que  conozca  las  personas. 

5.  i  Da  V.  la  mano  a  aquel  pobre  ?  Si,  seiior,  porque  aunque 
pobre  es  honrado. 

6.  I  Ha  dado  V.  fin  a  su  tarea  ?  Todavia  no  ;  pero  pronto 
dare  de  niano. 

7.  Si  V.  deja  esos  libros  en  manos  de  ese  muchacho,  pronto 
dara  fin  de  ellos. — Asi  lo  creo  ;  pero  es  necesario  que  los  ninos 
tengan  algo  para  entretenerse. 

8.  I  Como  ha  dispuesto  V.  de  sus  alhajas  ?  Las  he  guardado, 
porque  pude  encontrar  dinero  sin  venderlas. 

9.  I  Que  se  hizo  de  aquel  mal  negocio  en  que  se  metio  su 
primo  de  V.  ?  Se  le  ha  echado  tierra,  y  nadie  se  acuerda  mas 
de  el. 

10.  I  En  que  se  ocupa  su  amigo  de  V.  ?    Entiende  en  vinos ; 
pero  es  cosa  que  no  entiende. 

11.  I  Como  esta  su  esposa  de  V.  ?    Ella  esta  de  cuidado,  y  yo 
con  cuidado. 

12.  i  Esta  V.  en  hacer  aquel  negocio  ?    Estoy  para  hacerlo. 


LUSSOJ^  LVIL  341 

13.  i  Queda  V.  en  hacer  ese  encargo  por  mi  ?  Quedo  en  ha- 
cerlo  y  pierda  V.  cuidado,  que  no  se  quedara  por  hacer. 

14.  I  Es  V.  mayor  de  edad  ?  No,  senor,  todavia  no  ;  pero  soy 
mayor  en  edad  con  respecto  a  mis  hermanos. 

15.  No  ponga  V.  eso  por  tierra. — No  lo  pongo  por  tierra,  sine 
en  tierra. 

16.  I  Piensa  V.  salir  con  su  empresa  ?  No,  senor,  pero  pienso 
salir  pronto  de  ella. 

17.  i  Tiro  ese  hombre  de  la  espada  ?  Tiro  de  la  espada, 
porque  la  saco  ;  pero  el  miedo  le  hizo  emprender  la  fuga  y  la  tiro. 

18.  Don  Juan,  i  le  gusta  a  V.  vender  al  fiado  ?  No,  seiior,  me 
gusta  vender  al  contado  y  de  contado. 

19.  I  Volvio  D.  Francisco  por  larazon  ?  No,  senor, D.Francisco 
no  ha  vuelto  a  la  razon,  y  por.consiguiente  no  volvio  por  la  razon. 

20.  I  Se  acuerda  ese  hombre  con  su  esposa  ?  No,  seiior,  no  se 
acuerdan.  ..^ 

21.  I  Se  acuerda  Y.  de  lo  que  le  dije  a  V.  ayer  ?  No,  senor,  lo 
he  olvidado. 

22.  I  Conviene  V.  ahora  conmigo  en  que  el  espanol  es  mas 
facil  que  el  ingles  ?    Convengo  con  Y.  en  ello. 

23.  i  Le  conviene  a  Y.  hacer  eso  ?    No,  senor,  no  me  conviene. 

24.  I  Dio  Y.  por  fin  con  lo  que  buscaba  ?  No,  senor,  todavia 
no  lo  he  encontrado. 

25.  Este  hombre  ha  dado  en  la  tema  de  querer  aprender  sin 
estudiar ;  ^  no  le  parece  a  Y.  que  es  una  pretension  muy  ridicula  ? 
Ridiculisima. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Has  the  Baron  given  up  his  project  ?  He  told  me  he 
would  like  to  give  it  up,  if  he  could  do  so  honorably. 

2.  I  understand  that  he  is  an  honorable  man  ?  Yes,  and  he 
is  therefore  respected  by  all  who  know  him. 

3.  Has  your  brother  come  to  an  agreement  with  that  dealer 
for  the  purchase  of  the  horse  about  which  he  was  speaking  ?  It 
appears  not,  and  that,  on  the  contrary,  he  desires  to  get  rid  of  the 
one  he  has. 

4.  Did  you  inform  the  merchant  of  the  order  you  received 
from  the  West  ?  Not  yet ;  but  I  intend  to  let  him  know  of  it 
this  very  day. 

5.  Does  that  woman  understand  cooking  ?  She  says  she  does ; 
and  she  handed  me  a  letter  from  a  lady  with  whom  she  lived  two 
years. 


842 


LUSSON  LVIIL 


6.  Did  the  captain  draw  his  sword  as  soon  as  he  heard  his 
antagonist's  reply  ?  He  had  already  drawn  it ;  but  when  he 
heard  the  reply  be  threw  down  his  sword,  and  ran  and  gave  his 
hand  to  the  man  whom,  a  few  moments  before,  he  was  resolved 
to  kill. 

7.  Has  your  brother  sent  you  the  books  he  promised  you  ? 
No,  and  that  need  not  surprise  you,  for  I  can  never  rely  (count) 
on  him  for  anything. 

8.  That  is  to  say,  he  never  keeps  his  promise  ?  That  is  pre- 
cisely what  I  mean  to  say. 

9.  Do  past  participles  always  agree  in  gender  and  number 
with  the  subject  of  the  verb  ?  Yes,  always,  except  when  gov- 
erned by  the  auxiliary  to  have. 

10.  Are  there  not  some  participles,  past  and  present,  that  do 
not  retain  the  regimen  of  the  verbs  to  which  they  belong  ? — 
There  are  very  many ;  and,  if  you  like,  I  shall  mention  some  of 
them. — Be  good  enough  to  do  so. 

11.  I  hope  you  have  provided  yourself  with  everything  ne- 
cessary for  your  journey  ?  Everything,  except  one  or  two  arti- 
cles which  I  have  been  unable  to  find. 

12.  How  do  you  advise  me  to  arrange  (dispose)  all  these  books  ? 
I  have  only  one  counsel  to  give  you  in  the  matter,  and  that  is,  to 
dispose  of  them  as  quickly  as  you  can. 

13.  Would  you  like  to  taste  this  dish  ?  No,  thank  you,  I  am 
not  fond  of  it. 

14.  Is  he  not  of  your  opinion  ?  Not  at  all ;  he  always  goes 
(sides)  with  his  father. 


LESSON    LVIII. 


Notar. 

Cazar. 

Chancear. 

Combinar. 

Concertar. 

Concluir. 

Enfriarse. 

Encargar. 

Flotar. 
Improvisar. 


To  note,  to  observe,  to  perceive. 

To  hunt,  to  chase. 

To  jest. 

To  combine. 

To  concert,  to  agree. 

To  conclude,  to  finish. 

To  cool,  to  get  (or  grow)  cold. 

To  charge,   to  commission,   to 

order. 
To  float. 
To  improvise. 


LESSON  LVIIL 

343 

Inspirar. 

To  inspire. 

Eepartir 

To  divide. 

Saltar. 

To  leap,  to  jump. 

Trinchar. 

To  carve,  to  cut. 

Cobrar. 

Brindar. 

To  collect.    To  toast. 

A  lo  lejos. 

At  a  distance. 

in  the  distance. 

A  cuestas. 

On  one's  back, 

on  one's  shoulder. 

A  la  espanola. 

In  the  Spanish 

fashion. 

Atras. 

Backward,  age 

,  behind. 

Blanco. 

White. 

Bonito. 

Pretty. 

Durable, 

duradero. 

Durable. 

Elocuente. 

Eloquent. 

Galante. 

Gallant. 

Bello  sexo. 

Fair  sex. 

Magnifico. 

Magnificent. 

Negro. 

Black. 

Rodeado 

. 

Surrounded. 

Vacio. 

Empty. 

Abanico. 

Fan. 

Ala. 

Wing. 

Apetito. 

Appetite. 

Botella. 

Bottle. 

Aficionado. 

Amateur,  one 

Caza. 

Hunt. 

fond  of. 

Chanza. 

Jest. 

Baiil. 

Trunk. 

Cima. 

Top,  summit. 

Buey. 

Ox. 

Colina. 

Hill. 

Brindis. 

Toast. 

Dama. 

Lady. 

Carro. 

Car,  cart. 

Imaginacion. 

Imagination. 

Canasto. 

Basket. 

Llave,  clave. 

Key.t 

Conductor. 

Conductor. 

Milla. 

Mile. 

Pretexto. 

Pretext. 

Pechuga. 

Breast  (of  fowl). 

Penasco. 

Rock,  cliff. 

Fuerza. 

Force,  strength. 

Embarcadero. 

Ferry. 

Suerte. 

Luck,  sort. 

Piropos  {pi.). 

Sweet  things.* 

Tarea. 

Task. 

Pasaje. 

Fare. 

Vocal. 

Vowel. 

Sitio. 

Place,  spot. 

Voz. 

Voice,  word. 

Salon. 

Saloon. 

Sombra. 

Shade,  shadow. 

Vocabulario. 

Vocabulary. 

Elocuencia. 

Eloquence. 

*  Piropos.  sweet  words,  honeyed  sayings. 
f  Llave.  key  to  a  door ;  clave,  key  to  a  book,  or  to  an  arch,  mysterious 
writings,  or  in  a  figurative  sense. 


344 


LESSO]^  LVIIL 


COMPOSITION. 


Quedamos  en  que  saldriamos  a  las 

cinco. 
Este  canasto  es  superior  a  mis  f  uer- 

zas. 
A  la  salud  de  las  sefioras. 
Decir  piropos  a  las  senoritas. 

Sirvase  V.  pagar  al  conductor. 
\  Mire  V.  que  gracia ! 
i  Que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  I 
Pongamos  los  canastos  a  la  som- 

bra. 
La  subida  de  la  colina  con  un  gran 

canasto  a  cuestas,  me  ha  abierto  el 

apetito. 
Me  alegro  de  ver  a  V. 
Se  alegro  de  la  noticia. 
Lo  siento  mucho. 

Me  pesa  mucho  saberlo. 

jCuantas  personas  caben   en  esta 

iglesia  ? 
No  cabiamos  todos  en  el  salon. 
4  Puede  caber  en  tu  imaginacion  tal 

cosa? 
Cabe  mucho  en  este  baiil. 
No  caber  de  pies. 
A  mi  me  cupo  en  suerte  venir  a  la 

America. 
No  caber  de  gozo. 


We  agreed  to  set  out  (or  start)  at 

five  o'clock. 
This  basket  is  more  than  I  am  able 

to  manage. 
To  the  health  of  the  ladies. 
To  say  sweet  things  to  the  young 

ladies. 
Please  pay  the  conductor. 
Only  think ! 
How  do  you  like  it  ? 
Let  us  set  the  baskets  in  the  shade. 

Coming  up  the  hill  with  a  large  bas- 
ket on  my  back  has  sharpened  my 
appetite. 

I  am  glad  to  see  you. 

He  was  rejoiced  at  the  news. 

I  am  very  sorry  for  it  {i.  e.,  I  regret 
it  much). 

I  am  very  sorry  to  know  it  {i.  e.,  it 
grieves  me  much  to  know  it). 

How  many  persons  does  this  church 
hold? 

The  saloon  could  not  hold  us  all. 

Can  such  a  thing  enter  your  imagi- 
nation ? 

This  trunk  holds  a  good  deal. 

To  have  no  room  to  stand. 

It  was  my  lot  to  come  to  America. 

To  be  overjoyed. 


EXPLANATION. 

IDIOMATIC   USE   OF   CERTAIN   VERBS. 

279.  Alegrarse. — The  verbs  to  he  glad  and  to  he  rejoiced 
at  are  translated  by  the  reflexive  verb  alegrarse ;  as, 

Me  alegro  de  ver  a  V.  1 1  am  glad  to  see  you. 

Se  alegro  de  la  noticia.  |  He  was  rejoiced  at  the  news. 

280.  Sentir  and  pesar. — To  he  sorry  and  to  grieve  are 
translated  by  these  verbs ;  as, 


LESSON  LVIIL 


345 


Lo  siento  mucho. 

Me  pesa  mucho  saberlo. 


I  am  very  sorry  for  it  {i.  e.,  I  greatly 

regret  it). 
I  am  very  sorry  to  know  it  {i.  e.,  it 

grieves  me  much  to  know  it). 

281.  Caber,  to  be  capable  of  containing,  &c. — This  verb 
is  employed  in  different  manners  in  Spanish ;  as, 


^Cuantas  personas 
iglesia? 


caben  en   esta 


No  cabiamos  todos  en  el  salon. 

i  Puede  caber  en  tu  imaginacion  tal 

cosa? 
Cabe  mucho  en  este  baul. 
No  caber  de  pies. 
A  mi  me  cupo  en  saerte  venir  a  la 

America. 
No  caber  en  si. 
No  caber  de  gozo. 


How  many  persons  does  this  church 
hold  (or  is  it  capable  of  contain- 
ing)?* 

The  saloon  could  not  hold  us  all. 

Can  such  a  thing  enter  your  imag- 
ination ? 

This  trunk  holds  a  great  deal. 

To  have  no  room  to  stand. 

It  was  my  lot  to  come  to  America. 

To  be  well  satisfied  with  one's  self. 
To  be  overjoyed. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  Buenos  dias,  seiiores,  i  conque  ya  todos  estan  listos  ?  Pues 
no  habiamos  de  estar,  si  son  ya  las  seis  y  quedamos  en  que  sal- 
driamos  a  las  cinco. 

2.  Habriamos  estado  aqui  de  los  primeros,  si  no  hubiera  sido 
que,  despues  de  haber  andado  dos  6  tres  manzanas,  echo  de  ver 
mi  esposa  que  habia  olvidado  la  Have  del  cuarto,  el  paraguas,  el 
abanico,  y  yo  no  se  cuantas  otras  cosas  mas ;  pero  en  fin  ya  esta- 
mos  aqui,  i  cuando  partimos  ?  Estamos  esperando  el  carro  que 
va  al  embarcadero  de  la  calle  Treinta  y  tres. 

3.  Seiioras,  esten  Vds.  prontas,  porque  veo  venir  el  carro. — 
Don  Martin,  ayudeme  V.  a  llevar  este  canasto,  porque  es  superior 
a  mis  f  uerzas. — Llame  V.  a  Don  Pepito,  que  no  hace  mas  que 
decir  piropos  a  las  seiioritas,  porque  yo  tengo  ya  dos  paraguas  y 
tres  niiios  de  que  cuidar. 

4.  Don  Pepe,  V.  que  no  tiene  niiios,  ni  canastos,  etc.,  sirvase 
V.  pagar  al  conductor. — (i  El  diantre  del  hombre !  ahora  me  pesa 
no  haber  tornado  un  canasto.) 

5.  i  El  pasaje  caballeros  !  l  Cuantos  somos  ?  uno,  dos,  tres, 
cuatro,  caballeros ;  una,  dos,  tres,  cuatro,  siete  seiioras,  esto  es : 
once  personas  mayores  y  catorce  niiios. 

*  Literally,  how  many  persons  hold  themselves  in  this  church  ? 


346  LESSON  LYIIL 

6.  Papa,  i  esta  muy  lejos  el  sitio  adonde  vamos  a  pasar  el 
dia  ?    No,  Luisita,  solamente  unas  diez  millas. 

7.  i  De  este  lado  6  del  otro  del  rio  ?  Del  otro,  desde  aqiii  lo 
puedes  ver. 

8.  e  No  ves  alia  a  lo  lejos,  en  la  cima  de  aquella  colina,  una 
casa  blanca  en  donde  flota  la  bandera  americana  ?  Si,  seiior,  es 
muy  bonito  sitio  y  debe  tener  muy  buenas  vistas. 

9.  Cuidado  con  los  niiios  al  saltar  en  tierra,  no  se  caiga 
alguno  al  agua. — i  Estan  todos  fuera  ?  e  No  se  ha  olvidado 
nada  ? — No,  seiior. — Pues  en  marcha. 

10.  Don  Pepito,  tome  V.  ese  canasto,  y  cuidado  no  le  deje  caer 
y  rompa  las  botellas  que  contiene. — i  Hombre,  por  Dios  !  con  el 
pretexto  de  que  venia  con  las  manos  vacias,  me  ha  hecho  V. 
pagar  los  carros  y  el  vaporcito  por  veinte  y  tres  personas,  y  ahora 
me  quiere  V.  hacer  cargar  con  el  canasto  del  vino. 

11.  Vamos,  Don  Pepito,  llevelo  V.  ahora  hasta  la  cima  de 
aquella  colina,  que  a  la  vuelta  a  casa  yo  me  encargo  de  llevarlo. 
— ;  Mire  V.  que  gracia !  a  la  vuelta !  que  es  lo  que  quedara 
de  una  docena  de  botellas,  despues  de  beber  veinte  y  tres  per- 
sonas. 

12.  Nada ;  el  que  no  ayude  a  llevar  los  canastos  no  partici- 
para  de  su  contenido. — Seiiores,  repartamos  la  tarea  ;  que  los  hom- 
bres  lleven  los  canastos,  las  mamas  a  los  ninos,  los  ninos  los 
paraguas,  y  las  seiioritas  a  Don  Pepito. 

13.  Da.  Delfina  i  que  tal  le  gusta  a  V.  este  sitio  ?  i  Oh !  es 
delicioso ;  \  que  vistas  tan  bonitas ! 

14.  Pongamos  los  canastos  a  la  sombra  de  ese  hermoso  arbol. 
—Si,  y  pongamonos  nosotros  tambien  a  la  sombra,  que  al  sol 
hace  calorcito. 

15.  I  No  le  parece  a  V.,  Don  Enrique,  que  es  tiempo  de  poner 
la  mesa  ?— Asi  me  parece.  porque  la  subida  de  la  colina  con  un 
gran  canasto  a  cuestas  me  ha  abierto  el  apetito. 

16.  Senores,  la  comida  esta  en  la  mesa.— Seiioras,  e  que  es  lo 
que  Yds.  dicen  ?  i  en  la  mesa !  I  Ah  !  si,  ya  vemos,  sobre  un  gran 
peiiasco  a  la  sombra  de  aquel  arbol  i  magnifica  idea ! 

17.  Don  Pepito,  traiga  V.  un  par  de  sillas  mas,  que  faltan  para 
dos  sefioras.  Alia  voy,  ;  caspita  con  las  sillitas  !  cada  una  pesa 
cien  libras ;  pero,  eso  si,  son  durables,  no  haya  miedo  de  que  se 
rompan.— Tomen  Vds.  asiento,  sefioras. 

18.  Pase  v.,  Don  Martin,  primero.  No,  senor,  despues  de  V. 
—Seiiores  sin  cumplimientos  que  se  enfria  la  comida. 


LFSSON  LVIIL  347 

19.  h  Quieii  quiere  sopa  ?  ;  Hombre,  sopa  !  yo,  yo,  sirvame  Y. 
un  plato,  Don  Enrique. 

20.  Poco  a  poco,  Don  Pepito,  en  el  campo,  no  tenemos  sopa. 
— Pues  yo  crei  que  V.  me  la  ofrecia. — Yo  pregunte  por  saber 
quien  era  aficionado  a  la  sopa. 

21.  Senor  Don  Pedro  i  quiere  V.  hacerme  el  favor  de  trinehar 
ese  polio  ?    Con  mucho  gusto. 

22.  Da.  Margarita  i  voy  a  mandarle  a  V.  un  pedazo  de  pe- 
chuga  ?  No,  seiior,  gracias,  mandeme  V.  el  ala  6  la  pierna,  que 
me  gusta  mas. 

23.  Don  Pepito,  un  brindis,  vamos  un  brindis.— Excusenme 
Vds.,  seiiores,  yo  no  se  hacer,  y  menos  improvisar  brindis. 

24.  Pero  hombre,  i  eso  dice  V.  que  es  tan  galante  y  elocuente 
con  las  damas  !  ^  No  le  inspira  a  Y.  algo  el  bello  sexo  de  que 
se  halla  Y.  rodeado  ?  Pues  bien,  a  la  salud  de  las  senoras. — V 
J  por  que  no  ? 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Has  not  the  baker  come  yet  ?  You  are  in  a  jesting  mood 
(humor)  this  morning ;  he  came  long  before  you  were  up. 

2.  Never  mind;  I  have  change  enough  to  pay  for  all. — 
You  are  too  late,  I  have  already  paid ;  the  conductor  has 
no  time  to  wait  half  an  hour  collecting  the  fare  of  each  passen- 
ger. 

3.  Your  appetite  seems  to  be  a  little  better  to-day  than  usual ; 
how  do  you  account  for  that  ?  Really  you  praise  my  appetite 
beyond  what  it  deserves ;  I  am  happy  to  say  that  it  is  at  all 
times  in  excellent  condition. 

4.  Do  you  not  find  it  good  exercise  to  climb  to  the  top  of  the 
hill  with  that  heavy  basket  on  your  arm  ?  The  fact  is  that  I 
shall  have  to  give  it  to  some  one  else  for  a  while,  for  my  strength 
is  not  equal  to  the  task. 

5.  I  wonder  whom  you  can  give  it  to  ;  you  see  that  we  have 
each  of  us  something  to  carry.  Well,  in  that  case,  I  must  change 
with  some  one  that  has  a  lighter  burden  {cargo)  than  my  own. 

6.  Does  not  John  intend  to  become  a  soldier  ?  He  does, 
though  entirely  contrary  to  the  will  of  his  father,  who  set  his 
face  against  it  in  the  most  determined  manner. 

7.  How  many  trunks  is  each  passenger  (pasajero)  permitted 
to  keep  with  him  in  his  berth  (camarote)  ?  Only  one,  supposed 
to  contain  the  articles  he  may  need  to  have  at  hand  during  the 
passage. 


348 


LESSON  LIX, 


8.  Did  you  ever  go  on  a  lion-hunt  while  you  were  in  South 
Africa  ?  Several  times,  and  I  can  assure  you  it  is  a  most  inter- 
esting and  exciting  scene. 

9.  Did  you  go  entirely  for  pleasure  ?  No,  I  managed  to  com- 
bine business  and  pleasure,  otherwise  I  should  probably  never 
have  seen  that  country,  for  you  know  that  such  a  voyage  as  that 
costs  a  great  deal  of  money. 

10.  Did  you  drink  many  toasts  during  the  dinner  ?  A  good 
many,  and  the  first  one  I  proposed  was  to  the  fair  sex. 

11.  Nothing  surprising  in  that ;  I  know  it  would  scarcely  be 
possible  to  surpass  you  in  gallantry.  You  are  flattering  me  now, 
for  the  ladies  on  every  hand  agree  in  calling  you  the  most  gal- 
lant young  gentleman  in  the  country. 

12.  Just  see  if  your  eloquence  will  not  succeed  in  persuading 
your  young  friend  to  come  with  us  to-morrow.  With  all  my 
heart;  but  unfortunately  he  does  not  speak  French,  and  you 
know  how  much  my  eloquence  loses  in  English. 

13.  Does  the  art  of  pleasing  depend  on  what  we  do  and  what 
we  say  ?  It  does  not,  in  my  opinion,  depend  so  much  on 
what  we  do  and  say  as  on  how  we  do  things  and  how  we  say 
them. 

14.  Is  it  not  surprising  that  your  sister  has  not  yet  come  ?  I 
believe  she  has  gone  to  see  her  young  Spanish  friend  (/em.), 
although  she  left  me  but  half  an  hour  ago,  under  pretext  of  hav- 
ing to  write  a  letter. 

15.  Do  you  generally  dine  in  the  Spanish  fashion  at  home  ? 
We  generally  dine  in  the  French  fashion,  notwithstanding  the 
fact  that  we  are  all  very  fond  of  the  Spanish  way  of  cooking. 


LESSON    LIX. 


Amenazar. 

To  menace. 

Cojear. 

To  be  lame,  to  limp. 

Colgar. 

To  hang. 

Corregir. 

To  correct. 

Cubrir. 

To  cover. 

Cubrirse. 

To  put  on  one's  hat,  to  cover 

one's  self. 

Descubrir. 

To  discover,  to  uncover. 

LESSON  LIX, 


349 


Descubrirse. 

Despedir. 

Definir. 

Durar. 

Eodar. 

Prestar. 

Yencer. 


To  take  off  one's  hat,  to  make 

one's  self  discovered. 
To  send  away,  to  put  away,  to 

give  up. 
To  define. 
To  last. 

To  roll,  to  run  on  wheels. 
To  lend. 
To  conquer. 


Cosa  de. 

About. 

Capaz. 

Capable,  able. 

Condicional. 

Conditional. 

Carirredondo. 

Roundfaced. 

Casero. 

Household,  family,  domestic. 

Companero. 

Companion. 

Claro. 

Clear. 

Copulativo. 

Copulative. 

Generoso. 

Generous. 

Defectivo. 

Defective. 

Libre. 

Free,  unembarrassed. 

Vulgar. 

Vulgar,  common,  usual. 

Vistoso. 

Showy. 

Asesino. 
Aumento. 

Cerrojo. 

Campo. 

Corredor. 

Dedo. 

Dialogo. 

Dolor  de  cos- 

tado. 
Deseo. 
Descuido. 
Grito. 
Gemido. 
Pagare. 


Assassin. 
Increase,  aug- 
mentation. 
Bolt. 

Field,  country. 
Broker. 
Finger. 
Dialogue. 
Pain  in  the  side. 

Desire,  wish. 
Carelessness. 
Shout. 

Groan,  moan. 
Promissory 
note. 


Barba. 

Carcajada. 

Decena. 

Definicion. 

Evidencia. 

Espalda. 

Gana. 

Hoja. 

Loteria 

Llave. 

Pena. 

Pera. 

Pobreza. 

Pascua. 

Rodilla. 

Vuelta. 


Beard,  chin. 

Burst  of  laughter. 

About  ten. 

Definition. 

Evidence. 

Back. 

Desire,  mind. 

Leaf. 

Lottery. 

Key. 

Difficulty,  pain. 

Pear. 

Poverty. 

Easter. 

Knee. 

Turn,  change. 


350 

LFSSON  LIX. 

Presidio. 

State  prison. 

Posicion.         Position. 

Peral. 

Pear-tree. 

Excusa.           Excuse,  apology. 

Pesame. 

Condolence. 

Premio. 

Prize,  premium, 
reward. 

Salto. 

Jump,  spring. 

Semblante. 

Look. 

Trago. 

Draught,  drink. 

COMPOSITION. 

Su   pagare   de 

V.  cae   el   mes  que 

Your  note  falls  due  next  month. 

viene. 
Le  ha  caido  la  loteria. 
Este  edificio  cae   al  (or  hacia  el) 

Norte. 
Mis  ventanas  caen  a  la  mano  dere- 

cha. 
Este  vestido  te  cae  bien. 
No  cayo  en  la  cuenta. 

Ya  caigo  en  ello. 

Estar  al  caer. 

Caer  de  pies,  de  rodillas. 

Lo  doy  por  hecho. 

Lo  dieron  por  libre. 

Me  doy  por  vencido. 

Le  dio  un  dolor  de  costado. 

La  lectura  de  ese  libro  te  dara  ganas 

de  dormir. 
Al  fin  dio  en  la  dificultad. 
Dar  los  buenos  dias. 
Dar  las  pascuas. 
Dar  el  pesame. 
Dar  la  enhorabuena. 
Dar  gritos. 
Dar  gemidos. 
Dio  una  carcajada. 
Dar  a  comprender. 
Darse  a  conocer. 
Dar  una  vuelta. 
Dar  pena. 
Dar  gusto. 
Dar  gana. 


He  has  won  a  prize  in  the  lottery. 
This    building    looks    toward    the 

North. 
My  windows  are  on  the  right  hand. 

This  dress  fits  her  well. 

He  did  not  see  the  drift  (of  what 

was  said). 
Ah,  now  I  see ! 
To  be  about  to  take  place. 
To  fall  on  one's  feet,  on  one's  knees, 
I  take  for  granted  it  is  done. 
They  let  him  go  free. 
I  give  up. 

A  pain  struck  him  in  the  side. 
Reading  this    book  will   put  you 

asleep  (or  make  you  sleep). 
Finally  he  fell  upon  the  difficulty. 
To  wish  one  a  good  day. 
To  wish  a  happy  Easter. 
To  express  condolence. 
To  congratulate. 
To  give  shouts. 
To  utter  groans. 
He  burst  out  laughing. 
To  give  to  understand. 
To  make  one's  self  known. 
To  take  a  turn,  to  go  round. 
To  cause  displeasure. 
To  give  pleasure. 
To  have  a  mind ;  to  take  a  notion. 


LESSON  LIX. 


351 


Dar  saltos. 

Dio  que  decir. 

Esto  no  dice  bien  con  aquello. 

El  bianco  dice  bien  con  el  azul. 

Su  vestido  dice  su  pobreza. 

El  serablante  de  Juan  dice  bien  su 

mal  genio. 
Este  peral  echa  muchas  peras. 

Esta  planta  no  ha  echado  hojas. 

He  echado  un  trago. 

Eche  V.  la  Have  a  la  puerta. 

Echar  pie  a  tierra. 

Echar  el  cerrojo. 

Echarlo  a  juego  {or  chanza). 

Hoy  echan  la  comedia  nueva. 

Ha  echado  coche. 

Echar  a  presidio. 

Echar  por  los  campos. 

Echaron  a  correr. 

Lo  echo  todo  a  perder. 

Echar  a  rodar. 

No  echo  de  ver  este  defecto. 

I  Echa  V.  de  menos  algo  f 

No,  senor ;  echo  de  menos  a  alguien. 

Me  eche  a  dormir. 

Se  echo  a  reir. 

Se  echo  a  corredor. 


To  jump  about. 

He  left  room  for  a  talk. 

This  is  not  in  strict  accordance  with 

that.  • 

White  goes  very  well  with  blue. 
Her  dress  declares  her  poverty. 
John's  bad  temper  is  pictured  on 

his  countenance. 
This  pear-tree  bears  a  great  many 

pears. 
This  plant  has  not  had  any  leaves. 
I  have  taken  a  drink. 
Lock  the  door. 
To  dismount. 
To  draw  tHe  bolt. 
To  take  it  in  play  (or  in  jest). 
The  new  play  comes  out  to-night. 
He  has  bought  a  carriage. 
To  send  to  prison. 
To  set  out  across  the  fields. 
They  set  out  running. 
He  spoiled  all. 
To  set  rolling. 

I  do  not  perceive  the  defect. 
Do  you  miss  anything? 
No,  sir ;  I  miss  some  one. 
I  went  asleep. 
He  began  to  laugh. 
He  became  a  broker. 
He  threw  him  into  the  street. 


Lo  puso  de  patitas  en  la  calle. 

EXPLANATION. 

282.  The  verbs  caer^  to  fall ;  dar^  to  give ;  decir ^  to  tell, 
or  to  say ;  echar ^  to  throw ;  differ  from  the  English  in  meaning 
as  conveyed  by  the  sentences  which  are  given  in  the  Compo- 
sition, and  to  which  we  refer  without  putting  them  here,  in 
order  to  avoid  repetition. 

There  they  are  to  be  found,  with  their  English  transla- 
tions, which  is  the  only  explanation  of  which  they  admit. 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 
1.  Don  Gonzalo,  i.  le  ha  caido  a  V.  la  loteria  ?    No,  seiior  ; 
pero  mi  pagare  ha  caiao. 


352  LESSON  LIX. 

2.  Luisita,  i  quien  ha  hecho  ese  vestido  que  te  cae  tan  bien  ? 
Mi  mama  lo  corto  y  yo  lo  cosi. 

3.  I  No  sabe  V.  por  que  me  hace  ahora  tantos  cumplimientos 
Don  Enriqiue  ?  No,  senor,  no  se  que  motivo  tenga  para  ser  ahora 
mas  politico  con  V.  que  lo  ha  sido  hasta  aqui. 

4.  I  No  sabe  V.  que  me  ha  caido  el  premio  de  los  cien  mil 
pesos  en  la  loteria  de  la  Habana  ?  Si,  senor  ;  ya  me  lo  ha  dicho 
V.  antes. 

5.  Pues  bien,  i  no  cae  V.  ahora  en  la  cuenta  ?  i  Ha !  ya  caigo 
en  ello.     Don  Enrique  quiere  pedirle  a  V.  dinero  prestado. 

6.  I  Han  dado  las  doce  ?    Estan  al  caer. 

7.  i  Dieron  garrote  a  los  asesinos  ?  No,  senor,  al  fin  los 
dieron  por  libres,  porque  no  habia  evidencia  suficiente  para  sen- 
tenciarlos. 

8.  I  Que  ha  tenido  su  hermano  de  V.  que  no  lo  he  visto  por 
tanto  tiempo  ?  Le  dio  un  dolor  de  costado  y  ha  tenido  que  guar- 
dar  cam  a  por  una  semana. 

9.  e  A  que  no  adivina  V.  lo  que  acabo  de  hacer  ?  Segura- 
mente  que  no  lo  adivinare,  porque  V.  es  capaz  de  hacer  muchas 
cosas  buenas  y  malas. 

10.  I  Se  da  V.  por  vencido  ?  Me  doy. — Pues  vengo  de  echar 
un  trago. 

11.  I  Que  comedia  dan  hoy  ?  Hoy  dan  la  tragedia  de  "  Me- 
dea," en  donde  representa  la  Senora  Ristori ;  l  ira  V.  ? 

12.  Siendo  en  italiano  no  ire,  porque  no  comprendo  el  ita- 
liano  y  me  daria  ganas  de  dormir. 

13.  Sr.  D.  Alejandro,  vengo  a  darle  a  Y.  los  buenos  dias. — 
Tengalos  V.  rauy  buenos. 

14.  I  No  me  quiere  V.  dar  alguna  otra  cosa  ?  Si,  senor,  le  doy 
a  V.  la  enhorabuena  por  el  aumento  que  ha  tenido  V.  en  su 
f  am  ilia. — Viva  V.  mil  aiios. 

15.  Todo  eso  es  muy  bueno,  D.  Pepito ;  pero  sea  V.  generoso 
y  deme  V.  alguna  cosita  mas. — Hombre,  si  V.  no  se  da  a  com- 
prender  yo  no  se  que  mas  darle  a  V.  ;  Ha  !  si,  ya  caigo !  que 
estamos  en  tiempo  de.  .  .  .  Doy  a  V.  felices  pascuas. 

16.  Dale,  dale,  si  no  es  eso,  yo  hablo  del  dinero  que  preste  a 
V.  hace  mas  de  un  ano.— jHa!  Senor  D.  Alejandro,  no  crea  V. 
que  yo  lo  hay  a  echado  en  saco  roto. 

17.  Pues  bien  ;  i  por  que  no  me  lo  da  V.  ?  \  Por  que !  hombre, 
ahora  ha  dado  V.  en  la  dificultad,  y  esta  es  que  yo  no  tengo 
dinero,  y  por  consiguiente  no  puedo  darlo. 


LUSSOJSr  LIX,  353 

18.  Entonces,  l  que  es  lo  que  V.  puede  dar  ?  j  Oh  !  en  cuanto 
a  eso  yo  puedo  dar  muchas  cosas. 

19.  i  Ha !  me  alegro  mucho,  veamos  lo  que  V.  puede  dar. — En 
primer  lugar  puedo  dar  gemidos. 

20.  i  Puf !  {pshaw). — Tambien  puedo  dar  gritos. 

21.  i  Dale ! — Puedo  dar,  .  .  .  que  decir. 

22.  No  lo  dudo. — Puedo  dar  un  pesame. 

23.  i  Dios  me  libre  ! — Puedo  dar  saltos. 

24.  Vaya  acabe  V.,  hombre,  acabe  Y. — Puedo  dar  a  com- 
prender. 

25.  Si,  eso  si,  demasiado  comprendo. — Puedo  darme  a  conocer. 
2^.  Ya,  ya,  conozco  de  que  pie  cojea  V. — Puedo  dar  una 

vuelta.  • 

27.  Pues  vuelvase  V.,  por  donde  ha  venido  y  nunca  de  V. 
mas  vueltas  por  esta  casa. — Y  todavia  mas,  puedo  dar  una  carca- 
jada. 

28.  i  Juan !  Juan !  echa  a  ese  hombre  de  casa,  y  despues  echa 
la  Have  y  el  cerrojo  a  la  puerta.  \  Haya  picaro  I  lo  he  de  echar 
a  un  presidio ! 

29.  i  Has  echado  a  ese  hombre  a  la  calle  ?  Si,  senor,  ya  lo 
puse  de  patitas  en  la  calle. 

30.  Y  I  que  dijo  ?  Primero  se  echo  a  reir,  yo  le  amenace  que 
lo  echaria  a  rodar  y  entonces  echo  a  correr. 

31.  El  diantre  del  hombre  siempre  esta  pidiendo  dinero  pres- 
tado  y  sobre  no  pagarlo  se  viene  a  reir  de  uno  en  su  barbas. — 
Seiior,  i  manda  V.  alguna  otra  cosa  ?  No,  te  puedes  ir,  yo  voy  a 
echarme  a  dormir,  ese  bribon  me  ha  dado  un  gran  dolor  de* 
cabeza. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  tiiere  anything  in  the  papers  this  morning  relative  to 
the  trial  of  the  murderer  of  Smith  ?  I  understand  that  his  trial 
will  not  take  place  before  a  month  from  this  time. 

2.  Why  did  you  not  bring  your  friend  with  you  ?  He  is  not 
able  to  walk  very  far  to-day,  owing  to  a  pain  in  his  side,  which 
has  troubled  him  for  the  last  three  days. 

3.  Did  you  tell  the  servant  to  draw  the  bolt  of  the  door  ? 
No,  but  I  told  him  to  lock  the  door. 

4.  Who  is  that  I  hear  groaning  ?  You  hear  no  one  groan- 
ing ;  it  is  some  one  shouting  in  the  distance. 

5.  How  did  your  cousin  lose  his  situation  ?  He  owes  that 
misfortune  entirely  to  his  own  carelessness. 

25 


354 


LUSSON  LX. 


6.  Charles,  are  you  not  going  to  say  good  morning  to  that 
gentleman  ?  I  need  not  say  good  morning  to  him  now,  for  I  have 
already  wished  him  a  happy  Easter. 

7.  Did  that  merchant  pay  his  correspondent  at  Malaga  after 
all  ?  He  did  not  pay  him ;  but  he  gave  him  a  note  at  three 
months. 

8.  What  do  you  understand  by  parlor  plays  (household  com- 
edies) in  Spain  ?  They  are  plays  represented  by  private  indi- 
viduals *  sometimes  in  private  houses,  from  w^hich  circumstance 
they  take  their  name. 

9.  Do  you  know  that  round-faced  little  man  who  is  sitting 
next  to  your  uncle  ?  That  is  one  of  the  principal  actors  (actor) 
in  the  parlor  plays  given  at  Mr.  Gutierrez's. 

10.  What  became  of  the  offender  ?  The  evidence  not  being 
sufficient  to  prove  the  crime  of  which  he  was  accused  f  he  w^as  let 
go ;  otherwise  he  would  have  been  sent  to  state  prison. 

11.  Did  they  refuse  to  give  him  the  things  he  wanted  on 
credit  ?  Of  course  they  did,  because  no  one  can  rely  on  him  nor 
give  credit  to  anything  he  says. 

12.  Will  that  young  man  probably  obtain  the  employment 
for  which  he  has  applied  ?  Most  probably  he  will,  because  he 
has  had  the  good  fortune  to  get  into  the  president's  favor. 

13.  How !  do  you  not  attend  your  classes  this  week  ?  No,  I 
am  not  very  well ;  and  so  a  friend  of  mine  was  good  enough  to 
offer  to  act  in  my  place. 

14.  Was  the  error  corrected  before  the  letter  was  dispatched  ? 
*No,  it  was  not  discovered  in  time  to  be  corrected. 


LESSON    LX. 


Decidir. 

Ejecutar. 

Ejercer. 

Ensuciar. 

Enemistar. 

Escuchar. 

Exagerar. 

Exhibir. 


To  decide. 

To  execute. 

To  exercise. 

To  dirty,  to  soil. 

To  put  at  enmity. 

To  listen  to,  to  hearken  to. 

To  exaggerate. 

To  exhibit. 


^  Aficionados. 


f  Acusar. 


LESSON  LX, 


855 


Extranar. 
Enfriarse. 

Encargar. 

Exclamar. 

Exceptuar. 

Esforzar. 

Estrechar. 

Sospechar. 

Tardar. 


Atolladero. 

Camino. 

Astronomo. 

Col  era. 

Cometa. 

Cofre. 

Cajon. 

Capricho. 

Cuello. 

Car  0:0. 

Exterior. 

Ext*'anjero. 

Embarcadero. 


To  wonder  at,  to  find  strange. 
To  grow  cold,  to  get  (become) 

cold. 
To  commission,  to  order,  to 

give  charge. 
To  exclaim. 
To  except. 

To  endeavor,  to  make  effort. 
To  press. 
To  suspect. 
To  delav. 


Extra. 

Extra. 

Empero. 

But. 

Eliptico. 

Elliptical. 

Agrio. 

Sour. 

Estrecho. 

Close,  narrow. 

Preciso. 

Essential,  indispensable,  pre- 

cise. 

Elocuente. 

Eloquent. 

Tonto 

Foolish,  stupid. 

Travieso. 

Mischievous. 

Entrambos. 

Both. 

Entretanto. 

In  the  mean  time. 

Excepto. 

Except. 

Difficulty. 

Road,  way. 

Astronomer. 

Cholera. 

Comet. 

Chest. 

Drawer,  box. 

Caprice. 

Neck. 

Cargo,  charge. 

Exterior,  outside. 

Foreigner. 

Landing. 


Casaca. 

Colocacion. 

Civilizacion. 

Colera. 

Corte. 

Cometa. 

Cita. 

Charla. 

Claridad. 

Compafiia. 

Caja. 

Cartilla. 


Coat,  dress-coat 

Situation. 
Civilization. 
Anger. 
Court. 
Kite. 

Appointment. 
Chat. 
Clearness. 
Company.  ' 
Box,  case,  cash 
(commercial). 
Primer. 


356 

LESSON  LX. 

Espejo. 

Mirror,    looking- 

Calentura 

Fever. 

glass. 

Casualidad. 

Chance. 

Estrecho. 

Strait. 

Cantidad. 

Quantity, 

Elemento. 

Element. 

Capa. 

Cloak. 

Gobernador. 

Governor. 

Cara.   ) 
Haz.     \ 

Face. 

Grado. 

Grade,  degree. 

Horno. 

Oven. 

Carga. 

Charge  (of  a  gun, 

Luto. 

Mourning. 

&c.). 

Litro. 

Litre.* 

Cuchara. 

Spoon. 

Matematico. 

Mathematician. 

Culpa. 

Fault,  blame. 

Tonel. 

Cask. 

Criatura. 

Creature,  infant. 

Termometro. 

Thermometer. 

Costa. 

Cost,  coast. 

Ferrocarrii. 

Railroad. 

Disculpa. 

Apology. 

Fruto. 

Fruit  (result). 

Estacion. 

Season,  station. 

Fondo. 

Bottom. 

Existencia. 

Existence. 

Fluido. 

Fluid. 

Fragata. 

Frigate. 

■ 

Mascara. 

Mask. 

Tontera. 

Foolish  action. 

Pretension. 

Pretension, 
claim. 

Hierba. 

Grass. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

Hoy  entra  la  primavera. 

Spring  begins 

to-day. 

Manana  entra 

el  mes  de  Octubre. 

The  month  of  October  commences 

to-morrow. 

Entra  en  el  niimero  de  los  sabios. 

He  is  of  the  number  of  the  learned. 

Entro  a  reinar  a  los  quince  anos. 

He  began  to  reign  at  fifteen  years 

of  age. 

Este  tonel  hace  cien  litros. 

This  cask  holds  100  litres. 

No  le  hago  tan  tonto. 

I  do  not  take  him  for  such  a  fool. 

Yo  le  hacia  raas  rico. 

I  took  him  to  be  richer. 

Haz  por  venir. 

Try  to  come. 

Hace  de  gobernador. 

He  is  acting  as 

governor. 

Esa  pobre  rauchacha  esta  haciendo 

That  poor  girl  i 

s  acting  the  part  of  a 

de  madre  a  sus  hermanos. 

mother  to  her  brothers  and  sisters. 

A  eso  voy. 

That  is  the  point  I  am  coming  to. 

Voy  de  paseo. 

I  am  going  for 

pleasure. 

Van  de  mascara. 

They  are  going  in  masks. 

Va  de  luto. 

He  is  in  mourning. 

♦  Equal  to  1.056  American  quarts. 


LESSOJSr  LX. 


357 


Le  va  en  ello  la  vida. 

Vengo  en  ello. 

^  Cuanto  me  lleva  V.  por  esto  *? 

Estos  dos    amigos  se  llevan   muy 

bien. 
No  nos  llevamos  bien. 
Este  camino  lleva  a  Madrid. 
Le  llevo  dos  anos  y  medio. 

Me  lleve  chasco.  ^ 

Lleva  una  casaca  a  la  francesa. 

Se  hizo  a  la  vela. 

Manda  que  nos  traigan  el  almuerzo. 

Hare  que  nos  lo  traigan. 

i  Hace  V.  tenir  su  vestido  de  azul  ? 

No,  senor,  lo  he  mandado  tefiir  de 

verde. 
Saldra  buen  matematico. 

Salio  muy  travieso. 

Ya  he  salido  de  todos  mis  granos. 
Me  salio  una  buena  colocacion. 
Este  negocio  me  ha  salido  bien. 

Le  salio  mal  su  empresa. 

Este  nino  ha  salido  a  su  padre. 

Salio  de  la  regla. 

Pronto  saldre  de  hijo  de  familia. 

Esta    capa   me   sale   en    cincuenta 

pesos. 
Se  salio  con  su  pretension. 
Sirve  al  rey. 
No  sirve  para  nada. 
Sirvase  V.  admitir  mis  disculpas. 
^il  tarda  mucho  en  decidir. 
;  Cuanto  tarda  en  responder ! 
;  Adios !   Volvere  a  ver  a  V.,  y  le 

volvere  a  hablar  de  eso. 
Este  vino  se  vuelve  agrio. 
Se  volvera  bueno  con  el  tierapo. 
Este  melon  sabe  a  melocoton. 


His  life  is  at  stake. 

I  agree  to  that. 

How  much  will  you  charge  me  for 

this? 
These  two  friends  agree  Vrjry  well 

together. 
We  do  not  agree  well  together. 
This  road  leads  to  Madrid. 
I  am  two  years  and  a  hall  older 

than  he. 
I  was  disappointed. 
He  wears  a  coat  made  in  the  French 

fashion. 
He  set  sail. 

Order  the  breakfast  to  be  served. 
I  shall  have  it  brought  to  us. 
Are  you   getting  your  dress  dyed 

blue? 
No,  sir,  I  have  ordered  it  dyed  green. 
He   will  turn    out  (to  be)  a  good 

mathematician. 
He  (or  she — the  child)  turned  out 

very  naughty. 
I  have  gotten  rid  of  all  my  grain. 
A  good  situation  turned  up  for  me. 
This  business  has  turned  out  well 

for  me. 
His  undertaking  turned  out  badly. 
This  child  resembles  his  father. 
He  departed  from  the  rule. 
I  shall  soon  be  of  age. 
This  cloak  cost  me  fifty  dollars. 

He  obtained  what  he  desired. 

He  serves  the  king. 

It  is  good  for  nothing. 

Please  accept  my  apology. 

He  is  slow  in  deciding. 

How  long  he  is  in  answering  ! 

Good-by !   I  shall  see  you  again,  and 

talk  more  to  you  on  the  subject. 
This  wine  is  turning  sour. 
It  will  become  good  again  in  time. 
This  melon  has  the  taste  of  a  peach. 


358  Li:ssoN  LX. 


Este  vino  haele  a  vinagre. 

D.  Juan  hace  un  gran  papel  en  la 

corte. 
Napoleon  III.  hace  un  gran  papel  en 

la  politica  del  mundo. 


This  wine  smells  of  vinegar. 
John  makes  a  great  noise  at  court. 

Napoleon  III.  plays  a  great  part  in 
the  politics  of  the  world. 


EXPLANATION. 

283.  In  the  Composition  of  this  lesson  we  give  the  prin- 
cipal idioms  with  the  verbs  eiitrar^  to  go  (or  come)  in ;  hacer^ 
to  do,  to  make  ;  iV,  to  go ;  llevar^  to*take,  to  charge ;  mandar^ 
Jiacer^  in  the  sense  of  to  order,  to  cause  to  be  done ;  oler  a,  to 
smell  of ;  and  saher  a,  to  taste  of ;  salir^  servir,  tardar  and 
volver, 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Cuando  antra  la  primavera  ?  Debo  conf esar  f  rancamente 
que  no  se  el  dia  precise  en  que  entra  y  sale  cada  estacion. 

2.  Entonces  V.  no  entra  en  el  numero  de  los  sabios,  puesto 
que  no  sabe  cuando  estamos  en  invierno  y  cuando  en  verano. — 
Poco  a  poco,  senor  Don  Pedro,  eso  seria  hacerme  entrar  en  el 
numero  de  los  idiotas. 

3.  I  Pues  no  acaba  V.  de  decirlo  ?  Yo  acabo  de  deeir  que  no 
se  el  dia  precise  en  que  entra  cada  estacion  ;  pero  cuando  veo 
crecer  la  hierba  y  las  hojas  de  los  arboles,  y  abrirse  las  flores, 
sospecho  que  estamos  en  la  primavera. 

4.  I  Ha !  V.  sospecha  !  Vamos,  ya  es  algo. — Si,  seiior,  y  del 
mismo  modo,  cuando  veo  el  termometro  en  la  sombra,  que  marca 
98°,  creo  adivinar  que  estoy,  una  de  dos,  6  en  un  horno  6  en 
Nueva  York  en  la  estacion  del  verano. 

5.  Vamos,  yo  le  hacia  a  V.  mas  ignorante  de  lo  que  en  efecto 
es ;  e  y  como  adivina  Y.,  6  sospecha,  que  se  encuentra  Y.  en  el 
otofio  ?    Cuando  los  melocotones  se  acaban  y  las  hojas  caen. 

6.  i  Bien  !  bien  !  ^  y  el  invierno  ?  Cuando  por  la  manana  no 
puedo  lavarme  por  hallar  que  se  ha  helado  el  agua  en  la  pa- 
langana. 

7.  Ya  veo  que  es  Y.  un  sabio  perfecto.  Yeamos  en  historia 
I  a  que  edad  entro  a  reiijar  el  Rey  Pepino  ? — ;  Caspita !  Seiior 
Don  Pedro !  es  mas  facil  criticar  que  ejecutar,  y  mas  facil  hacer 
preguntas  que  responderlas,  y  si  no,  respond ame  Y.  que  la  echa 
de  sabio. 


Lj^'SSOJ^  LX,  359 

8.  I  Cuantos  litres  hace  ese  tonel  ?  i  Hombre !  yo  i  que  he  de 
entender  de  medir  toneles  ? 

9.  Pues  cambiare  de  materia,  l  quien  hace  de  gobernador  en 
Manila  ?    j  Y  a  mi  que  me  im porta  ! 

10.  i  Vaya !  ese  es  un  buen  modo  de  salir  del  atolladero. — No, 
senor,  sirvase  V.  recibir  mis  disculpas,  tengo  que  irme  ahora, 
pero  volvere  a  ver  a  V.,  y  volveremos  a  tratar  de  esa  materia. 
Adios,  senores. 

11.  I  Que  le  parece  a  V.,  Don  Enrique,  de  ese  caballero  ?  Me 
parece  que  este  joven  saldra  buen  matematico,  porque  ha  salido 
en  todo  a  su  padre. 

12.  I  Sabe  V.  si  salio  bien  6  mal  de  su  empresa  ?  Es  un  nego- 
cio  que  le  ha  salido  muy  bien. 

13.  I  Se  lleva  bien  Luisa  con  sus  hermanos  ?  Si,  seiior,  y  aun- 
que  no  les  lleva  mas  de  tres  6  cuatro  afios,  les  sirve  de  madre. 

14.  I  Cuanto  le  cuesta  a  V.  esa  capa  ?  Me  sale  en  unos  cin- 
cuenta  pesos. 

15.  I  Cuanto  tardara  la  fragata  en  hacerse  a. la  vela  ?  No  se, 
creo  que  el  capitan  es  hombre  que  tarda  eti  decidirse. 

16.  I  De  que  color  hace  V.  tenir  su  vestido  ?  Lo  mande  tefdr 
de  amarillo. 

17.  Don  Manuel,  mande  V.  que  nos  suban  el  almuerzo. — Hare 
que  nos  lo  traigan. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  When  does  Spring  begin  ?  It  begins  in  March  and  ends 
in  May. 

2.  Has  your  young  friend  passed  his  examination  yet  ?  The 
examinations  have  not  taken  place  ;  but  when  thev  do,  he  will 
prove  to  be  the  best  Spanish  student  in  the  country. 

3.  In  what  month  does  the  cold  weather  generally  commence 
in  the  north  of  Spain  ?  Winter  usually  sets  in  about  the  middle 
of  November. 

4.  How  much  does  this  cask  hold  ?  It  holds  from  100  to  120 
litres. 

5.  How  soon  do  you  set  out  for  Europe  ?  As  soon  as  the  fine 
weather  begins. 

6.  Are  you  going  on  business,  or  for  pleasure  ?  For  pleasure 
only. 

7.  How  are  they  going  to  the  ball  ?    They  are  going  in  masks. 

8.  How  much  did  your  tailor  charge  you  for  that  coat  ?  It 
cost  me  forty-five  dollars. 


360 


LESSON  LXL 


9.  What  do  you  take  to  be  my  cousin's  age  ?    I  should  take 
him  to  be  about  the  same  age  as  his  friend. 

10.  You  had  better  guess  again.     I  give  it  up. 

11.  How  old  is  he,  then  ?  He  is  two  years  and  four  months 
older  than  his  friend. 

12.  Do  you  know  whether  the  pianist's  brother  succeeded  in 
obtaining  the  position  he  applied  for  ?  He  did  not ;  but  an  ex- 
cellent situation  turned  up  for  him  a  short  time  after. 

13.  How  long  will  it  take  for  you  to  dye  this  dress  for  me  ? 
About  a  week. 

14  What  color  do  you  wish  it  to  be  dyed  ?  I  wish  to  have  it 
dyed  blue. 

15.  Do  you  think  this  boy  will  turn  out  to  be  as  good  a  musi- 
cian as  his  father  ?  I  have  not  the  least  doubt  of  it,  for  he  resem- 
bles him  in  every  respect  {en  todo). 

16.  Have  the  goodness  to  accept  my  apology  for  not  coming 
yesterday  as  I  had  promised.  Certainly,  sir ;  I  know  very  well 
that  you  have  a  great  deal  of  business  to  arrange. 

17.  For  whom  is  Mr.  Terrero  in  mourning  ?  For  his  uncle, 
who  died  about  a  year  ago  in  Manila. 


LESSON    LXI. 


Felicitar. 

Fiar. 

Ignorar. 

Lastimar. 

Improvisar. 

Inquietar. 

Intentar. 

Interrogar. 

Invertir. 

Interesar. 

Invitar. 

Imprimir. 

Obligar. 

Rehusar. 

Lisonjear. 

Llevar. 


To  felicitate,  to  congratulate. 

To  trust. 

To  be  ignorant  of,  unaware  of. 

To  hurt,  to  wound. 

To  improvise,  to  do  (anything) 
offhand. 

To  make  uneasy,  to  cause  anxi- 
ety. 

To  attempt,  to  intend. 

To  interrogate,  to  question. 

To  invert,  to  invest. 

To  interest,  to  be  of  interest. 

To  invite. 

To  print. 

To  force,  to  oblige. 

To  refuse. 

To  flatter. 

To  carry,  to  take,  to  charge. 


LESSO 

N  LXL 

361 

Descuidado. 

Careless. 

Final. 

Final. 

Ignorante. 

Ignorant. 

Impersonal. 

Impersonal. 

Increible. 

Incredible. 

Indefinido. 

Indefinite. 

Inexplicable. 

Inexplicable. 

Ingenioso. 

Ingenious. 

Inmediato. 

Immediate,  close  by,  next. 

Inquieto. 

Uneasy,  restless. 

Justo. 

Just,  right. 

Ultimo. 

Last. 

Lisonjero. 

Flattering. 

Especiero. 

Spicer,  grocer. 

Loco. 

Mad. 

Lento. 

Slow. 

Solemne. 

Solemn,  cruel. 

De  Zeca  en  Meca. 

To  and  fro. 

A  ciegas. 

With  one's  eyes  shut. 

A  gatas. 

On  all-fours. 

En  el  interin. 

In  the  mean  time. 

Ampo  de  la  nie-  W  hiteness    of 

Anchuras  (f.pl.) 

.  Ease. 

ve.                           snow. 

Cuba. 

Cask,     toper, 

Asno.                     Ass. 

drunkard. 

Descuido.              Carelessness. 

Cara. 

Face. 

Hueso.                   Bone. 

Cartilla. 

Primer. 

Golpe.                    Blow,  stroke. 

Calabaza. 

Pumpkin,  re- 

Dares y  tomares.  Dispute. 

fusal. 

Indice.                    Index. 

Imaginacion 

Imagination. 

Ingenio.                Genius. 

Intencion. 

Intention. 

Insecto.                  Insect. 

Interrogacion. 

Interroga- 

Instinto.                Instinct. 

tion. 

Instrumento.         Instrument. 

Inversion. 

Inversion. 

Interrogante.        Question,  note 

Justicia. 

Justice. 

of     interro- 

Llave. 

Key. 

gation. 

Lluvia. 

Pain. 

Italiano.                Italian. 

Lista. 

List. 

Arco  iris.               Rainbow. 

Lisonja. 

Flattery. 

Galicismo.            Gallicism. 

Luna. 

Moon. 

362 

LESSON  LXL 

Hierro. 

Iron. 

Luz. 

Ligbt. 

Juego. 

Play. 

Latitud. 

Latitude. 

Loco. 

Madman. 

Longitud. 

Longitude. 

Lugar. 

Place. 

Legua. 

League. 

Latin. 

Latin. 

Letra. 

Letter. 

Sonido.  1 

?\CY11T\{\ 

Limosna. 

Alms. 

Son.       > 

VJKJ\XLl.\Xm 

Limpieza. 

Cleanness. 

Pico. 

Beak. 

Lmea. 

Line. 

Levita 

Levite. 

Levita. 

Frock-coat. 

Uso. 

Use.  custom. 

Rama. 

Brancb. 

Objeto. 

Object. 

Teja. 

Tile. 

Oido 

Ear,  bearing. 

Ocasion. 

Occasion. 

Olfato. 

Smell. 

COMPO 

Vergiienza. 
SITION. 

Sbame. 

A  mas  tardax. 

A  media  palabra. 

A  medida  de  sus  deseos. 

A  sus  anchuras. 

Al  descuido  y  con  cuidado. 

Abrir  el  ojo. 

Alia  se  las  haya. 

Andar  a  ciegas. 

Andar  a  gatas. 

A  todo  coirer. 

Vaya  V.  eon  Dios. 

fil  va  de  capa  caida. 

£l  va  de  Zeca  en  Meca. 

Ir  de  puntillas. 

Andar  en  dares  y  tomares. 

Andarse  per  las  ramas. 

De  t€jas  aba  jo. 

Asir  la  ocasion  por  los  cabellos. 

Bailar  al  son  que  se  toca. 

Beber  los  aires  or  los  vientos. 

Beber  como  una  cuba. 

Blanco  como  el  ampo  de  la  nieve. 

Bocado  sin  hueso. 

Burla  burlando. 
Buscar  cinco  pies  al  gato. 
Xo  caber  de  gozo. 
No  caber  en  si. 


At  latest. 

At  the  slightest  hint. 

According  to  one's  wishes. 

At  one's  ease. 

Studiously  careless. 

To  be  upon  the  alert. 

Let  him  look  to  that. 

To  grope  in  the  dark. 

To  creep  on  all-fours. 

With  all  speed. 

Go  in  peace. 

He  is  crestfallen. 

He  goes  roving  about,  to  and  fro. 

To  go  on  tiptoe. 

To  quarrel. 

Not  to  come  to  the  point. 

Humanly  speaking. 

To  take  time  by  the  forelock. 

To  go  with  the  stream. 

To  desire  anxiously. 

To  drink  like  a  fish. 

White  as'the  driven  snow. 

An   employment  without  labor ;  a 

sinecure. 
Between  joke  and  earnest. 
To  pick  a  quarrel. 
To  be  overjoyed. 
To  be  bursting  with  pride. 


LESSON  LXL 


363 


No  cabe  en  el. 

Caer  de  su  asno. 

Caersele  a  uno  la  cara  de  vergiienza. 

Callar  el  pico. 

Chanzas  aparte. 

Con  mil  amores. 

Con  su  pan  se  lo  coma, 

Conque,  hasta  la  vista. 

Cosa  que  no  esta  en  la  cartilla. 

Dar  a  alguno  con  las  puertas  en  la 

cara. 
Dar  i  luz. 

Dar  por  supuesto,  or  por  sentado. 
Dar  chasco. 
Dar  el  si. 
Dar  golpe  una  cosa. 

Dar  calabazas. 
No  se  le  da  nada. 


He  is  not  capable  of  such  a  thing. 

To  acknowledge  one's  fault. 

To  blush  with  shame. 

To  hold  one's  tongue. 

Jesting  aside. 

Most  willingly. 

That  is  his  own  business. 

I  hope  we  may  soon  meet  again. 

Something  out  of  the  common  way. 

To  shut  the  door  in  one's  face. 

To  publish  :  to  give  birth  to. 

To  take  for  granted. 

To  disappoint. 

To  consent. 

To  strike  one  with  admiration,  or 

astonishment  (said  of  things). 
To  give  the  mitten. 
He  cares  nothing  about  it. 


CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  i  Le  salen  a  V.  las  cosas  a  medida  de  sus  deseos  ?  Chan- 
zas aparte,  Don  Juan,  V.  sabe  bien  que  de  tejas  abajo  eso  nunca 
sucede. 

2.  Si,  pero  como  V.  baila  al  son  que  se  toca  y  sabe  asir  la 
ocasion  por  los  cabellos,  siempre  esta  a  sus  anchuras  y  tiene 
siempre  al^n  bocado  sin  hueso. — Ami  go,  caiga  V.  de  su  asno  y 
confiese  de  buena  fe  que  si  anda  de  capa  caida,  es  porque  va 
siempre  de  Zeca  en  Meca,  y  porque  bebe  mas  que  una  cuba. 

3.  Adios,  Don  Pedro,  me  voy,  porque  no  quiero  buscar  cinco 
pies  al  gato. — Yaya  V.  con  Dios,  Don  Juan. 

4.  Don  Pedro,  me  parece  que  V.  ha  dado  con  la  puerta  en  la 
cara  a  Don  Juan. — No,  seiior,  Don  Enrique,  a  otro  se  le  caeria  la 
cara  de  vergiienza,  pero  a  el  no  se  le  da  nada,  y  pronto  lo  volvera 
V.  a  ver  por  aca. 

5.  Entonces  el  no  entiende  a  media  palabra. — A  mas  tardar 
lo  vera  Y.  aqui  otra  vez  dentro  de  media  bora. 

6.  El  pobre  hombre  anda  a  ciegas,  y  si  no  abre  el  ojo,  ira  a 
parar  a  un  hospital. — Con  su  pan  se  lo  coma,  y  alia  se  las  hay  a  ; 
yo  lo  siento  solamente  por  su  nina,  que  es  una  seiiorita  perfecta. 

7.  Me  ban  dicbo  que  V.  queria  casarse  con  ella,  i  es  verdad, 
Don  Enrique  ? — Si,  seiior,  y  lo  hubiera  hecho  con  mil  amores, 
porque  ademas  de  ser  muy  amable  e  instruida,  es  muy  bonita, 


364  LFSSO^''  LXL 

tiene  ojos  negros  muy  hermosos  j  es  tan  blanca  como  el  ampo 
de  la  nieve. 

8.  Pues  I  por  que  no  se  caso  V.  con  ella  ?  Por  una  pequena 
dificultad. 

9.  Quiza  V.  se  andaria  por  las  ramas  y  no  sabria  asir  la  oca- 
sion  por  los  cabellos. — No,  senor,  nada  de  eso,  antes  al  eontrario 
yo  lo  daba  todo  por  supuesto,  porque  V.  sabe  que  soy  rico,  y  crei 
que  la  niiia  me  daria  el  si  sin  hacerse  de  rogar. 

10.  I  Pues  que,  no  se  lo  dio  ?  No,  senor,  no  me  dio  el  si,  pero 
me  dio  calabazas. 

11.  i  Miren  la  rapazuela  I  e  y  V.  que  hizo  ?  Yo  que  bebia  los 
vientos  por  ella,  y  creia  que  siis  calabazas  eran  cosa  que  no  es- 
taban  en  la  cartilla,  recurri  a  su  padre,  creyendo  que  el  no  me 
negaria  la  mano  de  su  hija. 

12.  I Y  bien  y  que  ?  Que  me  lleve  un  solemne  chasco,  el 
padre  me  rehuso  la  mano  de  su  hija  ni  mas  ni  menos  que  ella  lo 
habia  hecho. 

13.  i  Pero  que  razon  le  dio  a  V.  para  ello  ?  Me  dijo  que  su 
hija,  aunque  pobre,  era  hija  de  un  caballero  y  que  ni  ella  querria 
ni  el  la  obligaria  jamas  a  casarse  con  un  especiero  comun  e  igno- 
rante  ;  que  el  dinero  era  una  gran  cosa,  pero  que  no  lo  compraba 
todo. 

14.  I  Y  V.  que  dijo  ?  Yo,  por  no  andar  en  dares  y  tomares  y 
dimes  y  diretes,  me  calle  el  pico  y  sail  de  su  casa  a  todo  correr. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Would  you  not  be  more  likely  to  obtain  what  you  wish, 
if  you  came  to  the  point  at  once  ?  Perhaps  I  should  ;  but  the 
matter  is  an  important  one,  and  I  considered  it  necessary  to 
enter  into  some  explanation  concerning  it. 

2.  Do  you  think  he  would  understand  me  ?  Of  course  h© 
would,  at  the  slightest  hint. 

3.  How  did  your  cousin  Charles  succeed  in  that  affair  ? 
Everything  turned  out  according  to  his  wishes. 

4.  How  soon  do  you  suppose  this  book  will  be  published  ?  I 
hope  it  will  be  published  in  a  very  short  time ;  I  know  they  are 
working  at  it  with  all  possible  speed. 

5.  Have  you  ever  seen  a  more  active  man  than  that  mer- 
chant ?  Never ;  and  I  have  never  seen  a  less  active  man  than 
his  brother ;  he  always  floats  with  the  stream,  and  troubles  him- 
self about  nothing. 


LUSSOJS-  LXL  365 

6.  Ought  you  not  to  have  shown  that  letter  to  your  brother  ? 
I  should  have  done  so,  of  course,  but  I  took  for  granted  that  he 
had  already  heard  the  news. 

7.  You  had  better  tell  your  friend  to  look  out,  and  not  get 
into  a  quarrel  with  that  man.  That  is  his  own  business ;  let  him 
look  to  it  himself. 

8.  Is  it  possible  that  he  could  be  capable  of  such  an  action  ? 
Yes,  but  the  worst  of  all  is,  that  he  is  not  ashamed  to  acknowl- 
edge it  to  every  one  he  meets. 

9.  When  is  Peter  to  be  married  ?  I  cannot  say  certainly ;  but 
I  suppose  in  about  a  month  at  the  latest. 

10.  I  don't  know  any  one  who  has  a  better  position  than  your 
uncle ;  plenty  of  money  and  scarcely  anything  to  do.  That  is  a 
fact,  his  position  is  a  real  sinecure. 

11.  What  has  occurred  to  that  gentleman  ?  he  looks  quite 
crestfallen.  Do  not  be  astonished  at  that;  he  has  been  unfor- 
tunate in  business,  and  has  lost  almost  all  he  possessed  in  the 
world. 

12.  Are  you  trying  to  pick  a  quarrel  with  me  ?  No,  I 
assure  you,  jesting  aside,  that  the  matter  stands  exactly  as 
I  say. 

13.  How  was  he  received  by  the  lady's  father  ?  He  was  not 
received  at  all,  they  shut  the  door  in  his  face. 

14.  If  you  desire  so  anxiouly  to  see  him,  why  do  you  not  go 
to  his  house  ?  I  cannot  make  up  my  mind  (decidirme)  to  do 
that ;  you  know  he  is  bursting  with  pride,  and  he  would  very 
probably  refuse  to  receive  me. 

15.  Well,  I  hope  we  may  soon  meet  again ;  present  my  re- 
spects to  your  family.  With  the  greatest  pleasure. — Please  not 
to  forget  the  letter. 

16.  I  care  nothing  about  that;  all  I  desire  to  know  is  if 
he  will  be  here  in  time.  I  think  you  may  rely  on  his  being 
punctual. 

17.  I  have  been  told  that  your  brother  was  about  to  be  mar- 
ried to  Miss  Ramirez ;  is  it  true  ?  I  really  cannot  say  how  the 
matter  will  turn  out ;  so  far  everything  seems  to  be  going  ac- 
cording to  the  desire  of  both  parties. 


366 


LESSON  LXIL 


lesso:n^  lxii. 


Aplicar. 

Cebarse. 

Echar  a  perder. 

Errar. 

Ocurrir. 

Murmurar. 

Madrugar. 

Medir. 

Montar. 

Mudar. 

Nacer. 

Sazonar. 
Reunirse. 

Modificar. 


To  apply. 

To  feed,  to  gloat. 

To  spoil. 

To  err,  to  miss. 

To  occur. 

To  murmur,  to  grumble. 

To  rise  early. 

To  measure. 

To  mount,  to  amount. 

To  change,  to  move. 

To  be  born,   to  spring  up,   to 

proceed. 
To  season,  to  ripen. 
To  unite,  to  collect  together,  to 

assemble. 
To  modify. 


Desprevenido. 

Unawares,  unprepared. 

Intachable. 

Unimpeachable,       unquestion- 

able. 

Maldito. 

Perverse,  confounded. 

Mayuscula. 

Capital  (letter). 

Miniiscula. 

Small  (letter). 

Numeral. 

Numeral. 

Noble. 

Noble. 

Nominativo. 

Nominative. 

Neutro. 

Neuter. 

Masculino. 

Masculine. 

Objetivo. 

Objective. 

Quieto. 

Quiet,  at  rest. 

Cumpleafios.  Birthday. 

Menoscabo.     Detriment,  lessen- 
ing. 

Pique.  Point,  verge. 

Rayo.  Thunderbolt. 

Socio.  Associate,  partner. 

Sabor.  Taste,  savor. 

Menudo.  Change,  small 

change. 


Apariencia. 

Bravata. 

Botica. 

Fiesta. 

Centella. 

Siesta. 

Suerte. 


Appearance. 
Bravado. 
Drug  store. 
Feast,  holiday. 
Spark,  flash. 
Siesta  (afternoon 

nap). 
Luck,  fortune, 

chance. 


LESSON  LXIL 

367 

Meridiano. 

Meridian. 

Murmuracion. 

Murmurings. 

Metal. 

Metal. 

Malicia. 

Malice. 

Miembro. 

Member. 

Mente. 

Mind. 

Mineral. 

Mineral. 

Muestra. 

Sample,  sign. 

Momento. 

Moment. 

Manera. 

Manner. 

Mozo. 

Youth,  waiter. 

Manteca,  or  man-  Butter. 

Macho. 

Male. 

tequilla. 

Maestro. 

Master,  teacher. 

Medida. 

Measure. 

Manuserito. 

Manuscript. 

011a  podrida. 

Sort  of  mixed 

Mar. 

Sea. 

dish. 

Olor. 

Smell,  odor. 

Ostra. 

Oyster. 

Olivar. 

Olive  ground. 

Negacion. 

Negation. 

Ostion.   (See 

Oyster. 

Mar. 

Sea. 

Ostra.) 

Negativa. 

Negative. 

Palo. 

Wood,  stick. 

Nota. 

Note. 

Polvo. 

Dust,  powder. 

Zaga. 

Rear-guard. 

Pano. 

Cloth. 

Parabien. 

Felicitation,  con- 
gratulation. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

De  buenas  a  primeras. 

Without  ceremony. 

De  bueaa  fe. 

In  good  faith. 

De  mala  fe. 

Deceitfully. 

De  intento. 

On  purpose. 

De  oidas. 

From  hearsay. 

Decir  por  decir 

To  talk  for  the  sake  of  talking. 

Dejar  a  uno  colgado. 

To  frustrate  one's 

hopes. 

Dejar  a  uno  en 

la  calle. 

To  strip  one  of  his  all. 

Dejar  atras  los  vientos. 

To  go  quicker  than  the  wind. 

Dejar  correr. 

To  go  with  the  world. 

Dejar  el  campo 

libre. 

To  yield  to  one's  competitors. 

Dejar  en  blancc 

). 

To  leave  blank. 

Dejarse  algiina  cosa  en  el  tintero. 

To  forget  to  say  something. 

Dia  de  cumpleanos. 

Birthday. 

Saber  algo  de  buena  tinta. 

To  know  anything    on    good    au- 

thority. 

De  dia  en  dia. 

From  day  to  day. 

De  un  dia  para 

otro. 

From  one  day  to  another. 

De  hoy  en  ocho  dias. 

This  day  week. 

Un  dia  si  y  otro  no. 

Every  other  day. 

Hoy  dia. 

Now-a-days. 

Dicho  y  hecho. 

No  sooner  said  than  done. 

368 


LESSON  LXIL 


Dormir  a  pierna  suelta. 

Dormir  la  siesta. 

Echar  a  perder  algo. 

Echar  bravatas. 

Echar  rayos  y  centellas. 

Echar  la  culpa  a  alguno. 

Echar  su'ertes. 

Empenarse  en  hacer  algo. 

Empenarse  por  alguno. 

En  un  abrir  y  cerrar  de  ojos. 

Encenderse  en  colera. 

Errar  el  tiro. 

Erre  que  erre. 

Escarmentar  en  cabeza  agena. 

Estar  a  pique  de  perderse. 

Estar  de  casa. 

Estar  de  fiesta. 

Estar  en  ascuas. 

Estar  en  lo  que  se  dice. 

Estar  a  sus  anchuras. 

Estar  sobre  si. 

Estar  desprevenido. 

Estar  mano  sobre  mano. 

I  Estas  en  tus  cinco  sentidos  ? 


To  sleep  at  one's  ease. 
To  take  an  afternoon  nap. 
To  spoil  anything. 
To  brag,  to  boast. 
To  be  furious,  enraged. 
To  throw  the  blame  on  any  one. 
To  cast  lots. 

To  insist  upon  doing  anything. 
To  interest  one's  self  for  any  one. 
In  the  twinkling  of  an  eye,  in  a  trice. 
To  fly  into  a  passion. 
To  miss  one's  aim. 
Obstinately. 

To  take  warning  by  others'  misfor- 
tunes. 
To  be  within  an  ace  of  being  lost. 
To  be  in  dishabille. 
To  be  merry. 
To  be  upon  thorns. 
To  comprehend  what  is  said. 
To  be  at  one's  ease. 
To  be  on  one's  guard. 
To  be  off  one's  guard. 
To  be  idle. 
Are  you  in  your  senses  ? 


CONVERSATION  AND   VERSION. 

1.  Senores,  dejen  Vds.  el  campo  libre,  que  aqui  viene  Don 
Pepito  echando  bravatas  y  rayos  y  centellas. — Bien  venido,  Don 
Pepito,  I  que  trae  V.  de  nuevo,  que  parece  estar  fuera  de  si  ? 

2.  No,  seiior,  yo  estoy  en  mis  cinco  sentidos,  pero  hay  gentes 
de  mala  fe  que  hablan  por  hablar  y  se  ocupan  de  criticar  al  pro- 
jimo. — I  Y  eso  a  que  viene  ? 

3.  Yo  no  lo  dig^o  por  V.,  Don  Enrique,  pero  V.  sabe  que  hay 
muchos  desocupados  que  se  vienen  a  su  botica  de  V.  y  critican  a 
todo  el  mundo. — ;  Vamos,  vamos  !  Don  Pepito,  que  a  V.  tambien 
le  gusta  un  poquito  la  murmuracion. 

4.  Ciertamente,  porque  si  no  e  Que  seria  de  la  conversacion 
sin  un  poquito  de  critica  que  la  sazone  y  le  de  interes  ?  Muy 
bien,  pero  entonces  no  eche  V.  la  culpa  a  nadie  de  hacer  lo  mis- 
mo  que  V.  hace. 

5.  Si,  pero  yo  hablo  sin  malicia,  de  buena  fe  y  dig*©  lo  que 
me  ocurre  por  decirlo,  nada  mas. — Asi  pueden  decir  los  demas. 


LESSON  LXIL  369 

6.  Si,  pero  yo  no  soy  como  Don  Carlos,  que  viene  aqui  de 
dia  en  dia,  y  de  la  manana  a  la  tarde  hablando  mas  que  un  saca- 
muelas  y  sin  dejar  a  nadie  hueso  sano. — Si,  pues  apliquese  Y.  el 
cuento. 

7.  No,  senor,  yo  no  soy  ni  tan  hablador  ni  tan  murmurador 
como  ninguno  de  los  que  se  reunen  aqui,  y  si  no,  observe  V.  un 
poquito  a  cada  uno  de  ellos,  Don  Gonzalo,  por  ejemplo,  i  ha  ve- 
nido  hoy  ?  No,  senor,  no  ha  venido,  ni  vendra,  porque  es  el  dia 
de  su  eumpleanos  y  lo  celebra  con  su  familia  en  el  campo,  por 
consiguiente  puede  V.  cebarse  en  el  a  su  sabor. 

8.  Don  Gonzalo  es  hombre  de  buenos  sentimientos  y  hombre 
honrado,  no  haya  miedo  que  yo  diga  nada  en  menoscabo  suyo, 
pero  tiene  un  maldito  genio  que  le  hace  echar  a  perder  toda  con- 
versacion. 

9.  Pues  yo  no  habia  observado  eso. — i  Como  hombre  !  pues  si 
viene  aqui  un  dia  si  y  otro  no,  a  criticar  a  los  que  se  reunen  en  la 
botica  de  la  esquina,  y  los  dias  que  no  viene  aqui  va  a  la  botica 
de  la  esquina  a  criticarnos  a  nosotros. 

10.  i  Y  que  es  lo  que  le  hace  echar  a  perder  las  conversaciones 
como  decia  V.  pocos  minutos  ha  ?  Que  en  un  abrir  y  cerrar  de 
ojos  se  enciende  en  colera. 

11.  Bien,  por  Don  Gonzalo,  l  y  nuestro  vecino,  Don  Alberto, 
ese  si  que  es  intachable,  no  le  parece  a  V.  ?  j  Ho  !  en  efecto,  es  un 
excelente  hombre,  lastima  que  errase  el  tiro. 

12.  I  Que  quiere  V.  decir  con  eso  de  errar  el  tiro  ?  Hablo  con 
respecto  a  sus  negocios. 

13.  Y  bien  i  que  le  sucedio  ?    Que  escogio  malos  socios,  y  le 

han  dejado  en  la  calle. 

14.  Pero  eso  no  puede  ser ;  Don  Alberto  goza  de  muy  buena 
reputacion,  V.  habla  de  oidas.— No,  senor,  que  lo  se  de  buena  tin- 
ta,  y  hoy  dia  esta  a  pique  de  perderse. 

15.  Pues  el  parece  dormir  a  pierna  suelta. — Esta  obligado  a 
hacerlo  asi  por  guard  ar  las  apariencias. 

16.  e  No  se  ha  dejado  V.  algo  en  el  tintero  ?  Sin  duda  que  me 
he  dejado,  pero  es  tarde  y  voy  a  dormir  la  siesta. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Is  the  custom  of  taking  an  afternoon  nap  as  common  in 
Spain  now-a-days  as  in  former  times  ?    It  is  quite  as  common 
now-a-days  as  it  ever  was,  not  only  in  Spain,  but  in  almost  every 
country  of  Europe. 
26 


870  LESSON  LXIL 

2.  Are  you  perfectly  certain  that  he  acted  with  sincerity  in 
that  matter  ?    I  am  quite  sure,  as  I  know  it  on  good  authority. 

3.  Who  told  you  that  young  man  had  acted  deceitfully  to- 
ward your  cousin  ?  I  do  not  care  to  say  much  in  the  matter, 
especially  as  all  I  know  respecting  it  I  only  know  from  hearsay. 

4.  Can  you  tell  me  how  that  merchant's  enterprise  turned 
out  ?  Very  badly ;  for  shortly  after  he  had  engaged  in  it,  he 
heard  of  his  brother's  misfortune,  which  frustrated  all  his  hopes. 

5.  Did  Alexander  manage  to  pay  his  debts  after  all  ?  No, 
he  did  not;  and  although  his  intentions  were  strictly  honor- 
able, his  creditors  {acreedores)  would  wait  no  longer,  and  they 
stripped  him  of  all  he  possessed  in  the  world. 

6.  What  date  do  you  wish  me  to  put  here  ?  Just  leave  a 
blank,  and  Charles  will  put  in  the  date  before  he  sends  off  the 
letter. 

7.  When  do  you  think  they  will  be  able  to  give  me  some  of 
the  papers  ?    Probably  by  this  day  week. 

8.  What  did  he  say  when  he  saw  how  the  tailor  had  spoiled 
his  coat  ?  Fortunately  for  the  latter  he  was  in  a  merry  mood, 
and  did  not  fly  into  a  passion  as  he  usually  does  when  anything 
occurs  to  displease  him. 

9.  Are  you  in  your  senses,  my  dear  friend  ?  are  you  not  aware 
that  such  a  thing  is  impossible  ? 

10.  Did  he  shut  the  door  on  purpose  ?  Yes,  but  he  sent  his 
servant  to  take  us  into  another  room,  for  he  was  in  dishabille,  and 
did  not  wish  to  be  seen  until  he  had  dressed. 

11.  How  often  do  you  go  to  dine  at  your  uncle's  ?  I  generally 
go  every  other  day. 

12.  Have  your  friends  returned  yet  from  the  country  ?  No, 
they  have  been  putting  it  off  *  from  day  to  day  for  some  time, 
and  I  shall  not  be  in  the  least  astonished  if  they  do  not  return 
before  November. 

13.  Why  did  you  not  bring  your  sister  with  you  ?  I  did  all  I 
possibly  could  to  persuade  her  to  come,  but  she  insisted  on  stay- 
ing at  home. 

14.  How  did  they  decide  who  should  go  first  ?  They  cast 
lots  for  it. 

*  Fosponer, 


LESSON  LXIIL 


371 


LESSON    LXIII. 


Eetirar. 

Pegar. 

Pescar. 

Posponer. 

Preceder. 

Prometer. 

Pazonar. 

Resfriarse, 

Regalar. 

En  frente. 

Frente  por  frente. 

De  hito  en  hito. 

De  grado. 

Por  fas  6  por  nefas. 


J 


Alarde. 

Bulto. 

Ganso. 


To  retire,  to  withdraw. 

To  stick,  to  adhere,  to  beat. 

To  fish. 

To  postpone. 

To  precede. 

To  promise. 

To  reason. 

To  take  cold. 

To  regale,  to  present. 

In  front,  opposite. 

Fixedly,  with  open  eyes. 
By  fair  means. 
Justly  or  unjustly. 


i  Cascaras ! 

Dear  me  !  Oh  1 

Afortunado. 

Fortunate. 

Ageno. 

Foreign,  belonging  to  others. 

Formal. 

Formal,  steady,  respectable. 

Pasivo. 

Passive. 

Perezoso. 

Lazy. 

Personal. 

Personal. 

Posesivo. 

Possessive. 

Potencial. 

Potential. 

Preciso. 

Precise,  necessary,  obligatory. 

Prelimina^. 

Preliminary. 

Preterito. 

Preterit. 

Puntual. 

Punctual. 

Partitivo. 

Partitive. 

Radical. 

Radical. 

Paro. 

Rare,  curious. 

ReciprocOo 

Reciprocal. 

Reflexive. 

Reflective. 

Rubio. 

Fair  (of  the  hair  and  complex- 

ion). 

Ruin. 

Mean. 

Boast. 

Bulk,  bundle. 

Goose. 


Bulla. 
Baza. 


Noise,  uproar. 
Trick     (card- 
playing). 


372 

LESSON  LXIIL 

Bledo. 

Straw. 

Huespeda. 

Hostess. 

Diente. 

Tooth. 

Puntuacion. 

Punctuation. 

Desafio. 

Challenge,  duel. 

Puntualidad. 

Punctuality. 

Espadachin. 

Bully. 

Paciencia. 

Patience. 

Estribo. 

Stirrup. 

Raja. 

Straw. 

Mequetrefe 

Trifling    fellow, 

Polvora. 

Gunpowder. 

meddler. 

Perseverancia. 

Perseverance. 

Pasaje. 

Passage. 

Porcion. 

Portion,   num- 

Pedazo. 

Piece. 

ber. 

Perro. 

Dog. 

Prenda. 

Good    quality, 

Plazo. 

Term. 

jewel. 

Plomo. 

Lead. 

Pronunciacion 

Pronunciation. 

Por  que 

Reason  why. 

Propiedad. 

Propriety, 

Publico. 

Public. 

property. 

Principio. 

Principle,  begin- 

Pulgada. 

Inch. 

ning. 

Raiz. 

Root. 

Rasgo. 

Trait. 

Rebanada. 

Slice. 

Recado. 

Message,  errand. 

Reforma. 

Reform,  refor- 

Recibo. 

Receipt. 

mation. 

Rector. 

Rector,  director. 

Regla. 

Rule. 

Refran. 

Proverb. 

Reina. 

Queen. 

Relampago. 

Flash  of  light- 

Repeticion. 

Repetition,   re- 

ning. 

hearsal. 

Relojero. 

Watchmaker. 

Resolucion. 

Resolution. 

Regalo. 

Present. 

Rosa. 

Rose. 

Reposo. 

Rest,  repose. 

Rutina. 

Routine. 

Resfriado. 

Cold. 

Suma. 

Sum. 

Reumatismo. 

Rheumatism. 

Sutileza. 

Subtilty,  fine- 

Reves. 

Wrong  side, 

ness. 

back. 

Salida. 

Departure. 

Rincon. 

Corner. 

Silaba. 

Syllable. 

Ruisenor. 

Nightingale. 

Soledad. 

Solitude. 

Sustancia. 

Substance. 

, 

Subida. 
Sueerra. 

Rising  ground, 

going  up. 
Mother-in-law. 

Faltar  d  su  palabra. 
Guardarse  de  algana  cosa. 


COMPOSITION. 

To  break  one's  word. 
To  take  care  not  to  do  a  thing  (not 
to  attempt  to  do  a  thing). 


LESSON  LXIIL 


373 


Hablar  a  bulto. 

Hablar  a  tontas  y  a  locas. 

Hablar  al  aire. 

Hablar  al  oido. 

Hablar  al  alma. 

Hablar  entre  dientes. 

Hablar  por  boca  de  ganso. 

Hacer  a  uno  perder  los  estribos. 

Hacer  de  las  suyas.         ^  H^'n*^.  v  (* 

Hacer  alarde  de. 

Hacer  la  cuenta  sin  la  huespeda. 

Hacer  caso  de. 

Haberla  {or  haberselas)  con  alguno. 

Irse  de  la  memoria. 

f  rsele  a  uno  la  cabeza. 

Van  cien  duros  a  que  es  cierto. 

Llevar  a  raal. 

Mai  de  su  grado. 

Mai  que  le  pese. 

Manos  a  la  obra. 

Meter  bulla. 

Meterse  a  caballero. 

Meterse  a  sabio. 

Meterse  con  alguno. 

Meterse  en  camisa  de  once  varas. 

Meterse  en  todo. 

Meterse  en  vidas  agenas. 

Mirar  de  hito  en  hito. 

Mostrar  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 

Nacer  de  pies. 

Nada  se  me  da  de  ello. 

No  dejar  meter  baza. 

No  cabe  mas. 

No  estar  para  fiestas. 

No  le  pesa  de  haber  nacido. 

No  se  me  da  un  bledo. 

No  tener  arte  ni  parte  en  alguna 

cosa. 
Perder  cuidado. 
Por  ce  6  por  be. 
Por  fas  6  nefas. 
No  llegara  la  sangre  al  rio. 


To  speak  at  random. 

To  speak  without  rhyme  or  reason. 

To  talk  vaguely. 

To  whisper  into  one's  ear. 

To  speak  one's  mind. 

To  mutter. 

To  echo  what  another  has  said. 

To  make  one  lose  his  temper. 

To  show  off  one's  tricks. 

To  boast  of. 

To  reckon  without  the  host. 

To  pay  attention  (or  respect)  to. 

To  dispute  (or  contend)  with  any  one. 

To  escape  one's  memory. 

To  lose  one's  reason. 

I  wager  a  hundred  dollars  that  it  is 
true. 

To  take  anything  amiss. 

Unwillingly. 

In  spite  of  him. 

To  set  about  a  work. 

To  make  a  noise,  a  bustle. 

To  assume  the  fine  gentleman. 

To  affect  learning  and  knowledge. 

To  pick  a  quarrel  with  any  one. 

To  interfere  in  other  people's  busi- 
ness. 

To  meddle  in  everything. 

To  dive  into  other  people's  affairs. 

To  look  steadfastly  at. 

To  take  to  one's  heels. 

To  be  born  to  good  luck. 

I  care  nothing  about  it. 

Not  to  allow  one  to  slip  in  a  word. 

Nothing  more  can  be  desired. 

To  be  out  of  temper. 

He  has  no  mean  opinion  of  himself. 

I  do  not  care  a  straw. 

To  have  no  hand  in  anything. 

Not  to  fear,  to  make  one's  self  easy. 

Some  way  or  other. 

Right  or  wrong. 

There  is  nothing  to  be  feared. 


374  LESSON   l.XIIL 

CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  D.  Pepito  ha  faltado  a  su  palabra,  6  i  cree  V.  que  vendra 
todavia  ?  i  Que  ha  de  venir !  Si  el  habla  siempre  a  tontas  y 
a  locas. 

2.  Pues  yo  crei  que  prometio  formalmente  venir  hoy. — Don 
Pepito  no  habla  nunca  formalmente. 

3.  I  De  que  manera  habla  entonces  ?  De  muchas,  el  habla  al 
aire,  a  bulto,  al  oido,  entre  dientes,  por  boca  de  ganso ;  pero 
nunca  habla  al  alma. 

4.  Esto  hara  perder  a  cualquiera  los  estribos. — A  esto  le  llama 
el,  haciendo  alarde,  hacer  de  las  suyas. 

5.  Si ;  pero  el  se  las  habra  conmigo,  porque  ha  hecho  la  cuenta 
sin  la  huespeda. — D.  Luis,  no  haga  V.  caso,  es  un  mequetrefe,  si 
Vds.  quieren  yo  ire  a  su  casa  y  le  hare  venir  mal  de  su  grado,  6 
mejor  dicho,  mal  que  le  pese. 

6.  No,  senor,  no  vaya  V.,  es  un  hombre  que  se  mete  en  todo. 
— Y  en  eso  tiene  V.  razon,  porque  el  se  mete  con  todo  el  mundo. 

7.  Y  hasta  se  mete  a  sabio  y  a  caballero. — Lo  peor  es  que 
mete  mucha  bulla. 

8.  Vamos,  senores,  i  en  que  mas  se  mete  el  pobre  D.  Pepito  ? 
Se  mete  en  camisa  de  once  varas,  en  vidas  agenas,  &c. 

9.  Pero,  seiiores,  no  olviden  Vds.  que  si  por  ce  6  por  be, 
lo  llegase  a  saber,  D.  Pepito,  y  por  fas  6  por  nefas  hubiese  un 
desafio,  no  lo  olviden  Vds.,  vuelvo  a  repetir  que  D.  Pepito  es  un 
gran  espadachin.  i  Vaya !  pierda  V.  cuidado,  que  no  llegara  la 
sangre  al  rio. 

10.  I  Don  Pepito  espadachin  !  i  Cascaras  ! — Van  cien  pesos  a 
que  si  le  miro  de  hito  en  hito,  muestra  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 

11.  V.  no  debe  llevarlo  a  mal,  aunque  Don  Pepito  sea  tan  su 
amigo ;  pero  es  muy  hablador  y  no  deja  a  nadie  meter  baza. — Yo 
no  tengo  arte  ni  parte  en  ello  y  no  se  me  da  un  bledo. 

12.  I  Se  acordo  V.  de  decir  aquello  a  su  vecino  el  Sr.  Foster  ? 
No.  seiior,  se  me  fue  de  la  memoria. 

13.  i  Es  un  joven  muy  afortunado  ?  Si,  senor,  ha  nacido  de 
pies ;  pero  se  que  no  le  pesa  de  haber  nacido. 

14.  V.  no  debe  criticarlo,  porque  ahora  no  esta  para  fiestas. — 
A  mi  no  se  me  da  un  bledo  de  que  este  6  no  de  mal  humor. 

15.  Hable  V.  bajo  6  hableme  V.  al  oido,  porque  veo  al  Senor 
Foster  alii  enf rente  y  V.  debe  guardarse  de  que  le  oiga  hablar  de 
ese  modo,  porque  lo  llevaria  a  mal. — Pierda  V.  cuidado  que 
no  llegara^la  sangre  al  rio. 


LESSON  LXIll.  375 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Does  that  man  always  keep  his  word  ?  I  have  never 
known  him  to  break  his  word  on  a  single  occasion. 

2.  Peter  is  very  sorry  that  Alexander  went  away  without  him, 
and  I  do  not  know  what  he  would  have  done  if  John  had  left  him. 

3.  John  took  good  care  not  to  start  at  the  same  time  as  his 
elder  brother,  for  he  well  knew  that  he  would  have  been  obliged 
to  show  him  everything  worth  seeing  in  the  city. 

4.  He  very  often  talks  for  hours  together  without  rhyme  or 
reason,  to  the  very  great  annoyance  of  those  who  have  to  listen 
to  him. 

5.  Believe  me,  it  is  no  proof  of  talent  to  talk  away  at  random 
for  an  hour  at  a  time,  without  saying  anything  that  could  be 
called  either  new  or  agreeable. 

6.  I  cannot  endure  a  man  who  is  so  ignorant  as  to  come  and 
whisper  something  in  my  ear  while  I  am  engaged  in  conversa- 
tion with  another. 

7.  Not  one  of  those  ideas  is  his  own,  he  only  echoes  what  he 
has  heard  said  by  others. 

8.  I  should  advise  you  to  pay  no  attention  to  anything  he 
tells  you. 

9.  Judging  by  his  manner  of  speaking,  one  would  say  that 
he  had  lost  his  reason. 

10.  I  am  willing  to  wager  fifty  dollars  that  not  one  word  of 
all  you  have  read  and  heard  on  that  subject  {sobre  esa  materia) 
is  true. 

11.  I  suppose  you  have  already  heard  of  my  good  fortune  ? 
I  have ;  and  I  need  not  tell  you  how  glad  I  was  to  know  that  you 
had  succeeded. 

12.  Did  you  hear  all  the  president  said  ?  Everything ;  he 
spoke  very  loud,  so  that  all  those  that  were  present  might  not 
lose  a  word. 

13.  Although  he  affects  great  learning  and  knowledge,  I  have 
had  occasion  to  know  that  he  is  a  very  ignorant  man. 

14.  I  know  very  well  that  he  has  no  mean  opinion  of  himself ; 
but,  after  all,  his  greatest  fault  is  to  dive  a  little  too  deeply  into 
other  people's  affairs. 


376 


LESSON  LXIV, 


LESSON   LXIV. 


Alumbrar. 

Soltar. 

Suponer. 

Situar. 

Significar. 

Saludar. 

Sobrar. 

Sonreirse. 

Soplar. 

Sonrojarse. 

Sufrir. 

Suplicar. 

Suspirar. 

Rasgar. 

Hebajar. 

Rebanar. 

Recitar. 

Recomendar. 

Referir. 

Regular. 

Remendar. 

Remediar. 

Repasar. 

Representar. 

Resolver. 

Zafar. 

De  gorra. 

De  perilla. 

Cascos  a  la  gineta. 
A  raya. 
A  solas. 
Siquiera. 
En  suma. 

Santo. 
Sutil. 


To  light,  shine. 

To  loose,  to  let  go. 

To  suppose. 

To  situate. 

To  signify. 

To  salute,  to  bow  to. 

To  remain    over,   to    be  too 

much,  too  many. 
To  smile. 

To  blow,  to  prompt. 
To  blush. 
.  To  suffer,  to  bear. 
To  supplicate,  to  beseech. 
To  sigh,  to  long  after. 
To  tear. 
To  lower. 
To  cut  in  slices. 
To  recite. 
To  recommend. 
To  refer,  to  tell,  to  relate. 
To  regulate. 
To  mend. 

To  remedy,  to  help. 
To  look  over  (a  lesson,  &c.). 
To  represent,  to  lay  before. 
To  resolve. 
To  disembarrass. 

Sponging,  at  the  expense  of 

others. 
To  the  purpose,  at  the  proper 

time. 
On  one's  high  horse. 
Within  bounds,  at  bay. 
All  alone. 
Even,  only. 
In  a  word,  in  fine. 


Holy,  saintly. 
Subtile,  fine. 


LESSON  LXir. 


377 


Silencioso.                            | 

Silent. 

Sordo. 

Deaf. 

Sustantivo. 

Substantive. 

Sucio. 

Dirty,  filthy. 

Atrevimien- 

Assurance,  dar- 

Blanca. 

Mite. 

to. 

ing. 

Bula. 

Bull  (of  the 

Cuerpo. 

Body. 

Pope). 

Inconve- 

Objection. 

Flaqueza. 

Weakness. 

niente. 

Grorra. 

Cap,   lady's 

Esfuerzo. 

Effort,  endeavor. 

bonnet. 

Descaro. 

Barefacedness. 

Calzas  (fern,  pi.) 

.  Breeches. 

Fondos  {pi.). 

Funds. 

Pieza. 

Piece. 

Matrimonio. 

Matrimony. 

Trastienda. 

Back  shop. 

Modismo. 

Idiom. 

Tienda. 

Store,  shop. 

Provecho. 

Profit,  benefit. 

Tijeras. 

Scissors. 

Yugo. 

Yoke. 

Tarjeta. 

Card    (visiting 

Trapo. 

Rag. 

or  business). 

Saber. 

Learning,  knowl- 

Traza. 

Mien,  appear- 

edge. 

ance. 

Sacacorchos. 

Corkscrew. 

Trampa. 

Trap,  cheat. 

Saldo. 

Balance. 

Traduccion. 

Translation. 

Salto. 

Leap,  jump. 

COMPO 

3ITI0N. 

Quedarse  en  bianco. 

To  be  left  in  the  lurch. 

Quedarse  hecho  una  pieza  {or  he- 

To  be  thunderstruck,  to  be  trans- 

lado). 

fixed. 

Querer  decir. 

To  mean. 

Sacar  fuerzas  de  flaqueza.* 

To  make  a  virtue  of  a  necessity. 

Sacar  provecho. 

To  turn  to  account. 

Sacudir  el  yugo. 

To  shake  off  the  yoke. 

Salir  a  luz. 

To  be  produced,  to  be  published. 

Salir  con  algo. 

To  gain  one's  end 

Salir  los  colores  a  la  cara. 

To  blush. 

Saiga  lo  que  saliere. 

Come  what  may. 

Salirse  con  la  suya. 

To  have  one's  own  way,  to  accom- 

plish an  object. 

Santo  y  bueno 

Well  and  good. 

Sin  mas  aca  ni  mas  alia. 

Without  ifs  and  ands. 

'  Racer  de  la  necesidad  virtud. 


378 


LESSON  LX2V. 


Sin  que  ni  para  que. 

En  nombrando   al  ruin  de  Roma 

luego  asoma. 
Sobre  la  marcha. 
Tan  claro  como  el  sol  (or  como  el 

agua). 
Tener  a  menos  hablar  a  uno. 
Tener  a  uno  a  raya. 
Tener  algo  en  la  punta  de  la  lengua. 

Tener  buen  diente. 
Tener  bula  para  todo. 

Tener  el  pie  en  dos  zapatos. 
Tener  los  cascos  k  la  gineta. 

Tener  su  alma  en  su  cuerpo. 
Tomar  el  cielo  con  las  manos. 

Tomar  la  ocasion  por  lo^  cabellos. 

Tomar  las  (calzas)  de  Villadiego. 

Vamos  claros. 

Venir  a  menos. 

Venir  al  caso. 

Venir  con  las  manos  lavadas. 

Venir  de  perilla. 

Venir  una  cosa  pintada. 

Verse  negro. 

Vestirse  con  veinte  y  cinco  alfileres. 

Dicho  y  hecho. 

Vivir  de  gorra. 

Virir  a  sus  anchas  (ancburas). 

Zafarse  de  alguna  cosa. 


Without  rhyme  or  reason. 
Speak  of  the  devil,  and  his  imps  ap- 
pear. 
Off-hand  (instantly). 
As  clear  as  daylight. 

Not  to  deign  to  speak  to  one. 

To  keep  one  at  bay. 

To  have  anything  on  the  tip  of  one's 

tongue. 
To  have  a  good  appetite. 
To  have  permission  to  do  what  one 

likes. 
To  have  two  strings  to  one's  bow. 
To  be  hare-brained,  to  have  little 

judgment. 
To  do  what  one  thinks  proper. 
To  be  transported  with  rapture,  to 

be  enraged. 
To  profit  by  the  occasion. 
To  take  to  one's  heels. 
Let  us  understand  one  another. 
To  decline  in  any  way. 
To  come  to  the  point. 
To  wish  to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  an- 
other's labor. 
To  come  at  the  nick  of  time,  or  to 

fit  exactly. 
A  thing  to  suit  (or  fit)  exactly. 
To  be  afB-icted,  embarrassed. 
To  be  dressed  in  style,  to  be  decked 

out. 
No  sooner  said  than  done. 
To  live  at  another's  expense. 
To  live  at  one's  ease. 
To  get  clear  (or  rid  of)  anything. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Que  quiere  decir  quedarse  en  bianco  ?  Quiere  deeir  lo 
mismo  que  quedarse  a  la  luna  de  Valencia,  esto  es,  quedarse  sin 
nada. 

2.  I  Y  quedarse  hecho  una  pieza  6  helado,  que  quiere  decir  ? 
Bon  modismos  que  indican  admiracion  6  sorpresa. 


LESSON  LXIV.  879 

3.  I  Quiere  V.  explicarme  algunos  modismos  espanoles  ?  No 
tengo  inconveniente,  pregiinteme  V.  el  significado  de  los  que  no 
comprenda  V. — Muy  bien. 

4.  Sacar  f uerzas  de  flaqueza,  i  que  quiere  decir  ?  Yo  creo  que 
es  haeer  esf  uerzos  ;  pero  tambien  significa,  hacer  de  la  necesidad 
virtud. 

5.  Sacar  provecho,  creo  que  no  necesita  explicacion  y  si  la 
ocasion  se  presenta,  creo  que  sabre  sacarlo. — i  Y  que  me  dice  Y, 
acerca  de  sacudir  el  yugo  ?  Que  aquellos  que  tengan  algiin  mal 
yugo  que  sacudir  deben  hacerlo  sobre  la  marcha. 

6.  Santo  y  bueno,  pero  Y.,  e  no  tiene  ningiin  yugo  que  sacu- 
dir ?  No,  senor,  es  verdad  que  estoy  bajo  el  yugo  del  matrimo- 
nio ;  pero  no  deseo  zaf arme  de  el,  porque  para  mi  aunque  es  yugo, 
es  un  yugo  santo  que  me  ha  hecho  muy  feliz  y  bajo  el  cual  deseo 
vivir  todavia  muchos  anos. 

7.  ^  No  le  parece  a  V.  que  aquel  hombre  vive  d^-gorra  ?  Si, 
senor,  aqui  se  venia  todos  los  dias  con  sus  manos  lavadas  y  se  nos 
comia  un  codo. 

8.  I  Y  por  que  no  lo  echo  V.  de  su  casa  ?  ;  Asi  lo  hice  ayer,  y  si 
y.  lo  hubiera  visto !  parecia  querer  tomar  el  cielo  con  las  manos  j 

9.  I  Yaya  un  atrevimiento  !  Al  fin  me  vi  obligado  a  amena- 
zarle  con  una  silla,  y  entonces  tomo  las  de  Villadiego. 

10.  Creo  que  antes  era  rico,  pero  ahora  ha  venido  a  menos. — 
No,  lo  que  es  tener,  todavia  tiene. 

11.  No  hombre,  si  no  tiene  sobre  que  caerse  muerto. — Perdone 
v.,  si  V.  quiere  que,  para  practicar  en  los  modismos  del  verbo 
tener,  le  diga  a  V.  lo  que  ese  buen  senor  tiene,  se  lo  dire  a  V. 

12.  Santo  y  bueno. — Pues  entonces  alia  va  sin  que  ni  para 
que. 

13.  Pero  hombre,  i  para  que  sacar  a  la  colada  los  trapos  de 
ese  buen  hombre?  Si  eso  es  tan  claro  como  el  sol  que  nos 
alumbra. 

14.  Yamos  claros,  e  quiere  Y.  6  no  que  le  diga  lo  que  ese  senor, 
que  se  viste  con  veinte  y  cinco  alfileres,  tiene  ?  Pero  si  no  viene 
al  caso. 

15.  Entonces  se  acabara  el  ejercicio  sin  poder  introducir  en  la 
practica  la  mitad  de  los  modismos  que  tenemos  en  la  leccion. — 
I  Ah !  si,  si,  tiene  Y.  mil  razones,  escucho,  i  que  es  lo  que  ese  buen 
senor  tiene  ? 

16.  En  primer  lugar  tiene  buen  apetito  y  buen  diente. — I  Cas- 
pita  !  que  si  lo  tiene !  e  y  a  quien  se  lo  cuenta  Y.  ? 


380  LESSON  LXIV. 

17.  Tiene  siempre  algo  en  la  punta  de  la  lengua  y  nunca  tiene 
nada  en  el  bolsillo. 

18.  Y  segiin  el  descaro  con  que  obra,  parece  tener  bula  para 
todo ;  tambien  tiene  los  cascos  a  la  gineta  y  con  tanto  tener  creo 
que  es  mas  lo  que  le  falta  que  lo  que  tiene. 

19.  Yo  no  se  como  tenerlo  a  raya,  i  no  me  hara  V.  el  favor  de 
aconsejarle  que  no  venga  mas  por  aqui  ?  Amigo  mio,  digaselo 
V.  mismo,  porque  yo  tengo  a  menos  hablar  a  una  persona  de  su 
especie. 

20.  Y  sin  embargo,  vea  V.,  el  tiene  el  pie  en  dos  zapatos,  i  y 
que  mas  tiene  ? 

21.  Dejeme  V.  pensar,  \  ah !  si,  el  pobre  senor  tiene  tod  a  via 
otra  cosa  mas. — Bien,  pues,  digala  V.,  que  se  acaba  el  ejercicio. 

22.  Tiene  su  alma  en  su  cuerpo.  Hombre,  calle  V.,  que  aqui 
viene  el  en  persona. — Si,  en  nombrando  al  ruin  de  Roma,  luego 
asoma. 

23.  Buenos  dias,  D.  Juan. — Tengalos  Y.  muy  buenos,  D.  Peri- 
qui  to,  I  que  se  ofrece  ?  Yengo  a  pedirle  a  Y.  diez  pesos  presta- 
dos,  que  me  vendrian  de  peril  la,  ;  porque  me  veo  negro ! 

24.  Hombre  pidaselos  Y.  al  Sr.  de  Y.  que  esta  en  fondos,  en 
cuanto  a  mi  me  encuentro  sin  blanca. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  I  understand  that  your  brother  was  left  entirely  in  the 
lurch  ?  Not  at  all ;  on  the  contrary,  he  came  out  much  better 
than  I  did. 

2.  How  did  he  feel  when  he  learned  that  I  had  heard  of  the 
whole  matter  ?  He  was  thunderstruck,  and  could  not  give  me 
any  reply. 

3.  How  are  you  going  to  manage  in  such  a  case  as  that  ?  I 
simply  have  to  make  a  virtue  of  necessity. 

4.  I  think  there  is  little  danger  of  his  not  succeeding :  what 
do  you  think  (what  appears  to  you)  ?  Not  the  least ;  he  is  very 
prudent,  and  knows  how  to  turn  every  thing  to  account. 

5.  Do  you  remember  when  that  article  was  published  ?  I 
do  not  remember  exactly  ;  but  it  seems  to  me  that  it  must  have 
been  some  time  in  last  November. 

6.  You  see  that  is  what  I  told  you  the  other  day  would  take 
place.  Yes,  that  is  true;  but  you  seem  to  have  forgotten  the 
condition  I  mentioned  to  your  friend  as  he  was  going  out. 

7.  Is  not  Mr.  Martinez  going  to  be  here,  as  he  promised  ?    I 


LESSON  LXV, 


381 


am  expecting  him. — We  shall  wait  until  seven  o'clock ;  if  he 
comes  before  that  time,  well  and  good ;  if  not,  we  shall  go  on 
with  the  business  of  the  evening  without  him. 

8.  Well,  let  us  understand  each  other  before  going  any 
farther.  It  seems  to  me  we  understand  each  other  perfectly ; 
the  thing  is  as  clear  as  daylight. 

9.  Oh,  Charles !  I  am  so  glad  to  see  you !  you  have  just 
come  at  the  nick  of  time ;  we  shall  have  the  pleasure  of  your 
company  at  dinner.  You  are  very  kind ;  but  really  you  must 
excuse  me ;  I  have  a  friend  waiting  for  me. 

10.  You  lost  your  coat  ?  how  did  you  come  home  in  the  cold 
without  it  ?   Alexander  lent  me  one  of  his  that  fitted  me  exactly. 

11.  No  sooner  said  than  done ;  he  took  his  hat  and  went  out 
in  search  of  him,  notwithstanding  it  rained  in  torrents. 

12.  You  may  be  at  ease  in  your  mind  on  that  score ;  I  shall 
manage  to  get  rid  of  him  very  soon. 

13.  I  wish  you  would  come  to  the  point,  for  up  to  the  present 
I  have  been  unable  to  find  out  what  you  mean. 

14.  One  would  have  said,  from  the  manner  in  which  he  was 
(viendolo)  decked  out,  that  he  was  going  to  the  theatre  or  to  a 
ball  instead  of  to  the  office. 


LESSON    LXV. 


Aventurarse. 

Apretar. 

Cobrar. 

Desafiar. 

Escaldar. 

Enhebrar. 

Enzarzar. 

Enfadarse. 

Hilar. 

Juntar. 

Madrugar. 

Prevenir. 

Eelucir. 

Sustentar. 

Trasquilar. 


To  venture. 

To  tighten,  to  urge. 

To  collect. 

To  challenge. 

To  scald. 

To  thread  (a  needle),  to  link. 

To  sow  discord. 

To  get  angry. 

To  spin. 

To  join. 

To  rise  early. 

To  warn,  to  inform. 

To  shine. 

To  sustain. 

To  shear. 


382 


LESSON  LXV. 


Tapar. 

To  cover  up,  to  close  up. 

Trampear. 

To  impose  upon,  to  deceive. 

Tragar. 

To  swallow. 

Trasnochar. 

To  sit  up  all  night. 

Termlnar. 

To  terminate. 

Tolerar. 

To  tolerate. 

Tornar. 

To  return,  to  do  over  again. 

Tranquilizar. 

To    tranquillize,   to  make   any 

one's  mind  easy. 

Tutear.* 

To  address  any  one  in  the  second 

person  singular,  to  speak  fa- 

miliarly to. 

Expresivo. 

Expressive. 

Justo. 

Just. 

Duro. 

Hard. 

Necio. 

Silly,  foolish. 

Practice. 

Practised,  experienced. 

Ciego. 

Blind. 

Tuerto. 

Blind  of  one  eye. 

Trigueno. 

Dark  (of  the  complexion). 

Tinto. 

Colored,  red. 

Tonto. 

Foolish. 

Tramposo. 

Deceitful,  swindling. 

Terminante. 

Decided. 

Tranquilo. 

Tranquil,  quiet 

A  borbotones. 

Bubbling,  hurriedly, confusedly 

Palabras  mayores. 

Offensive  words  or  expressions. 

No  ser  rana. 

To  be  able  and  expert. 

i  Caramba ! 

There  is  no  English  word  cor- 

responding to  this  ;  though  it 

is  used  about  as  "Confound 

it ! "  might  be  used. 

Asador.            Spit  (for  roasting). 

Cola.                  Tail. 

Copo.               Flake  (of  snow). 

Danza.                Dance. 

*  Tutear,  composed  of  the  two  second  person  singular  pronouns,  tu 
and  te,  with  the  termination  of  the  first  conjugation,  ar,  appended. 


LESSON  LXV, 

383 

Entendedor. 

One  who    under- 

Divisa. 

Motto. 

stands. 

Familiaridad 

.  Familiarity. 

Herrero. 

Blacksmith. 

Miel. 

Honey. 

Menosprecio 

.  Scorn,  contempt. 

Mona. 

Monkey. 

Hortelano. 

Gardener. 

Fama. 

Fame,  notoriety. 

Dado. 

Dye. 

Moderacion. 

Moderation. 

Proverbio. 

Proverb. 

Oveja. 

Sheep. 

Sayo. 

Sort  of  loose  coat 

Necesidad. 

Necessity. 

or  jacket. 

Pareja. 

Pair. 

Pecho. 

Breast. 

Rana. 

Frog. 

Raton. 

Mouse. 

Viga. 

Beam. 

Tio. 

Uncle. 

Tenacidad. 

Tenacity. 

Bebedor. 

Toper,  tippler. 

Tos. 

Cough. 

{All  these  an 

masculine,) 

Soliloquio. 

Soliloquy. 

Trineo. 

Sleigh. 

SuegTO. 

Father-in-law. 

Tacto. 

Touch. 

Sujeto. 

Person,      individ- 

Talento. 

Talent. 

ual. 

Telegrafo. 

Telegraph. 

Sobrino. 

Nephew. 

Tenedor. 

Fork. 

Sinonimo. 

Synonym. 

Termino. 

Term. 

Silencio. 

Silence. 

Trigo. 

Wheat. 

Sentido. 

Sense. 

Termometro. 

Thermometer. 

Semblante. 

Countenance, 

Torno. 

Lathe. 

looks. 

Toque. 

Touch,  ringing 

Secreto. 

Secret. 

(of  bells). 

Trato. 

Intercourse,  treat- 

Titulo. 

Title. 

ment. 

Trago. 

Draught,  drink. 

Traves. 

Breadth  (of  a 
thing). 

Tirabuzon. 

Corkscrew. 

COMPO 

SITION. 

A  buena  gaim  no  hay  pan  duro. 

A  lo  hecho  pecho. 

A  qui  en  se  hace  de  miel  las  moscas 

se  lo  comen. 
A  quien  madruga  Dios  le  ayuda. 
Al  buen  entendedor  con  media  pa- 

labra  basta. 
Al  fin  se  canta  la  gloria. 


Hunger  is  the  best  sauce. 
What  is  done  cannot  be  helped. 
Smear  yourself  with  honey,  and  you 

will  be  devoured  by  flies. 
The  early  bird  catches  the  worm. 
A  word  to  the  wise  is  sufficient. 

Boast  not  till  the  victory  is  won. 


384 


LESSON  LXY, 


Antes   que  te   cases   mira    lo   que 

haces. 
Antes  cabeza  de  raton  que  cola  de 

leon. 
Aunque  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda 

mona  se  queda. 
Bien  vengas  mal  si  rienes  solo. 
Cada  oveja  con  su  pare j  a  {or  Dios 

los  cria  y  ellos  se  juntan). 
Cada  uno  juzga  por  su  corazon  el 

ageno. 
Cada  uno  hace  de  su  capa  un  sayo. 

Cada  uno  sabe  donde  le  aprieta  el 

zapato. 
Cobra  buena  fama  y  echate  a  dor- 

mir. 
Como  el  perro  del  hortelano,  que  ni 

come  ni  deja  comer. 
Cuenta  y  razon  sustentan  amistad. 
Del  mal  el  menos. 
Debajo  de  una  mala  capa  se  encuen- 

tra  un  buen  bebedor. 
Dime  con  qui^n   andas,  y  te  dire 

quien^  eres. 
Donde  fueres  haz  como  vieres. 
Lo  mejor  de  los  dados  es  no  jugar- 

los. 
En  boca  cerrada  no  entran  moscas. 
En  casa  del  herrero  asador  de  palo. 

En  tierra  de  ciegos  el  tuerto  es  rey. 

Gato  escaldado  del  agua  fria  huye. 
Ir  por  lana  y  volver  trasquilado. 
Hombre  prevenido  nunca  fue  veu- 

cido. 
La  caridad  bien  ordenada  empieza 

por  uno  misrao. 
La  mucha  familiaridad  es  causa- de 

menosprecio. 
La  necesidad  carece  de  ley. 
La  tenacidad  es  divisa  del  necio. 


Look  before  you  leap. 

Better  be  the  head  of  a  mouse  than 

the  tail  of  a  lion. 
A  hog  in  armor  is  still  but  a  hog. 

Misfortune  never  comes  alone. 
Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together. 

Every  man  measures  other  people's 

corn  in  his  own  bushel. 
Every  one  may  do  as  he  likes  with 

his  own. 
Every  one  knows  where  the  shoe 

pinches  him. 
Get  a  name  for  early  rising,  and  you 

may  lie  a-bed  all  day. 
Like  the  dog  in  the  manger. 

Short  reckoning  and  long  friends. 

Of  two  evils,  the  lesser. 

We  should  not  judge  the  book  by 
the  cover. 

Tell  me  your  company  and  I  shall 
tell  you  what  you  are. 

When  in  Rome,  do  as  Rome  does. 

The  best  throw  at  dice  is  to  throw 
them  away. 

A  close  mouth  catches  no  flies. 

Xo  one  goes  worse  shod  than  the 
shoemaker's  wife. 

In  the  land  of  the  blind,  the  one- 
eyed  man  is  king. 

A  burnt  child  dreads  the  fire. 

The  biter  bitten. 

Forewarned,  forearmed. 

Charity  begins  at  home. 

Familiarity  breeds  contempt. 

Necessity  has  no  law. 
A  wise  man  can  change  his  mind ; 
a  fool  never. 


Lussoisr  Lxr. 


385- 


jliO  que  no  se  puede  remediar  se  ha 

de  aguantar. 
Mas  vale  tarde  que  nunca. 
Mas  vale  pajaro  en  mano  que  ciento 

volando. 
Mientras  en  mi  casa  estoy  rey  soy. 
Nadie  puede  decir  de  esta  agua  no 

bebere. 
No  es  oro  todo  lo  que  reluce. 
No  hay  mal  que  por  bien  no  venga. 

No  la  hagas  no  la  temas. 
Poquito  a  poco  hilaba  la  vieja  el  copo. 
Quien  bien  te  quiere  te  hara  llorar. 
Quien  mucho  habla  mucho  yerra. 
Vale  mas  rodear  que  rodar. 

Quien  no  se  aventura  no  pasa  la  mar. 
Ya  que  la  casa  se  quema  calente- 

monos. 
Vemos  la  paja  en  el  ojo  a  geno  y  no 

la  viga  en  el  nuestro. 
Tu  enemigo  es  de  tu  oficio. 


What  can't  be  cured  must  be  en-^ 

dured. 
Better  late  than  never. 
A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  iiii 

the  bush. 
A  man's  house  is  his  castle. 
One  can  never  tell  what  the  future 

will  bring. 
All  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 
It's  an  ill  wind  that  blows  nobody 

good. 
Do  no  evil  and  fear  no  harm. 
Rome  was  not  built  in  a  day. 
Spare  the  rod  and  spoil  the  child. 
Who  speaks  much  often  blunders. 
The  longest  way  round,  the  shortest 

way  home. 
Nothing  venture,  nothing  have. 
Let  us  make  the  best  of  a  bad  job. 

We  see  the  mote  in  our  neighbor's 
eye,  and  not  the  beam  in  our  own- 
Two  of  a  trade  never  agree. 


CONVERSATION  AND  VERSION. 

1.  I  Hay  muchos  proverbios  en  espaiiol  ?  Hay  muchisimos ; 
en  tod  as  las  lenguas  los  hay,  pero  en  la  espanola  creo  que  hay 
tantos  que  si  se  reuniesen  todos  formarian  varios  voliimenes. 

2.  I  Le  gustan  a  V.  los  proverbios  ?  Si,  senor,  son  muy 
expresivos,  pero  debemos  usarlos,  como  decia  D.  Quijote,  con 
moderacion  y  no  a  borbotones  como  Sancho  Panza. 

3.  En  eso  tiene  V.  razon,  porque  quien  mucho  habla  mucho 
yerra. — V.  acaba  de  aplicar  ese  muy  bien  ;  pero  es  imposible  que 
practiquemos  con  todos  los  que  trae  esta  leccion,  en  este 
ejercicio. 

4.  Sin  embargo,  al  que  madruga  Dios  le  ayuda. — Y.  dice  bien, 
y  quien  no  se  aventura  no  pasa  la  mar. 

5.  Espero  que  quien  nos  oiga  conversar  introduciendo  tanto 
refran,  no  diga  de  ellos  lo  que  se  dice  de  los  males. — i  Que  dicen 
de  los  males  ?    Bien  vengas  mal  si  vienes  solo. 

6.  I  Oh !  no,  seiior,  en  primer  lugar  los  proverbios  no  son 
males,  y  en  segundo  lugar  a  nosotros  nos  gustan,  y  queremos- 

27 


386  LESSON  LXV. 

practicar  con  ellos,  para  aprenderlos. — Y.  esta  en  lo  justo,  y 
ademas,  cada  uno  hace  de  su  capa  un  sayo. 

7.  i  Ola,  amignito !  V.  me  parece  practice  en  la  materia,  pero 
no  piense  V.  que  yo  soy  rana,  porque  debajo  de  una  mala  capa 
se  encuentra  un  buen  bebedor. — Caramba  ;  que  no  me  deja  V. 
meter  baza !  no  se  dira  de  V.  aquello  de,  en  boca  cerrada  no  en- 
tran  moscas. 

8.  Yam  OS  amigo,  ese  refran  vino  por  los  cabellos. — Pues  si 
vino  por  los  cabellos,  a  pelo  vino,  ademas,  que  Y.  me  parece  ser 
de  aquellos  que  ven  la  paja  en  el  ojo  ageno  y  no  la  viga  en  el 
suyo. 

9.  No  se  enfade  Y.,  amigo,  que  quien  bien  lo  quiere  le  hara 
llorar. — No,  senor,  no  me  enfado,  pero  ya  veo  que  no  es  oro  todo 
lo  que  reluce. 

10.  i  Bravo !  bravo  !  ya  va  Y.  aprendiendo  a  enzarzar  refranes, 
lo  hace  Y.  cual  otro  Sancho  Panza,  y  yo,  con  toda  mi  practica, 
he  ido  por  lana  y  he  vuelto  trasquilado. — Su  ejemplo  de  Y.  me 
ira  enseiiando ;  poquito  a  poco  hilaba  la  vieja  el  copo,  y  dime  con 
quien  andas  y  te  dire  quien  eres. 

11.  ;  Que  hombre  !  si  Y.  va  a  ganara  su  maestro  !  pero  no  hay 
mal  que  por  bien  no  venga ;  Y.  me  hace  reir  con  sus  refranes. — 
Bien,  del  mal  el  menos,  pero  D.  Manuel,  i  es  posible  que  le  haya 
de  ganar  su  discipulo  ? 

12.  No  se,  no  puedo  decir  de  esta  agua  no  bebere,  y  lo  que  no 
se  puede  remediar  se  ha  de  aguantar,  y  al  fin  se  canta  la  gloria. — 
]  Zape,  como  los  enhebra  I  pero  yo  no  me  doy  por  vencido,  senor 
maestro,  porque  yo  ya  se  aquello  de  cobra  buena  fama  y  echate 
a  dormir. 

13.  La  tenacidad  es  divisa  del  necio,  y  al  buen  entendedor 
con  media  palabra  basta. — Si,  pero  esas  ya  son  palabras  mayores, 
y  a  quien  se  hace  de  miel  las  moscas  se  lo  comen,  y  mientras  en 
mi  casa  estoy,  rey  soy. 

14.  Espero,  D.  Carlos,  que  no  me  quiera  Y.  poner  fuera  de  su 
casa. — No  hombre,  pero  estos  refranes  son  tan  expresivos  que  le 
hacen  decir  a  uno  mas  de  lo  que  quiere ;  pero  a  lo  hecho  pecho  y 
ya  que  Y.  me  desafio,  siga  la  danza. 

15.  Bueno,  si  Y.  lo  quiere,  ya  que  la  casa  se  quema  calente- 
monos :  pero  bien  haria  Y.  antes  que  se  case  en  mirar  lo  que  hace, 
porque  cada  uno  sabe  donde  le  aprieta  el  zapato. — Amigo  mio,  Y. 
no  sabe  de  la  misa  la  media ;  yo  nunca  doy  mi  brazo  a  torcer,  y 
antes  quiero  ser  cabeza  de  raton  que  cola  de  leon. 


LESSON  LXY.  387 

16.  Si,  senor,  pero  aunque  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda,  mona  se 
queda,  no  sea  V.  como  el  perro  del  hortelano,  que  ni  come  ni 
deja  comer,  y  acuerdese  V.  que  cuenta  y  razon  sustentan  amistad 
y  lo  mejor  de  los  dados  es  no  jugarlos. — Basta,  basta,  hombre  me 
doy  por  vencido. 

17.  No  la  hagas  no  la  temas ;  tu  enemigo  es  de  tu  oficio. — 
Pero,  D.  Carlos,  le  repito.  .  .  . 

18.  La  caridad  bien  ordenada  entra  por  si  misma. — Pero  si 
repito  que.  .  .  . 

19.  Donde  quiera  que  fueres  haz  como  vieres. — Senor,  me 
rindo. — Mas  vale  tarde  que  nunca. 

EXERCISE. 

1.  Well,  Charles,  so  you  have  come  at  last.  Yes,  better  late 
than  never,  you  know ;  but  if  it  had  continued  raining  I  should 
not  have  come  at  all. 

2.  Are  you  going  out  ?  I  thought  we  were  going  together 
to  the  theatre  this  evening. — I  must  go  out  now ;  but  should  I 
get  back  as  soon  as  I  expect,  we  shall  still  have  time  to  go  to  the 
theatre. 

3.  If  you  undertake  that  journey,  I  should  like  to  be  your 
companion.  It  is  rather  doubtful  at  present  whether  I  shall ; 
but  if  I  do,  I  should  be  delighted  to  have  your  company. 

4.  If  the  directors  establish  that  as  a  general  rule,  a  great 
many  persons  will  suffer  heavy  loss. 

5.  The  conditions  were,  that  if  he  did  not  discover  the  error, 
or  if,  after  having  discovered  it,  he  could  not  rectify  it,  he  should 
lose  his  place. 

6.  He  said  he  would  have  no  rest  until  he  might  hear  some 
news  of  that  poor  young  man. 

7.  He  promised  that  I  should  have  the  place,  if  it  were  in  his 
power  to  procure  it  for  me. 

8.  In  case  his  efforts  should  not  be  attended  with  success, 
you  could  rely  upon  me  to  do  all  in  my  power  to  advance  {pro- 
mover)  your  interests. 

9.  Their  embarrassments  will  not  cease  so  long  as  they  do  not 
introduce  some  system  of  reasonable  economy. 

10.  Peter  tells  his  stories  so  well,  and  with  such  an  appear- 
ance of  truth,  that  one  is  actually  tempted  to  believe  them. 

11.  They  made  so  many  conditions,  that  it  was  clear  that  they 
had  no  wish  to  help  us. 


3.88  LESSON  LXV. 

12.  Why  did  you  not  take  that  book  ?    I  would  not  take  it 
because  some  leaves  were  wanting. 

13.  If  there  is  anything  within  (in)  my  reach  with  which  I 
can  serve  you,  just  *  let  me  know. 

14.  Whatever  he  may  have  been  in  his  youth,  he  is  now  a  re- 
spectable man,  and  beloved  (loved)  by  everybody  that  knows  him. 

*  English  words  in  italics  are  not  to  be  translated. 


GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS 


GRAMMATICAL  AND  IDIOMATICAL  PECULIARITIES  OF  THE 

SPANISH  LANGUAGE,  NOT  HITHERTO  TREATED 

OF  IN  THE  GRAMMAR. 


In  order  to  acquire  a  thorough  knowledge  of  a  language, 
it  is  necessary  to  compare  carefully  the  different  uses  of  the 
several  parts  of  speech  in  the  native  language  and  in  the  one 
proposed  to  be  learned. 

The  sense  of  a  whole  passage  is  very  often  changed  by 
the  suppression  or  omission  of  an  article,  a  preposition,  or 
a  conjunction;  by  using  one  tense  of  a  verb  for  another; 
placing  an  adjective  before  its  noun  when,  in  order  to  con- 
vey the  idea  intended,  it  should  go  after  it ;  and  not  unfre- 
quently  by  translating  a  certain  part  of  speech  by  a  word 
which,  although  its  appearance  would  lead  us  to  take  it  for 
the  equivalent  of  the  word  to  be  translated,  bears  in  reality 
no  relation  to  the  idea  designed  to  be  expressed. 

We  have  deemed  it  wise,  therefore,  to  devote  a  few  pages 
of  our  CoMBiiTED  Method  to  such  general  remarks  as  are 
necessary  to  guide  the  learner,  and  which,  if  attentively 
observed,  will,  after  the  study  of  the  Spanish  exercises  con- 
tained in  the  preceding  lessons,  enable  him  to  write  or  speak 
correctly  and  idiomatically  in  the  Spanish  language. 

The  Definite  Article. 

1.  Illustrations  have  already  been  given  in  previous  les-^ 
sons  as  to  the  more  common  use  of  the  article;  but  there 


390 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES. 


are  many  others  which  require  nice  discrimination  to  decide 
as  to  its  use  or  omission  in  Spanish,  as  in  English,  as  may 
be  seen  from  the  following  examples,  which  may  serve  as 
a  general  rule  for  all  those  of  the  same  kind : 
4  Esta  el  rey  en  palacio  ? 
Es  costumbre  en  Espana. 
Su  tio  firmo  por  el,  en  aiisencia  de 
su  padre. 


Is  the  king  in  the  palace  I 
It  is  the  custom  in  Spain. 
His  uncle  signed  for  him, 

absence  of  his  father. 
He  told  the  truth. 
On  the  3d  of  June. 
He  had  the  courage  to  answer. 
In  the  middle  of  August. 


in  the 


Decia  verdad. 

A  tres  de  Junio. 

Tuvo  valor  para  responder. 

A  mediados  de  agosto. 

2.  In  Spanish  the  article  is  at  times  accompanied  by  a 
preposition  not  required  in  English ;  as, 

Hace  del  caballero.  |  He  plays  the  gentleman. 

Indefinite  Article. 

3.  The  so-called  indefinite  article  is,  as  has  been  stated 
in  one  of  the  early  lessons,  frequently  employed  in  English ; 
and  when  translating  from  this  language  into  Spanish,  we 
either  suppress  it  entirely  or  render  it  by  some  other  part 
of  speech ;  as, 


Tiene  derecho  sobre  este  caudal. 

A.  distancia  de  .  .  . 

Cadiz  es  puerto  de  mar. 

Es  otro  Alejandro. 

En  medio  siglo  {or  dentro  de  medio 

siglo). 
Volveremos  dentro  de  media  hora. 
Las  obras  de  otro  {or  obras  agenas). 

Hubo  tiempo  en  que  .  .  . 


He  has  a  right  to  (or  a  claim  upon) 

this  capital. 
At  a  distance  of  .  .  . 
Cadiz  is  a  seaport  (town). 
He  is  another  Alexander. 
In  half  a  century. 

We  shall  return  in  half  an  hour. 
The  works  of  anoXhQV  (or  a^iother's 

works). 
There  was  a  time  in  which  .  .  . 


Personal  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 

4.  The  use  and  repetition  of  the  personal  and  possessive 
pronouns  are  more  frequent  in  English  than  in  Spanish; 
and  that  seeming  redundance  is  essential  to  the  clearness 
and  precision  of  the  English  language ;  but  Spanish  syntax, 
owing  to  the  completeness  of  the  verb  inflexions,  does  not 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES,  391 

require  a  so  lavish  use  of  these  forms,  and  they  are  omitted, 
save  where  absence  would  occasion  ambiguity,  and  where 
they  are  used  for  sake  of  emphasis ;  in  other  words,  the  pro- 
nouns are  omitted  wherever  possible,  without  injury  to  the 
construction  or  style ;  as. 


Es  verdad. 

Llueve. 

Hace  frio. 

j,Por  que  es  menester? 

fil  mismo  principe. 

Su  misma  madre. 

j61  mismo  lo  vi6. 


It  is  true. 

It  is  raining  (or  it  rains). 

It  is  cold. 

Why  is  it  necessary  ? 

The  prince  Aimself. 

His  mother  herself. 

He  saw  it  Aimself. 


5.  Before  leaving  the  pronouns,  it  is  proper  to  remark 
that  the  words  one  and  ones^  so  often  used  in  English,  to 
avoid  the  unpleasant  repetition  of  nouns,  have  no  equivalent 
in  Spanish,  as  they  are  usually  expressed  in  some  other  way, 
as,  for  instance,  by  adjectives,  and  hence  are  to  be  left  out  in 
translating  from  the  former  language  to  the  latter ;  as, 

I  Tiene  V.  caballos  ?  I  Have  you  horses  (or  any  horses)  I 

Tengo  dos  buenos.  1 1  have  two  good  ones, 

6.  Personal  pronouns,  when  used  redundantly  in  English, 
as  in  the  following  example,  are  never  expressed  in  Spanish : 

Am  bos  perecieron.  |  Both  of  them  perished  (or  were  lost). 

This,  however,  does  not  apply  to  such  words  as  uno,,  or 
the  cardinals  generally,  todo^  etc.,  as,  uno  de  ellos,  one  of  them, 
todos  ellos^  all  of  them. 

7.  Even  whole  members  of  sentences  are,  not  unf  requently, 
suppressed  in  translating  from  English  into  Spanish ;  as, 

Todo  no  podia  entrar  en  un  elogio,  I  Alltjould  not  find  place  in  a  eulogy, 
mas  si  en  una  satira.  I      but  all  could  find  place  in  a  satire. 

Observe  that  the  repetition  of  the  words  italicized  in  the 
English  sentence  is  avoided  by  means  of  the  adverb  si  in 
Spanish,  which  serves  to  correct  the  negation  expressed  in 
the  first  member  of  the  phrase,  thus  rendering  the  latter  at 
once  shorter  and  more  energetic. 


392 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES. 


Ellipsis. 

8.  There  are  certain  short  modes  of  expression,  certain 
grammatical  laconicisms,  peculiar  to  the  English  language, 
which  are  not  admissible  in  Spanish ;  the  ellipses  must  in 
such  cases  often  be  filled  up ;  as, 


Jamas  huho  orador  que  hablase  me- 

jor. 
De  ahi  dimanan  estos  errores. 
'No  puede  pensar  en  hacer  mal. 
La  ciudad  reducida  a  cenizas. 
2^0  va  mal  para  ser  nino. 
Su  madre  baftada  en  lagrimas. 
Aunque  todos  estuviesen  juntos. 
Esto  es  por  lo  que  toca  d  su  persona. 

En  pro  y  en  contra. 

•Con  la  espada  en  la  mano. 


Never  did  orator  speak  better. 

Hence  these  errors. 

He  cannot  think  of  evil. 

The  city  in  ashes. 

Not  bad  for  a  child. 

Her  mother  in  tears. 

They  were  all  together. 

So  much  for  his  person  (or  personal 

appearance). 
For  and  against. 
Sword  in  hand. 


N".  B. — It  is  also  correct  to  say,  Espada  en  mano. 


Inversion. 

Although  we  have  spoken  at  some  length,  in  Lesson  LI, 
on  the  subject  of  inversion,  we  take  it  for  granted  that  the 
student  will  not  be  displeased  to  meet  here  a  few  well-chosen 
examples  which  will  give  him  a  still  clearer  idea  of  the  order 
followed  in  Spanish  for  the  expression  of  ideas,  and  the  con- 
sequent difference  of  construction  between  that  language 
and  English. 

9.  The  substantive  usually  precedes  its  adjective ;  as, 

mas    perfecto   del    He  is  the  most  perfect  man  in  the 
world. 
False  key. 
False  witness. 
Her  youngest  son. 


Es   el    hombre 

mundo. 
Llave  falsa. 
Testigo  falso. 
Su  hi  jo  mas  joven. 


10.  Instances  occur,  however,  of  the  inversion  taking 
place  in  English,  while  the  natural  construction  is  followed 
in  Spanish  ;  especially  in  the  case  of  past  participles  acting 
as  verbal  adjectives ;  as, 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES. 


393 


Una    vez    destruido     este 
mento,  todo  se  viene  abajo. 


funda- 


Admitida  esta  libertad,  el  hombre 
puede  .  .  . 


This  foundation  being  once  de- 
stroyed, the  whole  (edifice)  comes 
to  the  ground. 

This  liberty  (being)  once  admitted, 
man  can  .  .  . 


11.  In  all  cases  similar  to  that  of  the  following  example, 
the  possessives  mio^  tuyo^  suyo  are  placed  after  the  substan- 
tive, and  then,  of  course,  they  retain  their  final  syllable ;  as, 
El  otro  hijo  suyo.  \  His  other  son. 

12.  The  same  ideas  are  in  not  a  few  instances  presented 
in  Spanish  in  an  order  very  different  from  that  followed  in 
English;  as, 


No  ha  venido  para  destruir,  sino 

para  edificar. 
Bien  veo  que  .  .  . 
Si  tuviese  V.  que  hacer  una  contrata. 


It  is  not  to  destroy  that  he  has  come 

but  to  build  up. 
I  see  (very)  well  that  .  .  . 
If  you  had  an  agreement  to  make. 


{If  you  had  to  make  an  agreement  would,  of  course,  also  be  an  allow- 
able construction  in  English.) 


No  tenia  razon  aquel  filosofo  que 

decia  que  .  .  . 
Toca  remunerar  los  servicios  al  que 

los  recibio. 
Entre  los  griegos,  los  que  .  .  . 
fil  que  mas  hablaba. 
Cien  veces  mas  quisiera  yo  que  .  .  . 


Solo  Dios  es  inmutable. 


That  philosopher  who  said  that  .  .  . 
was  wrong. 

It  is  for  him  who  received  the  serv- 
ices to  reward  them. 

Those  amongst  the  Greeks,  who  .  .  . 

He  who  spoke  the  most. 

I  would  prefer  a  thousand  times 
that  .  .  . 

God  alone  is  unchanging. 


Nouns. 


13.  There  is  a  striking  difference  to  be  observed  in  the  use 
of  nouns  in  the  two  languages ;  we  sometimes  meet  nouns  in 
the  singular  in  English,  while  in  Spanish  they  are  used  in  the 
plural  only,  and  vice-versa : 


Plurah 
Mirar  con  malos  ojos, 
Puso  los  ojos  en  mi. 
Dar  oidos  4  .  .  . 
Prestar  oidos. 
Be  pies  a  cabeza. 


Singular, 
To  look  with  evil  eye. 
He  set  his  eye  on  me. 
To  give  ear  to  .  .  . 
To  lend  an  ear. 
From  head  to  foot 


39i 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES, 


Por  todas  partes, 
Juego  de  manos. 
Se  presento  con  los  ojos  en  el  suelo. 

Singular, 
A  pie  descalzo. 
Estar  en  pie, 
A  remo  y  vela. 
En  toda  suerte  de  negocios. 
No  son  duenos  de  si. 


In  every  direction. 

Sleight  of  hand. 

He  came  forward  with  downcast  eye. 

Plural. 
With  bare  feet  (or  in  (his)  bare  feet). 
To  stand  on  (one's)  feet. 
With  oars  and  sails. 
In  all  5or/5  (or  kinds)  of  business. 
They  are  not  masters  of  themselves^ 


One  Part  of  Speecli  for  Another. 

14.  It  is  not  uncommon,  in  comparing  English  and  Span- 
ish composition,  to  see  adjectives  translated  by  substantives, 
adverbs  by  substantives,  substantives  by  verbs,  and  vice-versa. 
Sometimes,  in  translating,  difficulties,  appearing  at  first  sight 
almost  insurmountable,  are  overcome  by  the  simple  substitu- 
tion of  one  part  of  speech  for  another. 

Adjectives  for  Substantives. 


Pica  de  guapo    {or  presumido    de 

guapo). 
Es  aciisado  de  impio, 
Se  pone  furioso. 


He  piques  himself  on  his  bravery. 

He  is  accused  of  impiety. 
He  gets  into  a  fury. 


Substantives  for  Adverbs,  and  vice-versa. 


Aunque  idolatras  de  origen. 
Come  excesivamente. 
Tuvo  la  dicha  de  salvarse. 
For  desgracia  nada  oyeron. 


Although  originally  idolaters. 
He  eats  to  excess. 
Happily  for  him  he  escaped. 
Unfortunately  they  heard  nothing. 

Substantives  for  Verbs,  and  vice-versa. 


Hablo  lo  mejor  que  pudo, 
Debe  probar  su  dicho, 
Como  acostumbra. 
Despues  de  almorzar. 
Antes  de  comer. 


Hay    historiadores 
que  .  .  . 


que 


He  spoke  to  the  best  of  his  ability* 
He  must  prove  what  he  says. 
According  to  his  custom. 
After  breakfast. 
Before  dinner. 

Verbs  for  Pronouns. 

aseguran  1  Some  historians  assure  us  that  .  .  . 


Of  Verbs  in  General. 

15.  We  very  often  find  verbs  active  with  the  indefinite  se., 
and  sometimes  the  passive  verb  with  the  particle  se^  used  in 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES. 


395 


Spanish  to  express  the  same  idea  conveyed  in  English  by 
passive,  and  sometimes  also  by  active  verbs ;  one  tense  trans- 
lated by  another  different  tense,  one  number  substituted  in 
the  place  of  another,  one  person  for  other  persons,  and  at 
times  even  the  same  person  translated  by  any  or  all  the 
others,  according  to  the  sense  desired  to  be  conveyed. 

Passive  in  Engrlish. 


El  concilio  se  celehraba  en  Pisa. 
El  libro  que  se  le  atribuye, 
Esto  se  encierra  en  la  proposicioti. 
Esto  debe  contarse  por  nada. 
Cuando  se  les  ruega  que  respondan. 


The  council  was  held  at  Pisa. 
The  book  which  is  attributed  to  him. 
That  is  contained  in  the  proposition. 
This  is  to  he  counted  for  nothing. 
When  they  are  requested  to  answer. 


Active  in  Engrlish. 


Viene  kjuntarse  con  su  familia. 
Se  caso  con  la  duquesa. 
Se  hicieron  a  la  vela. 


He  comes  to  join  his  family. 
He  married  the  duchess. 
They  set  sail. 


The  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  for  the  Infinitive. 

He  ordered  him  to  hold  his  tongue 

(or  to  he  silent). 
He  is  supposed  to  possess  nothing. 


Lo  mando  que  callase. 

Es  reputado  por  hombre  que  nada 


Espero  me  responda  V. 


I  expect  you  to  answer  me. 


One  Tense  for  Another. 


I  Te  hahre  yo  dado  un  derecho.  que 

no  tengo  ? 
I  Por  que  solo  los  hombres  habrdn 

de  degenerar  ? 
Cuanto  mas  hag  an,  menos  ganaran. 

Que  un  muerto  resucite,  no  es  cosa 
comun. 


Have  I  then  given  thee  a  right  which 
I  do  not  possess  myself  f 

Why  must  mankind  alone  degen- 
erate I 

The  more  they  do,  the  less  they  will 
gain. 

It  is  no  common  thing  for  a  dead 
(man)  to  be  resuscitated. 


One  Number  for  Another  in  Verbs. 

Son  las  seis.  I  It  is  six  o'clock. 

No  le  quedan  mas  que  tres  hijos.       I  He  has  only  three  children  left. 

One  Person  for  Another. 


Nosotros  somas  los  barbaros. 
Si  huhiesen  sido  ellos  losvitupera- 
dos. 


It  is  we  that  are  barbarians. 
If  it  had  been  they  that  they  had 
blamed. 


396  GRAM3IATICAL  PECULIARITIES. 

Mode  of  Asking:  Questions  and  forming  Negations  with  Verbs. 

16.  The  auxiliary  do^  used  in  English  in  asking  questions, 
whether  negatively  or  positively,  is  to  be  lost  sight  of  in 
translating  into  Spanish,  inasmuch  as  the  simple  form  of  the 
verb  contains  all  that  is  required  for  that  purpose,  as  may  be 
seen  in  the  following  examples : 

^  Van  Vds.  algunas  veces  a  la  opera  ?  Do  you  sometimes  go  to  the  opera? 

^Sabia  V  que  debiamos  venir  tan  i)i6?  you  know  that  we  were  to  come 

temprano  ?  so  early  ? 

No  creia  que  debiesen  Vds.  venir  I  did  not  think  you  were  to  come 

hasta  las  tres.  until  three  o'clock. 

17.  Xor  is  it  to  be  translated  into  Spanish  when  it  stands 
in  the  English  sentence  merely  for  the  purpose  of  giving 
more  emphasis  to  the  expression ;  as, 

Yo  creia  que  no  iban  nunca  al  teatro.  1 1  thought  they  never  went  to  the 

theatre. 
SI,  senor,  van  a  menudo.  I  Yes,  sir,  they  do  go  often. 

18.  In  English  it  sometimes  takes  the  place  of  a  verb,  to 
avoid  the  repetition  of  the  latter ;  in  all  such  cases  it  is  to  be 
rendered  into  Spanish  by  a  simple  particle  (positive  or  nega- 
tive, as  required  by  the  sense),  or  else  the  verb  expressing 
the  action  must  itself  be  repeated ;  as. 

Do  you  write  to  your  uncle  every 

month  I 
Yes,  sir,  I  do. 


J,  Escribe  V.  todos  los  meses  a  su  tio  ? 

Si,  senor  {or  le  escribo  todos  los 
meses). 

19.  To  what  has  already  been  remarked  relative  to  con- 
jugations, we  have  but  a  few  words  to  add  respecting  a  lim- 
ited number  of  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation.  Those  which 
have  either  of  the  letters  ch,  //,  or  /T,  immediately  preceding 
the  termination,  make  their  past  participle  in  eiido,  instead 
of  iendo\  as,  cifiendo,  mullendo,  rinendo,  Mncliendo.hriinendo., 
grunendo,  tanendo,  instead  of  cimendo,  mulliendo,  rinie^ido, 
hincJiie7ido^  hruniendo^  gnmiendo,  tamendo. 

For  the  same  reason  the  i  is  also  suppressed  in  the  third 
persons  singular  and  plural  of  the  preterit  definite  of  the  in- 
dicative, and  in  all  the  persons  of  the  second  and  third  ter- 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES,  397 

minations  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and  of  the  future  of 
the  same  mood ;  as,  ciflo^  muUo,  rineron^  hinchera,  brunesey 
grunere,  instead  of  cinio^  muUio,  rinieron^  hinchiera^  Iruftiese^ 
grufliere. 

There  is  but  one  exception  to  this  rule,  and  that  occurs 
in  the  verb  henchir^  which  generally  retains  the  i  in  the  third 
singular,  preterit  indicative,  making  it  Mnchio^  in  order  to 
avoid  confounding  it  with  hincho^  same  person  and  tense  of 
hinchar^  a  regular  verb  of  the  first  conjugation. 

The  reason  of  the  suppression  of  the  i  in  the  cases  pointed 
out  above  is  obvious,  inasmuch  as  the  letters  cJi^  U,  or  n^  when 
forming  a  syllable  with  e,  cannot  be  sounded  without  the  con- 
currence of  the  i  element  to  a  certain  extent.  If,  therefore, 
the  i  were  retained  in  those  combinations,  a  forced  and  dis- 
agreeable sound  would  be  the  result. 

20.  There  are  in  English  certain  verbs  of  very  frequent 
occurrence,  whose  signification,  if  not  determined  by  some 
other  part  of  speech,  would  often  be  difficult  to  explain. 
Amongst  this  class,  the  verb  to  get  plays  a  very  important, 
if  not  the  most  important  part,  and  those  of  English  speech 
are  sometimes  at  as  great  a  loss  to  know  exactly  how  to  trans- 
late it  into  a  foreign  language  as  foreigners  are  to  know  how 
and  when  to  use  it  idiomatically  in  English.  This  verb  {to 
get)  has  no  exact  equivalent  in  Spanish,  but  there  are  in  that 
language  many  verbs  of  something  of  a  like  nature,  and  by 
which  it  may  at  times  be  correctly  rendered,  according  to 
the  sense  in  which  it  is  used.  We  venture  to  say  that,  in 
the  most  difficult  cases,  a  little  thought,  a  moment's  reflec- 
tion would  go  far  to  remove  all  uncertainty. 

Before  making  some  uncouth  makeshift  of  a  translation, 
pause  a  moment,  and  see  what  is  the  real  meaning  of  to  get 
in  the  case  before  you ;  then  see  what  other  verb  would  serve 
in  its  place,  or  what  other  form  of  expression  can  be  substi- 
tuted for  the  one  proposed  to  be  translated.  This  you  will 
soon  discover,  for  perhaps  in  no  language  can  an  instance  be 
found  of  the  impossibility  to  express  the  same  idea  in  more 
than  one  way.     For  instance,  let  it  be  required  to  translate 


398  GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES. 

into  Spanish,  To  get  i]^  by  the  window ;  here  is  a  difficulty 
just  as  great  as  any  other  case  where  the  verb  to  get  can 
be  used. 

Let  us  now  see  how  else  we  can  express  that  idea :  To  go 
IN,  or  to  come  in  by  the  window ;  that  is  to  say,  we  have  to 
convey  the  idea  of  motion  into.  This  same  idea  is  to  be 
expressed  thus :  To  ekter  by  the  window  =  ei^'trar  por  la 
ventana\  entrar  then  is  the  standard  and  usual  verb  ex- 
pressive of  motion  into.  Let  us  now  change  the  preposition 
and  reverse  the  sense,  for  the  preposition  in  determines  the 
signification  of  get  in  the  case  under  consideration. 

Eequired  to  translate :  To  get  out  by  the  window ;  the 
same  process  as  above  gives  us  motion  out\  hence,  salir 
"por  la  ventana^  salir  being  the  standard  and  usual  Spanish 
verb  expressive  of  motion  out. 

This  mode  of  reasoning  will  in  all  cases  lead  to  the  de- 
sired end.  Let  your  object  be  to  find  some  verb  in  English 
which  used  alone  will  mean  the  same  thing  as  get  and  its 
determining  preposition. 

Get,  used  in  connection  with  adjectives,  is  no  more  diffi- 
cult to  be  disposed  of  than  when  followed  by  prepositions, 
and  it  may  in  general  be  turned  into  Spanish  by  one  of  the 
three  verbs  ponerse^  hacerse^  or  volverse  (according  to  the 
nature  of  the  case),  and  an  adjective  corresponding  to  the 
English  one  which  governs  get ;  as, 


Hacerse  rico. 

Volverse  or  ponerse  rojo. 

Ponerse  furioso. 


To  get  rich. 
To  get  red. 
To  get  furious. 


These  ideas  in  Spanish  may  be  expressed  by  single  verbs 
derived  from  each  of  the  adjectives  respectively;  as, 


Enriquecerse. 

Enrojecerse. 

Enfurecerse. 


To  get  rich. 

To  get  red  {i.  e.,  to  redden). 

To  get  furious. 


21.  To  GET,  as  an  active  verb,  is  usually  translated  into 
Spanish  by  any  of  these:  conseguir^  oltener^  procurar^  JiOr 
cerse  de,  hacerse  con,  according  to  the  sense  ;  as, 


GRAMMATICAL  PECULIARITIES, 


399 


Consiguio  lo  que  deseaba. 

Ohtejidrdn  el  privilegio. 

^  Puede  V.  conseguirme  or  procurar- 

me  un  ejemplar  de  ese  libro? 
Se  hizo  de  un  caballo  para  el  viaje. 


He  got  what  he  wanted. 

They  will  get  the  patent. 

Can  you  get  me  a  copy  of  that  book  1 

He  got  {i.  e.,  bought)  a  horse  for  his 
journey. 


22.  As  for  to  get^  used  redundantly  with  the  verb  to  have^ 
it  disappears  in  the  Spanish  translation ;  as, 

Tenemos  uno.  I  We  have  got  one. 

23.  The  above  remarks  are  equally  applicable  to  all  verbs 
of  the  class  alluded  to,  as  for  instance  to  become  \  which 
latter,  as  well  as  to  get^  is  often  elegantly  translated  by 
llegar  a  ser  ;  as. 


Se  hizo  ciudadano  de  los  Estados 

Unidos. 
Llego  a  ser  hombre  muy  distinguido. 


He  became  a  citizen  of  the  United 

States. 
He  became  a  very  distinguished  man. 


COMPLETE   LIST 


CONJUGATIONS     OF    ALL     THE     SPANISH    VEKBS,    AUXILIARY, 

REGULAR,   IRREGULAR,    REFLEXIVE, 'IMPERSONAL, 

AND    DEFECTIVE,    WITH    AN    EXAMPLE 

OF    THE    PASSIVE    VOICE. 


AUXILIARY   VERBS. 

INFINITIVE. 
PRESENT. 


To  have.  To  he. 

Haber.  Tener.^  A<^(iJ     Ser.  Estar. 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

Having.  Being. 

Habiendo.  Teniendo.  I     Siendo.  Estando. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Had.  Been. 

Habido.  Tenido.  |     Sido.  Estado. 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

I  have. 

I 

am. 

1.  He. 

Tengo. 

Soy. 

Estoy. 

2.  Has. 

Tienes. 

Eres. 

Estas. 

3.  Ha. 

Tiene. 

Es. 

Esta. 

1.  Hemos. 

Tenemos. 

Somos. 

Estamos. 

2.  Habeis. 

Teneis. 

Sols. 

Estais. 

3.  Han. 

Tienen. 

IMPEB 

Son. 

tFECT. 

Estan. 

I  had. 

I  was. 

1.  Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estaba. 

2.  Habias. 

Tenias. 

Eras. 

Estabas. 

3.  Habia. 

Tenia. 

Era. 

Estaba. 

400 

CONJUGATIONS. 


401 


IMPERFECT— 

-{Continued). 

I  had. 

I  was 

'. 

1.  Habiamos. 

Teniamos. 

Eramos. 

Estabamos. 

2.  Habiais. 

Teniais. 

Erais. 

Estabais. 

3.  Habian. 

Tenian. 

Eran. 

Estaban. 

PRETERIT. 

I  had. 

I  was 

i. 

1.  Hube. 

Tuve. 

Fui. 

Estuve. 

2.  Hubiste. 

Tuviste. 

Fuiste. 

Estuviste. 

3.  Hubo. 

Tuvo. 

Fue. 

Estuvo. 

1.  Hubimos. 

Tuvimos. 

Fuimos. 

Estuvimos, 

2.  Hubi^teis. 

Tuvisteis. 

Fuisteis. 

Estuvisteis» 

3.  Hubieron. 

Tuvieron. 

FUT 

Fueron. 

[JRE. 

Estuvieron. 

I  shall  have. 

I  shall  be. 

1.  Habre.     , 

Tendre. 

Sere. 

Estore. 

2.  Habras. 

Tendras. 

Seras. 

Estaras. 

3.  Habra. 

Tendra. 

Sera. 

Estara. 

1.  Habremos. 

Tendremos. 

Seremos. 

Estaremos. 

2.  Habreis. 

Tendreis. 

Sereis. 

Estareis. 

3.  Habran. 

Tendran. 

IMPER 

Seran. 
ATIVE. 

Estaran. 

Have. 

Be. 

2.  He  (thou). 

Ten  (thou). 

2.  Se  (thou). 

Esta  (thou). 

3.  Haya  (he  or 

Tenga  (he  or 

3.  Sea  (he  or 

Este  (he  or 

you). 

you). 

you). 

you). 

1.  Hayamos(we).  Tengamos  (we) 

1.  Seamos  (we). 

Estemos  (weX 

2.  Habed  (ye). 

Tened  (ye). 

2.  Sed  (ye). 

Estad  (ye). 

3.  Hayan  (they).  Tengan  (they). 

3.  Seian  (they). 

Esten  (they). 

SUBJIT]^ 

rcTIVB. 

PRES 

»ENT. 

I  may 

have. 

I  may  be. 

1.  Haya. 

Tenga. 

Sea. 

Este. 

2.  Hayas. 

Tengas. 

Seas. 

Estes. 

3.  Haya. 

Tenga. 

Sea. 

Este. 

1.  Hayamos. 

Tengamos. 

Seamos. 

Estemos. 

2.  Hayais. 

Tengais. 

Seals. 

Esteis. 

3.  Hayan. 

Tengan. 

Sean. 

Esten. 

28 


402 


CONJUGATIONS,      , 
IMPERFECT. — First  Termination* 


I  would  have. 

1.  Habria.  Tendria. 

2.  Habrias.  Tendrias. 

3.  Habria.  Tendria. 

1.  Habriamos.  Tendriamos. 

2.  Habriais.  Tendriais. 

3.  Habrian.  Tendrian. 


I  would  he. 

Seria.  Estaria. 

Serias.  Estarias. 

Seria.  Estaria. 

Seriamos.  Estariainos. 

Serials.  Estariais. 

Serian.  Estarian. 


Second  Termination. 
I  would  have.  I  would  he. 


1. 

Hubiera. 

Tuviera. 

Fuera. 

Estuviera. 

2. 

Hubieras. 

Tuvieras. 

Fueras. 

Estuvieras. 

3. 

Hubiera. 

Tuviera. 

Fuera. 

Estuviera. 

1.  Hubieramos.     Tuvieramos. 

2.  Hubierais.         Tuvierais. 

3.  Hubieran.         Tuvieran. 


Fueramos.     Estuvieramos. 
Fuerais.         Estuvierais. 
Fueran.         Estuvieran. 


Third  Termination. 
I  should  have.  I  should  he. 


1. 

Hubiese. 

Tuviese. 

Fuese. 

Estuviese. 

2. 

Hubieses. 

Tuvieses. 

Fueses. 

Estuvieses. 

3. 

Hubiese. 

Tuviese. 

Fuese. 

Estuviese. 

1.  Hubiesemos.     Tuviesemos. 

2.  Hubieseis.         Tuvieseis. 

3.  Hubiesen.         Tuviesen. 


Fuesemos.      Estuviesemos. 
Fueseis.  Estuvieseis. 

Fuesen.  Estuviesen. 


FUTURE. 

I  might  or  should  have.  I  might  or  should  he. 


1. 

Hubiere. 

Tuviere. 

Fuere. 

Estuviere. 

2. 

Hubieres. 

Tuvieres. 

Fueres. 

Estuvieres 

3. 

Hubiere. 

Tuviere. 

Fuere. 

Estuviere. 

1.  Hubieremos.     Tuvieremos. 

2.  Hubiereis.         Tuviereis. 

3.  Hubieren.         Tuvieren. 


Fueremos.      Estuvieremos. 

Fuereis.  Estuviereis. 

Fueren.  Estuvieren. 


*  It  will  be  observed  that,  differing  from  almost  all  other  grammars, 
we  give  ria  as  the  first  termination,  this  order  appearing  to  us  more  log- 
ical and,  above  all,  more  grammatical,  and  more  in  accordance  with  the 
signification  and  uses  of  the  three  terminations. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


403 


MODELS    OF    THE    THEEE    REGULAR    CONJUGATIONS. 
FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 
Hablar.  I        To  speak. 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

Hablando.  I         Speaking. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Hablado.  1         Spoken. 


r 


Singular, 

1.  Hablo.         I  speak. 

2.  Hablas. 
Habla. 


1.  Hablaba. 

2.  Hablabas. 

3.  Hablaba. 


I  spoke,  was 
speaking,  &c 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Plural, 

1.  Hablamos. 

2.  Hablais. 

3.  Hablan. 

IMPERFECT. 

1.  Hablabamos. 


PRETERIT. 


Hable. 

2.  Hablaste. 

3.  Hablo. 


I  spoke. 


Hablabais. 
Hablaban. 

Hablamos. 
Hablasteis. 
Hablaron. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Hablare. 

2.  Hablaras. 

3.  Hablara. 


I  shall  or  will 
speak. 


1.  Hablaremos. 

2.  Hablareis. 

3.  Hablaran. 


^2.  Habla. 
8.  Hable. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Hablemos.  Speak  (we). 


Speak  (thou). 
Speak  (he  or  you). 


2.  Hablad. 

3.  Hablen. 


Speak  (ye). 
Speak  (they). 


c 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 


1.  Hable. 

2.  Hables. 

3.  Hlble. 


I  may  speak. 


1.  Hablemos. 

2.  Hableis. 

3.  Hablen. 


404 


CONJUGATIONS, 


IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 


1.  Hablaria.     I  should  or  would 

speak. 

2.  Hablarias. 

3.  Hablaria. 


1.  Hablariamos. 


2.  Hablariais. 

3.  Hablarian. 

Second  Termination. 


1.  Hablara.     I  might,  would, 

or  should  speak. 

2.  Hablaras. 

3.  Hablara. 


1.  Hablaramos. 

2.  Hablarais. 

3.  Hablaran. 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Hablase.     I  might,  &x;., 

speak. 

2.  Hablases. 

3.  Hablase. 

r*l.  Hablare.      I  might,  &c., 
\^  speak. 

2.  Hablares. 
V-8.  Hablare. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Hablasemos. 

2.  Hablaseis. 

3.  Hablasen. 

1.  Hablaremos. 

2.  Hablareis. 

3.  Hablaren. 


Aprender. 

Aprendiendo. 

Aprendido. 


1.  Aprendo.      I  learn. 

2.  Aprendes. 

3.  Aprende. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION, 

INFINITIVE. 

1         To  learn. 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

I         Learning. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

I         Learned. 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Aprendemos. 

2.  Aprendeis. 

3.  Aprenden. 

IMPERFECT. 


1.  Aprendia.     I  learned,  was 

learning,  &c. 

2.  Aprendias. 

3.  Aprendia. 


1.  Aprendiamos. 

2.  Aprendiais. 

3.  Aprendian. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


405 


PRETERIT. 

1.  Aprendi.        I  learned.  1.  Aprendimos. 

2.  Aprendiste.  2.  Aprendisteis. 

3.  Aprendio.  3.  Aprendieron. 

FUTURE. 

1.  Aprenderemos. 


1.  Aprendere.    I  shall  or  will 
learn. 


2.  Aprenderas. 

3.  Aprendera. 


2.  Aprendereis. 

3.  Aprenderan. 


2.  Aprende.    Learn  (thou). 

3.  Aprenda.   Learn  (he  or  you). 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Aprendamos.  Learn  (we). 

2.  Aprended.       Learn  (ye). 

3.  Aprendan.       Learn  (they). 


1.  Aprenda. 

2.  Aprendas. 

3.  Aprenda. 

1.  Aprenderia. 

2.  Aprenderias. 

3.  Aprenderia. 

1.  Aprendiera. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

I  may  learn.  1.  Aprendamos. 

2.  Aprendais. 

3.  Aprendan. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination, 
I  would  or 
should  learn. 


1.  Aprenderiamos. 


2.  Aprenderiais. 

3.  Aprenderian. 
Second  Termination. 


I  might,  would, 
or  should 
learn. 


2.  Aprendieras. 

3.  Aprendiera. 

1.  Aprendiese. 

2.  Aprendieses. 

3.  Aprendiese. 

1.  Aprendiere. 

2.  Aprendieres. 

3.  Aprendiere. 


1.  Aprendieramos. 


2.  Aprendierais. 

3.  Aprendieran. 
Third  Termination. 


I  might,  (fee, 
learn. 


1.  Aprendiesemos. 


I  might,  &c., 
learn. 


2.  Aprendieseis. 

3.  Aprendiesen. 

FUTURE. 

1.  Aprendieremos. 


2.  Aprendiereis. 

3.  Aprendieren. 


406 


CONJUGATIONS. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 

Escribir 

1         To  write. 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

Escribiendo.                          |        Writing. 

Escrito.* 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

1         Written. 
INDICATIVE. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

Escribo. 

Escribes. 

Escribe. 

PRES 

I  write. 

,ENT. 

1.  Escribimos. 

2.  Escribis. 

3.  Escriben. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

Escribia. 

Escribias. 
Escribia. 

IMPEB 

I  wrote,  was 
writing. 

IFECT. 

1.  Escribiamos. 

2.  Escribiais. 

3.  Escribian. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

Escribi. 

Escribiste. 

Escribio. 

PRET 

I  wrote. 

ERIT. 

1.  Escribimos. 

2.  Escribisteis. 

3.  Escribieron. 

1. 

2. 
3. 

Escribire. 

Escribiras. 
Escribira. 

FUTl 

I  shall  (or  will) 
write. 

CTRE. 

1.  Escribiremos 

2.  Escribireis. 

3.  Escribiran. 

IMPERATIVE. 

2. 
3. 

Escribe. 
Escriba. 

Write  (thou). 
Write  (he  or  you). 

1.  Escribamos. 

2.  Escribid. 

3.  Escriban. 

Write  (we). 
Write  (ye). 
Write  (they). 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

1. 
2. 
3. 

Escriba. 

Escribas. 

Escriba. 

PRES 

I  may  write. 

ENT. 

1.  Escribamos. 

2.  Escribais. 

3.  Escriban. 

*  This  is  the  only  instance  of  irregularity  in  the  verb  Escribir. 


CONJUGATIONS, 


407 


1.  Escribiria. 

2.  Escribirias. 

3.  Escribiria. 


1.  Escribiera. 


2.  Escribieras. 

3.  Escribiera. 


1.  Escribiese. 


2.  Escribieses. 

3.  Escribiese. 


IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 

1.  Escribiriamos. 


I  would   (or 
should)  write. 


2.  Escribiriais. 

3.  Escribirian. 


Second  Termination. 

1.  Escribieramos. 


I  might,  would, 
or  should 
write. 


2.  Escribierais. 

3.  Escribieran. 


Third  Termination. 

1.  Escribiesemos. 


I  might,  would, 
or  should 
write. 


2.  Escribieseis. 

3.  Escribiesen. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Escribiere.      I  might,  &;c., 

write. 

2.  Escribieres. 

3.  Escribiere. 


1.  Escribieremos. 

2.  Escribiereis. 

3.  Escribieren. 


COMPOUND   TENSES. 

These  are  formed  by  joining  the  several  tenses  of  the  auxil- 
iary haber  to  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  expressing  the 
action. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

PERFECT. 


I  have  spoken. 
I  have  learned. 
I  have  written. 

1.  He  )      hablado. 

2.  Has  >     aprendido. 

3.  Ha  )      escrito. 


Yo  he  hablado. 

Yo  he  aprendido. 

Yo  he  escrito. 
Hemos  ^      hablado. 

Habeis  [•     aprendido. 

Han  )      escrito. 


408 


CONJUGATIONS, 


PAST  PERFECT. 


I  had  spoken. 
I  had  learned. 
I  had  written. 

1.  Habia  j      hablado. 

2.  Habias  >     aprendido. 
S.  Habia            )     escrito. 


Yo  habia  hablado. 
Yo  habia  aprendido. 
Yo  habia  escrito. 
Habiamos       )      hablado. 


Habiais 
Habian 


aprendido. 
escrito. 


PRETERIT  PERFECT. 


I  had  spoken. 
I  had  learnd. 
I  had  written. 

1.  Hube  J     hablado. 

2.  Hubiste.         >     aprendido. 
-3.  Hubo  )     escrito. 


Yo  hube  hablado. 

Yo  hube  aprendido. 

Yo  hube  escrito. 
Hubimos        \      hablado. 
Hubisteis        >     aprendido. 
Hubieron.      )      escrito. 


I  shall  have  spoken. 
I  shall  have  learned. 
I  shall  have  written. 

1.  Habre  j      hablado. 

2.  Habras  >     aprendido. 
S.  Habiu            )      escrito.* 


FUTURE  PERFECT. 

Yo  habre  hablado. 
Yo  habre  aprendido. 


Yo  habre  escrito. 
Habremos      ^      hablado. 
Habreis  >     aprendido. 

Habran  )      escrito. 


THE   SEVEN   PRINCIPAL   CLASSES   OF   REGULAR 
IRREGTJLAR   VERBS. 


ACERTAR. 


FIRST   CLASS. 

I  To  hit  the  mark. 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 


1.  Acierto.        I  hit  the  mark. 

2.  Aciertas. 

3.  Acierta. 


1.  Acertamos. 

2.  Acertais. 

3.  Aciertan. 


*  The  other  compound  tenses  are  conjugated  in  like  manner. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


409 


2.  Acierta. 

3.  Acierte. 


1.  Acierte. 

2.  Aciertes. 

3.  Acierte. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Acertemos. 

2.  Acertad. 

3.  Acierten. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

1.  Acertemos. 

2.  Acerteis. 

3.  Acierten. 


The  following  verbs,  and  their  compounds,  are  conjugated  like 

ACERTAR : 


Acrecentar. 

To  increase. 

Derrengar. 

To  break  the  back. 

Adestrar. 

To  render  skilful. 

Despernar. 

To  cut  off  the  legs. 

Alentar. 

To  breathe. 

Despertar. 

To  awake. 

Apacentar. 

To  feed. 

Desterrar. 

To  banish. 

Apretar. 

To  squeeze. 

Empedrar. 

To  pave. 

Arrendar. 

To  hire. 

Empezar. 

To  begin. 

Asentar. 

To  place. 

Encerrar. 

To  lock  up. 

Aserrar. 

To  saw. 

Encomendar. 

To  recommend. 

Aterrar. 

To  throw  down. 

Enterrar.  . 

To  bury. 

Atestar. 

To  stuff. 

Escarmentar. 

To  take  warning. 

Atravesar. 

To  cross. 

Fregar. 

To  rub. 

Aventar. 

To  winnow. 

Gobernar. 

To  govern. 

Calentar. 

To  warm. 

Helar. 

To  freeze. 

Cegar. 

To  blind. 

Herrar. 

To  shoe. 

Cerrar. 

To  shut. 

Invernar. 

To  winter. 

Comenzar. 

To  commence. 

Mentar. 

To  mention. 

Concertar. 

To  agree. 

Merendar. 

To  take  a  collation. 

Confesar. 

To  confess. 

Negar. 

To  deny. 

Decentar. 

To  taste  for  the 

Nevar. 

To  snow. 

first  time. 

Pensar. 

To  think. 

Quebrar. 

To  break. 

Sosegar. 

To  quiet. 

Recomendar. 

To  recommend. 

Soterrar. 

To  bury. 

Regar. 

To  water. 

Temblar. 

To  tremble. 

Reventar, 

To  burst. 

Tentar. 

To  tempt. 

Segar. 

To  cut  down. 

Trasegar. 

To  rake. 

Sembrar. 

To  sow. 

Tropezar. 

To  stumble. 

Sentar. 

To  set. 

410 


CONJUGATIONS, 


SECOND  CLASS. 


ACOSTAR. 


To  put  or  go  to  bed. 


INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Acuesto. 

I  put  or  go  to  bed. 

1.  Acostamos. 

2.  Acuestas. 

2.  Acostais 

5. 

3.  Acuesta. 

3.  Acuestan. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Acostemos. 

2.  Acuesta. 

2.  Acostad 

3.  Acueste. 

3.  Acuesten. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRES 

JENT. 

1.  Acueste. 

1.  Acostemos. 

2.  Acuestes. 

2.  Acosteis 

>. 

3.  Acueste. 

3.  Acuesten. 

The  following 

r  verbs,  and  their 
Acos 

compounds,  an 

>TAR  : 

I  conjugated  like 

Acordar. 

To  agree. 

Consolar. 

To  console. 

Agorar. 

To  divine. 

Contar. 

To  count. 

Almorzar. 

To  breakfast. 

Costar. 

To  cost. 

Amolar. 

To  grind. 

Degollar. 

To  behead. 

Aporcar. 

To  hoe. 

Demostrar. 

To  demonstrate. 

Apostar. 

To  bet. 

Descollar. 

To  surpass. 

Aprobar. 

To  approve. 

Desconsolar. 

To  discourage. 

Asolar. 

To  waste. 

Desolar. 

To  desolate. 

Atronar. 

To  thunder. 

Desollar. 

To  skin. 

Avergonzar. 

To  shame. 

Desvergonzarse. 

To  be  impudent. 

Colar. 

To  strain. 

Emporcar. 

To  dirty. 

Colgar. 

To  hang. 

Encordar. 

To  string. 

Comprobar. 

To  verify. 

Encontrar. 

To  meet. 

Engrosar. 

To  engross. 

Resollar. 

To  breathe. 

Forzar. 

To  force. 

Rodar. 

To  roll. 

Holgar. 

To  rest. 

Rogar. 

To  entreat. 

HoUar. 

To  tread. 

Soldar. 

To  solder. 

Mostrar. 

To  show. 

Soltar. 

To  loose. 

Poblar. 

To  people. 

Sonar. 

To  sound. 

Probar. 

To  prove. 

Sonar. 

To  dream. 

Recordar. 

To  remind. 

Tostar. 

To  toast. 

Recostar. 

To  lie  down. 

Trocar. 

To  barter. 

Regoldar. 

To  belch. 

Tronar. 

To  thunder. 

Renovar. 

To  renew. 

Volar. 

To  fly. 

Reprobar. 

To  reprove. 

Volcar. 

To  overturn. 

Rescontrar. 

To  compensate. 

CONJUGATIONS. 


411 


THIBD 

CLASS. 

Mover.                          |            To  move. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Muevo.                                    1.  Movemos. 

2.  Mueves.                                    2.  Moveis. 

3.  Mueve.                                      3.  Mueven. 

IMPER 

2.  Mueve. 

3.  Mueva. 

ATIVE. 

1.  Movamos. 

2.  Moved. 

3.  Muevan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRES 

1.  Mueva. 

2.  Muevas. 

3.  Mueva. 

ENT. 

1.  Movamos. 

2.  Movais. 

3.  Muevan. 

The  following  verbs,  and  their 

Mo^ 
Absolver.              To  absolve. 
Disolver.               To  dissolve. 
Doler.                    To  grieve. 
Llover.                  To  rain. 
Moler.                   To  grind. 

'compounds,  are  conjugated  h 

Morder.              To  bite. 
Retorcer.           To  twist  again. 
Solver.                To  solve. 
Torcer.   .           To  twist. 
Volver.              To  turn. 

FOURTH   CLASS. 

Atender.                       1            To  attend. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRES 

1.  Atiendo. 

2.  Atiendes. 

3.  Atiende. 

ENT. 

1.  Atendemos. 

2.  Atendeis. 

3.  Atienden. 

IMPER 

2.  Atiende. 

3.  Atienda. 

ATIVE. 

1.  Atendamos. 

2.  Atended. 

3.  Atiendan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRES 

1.  Atienda. 

2.  Atiendas. 

3.  Atienda. 

ENT. 

1.  Atendamos. 

2.  Atendais. 

3.  Atiendan. 

412 


CONJUGATIONS, 


The  following  verbs,  and  their  compounds,  have  the  same 

irregularities  as  Atender  : 

Ascender 

To  ascend. 

Entender.          To  understand. 

Cerner. 

To  sift. 

Extender.          To  extend. 

Condescender.       To  condescend. 

Heder.                To  strnk. 

Contender.             To  contend. 

Hender.              To  split. 

Defender 

To  defend. 

Perder.          •     To  lose. 

Desatender.           To 

neglect. 

Tender.              To  stretch  out. 

Descender.             To  descend. 

Trascender.       To  transcend. 

Encendei 

To 

kindle. 

Verter.               To  pour  out. 

FIFTH  CLASS. 

Sentir. 

1             To  feel 
INDICATIVE. 
PRESENT. 

1. 

Siento. 

1.  Sentimos. 

2. 

Sientes. 

2.  Sentis. 

3. 

Siente. 

3.  Sienten. 

PRETERIT. 

1. 

Senti. 

1.  Sentimos. 

2. 

Sentiste. 

2.  Sentisteis. 

3. 

Sintio. 

3.  Sintieron. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Si  a  tamos. 

2. 

Siente. 

2.  Sentid. 

3. 

Sienta. 

3.  SientaDu 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1. 

Sienta. 

1.  Sintamos. 

2. 

Sientas. 

2.  Sintais. 

3. 

Sienta. 

3.  Sientan. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 

1.  Sentiria,  &;c. 

Second  Termination. 

1. 

Sintiera. 

1.  Sintieramos. 

2. 

Sintieras. 

2.  Sintierais. 

3. 

Sintiera. 

3.  Sintieran. 

Third  Termination. 

1. 

Sintiese. 

1.  Sintiesemos. 

2. 

Sintieses. 

2.  Sintieseis. 

3. 

Sintiese 

3.  Sintiesen. 

CONJUGATIONS. 


413 


FUTURE. 

1.  Sintiere. 

1.  Sintieremos. 

2.  Sintieres. 

2.  Sintiereis. 

3.  Sintiere. 

3.  Sintieren. 

The  following 

verbs^  and  their  compounds,  have  the 

irregularities  as  Sentir  : 

Adherir. 

To  adhere. 

Digerir.             To  digest. 

Advertir. 

To  advert. 

Herir.                To  wound. 

Arrepentirse. 

To  repent. 

Hervir.              To  boil. 

Asentir. 

To  assent. 

Ingerir.              To  ingraft. 

Conferir. 

To  confer. 

Invertir.             To  invert. 

Consentir. 

To  consent. 

Pervertir.           To  pervert. 

Controvertir. 

To  controvert. 

Preferir.             To  prefer. 

Convertir. 

To  convert. 

Referir.              To  refer. 

Deferir. 

To  defer. 

Requerir.           To  require. 

Diferir. 

To  differ. 

SIXTH  CLASS. 

Pedir. 

1             To  ask. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Pido. 

1.  Pedimos. 

2.  Pides. 

2.  Pedis. 

3.  Pide. 

3.  Piden. 

preterit. 

1.  Pedi. 

1.  Pedimos. 

2.  Pediste. 

2.  Pedisteis. 

3.  Pidio. 

3.  Pidieron. 

IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Pidamos. 

2.  Pide. 

2.  Pedid. 

3.  Pida. 

3.  Pidan. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Pida. 

1.  Pidamos. 

2.  Pidas. 

2.  Pidais. 

3.  Pida. 

3.  Pidan. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 
1.  Pediria,  &c. 


414 


CONJUGATIONS. 


Second  Termination. 


1.  Pidiera. 

1.  Pidieramos. 

2.  Pidieras. 

2.  Pidierais. 

3.  Pidiera. 

3.  Pidieran. 

Third  Termination. 

1.  Pidiese. 

1.  Pidiesemos. 

2.  Pidieses. 

2.  Pidieseis. 

3.  Pidiese. 

3.  Pidiesen. 

FUTURE. 

1.  Pidiere. 

1.  Pidieremos. 

2.  Pidieres. 

2.  Pidiereis. 

3.  Pidiere. 

3.  Pidieren. 

The  following  verbs,  and  the 

ir  compounds,  have  the 

irregularitie 

s  as  Pedir: 

Arrecir.                 To  benumb. 

Gremir.                   To  groan. 

Cenir.                    To  belt. 

Medir.                   To  measure. 

Colegir.                  To  collect. 

Regir.                    To  rule. 

Competir.              To  contend. 

Rendir.                  To  render. 

Concebir.               To  conceive. 

Refiir.                    To  quarrel. 

Constrefiir.            To  constrain. 

Repetir.                 To  repeat. 

Derretir.                To  melt. 

Seguir.                   To  follow. 

Desleir.                  To  dissolve. 

Servir.                   To  serve. 

Elegir.                   To  elect. 

Tefiir.                    To  dye. 

Embestir.              To  attack. 

Vestir.                  To  dress. 

SEVENT3 

I  CLABS. 

CONDUCIR. 

1            To  conduct. 

INDIC. 

iTIVE. 

PRES 

>ENT. 

1.  Conduzco. 

1.  Conducimos. 

2.  Conduces,  &c. 

2.  Conducis,  &c. 

PRET 

ERIT. 

1.  Conduje. 

1.  Condujimos. 

2.  Condujiste. 

2.  Condujisteis. 

3.  Condujo. 

3.  Condujeron. 

CONJUGATIONS, 


415 


2. .  Conduce. 
3.  Conduzca. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Conduzcamos. 

2.  Conducid. 

3.  Conduzcan. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
PRESENT. 

1.  Conduzca,  &c.  |         1.  Conduzcamos,  &:c. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 
1.  Conduciria,  &;c.  I         1.  Conduciriamos,  &;c. 

Second  Termination. 
1.  Condujera,  &c.  I         1.  Condujeramos,  &;c. 

Third  Termination, 
1.  Condujese,  &;c.  |        1.  Condujesemos,  <fec. 

FUTURE. 

1.  Condujere,  &c.  I        1.  Condujeremos,  &;c. 


The  following  verbs  are  conjugated  like  Conducir  : 

Aducir.                  To  adduce. 
Deducir.                To  deduce. 
Introducir.            To  introduce. 

Producir.               To  produce. 
Reducir.                To  reduce. 
Traducir,               To  translate. 

N.  B. — Conocer^  and  all  verbs  ending  in  cer^  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
follow  the  irregularity  of  Conducir  in  the  present  indicative  and  subjunctive, 
and  in  the  imperative.    Elsewhere  regular. 


416 


<f0NJUGATI0NS. 


J^     1 


fl 

, 

C3 

c 

c 

j4 

fl 

c 

o 

d 

C 

p 

o3 

c8 

03 

^ 

.5 

S 

u 

Ph 

<» 

a> 

«> 

^C 

'u 

^ 

«> 

9 

;-! 

;^ 

•c 

*2 

3 

^ 

p 

S3 

S3 

=J 

S 

3 

s 

S3 

cr* 

cr* 

cf 

cr 

O^ 

cr- 

cr" 

cr 

cr 

a* 

-s 

-% 

^ 

5 

'S 

^ 

-§ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

w 

ro 

oT 

r/T 

sT 

«r 

Qi 

iS 

tf 

vT 

cS 

g 

2 

rr 

03 

m 

;^ 

:s 

C 

a> 

a> 

^C 

^C 

'C 

•C 

>l 

^ 

^C 

Ph 

^ 

•G 

^ 

fS 

P 

P 

!3 

13 

=J 

S3 

S3 

S3 

cr 

o* 

cr" 

cr* 

cr* 

cr 

cr 

O^ 

cr" 

CT" 

^ 

-s 

S3 

e3 

'g 

-s 

08 

-§ 

^ 

^ 

oT 

sf 

rrT 

oT 

25 

O 

o 

O 

o 

8 
S 

s 

i 

8 
a 

O 

i 

E 

eg 

s 

a 

S 

CO 

so 

vS 

;-i 

kJ 

u 

Ut 

£ 

fc^ 

fc- 

U 

^ 

=3 

;3 

53 

P 

S3 

a 

s 

P 

3 

S3 

CT" 

cr" 

cr 

o* 

cr 

a" 

cr 

cf 

O^ 

cr< 

'TS 

•^ 

'TJ 

'TJ 

T3 

^ 

nrl 

"3 

T3 

T3 

<5 

<1 

<3 

<1 

<i 

<? 

<5 

<5 

<5 

<1 

r     ® 

\i 

. 

VC8 

c8 

03 

sS 

2 

® 

2 

(H 

^O 

(h 

Ui 

;.4 

*^H 

.2 

.2 

.        9 

^C 

*»^ 

'C 

© 

.2 

'C 

*S 

•c 

'C 

, 

CO  '3 

'3 

*3 

S3 

'3 

'5 

'3 

'5 

;3 

'3 

^ 

cr" 

o^ 

cr- 

u* 

cr" 

CT- 

O^ 

cr* 

c^ 

cr" 

.g 

•^ 

1 

1 

t^ 

2 

-§ 
4 

1 

o5 

^ 

J 

-§ 

§ 

e 

£ 

e8 

29 

^ 

bl 

^ 

2 

.2 

o 

o 

O 

1- 

.    ® 

S 

;g 

•c 

.2 

.2 

'u 

"S 

'C 

•g 

HIA 

o 

04  '3 

'3 

*3 

"3 

'3 

*3 

'j3 

':3 

'3 

*3 

u 

a> 

n^ 

.s 

cr 

o* 

cr 

cr 

CT" 

cr 

O^ 

cr 

cr 

o- 

•g 

!S 

^ 

-3 

% 

-§ 

^ 

^ 

-§ 

'S 

"i 

-s 

-i 

S3 

*3 

S3 

CJ- 

cr" 

O* 

'd 
<? 

<1 

^ 
< 

2^ 

<s 

if 

i 

2 

.2 

2 
•2 

S 

'S 

'S^ 

:g 

2 

'G 

Ig 

'C 

*g 

g* 

H 

l-H  *3 

'3 

*3 

'3 

'3 

*3 

'3 

'3 

'3^ 

K 

S 

c 

cr" 

cr 

u* 

CT" 

o^ 

cr 

a^ 

D^ 

pS 

■< 

TS 

T3 

'TS 

'd 

•X3 

^ 

^ 

ns 

'd 

s 

p3 

^         < 

<J 

<5 

<1 

<1 

< 

<1 

<1 

< 

^ 

a5 

H 

l-H 

H 

s 

OS 

-< 

Ui 

;J 

^ 

Pk 

04 

c:k 

H 

<i; 


t 


I 


d;      'pd/uddiuj 


S3 


t3 


CONJUGATIOJ^. 


41T 


1^ 


03 


03 


^ 
fl 
(d 


03         03 


03 


«         «, 


03 


-e8 

1 

^ 

f 

.2f 

03 

^ 

k 

^ 

'TS 

^ 

^ 

n^ 

'^ 

•d 

•d 

'd 

^ 

fl 

fi 

fl 

C 

fl 

C2 

c 

C3 

C 

fl 

03 

03 

03 

03 

08 

03 

03 

c3 

s 

c8 

03 

r 

a 
1 

s 

§ 
1 

s 

i 

a 

^c8 
03 

1 

2 

5 

•^ 

T3 

n3 

^ 

'TJ 

'd 

'd 

'd 

-d 

'd 

a 

& 

C 

C 

a 

c 

0 

C 

a 

c 

< 

^ 

<1 

<; 

<1 

-< 

<5 

<1 

< 

<1 

5^ 


<5 


08  ^ 

08         08  S 

'd           -^  r^ 

S             S  S 

^         o3  c8 


03 
-d 

03 


o 
"d 

s 

'd 


08        b3 


^        ^ 


<1 


(4 


03 

03 

P 
08 


k 

IS 

i=! 
03 


08 


i 

53 

^ 

1 

oa'^ 

S 

08 

k 

^ 

k 

^ 

'd 

•d 

^ 

^ 

^ 

•d 

^ 

'd 

nd 

c 

a 

p 

c 

p 

P 

C 

c 

P 

03 

c8 

03 

08 

08 

08 

* 

5 

g 

^ 

03 

08 

9 

^ 

08-^ 

*M 

•N 

•N 

1 

k 

sp" 

k 

k 

k 

o' 

5 

^ 

(iT 

1 

0 

d 

s 

T3 

^ 

-d 

nd 

'd 

•T3 

-r; 

'd 

^ 

C 

a 

c 

fl 

0 

C 

p 

fl 

PI 

<5 

<^ 

<^ 

<1 

<1 

<1 

< 

<i 

<1 

03 


<1 


^ 


^ 


^ 


'pd/u^diuj    1^ 


29 


H 

> 

H 

o 

< 

» 

^ 

D 

pa 
0^ 

3 

^, 

p 

1— 1 

oa 

418 


CONJUGATIONS. 


t 
.1 

I 

T 


C 

.   p 

§ 

2 

CO     « 

CO 

'55 

93 

03 

9i 

-2  ^  a  P 

S  9  §  S8 

bfi  U)  .b  .2 

TO  CO  03  W5 

03  03  03  03 


^1 


rA  a 


^     '-a      .**      '•(D 

-^        08         CO         M 


oT  .2  -2  .2 

^  .52  .2  .2 

CZl  'cO  'ot  *IJD 

o3  03  o3  flS 


=3 


<A     <     <     < 


I  a  a  a  s 

if  .Ju  ^2  *2  ^2 

CO  'm  'w  M  «n 

<^  <H  ^  <H  <^ 


g 

t— ( 

O 
H 


^ 

e 

•«!» 

•S 

^ 

1 

o 

o 

'^ 

fi 

o 

fS 

(V 

'S 

•  r^ 

^ 

OQ 

*w 

< 

^ 

<5 

H 

g 

>; 

£2 

{2^ 

TO 

H 

1 

» 

S 

04 

^ 

Pk 

^ 

5S 


m         CO         CO         CO 
-<       <1       <1       <J 


*-        ^•' 


<^        <j^        <<        <1 


^-        e 


H      H      H 


^     -§      I 


<J;  ^  t^ 


(i;     'pd/uddmj     ^ 


2 


!Z5 


CONJUGATIONS. 


419 


1^ 


fl 

fl 

• 

fl 

s 

2 

c 

c8 

2 

2 

§ 

.^ 

« 

.•5* 

.•& 

3? 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

•^ 

^ 

p 

c 

0 

« 

P 

G 

1=1 

a 

G 

C 

•2        tN        tN 


oT 

•i 

J5 

oT 

'2 

nd 

CO 

2 

8 

g 

S» 

§ 

'§ 

s 

.1? 

.•;? 

15^ 

'^ 

'd 

'O 

n3 

'd 

'H 

'd 

T3 

•T3 

^3 

a 

G 

G 

G 

G 

G 

G 

G 

S 

0) 

a> 

© 

03 

a» 

O) 

^ 

,a 

^ 

'  ^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

« 

a 

i 

1 

3 

2 

of 
O 

a 

1 

1 

1 

0 

J 

u 

t3 

T^ 

^ 

T^ 

r^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

-a 

r2 

G 

G 

G 

G 

•G 

G 

G 

G 

a 

G 

Wpqcqpqwpqwpqpup; 


p^       -^ 


^ 

G 

o' 

u 

.® 

^ 

d 

*o 

*o 

*o 

-t* 

o 

•N 

(V 

•p4 

TS 

^ 

^3 

'T^ 

G 

G 

G 

G 

03 

© 

(D 

(V 

m 

« 

M 

w* 

i 

^. 

£ 

: 

• 

^cB 

J 

.25 

g 

• 

• 

05 

CO   ^ 

eg 

1 

6 

? 

'73 

« 

4^ 
•T3 

s 

G 

e 

G 

G 

G 

G 

G 

G 

Z 

^ 

^ 

J 

^ 

^ 

^ 

r 

^ 

«« 

^ 

i 

« 

5" 

% 

Wk 

1 

i 

.2 

1 

3 
•a 

S 

-a 

G 

G 

13 

G 

G 

s 

G 

G 

G 

^ 

^ 

^ 

J 

^ 

S. 

^ 

0 

1 

1 

^•^ 
^U 

1 

5? 

2 

TS 

'S 

^ 

-a 

•73 

TS 

Tj 

-TJ 

^ 

s 

G 

G 

a 

G 

G 

G 

G 

G 

cq     pq     pq 


pq     W     PQ     PQ     cq 


V» 


^ 


H      H      H 

s* 

«■ 

CO          "d         r^ 

i 

5S 

NO 

1 

th       o;i       CO 

% 

1 

w 

w 

>► 

^ 

H 

H 

Q 

< 

tz; 

rt 

P 

» 

>-» 

Oi 

pq 

S 

5 

1— 1 

02 

420 


CONJUGATIONS, 


2^ 


00   jzi 
o3 


2 

IS 


u 


01 

PE^ 

i* 

^ 

1 

> 

.1 

P5 

1 

'g 

<< 

g 

.5i 

iJ 

D 

o 

^ 

J 

O 

"** 

•§ 

§ 

'«" 

P5 

1*^ 

O 
^ 

S*^ 

P:h 

^ 

^ 

Q 

o" 

^< 

'TJ 

& 

tT 

c 

<» 

o 

Q 

a> 

^ 

3 

3 

od 

08 

33 

^ 

o 

O 

o 

M 

•-H 

1-3 

H 

. 

H 

P3 

s 

>- 

^ 

PL, 

g 

n 

p 

HH 

Pi 

CO 

I 


TO   J 


1  s 


4) 

lii 


fa 


0* 


S  03 


eg 

ft 


.2^ 
'3 

9) 

.;ii 

^ 

f 

^ 

2 

fi 

^ 

^ 

as 

« 

^ 

c8 

c8 

C^ 

o 

© 

O 

tn 

0 

S^ 

0 

.     § 

1 

1 

S 

C8 

T-<    g 

•a 

^ 

ft 

S 

c8 

ft 

fa 

$ 

1 

1 

6 

0 

88 

ft 


2,    s 

^  OS 


ft  ^S 
2  ^ 
5*       O 


OS 

fa 

ft 

;;> 

fa 

9 


ft 


ft  ft  ft 

0       0  0 

V  V  g 

*      aR  « 

cs     ^  g 

fa     «  fa 

g     g  g 

•N  tN  tN 

ft         ft  ft 

0        0  0 

guv 


v^  \4J  vg 

tN  "J  •g 

ft  ft  ft 

0  0  0 

g  W  g 


2 
£ 
ft 

0 

g 


ft    ft    ft 

0       0       0 

g     g     g 


ft    ft    ft 
0      0      0 

^     ^^     ^ 


^     ^     ^     ^ 


H      H      H 

g     ^     ^     ;^  ^ 

<»        tH        CQ        CO  ^ 

^        ^ ^ ^  "^ 


I 


«3 


CONJUGATIONS. 


421 


03 

n 

« 

.S 

B 

^ 

O 

o 

o 


s 

c 

fi 

c 

c3 

ee 

c3 

eg 

N 

K 

^ 

4) 

^ 

<» 

IS 

P 

8 

■§ 

o 
O 


O 

O 


g 

g 

a 

a 

% 

g 

s 

g 

*2 

"2 

^2 

*o 

*o 

o 

o 

o 

O 

O 

O 

o 

o 


o 

el 


o 
O 


Ph 


'Q 


o 


g 
^ 


p3 


c^ 


^ 

© 

w 

1 

s 

IS 

o 


o 


4) 
IS 

O 


o 

O 


©      .2 


o 
o 

O 


W  QJ  ^ 

^-  S  ^  ^ 


1 

1 

;§  s  s 

1 

^ 

'pdj^j^ddmx 

1 

p4 

» 

t> 

>; 

S 

H 

o 

5 

5 

P3 

P 

H 

•-a 

PL| 

n 

422 


CONJUGATIONS. 


•5 

§ 

^ 

T 

m 

PQ 

1^ 

> 

tf 

< 

♦J 

t) 

K 

^ 

i 

*Ss 

fe 

^ 

c" 

Oi 

o 

tT 

r3 

e8 

08 

08 

Q 

Q 

Q 

1-^ 

;? 

en 

H 

H 

OQ 

03 

-< 

Oh 

Ph 

fl      o      c 

'TS        TS        '^ 


CO 


c8 


o 

s 

c8 


03 
Q 


.d 


v2       ^ 

03        (N 
T3        'TS 


I 


CO     o8 


-^     ^     ^ 

ra  r^  r^ 


03        -^ 

08        W4 
13        r3 


03 


08-^ 


0         e8       ^         03 

p     Q     O     Q 


o3 

'd 


a 

c3 


03 

03 
'd 


03 

'd 


"O         o3 


v;) 


P 


n3 


©        «        « 

•^      5?      5? 

O     P     Q 


H      H      H 


^ 


t 


^ 


^ 


^      ^ 


^ 


CONJUGATIONS. 


428 


I' 


O 

r  a 


u 


&fi 


a 

c3 


.7   4!^ 


•m     •? 


o      i*     «     -^    "n    "^ 

d)        tN         tN         •«         (N         (rt 


i 


OQPQ  QQQQAQ 


g' 

"hS 

i«^ 

<» 

1^ 

-i^ 

s 

^ 

S' 

o 

.?. 

o 

"S* 

•iS 

^ 

(^ 

>i 

e 

'^ 

^ 

§ 

CO 

•§ 

6 

CO 

^ 

^ 

J^ 

1 

O 

J? 

"o 

o 

V 

03 

•N 

(N 

Q 

« 

P 

g 
^ 

1 

s 

02 

H 

H 

S 

£ 

p3 

^  2  iS  ^  r4  ^  ^  ^  f- 

05         »2  ©  W  CS  03         irt  (D  o)  (X) 

•Pt  O         tp^         •N  .H        (P^         (N         (PK         tN         (f^ 


^    J    5   i       ««  I   I 


^ 


P     Q     Q     P 


r;  s  '=^ 


I 


•^    "n    •? 

tN       trt       •* 


M>     ft*     "n    "n    •^ 

tN       trt       (N       tN       ni4 
P       P       P       P       P 


H      S      ^ 


f^      'pd/uddmj    fej 


424 


CONJUGATIONS. 


e 


5 

^ 

§ 

^ 

T 

« 

P^ 

g^ 

> 

< 

1 

o 

1 

■1 

"^ 

H 

'S 

§- 

§ 

00 

4 

C 

1— 1 

}^ 

a> 

T3 

O 

1 

1 

0 

H 

Q 

« 

Q 

c» 

H-( 

hq 

H 

g 

^ 

> 

-<J 

» 

g 

^ 

p2 

» 

n 

H 

E 

» 

od 

55 

i* 

-«J 

HH 

Pl^ 

PUi 

. 

C 

^ 

, 

. 

C 

G 

2H 

G 

O 

fl 

a 

s 

08 

s 

o 

*a 

a 

o 

c8 

c8 

i 

v2 

1 

a 

'a 

© 

a 

0 

0 

ss 

0 

o 

0 

IS 

0 

^ 

'IS 

^13 

'O 

^ 

'TJ 

n3 

TS 

'TS 

^ 

«J' 

08 

g 

a 

^ 

o 

O 

^ 

^ 

o 

.a 


o 
Q 


CO  © 


a    s 


.  § 

<^ 

CO    ^ 

'a 

0 

o 

^ 

n3 

1 

© 

a 

i 

§i^ 

5i 

0 

o 

CO 

^3 

TS 

Q     P 


o 


a    « 

Q     P 


^ 


o 
P 


^      I      ^ 


o 


o 

a 

03 

a 

s 

p 


0 

13 


-2"    v^     ® 


a    a 


.S    a 


o 


vc8 

a 

u 
0 


a 

08 

a 

u 

0 

p 


a    a 


0 

n3 


0 


0 

P 


0 

P 


03  03 


0 

'T3 


a 

0 


08 

a 

0 

P 


a    a 

0        0 


08 


0 


0 

P 


0 


0 

P 


H      H 


a 

0 

13 


a    a 


a 

08 

*'C     "^^     r**     ^■^ 


0 

P 


© 
©    •I—* 

a  § 


2   P 
© 

a  5Z5 


^ 

g 

1^        'T^        ^ 

<» 

1 

^ 

tH        CQ        CO 

^ 

r 

'p9/uddtuj 

CONJUGATIONS, 


425 


CO     ^ 


d 

, 

fl 

G 

2 

-S 

P 

Oj 

<u 

S 

^ 

6fi 

3 

s 

J3 

fa 

bf) 

bn 

bo 

tJD 

^ 

0) 

U 

^ 

;3 


^3 


fa      =^ 


0 


■c 

>^ 

•s 

3 

^ 

£? 

J-.^ 

fa 

a> 

ai 

•rt 

>-» 

s, 


be 


1 

o 

a 

e3 

a 

i 

1 

'I 

3 

fl 

^ 

^ 

^ 

gp 

H         W         H         W        HH         >^ 


0 

I 

If 


>H     H 


bo 


S, 


o 

6 

o 

6 

2^ 

a 

a 

H 

a 

u 

03 

03 

ay 

<i> 

^C 

V(X) 

bn 

d 

d 

d 

d 

^ 

be 

bo 

bO 

bO 

S 

^ 


I      I 

J       ?3 


d 


0. 


d 


H 

Ph 


r^      fa 


^08 

es 

03 

s2 

g 

^ 

o 

g 

U) 

60 

IS 

.2 

•2 

d 

'd 

08 

fa 

c3 

fa 

*d 

'd 

'd 

bo 

bo 

& 

«) 

S) 

s 

bo 

^P 

^P 

.S^ 

•^ 

S^ 

9\ 

^ 

<D 

*c8 

^ 

e3 

J 

t 

m 

'd 

*d 

t 

« 

^ 

'd 

.2 

'd 

*d 

bo 

^ 

« 

bo 

« 

be 

^ 

^ 

{-1 

fe 

.*^ 

►» 

;-i 

k» 

^ 
« 

be 


d 
bo 


d 
bo 


f-t       (jj 


WWW 


W 


d 
bo 


^ 


& 


bo         tlD 


h5       PL, 


^ 


~    -£.   --s 


I  ^  ^ 


^ 


'pdj!uddiuj 


5 


426 


CONJUGATIONS. 


I 


Si 

c8 


S  -2  oT 

c8  08  e8  c3 

J-i  *-i  Jh  ^^ 

»-i  >^  t^  ^H 

a?  o  ®  o 


o 


s 

eg 

5 


s 

a 

s 

a 

2 

a 

* 

* 

® 

a   T 


ptiHWWiij         Wwpqw 


o 

a 


PS 


u 

•f 

^ 

, 

'Q* 

P5 

^ 

^ 

Ci3 

<;i 

<» 

r 

V 

»-H 

o 

O 

"** 

T3 

o" 

o 

i 

§ 

1 

Uk 

»^ 

bM 

H 

H 

^ 

w 

£ 

3 

H 

H 

H 

PS 

S 

> 

-< 

-flj 

2 

P^ 

CL, 

02 

H 

(d 

S 

Eu 

PS 

-<1 

t— 1 

Ph 

Ph 

08 


■i 


eg 
Si 
08 


I 


c8         08 


i 


F     H     H 


>l     ^ 


■£ 


t^    »^    tS; 


08 

u 
u 


^ 


^  »S  a8  ®  © 

^  e3  03  eS  08 

5  t:  t:  t:  t: 

^  H  w  f^  w 


^    ^    ^ 


4;     'pd^JLddmi      f^ 


p 


CONJVaATIONS. 


427 


.§ 

S 

1 

• 

^ 

§ 

§ 

1 

J 

3 

CO  % 

1 

4i 

S 

s* 

^ 

'% 

.S 

.s 

rC 

r4 

43 

rfl 

A 

4) 

»;r 

•s 

*S 

*3 

'08 

•s 

12 

1 

^ 

1 

1 

S3 

.2 

1 

m 

0 

s 

s 

^ 

0 

a 

0 

§ 

1 

of 

0 

i 

0 

0 

0 

08 

<o 

O 

.a 

1 

s 

i 

f 

a 

(M 

s 

tH    <» 

§ 

u 

^ 

U) 

&fi 

""C 

V 

;^ 

« 

*N 

c8 

08 

c8 

•rt 

tN 

•rt 

L   m 

cn 

m 

w 

W 

W 

W 

w 

W 

w 

1 


0 

-§ 

0 

^ 

A 

V 

0 

1 

^ 

s 

w 

H 

H 

S 

i 

> 

S 

w 

H 

(Z4 

Pi3 
Ci3 

53 

55 
1— i 

(In 

Pk 

.1 


_  OP       .S        •       'g 


.22      "S     T 
«     2     fe 

^        ^        .^ 


^        ^ 


2        «N        ip4 


«       'S 

V      h 


w   w   w   w 


^  ^ 


c8         o3        »rt        (N        «p4 
2        ^        ^        ^        ^ 


W 


Ch      ^pdfjLddm];    ^ 


f 

of 

.s 

61) 

*s 

;^ 

U 

08 

03 

•N 

•P( 

m 

w 

w 

w 

^ 

;^ 

^7 

H 

0) 

^ 

"g 

TS 

'd 

i 

t-H 

<M 

CO 

•-a 

n 

D 
CD 


428 


CON  JUG  A  TIONS, 


fl 

• 

CO  2 

> 

1 

1 
1 

9> 

^ 

.  m 

oT 

• 

C^m 

*aj 

•P< 

t 

1 

5 

_f 

' 

»" 

a 

1 

es 

eg 

N— 1 

s 
fa 

I? 


m 
0 

i 


i     §  g  § 

^   g    s    «    s 
k  .^  €  c;  € 


i       I  -2  •! 

^  .g    s    s    s 

k    .S    €    C    € 


0 

s 

es 


«  X  tt 

2  ©  0 

i  s  a 

eS  «  o 

h  ai  h 

s©  v^  \© 

0  0  Si 


.1^ 


C3 


^         I— I 


8 

o 

O 


a2 


o3 


►    S     C    .s 


-s 


I  5  I 


eg 


>  &  ^  ^ 


't 


^  1 1 


^ 


es 


68 


I  5 


I  I 


g  s 

h  s 

©  9 

*  ? 

^  ^ 


u 


.  H      H  H  . 

"^  "^    :S  ::^  S 

^  -rH           (M  CO  ^ 

|0  r  T'  ^ 


3 


C3 


CONJUGATIONS. 


429 


c3 

fl 

c 

d 

§ 

d 

fl 

d 

^ 

s 

^2 

^ 

s 

2 

2 

ti) 

c3 

S3 

03 

tJO 

ei 

flfi 

4) 

fcn 

bn 

bO 

« 

« 

5fl 

be 

bo 

bO 

p 

^^3 

^;3 

p 

^S 

^ 

p 

•r-» 

CO 

i: 

■^ 

^iii 

^ 

0 

;-i 

t 

m 

U 

^Trt 

03 

03 

c3 

03 

03 

bf) 

bfi 

bo 

bo 

bO 

bO 

bo 

bn 

bo 

bo 

^ 

3 
•(-» 

^3 

3 

•1— S 

3 

•r-a 

.P» 

^3 

p 

3 

•r-» 

3 

•r-» 

o 

a 

bo 

3 
1-3 


a 

eg 
Si 
^03 


c3 
bo 

3 


I 


rr 

o 

w 

r/!" 

^ 

n 

r! 

o 

O 

O 

n 

eg 

a 

a 

a 

M 

?n 

8, 

i 

% 

'S) 

ri 

3 

3 

3 

3 

^ 

»-a 

1-5 

»-3 

1-5 

5S» 

R 

^53^ 

•^ 

^ 

^ 

<» 

8 

r^ 

5»i 

^ 

p 

i 

tS 

3 

^ 

«3 

c8 

oi 

bO 

bo 

bo 

3 

3 

3 

Hs 

^5 

Ht. 

i 

J2i 

cw 

H 

H 

a> 

55 

bo 


c3 
bo 

3 


I 

0 


bo 

03 

03 

^ 

c8 

4) 

bO 

bo 

bn 

bO 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

bO 


J 

"tn 

■g 

^'^ 

P 

rfl 

c8 

bo 

eg 

on 

bO 

bo 

bO 

«) 

9 

bn 

bo 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

^ 

3 

^ 

1 

-g 

^2 

03 

•       1 

c3 

g 

eg 

4) 

bn 

bn 

bo 

^ 

bn 

bo 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

1-3 

•-9 

t-5 

►-9 

1-5 

t-9 

H5 

eg 
bO 


S 


ft;  I 


dj      'pd/uddiaj     f^ 


02 


430 


CONJUGATIONS. 


o 


2     d 

O  O 


w 

S2 

O) 

•d 

©i 

wT 

[3 

JO 

^g 

'o 

*o 

*o 

o 

1-H       ® 
S 


O 


61 


^    ^C 


s 

o 

o 

o 

s 

o 
E 

S 

c3 

g 

e 

2 

&fi 

&i 

"t 

••^ 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O 

o 


c 


"-fT^ 

*o8 

i: 

r^ 

!C 

*^u    ' 

h 

^ 

o 

O 

o 

O 

o 


^CO  02  ^03 


o 

6 

o 

B 

S 

a 

g 

s; 

2 

'■O 

Kp 

%o 

►» 

k 

^ 

O 

o 

O 

tf 

< 

h:; 

t) 

i* 

jV] 

*^ 

P5 

i 

1 

1 

KH 

V 

^ 

o 

^ 

o 

TS 

<< 

(^^ 

c 

(D 

o 

u 

t>> 

S 

5 

o 

O 

h-( 

J 

<2 

g 
^ 

Jz; 

02 

H 

t— 1 

en 

(4 

^ 

w    k»      « 


O 


*0        ^c3 

o       o 


O 


O      O 


-•      ^ 


<^ 


Q 
^ 


c3 


O 


08 


«         of 

o    S 


o 


.^  :s   ^ 


o 


o 


b^    b^    b^ 


o 


o 


*i: 

^ 

"g 

^    '^    :s 

§ 

<» 

^ 

1 

tH         CQ        CO 

^ 

1 

•pd/uddmj 

1 

H 

a 

>► 

K>- 

H 

H 

O 

<5 

^ 

OS 

t3 

g 

S 

1-4 

eg 

CONJUGATIONS. 


431 


A 


4) 


44 


W    ^         sS  ;^ 

.  'o       o      'o 


^ 

5 

ftf 

2 

^S 

rS 

^S 

<D 

'o 

'o 

'o 

CO  .2 


i-i      § 


O      O  ^  O      O 


o 
B 

O 


o    o 


.g^ 


o 


O      O 


P-l 


oj 


a5 

•  J 

13 

^2 

1> 

0 

s2 

^d 

0 

p4 

'o 

'o 

3 

.4 

c8 

S      >-•      o 

tf      'o      'o 


id      'o      'o 


Boo 


'a 


.4 


H 


^     ;z;     ;:h      ;=3 


O      O      O 


^     b^     ^ 


^ 


fi^      'p9^j,ddmx 


^ 


< 

iz; 

pj 

P 

ps] 

5 

(l4 

PQ 

g 

U 

l-H 

rjl 

4:32 


CONJUGATIONS, 


i-!«^ 


08  .S  C 

^^  -§  ^ 

O        P  o 

Ph         Ch  Dh 


i 

P^ 


I 


O 


O 


o 

a 

o 


t3 


o 

a. 


t3 


o 

a 


a 

03 

I 

P-l 


o 


O 

a 

08 


o      9 


2 


cu 


1 


1 


^ 

6 

13 

.2 

d 

^ 

08- 
•T3 

tf 

. 

»•§ 

1 

§ 

<J 

t^ 

Cu 

p, 

&. 

a. 

p. 

eu 

ij 

} 

g 

1 

1 

tf 

« 

•«!» 
^ 

e 
g 

J 

S 

to 

i^ 

1 

-^ 

s 

P5 

d 

c 

1' 

0 

0 

1 

O 

1 

1 

(2 

'^ 

a. 

C. 

P. 

&i 

p4 

a. 

g 

Oh 

(S 

HH 

U^ 

5 

00 

1 

o 

-■1 

1 

1 

0^ 

1 

111 

^ 

^" 

V*   -^ 


I  ^ 


o 


T3 


J:-      r3      'TS      ^ 
o       ?       S       g 

P4  a  a.  Ol 


0^ 


I 

HH 

Q 

5 


GQ 


CONJUGATIONS. 


433 


G 

g 

G 

G 

g" 

.      O) 

i 

2 

i 

1 

-« 

2 
_© 

"» 

n 

2 

CO    c 
o 

1 

G 
o 

G 
O 

§ 

G 
O 

s 

s 

I 

Ph 

P^ 

Ph 

Ol 

o. 

P4 

a. 

&. 

&I 

&i 

.2 

r#r 

.2 

^oT 

oT 

Oi 

V© 

03 

-^N 

'^ 

*a) 

*s 

§ 

o 

g 

n3 
o 
G 
o 

■'1 

G 
O 

fa 
G 

o 

m 

2 
'« 
9 

I 

P^ 

p^ 

P4 

P4 

P4 

■P^ 

Ph 

Ph 

P. 

p^ 

5 

0 

^ 

?f 

wT 

\ 

f 

i 

i 

m 

o 

a 

a 

1 

J' 

o 

O 

a 
0 

I 

■d 

a 

a 

'd 

'in 

^ 
3 
'« 

G 

o 

'3 

o 

G 
o 

G 

o 

§ 

G 

o 

IS 

d 

s 

P-. 

S^ 

PM 

a, 

fin 

Ah 

PM 

P4 

(1^ 

Pk 

G 
o 
CM 


1^ 


G 


;5 


d 

PU 


EH 

Ph 


I' 


G 

o 
Pu 


g 


T-i     G 


c8         0 

§      S 

p.     P. 


-d 

G 


I 

G 
o 

P4 


fa 
'd 

G 


eg 
C 


p4 


I 

-d 

G 
O 

Ph 


eg 

fa 
'd 

G 
O 


e8 

U) 

G 
O 
CL, 


0 

Ph 


Ph         P4 


IS 

Ph 


d 

p« 


i; 

o 

'd 

1! 

« 

Ob 

G 
o 

d 

0 

d 

P^ 

(^ 

p-i 

Ph 

PL, 


^      -^ 


H      H      H 


I 


(^      'pd^jLddmj;     ^ 


80 


eg 


434 


CONJUGATIONS. 


li 


3 


?3 


« 

♦i 
« 


0 


?3 


*S     fc 


E3 


=3 


S     *5 


**    rs    'SI    'S 


r/T 

X 

»r 

o 

1 

2 

a 

9 

o 

a 

a 
1 

a> 

a> 

•N 

9> 

O) 

O) 

a> 

3 

^ 

f3 

a 

S 

;3 

s 

D* 

o» 

o» 

o» 

G? 

o» 

o» 

cr 


«      *      « 

•2     •S     •« 


o»   o* 


0 

cr 


02 

PQ 

05 

» 

> 

P4 

<1 

u^ 

v> 

«:>» 

t3 

^ 

l<f 

1 

1^ 

, 

^ 

h 

*s 

§ 

00 

1 

03 

o 

o 

1 

s  J 

l-H 

^ 

TJ 

g^ 

fe 

fe 

.2 

4 

^ 

o 

0> 

•c 

H 

3 

a* 

§ 

K^l 

t^ 

. 

g 

03 

» 

CQ 

tH 

E 

» 

M 

1— 1 

C< 

-^ 

PLI 

cu 

2 

C3 

• 
0 

t 

d 

S 

so 

^ 

^ 

.  « 

*c 

tt 

C 

o 

(S 

91 

m 

« 

CO    ^ 

a> 

•n 

a> 

•N 

mt 

a> 

*m 

tN 

•N 

s 

S 

P 

S 

3 

P 

3 

P 

3 

cr 

cr 

cr 

cr 

cr 

cr* 

cr 

cr 

cr 

cr 

•> 

^ 

^ 

« 

»r 

03 

.  1 

J' 

v2 

£ 

1 

08 

•N 

1 

<M      3j 

iZ 

III 

JlJ 

(» 

;h 

X 

« 

« 

•N 

a> 

•N 

O) 

•M 

•N 

(D 

•N 

•N 

•P4 

3 

d 

3 

3 

fl 

3 

p 

3 

3 

cr 

cr" 

cy 

cy 

O* 

cr 

cr 

cr 

O^ 

a* 

3 


^cf 

* 

t 

i 

^ 

^ 

1 

*s 

» 

c 

a> 

;- 

« 

X 

SG 

O) 

•N 

o 

•rt 

O) 

•m 

•pK 

•rt 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

3 

o» 

o» 

o» 

<y 

;-7 

5* 

o* 

^» 

03 

a> 

03 

^ 

^ 

H 

H 

H 

f- 

•"H 

^" 

s 

1^ 

:s 

s 

^ 

i 

<%> 

^ 

1 

tH 

c:^ 

CO 

^ 

<i;  ^ 


(^      'pd/uddtuj     ^ 


g 

-< 

z 

Pi 

u 

g 

S 

g 

13 

hH 

QQ 

CONJUGATIONS. 


436 


ll 


•2         ® 
Q^    m        ^        CO 


r. 


^ 


O)       o       «       a> 
Ph      P5      P^      « 


03 


•fl   'a   -a 


•s   n   'a 


p^     D^     p^     pd;     p^ 


> 


=3 


<e 

1^ 

CJi 

C 

^ 

e 

1 

§» 

^ 

t3 

d 

^ 

« 


g 
^ 

g 
^ 

S5 

55 

H 

PS 

Ph 

P^ 

c8    .a 
'2     2 


^-l    *N  <X>         O  © 

P^      «      Ph      P^ 


«N         ®        •'^        '^        •^ 

p:*      p^      p-      Q^      Q^ 


H      H      H 


'f. 


^  ^ 


(J^      'pd^jLddmj 


^ 


Ec] 

» 

>j 

> 

H 

H 

O 

<J 

^5 

^ 

P 

04 

a 

a 

& 

h-4 

C» 

436 


CONJUGATIONS, 


CO     ® 


CI  ^ 


.2 

03 


c3 


U 


c3 


a 

08 


.2         =8 


d<    d^    p< 


^  03  Gj  03 

P*      &      0( 
0       0        0 


1  i 

.5  "i> 

0  03 

CZ2  CQ 


oT 

o 

o 

o 

s' 

oT 

O 

^ 

§ 

a 

o 

o 

1 

« 

■1 

va, 

vS 

^s 

a 

§4 

'& 

'& 

& 

4^ 

4^ 

0 

0 

0 

m 

CQ 

QQ 

02 

M 

CQ 

:^ 


.2     t 


or     S    -a 

c8         c3         P 


m     m     m 


fa 

c8 


v3 
fa 

-i 


c8 


ft 
4^ 


ft       ft 
0       0 


ft 
0 


ft     ^ 


ft      ft      ft 
0       0       0 


«      ^       0       0       0 
m     m     ui     ^     ^ 


■—  (i;  51, 

H     H     H 


1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

^  s  § 

'pd^jLddmj 

» 

H 

>► 

► 
H 

1 

^ 

sz; 

P3 

P 

» 

5 

0U| 

m 

H-4 

eg 

CONJUGATIONS. 


437 


08         03  08 


§ 
U) 


&     'S      .2 


«^' 

c3 

^c3 

^C 

bl) 

-d 

c8 

c3 

^-  a 


o 

a 


.2 


02     j/:i 


§^ 

a 

0 

a 

c8 

8 
i 

a 

rJi 

0 

a 
2 

% 

&£ 

s 

^2 

^0 

^2 

•— 2 

li 

c8 

c8 

OQ 

CQ 

02 

m 

w. 

c^ 

"§* 

.s^ 

"^ 

s 

V 

0 

§> 

s 

^ 

^ 

"§  . 

0 

0 

<:»> 

^ 

•vs 

'T^ 

g 

a 

0 

i.«* 

U 

.2 

3 

^ 

tfl 

CO 

CO 

; 

^ 

g 

ij 

Ph 

^ 

to 

0^ 

E-i 

(H 

P4 

PL, 

00^ 


^2 


03 


fel     »«      .2 


01  S     v2     .2 

^       5?       5 


o 


-•      e 


03 


'^        'c3        '3 


=3 


c8 


c8 


S 


r^      b^      ^ 


c8 


^ 


^ 


Ci^     'pd/u^ddrnj;     (*, 


g 
s 

CQ 


438 


CONJUGATIONS. 


I 


CO     % 


g     2 


1 


? 


•s?  ? 


•?  •? 


o 

.  a 


H      H 


o 

g 

7 


o 
S 


o 
S 

61 


•?  •?! 


H      H     H     H     E-i     H 


r 


c 

I? 


H      H 


P-i 


p3 


o3 

^3 


CI        cf 


i; 


0 

7 


*t  I 


C3 


83 


•?    T? 


EH      Eh      H      H 


't 


I 


03 

61 


0?        0?        c?  ' 


H      H 


H      H      H 


^         O^        CO 


cJ^      'pdfjLddmj;     ^  © 


H 

g 

-^ 

!25 

Oi 

P 

g 

S 

S 

t3 

hH 

C/2 

CONJUeATIONS. 


439 


c8         e8 


«r     .§      ^ 

*     ?     k 


O 


o 


o 

a 


o 

a 


^ 


be 


13 


o 

a 


(D     r« 


^c3        ^C 


a 
3d 


1 


'd     ^2      -2 


o 

O 

o 

a 

a 

a 

OS 

9. 

9 

^  (2 


.I" 


o 

^c; 

n:3 

^ 

o 

© 

TJ 

08 

ei) 

k 

> 

g 
^ 

i 

m 

H 

W 

C/2 

« 

^ 

Ph 

p^ 

^  13     IS 


06 


^d 


13         c3         c« 
l>        >        ^ 


V^    •£! 


.^     ^ 


e8 
> 


^       ^        ^        ^ 


i 

5 


& 


1 


bfi    *« 


c8 


U)    'd 


13 

^ 

c8 

ce 

IS 

l> 

> 

k 

t> 

> 

u 

^ 

»J 

r-*^ 

© 

© 

H 

H 

H 

•^ 

CO 

'^ 

nd 

i 

•I— 1 

Q^ 

00 

1 

'pdJddduLj 

I 

w 

»' 

k 

>; 

H 

H 

O 

^ 

fe 

P^ 

t3 

» 

•-S 

P^ 

n 

& 
m 

440 


CONJUGATIOJS^S. 


. 

§ 

1 

c 

d 

c 

u 

03 

CO     S 

»2 

.2 

f^ 

61 

*s 

'c 

C 

C 

«P4 

o 

•N 

<D 

© 

.  ► 

k 

> 

> 

> 

*§ 

. 

.2 

0) 

^ 

i^ 

«  ^ 

S 

^co 

^ 

c 

*G 

'c 

a 

^ 

o 

o 

•rt 

<» 

>► 

> 

>- 

> 

oT 

o 

o 

v2 

"S 

^S 

a> 

© 

> 

> 

o 

a 

C 


61 


QQ 

03 

^ 

^C 

g8 

w 

6fi 

-d 

•2 

•2 

s 

0 

'g 

c 

0) 

OJ 

•N 

•N 

>► 

>► 

;> 

> 

wT 

§ 

o 
E 
S 

i 

s 

^ 

'd 

3 

^2 

c 

c 

'S 

*c 

>    t>    ^    f> 


> 


.1" 


o 


>     >     > 


OS 


Si 


•     2         =8 


'd 

G 


c8 

G 


O 


G 


c3  ^ 

>    >  >  > 

I  1 1  i 

'^  I  ^  ^ 


I 

Q 


03 


c8 


'd      2     .2 

G         G         G 


P  ^  ^  Ki 

61  'd  .2  .2 

G  C  G  G 

>  ^  t>  > 


H      H 


G 


1 

1g        TS        ^ 

^        (>}        CO 

h 

'pd^jLddmj 

1 

» 

^ 

t^ 

>► 

H 

H 

O 

<< 

;z5 

03 

u 

m 

5 

0^ 

n 

CONJUGATIONS. 


441 


. 

a 

p 

a 

sS 

03 

03 

a) 

^ 

« 

.2 

> 

> 

V 

.2         =8         c3 

«      ®     .2 
>      >      >■ 


o 

"T 

A 

tn 

.  o 

-  a 

■J 

o 

a 

> 

> 

> 

o 

a 

c8 


O 

a 

03 


«  .in  --S 


;>   t>   >   t> 


.r 


>    >    > 


!> 

H 

Ert 

g 

en 

H 

^ 

03 

A 

-< 

P^ 

PL| 

k     k      f> 


>     >     !> 


c8 


t>      {>      >      > 


H      H      H 


^4^ 


^ 


(^      'pdj^j^ddmx     ^ 


S5 


442 


CONJUGATIONS, 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  VERB  IN  THE  EEFLEXIVE  FORM. 

INFINITIVE. 
Lavarse.  )         To  wash  one's  self. 

PRESENT   PARTICIPLE. 

Lavandose.  |         Washing  one's  self. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Lavadose.  I         Washed  one's  seK. 


INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 


1.  Me  lavo. 

2.  Te  lavas. 

3.  Se  lava. 


I  wash  myself. 


1.  Me  lavaba.      I  was  washing, 

washed,  or 
used  to  wash 
myself. 

2.  Te  lavabas. 

3.  Se  lavaba. 

1.  Me  lave. 

2.  Te  lavaste. 

3.  Se  lavo. 


1.  Nos  lavamos. 

2.  Os  lavais. 
3.'  Se  la  van. 

IMPERFECT. 

1.  Nos  lavabamos. 


PRETERIT. 


I   washed  my- 
self. 


FUTURE. 


I.  Me  lavare.       I  shall  wash 

myself. 
i.  Te  lavaras. 
3.  Se  lavara. 


2.  Os  lavabais. 

3.  Se  lavaban. 

1.  Nos  lavamos. 

2.  Os  lavasteis. 

3.  Se  lavaron. 

1.  Nos  lavaremos. 

2.  Os  lavareis. 

3.  Se  lavaran. 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Lavemonos.    Let  us  wash 
ourselves. 

2.  Lavate.  Wash  thyself.     2.  Lavaos.  Wash    your- 

selves. 

3.  Lavese.  Let  him  wash   3.  Lavense.  Let  them  wash 

himself,  or,  themselves, 

Wash    your-  or,  Wash 

self.  1  yourselves. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


443 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 


1.  Me  lave. 

2.  Te  laves. 

3.  Se  lave. 

1.  Melavaria. 

2.  Te  lavarias. 

3.  Se  lavaria. 

1.  Me  lavara. 

2.  Te  lavaras. 

3.  Se  lavara. 

1.  Me  lavase. 


I  may  wash  my- 
self. 


1.  Nos  lavemos. 


2.  Os  laveis. 

3.  Se  laven. 

IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 
I  would  wash  my-  1.  Nos  lavariamos. 

self. 

2.  Os  lavariais. 

3.  Se  lavarian. 

Second  Termination. 


I  might,  would, 
or  should  wash 
myself. 


1.  Nos  lavaramos. 


2.  Os  lavarais. 

3.  Se  lavaran. 


Third  Termination. 


2.  Te  la  vases. 

3.  Se  lavase. 


I  might,  would, 
or  should  wash 
myself. 


1.  Nos  lavasemos. 


2.  Os  lavaseis. 

3.  Se  lavasen. 


FUTURE. 
1.  Me  lavare.    I  might  or  should  1.  Nos  lavaremos. 


2.  Te  lavares. 

3.  Se  lavare. 


wash  myself. 


2.  Os  lavareis. 

3.  Se  lavaren. 


INFINITIVE.  • 
Ayudarse.  |         To  help  each  other. 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

Ayudandose.  I         Helping  each  other. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Ayudadose.  |         Helped  each  other. 


4:44 


CONJUGATIONS. 


INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-      We  help  each 

mos.  other. 

2.  Os  ayudais. 

3.  Se  ayudan. 

PRETERIT. 

1.  Nos  ayuda-      We  helped 

mos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudasteis. 

3.  Se  ayudaron. 


IMPERFECT. 

1.  Nosayudaba-  We    used    to 

mos.  help     each 

other. 

2.  Os  ayudabais. 

3.  Se  ayudaban. 

FUTURE. 

1.  Nos  ayudare-  We  shall  help 

mos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudareis. 

3.  Se  ayudaran.  • 


IMPERATIVE. 

1.  Ayudemonos.      Let  us  help  each  other. 

2.  Ayudaos. 

3.  Ayiidense. 


Help  each  other. 

Let  them  help  each  other. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 


IMPERF. — First  Termination, 


1.  Nos  ayude-      We  may  help 

mos.  each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudeis. 

3.  Se  ayuden. 

Second  Termination. 

1.  Nos  ayudara-  We  might, 

mos.  would,  or 

should  help 
each  other. 

2.  Os  ayudarais.  • 

3.  Se  ayudaran. 


Nos  ayuda- 
riamos. 

Os  ayudariais. 
Se  ayudarian. 


We  would 
help  each 
other. 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Nos  ayudase-  We  might, 


mos. 


could,  would, 
or  should 
help  each 
other. 


2.  Os  ayudaseis. 

3.  Se  ayudasen. 


FUTURE. 

1.  Nos  ayudaremos.     We  might  or  should  help 


each  other. 


2.  Nos  oyudareis. 

3.  Se  ayudaren. 


CONJUGATIONS, 


445 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

Amanecer.  I  To  grow  light. 


INDICATIVE. 


Present. 
Imperfect. 
Preterit. 
Future. 


Simple  Tenses. 


Amanece. 
Amanecia. 
Amanecio. 
Amanecera. 


It  grows  light. 

It  was  growing  light. 

It  grew  light. 

It  will  grow  light. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Perfect.  Ha  amanecido. 

Past  Perf.  Habia  amanecido. 
Pret.  Perf.  Hubo  amanecido. 
Future  Perf.  Habra  amanecido. 


It  has  grown  light. 
It  had  grown  light. 
It  had  grown  light. 
It  will  have  grown  light 


Amanezca. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I         Let  it  grow  light. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


Present.         Amanezca. 

r  Amaneceria. 
Imperfect,   k  Amaneciera. 

( Amaneciese. 


Future. 


Amaneciere. 


It  may  grow  light. 

c  might,  \ 
It  \  should,  or  >■  grow  light. 

k  would  ) 
It  should  grow  light. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Perfect.  Haya  amanecido. 

r  Habria  j  ama- 
Past  Perf.  <  Hubiera  >     ne- 

( Hubiese  )  cido. 
Future  Perf.  Hubiere  amane- 
cido. 


It  may  have  grown  light. 
C     might  have,     ^  grown 
\  should  have,  or  ^     Hg-ht. 


It 


(      would  have      ) 
It  should  have  grown  light. 


N.  B. — Anochecer,  to  grow  dark,  is  conjugated  in  the  same 
manner,  and  has  the  same  irregularity. 


446 


Nevar. 


CONJUGATIONS, 

I  To  snow. 


Present.  Nieva. 

Imperfect.  Nevaba. 

Preterit.  Nevo. 

Future.  Nevara. 


INDICATIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


It  snows. 
It  was  snowing. 
It  snowed. 
It  will  snow. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Perfect.  Ha  nevado. 

Past  Perf.  Habia  nevado. 
Pret.  Perf.  Hubo  nevado. 
Future  Perf.  Habra  nevado. 


It  has  snowed. 
It  had  snowed. 
It  had  snowed. 
It  will  have  snowed. 


Nieve. 


IMPERATIVE. 

I         Let  it  snow. 


Present.  Nieve. 

r  Nevaria. 
Imperfect.  <  Nevara. 

( Nevase. 
Future.  Nevare. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


It  may  snow. 
.  r     might, 
It  -<  should,  or 

(     would 
It  should  snow. 


snow. 


Compound  Tenses. 


Perfect. 
Past  Perf 
Fut.  Perf. 


Haya  nevado. 
(  Habria    \ 
^  Hubiera  >  nevado. 
'  Hubiese  3 

Hubiere  nevado. 


It  may  have  snowed. 

r  might  have,  \ 
It  •<  should  have,  or  >  snowed. 

V  would  have  ) 
It  should  have  snowed. 


N.  B. — Helar,  to  freeze,  is  conjugated  in  the  same  manner, 
and  has  the  same  tenses  irregular 


Tronar. 


CONJUGATIONS, 

I  To  thunder. 


447 


INDICATIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


Present.  Truena. 

Imperfect.  Tronaba. 

Preterit.  Trono. 

Future.  Tronara. 


It  thunders. 
It  was  thundering. 
It  thundered. 
It  will  thunder. 


Compound  Tenses. 

Perfect.  Ha  tronado. 

Past  Perf.  Habia  tronado. 
Pret.  Perf.  Hubo  tronado. 
Future  Perf.  Habra  tronado. 


It  has  thundered. 
It  had  thundered. 
It  had  thundered. 
It  will  have  thundered. 


Truene. 


IMPERATIVE. 


Let  it  thunder. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Simple  Tenses. 


Present.  Truene. 

c  Tronaria. 
Imperfect.    }  Tronara. 

( Tronase. 
Future.  Tronare. 


It  may  thunder. 

r  might,  \ 
It  ■<  shou\d,  or  >  thunder. 

(  would  ) 
It  should  thunder. 


Perfect.  Haya  tronado. 

c  Habria    j     . 
Past  Perf.    }  Hubiera  > 

( Hubiese  )  ^^^^• 
Future  Perf.  Hubiere  tronado. 


Compound  Tenses. 

It  may  have  thundered. 


r  might  have,  \ 
It  <  should  have,  or  >  thundered. 

'  would  have  j 
It  should  have  thundered. 


N.  B. — Llover,  to  rain,  belongs  to  the  second  conjugation,  and 
changes  also  the  o  into  ue  in  the  same  tenses.  Escarchar,  to 
freeze ;  granizar,  to  hail ;  lloviznar,  to  drizzle ;  and  relampa- 
guear,  to  lighten,  are  all  regular  and  impersonal. 


448  CONJUGATIONS, 

Hacer,  to  he  (when  employed  in  reference  to  time  and  weather). 


INDICATIVE. 

Simple  Tenses. 

Present. 

Hace. 

It  is. 

Imperfect. 

Hacia. 

It  was. 

Preterit. 

Hizo. 

It  was. 

Future. 

Hara. 

It  will  be. 

Compound  Tenses. 

Perfect. 

Ha  hecho. 

It  has  been. 

Past  Perf. 

Habia  hecho. 

It  had  been. 

Pret  Perf. 

Hubo  hecho. 

It  had  been. 

Future  Perf 

'.  Habra  hecho. 

IMPER 

It  will  have  been. 
ATIVE. 

Haga. 

SUBJU> 
Simple 

Let  it  be. 

ACTIVE. 
Tenses. 

Present. 

Haga. 

It  may  be. 

'  Haria.     ) 

c     might,     \ 

Imperfect. 

}  Hiciera.  > 

It }  should,  or  >  be. 

'  Hiciese.  ; 

(     would     ; 

Future. 

Hiciere. 

It  should  be. 

Compound  Tenses. 


Perfect.  Haya  hecho. 

c  Habria  \ 
Past  Perf.    <  Hubiera  >  hecho. 

(  Hubiese  j 
Future  Perf.  Hubiere  hecho. 


It  may  have  been. 

r  might  have,  ) 
It  <  should  have,  or  > 

(  would  have  ) 
It  should  have  been. 


been. 


Haber,  when  signifying  thei^e  to  be. 


Hay. 

Habia. 

Hubo. 
Habra. 


There  is. 
There  are. 
There  was. 
There  were. 
There  will  be. 


T__    ,    ,.,         i  There  has  been. 
Ha  habido.      <  rnu       i         i 

(  There  have  been. 

Habia  habido.  There  had  been. 

Hubo  habido.   There  had  been. 

Habra  habido.  There  shall  have 

been. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


449 


Haya. 

Let  there  be. 

Haya  habido. 

There  may 

Haya. 

There  may  be. 

have  been. 

Habria. 

r  There  might, 

'  There  might, 

Hubiera. 

<      would,  or 

Habria  habido. 

could, 

Hubiese. 

(      should  be. 

Hubiera  habido.  ■ 

would. 

Hubiere. 

There  might  or 

Hubiese  habido. 

or  should 

should  be. 

have  been. 

Hubiere"  habido. 

There  might 
or  should 
have  been. 

DEFECTIVES. 

The  following  verbs  are  found  used  only  in  the  tenses  and 
persons  given  in  the  annexed  examples : 


Placer. 


I 


To  please. 


INDICATIVE. 


Pres.,  3d  per s.  sing.,  Place. 
Imperf.  "  "       Placia. 

Preterit,  ""      Plugo. 


It  pleases. 

It  was  pleasing. 

It  pleased. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Pres.,  3d  per s.  sing.,  Plegue. 

^    -''  i  Pluguiese. 

Future  Perfect, "       Pluguiere. 


SOLER. 


It  may  please. 
It  would  please. 
It  might  please. 
It  should  please. 

To  be  wont. 


INDICATIVE. 


Suelo. 
Sueles. 
Suele. 
Solemos. 
Soleis. 
Suelen. 
31 


PRESENT. 


I  am  wont. 
Thou  art  wont. 
He  is  wont. 
We  are  wont. 
You  are  wont. 
They  are  wont. 


450 


CONJUGATIONS. 


IMPERFECT. 


Solia. 

Solias. 

Solia. 

Soliamos. 

Soliais. 

Soli'an. 

Yacer. 


I  was  wont. 
Thou  wast  wont. 
He  was  wont. 
We  were  wont. 
You  were  wont. 
They  were  wont. 

To  lie  dead. 


No  part  of  this  verb  is  made  use  of  except  the  third  persons  o^ 
the  present  indicative,  yace  and  yacen,  which  ai'e  generally  in- 
scribed on  tombstones. 


CONJUGATION  OF  A  VERB  IN  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

INFINITIVE. 
Ser  perdonado.  ]         To  be  pardoned. 

PRESENT  PARTICIPLE. 

Siendo  perdonado.  I         Being*  pardoned. 

PAST  PARTICIPLE. 

Habiendo  sido  perdonado.      |         Having  been  pardoned. 


INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 

1.  Soy  perdona-  I  am  pardoned. 

do. 

2.  Eres  perdo- 

nado. 

3.  Es  perdonado. 


1.  Somos  perdonados. 

2.  Sois  perdonados. 

3.  Son  perdonados. 


IMPERFECT. 


1.  Era  perdona-   I  was  or  used  to 

do.  be  pardoned. 

2.  Eras  perdonado. 

3.  Era  perdonado. 


1.  Eramos  perdonados. 

2.  Erais  perdonados. 

3.  Eran  perdonados. 


CONJUGATIONS. 


451 


PRETERIT. 


1.  Ful  perdona-    I  was  par- 

do.  doned. 

2.  Fuiste  perdonado. 

3.  Fue  perdonado. 


1.  Fuimos  perdonados. 

2.  Fuisteis  perdonados. 

3.  Fueron  perdonados. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Sere  perdona-  I  shall  be  par- 

do.  doned. 

2.  Seras  perdonado. 

3.  Sera  perdonado. 


1.  Seremos  perdonados. 

2.  Sereis  perdonados. 

3.  Seran  perdonados. 


IMPERATIVE. 
2.  Se  perdonado.  Be  pardoned.   J     2.  Sed  perdonados. 


1.  Sea  perdonado.  I  may  be  par- 

doned. 

2.  Seas  perdonado. 

3.  Sea  perdonado. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

1.  Seamos  perdonados. 


2.  Seals  perdonados. 

3.  Sean  perdonados. 


IMPERFECT. — First  Termination. 


1.  Seria  perdona-  I  would  be 

do.  pardoned. 

2.  Serias  perdonado. 

3.  Seria  perdonado. 


1.  Seriamos  perdonados. 

2.  Serials  perdonados. 

3.  Serian  perdonados. 


Second  Termination. 


1.  Fuera  perdo-    I  might,  could, 

nado.  would,  or 

should  be 
pardoned. 

2.  Fueras  perdonado. 

3.  Fuera  perdonado. 


1.  Fueramos  perdonados. 


2.  Fuerals  perdonados. 

3.  Fueran  perdonados. 


452 


CONJUGATIONS, 


Third  Termination. 


1.  Fueseperdo-    I  might,  could, 

nado.  would,  or 

should  be 
pardoned. 

2.  Fueses  perdonado. 

3.  Fuese  perdonado. 


1.  Fuesemos  perdonados. 


2.  Fueseis  perdonados. 

3.  Fuesen  perdonados. 


FUTURE. 


1.  Fuere  perdo-    I  might  or 

nado.  should  be 

pardoned. 

2.  Fueres  perdonado. 

3.  Fuere  perdonado. 


1.  Fueremos  perdonados. 


2.  Fuereis  perdonados. 

3.  Fueren  perdonados. 


Compound  Tenses. 
INDICATIVE. 


PERFECT. 


He  sido  per- 
donado. 

Has  sido  per- 
donado. 

Ha  sido  per- 
donado. 


1.  Habia     sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Habias    sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habia     sido 

perdonado. 

1.  Hube      sido 

perdonado. 

2.  Hubiste  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubo      sido 

perdonado. 


I    have    been 
pardoned. 


1.  Hemos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Habeis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Han  sido  perdonados. 


PAST  PERFECT. 


I     had     been 
pardoned. 


1.  Habiamos    sido    perdona- 

dos. 

2.  Habiais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Habian  sido  perdonados. 


PRETERIT   PERFECT. 


I     had     been 
pardoned. 


1.  Hubimos  sido  perdonados. 

2.  Hubisteis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubieron  sido  perdonados. 


CONJUGATIONS, 


453 


FUTURE   PERFECT. 

1.  Habre  sido  I  shall  have  been 

perdonado.     pardoned. 

2.  Habras  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habra  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Habremos  sido  perdonados, 

2.  Habreis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Habran  sido  perdonados. 


PERFECT. 

1.  Haya  sido    I  may  have  been 

perdonado.     pardoned. 

2.  Hayas  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Haya  sido 
perdonado. 

PLUPERFECT. — Fivst  Termination. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

)T. 

1.  Hayamos  sido  perdonados* 

2.  Hayais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hayan  sido  perdonados. 


1.  Habria  sido  I  would  have 

perdonado.    been  pardoned. 

2.  Habrias  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Habria  sido 

perdonado. 

Second  Termination. 


1.  Habriamos  sido 
perdonados. 

2.  Habriais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Habrian  sido  perdonados. 


1.  Hubiera  sido  I  might,  could, 

perdonado.    would,  or 

should  have 
been  pardoned. 

2.  Hubieras  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubiera  sido 

perdonado. 

Third  Termination 


1.  Hubieramos  sido 
perdonados. 


2.  Hubierais  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubieran  sido  perdonados. 


1.  Hubiese  sido  I  might,  could, 

perdonado.    would,  or 

should  have 
been  pardoned. 

2.  Hubieses  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubiese  sido 

perdonado. 


1.  Hubiesemos  sido 
perdonados. 


2.  Hubieseis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubiesen  sido  perdonados. 


454 


CONJUGATIONS. 


1.  Hubiere  sido  I  might  or 

perdonado.    should  have 

been  pardoned. 

2.  Hubieres  sido 

perdonado. 

3.  Hubiere  sido 

perdonado. 


FUTURE   PERFECT. 

1.  Hubieremos  sido 
perdonados. 


2.  Hubiereis  sido  perdonados. 

3.  Hubieren  sido  perdonados. 


LIST 

OF  THE  PRINCIPAL  IRREGULAR  VERBS  IN  THE  SPANISH 
LANGUAGE. 


N.  B. — The  figures  placed  after  each  verb  refer  to  the  page  at  which  the  model 

conjugation  for  that  verb  is  to  be  found.    For  instance^  the  number  415 

s/ioAjs  that  Aducir  is  conjugated  like  Conducir, /ownd  at  page  415. 


Absolver,  411. 
Abstraer,  438. 
Acertar,  408. 
Acordar,  410. 
Acostar,  410. 
Acrecentar,  409. 
Adestrar,  409. 
Adherir,  413. 
AdquirJr,  416. 
Advertir,  413. 
Aducir,  415. 
Agorar,  410. 
Alentar,  409. 
Almorzar,  410. 
Amolar,  410. 
Andar,  417. 
Apacentar,  409. 
Apostar,  410. 
Aprobar,  410. 
Apretar,  409. 
Arrecirse,  414. 
Arrendar,  409. 
Arrepentirse,  413. 
Ascender,  412. 
Asentar,  409. 
Asentir,  413. 
Aserrar,  409. 
Asir,  418. 
Asolar,  410. 
Atender,  411. 
Aterrar  (echar  por  tie- 

rra),  409. 
Atestar  (rellenar),  409. 
Atraer,  438. 
Atravesar,  409. 
Aventar,  409, 
Aventarse,  409. 
Avergonzar,  410. 


Bendecir,  419. 


Caber,  420. 
Caer,  438. 
Calentar.  409. 
Cegar,  409. 
Cenir,  414. 
Cerner,  412. 
Cerrar,  409. 
Cocer,  421. 
Colar,  410. 
Colegir,  414. 
Colgar,  410. 
Comenzar,  409. 
Competir,  414. 
Concebir,  414. 
Concertar,  409. 
Condescender,  412. 
Condolerse,  411. 
Conducir,  414. 
Conferir,  413. 
Confesar,  409. 
Conocer,  415. 
Conseguir,  414. 
Consentir,  412. 
Consolar,  410. 
Constrenir,  414. 
Contar,  410. 

Contener,    like    Tener. 
(See  auxiliary  verbs.) 
Contender,  412. 
Contradecir,  423. 
Contraer,  438. 
Controvertir,  413. 
Convertir,  413. 
Corregir,  414. 


Dar,  422. 
Decaer,  438. 
Deoentar,  409. 
Decir,  423. 
Deducir,  415. 


Defender,  412. 
Deferir,  413. 
Degollar,  410. 
Demoler,  411. 
Demostrar,  410. 
Denegar,  409. 
Denostar,  410. 
Derrengar,  409. 
Derretir,  414. 
Desavenir,  440. 
Descender,  412. 
Descollar,  410. 
Descordar,  410. 
Descomedirse,  414. 
Desembrar,  409. 
Deshacer,  427. 
Deshelar,  409. 
Desleir,  414. 
Desolar,  410. 
Desollar,  410. 
Desovar,  410. 
Despedir,  413. 
Despernar,  409. 
Despertar,  409. 
Desplegar,  409. 
Desterrar,  409. 
Desvergonzarse,  410. 
Diferir,  413. 
Digerir,  413. 
Discernir,  412. 
Discordar,  410. 
Disolver,  411. 
Divertir,  413. 
Doler,  411. 
Dormir,  424. 


Elegir,  414. 
Em  bestir,  414. 
Empedrar,  409. 
Empezar,  409. 

455 


456 


LIST  OF  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


Emporcar,  410. 
Encender,  412. 
Encerrar,  409. 
Encomendar,  409. 
Encontrar,  410. 
Encordar,  410. 
Engreirse,  413. 
Engrosar,  410. 
Enmendar,  409. 
Enrodar,  410. 
Ensangrrentar,  409. 
Entender,  412. 
Enterrar,  409. 
Envestir,  414. 
Erguir,  425. 
Errar,  426. 
Escarmentar,  409. 
Escocer,  421. 
Esforzar,  410. 
EsTAR,  400.    (See  auxili- 
ary verbs.) 
Estrenir,  413. 
Expedir,  413. 
Extender,  412. 


Forzar,  410. 
Fregar,  409. 


Gemir,  414. 
Gobernar,  409. 


Haber,  400.  (See  auxili- 
aries  and  imperson- 
als.) 

Hacer,  427. 

Heder,  412. 

Helar,  409. 

Henchir,  413. 

Hender,  412. 

Henir,  413. 

Herir,  413. 

Herrar,  409. 

Hervir,  413. 

Holgar,  410. 

Hollar,  410. 


Impedir,  413. 
Incensar,  409. 
Inducir,  415. 
Inferir,  412. 
Ingerir,  4]  3. 
Inquirir,  416. 
Introducir,  415. 
Invernar,  409. 
Invertir^  413. 
Investir,  413. 
Ir,428. 


Jugar,  429, 


Llover,  411. 


Maldecir,  423. 
Manifestar,  409. 
Mantener,    like   Tkner. 
(See  auxiliary  verbs.) 
Medir,  414. 
Mentar,  409. 
Mentir,  412. 
Merendar,  409. 
Moler,  411. 
Morder,  411. 
Morir,  414. 
Mostrar,  410. 
Mover,  413. 


Negar,  409. 
Nevar,  409. 


Oir,  430. 
Oler,  431. 


Pedir,  413. 
Pensar,  409. 
Perder,  412. 
Pervertir,  413. 
Placer,  449. 
Plegar,  409. 
Poblar,  410. 
Poder,  432. 
Poner,  433. 
Preferir.  413. 
Probar,  410. 
Producir,  415. 
Proferir,  412. 


Quebrar,  409. 
Querer,  434. 


Raer,  438. 
Recomendar,  409. 
Recordar,  410. 
Recostar,  410. 
Reducir,  415. 
Referir,  413. 
Regar,  409. 
Regir,  414. 
Regoldar,  410. 
Reir,  435. 
Remendar,  409. 
Rendir,  414. 
Renovar,  410. 
Reiiir,  414. 
Repetir,  414. 
Requebrar,  410. 
Requerir,  413. 
Rescontrar,  410. 


ResoUar.  410. 
Retentar,  409. 
Reventar,  409. 
Revolcar,  410. 
Rodar,  410. 
Rogar,  410. 


Saber,  436. 
Salir,  437. 
Satisfacer,  427. 
Segar,  409. 
Seguir,  414. 
Sembrar.  409. 
Sentar,  409. 
Sentir.  412. 
Ser.  400.    (See  aux- 
iliary verbs.) 
Servir,  414. 
Serrar,  409. 
Soldar,  410. 
Soler,  449. 
Soltar,  410. 
Solver,  411. 
Sonar,  410. 
Sonar,  410. 
Sosegar,  409. 
Soterrar,  409. 
Sugerir,  412. 


Temblar,  409. 
Tender,  412. 
Tener,  400.    (See 

auxiliary  verbs.) 
Teiiir,  414. 
Tentar,  409. 
Torcer,  411. 
Tostar.  410. 
Traducir,  415. 
Traer,  438. 
Trascender,  412. 
Trascordarse,  410. 
Trasegar,  409. 
Trocar,  410. 
Tronar,  410. 
Tropezar,  409. 


Valer,  439. 
Venir,  440. 
Ver,  441. 
Verier,  412. 
Vestir,  414. 
Volar,  410. 
Volcar,  410. 
Vol  ver,  411. 


Yacer,  450. 
Zaherir,  413. 


VOCABULARIEa 


EXPLANATIONS. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 


Act.  part.,  Active  participle. 

Adj.,  Adjective. 

Adv.,  Adverb. 

Amer.,   American  ;    peculiar    to    the 

Americas. 
Conj.,  Conjunction. 
F.,  Feminine. 
Indef.,  Indefinite. 
Interj.,  Interjection. 
Interr.,  Interrogative. 
Irr.,  Irregular. 


Lat.,  Latin. 

M.,  Masculine. 

Num.,  Numeral, 

Ord.,  Ordinal. 

P.  P.,  Past  Participle. 

Pers.,  Personal. 

Poss.,  Possessive. 

Pres.  Part.,  Present  Participle. 

Pron.,  Pronoun. 

Ref.,  Reflexive. 

S.,  Substantive. 


KEY  TO  PRONUNCIATION. 
(These  rules  apply  solely  to  the  italicized  words  given  as  the  approximate 
pronunciation,  and  placed  after  those  which  follow  the  true  Spanish  orthog- 
raphy. ) 

S,  as  in  command. 

a,  as  in  father. 

a  (Spanish  long  e),  as  in  mate. 

c,  as  in  cart. 

5,  as  in  men. 

e  (Spanish  i),  as  in  be. 

g  and  gh,  as  in  go. 

h,  as  in  host  (the  nearest  approach  which  English  affords  to  the  Spanish 
guttural  g  and  j). 

hr,  used  to  represent  the  Spanish  rr,  and  r  following  n,  is  but  a  makeshift ; 
but  the  best  to  be  obtained. 

k,  takes  the  place  of  the  hard  c  sound  at  the  end  of  syllables. 

o  (invariable),  as  in  lord. 

8,  as  the  double  s  of  pass. 

th  (the  Castilian  sound  of  soft  c  and  of  z),  as  in  thin. 

TH  (the  Spanish  soft  d),  as  in  that. 

u  (invariable),  as  in  rule. 

All  words  containing  soft  c  (i  e.,  c  before  e  and  i),  z  and  II,  are  given 
two  pronunciations ;  the  first,  in  italics,  is  the  correct  Castilian  pronuncia- 
tion ;  the  second  [in  brackets]  is  the  common  pronunciation  in  Spanish- 
America,  but  is  avoided  by  those  wishing  to  speak  Spanish  correctly. 


458 


SPANISH-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


Note. — The  references  are  made  to  the  lessons  of  the  Method  where  each 
word  is  treated. 


A,  (J,  prep.,  at,  to,  in,  and  sign  of  per- 
sonal direct  or  indirect  object.  Voy 
a  Francia,  I  am  going  to  France ;  d 
lo  menos,  at  least ;  d  la  verdad,  in- 
deed ;  a  la  espanola,  in  the  Spanish 
fashion  ;  amo  d  mi  amigo,  I  love  my 
friend.     L.  4. 

Abajo,  d-bd'ho,  adv.,  below,  down, 
down-stairs.     L.  33. 

Abalanzar,  d-bd-ldn-thdr'  CS-bS-iSn-sSr'], 
to  balance,  to  spring,  to  rush,  to 
hurl  one's  self.     L.  57. 

A}ia.iidona.T,  d-bdn-do-ndr' ,  to  abandon, 
to  give  up,  to  leave,  to  desert.    L.  58. 

Abanico  d-bd-iie'-co,  s.  m.,  fan.    L.  52. 

Abierto  d-be^r'-to,  p.  p.  irr.  of  Abrir 
(which  see).     L.  52. 

Abogado,  d-bo-gd'-THo,  s.  m.,  lawyer, 
advocate,  attorney.     L.  49. 

Aborrecible,  d-bo-hrd-the'-bld  [S-bo-hra- 
se'-bla],  ad,].,  hateful.     L.  24. 

Abril,  d-brel\  s.  m.,  April.     L.  24. 

Abrir,  d-brer\  to  open.  Abrir se,  to  be 
opened,  to  bloom  {i.  e.,  to  open  up). 
L.  28. 

Aca,  d-cd\  adv.,  here.  Acd  y  all^,  here 
and  there.     L.  18. 

Acabar,  d-cd-bdr\  to  finish,  to  end. 
Acabar  de,  to  be  or  have  just.  Aca- 
bar con,  to  kill,  to  put  an  end  to,  k) 
destroy.     L.  28. 

Academia,  d-cd-THd'-mea,  s.  f.,  acade- 
my.    L.  51. 

Acaso,  d-cd'-so^  adv.,  perchance,  by 
chance,  perhaps.  Si  acaso,  if  at  all. 
For  si  acaso,  in  case  that.     L.  32. 

Accidente,  dc-the-d^n'-td  [ac-se-d6n'-ta], 
s.  m.,  accident.     L.  40. 

Acoldn,  d-theon'  [ac-seon'],  s.  f.,  action, 
share.     L.  24. 


Acento,  d-tMn'-to  [S-sSn'-to],  s.  m.,  ac- 
cent.    L.  47. 

Aceptar,  dth^p-tar'  [S-sgp-tar'],  to  ac- 
cept.    L.  45. 

Acerca,  d-tMr'-ca  [a-s^r'-ca],  prep,  {acer- 
ca  de,  about).     L.  49. 

Acertar,  d-tMr-tdr'  [a-ser-t2r'],  to  make 
out  or  find  out,  to  hit  the  mark,  to 
succeed,  to  be  right  {i.  e.,  to  conjec- 
ture rightly).     L.  34. 

Acierto,  d-the^r'-to  [S-seer'-to],  s.  m., 
success.  .  L.  52. 

Acomodar,  d-co-mo-ddr\  to  accommo- 
date, to  suit.    L.  31. 

Acompanar,  d-com-pdn-ydr\  to  accom- 
pany.    L.  47. 

Aconsejar,  d-con-sd-hdr',  to  counsel,  to 
advise.     L.  45. 

Aoordar,  d-cor-ddr\  to  accord,  to  agree, 
to  tune.  Acordarse,  to  remember. 
L.  46. 

Acostar,  d-cos-tdr.  to  lay  down.  Acos- 
tarse^  to  lie  down,  to  go  to  bed.  L. 
35. 

Actual,  dc-tMr,  adj.,  present,  actual. 
L.  52. 

Acudir,  d-c4-THer\  to  hasten,  to  run, 
to  turn  (to),  to  refer  (to).     L.  49. 

Acuerdo,  d-cuir'-do^  s.  m.,  agreement, 
accord,  decision  (of  a  court).  L. 
42. 

AcuUa,  d-cul-yd'  CS-cft-ya'],  adv.,  there. 
Aqui  y  aculld,  to  and  fro  ;  here  and 
there.     L.  18. 

Adelantar,  d-dd-ldn-tdr' ,  to  advance,  to 
make  progress.     L.  36. 

Adelante,  d-dd-ldn'-td,  adv.,  forward. 
En  adelante,  henceforward.  Ade- 
lante !  go  on,  go  forward,  go  ahead. 
L.  43.       , 

'  459 


460 


VOCABULARY. 


Ademan,  d-dd-mdn\  s.  m.,  posture,  air, 
gesture.     L.  44. 

Ademas,  a-da-mas,  prep.,  besides;  adv., 
moreover,  besides.     L.  37. 

Adentro,  d-d^n'-tro,  adv.,  in,  within, 
inside.     L.  47. 

Adivinar,  a-de-ve-ndr\  to  guess,  to  di- 
vine.    L.  46. 

Adjetivo,  dd-hd-te'vo^  s.  m.,  adjective. 
L.  43. 

Amirable,  <?-me-ra'-6?a, adj.,  admirable, 
wonderful.     L.  51. 

Admiracion,  &d-me-rd-theon'  [ad-me-rS- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  admiration,  wonder.  L. 
51. 

Admirar,  dd-me-rdr\  to  admire,  to  won- 
der at.     L.  61. 

Adonde,  d-don'-dd  (see  Donde).     L.  9. 

Adquirir,  dd-]ce-rer\to  acquire.    L.  42. 

Adverbial,  dd-v^r-bedl\a.dj.,  adverbial. 
L.  50. 

Adverbio,  dd-v^r'-beo^  s.  m.,  adverb. 
L.  43. 

Advertir,  dd-v^r-t€r\  to  advise,  to  men- 
tion, to  point  out,  to  warn,  to  observe. 
L.  43. 

Aereo,  dd'-rdo,  adj.,  aerial.     L.  48. 

Afectacidn,<i-/^fc-<<t-</ieow'[5-f?k-ta-seon'], 
s.  f.,  affectation.     L.  24. 

Afectar,  d-f^k-tdr',  to  affect.    L.  45. 

Afeitar,  d-fde-tdr\  to  shave,  to  paint 
(the  face).     L.  33. 

Afirmacidn,  d-fer-md-theon'  [2-fer-in5- 
s6on'],  s.  f.,  affirmation.     L.  24. 

Afirmar,  drfer-mdr\  to  affirm,  to  make 
firm,  to  strengthen,     L.  48. 

Afligir,  d-jle-her\  to  afflict.     L.  48. 

Afortunado,  d-for-t'd-nd'-THO^  adj.,  for- 
tunate.    L.  63. 

Ageno,  (!-/ia'-720,  adj.,  foreign,  belong- 
ing to  others.     L.  63. 

Agitacidn,  d-he-td-theon'  [a-h6-t«-86on'], 
s.  f.,  agitation.     L.  24. 

Agradar,  dgrd-THdr\  to  please.    L.  53. 

Agradecer,  d-grd-THd-tMr'  [S-grS-rnS- 
eer],  to  thank,  to  be  obliged  to,  to  be 
grateful  for.     L.  39. 

Agreg'ar,  d-grd-gdr\  to  add  to,  to  unite. 
L.  49. 

Agrio,  ^'-gfreo,  adj.,  sour.     L.  22. 

Agua,  a'-gita,  s.  f.,  water.    L.  7. 

Ag'nantar,  a-guan-tdr\  to  support,  to 
bear,  to  put  up  with,  to  bear  with. 
L.  53. 

Aguardiente,  a-gu^r-de^n'-td,  s.  m., 
brandy,  rum.     L.  50. 

Agudeza,  d-gu-THd'-tha  [5-g<i-THa'-sa],  s. 
f.,  wit,  or  witty  saying.     L.  57. 

AgUero,  Q-gud'-ro^  s.  m.,  augury,  omen. 
L.  45. 

Ahora,  ao'ra,  adv.,  now.     L.  27. 

Aire,  Q-erd,  s.  m.,  air.    L.  46. 


Ajedrez,  d-hd-drdth'  [S-ha-drSs'l,  s.  m., 

chess.     L.  42. 
Ala,  d'-la^  s.  f.,  wing.     L.  58. 
Alabanza,  d-ld-bdn'-thg,  [a-lS-ban'-sa],  s. 

f.,  praise.     L.  53. 
Alarde,  dlar'-dd,  s.  m.     Hacer  alarde^ 

to  boast.     L.  63. 
Alberto.  dlMr'-to,  s.  m. ,  Albert.    L.  38. 
Alcance,  dl-cdn'-thd   [ai-cSn'-sa],  s.   m., 

reach.     L.  53. 
Alcanzar,    dl-cdn-thdr'    [Si-cSn-sSr'],  to 

reach,  to  overtake,  to  take  up  with, 

to  catch.     L.  53. 
Alegrar,  d-ld-grdr\  to  give  joy,  to  make 

glad.     L.  37. 
Alegre,  d-ld'-grd,  adj.,  joyful,    glad, 

merry.     L.  21. 
Alejandro,  d-ldhdn'-dro,  s.  m.,  Alex- 
ander.    L.  3, 
Aleli,  d-ld-le\  s.  m.,  gilliflower.     L.  9. 
Aleman,  d-ld-mdn\  s.  m.,  German  (lan- 
guage).   L.  2. 
Aleman,  d-ld-mdn\ s.  m.,  German;  adj., 

German.    L.  3. 
Alemania,  d-ld-md'-neQ^s.  f.,  Germany. 

L.  9. 
Alfiler,  dl-fe-ldr\  s.  m.  and  f.,  pin.    L. 

46. 
Algrazara,  ^Z-gf^-</i^'-rg  [5i-g2-8a'-ra],  s.  f., 

shouts  of  joy.     L.  54. 
Algoddn,  ^Z-gfo-r^on',  s.  m.,  cotton.    L. 

5. 
Alguien.  dl'-ghe^n,  pron.,   somebody, 

anybody,  some  one,  any  one.    L.  11. 
Alguno,  dl-gu'-no,  adj.,  some.     L.  11. 
Algxino,  dl-gu'-no,  pron.  ind.  and  adj., 

somebody,  some  one,  anybody,  any 

one,  some.     L.  11. 
Alhaja,  d-ld'-kg,  s.  f.,  jewel.    L.  57. 
Alimentar,  d-le-mhi-tdr\  to  feed.    Ali- 

mentarse  de  esperanzas,   to  live  on 

hoi)e.     L.  53. 
Alimento,  dle-m^n'-to^  s.  m.,  food.    L. 

49. 
Alia,  dl-yd'  [S-yS'],  adv.,  there,  yonder. 

L.  18. 
Alma,  dl'-ma,  s.  f.,  soul.     L.  47. 
Almacen,  dl-md-thdn'  [al-ma-san'],  s.  m., 

store,  warehouse.     L.  62. 
Almorzar,  dlmor-thdr'  [Si-mor-sSr'],  to 

breakfast,  to  take  breakfast.     L.  35. 
Almuerzo,  dl-mu^r'-tho  [ai-mfigr'-so],  s. 

m.,  breakfast.     L.  55. 
Alrededor,       dl-rd-THd-THor\      adv., 

around.     L.  56. 
Alteracion, dl-tdrd-theon'  LSl-ta-rS-seon'], 

s.  f.,  alteration.     L.  56. 
Alto,  dl'-to,  adj.,  high,  tall.     L.  21. 
Altura,  dlM'-ra,  s.  f.,  height.     L.  37. 
Alumbrar,  d-ldm-brdr',  to  light.     L.  64. 
Amable,  d-md'-bld,  adj.,  amiable,  lova- 
ble.   L.  47. 


rOCABULART. 


461 


Amador,  <i-md-THor\  s.  m.,  lover.  L. 
49. 

Amanecer,  d-md-nd-tMr'  [a-ma-na-ser'],  to 
become  morning,  to  dawn,  to  be  in  a 
place  at  daybreak.     L.  30. 

Amante,  d-mdn'-td,  act.  p.  and  s.,  lov- 
ing, lover,  sweetheart.     L.  38. 

Amar,  d-mdr',  to  love.     L.  21. 

Amarillo,  d-md-rel'-yo  [S-ma-re'-yo],adj., 
yellow.     L.  54. 

Ambicidn,  dm-be-theon'  CSm-bg-sgon'],  s. 
f.,  ambition.     L.  60. 

Ambos,  dm' -bos,  pron.,  both.     L.  28. 

Amenasar,  d-md-nd-sdr\  to  menace,  to 
threaten.     L.  59. 

Amenidad,  d-mdne-THdTH\  s.  f.,  amen- 
ity.    L.  32. 

Amigra,  d-me'-ga,  s.  f.,  friend.    L.  13. 

Amigro,  d-me'-go,  s.  m.,  friend.     L.  13. 

Amis  tad,  d-mes-tdTH',  s.  f.,  friendship. 
L.  61. 

Amor,  d-mor\  s.  m.,  love.     L.  45. 

Amplio,  dm'-pleo,  adj.,  ample.     L.  52. 

Ampo,  dm'-po,  s.  m.,  whiteness  (of 
snow).     L.  61. 

Aiialitioo,^-n^-ie'-<e-co,  adj.,  analytical. 
L.  35. 

Anaranjado,  d-ndrdng-hd'-THO^  adj., 
orange  (color).    L.  54. 

Ancho,  dn'-cho,  adj.,  wide,  broad. 
L.  47. 

Anchura,  dn-chU'-rf^^  s.  f.,  width, 
breadth.     L.  61. 

Anciano,  dn-thed'-no  [5n-8S2'-no],  adj. 
and  s.,  old,  old  man.    L.  48. 

Andar,  dn-ddr\  to  walk,  to  go.     L.  44. 

An^cdota,  d-nW -do-tg,,  s.  f,  anecdote. 
L.  44. 

Angel,  g,ng'-Ml,  s.  m.,  angel.    L.  60. 

Ang-ulo,  dn'-gu-lo^  s.  m  ,  angle.  En 
dngulos  rectos,  at  right  angles.  L. 
60. 

Animal, d-7ie-mdr ,  s. m.,  animal.    L.  62. 

Animar,  d-nemdr',  to  animate,  to  en- 
courage.   L.  38. 

Anoche,  d-no'-chd,  adv.,  last  night.  L. 
28. 

Anochecer,  d-no-chd-tMr'  [^-no-cha-sSr'], 
to  become  night,  to  be  here  or  there 
at  nightfall.     L.  30. 

Antagonista,  dn-tdgo-yies'-tg,,  s. m.,  an- 
tagonist.    L.  36. 

Ante,  dn'-td,  prep.,  before,  in  presence 
of.     L.  16. 

Anteayer,  dn-tdd-y^r\  adv.,  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday.     L.  16. 

Antecedente,  dn-td-thd-dPn' -td  [an-ta-sa- 
d?n'-ta],  s,  m.,  antecedent.     L.  61. 

Antenoche,  dn-td-no'-chd,  the  night  be- 
fore last.     L.  23. 

Anteojo,  dn-tdo'-ho,  s.  m.,  eye-glass. 
Anteojos,  spectacles.     L.  53. 


Antepeniiltimo,  dn-td-pd-nuV  -te-mo,  adj* 

and  s.  m.,   antepenultimate,   ante- 
penult. 
Anterior,   dn-td-reor\  adj.,  preceding, 

foregoing,  previous,  former.    L.  49. 
Antes,  dn'-tes,  prep.    Antes  de,  before. 

L.  42. 
Antes,  dn'-t^s,  9,dy.,  rather,  first,  sooner 

than,  but.     L.  16. 
Antepuesto,  dn-td-puds'-to,  p.  p.,  pre- 
fixed ;  s.  prefix.     L.  52. 
Antiguo,  dn-te'-guo,  adj.,  ancient,  old. 

L.  52. 
Antisocial,  dn-te-so-thedV  Can-te-so-seal'], 

adj.,  antisocial.     L.  50. 
Antojo,  dn-to'-ho,  s.  m.,  whim,  long- 

mg.     L.  63. 
Anadir,  dn-yd-THer\  to  add  to.    L.  49. 
Anil,  dn-yeV,  s.  m.,  indigo  (color).    L. 

54. 
Aio,  dn'-yo,  s.  m.,  year.     L.  16. 
Apariencia,  d-pd-re^n'-thea  [a-pS-rggn'- 

sea],  s.  f.,  appearance.     L.  53. 
Apeg-ar,  d-pd-gdr',  to  stick,  to  attach, 

to  paste,  to  adhere.     L.  54. 
Apenas,  d-pd'-nds,  adv., scarcely,  hard- 
ly.   L.  29. 
Aplicar,  d-ple-cdr\  to  apply.     L.  62. 
Apostar,  d-pos-tdr',  to  bet,  to  wager. 

L.  63. 
Apoyar,  d-po-ydr',  to  support,  to  lean, 

to  protect,  to  aid.     L.  50. 
Apreciable,    d-prd-thed'-bld   [S-pra-seS'- 

bia],  adj.,  appreciable,  respected.    L. 

56. 
Apremiar,  d-prd-medr',  to  press,  to  urge. 

L.  45. 
Aprender,  d-pr^n-d^r' ,  to  learn.     L.  6. 
Apretar,  d-prd-tdr\  to  tighten,  to  press, 

to  urge.    L.  65. 
Aprisa,  d-pre'-sa,  adv.,  quickly.     L.  6. 
Aprobacion,    d-pro-bd-theon'    [a-pro-bS- 

seon'],  s.  f.,  approbation.     L.  24. 
Aprobar,   d-pro-bdr',  to  approve.    L. 

35. 
Aprovechar,  d-pro  vd-chdr' ,  to  progress, 

to  improve,  to  make  the  most  of.    L. 

52. 
Aproximar,  d-proTc-se-mdr' ,  to  approxi- 
mate, to  approach.     L.  44. 
Apto,  dp' -to,  adj.,  apt,  fit.     L.  51. 
Apurado,  d-pu-rd'-THO,  adj . ,  straitened, 

embarrassed.     L.  44. 
Aquel,  d-MV,  pron.,  that  one,  he,  the 

former.     L.  18. 
Aqui,  d-M',  adv.,  here.^    L.  18. 
Arbol,  ar'-bol,  s.  m.,  tree.     L.  49. 
Arboleda,   cir-bo-ld' -tslq^  s.  f.,  grove. 

L.  49. 
Arenal,  d-rd-ndV,  s.  m.,  sandy  ground. 

1..  49. 
Arguir,  Qr-guer',  to  argue.     L.  34. 


462 


VOCABULARY, 


Aristocracia,  H-res-fo-crd-the'a  [a-res-to- 
crS-se-'a],  s.  f.,  aristocracy.     L.  60. 

Aristooratico,  d-res-to-crd'-te-co,  adj., 
aristocrat.     L.  35. 

Aritmetioa,  &-ret-me'-te-ca,  s.  f.,  arith- 
metic.    L.  21. 

Armar,  ar-mdr',  to  arm.    L.  59. 

Arpa,  ar'-pQ,  s.  f.,  harp.     L.  15. 

Arquitecto,  ar-ke-Uk'-tOj  s.  m.,  archi- 
tect.    L.  48. 

Arquitectura,  ar-he-t^k-tu'-ra,  s.  f.,  ar- 
chitecture.   L.  51. 

Arreglar,  a-hrd-gldr',  to  arrange,  to 
regulate,  to  settle.    L.  60. 

Arrepentirse,  d-hrd-pen-ter'-sd,  to  re- 
pent.   L.  38. 

Arrestar,  d-hrh-tdr\  to  arrest.    L.  37. 

Arriba,  ^7ire'-6a, adv., above,  upstairs. 
L.  33. 

Arte,  ar'-td,  s,  m.  and  f.,  art.     L.  31. 

Articuio,  (ir-te'-cu-lo,  s.  m.,  article.  L. 
43. 

Artificial,  ar-te-fe-ihedV  [ar-te-fg-8521'], 
adj.,  artificial.     L.  49. 

Artista,  (ir-tes-tg,,  s.  m.,  artist.     L.  36. 

Asador,  d-sdTHor\  s. m.,spit  (for  roast- 
ing).    L.  65. 

Ascender,  ds-thH-d^r'  [S-85n-d?r'],  to 
ascend,  to  go  up,  to  mount.     L.  37. 

Ascension,  ds-thtn-seon'  [S-sen-seon'J,  s. 
f.,  ascension.     L.  49. 

Asegurar,  ^sa-ptt-r^r',  to  secure,  to  as- 
sure.   L.  38. 

Asesino,  d-sd-se'-no,  s.  m. ,  assassin.  L. 
59. 

Asi,  d-se\  adv.,  so,  thus.  L.  20.  Asi 
que,  so  that,  as  soon  as.  L.  29.  Asi 
asi,  so  so.     L.  39. 

Asiento,  d-sehi'-to,  s.  m.,  seat.    L.  39. 

Asir,  d-ser',  to  seize,  to  make  the  most 
of.     L.  42. 

Asno,  ds'-no,  s.  m.,  ass.     L.  61. 

Asombro,  ^.som-&ro,s.m., amazement. 
L.  46. 

Astronomia,  ds-tro  no-me'-dy  s.  f.,  as- 
tronomy.    L.  49. 

Atencidn,  d-thi-theon'  [3-t?n-s5on'],  s.  f., 
attention.     L.  56. 

Atender,  d-Un-der  .  to  attend.    L.  37. 

Atlantico,  dt-ldn'-te-co,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
Atlantic.     L.  46. 

Atolladero,  d-toI-yd-THd'-ro  rs-to-ya- 
THa'-ro],  s.  m.,  difficulty.     L.  60. 

Atraccidn,  d-trdk-theon'  [a-trak-se-on'], 
s.  f.,  attractiqn.     L.  24. 

Atras,  drtrds\  adv.,  behind,  ago.  L. 
58. 

Atreverse,  d-trd-vtr'-sd,  to  dare.  L.  | 
48. 

Atrevimiento,  d-trd-ve-mehfi'-to.  s,  m., 
daring,  hardihood,  assurance.  L. 
64. 


Atrocidad,  d-tro-the-THdrn'  [S-tro-sg^ 
thSth],  s.  f.,  atrocity.     L.  36. 

Atropellar,  d-tro-pdl-ydr'  [a-tro-pa-yar], 
to  trample,  to  run  over.     L.  51. 

Anllar,  aul-ydr'  [a(i-ySr'],  to  howl.  L. 
44. 

Aumento,  qu-mhi'-to,  s.  m.,  augment, 
augmentation,  increase.     L.  59. 

Aun,  Qun\  adv.,  still,  yet.    L.  25. 

Annque,  aun'-kd,  adv.,  although, 
though.     L.  36. 

Ausencia,  Q,vrS(^n' -theQ,  [afi-sen'-se^],  s.  f., 
absence.     L.  35. 

Ausente,  Qu-sH'-td,  adj.,  absent.  L. 
59. 

Alitor,  gu-tor',s.  m.,  author.     L.  47. 

Autoridad,  g,u-to-re-THdTH' ,  s.  f.,  au- 
thority,   p.  59. 

Auxiliar,  auk-se-ledr' ,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
auxiliary.     L.  57. 

Auxiliar,  auk-se-ledr' ,  to  help,  to  aid. 
L.  62. 

Auzilio,  ailk-se'-leo,  s.  m.,  help,  assist- 
ance.    L.  55. 

Avenida,  d-vd-ne'-THQ,  s.  f.,  avenue. 
L.  15. 

Aventurarse,  d-vht-tHirrdr'-sd,  to  ven- 
ture.   L.  65. 

Avisar,  d-ve-sdr',  to  let  know,  to  in- 
form.   L.  45. 

Ay,  Q-e,  intj.,  alas.     L.  46. 

Ayer,  5-2/?r',  adv.,  yesterday.    L.  16. 

Ayudar,  d-yu-THdr\  to  aid,  assist,  to 
help.     L.  38. 

Azul,  d-thul'  [2-861'],  adj.,  blue     L.  54. 

Bailar,  hae-ldr\  to  dance.    L.  28. 
Baile,  ba'-e-ld,  s.  m. ,  dance,  ball.     L.  30. 
Bajar,  bd-hdr\  to  go  or  come  down,  to 

lower.     L.  53. 
Btyo,  bd'-hOy  adj.,  low,  base,  mean.    L. 

51. 
Banco,  bdn'-co,  s.  m,,  bank.    L.  31. 
Bandera,  bdn-dd'-rg,.  s.  f.,  flag,  stand- 
ard, banner.     L.  58. 
Banar,65w-yar',  to  bathe.     L.  49. 
Barato,  bd-hrd'-to,  adj.,  cheap.     L.  13. 
Barba.  bar'-ba,  s.  f.,  chin, beard.    L.  59. 
Barberia,  bar-bd-re'-a,   s.  f.,  barber's 

shop.     L.  50. 
Barbero,  bar-bd'-ro,  s.  m.,  barber.     L. 

33. 
Barbilampino,  bdr-be-ldm-pen'-yo,  adj., 

thin  bearded.     L.  50. 
Barco,  bar'-co,  s.  m.,  barque,  vessel, 

boat.     L.  60. 
Barbn,  bd-ron\  s.  m.,  baron.     L.  51. 
Barrer,  ba-hrer',  to  sweep.     L.  24.  """^ 
Basta,  bds'-ta,  intj.,  enough  !    L.  3C. 
Bastante,  &as-<an'-^a,  ad  v.,  enough.    L. 

25. 
Bastar,  bds-tdr',  to  be  enough.    L.  30. 


VOCABULARY. 


463 


Bastdn,  hds-ton',  s.  m.,  walking-cane. 
L.  10. 

Baza,  bd'-tha  [ba'-sa],  s.  f.,  trick  (at 
cards).  No  dejar  meter  6a2;a,  not  to 
let  one  put  in  a  single  word.    L.  63. 

Bebedor,  bd-hd-THor',  s.  m.,  tippler, 
toper,  drinker.     L.  65. 

Beber,  bd-ber',  to  drink.  Beber  los  vien- 
tos  por  algo,  to  solicit  with  much 
eagerness,  to  desire  ardently.  Beber 
como  una  cuba,  to  drink  like  a  fish. 
L.  7. 

Belleza,  bM-yd'-th^  [bS-ya'-sa],  s.  f., 
beauty.     L.  51. 

Bello,  bW-yo  [b6'-yo],  adj.,  beautiful, 
handsome,  fine.     L.  31. 

Bendecir,  bH-dd-ther'  LbSn-da-ser'],  to 
bless.    L.  41. 

Bendito,  b^n-de'-to,  adj.,  blessed.  L. 
52. 

Besar,  bd-sdr',  to  kiss.    L.  39. 

Beso,  bd'-so,  s.  m.,  kiss.    L.  39. 

Biblioteca,  be-bleo-td'-ca,  s.  f.,  library. 
L.  52. 

Bien,  be^n',  adv.,  well.  L.  3.  Est^ 
bien,  very  well,  all  right.  No  bien, 
scarcely,  no  sooner.     L.  29. 

Bienhechor,  be^n-d-chor' ,  s.  m.,  bene- 
factor.   L.  50. 

Bienvenida,  beM-vd-ne'-THn^,  s.  f.,  wel- 
come.   L.  45. 

Billete,  bel-yd'-td  [bg-yS'-ts],  s.  m.,  note, 
bill,  bank-note.     L.  7. 

Blanoa,  bldn'-cci,  s.  f.  Encontrarse  sin 
blanca,  to  find  one's  self  without  a 
cent.     L.  64. 

Blanco,  bldn'-co,  adj.,  white.    L.  58. 

Blanco,  bl&n'-co,  s.  m.,  mark,  target, 
bull's-eye.  Quedarse  en  bianco,  to 
be  left  in  the  lurch. 

Bledo,  bld'-THo,  s.  m.,  straw.  No  se  me 
da  un  bledo,  I  don't  care  a  straw.  L. 
63. 

Boca,  bo'-CQ,  s.  f.,  mouth.  L.  44.  Ha- 
blar  por  boca  de  ganso,  to  repeat 
what  another  has  said.     L.  63. 

Bocado,  bo-cd'-THo,  s.  m.,  mouthful, 
bite.  Bocado  sin  hueso,  a  sinecure. 
L.  61. 

Bolsa,  bol'-sq,  s.  f.,  purse.    L.  45. 

Bolsillo,  boi-seV-yo  [bol-se'-yo],  s.  m., 
pocket,  purse.     L.  47. 

Bondad,  bon-d&TH',  s.  f.,  goodness, 
kindness.     L.  39. 

Bondadoso,  bon-dd-Tuo'-so,  adj.,  good, 
kind.     L.  54. 

Bonito,  bo-ne'-to,  adj.,  pretty.     L.  58. 

Borboton,  bor-bo-ton',  d  borbotones,  bub- 
bling, hurriedly,  confusedly.     L.  63. 

Bosque,  bos' -led,  s.  m.,  woodland.  L. 
40. 

Bota,  bo'-tQ,  s.  f.,  boot.     L.  10. 


Botica,  bo-te'-ca,  s.  f.,  drug-store.    L. 

62. 
Boticario,  bo-te-cd'-reo,  s.  m.,  druggist. 

L.  49. 
Bravata,    brd-vd'-ta,    s.    f.,    bravado. 

Echar  bravatas,  to  boast.     L.  62. 
Bravo,  brd'-vo,  adj.,  daring,  fierce.    L. 

44. 
Bravo  !  brd'-vo,  intj.,  bravo  !  L.  48. 
Brazo,  brd'-tho  [bra'-so],  s.  m.,  arm.    L. 

44. 
Bribdn,  bre-bon',  s.  m.,  scoundrel,  ras- 
cal.    L.  32. 
Brnto,  bru'-to,  s.  m.,  brute,  ignorant 

person.     L.  48. 
Bruto,   bru'-to,   adj.,   brutish,   crude, 

ignorant.     L.  48. 
Bueno,  bud' -no,  adj.,  good.     L.  7.    De 

buenas  i,  primeras,  all  at  once.    L.  62. 
Buey,  bud'-e,  s.  m.,  ox.     L.  58. 
Bula,  bu'-la,  s.  f.   Tener  bula  para  todo, 

to  act  according  to  one's  fancy.  L.  64. 
Bulla,  bul'-yOf  [bfi'-ya],  s.  f.,  noise.     Me- 
ter bulla,  to  make  a  noise.     L.  63. 
BuUicio,  bul-ye'-theo  Lbfi-ye'-seoJ,  s.  m., 

bustle,  noise,  uproar.     L.  64. 
Bulto,  bid' -to,  s.  m.,  bundle.     Hablar 

a  bulto^  to  talk  at  random.     L.  63. 
Burla,  bur'-la,  s.  f.,  jest,  joke.     Hablar 

d  burlas,  to  speak  in  jest.     L.  33. 
Burlar,  bur-ldr',  to  jest.     Burlame  de 

alguno,  to  make  fun  of,  to  laugh  at 

any  one.     Burla  burlando,  half  jest, 

half  earnest.    L.  33. 
Burldn,  bur-Ion',   s.   m.,   wag,  jester. 

L.  44. 
Busca,  bus'-CQ,  s.  f.,  search.     En  btisca 

de,  in  search  of.     L.  55. 
Buscar,  bus-cdr',  to  search,  to  look  for. 

L.  4.     Buscar  cinco  pies  al  gato,  to 

pick  a  quarrel.     L.  4. 

Caballejo,  cd-bdl-yd'-ho  [cjC-bS-ya'-hb],  s. 
m.,  (dim.  of  Caballo),  nag,  miser- 
able horse.     L.  49. 

Caballero,  cd-bdl-yd'-ro  [cS-bS-ya'-ro],  s. 
m.,  sir,  gentleman,  knight,  horse- 
man.    L.  2. 

Caballo,  cd-bdl'-yo  [ca-ba'-yo],  s.  m., 
horse.     L.  4. 

Cabello,  cd-bW-yo  [cS-bS'-yo],  s.  m.,  hair. 
L.  33.  Tomar  la  ocasion  por  los  ca- 
bellos,  to  profit  by  the  occasion,  to 
take  time  by  the  forelock.     L.  61. 

Caber,  cd-b^r',  to  hold,  to  contain.  No 
caber  de  gozo,  to  be  overjoyed. 
i  Puede  cciber  en  tu  imaginacion  ? 
Can  such  a  thing  enter  into  your 
imagination  ?  No  cabe  md,s,  nothing 
more  can  be  desired.    L.  42. 

Cabeza,  cd-bd'-tha  [cS-ba-sa'],s.  f.,  head. 
L.  28. 


464 


VOCABULARY. 


Cable,  cd'-hli,  s.  m.,  cable.    L.  46. 
Cabo,  cd'-bo,  s.  m.,  end.     Al  caho,  at 

last.     L.  54. 
Cada,  c&'-THa,  pron. ,  each,  every.    Cada 

vez,  every  time.     Cada  una,  each, 

every  one.     L.  43. 
Caer,  cd-iir',  to  fall,  to  see,  to  under- 
stand, to  be,  to  fall  due.    L.  41.    Caer 

de  pies,  to  fall  on  one's  feet.    Ya  cai- 

go  en  ello,  now  I  see,  understand. 

Las  ventanas  caeyi  i>  la  plaza,  the 

windows  look  on  the  square.    L.  59. 
Cafe,  cd-fd',  s.  m.,  coffee,  coffee-house. 

L.  14. 
Caja,  cd'-ha,  s.  f.,  box,  case,  cash  (com- 
mercial).   L.  60. 
Cal,  cdl,  s.  f.,  lime.     De  cal  y  canto,  of 

solid  masonry.     L.  48. 
Calabaza,  cd-ld-bd'-tha  [cS-iS-bS'-sa],  s.  f., 

pumpkin.     Dar  calabaza^,   to    give 

the  mitten.     L.  61. 
Calcular,  cM-cH-ldr',  to  calculate.    L. 

51. 
Caldo,  cdl'-do,  s.  m.,  broth.     L.  44. 
Calducho,   cdl-dii'-cho,   s.  m.,  thin  or 

poor  broth.     L.  44. 
Calentar,  cd-lH-tdr\  to  heat,  to  warm. 

L.  34. 
Calentura,  cd-lH-tu'-rQ,  s.  f.,  fever.    L. 

60. 
Caliente,  cd-leH'-td,  adj.,  hot,  warm. 

L.  44. 
Callado,    cdl-yd'-THo  [cS-yS'-THo],  adj., 

silent,  taciturn.     L.  20. 
Callar,  cdl-ydr'  [cS-ySr'],  to  keep  silence. 

Callar  su  pico,  to  hold  one's  tongne, 

to  say  nothing.     L.  42. 
Calle,  cdl'-yd  [ca-y5],  s.  f.,  street.     De- 
jar  ^  uno  en  la  calle,  to  strip  one  of 

his  all.     L.  15. 
Calor,  cd-lor',  s.  m.,  heat,  warmth.    L. 

25. 
Calva,  cdl'-va,  s.  f.,  baldness,  bald  place. 

L.  45. 
Calvo,  cdl'-vo,  adj.,  bald.     L.  45. 
Calza,  cdl'-iha  [cSi'-sal.  s.  f.,  stockings. 

Tomar  las  cahasde  Villadiego,  to 

make  off,  to  make  a  hurried  escai)e. 

L.  50. 
Cama,  cd'-md,  s.  f . ,  bed.    Guardar  cama, 

to  be  confined  to  the  bed.     L.  14. 
Cambiar,  cdm  bedr',  to  change.     L.  59. 
Cambio,  cdm'-beo,  s.  m.,  change.    L. 

46. 
Camino,  cd-me'-no,  s.  m.,  way,  road. 

L.  60. 
Camisa,  cd-me'-sa,  s.  f.,  shirt.    Meterse 

en  camisa  de  once  varas,  to  interfere 

in  the  affairs  of  others.     L.  46,  | 

Campo,  cdm'-po,  s.  m.,  field,  country, 

camp.     Dejar  el  campo  libre,  to  leave  ; 

the  field  to  one's  competitors.    L.  59.  ( 


Canasto,  cdrnds'-to,  s.  m.,  basket.    L, 

58.^ 
Candidamente,  cdn'-de-THd-m^n-td,  adv., 

candidly.     L.  48. 
Cansado,  cdn-sd'-THO,  adj.,  tired,  tire- 
some.    Estar  cansado,  to  be  tired. 

Ser  cansado,  to  be  tiresome.     L.  20. 
Cansar,  cdn-sdr',  to  tire,  to  fatigue. 

L.  33. 
Cantar,  cdn-tdr',  to  sing.    L.  15. 
Cantatriz,   cdn-td-treth'  [can-ta-tres'],  s. 

f.,  singer  (female).     L.  15. 
Ca,ntida,d.,  cdn-te-THdTH' ,  s.  f.,  quantity, 

sum.     L.  60. 
Canto,  cdn'-to,  s.m.,  singing,  cut  stone. 

L.  48. 
Cantor,  cdn-tor',  s.  m.,  singer.     L.  15. 
Canon,  cdn-yon',  s.  m.,  cannon  or  deep 

ravine.     L.  44. 
Canonazo,  cdn-yo-nd'-tho  [can-yo-nS'-so], 

s.  m.,  cannon  shot,  gun  shot.    L.44. 
Capa,  cd'-pa,  s.  f.,  cloak.     Andar  de 

capa  caida,  to  be  crestfallen.    L.  60. 
Capacidad,    cd-pd-the-THdrn'    [ca-pa-se- 

thSth'],  s.   f.,   capacity,  capability. 

L.  36. 
Capaz,  cd-pdth'  [c5-p&'],  adj.,  capable. 

L.  59. 
Capitan,  cd-pe-tdn',  s.  m.,  captain.    L. 

52. 
Capricho,  ed-pre'-cho,  s.  m.,  whim,  fan- 
cy, caprice.     L.  60. 
Cara,  c4'-ra,  s.  f.,  face      Dar  d,  alguno 

con  la  puerta  en  la  cara,  to  shut  the 

door  in  one's  face.     L.  60. 
Caracter,  cd-rdk'-t^r  (ifr.  plural,  carac- 

teres),  s.  m.,  character,  disposition. 

L.  40. 
Caramba !  cd-rdm,'-ba,   intj.,   strange! 

zounds  !  confound  it !    L.  65. 
Carcajada,  car-ca-hd'-THd,  s.  f.,  horse 

laugh,  burst  of  laughter.     L.  54. 
Carcel,  car'-fhH  [car'-sel],  s.  f.,  prison. 

L.  34. 
Carga,   cqr'-ga,    s.  f.,    load,    burden, 

charge.     L.  60. 
Cargrar,  car-i  dr',  to  charge,  to  load,  to 

heap.     L.  47. 
Cargo,  car'-go,  s.  m.,  load,  charge,  em- 
ployment, office.     L.  60. 
Caridad,  c^-re-THdTH' ,  s.  f.,  charity. 

L.  41. 
Cariredondo,    cd-re-hrd-don'-do,    adj., 

round-faced.     L.  59. 
Came,  car'-nd,  s.  f.,  flesh,  meat.    L.  7. 
Carnero,   car-nd'-ro,    s.    m.,    mutton, 

sheep.     L.  40. 
Carniceria,    car-ne-thd-re' a    [car-ifg-sS- 

re'-a],  s.  f.,  meat  market,  butcher- 
shop.     L.  11. 
Carnicero,  car-ne-thd'-ro  [car-ne-Ba'-ro], 

s.  m.,  butcher.     L.  11. 


VOCABULARF. 


465 


Carnuza,  car-nH'-tha  [car-nft'-sa],  s.  f., 
bad  or  spoiled  meat.     L.  49. 

Caro,  ca'-ro,  adj.,  dear,  costly,  beloved. 
L.  13. 

Carpintero,  car-pen-td'-roj  s.  m.,  car- 
penter.    L.  33. 

Carrera,  cd-hrd'-ra,  s.  f.,  course,  career, 
race,  profession.     L.  48. 

Cairo,  c(i'-hro,  s.  m.,  car,  wagon.  L. 
58. 

Carmaje,  ca-hrHiji'-hd,  s.  m.,  carriage. 
L.  51. 

Carta,  cqr'-tQ,,  s.  f.,  letter.    L.  7. 

Cartilla,  car-tel'-yg,  [car-te'-ya],  s.  f., 
primer.  Cosa  que  no  est^  en  la  car- 
tilla, something  strange  or  uncom- 
mon.    L.  61. 

Casa,  ca'-sa,  s.  f.,  house.     L.  9. 

Cascaras  !  cds'-cd-rds,  intj.,  oh!  An 
exclamation  expressive  of  astonish- 
ment or  admiration.     L.  63. 

Casero,  cd-sd'-ro,  adj.,  domestic,  home- 
like. Comedia  casera,  household 
play,  parlor  play.     L.  59. 

Casi,  cd'-se,  adv.,  almost.     L.  32. 

Caso,  cd'-so,  s.  m.,  case,  event.  No 
haga  usted  caso  de  eso,  take  no  no- 
tice of  it.     L.  60. 

Castana,  cds-tdn'-yq,  s.  f.,  chestnut. 
L.  40. 

Castellano,  cds-tdl-yd'-no  [cSs-ta-yS'-no], 
s.  m.,  Castilian  language.     L.  55. 

Castellano,  cds-tdl-yd'-no  [cSs-ts-yS'-no], 
adj.,  Castilian.     L.  55. 

Castillo,  cds-tel'-yo  [cas-te'-yo],  s.  m., 
castle.  Hacer  castillos  en  el  aire,  to 
build  castles  in  the  air.     L.  48. 

Casualidad,  cd-sM(i-le-THdTH,  s.  f.,  ac- 
cident, chance,  casualty,  hazzard. 
L.  60. 

Casucha,  cd-su'-cha,  s.  f.,  miserable 
house.     L.  44. 

Catolicismo,  cd-to-le-thes'-mo  [cS-to-is- 
ses'-mo],  s.  m.,  Catholicism.     L.  49. 

Catorce,  cd-tor'-thd  [cS-tor'-sa],  num. 
adj.,  fourteen.  Luis  Catorce,  Louis 
the  Fourteenth.    L.  14. 

Causa,  cau'-sa,  s.  f.,  cause.  A  causa 
de,  on  account  of.     L.  40. 

Causar,  cau-sdr',  to  cause.     L.  51. 

Caza,  cd'-iha  [cS'-sa],  s.  f.,  chase,  hunt. 
Ir  ^  la  caza,  to  go  hunting.     L.  58. 

Cazar,  cd-thdr'  [cS-sar'],  to  chase,  to 
hunt.     L.  58. 

Ceoa,  thd'-ca  [sa'-cal.  De  Ceca  en  Meca, 
to  wander  from  pillar  to  post.    L.  61. 

Celebraci6n,  thd-ld-brd-theon'  [sa-ia-bra- 
se-on'],  s.  f.,  celebration.     L.  39. 

Celebrar,  thd-ld-brdr'  [sa-ia-brar'l,  to 
celebrate.  Celebro  que  usted  haya 
venido,  I  am  glad  you  have  come. 
L.  39. 

32 


Celeste,  thd-les'-tdlBsi-iSs'-tsil^adj.,  heav- 
enly, celestial.     L.  49. 

Celestial,  thd-Us-tedV  [sa-ies-teal'],  adj., 
celestial,  heavenly.    L.  49. 

Celioo,  thd'-le-co  [sa'-ie-co],adj.,  heaven- 
ly (used  in  poetry  only).     L.  49. 

Celo,  thd'-lo  [sS'-io],  s.  m.,  zeal,  jealousy. 
L.  55. 

Cena,  thd'-na  [sa'-na],  s.  f.,  supper.  Last 
Supper.     L.  52.  " 

Cenar,  thd-ndr'  [sa-nar'],  to  sup,  to  take 
supper.     L.  39. 

Centavo,  tMn-td'-vo  [sgn-tS'-vo],  s.  m., 
cent.     L.  14. 

Centella,  tMn-tW-ya  [sen-tg'-ya],  s.  f., 
flash,  spark.  Echar  rayos  y  cente- 
llas,  to  foam  with  rage.     L.  62. 

Centena,  then-td'-na  [sgn-ta'-na],  s.  f., 
about  a  hundred.    L.  40. 

Centenar,  then-td-ndr'  [s5n-ta-nar'],  s.  m., 
a  hundred.     L.  40. 

Cerca,  th^'-cg,  [sSr'-ca],  adv.,  near,  close 
by.  Cerca  de  su  casa,  near  his  house. 
L.  31. 

Ceremonial,  thd-rd-mo-nedl'  [sa-ra-mo-ne- 
51],  adj.,  ceremonial,  ceremonious. 
L.  54. 

Cerrar,  the-hrdr'^  [se-hrar'],  to  shut,  to 
close.     L.  34. 

Cerrojo,  tM-hro'-ho  [sa-hro'-ho],  s.  m., 
bolt.     L.  59. 

Cerveza,  tMr-vd'-thg,  [sgr-va'-sa],  s.  f., 
ale,  beer.     L.  7. 

Chaleco,  chd-ld'-co,  s.  m.,  vest.    L.  10. 

Chancear,  chdn-thedr'  [chSn-sSSr'],  to 
jest,  to  joke.    L.  58. 

Chanza,  chdn'-tha  [chSn'-sa],  s.  f.,  jest, 
joke.     L.  58. 

Char  la,  chqr'-la,  s.  f.,  chat,  chit  chat, 
pi-attle.     L.  60. 

Charlar,  char-ldr',  to  chat,  to  prattle. 
L.  37. 

Chasco,  chds'-co,  s.  m.,  disappointment. 
Llevarse  un  chasco  solemne,  to  be 
greatly  disappointed.     L.  46. 

Chelin,  chd-len',  s.  m.,  shilling.    L.  61. 

Chico,  che'-co,  adj.,  little,  small.    L.  44. 

Chiquito,  che-ke'-to,  dim.  adj.,  very 
small,  very  little,  little  one.    L.  44. 

Chito,  che'-to,  intj.,  hush!  silence!  L. 
46. 

Chocolate,  cho-co-ld'-td,  s.  m.,  choco- 
late.   L.  14. 

Ciegro,  thed'-go  [sea'-go],  adj.  and  s.  m., 
blind.  A  degas,  blindly,  in  the 
dark.     L.  48. 

Cielo,  thed'-lo  [sea'-io],  s.  m.,  heaven, 
sky,  ceiling.  Tomar  el  cielo  con  las 
manos,  to  be  transported  with  joy, 
grief,  or  passion.     L.  45. 

Cien,  the-^n'  [se-en'l,  num.  adj.,  a  hun- 
dred.   (See  CiENTO.)    L.  14. 


466 


VOCABULABY. 


Ciencia,  the-^n'-theg,    [se-en'-sea],  s.   f., 

knowledge,  science.     L.  45. 
Ciento,  the-^n'-to  [se-Sn'-to],  num.  adj.,  a 

hundred.     (See  Cien.)    L.  14. 
Cierto,  the-^r'-to  [se-Sr'-to],  adj.,  certain. 

L.  48. 
Cimiento,  the-me-hi' -to  [se-me-en'-to],  s. 

m.,  foundation.     L.  59, 
Cinco,  then'-co  [sen'-co],  num.  adj.,  five, 

fifth.     L.  14. 
Cincuenta,   then-ku^n'-ta  [sen-kuen'-ta], 

num.  adj.,  fifty,  fiftieth.     L.  14. 
Circunspeccion,      ther-cun-spek-theon' 

[ser-cun-spek-seon'],  s.  f.,  circumspec- 
tion.    L.  24. 
Circunstancia,  ther-cun-stdn'-thea  [ser- 

cftn-stan'-sea],  s.  f.,  circumstance.    L. 

40. 
Cita,  the' -fa  [se'-ta],  s.  f.,  appointment, 

quotation.     L.  60. 
Citar,  the-tdr'  [se-tSr'],  to  make  an  en- 
gagement, to  quote.     L.  52. 
Ciudad,  theu-THdTH'  [sea-THS^n'],  s.  f., 

city.     L.  9. 
Ciudadano,  theu-THd-THd'-no  [seii-THS- 

TH5'-no],  s.  m.,  citizen.     L.  47. 
Civilizacidn,  the-ve-le-thd-theon'  [se-vg- 

le-sS-seon'].  s.  f.,  civilization.     L.  60. 
Claridad,  cld-re-THdTH\  s.  f.,  clearness, 

perspicuity.     L.  36. 
Claro,  cld'-ro,  adj.,  clear,  bright.  L.  59. 
Clase,  dd'-sd,  s.  f.,  class,  kind.    L.  54. 
Clasico,  cld'-se-co,  adj.,  classic,   clas- 
sical.    L.  35. 
Clasificacidn,  dd-the-fe-cd-theon'    [ci5- 

se-fe-ca-seon'],  s.  f.,  classification.    L. 

24. 
Clima,  de-ma,  s.  m.,  climate.     L.  40. 
Cocer,  co-tMr'  [co-s5r'],  to  cook,  to  boil. 

L.  42. 
Coche,  co'-chd,  s.  m.,  coach,  carriages 

in  general.     L.  42. 
Cocinero,  co-the-nd'-ro   [co-se-na'-ro],  s. 

m.,  cook.     L.  11. 
Cofre,  co'-frd,  s.  m.,  chest,  trunk,  cof- 
fer.    L.  60. 
Coger,  co-hPr\  to  catch,  to  take,  to  pick 

up.     L.  46. 
Cojear,  co-hddr',  to  limp,  to  walk  lame. 

L.  39. 
Cojo,  CO' -ho,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  lame.    L. 

44. 
Colada,  co-Id' -THa,   s.  f.,  stiffening  of 

clothes,     Todo  saldr^  en  la  colada, 

all  will  be  brought  to  light.      L.  65. 
Colectivo,  co-Uk-te'-vo,  adj.,  collective. 

L.  40. 
Collar,  col-gdr',  to  hang,     L.  59. 
Colina,  co-l'e'-na,  s.  f.,  hill,     L.  58. 
Colocacion,  co-/o-c^-f /ieo»r[co-io-ca-8eon'], 

s.  f.,  employment,  place,  i)osition, 

situation.    L.  60. 


Colocar,  co-lo-cdr',  to  place,  to  put,  to 
arrange,  to  employ.     L.  4ff. 

Colorado,  co-lo-rd'-THo,  adj.,  red.  L. 
54. 

Colorido,  co-lo-re'-THo,  s.  m.,  coloring 
(painting).     L.  52, 

Color,  co-lor',  s,  m.,  color,    L.  52. 

Combatir,  com-bd-ter',  to  combat,  to 
fight.     L.  54, 

Combinacion,  com-be-nd-theon'  [com-be- 
n2-seon'],  s.  f,,  combination.     L,  24. 

Combinado,  com-be-nd'-THo,  p,  p.  and 
adj.,  combined,  mixed.     L.  58. 

Combinar,  com-be-ndr',  to  combine,  to 
compound,  to  mix.     L.  58. 

Comedia,  co-md'-Tnea,  s.  f.,  comedy. 
L.  52. 

Comer,  co-m^r',  to  eat,  to  dine.    L.  7. 

Comerciante,  co-m  r-thedn'-td  [co-m§r- 
sean'-ta],  s.  m.,  merchant.     L,  5. 

Cometa,  co-md'-tq,  s.  m.,  comet;  s.  f., 
kite,  toy.     L.  60. 

Cometer,  co-md-th-',  to  commit.  L. 
43. 

Cdmico,  co'-me-co,  s.  m.,  actor,  come- 
dian.   L,  63. 

Comico,  co'-me-co,  adj.,  comic,  comical. 
L,  35. 

Como,  CO' -mo,  adv.,  how,  as.     L.  15. 

Comodidad,  co-mo-THe-THdwH' ,  s.  f., 
commodity,  convenience,  comfort. 
L.  49. 

Cdmodo,  co'-mo-THo,  adj,,  commodious, 
convenient,  comfortable.     L.  29. 

Companero,  com-pdn-yd'-ro,  s.  m.,  com- 
panion, comrade.     L,  60. 

Compjmia,  com-pdn-ye'-g,,  s.  f.,  company. 
L.  60. 

Comparativo,  com-pd-rd-te'-vo,  adj,, 
comparative.     L,  61. 

Compasion,  com-pd-seon' ,  s.  f.,  compas- 
sion.   L,  45. 

Complacencia,  com-pld-thPn'-thea  [com- 
pia-86n'-seal,  s.  f.,  pleasure,  compla- 
cency.    L.  39. 

Complemento,  com-ple-m^n'-to,  s.  m., 
complement.     L,  51. 

Componente,  com-po-nhi'-td,  act.  part., 
component.    L,  49. 

Componer,  com-po-nh-',  to  mend,  to  ar- 
range, to  compound,  to  compose.  L. 
49, 

Composicion,  com-po-se-theon'  [com-po- 
se-seon'],  s,  f,,  composition.     L.  24. 

Comprar,  com-prdr',  to  buy,  to  pur- 
chase.    L.  4, 

Comprender,  com-prhi-d^' ,  to  compre- 
hend, to  understand,  to  comprise. 
L.  50. 

Con,  con,  prep.,  with,  by.     L.  10 

Concebir,  con-thd-ber'  [con-sS-ber'],  to 
conceive  of.    L.  54. 


rOCABULABT. 


467 


Conceder,  con-tM-d^r'  Ccon-se-dgr'],  to 

grant,  to  concede.     L.  53. 
Concertar,  con-tMr-tdr'  [con-sSr-tar'],  to 

concert,  to  agree.     L.  58. 
Conciencia,    con-the^n'-theq,    [con-seen'- 

sea],  s.  f.,  conscience.     L.  40. 
Conoierto,  con-the^r'-to  [con-segr'-to],  s. 

m.,  concert,  agreement.     L.  17. 
Conoluir,  con-duer',  to  conclude,  to  fin- 
ish, to  be  over  with.     L.  58. 
Conoordanoia,    con-cor-ddn'-theq,    [con- 

cor-dan'-sea],  s.  f.,  concordance,  agree- 
ment.   L.  50. 
Condescender,  con-d^s-tMn-d^r  [con-de- 

sen-dSr'],  to  condescend,  to  agree.    L. 

48.^  . 
Condioidn,    con-de-theon'   [con-de-seon'], 

s.  f.,  condition.     L.  43. 
Condicional,  con-de-theo-ndV  [con-de-seo- 

nSl'],  adj.,  conditional.     L.  59. 
Conducir,   con-du-ther'  [con-d(i-s6r'],  to 

conduct,  to  convey,  to  lead.     L.  40. 
Confesar,   con-fe-sdr\  to   confess,    to 

acknowledge,  to  avow.    L.  34. 
Confuso,  cow-/?t'-«o,  adj.,  confused,  con- 
founded.   L.  54. 
Conjugacion,  con-hu-gd-theon'  [con-hCi- 

gS-seon],  s.  f.,  conjugation.     L.  43. 
Conjugrar,   con-hii-gdr' ,  to   conjugate. 

L.  43. 
Conjuncidn,     con-hun-theon'    [con-hlin- 

seon'],  s.  f.,  conjunction.     L.  43. 
Conmigo,  con-me'-go,  pron.,  with  me, 

with  myself.     L.  26. 
Conooer,  co-no-tMr'  Cco-no-sgr'],  to  know, 

to  be  acquainted  with.     L.  25. 
Conocimiento,  co-no-the-me^n'-to  [co-no- 

se-meen'-to],  s.  m.,  knowledge,  bill  of 

lading.     L.  43. 
Conseouencia,  con-sd-Jctihi'-theQ,  [con-sa- 

kftgn'-sSa],  s.  f.,  consequence.     L.  34. 
Consegruir,  con-sd-gher' ,  to  obtain,  to 

get,  to  succeed.     L.  42. 
Consejo,  con-sd'-ho,  s.  m.,  counsel,  ad- 
vice.   L.  53. 
Consentir,  con-s^n-ter\  to  consent,  to 

agree  to.     L.  38. 
Consistir,  con-ses-ter\  to  consist.    L. 

52. 
Cousolar,  con-so-ldr',  to  console.  L.  35. 
Constancia,  con-stdn'-thea  [con-stan'-sea], 

s.  f.,  constancy,  steadiness.     L.  46. 
Construccidii,     con-struTc-theon'     [con- 

strtik-seoii'],   s.  f.,   construction.     L. 

51. 
Contante,  con-tdn'-td,  s.  m.  and  adj., 

ready  money.     L.  38. 
Cental,  con-tdr',  to  count,  to  relate,  to 

tell.     L.  35. 
Contener,    con-td-ntr\  to  contain,  to 

retain,  to  restrain,  to  stop,  to  check. 

L.  49. 


Contenido,  con-td-ne'-THO,  s.  m.,  con^ 

tents.     L.  49. 
Contentar,  con-t^n-tdr' ,  to  make  con^ 

tented,  to  make  glad.     L.  33. 
Contento,    con-Un'-to^    adj.,    content, 

contented,  satisfied.     L.  33. 
Contigo,  con-te'-go,  pron.,  with  thee» 

L.  26. 
Continuar,   con-te-nudr' ,  to  continue. 

L.  54. 
Contra,  con'-tr^,  prep.,  against.     L.  41. 
Contradecir,  con-trd-dd-ther'  [con-tra-da. 

ser],  to  contradict.    L.  41. 
Contrario,  con-trd'-reo,  adj.,  contrary. 

Al  contrario,  on  the  contrary.     L. 

53. 
Convencer,  con-vhi-tMr'  [con-vgn-ser'], 

to  convince.    L.  48. 
Convenir,   con-vd-ner\  to  suit,  to  be 

fitting,  to  agree.     L.  30. 
Couversacidn,  con-v^r-sd-theon'  [con-v6r- 

sa-seon'],  s.  f.,  conversation.     L.  24. 
Conversar,   con-v^r-sdr' ,   to  converse. 

L.  55. 
Convertir,  con-v^r-ter',  to  convert.    L. 

45. 
Convicto,  con-vek'-to,  irr.   past.  part. 

(convencer),  convicted.     L.  52. 
Convite,  con-ve'-td,  s.  m.,  invitation. 

L.  56. 
Copulative,  co-pH-ld-te'-vo,  adj . ,  copula- 
tive.   L.  59. 
Coqueta,  co-Tcd'-ta,  s.  f.,  coquette.    L. 

32. 
Corazdn,  co-rd-thon'  Cco-ra-son'],  s.  m., 

heart.     L.  56. 
Corbata,  cor-hd'-tii,  s.  f.,  cravat.    L.  10. 
Corona,  co-ro'-na,  s.  f.,  crown.     L.  56. 
Correoto,  co-hrik'-to,  adj.,  correct.    L. 

29. 
Corredor,  co-hrd-rnor' ,  s.  m.,  corridor, 

broker.     L.  49. 
Corregir,  co-hrd-her\  to  correct.     Co- 

rregirse,  to  mend.    L.  59. 
Correo,  co-hrd'-o^  s.  m.,  currier,  post, 

mail.      Casa  de  correos,  post-office. 

L.  29. 
Correr,  co-hr^r\  to  run.     Correrse,  to 

be  ashamed  or  confused,  to  blush. 

L.  51. 
Corretear,  co-hrd-tddr' ,  to  run  about. 

L.  53. 
Correveidile,  co-hrd-vde-THe'-ld,  s.  m., 

tale-bearer,  tattler.    L.  50. 
Corriente,  co-hre^n'-td,  adj.,  current ; 

s.  m.,  al  corriente  de,  aware  of,  s.  f., 

current,  stream.     L.  56. 
Corrientemente,      co-hrePM-td-m^n'-td, 

adv.,  currently,  fluently.     L.  49. 
Corro,  co'-hro,  s.  m.,  circle  of  people 

collected  together  for  talking.    L. 

44. 


468 


VOCABULARY. 


Cortante,  cor-tdn'-td,  adj.,  cutting, 
edged,  sharp.     L.  38. 

Cortaplumas,  cor-td-pW-mas,  s.  m., 
pen-knife.     L.  9. 

€ortar,  cor-tdr',  to  cut.     L.  33. 

Corto,  cor' -to,  adj.,  short.  ^L.  21. 

€osa,  co'-sa,  s.  f.,  thing.  A  cosa  de  las 
seis,  about  six  o'clock.     L.  11. 

Coser,  co-s^r',  to  sew.    L.  24. 

Cosmopolita,  cos-mo-po-le'-tQ,  s.  m., 
cosmopolite.     L.  51. 

Costa,  cos'-ta,  s.  f.,  coast,  cost.  A  casta 
de,  at  the  expense  of.     L.  60. 

Cost&do, cos-td'-THo,  s.  m.,  side.     L.  61. 

Cos  tar,  cos-tdr\  to  cost.     L.  61. 

Costnmbre,  cos-tHm'-brd,  s.  f.,  custom, 
habit.     L.  54. 

Creacidn,  crdd-theon'  [cra2-86on'],  s.  f., 
creation.     L.  41. 

Crear,  crd^r',  to  create.     L.  41. 

Credito,  crd'-THe-to,  s.  m.,  credit,  cre- 
dence.   L.  57. 

Creencia,  crdhi'-theg,  [crSSn'-sea],  s.  f., 
belief.    L.  49. 

Creer,  crdh-\  to  believe,  to  think  (a 
thing).     L.  27. 

Creyente,  crd-yhi'-td,  act.  part,  and  s. 
m.  and  f.,  believing,  believer.   L.  38. 

Criado,  cred'-THo,  s.  m.,  servant.  L. 
17. 

Criar,  credr',  to  breed,  to  rear,  to  bring 
up.     L.  51. 

Criatura,  cred-tu'-rQ,  s.  f.,  creature,  in- 
fant.    L.  60. 

Crimen,  cre'-mhi,  s.  m.,  crime.    L.  59. 

Criticar,  cre-ti-cdr',  to  criticise.    L.  48. 

Critico,  cre'-te-co,  s.  m.,  critic.    L.  45. 

Cronolog-ista,  cro-no-lo-hes'-tQ,  s.  m., 
chronologist.     L.  36. 

Crueldad,  cru^l-ddrH',  s.  f.,  cruelty. 
L.  36. 

Cuaderno,  cu{i-TH^r'-no,  s.  m.,  copy- 
book.    L.  4. 

Cual,  cuul',  pron.,  which.     L.  10. 

Cnalidad,  cuQ-le-THdm' ,  s.  f.,  quality. 
L.  36. 

Cualquiera,  cuaJ-hed'-rQ,  pron.  and 
adj.,  any  one,  whosoever,  some  one. 
L.  34. 

Cuan,  cuQn\  adv.,  how,  as  (used  only 
before  adjs.  and  other  advs.  \    L.  14. 

Cnando,  ciiQn'-do,  adv.,  when.     L.  9. 

Cuanto,  cuqn'-to,  adj.,  how  much,  how 
many.  Cuanto  antes,  at  once,  imme- 
diately. Por  cuanto,  inasmuch  as. 
L.  14. 

Cuarto,  cuar'-to,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m., 
fourth,  room,  chamber.     L.  40. 

Cnatro,  cii(i'-tro,  num.  adj.,  four.  L. 
15. 

Cuba,  cH'-ha,  s.  f.,  cask,  tub.  Cuba  (is- 
land of).'   L.  61. 


j  Cubrir,  cH-hrer',  to  cover.     L.  59. 
!  Cuchara,  cvrchd'-rq,  s.  f.,  spoon.    L.  60. 
Cuchillo,  cu-chel'-yo  [ct-che'-yo],  s.  m., 

knife  (tablej.     L.  33. 
Cuello,  cuW-yo  [ctig'-yo],  s.  m.,  neck, 

collar.    L.  60. 
Cuenta,   c&hi'-tQ,  s.  f.,  account,  bill. 

L.  46. 
Cuento,  c^n'-to,  s.  m.,  story,  tale.    L. 

44. 
Cuerpo,  cMr'-po,  s.  m.,  body.     L.  64. 
Cuervo,  cuer'-vo,  s.  m.,  crow.^  L.  45. 
Cuesta,  cuis'-tq,  s.  f.,  hill.     A  cuestas, 

on  one's  back  or  shoulders.     L.  63. 
Cuestidn,  cu^-teon',  s.  f.,  question.    L. 

40. 
Cuidado,  cue-TH^'-^HO,  s.  m.,  care.   Es- 

tar  de  cuidado,  to  be  dangerously  ill. 

Estar  con  cuidado,  to  be  very  anx- 
ious.    L.  28. 
Cuidar,  cue-THdr',  to  care,  to  take  care. 

L.  44. 
Culpa,  ciil'-pQ,  8.  f.,  fault,  blame,  guilt. 

L.  60. 
Culpar,  cul-pdr',  to  blame.    L.  60. 
Cultivar,  c^-te-vdr',  to  cultivate.    L. 

60. 
Cumpleanos,     cum-plddn'-yos,    s.    m., 

birthday.     L.  62. 
Cumplimieiito,  cumr-ple-me^n'-to,  s.  m., 

complement,  fulfilling. 
Cumplir,  cum-pler',  to  accomplish,  to 

fulfil.     L.  57. 
Cuuado,    cUn-yd'-THO,   s.    m.   and    f., 

brother-in-law,  etc.     L.  64. 
Curioso,  cii-reo'-so,adj.,  curious,  worthy 

of  note.     L.  51. 
Curso,  CMr'-so,  s.m.,  course.     L.  64. 
Custodia,  cus-to'-Tneg^,  s.  f.,  custody. 

L.  53. 
Cutis,  cu'-tls,  s.  m.  and  f.,  skin.    L.  64. 
Cuyo,  cu'-yo,  pron.,  of  whom,  whose, 

of  which,  which.     L.  17. 

Dale,  dd'-ld,  intj.,  have  at  it,  go  at  it 

or  him.     L.  64. 
Dama,  dd'-mg,,  s.  m.,  dame,  lady.    Da- 
mas,  draughts  or  checkers.     L.  58. 
Danza.  ddn'-tha  [d5n'-sa],  s.  f.,  dance. 

L.  64. 
Danar,  ddn-ydr',  to  damage,  to  hurt,  to 

harm.     L.  47. 
Dano,   ddn'-yo,  s.  m.,  danger,  harm. 

L.  42. 
Dar,  ddr,  to  give.    Dares  y  tomares, 

disputes,  ifs  and  ands.    Darse  a  la 

vela,  to  set  sail.     L.  26. 
De,   dd,  prep.,  of,  from.     De  dia,  by 

day.     De  intento,  on  purpose.    L.  4. 
Deber,  dd-b^r',  s.  m.,  duty.     L.  28. 
Deber,  dd-b^r',  to  owe,  must,  ought 

L.  28. 


VOCABULAMY. 


469 


Decena,  dd-thd'-ng,  [dS-sa'-na],  s.  f.,  about 
ten.     L.  59. 

Decidir,  dd-the-^uer'  [de-se-^HSr'],  to  de- 
cide.    L.  60. 

Decimo,  dd'-the-mo  [da'-sg-mo],  ord.  adj. 
and  s.  m.,  tenth.     L.  15. 

Decir,  dd-ther'  [da-sSr'],  to  say,  to  tell. 
L.  27. 

Declarar,  dd-cld-rdr',  to  declare.  L.  48. 

Dedal,  dd-THdl',  s.m..,  thimble.    L.  24. 

Dedo,  dd'-THO,  s.  m.,  finger.     L.  59. 

Defective,  dd-f^k-te'-vo,  adj.,  defective. 
L.  63. 

Defecto,  dd-fW-to,  s.  m.,  defect,  fail- 
ing.    L.  55. 

Defender,  dd-fhi-d^r',  to  defend.  L. 
37. 

Definicidn,  dd-fe-ne-theon'  [da-fg-ne- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  definition.     L.  59. 

Definir,  dd-fe-ner',  to  define.     L.  59. 

Dejar,  dd-hdr',  to  leave,  to  let,  to  per- 
mit.    L.  44. 

Delante,  dd-ldn'-td,  prep.  Delante  de, 
before,  in  the  presence  of.     L.  16. 

Deleitar,  dd-lde-tdr',  to  delight.    L.  47. 

Delicado,  dd-le-cd'-^no,  adj.,  delicate. 
L.  39. 

Delicioso,  dd-le-theo'-so  [dfi-lg-eSo'-so], 
adj.,  delicious.     L.  35. 

Delincuente,  dd-len-ku^n'-td,  s.  m.,  de- 
linquent, transgressor.     L.  34. 

Delinquir,  dd-len-ker',  to  transgress. 
L.  34. 

Delito,  dd-le'-tOf  s.  m.,  fault,  crime. 
L.  51. 

Demds,  dd-mds',  adv.,  over  and  above, 
too  much ;  adj.  (generally  used  with 
lo,  los,  las),  the  rest,  others.     L.  43. 

Demasiado,  dd-md-sed'-THo,  adj.  and 
adv.,  too  much,  too.     L.  25. 

Dentro,  d^n'-tro,  prep.,  in,  within,  in- 
side ( always  followed  by  de) .    L.  31 . 

Derecho,  dd-rd'-cho,  adj.,  straight, 
even,  right.    L.  50. 

Desafiar,  dd-sd-fedr',  to  challenge.  L. 
65. 

Desafio,  dd-sd-fe'-o,  s.  m.,  challenge, 
duel.     L.  63. 

Desanimar,  dd-sd-ne-mdr' ,  to  disheart- 
en, to  discourage.    L.  38. 

DescaxLsadamente,  dds-cdn-sd-Ti:d- 
m^n'-td,  adv.,  easily,  at  one's  ease. 
L.  33. 

Desoansado,  dds-cdn-sd'-THo,  adj . ,  easy, 
quiet,  refreshed.     L.  33. 

Descansar,  dds-cdn-sdr' ,  to  rest.     L.  33. 

Descanso,  dds-cdn'-so,  s.  m.,  rest,  re- 
pose, ease.     L.  33. 

Descaro,  dds-cd'-ro,  s.  m.,  barefaced- 
ness.     L.  64. 

Descender,  dds-tMn-d^r'  [ds-s5n-d6r'],  to 
descend.    L.  37. 


Descomponer,  dds-com-po-n^r' ,  to  dis- 
arrange, to  discompose,  to  put  out  of 
order.     L.  53. 

Descompuesto,  dds-com-puds'-to^  adj., 
disarranged,  out  of  order.     L.  53. 

Desconfiar,  dds-con-fedr' ,  to  distrust^ 
to  mistrust.     L.  43. 

Desgrracia,  dds-grd'-thea  [das-gra'-sea],  s. 
f.,  misfortune,  ill-luck.    L.  48.  * 

Deshacer,das-^ii^^r'[das-a-ser'J,toundo,, 
to  destroy,  to  take  to  pieces.    L.  57. 

Desierto,  dd-se^r'-to,  s.  m.,  desert, 
wilderness.     L.  54. 

Desigual,  dd-se-giiQl^  adj.,  unequal, 
uneven.     L.  55. 

Desocupar,  dd-so-cd-pdr' ,  to  quit,  evac- 
uate, to  empty.     L.  56. 

Despacio,  dds-pd'-theo  [das-pS'-seo],  adv., 
slowly.     L.  6. 

Despedir,  dds-pd-rner',  to  dismiss,  to 
say  farewell,  to  send  or  put  away. 
L.  59. 

Despertar,  dds-p^r-tdr' ,  to  awake,  to 
awaken,  to  arouse,  to  rouse.     L.  34. 

De  spier  to,  dds-pe^r'-to,  adj.,  awake, 
brisk,  lively.     L.  52. 

Desproporcionadisimaniente,ofas-pro- 
por-theo-nd-THe'-se-md-mPn-td[asis-\yro~ 
por-6eo-ng-THe'-se-mS-m6n-ta],  adv.,  dis- 
proportionately.    L.  50. 

Despues,  dds-puh',  prep,  and  adv.> 
after,  afterward.     L.  16. 

Determinante,  dd-Ur-me-ndn' -td,  adj., 
determiuing.     L.  53. 

Determinar,  dd-t^r-me-ndr' ,  to  deter- 
mine.   L.  53. 

Detras,  dd-trds',  prep,  and  adv.,  be- 
hind.    L.  33. 

Deudor,  ddu-dor\  s.m.,  debtor.    L.  45. 

Devolver,  dd-vol-v^r\  to  return,  to 
give  back.     L.  43. 

Dia,  de'-a,  s.  m.,  day.     L.  9. 

Diablo,  dea'-blo,  s.  m.,  devil.     L.  65. 

Dialecto,  ded-Uh'-to,  s.  m.,  dialect.  L. 
55. 

Dialogo,  ded'-lo-gOj  s.  m.,  dialogue.  L. 
59. 

Diantre,  dedn'-trd.s.  m.,  deuce.    L.  46. 

Dibujo,  de-bu'-ho^  s.  m.,  design,  draw- 
ing.    L.  51. 

Diccionario,  dek-theo-nd'-reo  [dek-seo- 
na'-reo],  s.  m.,  dictionary.     L.  49. 

Dicha,  de'-cha,  s.  f.,  happiness,  good 
fortune.     L.  64. 

Dioho,  de'-cho,  s.  m.,  saying.    L.  54. 

Dioiembre,  de-theem'-brd  fde-segm'-bra], 
s.  m.,  December.     L.  24. 

Diente,  de^n'-td,  s.  m.,  tooth.  ITablar 
entre  dientes,  to  mumble,  to  mutter. 
L.  63. 

Diez,  dedth'  [deas'l,  num.  adj.,  ten.  K 
14. 


470 


VOCABULABY. 


Diferencia,  de-fd-rH'-iheQ  [de-fa-r?n'- 
sea],  s.  f.,  difference,     L.  48. 

Oiferenciar,  de-fd-r&n-thedr'  [de-fa-r^n- 
seSr'],  to  differ,  to  distinguish.  L. 
48. 

Dificil,  di-fe'-thel  [de-fe'-sel],  adj.,  diffi- 
cult.    L.  21. 

Dificultad,  de-fe-cHl-tilTH' ,  s.  f.,  diffi- 
culty.   L.  36. 

Digrno,  dig' -no,  adj.,  worthy,  deserv- 
ing.    L.  53. 

Dilnviar,  de-lu-vedr\  to  pour,  to  rain 
in  deluge.     L.  30. 

Dimes,  de'-m^s.  Andar  en  dimes  y  di- 
retes,  to  hum  and  haw.     L.  47. 

Diminutive,  di-me-nu-te'-vo,  s.  m.,  di- 
minutive.    L.  44. 

Dinero,  de-nd'-ro,  s.  m.,  money.  L. 
13. 

Dios,  deos',  s.  m.,  God.     L.  31. 

Diptongo,  dep-ton'-go,  s.m., diphthong. 
L.  57. 

Direccion,  de-r^k-theon'  [de-rgk-seon'],  s. 
m.,  direction.     L.  24. 

Direct©,  de-rSk'-to,  adj.,  direct.    L.  51. 

Director,  de-r^k-tor',  s.  m.,  director. 
L.  50. 

Dirigir,  de-re-her'.  to  direct ;  dirigirsCj 
to  apply.     L.  63. 

Discipulo,  de-the'-pu-Io  [de-se'-pti-io],  s. 
m.,  pupil,  disciple.     L.  18. 

Discrete,  des-crd'-to,  adj.,  discreet,  cir- 
cumspect.    L.  39. 

Discnlpa,  des-cul'-pQ,  s.  f.,  apology,  ex- 
cuse.   L.  60. 

Discurso,  des-cur'-so,  s.  m.,  discourse, 
speech.     L.  53. 

Disg-nstar,  des-gm-tdr' ,  to  disgust,  to 
displease.    L.  50. 

Disgusto,  des-gus'-to,  s.  m.,"  disgust, 
displeasure.     L.  50. 

Disponer,  des-po-nh-\  to  dispose,  to  lay 
out,  to  arrange,  to  prepare.     L.  48. 

DisposicidxL,  des-po-se-theon  [des-po-se- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  disposition,  arrange- 
ment, distribution.     L.  33. 

Distancia,  des-tdn' -thea  [des-tan'-sea],  s. 
f.,  distance.     L.  51. 

Distante,  des-tdn'-td,  adj.,  distant.  L. 
38. 

Distar,  des-tdr',  to  be  distant,  to  be  far 
from.     L.  53. 

Distinguir,  des-ten-gher' ,  to  distin- 
guish.    L.  43. 

Divertir,  de-ver-ter',  to  divert,  to 
amuse.    L.  39. 

Dividir,  de-ve-THer',  to  divide.    L.  51. 

Divisar,  de-re-sdr\  to  descry,  to  per- 
ceive, to  make  out.     L.  42. 

Doble,  do' -hid,  adj.,  double.     L.  40. 

Doce,  do'-thd  [do'-sal,  num.  adj.  and  s. 
m.,  twelve,  twelfth.    L.  14. 


Docena,  do-thd'-nQ  [do-sa'-na],  s.  f.,  doz- 
en.   L.  40. 

Doler,  do-lh-',  to  ache,  to  have  pain. 
L.  36. 

Dolor,  do-lor',  s.  m.,  pain.    L.  50. 

Domingo,  do-men' -go,  s.  m.,  Sunday. 
L.  9. 

Donde,  don'-dd,  adv.,  where.    L.  9. 

Dona,  don'-yg,  s.  f.,  lady,  madam,  Mrs. 
L.  2. 

Dormir,  dor-mer',  to  sleep.    L.  41. 

Dos,  dos,  num.  adj.,  and  s.  m.,  two, 
second.     L.  14. 

Drama,   drd'-mg,  s.  m.,  drama.      L. 
52. 

Drama tico,  drd-md'-te-co,2idj.,  dramat- 
ic.    L.  52. 

Duda,  du'-THa,  s.  f.,  doubt.    L.  43. 

Dndar,  du-rndr',  to  doubt.    L.  28. 

Dnrable,  du-rd'-bld,  adj.,  durable.    L. 
58. 

Durante,  du-rdn'-td,  act.  part.,  during. 
I      L.  59. 

I  Durar,  du-rdr',  to  last,  to  endure,  to 
continue.     L.  59. 

Daro,  du'-ro,  adj.,  hard  ;  s.  m,,  dollar. 
L.  60. 

Ea !  ^'-g,  intj.,  say  !  hallo !    L.  46. 
Echar,  d-chdr',  to  throw,  to  put  out,  to 

cast.     Echar  de  ver,  to  notice.     L. 

53. 
Econdmico,   d-co-no'-me-co,   adj.,   eco- 
nomical, economic.    L.  35. 
Edad,  d-THaTH',  s.  f.,  age.    L,  53. 
Edicidn,   d-de-theon'    [a-dg-seon'],  s.   f., 

edition.    L.  60. 
Edifioar,  d-de-fe-cdr' ,  to  edify,  to  build. 

L.  48. 
Efecto,  ^-f^k'-to,  s.  m.,  effect.    L.  47. 
Hjecutar,   ^-hP-cii-tdr' ,  to  execute,  to 

put  into  practice.     L.  60. 
ijjemplo,  d-hhn'-plo,  s.  m.,  example. 

L.  32. 
IJjercer,  d-Mr-tMr'  [a-her-ser'l,  to  exer- 
cise, to  practise.     L.  60. 
ijjercicio,   d-Mr-lhe'-theo  [a-her-se'-seo], 

s.  m.,  exercise.     L.  8. 
El,  la,  lo,  los,  las,  def.  art.,  the.    L.  1. 
^1,  2?,  i)ers.  pron.,  he,  it.     L.  1. 
Eleccion,  d-lek-theon'  La-lek-seon'],  s.  f., 

election,  choice.     L.  24. 
Elegancia,  d-ld-gdn'-thea  [a-la-gSn'-sea], 

s.  f.,  elegance.     L.  52. 
Elegante,   d-ld-gdn'-td,   adj.,  elegant. 

L.  65. 
Elegir,  d-ld-her',  to  elect,  to  choose. 

L.  39. 
Elemento,  d-ld-m^n'-to,  s.  m.,  element, 

constituent  part.     L.  60. 
Elena,  d-ld'-riQ,  s.  f.,  Helena,  Ellen. 

L.  19. 


rOCABULART. 


471 


Eliptico,  d-lep'-te-co,  adj.,  elliptic,  ellip- 
tical.    L.  60. 

Embarcadero,  ^m-bg,r-c&-THd'-ro,  s.  m., 
landing,  ferry.     L.  58. 

Embargo,  ^m-har'-go,  s.  m.,  embargo. 
Sin  embargo,  notwithstanding.  L. 
48.  ^ 

Empenar,  ^m-pdn-ydr' ,  to  engage,  to 
pledge,  to  bind,  to  pawn.    L.  45. 

Empero,  Im-pd'-ro,  conj.,  yet,  how- 
ever, but.    L.  60. 

Emplear,  ^m-plddr\  to  employ.    L.  44. 

Empleo,  ^m-pld'-o,  s.  m.,  employ,  em- 
ployment, position.     L.  57. 

En,  ^n,  prep.,  in,  at,  on.     L.  8. 

Enamorar,  d-nd-mo-rdr' ,  to  enamor, 
to  court,  to  make  love  to.     L.  39. 

Encargo,  H-car'-go^  a.  m.,  charge, 
command,  commission.     L.  57. 

Enoargar,  ^n-car-gar,  to  charge,  to  or- 
der, to  commission.    L.  58. 

Encender,  ^n-th^n-d^r'  [5n-8gn-d5r'],  to 
light,  to  kindle.     L.  37. 

Encerrar,  ^n-tM-hrdr'  [gn-sS-hrSr'],  to 
close,  to  shut  up,  to  contain,  to  com- 
prehend.    L.  65. 

Encima,  hi-the'-m^  [gn-ss'-ma],  prep, 
and  adv.,  above,  over.    L.  33. 

Encontrar,  ^n-con-trdr' ,  to  meet,  to 
find.     L.  35. 

Enemigo,  d-nd-me'-go,  s.  m.,  enemy. 
L.  51. 

Enemistar,  d-nd-mes-tdr' ,  to  set  at  en- 
mity, to  antagonize.     L.  60. 

Energia,  d-n^r-he'-fi,  s.  f.,  energy.  L. 
61. 

Enfermar,  ^n-f^r-mdr',  to  make  sick, 
to  become  sick.     L.  38. 

Enfermo,  ^n-/gr'-mo,  adj.,  sick,  ill.  L. 
48. 

Enf rente,  hi-frhi'-td,  adv.,  opposite, 
in  front.     L.  51. 

Enganar,  ^n-gdn'-ydr,  to  deceive,  to 
cheat,  to  take  in.     L.  32. 

Enhebrar,  H-d-hrdr\  to  thread,  to  link. 
I      L.  65. 

I  Enhorabuena.    ^n-o-ra-bud'-n(i,    s.    f., 
congratulation,  felicitation.     L.  39. 

Enrique,  ^n-hre'-hd,  s.  m.,  Henry.  L. 
15.^ 

Ensenar,  H-sdn-ydr\  to  show,  to  teach. 
L.  27. 

Ensuciar,  hi-su-thedr'  [gn-sft-sear'],  to 
soil,  to  daub.     L.  60. 

Entendedor,  ^n-thi-dd-THor\  s.  m.,  one 
who  understands.     L.  65. 

Entender,  ^n-Un-d^r\  to  understand. 
L.  31. 

Entonces,  ^n-ton'-thes  [en-ton'-sSs],  adv., 
then.     L.  23. 

Entrambos,  ^n-trdm'-bos,  pron.  pi., 
both.    L.  60. 


Entrar,  ^n-trdr',  to  go  in,  to  enter,  to 
begin,  to  come  in.     L.  28. 

Entre,  ^n'-trd,  prep.,  between,  in  the 
course  of,  among.     L.  19. 

Entretanto,  ^n-trd-tdn'-to,  adv.,  in  the 
meantime.     L.  60. 

Entre tener,  ^n-trd-td-n^r' ,  to  entertain, 
to  occupy,  to  divert.     L.  ,40. 

Entusiasmo,  ^n-tu-seds'-mo,  s.  m.,  en- 
thusiasm.   L.  54. 

Enviar,  ^n-vedr\  to  send.     L.  14. 

Envidiar,  en-ve-THedr' ,  to  envy.  L. 
40. 

Equivocacidn,  d-M-vo-cd-theon'  [a-kg. 
vo-cS-seon'],  s.  f.,  mistake,  misconcep- 
tion.    L.  50. 

Eqnivocar,  d-ke-vo-cdr' ,  to  make  a  mis- 
take, to  mistake.     L.  47. 

Erguir,  ^r-gher',  to  hold  erect  (as  the 
head,  etc.).     L.  42. 

Errar,  ^-hrdr\  to  err,  to  miss.     L.  41. 

Erndicidn,  d-rH-de-the-on'  [a-rfi-de-se- 
on'].  s.  f.,  erudition.     L.  52. 

Escaldar,  ks-cdl-ddr\  to  scald.     L.  65. 

Escena,  Ps-the'-riQ,  [g-sa'-na],  s.  f.,  scene. 
L.  65. 

Eso^ptico,  h-tMp'-te-co  [g-sgp'-tg-co], 
adj.,  skeptical.    L.  45. 

Esooba,  ^s-co'-bQ,  s.  f.,  broom.     L.  49. 

Escobajo,  h-co-bd'-ho,  s.  f.,  miserable 
stump  of  a  broom.     L.  49. 

Esooger,  ^s-co-Mr',  to  choose.    L.  65. 

Escribano,  ^s-cre-bd'-tio,  s.  m.,  notary. 
L.  19. 

Escribiente,  i^s-cre-be^n'-td,  s.  m., 
amanuensis,  clerk.     L.  38. 

Escribir,  ^s-cre-bcr',  to  write.     L.  8. 

Escritor,  ^s-cre-tor',  s.  m.,  writer,  au- 
thor.    L.  19. 

Escritura.  h-cre-tu'-rg,,  writing,  docu- 
ment, conveyance ;  las  escrituras, 
the  Scriptures.     L.  19. 

Escnchar,  Ps-cH-chdr' ,  to  hearken,  to 
listen.     L.  60. 

Esouela,  ^s-hud'-la,  s.  f.,  school.    L.  21. 

Egcultor,  ^s-cHl-ior',  s.  m.,  sculptor. 
L.  31. 

Escultura,  ^s-cul-tu'-ra,  s.  f.,  sculpture. 
L.  31. 

Esforzar,  ^s-for-thdr'  [es-for-sar'],  to 
strengthen,  to  exert,  to  make  effort. 
L.  60. 

Esfuerzo,  U-fu^r'-tho  [es-ffier'-so],  s.  m., 
endeavor,  effort.     L.  47. 

Espacio,  h-pd'-theo  [es-pS'-seo],  s.  m., 
space.     L.  48. 

Espada,  es-pd'-Tna,  s.  f.,  sword.    L.  57. 

Espadachin,  ^s-pd-wnd-chen' ,  s.  m., 
bully.     L.  63. 

Espalda,  ^s-pdl'-d§,  s.  f.,  shoulder;  pi. 
back.     L.  59. 

Espana,  ^s-pdn'-yg,,  s.  f.,  Spain.    L.  9. 


472 


VOCABCLAEY. 


Espanol,  ^-pdn-yoV,  s.  and  adj.,  Span- 
ish language  and  Spanish.  A  la  es- 
paiiola,  in  the  Spanish  fashion.    L.  2. 

Especie,  (^s-pd'-thed  [gs-ps'-sea],  s.  f., 
species,  sort,  kind.     L.  40. 

Especiero,  ^s-pd-thed'-ro  [es-pa-sea'-ro], 
s.  m.,  spicer,  grocer.    L.  65. 

Espejo,  ^s-pd'-ho,  s.  m.,  looking-glass. 
L.  60. 

Esperanza,  Is-pd-rdn'-thg,  [Ss-pa-ran'-sa], 
s.  f.,  hope.     L.  27. 

Esperar,  h-pd-rdr',  to  hope,  to  expect, 
to  await.     L.  32. 

Espiritu,  ^-pe'-re-tu,  s.  m.,  spirit.  L. 
45. 

Esposa,  (^s-po'-sa,  s.  f.,  wife.     L.  39. 

Esposo,  ^-po'-so,  s.  m.,  husband.  L. 
39. 

Esquela,  ^-hd'-lg,,  s.  f.,  note.     L.  56. 

Esquina,  is-ke'-na,  s.  f.,  corner.    L.  51. 

Establecer,  es-td-bld-th^r'  [gs-ta-bia-sgr'J, 
to  establish.     L.  42. 

Estacion,  ^s-td-theon'  [?s-ta-seon'],  s.  f., 
season,  station.     L.  60. 

Estado,  h-td'-THo,  s.  m.,  state.    L.  19. 

Estar,  ^s-tdr',  to  be,  to  understand. 
Estar  para  salir,  to  be  about  to  set 
out.  Estar  por  alguno,  to  be  for  one. 
i  Estd  usted  ?  do  you  understand  ? 
L.  22. 

Este,  ^s'-td,  s.  m.,  east.    L.  22. 

Este,  Esta,  Esto,  ^s'-td,  ^'-t^,  ^s'-to, 
dem.  pron.,  this,  this  one,  he,  she, 
it.     L.  18. 

Estilo,  Ps-te'-lo,  s.  m.,  style.     L.  52. 

Estimable,  ^-te-md'-hld,  adj.,  estima- 
ble.    L.  39. 

Estimar,  ^-te-mdr'^  to  esteem,  to  esti- 
mate.   L.  39. 

Esto,  ^s'-to  (see  Este).    L.  18. 

Estocada,  h-to-cd-THQ,  s.  f.,  thrust, 
stab.     L.  53. 

Estratagrema,  h-trd-t4-hd'-mu,  s.  f., 
stratagem,  ruse.     L.  44. 

Estrechar,  ^-trd-chdr',  to  tighten,  to 
squeeze,  to  press,  to  make  narrow. 
L.  60. 

Estrecho,  ^-trd'-cho,  adj.,  narrow, 
straitened,  close,  intimate.  Estre- 
cho, s.  m.,  strait.     L.  60. 

Estribo,  U-tre'-bo,  s.  m.,  stirrup.  L. 
38. 

Estudiante,  (^-tip-Tnedn'-td,  s.  m.,  stu- 
dent.    L.  38. 

Estudiar,  ^-tH-THe&r',  to  study.     L.  3. 

Estudio,  ^s-tu'-THeo,  s.  m.,  study.  L. 
25. 

Eternidad,  d-thr-ne-rudTH' ,  s.  f.,  eter- 
nity.    L.  36. 

Eterno,  d-t^r'-no,  adj.,  eternal.     L.  41. 

Evidencia,  d-vd-d^n'-theq  fa-va-dgn'-sea], 
s.  f.,  evidence.    L.  59. 


Evitar,   d-ve-tdr',    to   avoid,   to  keep 

from.     L.  47. 
Exagreracion,  ^k-sd-hd-rd-theon'  [ek-sS- 

ha-ra-seon'],  s.  f.,  exaggeration.     L. 

48. 
Exagerar,  ek-sd-hd-rdr' ,  to  exaggerate. 

L.  60. 
Examen,   ^k-sd'-mtn,  s.  m.,  examina- 
tion.   L.  38. 
Examinar,  ^-sd-me-ndr' ,  to  examine. 

L.  41. 
Exceder,   ^ks-thd-TH^r'  [?k-sa-THer'],  to 

exceed,  to  overstep,  to  surpass.    L. 

53. 
Excelente,  ^ks-ihd-lH'-td  [gk-sa-i^n'-ta], 

adj.,  excellent.     L.  53. 
Ezcepcidn,  ^ks-tMp-theon'  [gk-sep-secn'], 

s.  f.,  exception.    L.  45. 
Exceptuar,  ^ks-tMp-tudr'  CSk-sep-tMr'], 

to  except.     L.  60. 
Exclamacion,  eks-cld-md-theon'  [eks-cla- 

ma-8eoii',s.  f.,  exclamation.     L.  24. 
Exclamar,    ^ks-cld-mdr' ,   to    exclaim. 

L.  60. 
Exousa,  ^ks-cu'-sa,  s.  f.,  excuse,  apol- 
ogy.    L.  60. 
Excusar,  ^ks-cu-sdr',  to  excuse,  to  apol- 
ogize.    L.  27. 
Exhibicidn,     ^ks-e-be-theon'     [gks-g-be- 

aeon'],  s.  f.,  exhibition.     L.  48. 
Exhibir,  ^ks-e-ber',  to  exhibit.     L.  60. 
Exigir,  ^k-se-her',  to  exact,  to  require, 

to  demand.     L.  38. 
Existencia,  ^k-ses-ten'-thea  [ek-sgs-tgn'- 

sea],  s.  f.,  existence  (pi.  stock).    L. 

52.' 
Existir,  ^h-ses-ter' ,  to  exist.     L.  40. 
Exito,    ^k'-se-to,    s.  m.,  result,   issue. 

Buen  exito,  success. 
Experiencia,    eks-pd-rehi'-fhea  [eks-pa- 

reen'-sea],  s.  f.,  experience.     L.  41. 
Explicacidn,   ^ks-ple-cd-tkeon'  [eks-pie- 

cS-seon'],  s.  f.,  explanation.     L.  48. 
Explicar,  ^ks-ple-cdr' ,  to  explain.     L. 

45. 
Exponer,  eks-po-nh'',  to  expose,  to  ex^ 

pound.     L.  51. 
Expresar,  ^ks-prd-sdr' ,  to  express.    L. 

52. 
Expresion,  ^ks-prd-seon' ,  s.  f.,  expres- 
sion.    L.  56. 
Expresivo,  ^ks-prd-se'-vo,  sidy,  expres- 
sive.   L.  65. 
Exterior,   ^ks-td-reor' ,  s.  m.,  outside, 

exterior.     L.  48. 
Extra,  Sks'-tra,  adv.,  extra.     L.  60. 
Extranjero,    ^ks-trdng-hd'-ro,    s.    m., 

foreigner.     L.  60. 
Extranar,  ^ks-trdn-ydr' ,  to  wonder  at, 

to  find  strange.     L.  60. 
Extrano,   ^ks-trdn'-yo,    adj.,    strange. 

L.  48. 


VOCABULARY. 


473 


Extraordinario,  ^ks-trdor-de-nd'-reo, 
adj.,  extraordinary.     L.  46. 

Extremado,  eks-trd-md'-THo,  adj.,  ex- 
treme.   L.  55. 

Fabricar,  fd-bre-cdr\  to  build,  to  make, 

to  manufacture.     L.  48. 
Faccidn,  fdk-theon'    Lfak-seon'],    s.    f., 

feature,  faction.     L.  35. 
Facil,  fd'-thel  [fa'-sel],  adj.,  easy.     L. 

21. 
Pacilidad,     fd-the-le-THdrn'     Cfa-se-le- 

thSth],  s.  f.,  facility,  ease.     L.  36. 
Eacilitar,  fd-the-le-tdr'  Cfa-se-le-tSr'],  to 

facilitate,  to  make  easy,  to  procure. 

L.  49. 
Eacilmente,  fd-thel-m^n'-td  [f^-sei-mSn'- 

ta],  adv.,  easily.     L.  49. 
Faotura,  fdk-tu'-rg,,  s.  f.,  invoice.    L. 

63. 
Facultad,  fd-cul-fdTH',    s.  f.,  faculty, 

power  to  do  anything,  liberty  to  do 

anything.     L.  63. 
Falso,  fdl'-so,  adj.,  false.     L.  45. 
T aXta.,  fdl'-ta,  s.  f.,  want,  fault,  lack. 

L.  27. 
Faltar,  fdl-tdr',  to  want,  lack,  to  be 

lacking  in.    L.  31. 
Pama, /a'-m(j,  s.  f.,  fame,  reputation, 

repute.     L.  65. 
Fcmilia,  fd-me'-lea,  s.  f.,  family.    L. 

23. 
Eamiliar,  fd-me-ledr',  adj.,  familiar. 

L.  49. 
Eamiliaridad,   fd-me-led-re-THdTH',  s. 

f.,  familiarity.     L.  65. 
Famoso,  fd-mo'-so,  adj.,  famous.    L. 

45. 
Panatico,  fd-nd'-te-co,  adj.,  fanatical. 

L.  35. 
Fas,  fds,  por  fas  6  por  nefas,  right  or 

wrong  ;  justly  or  unjustly.     L.  63. 
Fastidio,  fds-te'-THeo,  s.  m.,  trouble, 

annoyance.     L.  47. 
Favor,  fd-vor',   s.  m.,   favor,   mercy, 

help.     A  favor  de,  in  behalf  of.     L. 

39. 
Favorecer,  fd-vo-rd-th^r'   [fS-vo-ra-sgr'], 

to  favor.     L.  56. 
Favorite,  fd-vo-re'-to,  adj.,    favorite. 

L.  54. 
Fe,/a,  s.  f.,  faith.    L.  45. 
Febrero,  f^-hrd'-ro,  s.  m.,  February. 

L.  24. 
Fecha,  fd'-cha,  s.  f,,  date.     L.  20. 
Felicidad,     fd-le-the-THdrH'     [fa-le-se- 

thSth'],  s.  f.,  happiness,  felicity.     L. 

48. 
Felicitar,  fd-le-the-tdr'  [fa-lg-se-tSr'J,  to 

felicitate,  to  congratulate.     L.  61. 
Feliz,  fd-leth'  [falls'],  adj.,  happy,  for- 
tunate.  L.  21. 


Felizmente,  fd-leth-m^n'-td  [fa-ies-men'- 
ta],  adv.,  happily,  fortunately.  L. 
49. 

Femenino,  fd-md-ne'-no^  adj.,  feminine. 
L.  47. 

Feo,  fd'-o,  adj.,  ugly.     L.  7. 

F er oz,  fd-roth'  [ffi-ros'],  adj.,  ferocious, 
fierce,  ravenous.     L.  54. 

Ferrocarril,  f^-hro-cd-hrel\  s.  m.,  rail- 
road.    L.  60. 

Fiado,  fed'-THo,  adj.,  confident,  trust- 
ing.    Al  fiado,  on  credit.     L.  61. 

Fiar,  fedr',  to  trust,  to  go  bail.  L. 
61. 

Fiel,  fedV,  adj.,  faithful.     L.  21. 

Fiesta,  feds' -td,  s.  f.,  feast,  festival, 
fete.     Dia  de  fiesta,  holiday.     L.  62. 

TigVLTQ.,  fe-ffu'-rci,  s.  f.,  figure,  form, 
shape.  Hacer  figura,  to  make  or  cut 
a  figure.     L.  63. 

Fig-urado,  fe-gu-rd'-FHO,  adj.,  figura- 
tive.    L.  51. 

Filosofastro,  fe-lo-so-fds'-tro,  s.  m., 
philosophaster.     L.  49. 

Fii6sofo,/e-Zo'-so-/o,  s.  m.,  philosopher. 
L.  49. 

Fin,  fen,  s.  m.,  object,  end,  point.  A 
fin  de,  in  order  to.    L.  45. 

Final,  fe-ndV,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  end,  ter- 
mination, final.     L.  61. 

Finalmente, /e-?i^^?w^n'-<a,  adv.,  final- 
ly.   L.  49. 

Fino, /e'-MO,  adj.,  fine,  clever,  hand- 
some, refined.     L.  56. 

Firma,/e?''-wa,  s.  f.,  signature.     L.  56. 

Fisonomia,  fe-so-no-me'-a,  s.  f.,  physi- 
ognomy.    L.  45. 

Flaqueza,  fid-kd'-tha  [flS-ka'-sa],  s.  f., 
leanness,  weakness,  foible,  frailty. 
L.  64. 

Fondo,  fon'-do,  s.  m.,  bottom,  ground 
(of  colored  articles) ;  pi.  funds,  cash, 
money.     L.  60. 

Formal,  for-mdV,  adj.,  formal,  reliable, 
respectable.     L.  45. 

Formalidad,  for-md-le-THdrn',  s.  f., 
formality,  reliability.     L.  45. 

Formal,  for-mdr\  to  form,  to  shape. 
L.  43. 

Fortuna,  for-tu'-na,  s.  f.,  fortune,  luck. 
L.  42. 

Fragrata,  frd-gd'-tc^,  s.  f.,  frigate.  L. 
60. 

Fraile,  fr^'e-ld,  s.  m.,  friar.    L.  41. 

Frances,  frdn-thds  [frSn-sas'l,  s.  m.  and 
adj.,  French,  Frenchman.     L.  3. 

Franoia,  frdyi'-thea  [fran'-seal,  s.  f., 
France.     L.  9. 

Francisco,  frdn-thes'-co  [fran-ses'-co],  s. 
m.,  Francis.     L.  44. 

Franco,  f ran' -co,  adj.,  frank,  candid, 
intimate.     L.  34. 


474 


VOCABULARY. 


Franqueza,  frdn-M'-tha  [fran-ka'-sal,  s. 

f.,  frankness,  intimacy.     L.  48.~ 
Frase,  fra'-sdy  s.  f.,  phrase,  sentence. 

L.  51. 
Fray,  frd'-e,  s.  m.,  friar.     L.  41. 
Frecuente,/ra-fc?tgn'-^,  adj.,  frequent. 

L.  29. 
Freir,  frder\  to  fry.     L.  52. 
Frente,  fren'-td,  adj.,  front,  s.  f.,  fore- 
head.    En  frente,  opposite.     L.  45. 
Fresco,  frP^'-co,  adj.,  fresh,  cool.    Pin- 

tura  al  fresco,  fresco  painting.     L. 

46. 
Fresco,  fr^s'-co.  s.   m.,   cool  breeze; 

fresco  (painting).     L.  46. 
Frio,  fre'-o,  adj.,  cold.     L.  25. 
Friolera,  freo-ld'-ra,  s.  f.,  trifle.    L. 

37. 
Frnta,  fru'-ta,  s.  f.,  fruit.    L.  31. 
Yruto,  frU'-to,  s.  m.,  fruit  (produce). 

L.  40. 
Fuego,  fild'-go,  s.  m.,  fire.     L.  34. 
'FueJite,fuH'-td,s.  f.,  fountain,  spring, 

source.     L.  52. 
Fnera,  fUd'-rQ,  adv.,  out.    Fuera  de 

que,  besides.     L.  31. 
Fuera!   fud'-r^,   inlj.,   out!  begone! 

away !    L.  31. 
Fuerza,  fder'-tha  [fftgr'-sft],  s.  f.,  force, 

strength.     A.  fuerza  de,  by  dint  of. 

L.  58. 
YjL^dL,  fu'-ga,  s.  f.,  flight,  escape.    L. 

57. 
Fulano, /w-Z^'-no,  s.  m.,  so  and  so,  such 

a  one.     L.  55. 
Fumar,  fu-mdr',  to  smoke.    L.  42. 
Fusil,  fu-seV,  s.  m.,  gun.     L.  49. 
Fusilar,  fu-se-ldr',  to  shoot  (mil.)    L. 

45. 
Future,  ffi-tu'-ro,  s.  m.,  future  (tense). 

L.  43. 
Future,  fii-tu'-ro,  adj.,  future.     L.  43. 

Galan,  gd-Mn',  s.  m.  and  adj.,  gallant, 
actor  ;  gallant.     L.  58. 

Galante,  qd-ldn'-td,  adj.,  gallant,  court- 
ly.    L.  58. 

iTalicismo,  gd-le-thes'-mo,  s.  m..  Galli- 
cism.    L.  61. 

Galleg-o,  gdl-yd'-go  [gS-ya'-go],  s.  m., 
Galician.     L.  55. 

Gallina,  gdl-ye'-na  [ga-y€'-na],  s.  f.,  hen. 
L.  5. 

Gana,  gd'-na,  s.  f.,  desire,  will,  appe- 
tite.    L.  59. 

Ganapierde,  gd-nd-pe^r'-dd,  s.  m.,  a 
gave-away  game  of  checkers.  L. 
50. 

Ganar,  gd-ndr',  to  gain,  to  win.     L.  27. 

Ganso,  gdn'-so,  s.  m.,  goose.  Hablar 
por  boca  de  ganso,  to  repeat  what 
has  been  said  by  others.     L.  63. 


Garrotaso,  gd-hro-id'-so,  s.  m.,  blow 
with  a  cudgel.     L.  44. 

Garrote,  gd-hro'-td,  s.  m.,  cudgel.  L. 
44. 

Gas  tar,  gds-tdr',  to  waste,  spend,  to  ex- 
pend.   L.  50. 

Gatillo,  gd-tel'-yo  [ga-ie'-yo],  s.  m.  dim., 
little  cat,  trigger  of  a  gun.     L.  53. 

Gato,  gd'-to,  s.  m.,  cat.    L.  46. 

Gemido,  hd-me'-THo,  s.  m.,  groan, 
moan,  lamentation.     L.  59. 

General,  hd-nd-rdl',  s.  m.  and  adj., 
general.     L.  45. 

Genero,  hd'-nd-ro,  s.  m.,  gender,  genus, 
kind,  sort,  cloth.     L.  57. 

Gentilicio,  Mn-te-le'-theo  [h?n-ts-i6'. 
86o],  adj.,  peculiar  to  a  nation.  L. 
49. 

Geutio,  Mn-te'-o,  s.  m.,  great  crowd, 
multitude.     L.  40. 

Gentualla,  Mn-tual'-yg,  [hgn-tfla'-ya],  s. 
f.,  rabble,  mob.     L.  49. 

Gigantesoo,  he-gdn-t^'-co,  adj.,  gigan- 
tic.    L.  49. 

Gineta,  he-nd'-ta,  tener  los  cascos  d  la 
gineta,  to  be  hare-brained.    L.  64. 

Globo,  glo'-bo,  s.  m.,  globe,  balloon.  L. 
37. 

Gobernante,  go-Mr-ndn'-td,  act.  part, 
governing ;  los  gobernantes^the  rulers. 
L.  38. 

Gobernar,  go-Mr-ndr',  to  govern.  L. 
34. 

Gobierno,  go-be^r'-no,  s.  m.,  govern- 
ment.   L.  40. 

Goce,  go'-thd  [go'-sa],  s.  m.,  enjoyment. 
L.  54. 

Golpe,  gol'-pd,  s.  m.,  blow,  stroke.  L. 
61. 

Gonzalez,  gon-thd'-Uth  [gon-sS'-ies],  s. 
m.,  Gonzalez.     L.  49. 

Gorra,  go'-hra,  s.  f.,  bonnet.  Vivirde 
gorra,  to  live  at  others'  expense  ;  to 
sponge.     L.  64. 

Gozar,  go-thdr  [go-sSr'l,  to  enjoy.  L. 
25. 

Gozo,  go'-tho  [go'-so],  s.  m.,  joy,  pleas- 
ure.    L.  51. 

Grabado,  grd-bd'-rno,  s.  m.,  engrav- 
ing, cut  (picture).     L.  52. 

Grabar,  grd-bdr',  to  engrave.     L.  52. 

Gracia,  grd'-thea  [gra'-sea],  s.  f.,  grace, 
favor,  pardon,  gracefulness.  L. 
51. 

Gracias,  grd'-theas  [gra'-seas],  s.  m. 
pi.,  thanks,  thank  you.     L.  23. 

Grade,  grd'-wHo,  s.  m.,  grade,  degree. 
L.  60. 

Gramatica,  grd-md'-te-ca,  s.  f.,  gram- 
mar.    L.  5. 

Gramatical,  grd-md-te-cdV ,  adj.,  gram- 
matical.   L.  51. 


VOCABULARY. 


475 


Grande,  grdn'-dd,  adj.,  large,  grfeat. 

L.  7. 
Granizar,   grd-ne-thdr'   [grjt-ne-82r'],  to 

hail.    L.  30. 
Grato,  gr&'-to,&d2.,  grateful,  pleasing, 

agreeable.     L.  56. 
Grito,  gre'-to,  s.  m.,  cry,  shout,  scream. 

L.  59. 
Guerra,  gM'-hra,  s.  f.,  war.    L.  56. 
Guinada,  ghen-yd'-THa^s.  f.,  wink.    L. 

54. 
GuipTizcoa,  ghe-pHth'-cog,  [ghe-pfts'-coa], 

s.  f.,  Guipuscoa  (a province  in  Spain). 

L.  55. 
Gustar,  gus-tdr',  to  like,  to  please,  to 

taste.     L.  31. 
Gusto,  gUs'-to,  s.  m.,  taste,  pleasure. 

L.  23. 

Habana,  d-bd'-nci,  s.  f.,  Havana.    L.  12. 
Habanero,  d-hd-ne'-ro,  adj.  and  s.  m., 

Havanese.     L.  49. 
Haber,  d-Mr\  to  have  (used  only  as  an 

auxiliary  verb  with  this  significa- 
tion.    See  L.  66).     Impersonal  verb, 

there  to  be.      L.  12. 
Habil,  ^'-6e^adj.,  able,  skilful,  expert, 

clever.     L.  21. 
Habilidad,  d-be-le-THdrn' ,  s.  f.,  ability, 

skilfulness,  expertness.     L.  36. 
Habitante,  d-be-tdn'-td,  s.  m.,  inhabit- 
ant.    L.  40. 
Hablador,  a-bld-wnor',  adj.  and  s.  m., 

talkative  and  talker.    L.  20. 
Hablar,  a-bldr\  to  speak,  to  talk.    L.  1. 
Hacer,  d-tMr'  [S-ser'J,  to  do,  to  make. 

Hacerde,  to  act  as.     L.  19. 
Hacia,   d'-thea  [S'-sea],   adv.,   toward. 

L.  19. 
Hallar,  dl-ydr'  [S-ySr'],  to  find.     L.  37. 
Hambre,  dm' -bra,  s.  f.,  hunger.     Te- 

ner  hambre,  to  be  hungry.     L.  25. 
Hasta,   ds'-ta,  adv.,  until,  till,  as  far 

as,  even.     L.  19. 
Hazmereir,  dth-md^der'  [Ss-ma-raer'],  s. 

m.,  laughing-stock.     L.  50. 
He!  a,  intj.,  oh!  what!  what  is  it! 

L.  44. 
Hecbo,  d'-cho,  s.  m.,  fact,  event.    L. 

52. 
Helar,  d-ldr',  to  freeze.    L.  30. 
Helena,  d-ld'-n§,  s.  f.,  Helena,  Ellen. 

L.  19. 
Hermanastro,    ^r-md-nds'-tro,    s.    m. 

aug.,  step-brother,  half-brother.     L. 

49. 
Hermano,    er-md'-no,    s.  m.,   brother. 

L.  6. 
Hermoso,     ?r-mo'-so,  adj.,     beautiful, 

handsome.     L.  7. 
Hermosura,  ^r-mo-su'-r<^,  s.  f.,  beauty, 

handsomeness.    L.  53. 


Herrero,  ^-hrd'-ro,  s.  m.,  blacksmith. 

L.  65. 
Hielo,  ed'-lo,  s.  m.,  ice,  frost.     L.  30. 
Hierba,  y^r'-ba,s.  f.,  herb,  grass.  L.  60. 
Hierro,  e^'-hro,  s.  m.,  iron.     L.  61. 
Higo,  e'-go,  s.  m.,  fig.     L.  40. 
Hijastro,  e-hds'-tro,  s.  m.,  stepson.  L.  49. 
Hijo,  e'-ho,  s.  m.,  son.    L.  6. 
Hilar,  e-ldr',  to  spin.    L.  65. 
Hilo,  e'-lo,  s.  m.,  thread.     L.  24. 
Hinchar,  en-chdr\  to  swell.     L.  53. 
Historia,  es-to'-rea,  s.  f.,  history.    L. 

15. 
Hoja,  o'-ha,  s.  f.,  leaf  (of  a  tree  or  a 

book).     L.  59. 
Hola,  o'-Iq,  intj.,  hallo  !    L.  46. 
Holg-azan,  ol-gd-thdn'   [oi-gS-sSn'],  adj. 

and  s.  m.,  idle,  lazy,  loiterer,  idler. 

L.  6. 
Hombre,  om'-brd,  s.  m.,  man.    Es  mds 

hombre  que  su  hermano,  he  is  more 

of  a  man  than  his  brother.  L.  6. 
Honor,  o-nor',  s.  m.,  honor.  L.  39. 
Honroso,  on-hro'-so,  adj.,   honorable. 

L.  52. 
Hora,  o'-ra,  s.  f.,  hour.     L.  23. 
Homo,  or' -no,  s.  m.,  oven.     Cocer  en 

homo,  to  bake.     L.  60. 
Horrendo,  o-hr^n'-do,  horrible  (poet.). 

L.  55. 
Hortelano,  or-td-ld'-no,  s.  m.,  gardener. 

L.  65. 
Hospital,   os-pe-tdl',   s.   m.,    hospital. 

L.  47. 
Hotel,  o-tM',  s.  m.,  hotel.     L.17. 
Hueso,  Hd'-sd,  s.  m.,  bone.    L.  61. 
Hu^sped,  uh'-p^TH,  s.  m.,  host.   Echar 

la  cuenta  sin  la  huesped,  to  reckon 

without  the  host.    L.  63. 
Huir,  H-er',  to  flee,  to  make  off.     L.  34. 
Humano,  ii-md'-no,  adj.,  human.    L. 

48. 
Humor,  H-mor'^  s.  m.,  humor,  wit.    L. 

27. 

Idea,  ^-THd'-g,,  s.  f,,  idea,  thought.    L. 

54. 
Ideal,  e-THddV,  adj.,  ideal.     L.  48. 
Idioma,  e-Tneo'-ma,  s.  m.,  language. 

L.  55. 
Idiota,  e-THeo'-ta,  s.  m.,  idiot.     L.  48. 
Idiotismo,  e-Tneo-tes'-mo,  s.  m.,  idiom. 

L.  49. 
Iglesia,  e-gld'-sea,    s.  f.,   church.     L. 

16. 
Ignorancia,  eg-no-rdn-thea   [eg-no-ian'- 

seaj,  s.  f.,  ignorance.     li.  52. 
Ignbrante,  eg-no-rdn'-td,  adj.,  ignorant. 

L.  61. 
Ignorar,  eg-no-rdr',  to  be  ignorant  of, 

not  to  know.     L.  61. 
Igual,  e-gilal',  adj.,  equal,  alike.  L.  48. 


476 


VOCABULARY. 


Igrnaldad,  e-gual-TH(iTH\  s.  f.,  equal- 
ity.    L.  55, 

Ilasidn,  e-lu-seon',  s.  f.,  illusion.  L. 
48.  ^ 

Imagrinacioii,  e-md-he-nd-theon'  [e-mS- 
he-na-seon'],  s.  f.,  imagination.  L. 
58. 

Impedir,  em-pd-THer' ,  to  impede,  to 
hinder.    L.  43. 

Imperative,  em-pe-rd-te'-vo,  adj.  and s. 
m.,  imperative,  imperative  mode. 
L.  43. 

Imperfeccidn,  em-p^r-felc-theon'  [em- 
per-fek-seon'],  s.  f.,  imperfection.  L. 
55. 

Imperfecto,  em-p^r-f^lc'-to,  adj.,  imi)er- 
fect.     L.  43. 

Impersonal,  em-ph'-so-ntU\  adj.,  im- 
personal.    L.  61. 

Imponer,  em-po-n^r',  to  impose,  to  in- 
form, to  acquaint.     L.  44. 

Importante,  em-por-tdn'-tdy  adj.,  im- 
portant.   L.  38. 

Importar,  hn-por-tdr',  to  import,  to  be 
of  importance,  to  amount  to.    L.  31. 

Imposible,  em-pose' -hid,  adj.,  impossi- 
ble.    L.  31. 

Impreso,  eni-prd'-so,  p.  p.  of  Impri- 
MIR,  to  print.     L.  61. 

Imprimir,  em-pre-mer',  to  print.  L. 
61. 

Improvisar,  em-pro-ve-sdr' ,  to  impro- 
vise, to  extemporise.     L.  58. 

Improvise,  em-pro-ve'-so.  De  improri- 
so,  unexpectedly,  on  a  sudden.  L. 
62. 

Imprudencia,  em-pru-dhi'-thea  [em-pra- 
den'-seal,  s.  f.,  imprudence.     L.  43. 

Imprudente,  em-pni-den'-id,  adj.,  im- 
prudent.    L.  20. 

Impuesto,  em-puds' -to,  p.  p.  of  Impo- 
ner.   L.  52. 

In,  en,  Lat.  prep.,  used  in  Spanish  as 
a  prefix  only,  and  generally  with  a 
negative  signification.     L.  50. 

Incendiar,  en-thhi-dedr'  [en-sen-dear'], 
to  set  fire  to  a  house.     L.  51. 

Incluir,  en-duer',  to  include.     L.  49. 

Incdmedamente,  en-co'-mo-TnS-mH-td, 
adv.,  inconveniently,  uncomfort- 
ably.    L.  29. 

Incemedar,  en-co-mo-THdr' ,  to  put  out, 
to  incommode.     L.  47. 

Incomodo,  en-co'-mo-THo,  adj.,  incom- 
modious, inconvenient.     L.  29. 

Incomplete,  en-com-pld'-to,  adj.,  in-  i 
complete.     L.  48.  j 

Inconveniente,  en-con-vd-ne-hi'-td,  s.  ■ 
m.  and  adj.,  difficulty,  obstacle,  in-  i 
convenient.     L.  64.  : 

Increible,  en-crde'-bld,  adj.,  incredible. 
L.  61.  1 


Indefinide,  en-dd-fe-ne'-THo,  adj.,  in- 
definite.    L.  61. 

Independencia,  en-dd-phi-dhi' -theg,  [9n 
da-pgn-den'-8ga],  s.  f.,  independence. 
L.  35. 

Indicative,  en-de-cd-te'-vo,  adj.,  indic^ 
,  ative.     L.  43. 

Indice,  en'-de-thd  [en'-de-sa],  s.  m.,  in- 
dex.    L.  61. 

Indigne,  en-deg'-no,  adj.,  unworthy, 
,  undeserving.     L.  53. 

Indig'O,  en'-de-goy  adj.  (See  Anil.) 
L.  54. 

Indirecte,  en-de-r^k'-to,  adj.,  indirect. 
L.  51. 

Individue,  en-de-ve'-THuo,  s.  m.,  in- 
dividual.    L.  51. 

Industrioso,  en-dus-treo'-so,  adj.,  in- 
dustrious.    L.  35. 

Inepte,  e-nPp'-to,  adj.,  unfit,  inept. 
L.  51. 

Inexplicable,  e-n^ks-ple-cd'-bld,  adj., 
inexplicable.    L.  61. 

Infancia,  en-fcfn'-ihea  [en-fan'-sea],  s.  f.> 
infancy.    L.  54. 

Inferior,  en-fd-reor',  adj.,  inferior.    L. 

,  21. 

Infime,  en'-fe-mo,  adj.,  lowest.    L.  21. 

Infinidad,  en-fe-ne-THdTH\s.  f.,  infini- 
ty.    L.  40. 

Infinitive,  en-fe-ne-te'-vo,  adj.,  infini- 
tive.    L.  43. 

Infinite  en-fe-ne'-to,  adj.,  infinite.  L. 
39. 

Inflnir,  en-fluer',  to  influence.     L.  48. 

Infertnnie,  en-for-tu'-neo,  s.  m.,  mis- 
fortune.    L.  41. 

Ingenie,  en-hd'-neo,  s.  m.,  genius.  L. 
61. 

Ingeniese,  en-hd-neo'-so^  adj.,  ingeni- 
ous.    L.  61. 

Inglaterra,  eng-la-W-hrg,  s.  f.,  Eng- 
land.    L.  9. 

Ingles,  eng-lds',  s.  m.  and  adj.,  Eng- 
lish.    L.  2. 

Inicial,  e-ne-thedl  [e-ne-seai'],  adj.,  ini- 
tial.    L.  56. 

Injusticia,  en-Ms-te'Ahea  Een-hus-te'- 
sea],  s.  f.,  injustice.     L.  45. 

Inmediate,  en-md^Tneii'-to,  adj.,  im- 
mediate, near.     L.  61. 

Inmemerial,  en-md-mo-redV ,  adj.,  im- 
memorial.    L.  55. 

Inecente,  e-no-then'-td  [e-no-sen'-ta], 
adj.,  innocent.     L.  34. 

Inquietar.  en-ked-iar',  to  disquiet,  to 
make  uneasy.     L.  61. 

Inqniete,  e»-A:ea'-fo,  adj.,  uneasy,  rest- 
less.    L.  61. 

Insecte,  en-sek'-io.s.  m.,  insect.    L.  61. 

Inspirar,  en-spe-rar' ,  to  inspire.  L. 
58. 


VOCABULARY. 


477 


Instante,  en-stdn'-td,  s.  m.,  instant. 
Al  instante,  immediately.    L.  42. 

Instinto,  en-sten'-to,  s.  m.,  instinct. 
L.  61. 

Instruccidn,  en-striik-theon'  [en-8tr<ik- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  instruction,  learning. 
L.  52. 

Instruido,  en-strue'-Tuo,  adj.,  in- 
structed, learned,  educated.     L.  49. 

Instruir,  en-struer',  to  instruct,  to 
teach.     L.  47. 

Instrumento,  en-strH-m^n'-to,  s.  m.,  in- 
strument.    L.  61. 

tntachable,  en-td-chd'-bld,  adj.,  unim- 
peachable, irreproachable.    L.  62. 

Intencidil,  en-t^n-theon'  [gn-tSn-seon'], 
s.  f.,  intention.     L.  61. 

Intentar,  en-t^n-tdr',  to  attempt.  L. 
61. 

Interns,  en-td-rds',  s.  m.,  interest.  L. 
54. 

Interesante,  en-td-rd-sdn'-td,  adj.,  in- 
teresting.    L.  47. 

Interesar,   en-td-rd-sdr',    to   interest. 

,  L.  61. 

Interin,  en'-td-ren,  adv.,  in  the  mean- 
while.    L.  61. 

Interior,  en-td-reor',  adj.,  interior.  L. 
48. 

Interior,  en-td-reor',  s.  m.,  interior. 
L.  45. 

Interjeccidn,  en-t(ir-h^k-theon'  [gn-t5r- 
hgk-seon'],  s.  f.,  interjection.      L.  43. 

Interrogacidn,  en-t^-hro-gd-theon'  [gn- 
tS-hro-ga-seon'J,  s.  f.,  interrogation. 
L.  61. 

Interrogante,  en-t^hro-gdn'-td,  s.  m., 
note  of  interrogation ;  act.  part,  of 
interrogar. 

Interrogar,  en-t^-hro-gdr\  to  interro- 
gate, to  question.     L.  61. 

Interrnmpir,  en-t^-hrHm-per' ,  to  inter- 
rupt.    L.  64. 

Intimidad,  en-te-me-THdTH',  s.  f.,  inti- 

^  macy.     L.  56. 

Intimo,  en'-te-mo,  adj.,  intimate.  L. 
56. 

Introducir,  en-tro-dH-ther  [en-tro-dfi- 
ser'],  to  introduce.     L.  40. 

Inutil,  e-nH'-tel,  adj.,  useless.    L.  50. 

Invariable,  en-vd-red'-bld,2Ldj.,  invari- 
able.    L.  56. 

Inversidn,  en-v^r-seon' ,  s.  f.,  inver- 
sion.   L.  61. 

Invertir,  en-vtr-ter',  to  invert.     L.  61. 

Invierno,  en-ve^r'-no,  s.  m.,  winter. 
L.  24. 

Invitar,  en-ve-tdr\  to  invite.     L.  56. 

Ir,  er,  to  go.     L.  18. 

tris,  e'-res,  s.  f.,  rainbow.     L.  61. 

Irlanda,  er-ldn'-da,  s.  f.,  Ireland.  L. 
40. 


Irregular,  e-hrd-gu-ldr' ^ adj., irregular. 

L.  43. 
Irregularidad,    e-hrd-gil-ld-re-THdTH', 

s.  f.,  irregularity.     L.  55, 
Isabel,  e-sdMV,  s.  f.,  Isabel.     L.  55. 
Isla,  es'-la,  s.  f.,  island.     L.  61. 
Italia,  e-td'-leOf,    s.  f.,  Italy.     L.  40. 
Italiano,   e-td-led'-no^  s.  m.  and  adj., 

Italian.     L.  61. 
Izquierdo,  eth-ke^r'-do  [es-keer'-do],  adj., 

left,  left  side.    L.  50. 

Jabdn,  hd-hon',  s.  m.,  soap.    L.  5. 

Jamas,  hd-mds'^ady.,  never.     L.  25. 

Jaque,  hd'-kd,  check  (in  playing  chess). 
L.  42. 

Jardin,  har-den\  s.  m.,  garden.     L.  18. 

Jardinero,  har-de-nd'-ro,  s.  m.,  gar- 
dener.    L.  34. 

Jose,  ho-sd',  s.  m.,  Joseph.     L.  43. 

Joven,  Tio'-ijgw,  adj.,  young.    L.  13. 

Juan,  hiian',  s.  m.,  John.    L.  17. 

Juana,  hua'-na^  s.  f.,  Jane.    L.  17. 

Juego,  hud' -go,  s.  m.,  game,  play,  set. 
L.  61. 

Jueves,  hud'-v^s,s.  m.,  Thursday.  L. 
9. 

Juez,  Math'  ChMs'],  s.  m.,  judge.    L.  9. 

Juprar,  hu-gdr',  to  play.    L.  41. 

Jnioio,  hUe'-theo  [hlie'-seo],  s.  m.,  judg- 
ment, sense,  trial.     L.  53. 

Julio,  hu'-leo,  s.  m.,  July,  Julius.  L. 
24. 

Jnntar,  h4n-tdr',  to  join,  to  gather 
together.     L.  65. 

Junto,  hiln'-to,  adv.,  near,  close  to. 
L.  39. 

Juramento,  hUrrd-mhi'-to,  s.  m.,  oath, 
affidavit.     L.  53. 

Justicia,  hiis-te'-thea  [hfts-te'-sea],  s.  f., 
justice,  righteousness.     L.  61. 

Jnsto,  hiis'-to,  adj.,  just,  right.     L.  61. 

Juventud,  hu-vhi-tixTH' ,  s.  f.,  youth. 
L.  48. 

La,  l(jL,  def.  art.,  f.  sing.     L.  5. 
La,  Iq,,  pron.  f.  sing.,  her,  it.     L.  8. 
Lacdnico,  Za-co'-ne-co,  adj.,  laconic.    Jj. 

38. 
Laboriosidad,  Id-ho-reo-se-THdTH,  s.  f., 

industry.     L.  51. 
Lacre,  Id'-crd,  s.  m.,  sealing-wax.  L.  5. 
Lado,  Id-THO,  s.  m.,  side.    L.  18. 
Ladrdn,  ld~dron',  robber,  thief.   L.  44. 
Lago,  Id' -go,  s.  m.,  lake.     L.  40. 
Lagrrima,  la'-gre-ma,  s.  f.,  tear.    L.  51. 
Lapiz,  Id'-peth  [la'-pes],  s.  m.,  pencil. 

L.  51. 
Largro,  l(ir'-go,  adj.,  long.     L.  21. 
Lastima,  Ids'-te-ma,  s.  f.,  pity.     L.  25. 
Lastimar,  Ids-fe-mdr',  to  hurt,  wound, 

to  offend.     L.  61. 


478 


VOCABULARY. 


Latin,  ld-ten\  s.  m.,  Latin.    L.  61. 

Latinajo,  la^te-nd'-ho,  s.  m.  aug.,  dog- 
Latin.     L.  49. 

Latitud,  ld-te-tuTH\  s.  f.,  -width,  lati- 
tude.   L.  61. 

Lavandera,  Id^vdn-dd'-rQ,  s.  f.,  washer- 
woman.    L.  5. 

Lavar,  Id-vdr',  to  wash.    L.  24. 

Le,  Id,  pron.,  him,  it,  to  him,  to  it. 
L.  10. 

Leocidn,  Uh-theon'  [lek-seon'j,  s.  f.,  les- 
son.   L.  8. 

Leohe,  Id'-chd,  s.  f.,  milk.     L.  7. 

Leotura,  l^k-tu'-rg,,  s.  f.,  reading.  L. 
38. 

Leer,  Id^r',  to  read.    L.  7. 

Legna,  Id'-gtiQ,  s.  f..  league.  A  Span- 
ish league  is  2^  English  miles. 
L.  61. 

Leido,  Ide'-THO,  adj.,  bien  leido,  well 
read.     L.  52. 

Lejos,  W-hos,  adv.,  far,  distant.  A  lo 
lejos,  in  the  distance.     L.  31. 

Lengna,  l^n'-qfia,  s.  f.,  tongue,  lan- 
guage.    L.  23. 

Lenguaje,  IH-guQ'-ha,  s.  m.,  language. 
L.  66. 

Lento,  IH'-to,  adj.,  slow,  tardy,  quiet. 
L.  61. 

Ledn,  Idon,  s.  m.,  lion.     L.  54. 

Letra,  Id'-trQ,  s.  f.,  letter  (of  the  alpha- 
bet), letter  (of  credit) ;  pi.,  letters 
(literature).     L.  61. 

Levantar,  Id-vdn-tdr',  to  raise,  to  lift 
up.  Lerantarse,  to  arise,  to  get  up. 
L.  33. 

Levita,  Id-ve'-t^,  s.  m.,  Levite ;  s.  f., 
frock-coat.    L.  61. 

Ley,  Id'-e,  s.  f.,  law.     L.  8. 

Liberal,  le-hd-rdV,  adj.,  liberal.   L.  62. 

Libertad,  le-b^r-tdwH' ,  s.  f.,  liberty. 
L.  40. 

Libra,  le'-bvQ,  s.  f.,  pound.  Libra  es- 
terlina,  pound  sterling.    L.  47. 

Librar,  le-brdr',  to  free,  to  deliver,  to 
draw  on  (commercial).     L.  45. 

Libre,  le'-brd,  adj.,  free.    L.  59. 


Lisonja,  Ze-songr' -?irt,  s.  f.,  flattery.  L.61. 
Lisonjear,  le-song-hddr' ,  to  flatter.    L. 

61. 
Lisonjero,  le-song-hd'-ro,    adj.  and  s. 

m.,  flattering,  flatter.     L.  61. 
Lista,  les'-ta,  s.  f,,  list.    L.  61. 
Listo,  les'-to,  adj.,  ready,  sharp,  quick. 

L.  46. 
Literate,  le-td-rd'-to,  s.  m.,  man  of  let- 
ters, literateur.     L.  51. 
Literatura,  le-td-rd-tu'-ra,  s.  f.,  litera- 
ture.    L.  52. 
Litre,  le'-tro,  s.  m.,  litre.    L.  60. 
Lo,  lo,  neut.  art.,  the.     L.  8. 
Lo,  lo,  pron.,  him,  it.     L.  26. 
Local,  lo-cdV,  adj.,  local.     L.  54., 
Loco,  lo'-co,  adj.,  mad,  crazy.    A  ton- 

tas  y  d  locos,  inconsiderately.  L.  61. 
Loco,  lo'-co,  s.  m.,  madman.     L.  61. 
Lodo,  lo'-THO,  s.  m.,  mud,  mire.    L.  45. 
Lograr,  lo-grdr',  to  succeed,  to  reach, 

to  obtain.     L.  38. 
Londres,  lon'-drSs,  s.  m.,  London.    L, 

12. 
Longitud,  long-he-tHTH' ,  s.  f.,  length, 

longitude.     L.  61. 
Loteria,  lo-td-re'-a,  s.  f., lottery.    L.  65. 
Lucir,  lH-ther'  lifi-sgr'],  to  shine,  to  glit* 

ter.     L.  65. 
Luego,  liid'-go,  adv.,  by-and-by,  pres' 
ently  ;  conj.,  then,  therefore.    L.  33* 
Lngar,  lu-gdr',  s.  m.,   place,  village* 

En  lugar  de,  instead  of.    L.  29. 
Luis,  lues',  s.  m.,  Louis.     L.  15. 
Lnisa,   liie'-sa,  s.  f.,   Louise,   Louisa* 

L.  2. 
Lnna,  lu'-nQ,  s.  f.,  moon,     L.  61. 
Luto,  lu'-to,  s.  m..  mourning.    L.  60. 
Luz,  lulh'  [1(18'],  s.  f.,  light.    Dar  i  luZf 

to  publish,  to  bring  to  light.    L.  61. 

Llamar,  lyd-mdr'  [ya-mSr'],  to  call,  to 

knock.     L.  27. 
Llave,  lyd'-vd  [y5'-va],  s.  f.,  key.    L. 

59. 
lileg'ar,  lyd-gdr  [yS-gSr'],  to  arrive.  Lie-  i 

gar  i,  hacer,  to  become.    L.  37. 


Libreria,  le-brd-re'-a,  s.  f.,  book-store J^  Llenar,  lyd-ndr'  [ya-nar],  to  fill,  to  ful' 

L.  11.  ^      fil.     L.  54. 

Librero,  le-brd'-ro,  s.  m.,  book-seller.  iLleno,  Zya'-no  [ya'-no],  adj.,  full.   L.  54. 

L.  11.  /Llevar,  lyd-vdr'  [ya-var],  to  carry,  to  f 


Libre,  le'-bro,  s.  m.,  book.    L.  4. 
Ligero,  le-hd'-ro,  adj.,  light,  swift.  L. 

46. 
Limosna,  le-mos'-na,  s.  f.,  alms.  L.  61. 
Limpiar,  lem-pedr',  to  clean.     L.  64. 
Limpieza,  lem'-ped'-tha  [lem-pea'-saJ,  s.f., 

clea,nliness.     L.  61. 
Limpio,  lem'-peo,  adj.,  clean,  cleanly. 

L.  20. 
Linea,  le'-nda,  s.  f.,  line.    L.  61. 
Lisboa,  les-bo'-Q,  s.  f.,  Lisbon.     L.  55. 


bear,  to  bring  forth.    L.  14. 
Llorar,  lyo-rdr'  [yo-rSr'],  to  cry,  to  weep. 

L.  51. 
Lloro,  lyo'-ro  [yo'-ro],  s.  m.,  tear,  act  of 

crying,  weeping.     L.  54. 
Llover,  lyo-v^r'  [yo-ver'],  to  rain.    LIo- 

ver  d  c^ntaros,  to  pour  down.    L.  30. 
Llovisnar,   lyo-ves-ndr'  [yo-ves-nSr'],  to 

drizzle.    L.  30. 
Lin  via,  lyu'-v^q  [yt'-vga],  s.  f.,  rain,    L. 

30. 


VOCABULAHr. 


479 


Macho,  md'-cho,  s.  m.,  male ;  mule.  L. 
62. 

Madera,  md-THd'-vQ,  s.  f.,  wood,  tim- 
ber, lumber.     L.  4. 

Madras tr a,  md-drds'-trg,,  s.  f.,  step- 
mother.    L.  49. 

Madre,  mg,'-drd,  s.  f.,  mother.  Lengua 
madre,  an  original  language.    L.  6. 

Madrid,  md-dreTH',  s.  m.,  Madrid.  L. 
12. 

Madrileno,  md-dre-ldn'-yo,  s.  m.,  a  na- 
tive of  Madrid.     L.  49. 

Madrugada,  md-drH-gd'-TH^,  s.  f.,  the 
night  hours  between  midnight  and 
sunrise.     L.  65. 

Madruirar,  md-drii-gdr\  to  rise  very- 
early.     L.  62.  ^ 

Madurez,  md-THu-rdth'  [mS-THft-rSs'],  s. 
f.,  maturity,  ripeness.     L.  51. 

Maestro,  mg,ds'-tro,  s.  m.,  master, 
teacher.     L.  62. 

Magnifico,  m^gf-ne'-/e-co,  adj.,  magnifi- 
cent.   L.  58. 

Mai,  mdl,  s.  m.,  evil,  harm,  disease. 
L.  48. 

Mai,  mdl,  adv.,  badly.  Mai  de  su  gra- 
do,  in  spite  of  him.     L.  3. 

Maldito,  mdl-de'-to,  adj.,  accursed,  per- 
verse.   L.  62. 

Malicia,  md-le'-theg,  [ma-is'-sSa],  s.  f., 
malice,  wickedness.     L.  62. 

Male,  md'-lo, adj., bad,  ill,  wicked.  L. 7. 

Mama,  md-md\  s.  f.,  mama.     L.  5. 

Mandar,  mdn-ddr',  to  send,  to  com- 
mand, to  order.     L.  17. 

Manera,  md-nd'-ra,  s.  f.,  manner.  De 
manera  que,  so  that.     L.  42. 

Mania,  md-ne'-^,  s.  f.,  n^ania,  whim. 
L.  57. 

Manifestar,  md-ne-fh-tdr\  to  mani- 
fest, to  show.     L.  51. 

Manifiesto,  md-ne-fe<^s'-to,  adj.,  mani- 
fest.   L.  52. 

Mano,  md'-no,  s.  f.,  hand,  quire  (of  pa- 
per;.    L.  28. 

Manteoa,  mdn-td'-c^,  butter ;  in  the 
Americas,  lard.     L.  62. 

Mantequilla,  mdn-td-kel'-ya  [mSn-ta-kS'- 
ya],  s.  f.,  butter.  (Amer.)     L.  62. 

Manuel,  md-nix-W,  s.  m.,  Emanuel. 
L.  2. 

Manusorito,  md-nus-cre'-to,  s.  m., 
manuscript.    L.  62. 

Manzana,  mdn-thd'-na  [mSn-sS'-na],  s.  f., 
apple,  block  (of  houses).     L.  31. 

Manzanar,  mdn-thd-ndr'  [mSn-sa-nar'], 
s.^m.,  apple  orchard.     L.  49. 

Manana,   mdn-yd'-na,  s.  f.,  morning, 
to-morrow.    Pasado  manana,  the  day 
after  to-morrow.     L.  30. 
j  Mar,  mgiV,  s.  m.  and  f.,  sea.    Alta  mar, 
high  sea.     L.  62. 


Marca,  mg/V'-ca,  s.  f.,  mark,  brand.  L. 
42.  *       "     . 

Marcha,  mar'-chg,  s.  f.,  march.  Sobre 
la  marcha,  off-hand,  on  the  spot.  L. 
51. 

Marchar,  mar-chdr',  to  march.    L.  19. 

Margarita,  mg,r-gd-re'-ta,  s.  f.,  Marga- 
ret.    L.  3. 

Maria,  md-re'-a,  s.  f.,  Maiy.     L.  44. 

Martes,  mar' -Us,  s.  m.,  Tuesday.  L.  9. 

Marzo,  mar'-tho  [mar'-soJ,  s.  m.,  March. 
L.  24. 

Mas,  mds,  adv.,  more.     L.  16. 

Mas,  mds,  conj.,  but. 

Mascara,  mds'-cd-ra,  s.  f.,  mask.    L.  60. 

Masculine,  mds-cu-le'-no,  adj.,  mascu- 
line.    L.  47. 

Matar,  md-tdr',  to  kill.    L.  52. 

Matemdtico,  md-td-md'-te-co,  s.  m., 
mathematician ;  adj.,  mathematical. 
L.  60. 

Materia,  7nd-td'-reQ,  s.  f.,  matter,  sub- 
ject, affair.     L.  54. 

Material,  md-td-re-dV ,  adj.,  material. 
L.  48. 

Materialista,  md-td-red-les'-t^,  s.  m., 
materialist.     L.  36. 

Matrimonio,  md-tre-mo'-neo,  s.  m., 
matrimony,  marriage.    L.  64. 

Maullado,  mg,iil-yd'-THO  [mafi-yS'-THo], 
s.  m.,  mew  (of  a  cat).     L.  46. 

Mizimo,  mdk'-se-mo,  adj.  (supl.  of 
grande),  chief,  principal,  very  great. 
L.  21. 

Mayo,  md'-yo,  s.  m..  May  (month).  L. 
24. 

Mayor,  md-yor',  adj.,  greater,  larger. 
El  mayor,  the  greatest,  largest,  old- 
est.    L.  20. 

Mayiiscula,  md-yus' -cu-la>,  adj.,  capital 
(letter  of  the  alphabet).     L.  62. 

Me,  md,  pron.,  me,  to  me.     L.  26. 

Meca,  md'-CQ,,  s.  f.  De  Ceca  en  Meca, 
from  pillar  to  post.     L.  61. 

Media,  md'-TueQ,,  s.  f.,  stocking.  L.  10. 

Medianamente,  md-THed-nd-mhi' -td, 
adv.,  middling,  fairly.     L.  39. 

Mediania,  ind-Tned-ne'-g,,  s.  f.,  modera- 
tion, mediocrity.     L.  52. 

Mediano,  md-Tned'-no,  adj.,  medium, 
moderate.     L.  39. 

Medico,  -md'-Tne-co,  s.  m.,  physician, 
doctor.     L.  19. 

Medida,  md-wne'-Tna,  s.  f.,  measure. 
L.  55. 

Medio,  md'-THeo,  adj.,  half,  middle. 
Medianoche,  midnight.     L.  30. 

Medio,  md'-THeo,  s.  m.,  middle,  means. 
In  America  a  half  real,  or  six  and  a 
quarter  centavos.     L.  37. 

Mediodia,  md-Tueo-de' -a,  s.  m.,  noon, 
midday,  south.     L.  30. 


480 


VOCABULARY. 


Medir,  md-THer',  to  measure.     L.  39. 

Mexicano,  m^-he-cd'-no,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
Mexican.     L.  47. 

Mexico,  m^'-he-co,  s.  m.,  Mexico.  L.  20. 

Mejor,  Tod-hor',  adj.  and  adv.,  better. 
L.  25. 

Melocot6n,  mMo-co-ton' ,  s.  m.,  peach. 
Compare  durazno,  peach.  (Amer.) 
L.  31. 

Melon, m^-Zon',  s.  m.,  melon.     L.  31. 

Memoria,  md-mo'-rea,  s.  f:,  memory. 
Aprender  de  memoriay  to  leam  by 
heart.     L.  38. 

Memorias,  md-nw'-reds,  s.  f.  pi.,  re- 
membrances, compliments.     L.  39. 

Mencion,  mhi-fheon'  [mgn-seon'],  s.  f., 
mention.     L.  52. 

Mencionar,  mhi-theo-n&r'  [m5n-seo-nSr'], 
to  mention.     L.  45. 

Menester,  md-n^-Ur',  s.  m.,  need, 
want,  necessity.     L.  30. 

Menor,  md-nor',  adj.,  less,  smaller, 
minor,  younger.     L.  20. 

Menos,  im'-nos,  adv.,  less.  A  lo  me- 
nos,  at  least.     L.  16. 

Menoscabo,  md-nos-cd'-bo,  s.  m.,  dete- 
rioration.   L.  62. 

Menosprecio,  md-nos-prd'-theo  [ma-nos- 
pra'-seo],  s.  m.,  scom,  contempt.  L. 
65. 

Mente,  rn^'-td,  s.  f.,  mind.    L.  62. 

Mentir,  men-ter',  to  lie.     L.  45. 

Menndo,  md-nu'-THo,  adj.,  small,  slen- 
der, mean.  A  menudo,  often.  L. 
25. 

Mequetrefe,  md-kd-trd'-fd,  s.  m.,  trifler, 
jackanapes.     L.  63. 

Mercader,  m^r-cd-TH^' ,  s.  m.,  dealer, 
trader,  shop-keeper.     L.  52. 

Mercado,  mhr-cd'-THo,  s.  m.,  market. 
L.  17. 

Mercantil,  mer-cdn-teV ,  adj.,  mercan- 
tile.    L.  56. 

Merecer,  md-rd-tMr'  [ma-ra-ser'],  to 
merit,  to  deserve.     L.  52. 

Merendar,  vm-rH-ddr',  to  lunch.  L. 
34. 

Merienda,  md-re-hi'-dQ,  s.  f.,  lunch. 
L.  34. 

Meridiano,  md-re-Tsed'-no,  s.  m.,  me- 
ridian.    L.  62. 

Merino,  md-re'-no,  s.  m.,  merino 
(sheep).     L.  40. 

Merito,  m^'-re-to,  s.  m.,  merit.     L.  55. 

Mes,  mas,  s.  m.,  month.  Al  mes,  by 
the  month.     L.  16. 

Mesa,  md'-sa,  s.  f.,  table.     L.  14. 

Metal,  m^-tiil',  s.  m.,  metal.     L.  62. 

Meter,  md-Ur\  to  put  in,  to  introduce 
into.     L.  46. 

Metodico,  md-to'-THe-co,  adj.,  method- 
ical.   L.  35. 


M^todo,  md'-to-THo,  s.  m.,  method. 
L.  47. 

Metrdpoli,  md-tro'-po-le,  s.  f.,  metrop- 
olis.   L.  51. 

Mi,  me,  pron.,  me.     L.  25. 

Mi,  me,  poss.  pron.,  my.     L.  5. 

Miedo,  med'-THO,  s.  m.,  fear.    L.  25. 

Miel,  me-dV,  s.  f.,  honey,  syrup.    L.  65. 

Miembro,  me^m'-bra,  s.  m.,  member, 
limb.     L.  62. 

Miercoles,  me^r'-co-Us,  s.  m.,  Wednes- 
day.   L.  9. 

Mil,  mel,  num.  adj.  and  s.  m.,  a  thou- 
sand, one  thousand.     L.  14. 

Milla,  mel'-yg,  [me'-ya],  s.  f.,  mile.  L. 
62. 

Millar,  mel-ydr  [me-ySr'],  s.  m.,  a  thou- 
sand.    L.  40. 

Milldn,  mel-yon'  [m6-yon'],  num.  adj. 
and  s.  m.,  million.     L.  40. 

Mineral,  me-nd-rdV,  s.  m.,  mineral. 
L.  62. 

Mimiscula,  me-nus'-cu-la,  adj.,  small 
(letter,  not  capital).     L.  62. 

Minuto,  me-nH'-to,  s.  m.,  minute.  L. 
23. 

Mio,  mi'-o,  poss.  pron.  and  poss.  adj., 
mine.     L.  13. 

Mirar,  me-rdr',  to  look,  to  behold,  to 
observe.     L.  29. 

Mismo,  mes' -mo,  adj.,  same,  self,  self- 
same.    El  mismo,  he  himself.    L.  27. 

Mi  tad,  me-tdTH,  s.  f.,  half.     L.  40. 

Moda,  mo'-THa,  s.  f.,  fashion.    L.  25. 

Modelo,  mo-THd'-lo,  s.  m.,  model.  L.  55. 

Moderacidn,  mo-THd-rd-theon'  [mo-THS- 
rS-th6on'],  s.  f..  moderation.     L.  65. 

Moderno,  mo-rner'-no,  adj.,  modern. 
L.  52. 

Modificar,  mo-THe-fe-cdr' ,  to  modify. 
L.  61. 

Modo,  mo'-THo^  s.  m.,  mode,  manner, 
means.  De  ningtin  modo,  by  no 
means.     L.  42. 

Molestar,  mo-Us-tdr',  to  molest,  to  dis- 
turb, to  trouble.     L.  43. 

Momento,  mo-m^n'-to,  s.  m.,  moment. 
L.  62. 

Mona,  mo'-ng,,  s.  f.,  female  monkey. 
L.  65. 

Mondrqnico,  mo-nar'-ke-co,  adj.,  mon- 
archical.    L.  35. 

Moneda,  mo-nd'-THa,  s.  f.,  coin.  Pa- 
pel  moneda,  paper  money.     L.  13. 

Montar,  mon-tdr',  to  mount,  to  ride 
(horseback).     L.  62. 

Montaraz,  mon-td-hrdih'  [mon-t5-hrSs'J, 
adj.,  mountain,  wild.     L.  54. 

Monte,  mon'-td^  s.  m.,  mountain. 
Monte  de  piedad,  pawn-shop.     L.  40. 

Morder,  mor-d^',  to  bite,  to  nip.  L. 
36. 


rOCABULABY. 


481 


Moribundo,  mo-re-hiin'-do,  adj.,  dying. 

L.  37. 
Morir,  mo-rer',  to  die.     L.  44. 
Mosoa,  mos'-ca,  s.  f.,  fly.     L.  44. 
Mostrar,  mos-trdr',  tx)  show.    L.  35. 
Motive,  mo-te'-vo,  s.  m.,  motive.     L. 

34. 
Mover,  mo-vhr',  to  move.     L.  36. 
Mozo,  mo'-tho   [mo'-so],  s.  m.,  youth, 

young  man,  waiter.     L.  62. 
Muohacha,  mu-chiX'-chg,^  s.  f.,  girl.  L.  6. 
Muohacho,  mix-chW-cho^  s.  m.,  boy.     L. 

6. 
Muoho,  mH'-cho,  adj.  and  adv.,  much, 

a  great  deal,  very.     L.  8. 
Mudable,  mii-THd'-bld,  adj.,  mutable, 

changeable,  fickle.     L.  49. 
Mudar,  mH-THdr',  to  change.    L.  62. 
Mnela,    mud' -la,    s.    f.,    molar,    back 

tooth.     L.  50. 
Muerte,  mu^r'-td,,  s.  f.,  death.     L.  38. 
Muerto,  mMr'-to,  p.  p.  of  Mobie,  dead, 

killed.    L.  52. 
Muestra,  mu^'-tr^,  s.  f.,  sample,  sign. 

L.  62. 
Mujer,   mu-hdr'f  s.  f.,  woman,  wife. 

L.  6. 
Multitud,   mul-te-tuTH' ,    s.  f.,   multi- 
tude.   L.  40. 
Mundo,  mun'-do,  s.  m.,  world.     L.  35. 
Murmuraoidn,  mur-mii-rd-theon'  [mftr- 

mti-ra-seoii'],  s.  f.,  murmuring,  back- 
biting.    L.  62. 
Murmur9,r,  mur-mu-rdr' ,  to  murmur, 

to  backbite.    L.  62. 
Museo,  mu-sd'-o,  s.  m.,  museum.     L. 

51. 
Miisica,  mu'-se-c(i,  s.  f.,  music.    L.  15. 
Mtisioo,    mu'-se-co,   s.  m.,    musician. 

L.  15. 
Muy,  mu'-e,  very.    L.  6. 

Nacer,  nd-th^r'  [nS-sgr'l,  to  be  bom. 
Nacer  de  pies,  to  be  born  to  good 
luck.    L.  62. 

Naoidn,  nd-theon'  [nS-sSon'],  s.  f.,  na- 
tion.   L.  24. 

Nada,  nd'-Tna,  adv.,  in  no  degree. 
L.  11. 

Nada,  nd'-Tua,  s.  f.,  nothing,  nonen- 
tity.   L.  II. 

Nadar,  nd-THdr',  to  swim.     L.  53. 

Nadie,  nd'-THed,  ind.  pron.,  nobody, 
no  one.     L.  11. 

NApoles,  nd''po-l<^,  s.  f.,  Naples.  L. 
47. 

Naranja,  nd-rdng'-ha,  s.  f.,  orange.  L. 
31. 

Natural,  nd-t^-rdV,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  na- 
tive, natural.     L.  44. 

Naturaleza,  nd-tH-rd-ld'-th^  [nS-tti-rS-ls'- 
Ba],  s.  f.,  nature.     L.  40. 
33 


Naturalista,  nd-tii-rd-les'-tQ,  s.  m.,  nat- 
uralist.   L.  36. 

Navarra,  nd-vq,'-hrQ,  s.  f.,  Navarre. 
L.  55. 

Navarro,  nd-v^'-hro,  s.  m.,  Navarrese. 
L.  55. 

Navegaoidn,  nd-vd-gd-theon'  [nS-vS-gS- 
86011'],  s.  f.,  navigation.     L.  24. 

Navidad,  nd-ve-THdrn' ,  s.  f.,  Christ- 
mas, nativity.     L.  43. 

Navio,  nd-ve'-o,  s.  m.,  ship.     L.  53. 

Neoesario,  nd-thd-sd'-reo  [nS-sa-sS'-rSo], 
adj.,  necessary.     L.  27. 

Neoesidad,  nd-thd-se-THdrn'  [nS-eS-sS- 
THaTH'],  s.  f.,  necessity.     L.  44. 

Neoesitar,  nd-thd-se-tdr'  [nS-sa-sg-tSr'],  to 
need,  to  require.    L.  5. 

Necio,  nd'-theo  [na'-seo],  adj.  and  s.  m., 
foolish,  fool.    L.  65. 

Nefas,  nd'-fds.  Por  fas  6  por  nefas, 
right  or  wrong.     L.  63. 

Negraoidn,  nd-gd-theon'  [nS-gS-sgon'],  s. 
f.,  negation.     L.  62. 

Negrar,  nd-gdr',  to  deny,  to  refuse.  L. 
34. 

Ne^ativa,  nd-gd-te'-vo,  a.  f.,  negation, 
refusal,  negative.    L.  62. 

Negrligrente,  n^g-le-h^'-td^  adj.,  negli- 
gent.   L.  50. 

Negrocio,  nd-go'-theo  [n5-go'-86o],  s.  m., 
business,  affair,  matter.     L.  27. 

Negro,  nd-gro,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  negro, 
black.     L.  62. 

Neutro,  ndH'-tro,  adj.,  neuter.    L.  62. 

Nevar,  nd-tdr',  to  snow.    L.  30. 

Ni,  ne,  cong.,  neither,  nor.     L.  8. 

Nieve,  ned'-vd,  s.  f.,  snow.    L.  30. 

Ningruno,  nen-gu'-no,  pron.,  no  one,  no- 
body. Ninguna  cosa,  nothing.  L. 
11. 

Nina,  nen'-ya,  s.  f.,  babe,  child,  little 
girl,  maiden.     L.  17. 

Nino,  nen'-yo,  s.  m.,  babe,  little  boy. 
L.  17. 

No,  no,  adv.,  no.    L.  1. 

Noble,  no' -bid,  adj.,  noble.    L.  62. 

Nobleza,  no-bid' -tha  [no-bia'-sa],  a.  f., 
nobleness,  nobility.    L.  55.  * 

Noche,  no'-chd,  s.  f.,  evening,  night. 
Noche  buena,  Christmas  eve.     L.  23. 

Nombrar,  nom-brdr',  to  appoint,  to 
name.     L.  48. 

Nombre,  nam' -bra,  s.  m.,  name,  noun. 
L.  40. 

Nomina tivo,  no-me-nd-te'-voy  s.  m., 
nominative.     L.  62. 

Nono,  no'-no,  see  Noveno.    L.  15. 

Norte,  nor'-td,  s.  m.,  north.    L.  22. 

Nos,  nos,  pers.  pron.,  us,  to  us.    L.  26. 

Nosotros,  no-so'-tros,  pron.,  we,  our- 
selves.   L.  1. 

Nota,  no'-t^,  s.  f.,  note.    L.  62. 


482 


VOCABULARY. 


No  tar,  no-tdr',  to  note,  to  observe.    L. 

58. 
Notioia,  no-te'-theg>  [no-te'-sea],  s.  f.,  no- 
tice, news  (pi. )     L.  27. 
Notorio,  no-to'-reo,  adj.,  notorious.    L. 

45. 
Novecientos,     no-vd-the^n' -tos     [no-v6- 

s6gn'-to8],  num.  adj.,  nine  hundred. 

L.  14. 
Novedad,  no-vd-TH&TH' ,  s.  f.,  novelty, 

news.     L.  39. 
Novela,  no-vd'-la,  s.  f.,  novel,  romance. 

L.  52. 
Noveno,  no-vd'-nOf  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m., 

ninth.     L.  15. 
Noventa,  no-vH'-ta,  num.  adj.,  ninety. 

L.  14. 
Noviembre,   no-ve^m'-hrd,    s.  m.,    No- 
vember.    L.  24. 
Nuestro,  nu^'-tro,  poss.  pron.,   ours. 

L.  13. 
Nueva,  nud'-vQ,  s.  f.,  news  (generally 

used  in  the  plural).     L.  60. 
Nueva  York,  nud'-vgryork,  s.  f.,  New 

York.    L.  9. 
Nueve,  nud'-vd,  num.  adj.,  nine.    L. 

14. 
Nuevo,  nud'-vo,  adj.,  new.     De  nuevo, 

anew.     L.  21. 
Nuez,  nudth'  [ntias'],  s.  f.,  walnut^  nut. 

L.  40. 
Numeral,   nH-md-rHi',  adj.,   numeral. 

L.  14. 
Niimero,  nu'-md-ro,  s.  m.,  number.    L. 

14. 
Nunca,  niln'-ccL,  adv.,  never.     L.  25. 

0,  0,  conj.,  or,  either.     L.  8. 

Obedecer,  o-bd-Tud-th^r'  [o-M-THa-sSr'], 
to  obey.     L.  48. 

Objetivo,  ob-hd-te'-vo,  adj.  and  s.  m., 
objective.     L.  62. 

ObjetO;  ob-hd'-to,  s.  m.,  object.    L.  48. 

Obligacion,  ob-le-gortheon'  [ob-ie-ga- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  obligation,  duty.    L.  24. 

Oblig'ar,  ob-le-gdr',  to  oblige,  to  force, 
to  compel.     L.  61. 

Obra,  o'-bra,  s.  f.,  work.     L.  15. 

Obrar,  o-brdr',  to  work,  to  operate. 
L.  40. 

Observar,  ob-s^r-vdr\  to  observe,  to  re- 
mark.   L.  48. 

Obstante,  ob-stdn'-td,  see  No  obstan- 
te.   L.  54. 

Obvio,  ob'-veo,  adj.,  obvious.    L.  43. 

Ocasidn,  o-c&seon',  s.  f.,  occasion,  op- 
portunity.   L.  39. 

Occidente,  ok-the-d^n'-td  [ok-se-den'-ta], 
s.  m.,  the  West.     L.  51. 

Ochenta,  o-cMn'-tg,  num.  adj.,  eighty. 
L.  14. 

Ocho,  o'-cho,  num.  adj.,  eight.    L.  14. 


Ochocientos,     o-cho-the^n'-tos     [o-cho- 

segn'-tos],  num.  adj.,  eight  hundred. 

L.  14. 
Octavo,  oh-td'-vo,  ord.  adj.,  eighth.   L. 

15. 
Octubre,  oh-tu'-brd,  s.  m.,  October.   L. 

24. 
Ocultar,  o-cul-tdr\  to  hide.    L.  48. 
Oculto,    o-cul'-to,  adj.,  hidden,  secret. 

L.  52. 
Ocupacidn,  o-cu-pd-theon'  [o-ca-pa-seon'J, 

s.  f.,  occupation,  business.     L.  54. 
Ocupar,  o-cil-pdr',  to  occupy,  to  engage 

in.     L.  47. 
Ocurrir,  o-cu-hrer',  to  occur,  to  strike. 

L.  62. 
Oeste,  o^'-td,  s.  m.,  west.     L.  51. 
Ofender,  o-f^n-der',  to  offend.    L.  27. 
Oficio,  o-fe'-theo  [o-fe'-seo],  s.  m.,  office, 

trade,  business.     L.  38. 
Ofrecer,  o-frd-TH^r'  [o-fra-ser'],  to  offer. 

L.  39. 
Oh,  0,  oh  !  exclamation.     L.  46. 
Oido,  oe'-THo,  s.  m.,  hearing,  ear.    L. 

61. 
Oir,  oer\  to  hear.    Oiga,  hist,  listen, 

L.41. 
Ojala,  o'-hd-la,  intj.,  would  that!  oh 

that !     L.  37. 
Ojo,  o'-ho,  s.  m.,  eye.     L.  29. 
Oler,  o-l^r\  to  smell.     L.  41. 
Olfato,   ol-fd'-to,   s.  m.,  the  sense  of 

smell.     L.  61. 
011a,  ol'-yg,  [o'-ya],  s.  f.,  earthenware- 

pot.     L.'62. 
Olor,  o-lor',  s.  m.,  odor,  scent,  smell 

L.  62. 
Olivar,  o-le-vdr',  s.  m.,  olive  grove.  L 

62. 
Olvidar,    ol-ve-THdr\    to    forget.     L. 

Omnibus,  om'-ne-bus,  s.  m.,  omnibus. 
L.  51. 

Once,  on'-thd  [on'-sS],  num.  adj.,  eleven. 
L.  14. 

Opera,  o'-pd-rq,,  s.  f.,  opera.    L.  25. 

Opinion,  o-pe-neon',  s.  f.,  opinion.  L. 
42. 

Oponer,  o-po-n^r',  to  oppose.    L.  51. 

6ptimo,  op'-<e-mo,adj.,  best,  extremely 
good.     L.  21. 

Opuesto,  o-piids'-to,  adj.,  opposed,  op- 
posing, opposite.     L.  52. 

Oracidn,  o-rd-theon'  [o-ra-seon'],  s.  f., 
prayer,  speech,  discourse.     L.  45. 

Orden,  or'-d^n,  s.  m.  andf.,  order.  L. 
39. 

Ordenar,  or-dd-ndr',  to  ordain,  to  com- 
mand.    L.  51. 

Organista,  or-gd-nes'-tg,,  s.  m.,  organ- 
ist.    L.  36. 

Oriente,  o-re^n'-td,  s.  m.,  east.    L.  51. 


rOCABULART. 


483 


Oro,  o'-ro,  s.  m.,  gold.    L.  8. 

Os,  OS,  pron.,  you  (objective  case).  L. 
26. 

Osti6n,  08-teon',  s.  m.  See  Ostka.  L. 
62. 

Ostra,  os'-tra,  s.  f.,  oyster.     L.  62. 

Otono,  0-ton' -yo,  s.  m.,  autumn.  L.  24. 

Otro,  o'-tro,  indef.  pron.,  other,  an- 
other.   L.  18. 

Oveja,  o-vd'-h(i,  s.  f.,  sheep.    L.  65. 

Ox !  oTcs,  intj.,  exclamation  used  to 
frighten  off  fowls.    L.  46. 

Paca,  pd'-cii,  s.  f.,  Fanny.     L.  44. 

Paciencia,  pdrthe^n'-theQ  [pa-sggn'-sea], 
s.  f.,  patience.     L.  63. 

Paco,  pd'-co,  s.  m.,  contraction  of  Fran- 
cisco, Frank.     L.  44. 

Padecer,  pd-THd-th^r'  [pS-Tna-sgr'],  to 
suffer.     L.  47. 

Padrastro,  pd-drds'-tro,  s.  m.,  step- 
father.   L.  49. 

Padre,  pa'-drd,  s.  m.,  father.  L.  6  and 
45. 

Pagar,  pd-gdr',  to  pay.    L.  14. 

Pagare,  pd-gd-rd\  s.  m.,  promissory 
note.     L.  54. 

Pagina,  pd'-he-na,  s.  f.,  page  (of  a 
book).    L.  50. 

Pais,  i)(i-es',  s.m.,  country.     L.  19. 

Paisano,  p(^e-sd'-no,  s.  m.,  country- 
man, compatriot.     L.  50. 

T a^a.,  pd'-hQ,  s.  f.,  straw.    L.  63. 

Pajaro,  pd'-hd-ro,  s.  m.,  bird.     L.  48. 

Pajarraco,  pd-hd-hrd'-co,  s.  m.  (aug.  of 
pdjaro),  an  ugly,  clumsy  bird.  L.  49. 

Palabra,  pd-ld'-br^,  s.  f.,  word,  word 
of  promise.  Falabras  mayores,  of- 
fensive words.     L.  15  and  65. 

Palacio,  pd-ld'-theo  [pS-i2'-8go],  s.  m., 
palace.     L.  48. 

Palangana,  pd-ldn-gd-na,  s.  f.,  wash- 
bowl.   L.  46, 

Palo,  pd'-lo,  s.  m.,  stick  of  wood,  pole. 
L.  62. 

Pan,  pdn,  s.  m.,  bread,  loaf.    L.  7. 

Panaderia,  pd-nd-THd-re'-a,  s.  f.,  bak- 
ery.   L.  11. 

Panadero,  pd-nd-Tud'-ro,  s.  m.,  baker. 
L.  11. 

^2JitB\.6n,pdn-td-lon\  s.  m.,  pantaloon, 
trousers.     L.  17. 

Pano,  pdn'-yo,  s.  m.,  cloth.     L.  62. 

Panuelo,  pdn-yud'-lo,  s.  m.,  pocket- 
handkerchief.    L.  5. 

Papa,  pd-pa',  s.  m.,  papa.     L.  5. 

Papel,  pd-pU'y  s.  m.,  paper,  part  (in  a 
play).  Hacer^opeZ  de,  to  cut  a  fig- 
ure, to  take  a  part.    L.  4. 

Paquito,  pd-que'-to,  s.  m.  (contraction 
of  Francisco,  Francis),  Franky.  L. 
44. 


"PsLT,  pdr,  s.  m.,  pair,  couple.  Al  par, 
at  par.     L.  40. 

Para,  pd'-rcb,  prep.,  for,  to,  in  order  to, 
toward.     L.  19. 

Parabien,  jp^-ra-6e^n',  s.  m.,  congratu- 
lation, compliment.     L.  62. 

Paragnas,  _pa-r(j'-^w(is,  s.  m.,  umbrella. 
L.  50. 

Parar,  pd-rdr',  to  stop,  to  stand,  to 
stand  up,  to  end  in.    L.  51. 

'Pa.T&sol,  pd-rd-sol' ,  s.  m.,  parasol.  L. 
50. 

Parecer,  pd-rd-tMr'  [pa-ra-sgr'l,  to  ap- 
pear, to  seem.     L.  30. 

Pared,  pd-r^rn',  s.  f.,  wall.     L.  50. 

Paris,  pd-res\s.Tn.,  Paris.    L.  12. 

Parque,  pQ,r'-kd,  s.  m.,  park,  caliber. 
L.  17. 

"PsLite,  par'-td,  s.  f.,  part;  s.  m.,  mes- 
sage, despatch.     L.  27. 

Partioipar,  pg/r-te-the-pdr'  [par-t6-se- 
pSr'],  to  participate,  to  partake  of. 
L.  57. 

Participio,  par-te-the'-peo  [par-te-sg'- 
peo],  s.  m.,  participle.     L.  43. 

Particnla,  pQr-te'-cH-la,  s.  f.,  particle. 
L.  50. 

Particular,  p^r-te-cA-ldr' ,  adj.,  particu- 
lar, private.    L.  49. 

Partida,  j)ar-<e'-spH^,  s.  f.,  departure. 
L.  42. 

Partir,  pq,r-ter',  to  depart,  to  set  out, 
to  divide.     L.  19. 

Parti tivb,  par-te-te'-vo,  adj.,  partitive. 
L.  63. 

Pasaje,  pd-sd'-hd,  s.  m.,  passage,  fare. 
L.  58,  63. 

Pasar,  pd-sdr',  to  pass,  to  go  in,  to  enter. 
Pase  usted,  senor,  come  in,  sir.  L.  16. 

Pasoua,  pds'-cHQ,  s.  f.,  Easter.    E.  59. 

Paseante,  pd-sddn'-td,  s.  m.,  passer-by, 
promenader.     L.  38. 

Pasearse,  pd-sddr'-sd,  to  take  a  walk, 
to  promenade.     L.  24. 

Paseo,  pd-sd'-o,  s.  m.,  walk,  prome- 
nade.    L.  57. 

Pasiva,  pd-se'-vQ,  s.  f.,  the  passive 
voice.     L.  50. 

Pasivo,  pd-se'-voy  adj.,  passive.     L.  63. 

Paso,  pd'-so,  s.  m.,  step,  pace.     L.  54. 

Patio,  pd'-teo,  s.  m.,  yard,  pit  (in  the- 
atres).    L.  46. 

Patronimico,  pd-tro-ne'-me-co,  adj., 
patronymic.     L.  49. 

Paz,  path  [pas],  s.  f.,  peace.     L.^43. 

Pecho,  pd'-cho,  s.  m.,  breast.  A  lo  he- 
cho  pecho,  what  is  done  cannot  be 
helped.     L.  65. 

Pechug'a,  pd-chu'-gg,,  s.  f.,  breast  of  a 
fowl.     L.  68. 

Pedazo,  pd-dd'-tho  [pa-dS'-so],  s.  m., 
piece,  morsel,  bit.     L.  63. 


4:84 


VOCABULARY. 


Pedir,  pd-wHer',  to  ask,  to  demand,  to 
ask  for.     L.  39. 

Pedro,  pd'-dro,  s.  m.,  Peter.     L.  19. 

Pegar,  pd-gdr',  to  stick,  to  paste,  to 
beat.     L.  63. 

Peinar,  pde-ndr\  to  comb.     L.  46, 

Peine,  pd'e-nd,  s.  m.,  comb.     L.  46. 

VeligTO,  pd'le'-gro,  s.  m^.,  danger,  peril. 
L.  51. 

Pelo,  pd'-lo,  s.  m.,  hair.  Apelo,  to  the 
purpose,  fitting.  En  pelo,  bareback 
(to  ride).     L.  33,  44. 

Pelota,  pd-lo'-ta,  s.  f.,  ball  (for  play- 
ing).   L.  54. 

Pena,  pd'-na,  s.  f.,  pain,  penalty.  A 
duras  penas,  with  much  difficulty. 
L.  59. 

Pensamiento,  phi-sd-me^n'-to,  s.  m., 
thought.     L.  48. 

Pensar,  p^n-sdr',  to  think,  to  intend. 
L.  34. 

Pentiltimo,  pd-nHl'-te-mo,  adj.,  penul- 
timate, penult.     L.  50. 

Penasco,  pdn-yds'-co,  s.  m.,*  a  large 
rock.     L.  56. 

Peer,  pd-or',  adj.  and  adv.,  worse.  L. 
20. 

Pepa,  pd'-pQ,  s.  f.,  Josie.    L.  44. 

Pepe,  pd'-pd.    (See  Pepito.  )    L.  44. 

Pepito,  pd-pe'-to,  s.  m.  (contraction  of 
Jose,  Joseph),  Joe.    L.  44. 

Pequeno,  pd-hdn'-yo,  adj.,  little,  small, 
young.     L.  7. 

Per-,p^,  Lat.  prep,  used  in  Spanish  as 
a  prefix  only.     L.  50. 

Pera,  pd'-rQ,  s.  f.,  pear.     L.  59. 

Peral,  pd-rill\  s.  m.,  i)ear-tree.  L. 
59. 

Perder,  p^-dh^',  to  lose.    L.  37. 

Perdonar,  p^r-do-n&r\  to  pardon.  L. 
27. 

Perezoso,  pd-rd-tho'-so  [pS-rS-so'-so], 
adj.,  lazy,  slothful.     L.  38. 

Perfecoionar.  p^-f^k-theo-n&r'  [pgr-f 5k- 
seo-nar'],  to  perfect,  to  improve.  L. 
38. 

Perfecto,  pi^r-f^k'-to,  adj.,  perfect.  L. 
29. 

Perilla,  pa-rer-3/flt[pa-re'-ya],  s.  f.,  small 
pear.  Venir  de  perilla,  to  suit  exact- 
ly.    L.  64. 

Periddioo,  pd-reo'-Tne-co,  s.  m.,  news- 
paper.    L.  8. 

Permanecer,  p^-md-nd-th^'  [pgr-mS- 
na-ser'],  to  remain,  to  stop,  to  stay. 
L.  45. 

Permanencia,  ph'-md-n^n' -fhea  [pSr-mS- 
ngn'-sea],  s.  f.,  permanence,  duration, 
stay.     L.  51. 

Permitir,  per-me-fer',  to  permit,  to  al- 
low.   L.  44. 

Pero,  pd'-ro,  conj.,  but.    L.  3. 


Perpendicular,  p^r-phi-de-dir-ldr\  adj., 
perpendicular.    L.  51. 

Perro,  p^'-hro,  s.  m.,  dog.     L.  63. 

Perseverancia,  per-sd-vd-rdn'-theg,  [per- 
sa-va-ran'-sea],  s.  f.,  perseverance.  L. 
63-.     .         "  ^ 

Persistir,  p^r-ses-ter' ,  to  persist.  L. 
50.  cs 

Persona,  p^r-so'-na,  s.  f.,  person.  L. 
38. 

Personal,  ph-so-ndl',  adj.,  personal. 
L.  63. 

Pesa,  jpa'-sa,  s.  f.,  weight  (for  weigh- 
ing).   L.  55. 

P^same,  pd'-sd-md,  s.  m.,  condolence. 
L.  59. 

Pesar,  pd-sdr',  to  weigh,  to  regret. 
No  le  pesa  de  haber  nacido,  he  has 
an  excellent  opinion  of  himself.  L. 
31. 

Pesar,  pd-sdr',  s.  m.,  regret,  grief,  sor- 
row. A  pesar  de,  in  spite  of,  not- 
withstanding.    L.  31. 

Pescado,  p^-cd'-THo,  s.  m.,  fish.     L.  7. 

Pescar,  p^s-cdr',  to  fish.    L.  63. 

P^simo,  pd'-se-mo,  adj.,  worst,  very 
bad.     L.  21. 

Peso,  pd'-so,  s.  m.,  weight,  heaviness, 
dollar.     L.  14. 

Pianista,  ped-nes'-tQ,  s.  m.,  pianist. 
L.  15. 

Piano,  pe^'-no,  s.  m.,  piano.     L.  15. 

Picante,  pe-cdn'-td,  adj.,  piquant,  high- 
ly seasoned,  pungent,  pointed  (say- 
ing).    L.  54. 

Picar,  pe-cdr\  to  prick,  to  bite,  to 
pique,  to  thrust.     L.  46. 

Picaresoo,  pe-cd-rh'-co,  adj.,  roguish. 
L.  49. 

Pioaro,  pe'-cd-ro,  adj.,  rogue,  rascal, 
knave.     L.  32. 

Pico,  pe'-co,  s.  m.,  beak,  bill.  Callarse 
el  pico,  to  hold  one's  tongue.     L.  61. 

Pie,  pea',  s.  m.,  foot.  A  pie,  on  foot. 
Nacer  de  pies,  to  be  born  with  good 
luck.     L.  39. 

Pierna,  pe^r'-na,  s.  f.,  leg.    L.  33. 

Pieza,  ped'-tha  [pea'-sa],  s.  f.,  piece.  L. 
64. 

Pinar,  pe-ndr',  s.  m.,  pine-grove.  L. 
49. 

Pino,  pe'-no,  s.  m.,  pine.     L.  40. 

Pintar,  pen-tdr',  to  i)aint,  to  represent. 
L.  54. 

Pintor,  pen-tor',  s.  m.,  painter.     L.  31. 

Pintura,  pen-tu'-rg,,  s.  f.,  painting.  L. 
31. 

Pipa,  pe'-pa^  s.  f.,  pipe.    L.  42. 

Piqne,  pe'-kd,  s.  m.,  pique,  offence. 
Estaba  pique  de  perderse,  he  was  on 
the  brink  of  ruin.     L.  62. 

Piropos,  pe-ro'-pos,    s.   m.,    sayings. 


VOCABULARY. 


485 


sweet  phrases  addressed  to  women. 
L.  58. 

Pisaverde,  pe-sd-v^r'-dd,  s.  m.,  fop, 
coxcomb.     L.  50. 

Piso,  pe'-so,  s.  m.,  floor,  story  (of  a 
house).     L.  53. 

Pistola,  pes-to'-lQ,  s.  f.,  pistol.     L.  44. 

Pistoletazo,  pes-to-ld-td'-tho  [pes-io-ia- 
ta'-8o],  s.  m.,  pistol-shot.     L.  44. 

Placer,  pld-tMr'  [piS-sSr'],  to  please. 
L.  31. 

Placer,  pld-th^r'  CpiS-sgr'],  s.  m.,  pleas- 
ure, gold-diggings.     L.  31. 

Plata,  pld'-t^,  s.  f.,  silyer.    L.  8. 

Plato,  pld'-to,  s.  m.,  plate,  dish  (of 
food).     L.  57. 

Plaza,  pld'-thg,  [plS'-sa],  s.  f.,  place,  situ- 
ation, square,  market-place.  Plaza 
de  toros,  arena  for  bull-fights.  L. 
17,  54. 

Plazo,  pld'-tho  [piS'-8o],  s.  m.,  term  (of 
payment).    L.  63. 

Plomo,  plo'-mo,  s.  m.,  lead.    L.  63. 

Pluma,  plu'-ma^  s.  f.,  feather,  pen.  L.  5. 

Plural,  plu-r&i,  adj.,  plural.     L.  57. 

'P\vL80Tia.m]peTfeoto,plu8-kuam-p^r-f<^k'- 
io,  s.  m.,  pluperfect,  past  perfect. 
L.  43. 

Pobre,  po'-brd,  adj.,  poor,  needy, 
wretched.     L.  13. 

Pobreza,  po-hrd'-thg,  [po-brs'-sa],  s.  f., 
poverty.     L.  59. 

Poco,  po'-eo,  adv.,  little;  pi.,  few. 
Poco  i.  poco,  slowly,  gently,  softly. 
L.  32. 

Poco,  po'-co,  s.  m.,  little.    L.  6. 

Poder,  po-TH^r',  to  be  able.  No  poder 
mds,  to  be  exhausted.     L.  32. 

Poder,  po-TH^r',  s.  m.,  power,  author- 
ity, possession.     L.  35. 

Poesia,  pod-se'-a,  s.  f.,  poetry,  poesy. 
L.  31. 

"PoetB.,  pod'-tg,,  s.  m.,  poet.    L.  31. 

Poetastro,  ^oa-Ms'-<ro,  s.  m.,  poetaster. 
L.  44. 

Portico,  po^'-te-co,  adj.,  poetic,  poeti- 
cal.    L.  35. 

Polca,  pol'-ca,  s.  f.,  polka.     L.  33. 

Politica,  po-le'-te-cci,  s.  f.,  politics,  po- 
liteness.    L.  52. 

Politico,  po-le'-te-co,  adj.,  political,  po- 
lite.    L.  52. 

Politico,  po-le'-te-co,  s.  m.,  politician. 
L.  52. 

Polio,  pol'-yo  [po'-yo],  s.  m.,  chicken. 
L.  5. 

"Polvo,  pol'-vo,  s.  m.,  powder,  dust.  L. 
62. 

Pdlvora,  pol'-vo-ra,  s.  f.,  gunpowder. 
L.  63. 

Ponderar,  pon-dd-rdr',  to  exaggerate, 
to  cry  up.     L.  54. 


Poner,  po-n^r',  to  put,  to  place,  to  lay, 
to  set  (as  the  sun ) .  Ponerse,  to  be- 
come, to  get.  Se  puso  serio,  he  be- 
came serious.     L.  41. 

Por,  por,  prep.,  by,  for,  in  behalf  of,  in 
favor  of,  about,  through.    L.  19. 

Porcion,  por-theon'  [por-seon'],  s.  f.,  por- 
tion, part,  lot,  number,  quantity. 
L.  63. 

Pormenor,  por-md-nor',  s.  m.  (general- 
ly used  in  the  plural).  Pormenores, 
details,  particulars.    L.  50. 

Porque  por'-kd,  conj.,  because.     L.  18. 

Por  que,  por-fca',  conj.,  why?  for  what 
reason?  s.  m.,  reason  wherefor.  L. 
18. 

Portarse,  por-tdr'-sd,  to  behave,  to  con- 
duct one's  self.     L.  55. 

Portugal,  por-tu-gdl',  s.  m.,  \Portugal. 
L.  60. 

Portugues,  por-tu-ghds' ,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
Portuguese.    L.  44. 

Poseer,  po-sd^r',  to  possess.    L.  34. 

V OBesiv 0,  po-sd-se'-vo,  a^.,  possessive. 
L.  63. 

Toaible, pose' -bid,  adj.,  possible.  L.  31. 

Positive,  po-se-te'-vo,  adj.,  positive. 
L.  48. 

Posponer,  pos-po-n^r',  to  postpone,  to 
place  after.     L.  63. 

Potencial,  po-thi-thedl'  [po-tSn-sSSi'], 
adj.,  potential.     L.  63. 

Practica,  prdk'-te-cg,  s.  f.,  practice. 
L.  23. 

Practicante,  prdk'-te-cdn'-td,  s.  m., 
practitioner.     L.  38. 

Practical,  prdk-te-cdr' ,  to  practise.  L. 
23. 

Practice,  adj.,  practical.    L.  65. 

Pre-,  prd,  Lat.  prep,  used  in  Spanish 
as  prefix  only.     L.  50. 

FiecedeT,  prd-thd-TH^r'  [pr5-sa-THgr'],  to 
precede,  to  go  before.  >  L.  63. 

Precepto,  prd-tMp'-to  [pra-sgp'-to],  s. 
m.,  precept.     L.  53. 

Precio,  prd'-theo  [pra'-seo],  s.  m.,  price, 
prize.     L.  50. 

Precise,  prd-the'-so  [pra-se'-so],  adj.,  ne- 
cessary, obligatory,  precise.     L.  63. 

Preferir,  prd-fd-rer',  to  prefer.    L.  38. 

'Piegvinta.,  prd-gun'-ta,  s.  f.,  question, 
inquiry.     L.  33. 

Preguntar,  prd-giin-tdr' ,  to  ask  ques- 
tions, to  question,  to  inquire.    L.  33. 

Preliminar,  prd-le-me-ndr' ,  adj.,  pre- 
liminary.    L.  63. 

Premiar,^ra-mc^r',  to  reward.     L.  62. 

Premie,  prd'-meo,  s.  m.,  premium,  re- 
ward, prize.     L.  59. 

Prenda,  pr^n'-da,  s.  f.,  pledge,  jewel; 
pi.  endowments,  talents,  parts.  L. 
41,  63. 


4:86 


VOCABULARY. 


Prender,  pr^n-d^r\  to  take  up,  to  ar- 
rest.    L.  39. 
Freposioddn,  prd-po-se-theon'  [pra-po-se- 

seon'],  s.  f.,  preposition.     L.  43. 
TTeBencitL,  prd-s^n'-thea  [pra-sen'-sea],  s. 

f.,  presence.    L.  63. 
Presentar,  prd-sH-tdr',  to  present,  to 

introduce,  to  offer.     L.  39. 
Presente,   prd-shi'-td,    adj.,    present. 

Tener  presente,  to  bear  in  mind.     L. 

43. 
Presidente,  prd-se-d&a'-td,  s.  m.,  presi- 
dent.   L.  46. 
Presidio,  prase' -thIo,   s.  m.,   prison. 

L.  59. 
Presidir,  prd-se-THer' ,  to  preside.    L. 

54. 
Preso,  prd'-so,  irreg.  p.  p.  (of  Peen- 

dek),    taken.      Estd   preso,    he    is 

taken  (prisoner).     L.  52. 
Prestar,  pr^-tar',  to  lend.     L.  59. 
Presto,  pr^'-to,  adj.,   quick,    ready, 

prompt.     L.  20. 
Presto,  pr^'-to,  adv.,  soon,  quickly. 

L.  20. 
Pretender,  prd-t^n-d^r\  to  pretend,  to 

lay  claim  to,   to  claim,  to  solicit. 

L.  48. 
Pretensidn,  prd-t^n-theon' ,  s.  f.,  pre- 
tention, claim,  thing  solicited.     L. 

57. 
Preterite,  prd-W-re-to,  adj.,  preterit. 

L.  63. 
Pretexto,  prd-Uhs'-to,  s.  m.,  pretext. 

L.  58. 
Prevenir,  prd-vd-ner',  to  prevent,  to 

foresee,  to  warn,  to  prepare.     L.  65. 
Prever,  prd-ver',  to  foresee.    L.  69. 
Primavera,  pre-m(i-vd' -r^,  s.  f.,  spring. 

L.  24. 
Primero,  pre-md'-ro^  adj.,  first ;  adv., 

first,  rather,  sooner.     L.  15. 
Prime,  pre: -mo,  s.  m.,  cousin.     L.  13. 
Principal,    pren-the-pdl'    [pren-se-pSl'], 

adj.,  principal,  chief.     L.  36. 
Principiante,  pren-the-pedn'-td  [pren-se- 

pean'-ta],  act.  part.,   beginner.       L. 

38. 
Principiar,pren-<^e-pe^r'[prgn-8€-p6Sr'], 

to  begin,  to  commence.     L.  23. 
Principle,  pren-the'-peo  [pren-8e'-peo],  s. 

m.,  beginning,  commencement,  prin- 
ciple.    L.  63. 
Prisa,  pre'-sa,  s.  f.,  haste,  si)eed,  hurry. 

L.  30. 
Prisionero,  pre-seo-nd'-ro,  s.  m.,  pris- 
oner.   L.  48. 
Prisma,  pres'-ma,  s.  m.,  prism.     L.  54, 
Probable,  pro-bd'-hld,  adj.,  probable. 

L.  29. 
Probar,  pro-hdr',  to  try,  to  prove,  to 

taste.    L.  35. 


Procesidn,  pro-th^seon'  [pro-sS-seon'],  a., 
f.,  procession.    L.  46. 

Procurar,  pro-cu-rdr\  to  procure,  to 
endeavor,  to  try  to.     L.  51. 

Produccidn,  pro-duk-theon'  [pro-diik- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  production.     L.  40. 

Preducir,  pro-du-ther'  [pro-du-ser],  to 
produce.     L.  40. 

Proeza,  prod'-thg,  [proa'-8a],Ai^f.,  prow- 
ess.    L.  54. 

Profecia,  pro-fd-the'-g,  [pro-fa-se'-alr^  s. 
f.,  prophecy.     L.  45. 

Profesi6n,pro-/2-«eon',s.  f.,  profession. 
L.  38. 

Profesor,  pro-fd-sor',  s.  m.,  professor. 
L.  18. 

Prohibir,  pro-e-her',  to  prohibit.  L. 
53. 

Prdjimo,  pro' -he-mo,  s.  m.,  neighbor. 
L.  28. 

Promesa,  pro-md'-SQ,  s.  f.,  promise. 
L.  57. 

Prometer,  pro-md-Ur',  to  promise.  L. 
54. 

Pronombre,  pro-nom'-brd,  s.  m.,  pro- 
noun.    L.  43. 

Pronominal,  pro-no-me-ndl' ,  adj.,  pro- 
nominal.    L.  61. 

Prontitud,  pron-te-tuTH' ,  s.  f.,  prompt- 
ness, promntitude,  quickness.  L. 
43. 

Pronto,  pron'-to,  adj.,  prompt,  quick, 
ready ;  adv.,  soon,  promptly,  quick- 
ly.    L.  20. 

Pronnnoiaoidn,  pro-nHn-thed-theon' 
[pro-n^n-sea-seon'],  s.  f.,  pronuncia- 
tion.    L.  63. 

Pronunciar,  pro-nun-thedr'  [pro-n^- 
sear'],  to  pronounce.     L.  15. 

Propiedad,  pro-ped-THdTH' ,  s.  f.,  pro- 
priety, property.     L.  63. 

Propio,  pro'-peo,  adj.,  proper,  own, 
selfsame,  same.     L.  49. 

Pr opener,  pro-po-n^r' ,  to  propose.  L. 
51. 

Prosa,  pro'-sq,  s.  f.,  prose.    L.  31. 

Proporcionar,  pro-por-theo-ndr'  [pro- 
por-seo-nSr],  to  proportion,  to  proi 
cure,  to  offer.     L.  48. 

TTOtest&nte,  pro-t^s-tdn'-td,  s.  m.,  Pro 
testant.     L.  49. 

Protestantismo,  pro-Us-tdn-tes'-mo,  s 
m..  Protestantism.     L.  49. 

Provecho,  pro-vd'-cho.  s.  m.,  profit^ 
benefit.     L.  64. 

Proveer,  pro-vd^r',  to  provide.     L.  34. 

Proverbio,  pro-v^r'-beo,  s.  m.,  proverb. 
L.  65. 

Provincia,  pro-ven'-thea,  s.  f.,  province. 
L.  19. 

Provisto,  pro-ves'-to,  p.  p.  (of  Peo- 
veee),  provided.    L.  52. 


VOCABULARY. 


487 


Frdximo,  proh'-se-mo,  adj.,  next,  near- 
est.    L.  23. 

Frudencia,  pr4-d^n'-thea  [prft-dgn'-sea], 
s.  f.,  prudence.     L.  34. 

Prudente,  prii-d^n'-td,  adj.,  prudent. 
L.  20. 

Prueba,  prM'-bQ,  s.  f.,  proof.    L.  46. 

Prusia,  prU'-se^,  s.  f.,  Prussia.    L.  46. 

Publicar,  pu-Me-cdr',  to  publisli.  L. 
48. 

Piiblico,  p4'-ble-co,  s.  m.  and  adj.,  pub- 
lic.   L.  51. 

Pudrir,  pH-drer'^  to  rot.    L.  41. 

Pueblo,  pUd'-blo,  s.  m.,  town,  people. 
L.  50. 

Puerta,  pu^r'-tf^,  s.  f.,  door.    L.  27. 

Pues,  puds',  conj.,  then,  therefore,  in- 
asmuch as,  since,  because ;  intj . ,  well ! 
Pues  que?  well,  what  of  it?    L.  41. 

Pulgada,  pHl-gd'-TH^j  s.  f.,  inch.  L. 
63. 

Punta,  pUn'-ta,  s.  f.,  point,  stitch.  L. 
50. 

Puntapl^,  pUn-t^-ped' ,  s.  m.,  kick.  L. 
50. 

Puntilla,  pJin-tel'-ygL  [pftn-te'-ya],  s.  f., 
small  point.  De  puntillas,  on  tip- 
toe.   L.  44. 

Funto,  pun' -to J  s.  m.,  point  (of  time  or 
space),  spot,  place.    L.  51. 

Puntuacidn,  piin-tud-theon'  [pftn-tM- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  punctuation.     L.  63. 

Funtual,  pun-tudV,  adj.,  punctual,  ex- 
act, accurate.    L.  63. 

Funtualidad,  pUn-tud-le-rndTH',  s.  f., 
punctuality.     L.  63. 

Furista,  pu-res'-t^,  s.  m.,  purist.  L. 
63. 

Que,  hd,  rel.  pron.,  that,  which,  that 

which,  he  who ;  interr.  pron.,  what, 

that ;  conj.,  that.    L.  3,  16,  17. 
Quebrar,  kd-brdr',  to  break,  to  smash. 

L.  34. 
Quedar,  hd-THdr',  to  stop,  to  stay,  to 

remain,  to  become.    El  campo  quedo 

por  los  americanos,  the  Americans 

were  victorious.     L.  38. 
Quejarse,  kd-Mr'-sd,  to  complain,  to  be 

vexed,  to  moan.     L.  38. 
Quemar,  hd-mdr',  to  burn.    L.  32. 
Querer,  Tcd-rer',  to  wish,  to  desire,  to 

will,  to  love,  to  like,  to  be  willing, 

L.  13. 
Querido,  Icd-re'-THO,  adj.,  dear.  L.  13. 
Queso,  hd'-so,  s.  m.,  cheese.    L.  7. 
Quien,  ke-^n',  rel.  and  interr.  pron., 

who,  whom.    L.  17. 
Quienquiera,       ke^n-hed'-vQ,      indef. 

pron.,  whosoever.    L.  50. 
Quieto,  ked'-to,  adj.,  quiet,  still,  at  rest. 

L.  62. 


Quejada,  kd-hW-Tsa,  s.  f.,  jaw.    L.  50. 

Quince,  ken'-thd  [ken'-sa],  num.  ac^., 
fifteen.     L.  14. 

Quinientos,  ke-ne^n'-tos,  adj.,  five  hun- 
dred.   L.  14. 

Quinto,  ken' -to,  ord.  adj.  and  s.  m., 
fifth.     L.  15. 

Quitar,  ke-tdr',  to  remove,  to  take 
away,  ofl",  out,  to  prevent.     L.  53.    . 

Quitasol,  ke-t^soV,  s.  m.,  parasol.  L. 
50. 

Quiza,  ke-thg,'  [ke-sa'],  adv.,  perhaps. 
L.  34. 

Eadical,  ^ra-sH6-c^Z',  adj.,  radical.  L. 

63. 
Baiz,  hrg^-eth'  [hra-es'],  s.  f.,root,  sweet 

potato.  (Amer!)    L.  63. 
Bama,  hrd'-ma,  s.  f.,  branch.    L.  61. 
Ramillete,  rhd-mel-yd'-td  [hra-me-ya'-ta], 

s.  m.,  bouquet.     L.  27. 
Bamo,  hrd'-mo,  s.  m.,  branch  depart- 
ment.   L.  53. 
Bana,  hrd'-n^,  s.  f.,  frog.    No  ser  rana, 

to  be  wide-awake,  expert.    L.  65. 
Bapaza,   hrd-pd'-th^r   [hra-pa'-sa],   s.    f., 

little  girl.  I  Miren  la>rapazuela !  look 

at  the  little  vixen.    L.  61. 
Baro,  hrd'-ro,  adj.,  rare,  odd,  curious, 

scarce.    L.  63. 
Basgrar,  hrds-gdr',  to  scratch,  to  tear. 

L.  64. 
Basgo,  hrds'-go,  s.  m.,  trait,  stroke, 

instance.     L.  63. 
Bato,  hrd'-lo,  s.  m.,  while,  moment. 

A  ratos,  from  time  to  time.  L.  44. 
Bat5n,  hrd-ton',  s.  m.,  mouse.     L.  65. 
Baya,  hrd'-ya,  s.  f.,  stroke,  dash.  L.  64. 
Bayo,  hrd'-yo,  s.  m. ,  ray,  flash,  thunder- 
bolt.   L.  62,  63. 
Bazdn,  hrd-thon'  [hra-son'],  s.  f,,  reason, 

right.    Tener  razon,  to  be  right.    L. 

25. 
Bazonar,    hrd-tho-ndr'  ChrS-so-nSr'],   to 

reason.     L.  63. 
Be-,  hrd,  used  as  a  prefix.    L.  50. 
Beal,  hrd-dr,  adj.,  real,  royal ;  s.  m., 

real,   Spanish    coin,   usually  about 

twelve  cents.     L.  47,  48. 
Bealidad,  hrdd-le-THdTu' ,  s.  f.,  reality. 

L.48. 
Bebajar,   hrd-bd-hdr' ,    to    reduce,    to 

abate,    to    lower,    to    beat    down 

(prices).     L.  64. 
Bebanada,  hrd-bd-nd'-Tna,  s.  f.,  slice, 
piece  (of  bread).     L.  63. 
Bebanar,  hrd-bd-ndr',  to  slice,  to  cut 

(bread).     L.  64. 
Bebano,   hrd-bdn'-yo,   s.   m.,   flock  of 

sheep.     L.  40. 
Beoardo,  hrd-car'-do,  s.  m.,  message, 

errand.    L.  63. 


488 


VOCABULABY. 


Eecepci6ii,  hrd-tMp-theon'  [hrS-sgp- 
seon'],  s.  f.,  reception.     L.  64. 

Eecibimiento,  hrd-ihe-be-meH'-to  [rha- 
Be-be-meSn'-to],  s.  m.,  act  of  receiv- 
ing, reception.     L.  55. 

Becibir,  hrd-the-ber'  [hra-se-bSr'],  to  re- 
ceive.   L.  8. 

Becibo,  hrd-the'-bo  [rhS-se'-bo],  s.  m., 
receipt.    L.  63. 

Beciproco,  hrd-the'-pro-co  [hrS-se'-pro- 
CO],  adj.,  reciprocal.    L.  63. 

Eecitar,  hrd-the-tdr'  [hra-8e-t2r'],  to  re- 
cite.   L.  64. 

Eecomendacidn,  hrd-co-m^n-dd-theon' 
[hra-co-mgn-dS-seon'],  s.  f.,  recom- 
mendation.    L.  60. 

Becomendar,  hrd-co-m^-ddr' ,  to  rec- 
ommend.   L.,64. 

Beconocer,  hrd-co-no-tMr'  [hra-co-no- 
sgr'],  to  recognize,  to  acknowledge. 
L.  39. 

Becordar,  hrd-cor-ddr' ,  to  remember, 
to  remind.    L.  35. 

Becto,  hrW-to,  adj.,  right.    L.  55. 

Bector,  hrek-tor',  s.  m.,  rector,  direc- 
tor.    L.  63. 

Beourrir,  hrd-cu-hrer' ,  to  recur,  to 
have  recourse.     L.  50. 

Becurso,  hrd'cHr'-so,  s.  m.,  recourse, 
resource.    L.  40. 

Beducir,  hrd-du-ther'  [hrS-dd-ser'],  to 
redTuce.     L.  54. 

Beferir,  hrd-fd-rer',  to  refer,  to  re- 
late.   L.  64. 

Beflexivo,  hrd-jWc-se'-vo,  adj.,  reflex- 
ive, reflective.    L.  63. 

Beflexionar,  hrd-fi^lc-seo-ndr\  to  re- 
flect, to  think.    L.  48. 

Beforma,  hrd-for'-ma,  s.  f.,  reform, 
reformation.    L.  63. 

Beformar,  hrd-for-mdr' ,  to  reform,  to 
form  anew,  to  discharge  (from  an 
employment  or  office).     L.  48. 

Befran,  hrd-frdn',  s.  m.,  refrain,  prov- 
erb.    L.  63,  65. 

Begalar,  hrd-gd-ldr\  to  regale,  to  pre- 
sent with,  to  make  a  present  of.  L. 
63. 

Begalo,  hrd-gd'-lo,  s.  m.,  gift,  present. 
L.  63. 

B^grimen,  hrd'-he-mH,  s.  m.,  regimen, 
government.     L.  57. 

Begimiento,  hrd-he-meH'-to,  s.  m., 
regiment.     L.  19. 

Begir,  hrd-her',  to  govern.     L.  57. 

Begla,  hrd'-gla,  s.  f.,  rule,  ruler.   L.  63. 

Beg-ular,  hrd-gil-ldr',  adj.,  regular, 
tolerable,  moderate,  ordinary;  adv., 
tolerably,  fair,  middling.  L.  27,  57, 
64. 

Beg-nlaridad,  hrd-gu-ld-re-THdwH' ,  s.f., 
regularity.     L.  55. 


Regularizar,  hrd-gu-ld-re-thdr'  [hr^-gt- 
la-re-sSr'],  to  regulate.     L.  48. 

Behusar,  hrd-u-sdr',  to  refuse.     L.  61. 

Beina,  hrd'e-na,  s.  f.,  queen.     L.  63. 

Beinante,  hrde-ndn'-td,  act.  part., 
reigning.     L.  38. 

Beinar,  hrde-ndr\  to  reign.    L.  15. 

Beino,  hrd'e-nOy  s.  m.,  kingdom.  L. 
45. 

Beir,  hrd-er',  to  laugh.    L.  21. 

Belacidn,  hrd-ld-theon'  [hra-iS-sSon'],  s. 
f.,  relation,  account,  recital.     L.  43. 

Belampago,  hrd-ldm'-pd-go,  s.  m.,  flash 
of  lightning.     L.  '63. 

Belampaguear,  hrd-ldm-pd-ghddr' ,  to 
lighten.     L.  30. 

Belatar,  hrd-ld-tdr',  to  relate.    L.  45. 

Beligidn,  hrd-le-heon' ^  s.  f.,  religion. 
L.  35. 

Beligioso,  hrd-le-heo'-so,  adj.,  reli- 
gious.   L.  35. 

Beloj,  hrd-loh'f  s.  m.,  watch,  clock. 
L.  28. 

Belojero,  hrd-lo-hd'-ro,  s.  m.,  watch- 
maker.   L.  63. 

Belucir,  hrd-lu-ther'  [rhS-ifi-s^r'],  to 
sparkle,  to  glitter.  No  es  oro  todo 
lo  que  reluce,  all  is  not  gold  that 
glitters.     L.  65. 

Bemediar,  hrd-mdrrHedr' ,  to  remedy. 
L.  64. 

Be  medio,  hrd-rm'-Tneo,  s.  m.,  remedy. 
L.  53. 

Bemendar,  hrd-m^n-ddr\  to  repair,  to 
mend.     L.  64. 

Bemnnerar,  hrd-rnvrnd-rdr'^  to  remu- 
nerate.   L.  52. 

Bendir,  lirhi-der\  to  render,  to  sub- 
due.   Eendirse,  to  surrender.     L.  39. 

Benir,  hrdn-yer\  to  quarrel,  to  dispute, 
to  scold.     L.  39. 

Eeo,  hrd'-Oy  s.  m.,  culprit,  ofiender. 
L.  53. 

Bepartir,  hrd-par-ter' ,  to  divide.  L.  58. 

Bepasar,  hrd-pd-sdr',  to  repass,  to  ex- 
amine, to  glance  over.    L.  64. 

Bepaso,  hrd-pd'-so,  s.  m.,  revision,  the 
act  of  going  or  looking  over.     L.  61. 

Bepente,  hrd-p^'-td.  De  repente,  sud- 
denly, on  a  sudden.    L.  54. 

Bepeticidn,  hrd-pd-te-theon'  [hrS-pa-t6- 
seon'],   s.  f.,  repetition.     L.  63. 

Bepetir,  hrd-pd-ter',  to  repeat.     L.  39. 

Beposar,  hrd-po-sdr\  to  repose,  to  rest. 
L.  39. 

Beposo,  hrd-po'-8o,  s.  m.,  repose,  rest. 
L.  63. 

Eeprender,  hrd-prhi-d^',  to  repre- 
hend, to  reprimand.     L.  42. 

Bepresentar,  hrd-prd-s^n-tdr' ,  to  rep- 
resent, to  make  appear,  to  perform 
(a  part),  to  enact.    L.  64. 


VOCABULARY. 


489 


Reprobar,  7ird-pro-bdr'j  to  reprove,  to 
upbraid.    L.  60. 

Bepublioa,  hrd-pu'-ble-ca,  s.  f.,  repub- 
lic.    L.  65. 

Beputaoidn,  hrd-pii-td-theon'  [hrS-pft-tS- 
8§on'],  reputation.     L.  24. 

Besarcir,  hrd-SQ,r-ther'  [hra-sar-sgr'],  to 
indemnify,  to  compensate,  to  make 
up  for.     L.  59. 

Resentirse,  hrd-s^n-ter'-sd,  to  resent, 
to  feel  tbe  effects  of.     L.  59. 

Besfriado,  hrds-fred'-THo,  s.  m.,  a  cold. 
L.  63. 

Resfriarse,  hrds-fredr''Sd,to  catch  cold. 
L.  63. 

Residente,  hrd-se-dM'-td,  adj.,  act. 
part,  (of  Eesidib),  resident,  resid- 
ing.    L.  38. 

Residir,  hrdrse-THer\  to  reside.    L.  9. 

Resistir,  hrd-ses-ter',  to  resist.    L.  51. 

Resolucidn,  hrd-so-lii-theon'  [hra-so-m- 
B6on'],  s.  f.,  resolution.     L.  63. 

Resolver,  hrd-sol-vtr' ,  to  solve,  to  re- 
solve.   L.  64. 

Respeoto,  Jird-spW-to,  s.  m.,  respect, 
as,  in  this  respect.     L.  51. 

Respetable,  hrd-spd-td'-bld,  adj.,  re- 
spectable.   L.  39. 

Respetar,  hrd-spd-tdr' ,  to  respect.  L. 
36. 

Respeto,  hrd-spd'-to,  s.  m.,  respect,  re- 
gard.   L.  56. 

Responder,  hrd-spon-d&r' y  to  respond, 
to  answer,  to  reply  to.    L.  33. 

Responddn,  hrd-spon-don\  adj.,  ready 
or  quick  to  reply.     L.  33. 

Respuesta,  hrds-puds'-ta^  s.  f.,  re- 
sponse, reply,  answer.    L.  30. 

Restante,  hr^-tdn'-td,  s.  m.,  act.  part, 
(of  Restae),  remainder,  rest,  re- 
maining.   L.  46. 

Resnltar,  hrd-sHl-tdr' ,  to  result,  to  turn 
out,  to  occur.    L.  43. 

Retirar,  hrd-te-rdr' ,  to  retire,  to  with- 
draw, to  retreat.    L.  63. 

Retrato,  hrd-trd'-to,  s.  m.,  portrait, 
likeness.    L.  17. 

Renmatismo,  hrdu-md-tes'-mo,  s.  m., 
rheumatism.    L.  63. 

Reunir,  hrdii-ner',  to  unite,  to  reunite, 
to  assemble.     L.  52. 

Revds,  hrd-vds\  s.  m.,  back  part,  wrong 
side.  Al  reves,  on  the  contrary,  up- 
side down.    L.  63. 

Revoltoso,  hrd'vol-to'-so,  adj.,  turbu- 
lent, rebellious.    L.  44. 

Rey,  hrd'-e,  s.  m.,  king.    L.  15. 

Reyezuelo,  hrde-thiid'-lo  [hrae-sfiS'-lo],  s. 
m.  (dim.  of  Eey),  petty  king,  king- 
ling.    L.  44. 

Rioacho,  hre-cd'-cho,  adj.,  very  rich, 
new  rich.    L.  49. 


Rico,  hre'-co,  adj.,  rich.    L.  13. 
Ridiculez,  hre-de-cu-ldth'  thre-de-cCl-l5s'], 

s.  f.,  ridicule.    L.  45. 
Ridiculizar,  hre-de-cvrle-tMr'   [hrg-de- 

cft-le-sSr'J,  to  ridicule.     L.  48. 
Ridicule,  hre-de'-cd-lo,  adj.  and  s.  m., 

ridiculous,  ridicule.    L.  5. 
Rigoddn,  hre-go-Tson' ,  s.  m.,  rigadoon, 

country  dance.    L.  23. 
Rincdn,  hren-con',  s.  m.,  comer.    L.  55. 
Rio,  hre'-o,  s.  m.,  river.    L.  40. 
Riqueza,  hre-hd'-thQ,  [hre-kS'-sa],  s.  f., 

riches.     L.  48. 
Risa,  hre'-sQ,  s.  f.,  laugh,   laughter. 

L.  48. 
Rivalizar,  hre-vd-le-thdr'  [hrg-vJ-is-eSr'], 

to  rival,  to  vie  with.    L.  51. 
Robar,  hro-bdr\  to  rob,  to  steal.    L.  44. 
Rodar,  hro-THdr',  to  roll.    L.  54. 
Rodear,  hro-THddr',  to  go  around,  to 

surround,  to  revolve.    L.  54. 
B,odesido,*hro-THdd'-THo,  adj.  and  p.  p. 

(of  Eodear),  surrounded.     L.  58. 
Rodilla,  hro-THel'-yg,  [hro-THg'-ya],  s.  f., 

knee.    De  rodillas,  on  the  knees. 

L.  59. 
Rodriguez,  hro-dre'-gMth  [hro-dr6'-ghgs], 

s.  m.,  Eodriguez.    L.  49. 
Rogar,  hro-gdr'j  to  beg  of,  to  pray.    L. 

35. 
Rojo,  hro'-ho,  adj.,  red.    L.  54. 
Romano,  hro-md'-no,  adj.,  Eoman.    L. 

54. 
Romper,  hrom-p^r\  to  break,  to  tear. 

L.  46. 
Ropa,   hro'-pQ,  s.  f.,   clothes,  under- 
clothes, inner  wearing  apparel.    L. 

28. 
Rosa,  hro'-SQ,8.  f.,  rose.    L.  63. 
Roto,  hro'-to,  irr.  p.  p.  (of  Eomper), 

broken,  out  of  order.    L.  52. 
Rubio,  hrH'-beo,  adj.,  ruddy.    L.  63. 
Ruido,  hrue'-THO,  s.  m.,  noise.    L.  46. 
Ruin,   hr4-en\   adj.,   mean,  churlish, 

villanous.    L.  63. 
Rnindad,  hrHen-THdrn',  s.  f.,  meanness, 

churlishness,  villany.    L.  48. 
Rnisenor,  hrHe-sdn-yor',  s.  m.,  night- 
ingale.   L.  63. 
Rumor,  hr4-mor\  s.  m.,  rumor.    L.  54. 
Rutina,  hrii-te'-n^,  s.  f.,  routine.    L. 


Sabado,  sd'-bd-Tso,   s.  m.,  Saturday. 

L.  9. 
Saber,  sd-b^r',  to  know,  to  hear  from, 

to  savor,  to  taste ;  s.  m.,  learning, 

knowledge.    L.  21  and  42. 
Sabio,  sd'-beo.,  adj.,  wise,  sage,  learned. 

L.  21. 
Sabor,  sd-bor',  s.  m.,  savor,  taste.    L. 

62  and  66. 


490 


VOCABULAEY. 


Saoamtielas,  sdrc^mud'-las,  s.  m., 
tooth-drawer,  dentist.     L.  50. 

Sacar,  sd-cdr',  to  draw  out,  to  take 
out,  to  pull  out.     L.  50  and  66. 

Saco,  sd'-co,  s.  m.,  sack,  bag,  sack- 
coat.     L.  66. 

Sacudir,  sd-cu-rner',  to  shake  off,  to 
shake.    L.  54. 

Sal,  sdl,  8.  f.,  salt,  wit.    L.  55. 

Saldo,  sdl'-do,  s.  m.,  balance  (of  ac- 
counts).   L.  64. 

Salida,  sd-le'-wna,  s.  f.,  going  out,  de- 
parture, start.     L.  63. 

Salients,  sa-Ze^»'-fa,  adj.  and  act.  part., 
projecting,  salient.     L.  38. 

Salir,  sd-ler',  to  go  or  to  come  out,  to 
set  out,  to  leave,  to  start,  to  finish, 
to  rise  (as  of  the  sun).  Salio  i,  su 
padre,  he  resembled  his  father.  L. 
20. 

Saldn,  sd-lon',  s.  m.,  parlor,  saloon, 
hall.     L.  58. 

Saltar,  sdl-tdr',  to  jump,  to  leap.  L. 
58. 

Salto,  sdl'-to,  s.  m..  leap,  jump,  fall 
(water-fall).    L.  59. 

Salud,  sd-luTH',  s.  f.,  health.    L.  25. 

Saludar,  sd-lu-THdr',  to  salute.    L.  64. 

Sanchez,  sdn'-cMth  [sSn'-ch^s],  s.  m., 
Sanchez.     L.  49. 

Sangre,  sdn'-grd,  blood.     L.  64. 

Santificar,  sdn-te-fe-cdr' ,  to  sanctify. 
L.  45. 

Santo,  sdn'-to,  adj.,  holy,  saintly.  L. 
64. 

Sastre,  sds'-trd,  s.  m.,  tailor.    L.  11. 

Sastreria,  sds-trd-re'-Q,  s.  f.,  tailor- 
shop.     L.  11. 

Satirico,  s6i-^'-re-co,  adj.,  satirical.  L. 
35. 

Satisfaoer,  sd-tes-fd-tMr'  CsS-tes-fS-sgr'], 
to  satisfy-     L.  42. 

Satisfecho,  sd-tes-fd'-cho,  adj.  and  p.  p. 
(of  Satisfacee),  satisfied.  L.  44 
and  52. 

Sayo,  sd'-yo,  s.  m.,  a  loose  coat  or 
jacket.    L.  65. 

Sazonar,  sd-tho-ndr'  [s^-so-nSr'],  to  sea- 
son.   L.  62. 

Se,  sd,  per.  pron.  (instead  of  Le,  Les, 
to  him,  to  her,  to  them,  to  you),  L. 
26  ;  pron.  (used  to  form  the  passive 
voice),  L.  32;  ref.  pron.,  L.  33. 

Se-,  sd,  Lat.  prep,  prefix.     L.  50. 

Secrete,  sd-crd'-to,  s.  m.,  secret,  se- 
crecy.    L.  65. 

Sed,  s^TH,  s.  f.,  thirst.     L.  25. 

Seda,  sd'-THQ,  s.  f.,  silk.    L.  5. 

Segnir,  sd-gher',  to  follow,  to  con- 
tinue.    L.  39. 

Segun,  sd-qun',  prep.,  according  to. 
L.  40  and  66. 


Segnndo,  sd-gHn'-do,  ord.  adj.  and  s. 

m.,  second.     L.  15  and  23. 
Segnro,   sd-gii'-ro,  adj.,  sure,   secure. 

L.  43. 
Seis,  sd'-es,  num.  adj.,  six.     L.  14. 
Seiscientos,    sdes-the&n'-tos     [sae-se?n'- 

tos],  num.  adj.,  six  hundred.   L.  14. 
Semana,  sd-md'-nq,  s.  f.,  week.    L.  8. 
Semblante,  sem-bldn'-td,  s.  m.,  counte- 
nance, face,  aspect,  look.     L.  59. 
Sentar,  s^n-tdr' ,  to  sit,  to  sit  down,  to 

set  down,  to  enter  (in  a  book),  to  fit, 

to  be  becoming  to.     L.  34. 
Sentencia,    sen-Un'-thea    [sen-tgn'-sea], 

s.  f.,  sentence.     L.  43. 
Sentido,  shi-t^'-'^uo,  s.  m.,  sense,  idea. 

L.  65. 
Sentir,  shi-ter',  to  feel, to  regret.  L.  38. 
Senor,  sdn-yor'.  Sir,  Mr.,  Lord.    L.  1. 
Senora,  sdn-yo'-ra,  s.  f.,  lady,  madam, 

Mrs.,  wife.     L.  2. 
Senorita,    sdn-yo-re'-tcL,    s.   f.,    young 

lady.  Miss.     L.  2. 
Senorito,   sdn-yo-re'-to,  s.   m.,   young 

sir^  young  gentleman,  Mr.     L.  2. 
Septimo,  8^p'-te-mo,  s.  and  ord.  adj., 

seventh.     L.  15. 
Ser,  8^r,  s.  m.,  to  be,  to  exist  (compare 

with  Estae).    L.  11  and  22. 
Ser,   8^,  s.  m.,  being,  existence.    L. 

54. 
Servidor,  8h'-ve-THor' ,  s.  m.,  servant. 

Servidor  de  usted,  your  servant.    L. 

39. 
Servir,   8^r-ver',   to  serve,   to  oblige. 

S€rvir8e,  to  be  good  enough,  to  be 

kind  enough,  to  be  pleased  (to  do). 

L.  39. 
Sesenta,  sd-sen'-tQ,   num.  adj.,  sixty. 

L.  14. 
Setenta,  sd-t^n'-tg,,  num.  adj.,  seventy. 

L.  14. 
Setecientos,  sd-td-thehi'-tos  [sa-ta-se^n'- 

tos],  num.  adj.,  seven  hundred.    L. 

14. 
Septiembre,  s^p-te^m'-brd,  s.  m.,  Sep- 
tember.   L.  24. 
Sexo,  s^h'-so,  s.  m.,  sex.   El  bello  sexo, 

the  fair  sex.     L.  58. 
Sexto,    s^k'-to,   ord.    adj.  and  s.  m., 

sixth.     L.  15. 
Si,  se,  adv.,  yes.     L.  1. 
Si.  se,  indef.  pron.,  self,  one's  self.   L. 

26. 
Si,  se,  conj.,  if,  but.     L.  23. 
Siempre,  se^m'-prd,  adv.,  always.    Por 

siempre  jamd.s,  forever  and  ever.    L. 

25. 
Siesta,   seh'-ta,  s.  f.,  siesta,  afternoon 

nap.     L.  62!' 
Siete,  sed'-td,  num.  adj.,  seven.  L.  14. 
Siglo,  se'-glo,  s.  m.,  century.    L.  52. 


rOCABULAHF. 


491 


Significado,     seg-ne-fe-cd'-THo,   s.  m., 

signification,  meaning.   L.  49. 
Signiflcar,    seg-ne-fe-cdr' ,   to   signify. 

L.  64. 
Silaba,  se'-ld-hijb,  s.  f.,  syllable.    L.  63. 
Silencio,  se-lhi'-theo  [se-iSn'-seo],  s.  m., 

silence.     L.  65. 
Silencioso,     se-Un-theo'-so    Cse-ign-seo'- 

so],   adj.,  silent.     L.  64. 
Silla,  sel'-y^  [8e'-yaJ,s.  f.,  chair,  saddle. 

L.  14. 
Simpatizar,    sem-pd-te-thdr'  [sem-pS-tg- 

sSr'J,  to  sympathize.    L.  51. 
Simple,  sem'-pld,  adj.,  simple,  single, 

silly.     L.  43. 
Sin,  sen,  prep.,  without.   Sin  embargo, 

notwithstanding.    L.  19. 
Sinceridad,    sen-thd-re-THdrM'   [sen-sa- 

re-THETH'],  s.  f.,  sincerity.    L.  45. 
Sinoero,     sen-thd'-ro  [sen-sa'-roj,    adj., 

sincere.     L.  40. 
Singular,    sen-gu-ldr',  adj.,  singular. 

L.  57. 
Sino,  se'-no,  conj.,  but,  if  not.    L.  3. 
Sindnimo,    se-no'-ne-mo,  s.   m.,  syno- 
nym.   L.  65. 
Sinrazdn,  sen-rd-thon'  [sen-rS-son'],  s.  f., 

wrong,  injustice.     L.  50. 
Siquiera,    se-Tced'-rQ,    conj.,   even,  at 

least.     L.  40. 
Sitio,  se'-teo,  s.  m.,    place,    position, 

siege.     L.  58. 
Situado,  se-iUd'-THo,  p.  p.  (of  Situar). 

L.  20. 
Situar,  se-tddr',  to  situate,  to  be  situ- 
ated.   L.  64. 
So-,  so,  prep.,  under.    So  pretexto  de, 

under  pretext  of.     L.  41. 
Sobrar,  so-brdr',  to  be  over  and  above. 

L.  64. 
Sobre,  so'-brd,  prep.,  upon,  on,  over, 

above,  about;  s.  m.,  envelope.    L. 

41. 
Sobreesorito,   so-bra-h-cre'-to,    s.  m., 

superscription,  address  (of  a  letter). 

L.  56. 
Sobrina,  so-bre'-na,  s.  f.,  niece.    L.  65. 
Sobrino,  so-bre'-no,  s.  m.,  nephew.    L. 

65. 
Sooialismo,    so-thed-les'-mo   Cso-sea-lgs'- 

mo],  s.  m.,  socialism.    L.  50. 
Sociedad,  so-thed-THdrH'  [so-sea-THaTH'], 

s.  m.,  society,  company,  a  firm.     L. 

32. 
Socio,  so'-theo  [so'-seo],  s.  m.,  partner, 

companion,  member  of  a  firm.     L. 

62. 
Sofa,  so-fd\  s.  m.,  sofa.     L.  34. 
Sol,  sol,  s.  m.,  sun.     L.  45. 
Solas,  so'-lds,  all  alone.     L.  64. 
Soldado,  sol-dd'-THo,  s.  m.,  soldier.    L. 

52. 


Soledad,   so-ld-THdTs' ,  s.  f.,  solitude, 

loneliness.    L.  63. 
Solemne,  so-Um'-nd,  adj.,  solemn,  thor- 
ough, downright.     L.  61. 
Soler,  so-Ur\  to  be  accustomed  to,  to 

be  wont.     L.  41. 
Solicitar,  so-le-the-tdr'  [so-is-se-tSr'],  to 

solicit.     L.  47, 
Soliloquio,  so-le-lo'-keo,   s.  m.,  solilo- 
quy.   L.  65. 
Solo,   so'-lo,  adj.,   alone;    solo,    adv., 

only,  merely.     L.  25. 
Soltar,  sol-tdr',  to  untie,  to  loose,  to 

liberate,  to  let  go  free.    L.  64. 
Soltero,  sol-td'-ro,  s.  m.,  bachelor,  un- 
married man.    L.  51. 
Sombra,  som'-brQ,  s.  f.,  shade,  shadow. 

L.  58. 
Sombrero,  som-brd'-ro,  s.  m.,  hat.    L. 

10. 
Son,  son,  s.  m.,  sound.    Sin  ton  y  sin 

son,   without  rhyme    and  without 

reason.    L.  47. 
Sonar,  so-ndr',  to  sound.    L.  45. 
Sonido,  so-ne'-THOf  s.  m.,  sound.     L. 

47. 
Sonreirse,  son-rder'-sd,  to  smile.     L. 

64. 
Sonrisa,  son-re' -sq,,  s.  f.,  smile.    L.  54. 
Sonrojar,    son-ro-hdr',    to   make    one 

blush.     L.  64. 
Sonar,  son-ydr',  to  dream.    L.  35. 
Sopa,  so'-pQ,,  s.  f.,  soup.    L.  44. 
Sopetdn,  so-pd-ton',  s.  m.    De  sopeton, 

unexpectedly.     L.  44. 
Soplar,   so-pldr',  to  blow,  to  prompt. 

L.  64. 
Sordo,  sor'-do,  adj.,  deaf.     L.  64. 
Sorprender,  sor-prin-d^r' ,  to  surprise. 

L.  42. 
Sorpresa;   sor-prd'-s^,   s.  f.,  surprise. 

L.  51. 
Sospeohar,  sos-pd-chdr' ,  to  suspect.    L. 

60. 
Su,  sH,  poss.  adj.,  his,  her,  its,  their, 

your.     L.  5. 
Sub-,  siib,  Lat.  prep.,  prefix.     L.  50. 
Subida,  su-be'-THQ,  s.  f.,  rising,  rise, 

ascent.     L.  63. 
Snbir,   su-ber',  to  go  or  come  up,  to 

ascend,  to  mount,  to  rise.    L.  50. 
Subjuntivo,  sub-hun-te'-vo,   adj.,   sub- 
junctive.    L.  43. 
Substancia,  sub-stdn'-thea  [stib-stSn'-sea], 

s.  f.,  substance.     L.  63. 
Suceder,    su-thd-TH^r'    [sfi-sa-qpHSr'],    to 

happen,  to   take  place,  to  succeed 

(to  come  after).     L.  45. 
Sucesivo,    su-thd-se'-vo   [sii-sa-sS'-vo],  s. 

m.,  future.     L.  32. 
Sucio,   su'-theo    [sti'-ceo],  adj.,   soiled, 

dirty.    L.  64. 


492 


VOCABULAET. 


Snd,  suTH,  s.  m.,  South.  L.  26. 
Suegra,  sM'-gr^,   s.  f.,  mother-in-law. 

L.  63. 
SuegTO,  sud'-gro,  s.  m.,  father-in-law. 

L.  63. 
Suela,  sud'-lQ,  s.  f.,  sole.    L.  61. 
Suelo,  sM'-lo,  s.  m.,  ground,  floor,  soil. 

L.  54. 
Suelto,  sHW-io,  adj.  and  p.  p.  (of  Sol- 

tae),  loose,  free.     L.  64. 
Sueno,  sUdn'-yo,  s.  m.,  sleep,  dream. 

L.  25. 
Suerte,   suir'-td,  s.  f.,  luck,   chance, 

sort.     Echar  svsrtes,  to  cast  lots.    L. 

58. 
Stificiente,  su-fe-the^n'-td  [sfi-fe-seSn'-ta], 

adj.,  sufficient.     L.  49. 
Sufrir,  su-frer',  to  suffer,  to  bear  with, 

to  undergo.     L.  64. 
Btgeto,  sii-hd'-to,  s.  m.,  individual,  per- 
son, topic,  matter,  subject.     L.  27. 
Sujetc,  8u-hd'-to,  adj.,  subject. 
Buma,  su'-ma,  s.  m.,  sum.    En  swma, 

in  short.    L.  63  and  64. 
Superior,  su-pd-reor',  adj.,   superior. 

L.  21. 
Buperlativo,   sH-p^r-ldrte'-vo,  adj.,  su- 
perlative.   L.  50. 
Bnpersticioso,  su-phr-ste-theo'-so  [sfi-per- 

ste-seo'-so],  adj.,  superstitious.    L.  45. 
Suplicar,  su-ple-cdr',  to  supplicate,  to 

beg,  to  crave.     L.  64. 
Suponer,  sH-po-nh'',  to  supjKJse.    L.  64. 
Supremo,   su-prd'-mo,  adj.,   supreme, 

highest.     L.  21. 
Supuesto,  su-pUds'-to,  p.  p.  (of  Supo- 

neb).    Por  supuesto,  of  course.    L. 

64. 
Bur,  sur  (see  Sud).     L.  66. 
Bus,   sUs,   intj.,  holloa,   exclamation. 

L.  46. 
Bnspirar,  sus-pe-rdr',  to  sigh.    L.  64. 
Sustantivo,   siis-tdn-te'-vo,   s.   m.   and 

adj.,  substantive.     L.  64. 
Sustentar,  sus-tH-tdr',  to  sustain.    L. 

65. 
Sutil.  su-teV,  adj.,  subtle,  thin,  slender. 

L.  64. 
Sutileza,  su-te-ld'-thg,  [sii-te-la'-sa],  s.  f., 

subtlety,  cunning,  slendemess.     L. 

63. 
Suyo,  su'-yo,  poss.  adj.,  his,  hers,  its, 

theirs,  yours,  one's.    L.  13. 

Tabaco,  td-bd'-co,  s.  m.,  tobacco,  cigar. 

L.  42. 
Tablero,   td-hld'-ro,   s.  m.,   a   smooth 

board,  chess  or  checker-board.  L.  51. 
Tacto,<afc'-to,  s.  m.,  the  sense  of  touch. 

L.  65. 
Tal,  tM,  adj.,  such,  so.     Tal  vez,  per- 
L.  32. 


Talento,  tH-Un'-to,  s.  m., talent,  ability; 

L.  65. 
Tambien,   tdm-be^n',   conj.  and  adv., 

also,  as  well,  moreover.    L.  29. 
Tampoco,  tdm-po'-co,  adv.,  neither,  not 

either,  nor.     L.  29. 
Tan,   tdn,  adv.,  so,   so  much,   as,  as. 

much.     L.  20. 
Tan  to,  tdn' -to,  adj.,  so,  in  such  a  man- 
ner.    Tanto  mejor,  so  much  the  bet- 
ter.    Por  lo  tanto,  therefore.    L.  20. 
Tapar,  tdrpdr',  to  cover  up,  to  stop  up. 

L.  65. 
Tapete,   td-pd'-td,  s.  m.,   table-cover. 

L.  61. 
Tardar,  t^r-ddr',  to  delay,  to  put  off. 

L.  60. 
Tarde,  t^r'-dd,  s.  f.,  afternoon  ;  adv., 

late.     L.  20. 
Tarea,  td-rd'-a,  s.  f.,  task.    L.  58. 
Tarjeta,  tar-hd'-ta,  s.  f.,  card,  visiting 

card.      Tarjeta  postal,   postal  card. 

L.  64. 
Tate,   td'-td,   intj.,    easy  there !  take 

care !    L.  46. 
Taza,  td'-thQ  [tS'-sa],  s.  f.,  cup.    L.  55. 
Te,  td,  s.  m.,  tea.     L.  55. 
Te,  td,  pers.  pron.,  thee,  to  thee.     L. 

26. 
Teatro,  tdd'-tro,  s.  m.,  theatre.    L.  17. 
Teja,  tl^'-ha,  s.  f.,  tile.    De  tejas  abajo, 

humanly  speaking.     L.  61. 
Telegrafico,  td-ld-grd'-fe-co,  adj.,  tele- 
graphic.    L.  65. 
TelegT&fo.td-ld'-grd-fo,  s.  m.,  telegraph. 

L.  46. 
Tema,  te'-ma,  s.  m.,  theme,  exercise ; 

s.  f.,  dispute,  contention.    L.  57. 
Temer,  te-m^r',  to  fear.    L.  28. 
Temerario,   td-md-rd'-reo,    adj.,  rash, 

foolhardy.    L.  54. 
Temor,  td-mor',  s.  m.,  fear.    L.  54. 
Temprano,    t^m-prd'-no,    adv.,    early, 

soon.    L.  20. 
Tenacidad,    td-nd-the-THdwH'    [ta-n2-8& 

THaTH],  s.  f.,  tenacity.     L.  65. 
Tenedor,  td-nd-Tuor',  s.  m.,  fork.    L. 

65. 
Tener,  td-n^r',  to  have,  to  hold,  to  be, 

to  take  place.     L.  10. 
Tentacion,  thi-tdr-theon'  [tgn-tS-sgon'],  s. 

m.,  temptation.     L.  61. 
Tenir,  tdn-yer',  to  dye.     L.  39. 
Teoria,  tdo-re'-a,  s.  f.,  theory.     L.  23. 
Tercero,  t^r-thd'-ro  [ter-sa'-ro],  ord.  adj. 

and  s.  m.,  third.     L.  15. 
Tercio,  t^r'-theo  [ter'-seo],  s.  m.,  third, 

third  part.     L.  40. 
Terminacidn,  t^r-me-nd-theon'  [t5r-me- 

na-seon],  s.  f.,  termination.     L.  49. 
Terminante,  t^r-me-ndn'-td,  adj.,  con- 
clusive.   L.  65. 


VOCABULARY. 


493 


Terminar,   t^r-me-ndr',  to  terminate. 

L.  65. 
Termino,   t^r'-me-no,   s.  m.,  termina- 
tion, term.     L.  65. 
Termdmetro,  Ur-mo'-me-tro,  s.  m.,  ther- 
mometer.   L.  60. 
Terrenal,  t^-hrd-ndl\  adj.,  terrestrial. 

L.  49. 
Terrene,  tt-hrd'-no,  s.  m.,  ground.    L. 

55. 
Terrible,  <^7ire'-6Za,  adj.,  terrible.    L. 

53. 
Terrdn,  U-hron\  s.  m.,  a  clod,  upturned 

earth.     L.  49. 
Terroso,  U-hro'-so,  adj.,  earthy.      L. 

49. 
Terrestre,  U-hr^s'-tra^  adj.,  terrestrial, 

earthly.     L.  49. 
Tertulia,  t^-tu'-leQ,  s.  f.,  party,  soiree. 

L.  39. 
Ti,  te,  pers.  pron.,  thee,  following  a 

prep.     L.  26. 
Tiempo,  te^m'-po,  s.  m.,  time,  weather. 

L.  23. 
Tienda,  tehi'-dQ,  s.  f.,  store,  shop.    L. 

64. 
Tierra,  tW-hr^^  s.  f.,  earth,  land,  na- 
tive land,    L.  45. 
Tijeras,   te-hd'-ra^s,  s.  f.  pi.,  scissors. 

L.  64. 
Tinta,  ten'-t^,  s.  f.,  ink.    L.  5. 
Tintero,   ten-td'-ro,  s.  m.,  ink-stand. 

Dejarse  algo  en  el  tintero,  to  leave 

something  unsaid.    L.  4. 
Tinto,  ten' -to,  adj.,  red.    Vino  tinto, 

claret  wine.     L.  65. 
Tic,  te'-o,  s.  m.,  uncle.    L.  65. 
Tirabuzdn,  te-rd-bti-thon'  [tg-rS-bft-son'], 

s.  m.,  cork-screw.     L.  65. 
Tiranioo,  te-rd'-ne-co,  adj.,  tyrannical. 

L.  35. 
Tirar,   te-rdr',   to  throw,   to  cast,   to 

shoot.      Tire  usted  por  aqui,  take 

this  road.     L.  64. 
Tiro,  te'-ro,  s.  m.,  throw,  cast.    A  tiro 

de  pistola,  within  pistol  shot.     L. 

53. 
Titulo,  te'-tii-lOy  s.  m.,  title.    L.  55. 
Tooante,  to-cdn'-td,  prep.,  concerning, 

relating  to,  touching.     L.  38. 
Tocar,  to-cdr',  to  touch,  to  play  (on  an 

instrument).    L.  15. 
Todavia,  to-THd-ve'-q,  adv.,  yet,  still. 

L.  25. 
Todo,  to'-THO^ adj.,  all.     Todos  los  dias, 

every  day.     Del  todo,  entirely.    Con 

todo,  however,  notwithstanding.    L. 

11. 
Todo,  to'-THO,  s.  m.,  the  whole.    L.  61. 
Tolerar,  to-ld-rdr',  to  tolerate.    L.  65. 
Toma  !  to'-m^,  interj.,  indeed  !    L.  45. 
Tomar,  to-mdr',  to  take.    L.  14. 


Tomo,  to' -mo,  s.  m.,  volume.    Un  libro 

de  tres  tomos,  a  book  in  three  vol- 
umes.    L.  15. 
Tonel,  to-nW,  s.  m.,  cask,  barrel.    L. 

60. 
Tonto,  ton' -to,  adj.,  foolish.    A  tontos 

y  d,  locos,  at  random.     L.  60. 
Tontera,  ton-td'-ra,s.f.,  foolish  action. 

L.  60. 
Toque,  to'-hd,  s.  m.,  roll  (of  a  drum), 

ringing  (of  bells).    AM  est^  el  to- 
que,  that  is  where  the    difficulty 

lies.    L.  65. 
Torero,   to-rd'-ro,   s.  m.,   bull-fighter. 

L.  53. 
Tornar,   tor-ndr',  to  return,  to  begin 

anew.     L.  65. 
Tomo,  tor' -710,  s.  m.,  lathe.    En  torno^ 

round  about.     L.  65. 
Toro,    to'-ro,  s.  m.,  bull.    L.  53. 
Tos,  tos,  s.  f.,  cough.     L.  65. 
Trabajador,  trd-bd-hd-THor' ,  adj.,  and 

s.  m.,  hardworking,  worker.    L.  17. 
Trabajar,  trd-bd-hdr' ,  to  wor^,  to  labor. 

L.  17. 
Trabajo,  trd-bd'-ho,  s.  m.,  work,  labor, 

occupation.     L.  17. 
Traducci6n,      trd-duk-theon'     [tra-dftk- 

seon'Jj  s.  f.,  translation.     L.  64. 
Traducir,  trd-du-ther'   [trS-dti-ser'],    to 

translate.     L.  40. 
Traer,   trd^r',   to  bring,  to  carry,  to 

wear.    L.  42. 
Tragar,  trd-gdr',  to  swallow.    L.  65. 
Tragedia,  trd-hd' -THe§,  s.  f.,  tragedy. 

L.  52. 
Tra^co,  trd'-he-co,  adj.,  tragic.    L.  35. 
Trago,  trd'-go,  s.  m.,  draught,  drink. 

Echar  un  trago,  to  take  a  drink.    L. 

59. 
Traje,  trd'-hd,  s.  m.,  dress,  costume. 

L.  54. 
Trampa,  trdm'-pa,  e.  f.,  trap,  swindle. 

Caer  en  la  trampa,  to  fall  into  the 

snare.    L.  64. 
Trampear,  trdm-pddr',  to  swindle,  to 

impose  upon.    L.  65. 
Tramposo,  trdm-po'-so,&d^.,  deceitful, 

swindling  ;    s.  m.,  cheat,  swindler. 

L.  65. 
Tranquilidad,  trdn-Tce-le-THdTH' ,  s.  f., 

tranquility,  peace,  quietness.   L.  46. 
Tranquilizar,  trdn-ke-le-thdr  [trSn-ke-lg- 

sSr'],  to  tranquilize.     L.  65. 
Tranquilo,  trdn-Tce'-lo,   adj.,  tranquil, 

quiet,  i)eaceful.     L.  60. 
Trapo,  trd'-po,  s.  m.,  rag.     L.  64. 
Tras,  trds,  prep.,  behind,  after.  L.  41. 
Trascurso,  trds-cur'-so,  s.  m.,  course, 

process  (of  time).    L.  51. 
Trasnochar,  trds-no-chdr' ,  to  sit  up  all 

night.    L.  65. 


494 


VOCABULARY. 


Trasquilar,  trds-lce-ldr' ,  tx)  shear 
(sheep).  Ir  por  lana  y  volver  tras- 
quilado,  the  biter  bitten.    L.  65. 

Trastienda,  trds-teen'-dg,,  s.  f.,  a  room 
back  of  shop  or  store.     L.  64. 

Tratado,  trd-td'-THo,  s.  m.,  treatise, 
treaty.     L.  46. 

Tratante,  trd-tdn'-td^  s.  m.,  dealer.  L. 
38. 

Tratar,  trd-tdr\  to  treat,  to  have  in- 
tercourse with  or  relations  with,  to 
trade,  to  deal,  to  traffic,  to  try.  L.  32. 

Trato,  trd'-tOj  s.  m.,  treatment,  deal- 
ings, intercourse.    L.  65. 

Traves,  trd-vds',  prep.  Al  traves  de, 
through.     L.  65. 

Travesura,  trd-vd-su'-ra,  s.  f.,  trick, 
mischief,  naughtiness.    L.  53. 

Travieso,  trd-ved'-so,  adj.,  tricky, 
naughty,  mischievous.    L.  52. 

Traza,  trd'-thg,  [trS'-sa],  s.  f.,  trace. 
Tener  buena  traza,  to  look  well.  L. 
64. 

Trece,  trd'-thd  [tra'-ss],  num.  adj.,  thir- 
teen.   L.  14. 

Treinta,  trd'en-t^,  num.  adj.,  thirty. 
L.  14. 

Tres,  trds,  num.  adj.,  three.    L.  14. 

Tribunal,  tre-bu-ndl',  s.  m.,  tribunal, 
court  of  justice.    L.  53. 

Trigo^  <re'-go,  s.  m.,  wheat.    L.  65. 

Trigeno,  tre-gdn'-yo^  adj.,  brown,  dark 
(complexion).    L.  65. 

Trinchar,  tren-ch^r',  to  cut  up,  to 
carve.     L.  50. 

Trineo,  tre'-ndo,  s.  m.,  sleigh.   L.  65. 

Trinidad,  tre-ne-TudTs' ,  s.  f..  Trinity. 
L.  21. 

Triptongo,  trep-ton'-go,  s.  m.,  trij)- 
thong.     L.  57. 

Triste,  tres'-td,  sad,  mournful,  dull. 
L.  21. 

Tristesa,  tres-td'-sa,  s.  f.,  sadness,  dlil- 
ness.     L.  41. 

Tronar,  tro-ndr',  to  thunder.    L.  30. 

Tropa,  tro'-pa,  s.  f.,  troop.   L.  40. 

Trneco,  trud'-co,  s.  m.,  barter,  ex- 
change. A  triieco,  provided  that. 
L.  61. 

Trueno,  trud'-no,  s.  m.,  thunder,  clap 
of  thunder.    L.  30. 

Trueqne,  trim' -led  (seeTRUECo).  L.  48. 

Tn,  tu,  pers.  pron.,  thou ;  poss.  adj., 
thy.    L.  1. 

Tnerto,  tH^r'-to,  adj.,  blind  of  one  eye. 
L.  65. 

Tntear,  tH-tddr',  to  thou  and  thee,  to 
speak  familiarly  (in  the  second  per- 
son singular).    L.  65. 

Tnteo,  tu-td'-o,  s.  m.,  theeing  and  thou- 
ing.    L.  65. 

Tuyo,  tu'-yo,  poss.  pron.,  thine.    L.  13. 


V,  4,  conj.,  used  instead  of  6  before 
words  beginning  with  o  or  ho.  L.  8. 

Jf,  ilf,  inter).,  ugh  !    L.  46. 

Ultimo,  ul'-te-mo,  adj.,  last.  Por  Ulti- 
rao,  at  last,  finally.    L.  61. 

Un,  un,  adj.  and  indef.  art.,  one,  a 
(always  used  before,  never  after, 
words).  L.  4. 

Una,  li'-ng,  fem.  of  Uno,  which  see. 
L.  5. 

Universidad,  ^i^ner-v^r-se-THdTM' ,  s.  f., 
university.     L.  55. 

TJno,  u'-no,  indef.  art.  and  adj.,  a,  one. 
Uno  i,  uno,  one  by  one.    L.  14. 

"Dna,ttn'-2/a,  s.  f.,  finger-nail.    L.  33. 

TJsar,  -dirsdr',  to  use.    L.  62. 

Uso,  a'-so,  s.  m.,  use.    L.  61. 

TTsted,  u-st^TH',  s.  m.  and  f.,  you  (con- 
traction of  VUESTRA  MEECE17,  your 
worship).    L.  1. 

Util,  H'-tel,  adj.,  useful.    L.  13. 

TTva,  u'-va,  s.  f.,  grape.    L.  40. 

Vaoa,  vd-ca,  s. f.,  cow,  beef.    L.  55. 

Vacio,  vd-the'-o  [vS-sg'-o],  adj.,  empty. 
L.  58. 

Valencia,  vd-lhi'-theg,  [vS-ign'-th6a],  s.  f., 
Valencia.    L.  55. 

Valentia,  vd-lhi-te'Q,  s.  f.,  valor,  brav- 
ery.   L.  54. 

Valer,  vd-Ur',  to  be  worth,  to  be  good 
for.  Mds  vale  tarde  que  nunca,  bet- 
ter late  than  never.  /  Vdlgame  Dios ! 
bless  me  !    L.  41. 

Yaliente,  vd-lehi'-td,  adj.,  valiant, 
brave.     L.  47. 

Valor,  vdrlor',  s.  m.,  valor,  bravery, 
worth,  value.     L.  25. 

Vals,  vgls,  s.  m.,  waltz.    L.  23. 

VamoB !  vd'-mos,  intj.,  come!  come 
along !    L.  46. 

Vapor,  vd-por',  s.  m.,  steam,  steam- 
boat, steamer.     L.  37. 

Vara,  vd'-ra,  s.  f.,  rod  ;  yard  measure. 
L.  47. 

Vario,  vd'-reo,  adj.,  various,  variable; 
pi.,  several.     L.  43. 

Vardn,  vd-ron\  s.  m.,  man,  male,  hu- 
man being.     L.  62. 

Vascongradas,  vds-con-gd'-THds  (Las 
Provincias),  s.  f.  pi.,  the  three 
Spanish  provinces  of  Alava,  Guipuz- 
coa  and  Biscay.     L.  55. 

Vascuence,  vds-ku^n'-thd  [vas-k1i6n'-8a], 
s.  m.,  the  Biscayan  dialect.     L.  55. 

Vasija,  vd-se'-h^,  s.  f.,  cask  for  liquors. 
L.  52. 

Vaso,  vd'-so,  s.  m.,  vase,  glass  (for 
drinking),  tumbler.     L.  61. 

Vaya,  vd'-ya,  intj.,  come  now!  indeed! 
L.  42. 

Vecino,  vd-the'-no  [vS-se'-no].    L.  28 


VOCABULARY. 


495 


Veinte,  vd'en-td,   num.  adj.,   twenty. 

L.  14. 
Vela,   vd'-la,   s.  f.,   sail    (of  a  ship), 

candle.    L.  53. 
Veneer,    v^n-tMr'    [ven-ser'],    to    van- 
quish, to  overcome,  to  conquer.     L. 

59. 
Vender,  v^n-d^r',  to  sell.    L.  6. 
*-►    Venir,  vd-ner',  to  come,  to  suit,  to  fit. 

Venir  i,  pelo,  to  be  just  the  thing. 

No  hay  mal  que  por  bien  no  venga, 

it's  an  ill  wind  that  blows  good  to 

nobody.     L.  18. 
Ventaja,  v^n-t&'-ha,   s.  f.,  advantage. 

L.  43. 
Ventana,  v^n-td' -tiq,  s.  f.,  window.    L. 

28. 
«-•  Ver,  v^,  to  see,  to  look.    A  ver,  let  us 

look.     Verse  negro,  to  be  in  great 

distress.     L.  29. 
Verano,  vd-rd'-no,  s.  m.,  summer.    L. 

24. 
Verbal,  v^r-bdl\  adj.,  verbal.    L.  49. 
Verbo,  v^r'-bo,  s.  m.,  verb.    L.  41. 
Verdad,  ver-ddTH\  s.   f.,  truth.    A  la 

ver  dad,  truly,  indeed.     L.  43. 
Verdaderamente,    v^r-dd-THd-rd-m^n'- 

td,  adv.,  truly,  veritably.     L.  32. 
Verde,  v^r'-dd,  adj.,  green.    L.  54. 
Verdura,    v^r-du'-rg,,    s.   f.,   verdure, 

vegetables.     L.  34. 
Vergiienza,  v^r-gu^n'-thg,  [v5r-g\i5n'-sa], 

s.  f.,  shame.     Tener  vergiienza,  to  be 

ashamed.     L.  25. 
Versidn,  v^r-seon',  s.  f.,  version.   L.  64. 
Verso,    v&'-so,   s.   m.,  verse,   line  of 

poetry.     L.  52. 
Vestido,  vh-te'-THo,  s.  m.,  dress,  wear- 
ing apparel.     L.  39. 
Vestir,  v^s-ter',  to  dress,  to  clothe.    L. 

25. 
V   Vez,  vdth  [vas],  s.  f.,  time.    Una  vez, 

once.     Dos  veces,  twice.     En  vez  de, 

instead  of.     Hacer  las  veces  de,  to 

act  as,  to  serve  as.     Tal  vez^  perhaps. 

A  mi  vez,  in  my  turn.     A  veces,  at 

times. 
Viajar,  ved-hdr',  to  travel.    L.  21. 
Vicerector,  ve-thd-r^1c-tor'  [ve-sa-rgk-tor'], 

s.  m.,  vicerector.     L.  50. 
Viceversa,  ve-thd-v^r'-sa  [ve-sa-vSr'-sa], 

vice  versa.     L.  47. 
Vicio,  ve'-theo  [ve'-seo],  s.  m.,  vice.     L. 

41. 
Victoria,  veh-to'-rea,  s.  f.,  victory.    L. 

46. 
Vida,  ve'-THa,  s.  f.,  life.    L.  50. 
Viejo,  ve^'-ho,  adj.,  old.    L.  13. 
Viena,  ve^'-na,  s.  f.,  Vienna.     L.  12. 
Viento,  vein' -to,  s.  m.,  wind.    L.  30. 
Viernes,  veir'-nU,  s.  m.,  Friday.    Vier- 

nes  santo,  Good  Friday.    L.  9. 


Viga,  ye'-ga,  s.  f.,  beam.    L.  65. 

Villadiegro,  vel-ya-ded'-go  [ve-ya-dea'-go], 
s.  m.  Tomar  las  de  Villadiego,  to  run 
away,  to  take  to  one's  heels.     L.  50. 

Vinacho,  ve-nd'-cho,  s.  m.,  bad  wine. 
L.  49. 

Vino,  ve'-no,  s.  m.,  wine.     L.  7. 

Violado,  veo-ld'-THo,  s.  m.  and  adj., 
violet  (color).     L.  54. 

Violeta,  veo-ld-ta,  s.  f.,  violet.    L.  54. 

Violin,  veo-len',  s.  m.,  violin.    L.  15. 

Violinista,  veo-le-nes'-ta,  s.  m.,  violin- 
ist.    L.  36.  ^ 

Virtud,  ver-tuTH',  s.  f.,  virtue.  En 
virtud  de,  by  virtue  of.    L.  41. 

Visita,  ve-se'-ta,  s.  f.,  visit.    L.  28. 

Visitar,  ve-se-tdr',  to  visit,  to  examine. 
L.  52. 

Vista,  ves'-  ta,  s.  f.,  sight,  view.  A  vista^ 
at  sight.  Perder  de  vista,  to  lose 
sight  of.     L.  29  and  51. 

Visto,  ves'-to,  past.  part,  (of  Veb), 
seen.    L.  52. 

Vistoso,  ves-to'-so,  adj.,  conspicuous, 
showy.    L.  54. 

I  Viva!  ve'-va,  intj.,  long  live!  hur- 
rah !  huzza  !     L.  46. 

Viviente,  ve-veln'-td,  s.  m.  and  act. 
part.,  living  being ;  living,  animated. 
L.  38. 

Vivir,  ve-ver',  to  live.    L.  9. 

Vivo,  ve'-vo,  adj.,  alive,  lively,  spright- 
ly.    L.  20. 

Vizcaino;  veth-cg'-hno  [ves-ca'-S-no],  s. 
m.  and  adj.,  Biscayan.     L.  55. 

Vizcaya,  veth-cd'-yq,  [vSs-cS'-ya],  s.  f., 
Biscay.     L.  55. 

Vocabnlario,  vo-cd-bH-ld'-reo^  s.  m.,  vo- 
cabulary.   L.  58. 

Vocal,  vo-cdV,  adj.  and  s.  m.,  vocal, 
vowel.     L.  58. 

Volar,  vo-ldr',  to  fly.    L.  45. 

Volumen,  vo-lu'-men,  s.  m.,  volume. 
L.  15. 

Voluntad,  vo-lun-TsdTH' ,  s.  f.,  will. 
L.  45. 

Volver,  vol-vlr',  to  come  or  go  back,  to 
return,  to  do  again,  to  turn.  Volver 
en  si,  to  recover  one's  senses.  Vol- 
ver i,  las  andadas,  to  return  to  one's 
old  habits.     L.  36. 

Vos,  vos,  pers.  pron.,  you.     L.  66. 

Vosotros,  vo-so'-tros,  pers.  pron.,  you,- 
ye.    L.  1. 

Voz,  voth  [vos],  s.  f.,  voice,  word,  ru- 
mor, report.  Corre  la  voz  que  .  .  .  , 
it  is  rumored  that  ...     L.  58. 

Vuelta,  vuW-ta,  s.  f.,  return,  turn, 
trip.  A  vuelta  de  correo,  by  return 
mail.  Dar  una  vuelta,  to  take  a 
walk.  Dar  la  vuelta  al  parque,  to  g^ 
round  the  park.    L.  46. 


496 


VOCABULAEY. 


Vnelto,  vHM'-to,  past.  part,  (of  Vol- 

vee),  returned.     L.  52. 
Vuestro,  vu^'-tro,  poss.  adj.,  your.    L. 

13. 
Vulgar,  vvl-gdr',  adj.,  vulgar.    L.  59. 

Y,  e,  conj.,  and.     L.  3. 

Yc,  yd^  adv.,  already,  yet,  sometimes. 
Ya  lo  uno,  ya  lo  otro,  sometimes 
one,  sometimes  the  other.  L.  25  and 
37. 

Yacer,  yd-tMr  [yS-sgr'],  to  lie.    L.  41. 

Yemo,  ypr'-no,  s.  m.,  son-in-law.  L.  60. 

Yo,  yo,  pers.  pron.,  I.  Yo  mismo,  I 
myself.     L.  1. 

Yugo,  yu'-go,  s.  m.,  yoke.    L.  64. 

Zafarse,  thd-fdr'-sd  [sa-far'-sa],  to  es- 
cape, to  get  rid  of.    L.  64. 


Zaga,  thd'-gg,  [sa'-ga],  s.  f.,  rear.    No 

irle  a  uno  en  zaga,  not  to  be  far  be- 
hind any  one.     L.  44. 
Zapateria,  thd-pd-td-re'-Q  [sa-p2-ta-re'-a], 

s.  f.,  shoe  trade,  shoemaker's  shop. 

L.  17. 
Zapatero,  thd-pd-td'-ro  [sS-pS-ta'-ro],  s. 

m.,  shoemaker.     L.  8. 
Zapato,  thd-pd'-to  [sS-pS'-to],  s.  m.,  shoe. 

L.  10. 
Zape,   thd'-pd  [sS'-pa],  intj.,    used   to 

frighten  away  the  cats ;  God  forbid ! 

L.  46. 
Zas,  thds  [sas],  intj.,  used  to  imitate 

the  sound  of  repeated  knocks  or 

blows.     L.  62. 
Zntano,  thu-td'-no  [sfi-ta'-no],  s.  m.,  such 

a  one.    L.  55. 


ENGLISH-SPANISH  VOCABULARY 


Note. — The  references  are  to  the  lesson,  and  to  the  sentence  of  the 
English  exercise  in  that  lesson,  in  which  the  word  or  phrase  is  required. 


A,  an,  indef.  art.,  un(o) ;  day, 

month,  etc.,  al  dia,  al  mes,  etc.; 

yard,  la  vara. 

Able,  to  be,  poder. 

About,  prep.,  de  ;  acercade;  concer- 

niente  de  ;  (before  number)  unos  ; 

(of  time)  por,  d ;  to  he to,  estar 

para,  ir  d. 
Absence,  s.,  ausencia,  f. ;  falta,  f. 
Absent,  adj.,  ausente. 
Academy,  s.,  acaderaia,  f. 
Accent,  s.,  acento,  m. 
Accept,  aceptar. 
Accident,  s.,  accidente,  m. 
Accompany,  acompanar. 
Accomplishment,  s.,  prenda,  f. 
According   to,  prep.,  segun ;  i,  me- 

dida  de. 
Account  (for),  creer  que  es  la  causa. 
Account  of,  on,  prep.,  ^  causa  de. 
Accuse,  acusar. 
Ache,  doler  ;  my  head  aches ^  me  duele 

la  cabeza. 
Acknowledge,  acusar  (56,  9). 
Acquainted(with),  to  become,  cono- 

cer. 
Acquire,  adquirir. 
Acquisition,  s.,  adquisici6n,  f. 
Act,  obrar  ;  toward,  obrar  con  ; 

— —  in  om^s  place,  representar. 
Action,  s.,  acci6n,  f. 
Active,  adj.,  activo. 
Actor,  s..  actor,  m. 
Add,  v.,  anadir. 
Address,  s.,  direcci6n,  f. 
Admire,  admirar. 
Admit,  admitir. 
Advance,  promover. 
Adventure,  s.,  aventura,  f. 
Advice,  s.,  consejo,  m. 

34 


Advise,  aconsejar. 

Aerial,  adj.,  aereo. 

Affair,  s.,  negocio,  m. 

Affect  learning,  meterse  ^  sabio. 

Affectation,  s.,  afectaci6n,  f. 

Affidavit,    to    make,    prestar   jura- 

mento. 
Affirm,  afirmar. 
Afraid  of,  to  be,  temer ;  tenermie- 

do  de. 
After,  prep.,  despues  de,  tras ;  

all,  al  fin. 
Afternoon,  s.,  tarde,  f. 
Afternoon  nap,  to  take,  dormir  la 

siesta. 
Afterwards,  adv.,  despues. 
Again,  adv.,  otra  vez. 
Agitation,  s.,  agitacion,  f. 
Ago,  hacer  (impers.) ;  two  days , 

hace  dos  dias. 
Agree,  concordar;  estar  de  acuerdo 

en. 
Agreeable,  adj.,  agradable. 
Ah,  interj.,  ah. 
Aid,  s.,  ayuda,  f. 
Air,  s.,  aire,  m. 
Albert,  s.,  Alberto. 
Ale,  s.,  cerveza,  f. 
Alert,  to  be  on  the,  abrir  el  ojo. 
Alexander,  s.,  Alejandro. 
All,  adj.,  todo*, of,  (omit  of); 

about,  todo  lo  concerniente  A  ; 

on hands,  torlos;  with one's 

heart,  con  mucho  gusto. 
Allow,  permitir. 
Almost,  adv.,  casi. 
Alone,  adj.,  solo. 
Already,  adv.,  ya. 
Also,  adv.,  tambien. 
Although,  conj..  aunque. 
497 


498 


VOCABULABT, 


Always,  adv.,  siempre. 
Amazing,  adj.,  pasmoso. 
America,  s.,  America,  f. 
American,  adj.,  americano. 
Amiable,  adj.,  amable. 
Amongst,  prep.,  entre. 
Amuse,  divertir. 
Analytical,  adj.,  analitico. 
And,  conj.,  y,  e. 
Andalusia,  s.,  Andalucia,  f. 
Anecdote,  s.,  anecdota,  f. 
Animal,  s.,  animal,  m. 
Animated,  adj.,  animado. 
Annoyance  of,  to  the,  fastidiando. 
Another,  adj.,  otro. 
Answer,  s.,  respuesta,  f. ;   contesta- 

cion,  f. 
Answer,  contestar,  respond er  d. 
Antagonist,  s.,  antagonista,  m. 
Anxiously,  so,  adv.,  tan  to  (61, 14). 

Any,  adj.,  alguno ;  not ,  ningiino. 

Any,  pron.,  alguna  parte. 
Anybody,  s.,  alguien. 
Anyone,  s.,  cualquiera. 
Anything,  s.,  algo,  alguna  cosa ;  not 

but,  sine  (42,  5). 

Apology,  s.,  excusas,  f.  pi. 
Appear,  parecer,  presentarse. 
Appearance,  s.,  aparencia,  f. ;  to  all 

s,  segun  las  aparencias. 

Appetite,  s.,  apetito,  m. 
Apple,  s.,  manzana,  f. 

Apply,  pretender;  /or, solici tar. 

Approbation,  s.,  aprobaci6n,  f. 

April,  s.,  abril,  m. 

Arab,  s.,  d.rabe. 

Aragon,  s.,  Arag6n. 

Architect,  s.,  arquitecto,  m. 

Arithmetic,  s.,  aritmetica,  f. 

Arm,  s.,  braze,  m. 

Army,  s.,  ej^rcito,  m. 

Arrange,  disponer,  arreglar. 

Arrest,  arrestar. 

Arrested,  p.  p.,  preso. 

Arrival,  s.,  llegada,  f. 

Arrive,  llegar ;  in  possession  of, 

adquirir. 
Art,  s.,  arte,  m. 
Article,  s.,  articulo,  m. 
As,  adv.,  como ;  porque ;  en  el  estado 

que ;  for,  en  cuento  ^  ;  

to,  en  cuento  d  ;    much , 

tanto como. 

Ashamed,  to  be,  caerse  la  cara  de 

verguenza ;   of  tener  vergu- 

enza  de. 
Ask  (for),  preguntar  (about  =  acerca 

de) ;  i>edir ;  invitar ;  question, 

hacer  pregunta. 
Assure,  asegurar. 
Astonished,    to    be,    sorprenderse ; 

at,  admirarse  de. 


Astronomy,  of,  astronomico. 

At,  prep.,  en  ;  a  time  (  =  whole}, 

entero  ;  all  (neg.),  de  ningun 

modo  ;  home,  en  casa. 

Atlantic,  s.,  Atlantico. 
Attack,  combatir  con,  atacar. 
Attend,  servir,  atender. 
Attended  with  success,  to  be,  tener 

exito. 
Attention,  s.,  atencion,  f. 
Attentively,  adv.,  con  atencion,  aten- 

tamente. 
Augmentative,  adj., aumentativo,  m. 
Augury,  s.,  augiiero,  m. 
August,  s.,  agosto,  m. 
Aunt,  s.,  tia,  f. 
Austria,  s.,  Austria,  f. 
Author,  s.,  autor,  m. 
Authority,  on  good,  de  buena  tinta. 
Autumn,  s.,  otono,  m. 
Auxiliary,  s.,  auxiliar,  m. 
Avenue,  s.,  avenida,  f. 
Avoid,  evitar. 
Aware  of,  to  be,  saber. 

Bachelor,  s.,  soltero,  m. 

Back,  to  be,  volver. 

Bad,  adj.,  malo;  too ,  malisimo ; 

limn,  picaro  ;  to  be  on terms 

withy  no  tratar. 
Badly,  adv.,  mal. 
Baker,  s.,  panadero,  m. 
Bakery,  s.,  panaderia,  f. 

Bald,  adj.,  calvo  ;  place,  calva,  f. 

Balloon,  s.,  globo,  m. 

Barber,  s.,  barbero,  m. 

Barber's  shop,  s.,  barberia,  f. 

Baron,  s.,  baron,  m. 

Basket,  s.,  canastro,  m. 

Basque,  s.,  Vascuence,  m. 

Basque,  adj.,  vascongado. 

Battle,  s.,  batalla,  f. 

Be,  to,  ser ;  estar ;  haber  (impers.). 

Bear  (up  under),  aguantar,  soportar ; 

(with),  aguantar,  sufrir. 
Beardless  youth,  s.,  barbilampino,  m. 
Beauty,  s.,  hermosura,  f.  ;  belleza,  f. 
Because,  conj.,  porque. 
Become,  quedar,  hacerse. 
Bed,  s.,  cama,  f.  ;  to  go  to ,  acos- 

tarse. 
Beer,  s.,  cerveza,  f. 
Before,  adv.,  antes. 
Before,  conj.,  antes  que. 
Before,  prep.,  antes  de. 

Beg,  suplicar ;  of,  suplicar  d. 

Begin,  principiar  (d). 
Beginner,  s.,  principiante,  m. 
Beginning,  s.,principio,  m. ;  (of 

month),  principios.  m.  pi. 
Behind,  prep.,  detr^s  de. 
Being,  s.,  ser,  m. 


rOCA.JiULAJiY. 


499 


Belief,  s.,  creencia,  f. 

Believe,  creer. 

Belong,  pertenecer. 

Beloved  (by),  p.  p.,  amado  de. 

Berth,  s.,  camarote,  m. 

Beside,  prep.,  al  lado  de. 

Besides,   adv.,  ademas;   adem^  de 

(before  infin.). 
Best,  adj.,  el  mejor,  m^s  (47,  23). 
Better,  adj.,  mejor;  mds;  to  be , 

vale  m^s  ;  had ,  haria  mejor  en 

(before  infin.) ;  late  than  never ^ 

mas  vale  tarde  que  nunca. 
Between,  prep.,  entre. 
Beyond,  prep.,  m^s  de. 
Bill,  s.,  cuenta,  f. 
Bird,  s.,  pajaro,  m. 
Bite,  morder ;  one  on  the  hand^ 

morderle  la  mano. 
Blank,  s.,  bianco,  m.  (62,  6). 
Bludgeon,  s.,  garrote,  m. ;  blow  with 

,  garrotazo,  m. 

Blue,  adj.,  azul. 

Body,  s.,  cuerpo,  m. 

Bolt,  s.,  cerrajo,  m. 

Book,  s.,  libro,  m. ;   contemptible  old 

,  libraco,  m. 

Bookseller,  s.,  librero,  m. 

Bookstore,  s.,  librerla,  f. 

Boot,  s.,  bota,  f. 

Born,  to  be,  nacer. 

Both,  adj.,  ambos,  entrambos ;  

of  us  (omit  of). 
Bouquet,  s.,  ramillete,  m. 
Boy,  s.,  muchacho,  m. 
Branch,  s.,  ramo,  m. 
Brazil,  s.,  Brasil. 
Bread,  s.,  pan,  m. 
Break,  romper ; one^s  word,  faltar 

^  su  palabra. 
Breakfast,  s.,  almuerzo,  m. 
Breakfast,  almorzar. 
Bring*,  traer. 

Broom,  old  stump  of  a,  s.,  escobajo,m. 
Broth,  s.,  caldo,  m.;  poor cal- 

ducho,  m. 
Brother,  s.,  hermano,  m. 
Build,  edificar,  fabricar. 
Building,  s.,  edifico,  m. 
Bull-fight,  s.,  corrida  (f.)  de  toros. 
Bull  fighter,  s.,  torero,  m. 
Burden,  s.,  carga,  f. 
Burn,  quemar ;  to  be  — ed,  quemarse. 
Burst  with  pride,  no  caber  en  si. 
Business,  s.,  negocios,  m.  pi.  ;  that's 

his  own  ,  con  su  pan  se  lo  coma  ; 

letters,  cartas  de  negocios ;   in 

what is  one,  curies  son  sus  ne- 
gocios. 
But,  conj.,  pero,  sino  (after  neg.); 

not  anything ,  nothiyig ,  sino, 

solo. 


Butcher,  s.,  carnero,  m. 

Buy,  comprar. 

By,  prep.,  por  ;  para  ; one's  watch^ 

en    su   reloj  ;    to  mean ,  querer 

decir  por ;  steamer,  en  el  va- 
por. 

C,  s.,  f.,  thee,  lac  (36,  26). 
Cable,  s.,  cable,  m. 
Cage,  s.,  jaula,  f. 

Call,  llamar ;  in,  llamar. 

Called  by,  p.  p.,  que  tienen  (44,  13). 

Can,  poder. 

Capable,  adj.,  capaz. 

Capacity,  s.,  capacidad,  f. 

Captain,  s.,  capitdn,  m. 

Care,    take,  {of),  tenercuidado  de; 

(with),  tener  cuidado,  con. 
Care  (for),  querer;  not  to -^— , 

no  darse  nada  por. 
Carelessness,  s.,  descuido,  m. 
Carriage,  s.,  carruaje,  m. 
Carry  (on),  llevar. 

Case,  s.,  caso,  m.  ;  in ,  si  acaso. 

Cask,  s.,  baril,  m. 
Cast  lots,  echar  suertes. 
Castillo,  s,,  Castilla,  f, 
Castilian,  adj.,  castellano. 
Castle,  s.,  Castillo,  m. 
Catalonia,  s.,  Cataluna,  f. 
Catalonian,  adj.,  cataUn. 

Catch,  coger ;  up  with,  alcanzar. 

Catholic,  adj.,  catolico. 

Cause,  producir. 

Cease,  cesar,  parar. 

Celebrated,  adj.,  celebrado,  celebre. 

Cent,  s.,  centavo,  m. 

Central,  adj.,  central. 

Certain,  adj.,  cierto,  seguro. 

Certainly,    adv.,     ciertamente,    sin 

duda. 
Chair,  s.,  silla,  f. 
Change,  s.,  cambio,  m. 
Change,  cambiar. 
Chapter,  s.,  capitulo,  m. 
Characteristic,  adj.,  caracterlstico. 
Charge,  llevar  (por). 
Charity,  s.,  caridad^  f. 
Charles,  s.,  Carlos. 
Charlotte,  s.,  Carlota. 
Charming,   adj.,  discreto;    amable; 

encantadoro. 
Chat,  to  have  a,  charlar. 
Cheap,  adj.,  barato. 
Cheerful,  adj.,  alegre. 
Cheese,  s.,  queso,  m. 
Chess,  s.,  ajedrez,  m. 
Chicken,  s.,  polio,  m. 
Child,  s.,  nino,  m. 
Chocolate,  s.,  chocolate,  m. 
Choose,  escoger. 
Church,  s.,  iglesia,  f. 


500 


VOCABULABT, 


Cigrar,   s.,    cigarro,   m.;    tobaco,  m.; 

poor  man^s ,  cigarro  de  pobre. 

Cig-arette,  s.,  cigarillo,  m. 
Circumspect,  adj.,  circunspecto. 
Circumspection,    s.,  circunspecci6n, 

f. 
Circumstance,  s.,  circunstancia,  f. 
Citizen,  s.,  ciudadano,  m. 
City,  s.,  ciudad,  f. 
Civilization,  s.,  civilizacion,  f. 
Class,  s.,  clase,  f. 
Classical,  adj.,  cldsico. 
Classification,  s.,  clasificaci6n,  f. 
Cleanly,  adj.,  limpio. 
Clear,  adj.,  claro;  evidente  ;  as 

daylight,  tan  claro  como  el  sol. 
Clerk,  s.,  escribente,  m. 
Clever,  adj.,  habil. 
Climb,  subir. 
Clock,  s.,  reloj,  m.;   church ,  reloj 

de  la  iglesia. 
Close,  terminar. 
Cloth,  s.,  pano,  m. 
Co.,  Ca.  (Compania). 
Coat,  s.,  casaca,  f.;  levita,  f. 
Coffee,  s.,  cafe,  m. 
Cold,  s.,  resfwado,  m.;  (of  weather) 

el  frio ;  in  the ,  con  el  frio  que 

hace. 
Cold,  adj.,  frio  ;  to  he ,  tener  frio; 

(of  weather)  hacer  (impers.)  frio. 
Collect,  cobrar,  colecter. 
Color,  s.,  color,  m. 
Coloring,  s.,  colorido,  m. 
Columbus,  s.,  Colon. 
Comb,  s.,  peine,  m. 
Comb,  peinar. 
Combine,  combinar. 
Combined,  p.  p.,  combinado. 
Come,  venir  ;  llegar  ;  and,  venir 

d ;  nearer,  acercarse  ;  off, 

salir  (impers.,  ind.     obj.    of   pers., 

64,  1) ;     out,    salir ;   up, 

subir ;  to  agreement^  acordarse 

con. 
Come  now,  interj.,  calle. 
Comfortable,  adj.,  c6modo. 
Commence,  principiar  i. ;  (of  season) 

entrar. 
Commencement,  s.,  principio,  m. 
Commit,  cometer ;  mistakes,  equi- 

vocarse. 
Common,  adj.,  comtin,  general. 
Communicate,  comunicar. 
Companion,  s.,  companero.  m. 
Company,  compania,  f. ;  in with, 

en  compania  de. 
Compel,  apremiar. 
Complain  of,  quejarse  de. 
Complement,  s.,  complemento,  m. 
Complete,  adj.,  completo. 
Completely,  adv.,  completamente. 


Complication,  s.,  complicacion,  f. 
Composition,  s.,  composicion,  f. 
Conceive  of,  concebir. 
Concerning,  prep.,  tocante;  con  re- 

specto  d. 
Concert,  s.,  concierto,  m. 
Condition,  s.,  condicion,  f. ;   on 

that,  con  la  condicion  que. 
Conductor,  s.,  conductor,  m. 
Confess,  confesar. 
Confused,  adj.,  confuso. 
Conjugate,  conjugar. 
Conjugation,  s.,  conjugaci6n,  f. 
Conquest,  s.,  conquisto,  m. 
Conscience,  s.,  conciencia,  f. 
Consent,  consentir ;  permitir. 
Consider,  considerar. 
Considerably,  adv.,  mucho. 
Console,  consolar. 
Construction,  s.,  construccion,  f. 
Contain,  contener. 
Contented,  adj.,  contento. 
Continually,  adv.,  continuamente. 
Continue,  continuar. 
Contradict,  contradecir. 
Contrary,  on  the,  al  contrario;   de 

ningun  modo. 
Conversation,  s.,  conversacion,  f. 
Converse,  conversar. 
Conveyance,  s.,  escritura,  f. 
Convicted,  p.  p.,  convicto. 
Cook,  s.,  cocinero,  m.,  cocinera,  f. 
Cook,  cocinar. 
Cooking,  s.,  cocina,  f. 

Cool,  adj.,  fresco;  in  the .,  al  freso. 

Copy-book,  s.,  cuaderno,  m. 

Coquette,  s.,  coqueta,  f. 

Corner,  s.,  esquina,  f.;   on  the ,  la 

esquina  (in  directions). 
Correct,  adj.,  correcto. 
Correct,  corrigir. 
Correctly,  adv.,  correctamente. 
Correctness,  s.,  correccion,  f. 
Correspondence,  s.,  correspondencia, 

f. 
Correspondent,  s.,  corresponsal,  m. 
Cosmopolitan,  s.,  cosmopolito,  m. 
Cost,  costar. 
Cotton,  s.,  algodon,  m. 
Cotton,  adj.,  de  algodon. 

Count,  contar ;  upon,  contar  con. 

Countenance,  s.,  semblante,  m. 
Country,  s.,  campo,  m.;  pais,  m.; 

house,  casa  de  campo. 
Courage,  s.,  valor,  m. 
Court,  s.,  tribunal,  m. 
Cousin,  s.,  prime,  m.;  prima,  f. 
Credit,   s.,  credito,   m.;    on  ,   al 

fiado,  a  credito. 
Creditor,  s.,  acreedor,  m. 
Crestfallen,  to  be,  ir  de  capa  caida. 
Crime,  s.,  crimen,  m. 


VOCABULARr. 


501 


Criticise,  criticar. 
Cross,  atravesar. 
Crow,  s.,  Cuervo,  m. 
Crowd,  s.,  gentio,  m. 
Crown,  s.,  corona,  f. 

Cruelty,  s.,  crueldad,  f.; to,  cru- 

eldad  con  (36,  9). 
Cry,  V.  llorar. 
Cup,  s.,  taza,  f. 
Cure,  curar. 

Curiosity,  s.,  curiosidad,  f. 
Custom,  s.,  costumbre,  m. 
Cut,  cortar  ;  get ,  hacerse  cortar. 

Dance,  bailar. 

Danger,  s.,  peligro,  m. 

Dare,  atreyarse  d. 

Date,  s.,  fecha,  f. 

Date,  fechar. 

Daug-liter,  s.,  hija,  f. 

Day,  s.,  dia,  m.;  hef ore  yesterday, 

anteayer ;  antes  de  ayer ;  from 

to ,  de  dia  en  dla. 

Daybreak,  s.,  amanecer,  m. 

Deal,  a  good,  s.,  mucho,  muchisimo. 

Dealer,  s.,  mercador,  m. 

Dear,  adj.,  caro;   querido;   sir, 

senor    mlo ;    fellow,    querido 

amigo. 
Death,  s.,  muerte,  f. 
Deceitfully,  adv.,  de  mala  U, 
Deceive,  enganar. 
December,  s.,  diciembre,  m. 
Decided,  adj.,  grande. 
Decked  (out),  adj.,  vestido  de  veinte 

y  cinco  alfileres. 
Decompose,  decomponer. 
Degree,  s.,  grado,  m. 
Delicious,  adj.,  delicioso. 
Delight,  deleitar. 
Delighted,  to  be,  ser  un  gran  placer 

para. 
Deny,  negar. 
Departure,  s.,  partida,  f. 
Depend  on,  depender  de. 
Desert,  s.,  desierto,  m. 
Desert,  desertar. 
Desertion,  s.,  deserci6n,  f. 
Deserve,  merecer. 
Desire,  s.,  deseo,  m.;  with  the to, 

con  el  deseo  de. 
Desire,  desear. 
Desirous  of,  to  be,  desear. 
Despicable,  adj.,  despreciable. 
Detail,  s.,  pormenor,  m. 
Deteriorate,  deteriorar. 
Determined  manner,  in  a,  con  todas 

sus  fuerzas. 
Detestible,  adj.,  feo,  detestable. 
Dexterity,  s.,  habilidad,  f. 
Dialect,  s.,  dialecto,  m. 
Dictionary,  s.,  diccionario,  m. 


Die,  morir. 

Differ,  diferir,  diferenciarse. 

Difference,  s.,  diferencia,  f. 

Different,  adj.,  diferente. 

Difficult,  adj.,  dificil. 

Difficulty,  s.,  dificultad,  f. 

Diminutive,  s.,  diminutive,  m. 

Dine,  comer. 

Dinner,  s.,  comida,  f. 

Director,  s.,  director,  m. 

Disappointed,  to  be,  llevar  cbasco; 

to  be  terribly  ,  llevar  un  gran 

chasco. 
Discover,  descubrir. 
Discovery,  s.,  descubrimiento,  m. 
Dish,  s.,  plato,  m. 
Dishabille,  to  be  in,  estar  de  casa. 
Dishearten,  desanimar. 
Dispatch,  s.,  despacho,  m ;  telegraphic 

,  parte  telegrdfico. 

Dispatch,  despachar,  enviar. 
Displease,  no  hacer  d.  medida  de  sus 

deseos. 
Dissatisfied  (with),  adj.,  disgustado 

de. 
Distance,  s.,  distancia,  f.;  in  the ^ 

d  lo  lejos. 
Distinct,  adj.,  distinto. 
Distinguish,  distinguir. 
Distrust,  desco^fiar  de. 
Disturb,  molestar. 
Dive  into  other's  affairs,  meterse  en 

vidas  arenas. 
Divert,  divertir. 
Divide,  dividir. 
Do,  hacer ;  (of  health)  estar ; eor- 

respondence,    escribir ;    right, 

obrar  bien  ;  wrong,  obrar  mal, 

hacer  mal,  no  hacer  bien  ;  all 

in  one's  power,  hacer  todo  lo  que 

estd,  d  su  alcance. 
Doctor,  s.,  doctor,  m. 
Dog,  s.,  perro,  m.;   Latin,  lati- 

najo,  m.  (49, 16). 
Dollar,  s.,  peso,  m. 
Done  with,  to  have,  servirse  de. 
Door,  s.,  puerta,  f. 
Doubt,  s.,  duda,  f. 
Doubt,  dudar. 
Doubtful,  adj.,  dudoso. 
Doubtless,  adv.,  sin  duda. 
Down  town,  aba  jo  de  la  ciudad. 
Dramatist,  s.,  dramdtico,  m. 
Draughts,  s.,  damas,  f.  pi. 
Draw,  tirar  de ;    sacar ;  {bolt\ 

echar. 
Dream,  sonar. 
Dress,  s.,  vestido,  m. 
Dress,  vestir,  vescirse. 

Drink,  beber  ;  (a  toast),  echar. 

Drizzle,  lloviznar. 
During,  prep.,  durante. 


502 


VOCABULARY. 


Duty,  s.,  deber,  m. 

Dye,  tenir. 

Dying,  pres.  part.,  moribundo. 

E,  s.  f.,  an  e  =  una  e  (36,  26). 

Eacli,  adj.,  cada;  one,  cada  uno; 

other,  el  uno el  otro. 

Early,  temprano. 

Earn,  ganar. 

Earnest,  in,  de  veras. 

Earth,  s.,  tierra,  f. 

Ease,  s.,   facilidad,  f.;   to  be  at , 

vivir  d,  sus  anchas. 
Easily,  adv.,  facilmente. 
East,  s.,  este,  m. 
Eastern,  adj.,  del  este. 
Easy,  adj.,  Mcil, to,  fdcil  de  ; 

to  be  read,  f dcil  de  leer. 
Eat,  comer. 
Echo  what  has  been  said,  hablar  por 

boca  de  ganso. 
Economy,  s.,  economia,  f. 
Education,  s.,  educacion,  f. 
Effect,  s.,  efecto,  m. 
Effort,  s.,  esfuerzo,  m. 
Eight,  num.  adj.,  ocho. 
Eighteen,  num.  adj.,  diez  y  ocho. 
Eight    hundred,    num.  adj.,  ochoci- 

entos. 
Eighty,  num.  adj.,  ochenta. 
Eleven,  num.  adj.,  once. 
Either,  not,  tampoco. 
Elect,  elegir. 
Elegance,  s.,  elegancia,  f. 
Elegant,  adj.,  elegante. 
Eloquence,  s.,  elocuencia,  f. 
Else,  adv.,  de  otro  modo. 
Emanuel,  s.,  Manuel. 
Embarrassed,  adj.,  apuradillo. 
Embarrassment,  s.,  dificultad,  f. 
Employed  by,  to  be,  colocarse  con. 
Employment,  s.,  empleo,  m. 
Enabled,  to  be,  poder. 
End,  s.,  fin,  m.;  objecto,  m. 
End,  acabar. 
Engage  in,  emprender. 
Engaged  in,  to  be,  estar  (followed  by 

gerund  of  verb). 
England,  s.,  Inglaterra,  f. 
English,  adj.,  ingles. 
Englishman,  s.,  Ingl6s,  m. 
Engraving,  s.,  grabado,  m. 
Enjoy,  gozar  de. 

Enough,  adj.,  bastante  ("que"  be- 
fore in  fin.). 
Enter,  entrar. 
Enterprise,  s.,  empresa,  f. 
Enthusiastic,  to  get,  entusiasmarse. 
Entirely,   adv.,  enteramente ;  (with 

neg. )  de  ninguna  especie. 
Entrance,  s.,  entrada,  f. 
Epitaph,  s.,  epitafio,  m. 


Equal  to,  not  to  be,  ser  superior  i, 

sus  esfuerzas  (thing  as  subject). 
Equally,  adv.,  igualmente. 
Erect,  adj.,  erguido. 
Error,  s.,  error,  m. 
Erudition,  of,  erudito. 
Especially,  adv.,  especialmente. 
Esq.,  s.,  Don. 

Establish,  fundar ;  establecer. 
Esteem,  estimar. 
Esteemed,   p.  p.,  estimado;    favore- 

cido  ;  to  be ,  tener  aceptacion. 

Europe,  s.,  Europa,  f. 

Even,  adv.,  hasta;    not ,  ni  (40, 

22);  though,  aunque. 

Evening,  s.,  tarde,  f. ;  noche,  f.;  last 

,  anoche. 

Event,  s.,  hecho,  m.;  at  all  events,  de 

todos  modos. 
Ever,  adv.,  jamds  ;  sierapre. 
Every,  adj.,  cada;   todos  los;    (dis- 

tributively  of  periods  of  time)  d; 

body,  todos  ;  other  day,  un 

dia  si  y  otro  no. 
Evidence,  s.,  evidencia,  f. 
Exact,  adj.,  exacto. 
Exactly,  adv.,  exactamente. 
Exaggeration,  s.,  exajeracion,  f. 
Examination,  s.,  examen,  m. 
Examine,  examinar. 
Example,  s.,  ejemplo,  m. 
Exceed,  exceder  d. 
Exceedingly,       adv.,      muchisimo; 

muy ;  sobremanera. 
Excellent,  adj.,  excelente. 
Except,  prep.,  menos. 
Exception  of,  with  the,  exceptuando. 
Exciting,  adj.,  excitante. 
Excuse,  dispensar ;  excusar. 
Exercise,  s.,  ejercicio,  m. 
Exist,  existir. 
Expect,  esperar. 
Experience,  s.,  experiencia,  f. 
Explanation,  s.,  explicacion,  f. 
Expose,  exponer. 
Express,  expresar. 
Expression,     s.,   representacion,   f . ; 

expresion,  f.  ;  memoria,  f. 
Expressive,  adj.,  expresivo. 
Extract,  sacar. 

Extraordinary,  adj.,  extraordinario. 
Eye,  s.,  ojo,  m. 

Facilitate,  facilitar. 

Fact,  s.,  becho,  m.;  that  is  a ,  eso 

es  verdad. 
Fair,  adj.,  bello. 
Faith,  s.,  fe,  f. 
Fall,  s.,  otono,  m. 
Fall,  caer ;  in  love  with,  enamo- 

rarse  de. 
Familiar,  adj.,  familiar. 


rOCABULART. 


503 


Family,  s.,  familia,  f. 

Fanny,  s.,  Paca. 

Far,  adv.,  lejos;  from  it,  ni  con 

mucho  ;  as as,  hasta  donde. 

Fare,s.,  pasaje,  m. 

Fashion,  s.,  moda,  f.;  in  the  French, 

Spanish  ,   ^  la  francesa,  espa- 

nola  ;  in de  moda  ;  that  goes  out 

of ,  la  moda  de  eso  pasa. 

Fashionable,  adj.,  de  moda. 

Fast,  adv.,  aprisa. 

Father,  s.,  padre,  m. 

Fatigue,  s.,  fatiga,  f.;  cansancia,  f. 

Fault,  s.,  culpa,  f.;   falta,  f.;  defecto, 

m. 
Favor,  s.,  favor,  m.;  (  =  letter)  carta, 

f . ;  in of,  por. 

Fear,  s.,    miedo,   m.;   for  ,   por 

miedo,  por  temor. 
Fear,  temer. 
February,  s.,  febrero,  m. 
Ferocious,  adj.,  furioso. 
Few,  adj.,  pocos. 
Field,  s.,  campo,  m. 
Fifteen,  num.  adj.,  quince. 
Fifth,  num.  adj.,  quinto. 
Fifty,  num.  adj.,  cincuenta. 
Fill  (office),  proveer. 
Find,   encontrar  ;    hallar  ;    out, 

acertar,    encontrar,    conocer,   des- 

cubrir ;  to  go  and ,  ir  i,  buscar. 

Fine,  adj.,  bello  ;  hermoso  ;  bueno. 
Finish,     concluir ;     to     be    finished, 

acabado. 
Fire,  s.,  fuego,  m. 
First,  num.  adj.,  primero  ;  at ,  al 

principio ;   rate,    de    primera 

clase. 
Fish,  s.,  pescado,  m. 
Fit  exactly,  venir  pintado  (with  ind. 

obj.  of  person,  64,  10). 
Fit  for,  adj.,  proprio  para. 
Five,  num.  adj.,  cinco. 
Five  hundred,  num.  adj.,  quinientos. 
Flatter,  lisonjear;  adular. 
Flight,  s.,  vuelo,  m. 
Flock,  s.,  rebano,  m. 
Floor  (  =  story),  s.,  piso,  m. 
Florence,  s.,  Florencia,  f. 
Flower,  s.,  flor,  f. 
Fluently,  adv.,  fluidamente  ;  equally 

,  con  igual  fluidez. 

Fly,   s,,    mosca,    f.;   poor  little  , 

mosquita,  f. 
Fly    into    passion,    encenderse    en 

colera. 
Follow,  seguir;   followed  by,  j  des- 

pues  (39,  4);  to  be  followed  by,  usarse. 
Fond  of,  to  be,  gustar  (impers.,  ind. 

obj.  of  pers.). 
Foot,  s.,  pie,  m.;  (of  measure)  palmo, 

m. 


Fop,  s.,  pisaverde,  m. 

For,  prep.,  para  (destination);  por  (/or 

sake  of);  en  cuanto  jC  (  =  ''as  to  "); 

entre    (44,   13)   {  =  '' among");    de 

(  =  ''of");  durante  (  =  *' among"). 
For,  conj.,  porque. 
Forehead,  s.,  f rente,  m. 
Foreign,  adj.,  extrangero. 
Forever,  adv.,  siempre. 
Forget,  olvidar. 
Form,    s.,    forma,    f.;    formula,    f.; 

estilo,  m. 
Form,  formar. 
Former,  adj.,  otro ;  former latter j 

aquel este. 

Formerly,  adv.,  anteriormente. 

Fortunate,  adj.,  afortunado. 

Fortunately,  adv.,  afortunadamente. 

Fortune,  s.,  fortuna,  f. 

Forty,  num.  adj.,  cuarenta. 

Four,  num.  adj.,  cuatro. 

Fourteen,  num.  adj.,  catorce. 

Fourth,  num.  adj.,  cuarto. 

France,  s.,  Francia,  f. 

Freeze,  helar. 

French,  adj.,  f ranees. 

Frenchman,  s.,  Frances,  m. 

Frequently,  adv.,  frecuentemente. 

Fresh,  adj.,  fresco. 

Friday,  s.,  viernes,  m. 

Friend,  s.,  amigo,  m. 

From,  prep.,  de  ;  desde. 

Fruit,  s.,  fruta,  f. 

Frustrate,  echar  ^  pique. 

Fry,  freir. 

Fun  of,  to  make,  hacer  burla  de; 

burlarse  de. 
Furious,  adj.,  furioso. 
Further,  adv.,  mds. 
Future,  in,  en  lo  sucesivo. 

Gain,     ganar;    knowledge,    in- 

struirse. 

Galicia,  s.,  Galicia,  f. 

Galician,  adj.,  gallego. 

Gallant,  adj.,  galante. 

Gallantry,  s.,  galanteria,  f. 

Game,  s.,  partida,  f. 

Garden,  s.,  jardin,  m. 

Gender,  s.,  genero,  m. 

General,  s.,  general,  m. ;  in ,  en 

general,  generalmente. 

Generally,  adv.,  generalmente. 

Gentleman, s., caballero, m. ;  senor, m. 

Genius,  s.,  genio,  m. 

German,  adj.  and  s.,  alem^n. 

Germany,  s.,  Alemania,  f. 

Get,  obtener  ;  coger ;  conseguir ;  lle- 

gar ;  to  be,  hacerse  ;  along 

well,  adelantar  ;  back,  volver ; 

better,  quedar  bueno  ;  cuty 

hacerse    cortar;    enthusiastic, 


504 


VOCABULARY. 


entnsiasmarse ;     in,     entrar ; 

into  favor,   caer  en  gracia  i 

alguien  ; married,  casarse  ; 

on,    hacer    adelantos  en ;     seguir ; 

out  of  order,   descomponerse  ; 

rid  of,  deshacerse  de ;  zafarse 

de  ; to  (  =  ''arrive  at'^),  llegar 

en  ;  up,  levantarse. 

Gilly-flower,  s.,  aleli,  m. 

Girl,  s.,  muchacha,  f. 

Give,  dar; (reception),  hacer; 

(play),  representar;  back,  de- 

volver  ;    instruction,  instruir ; 

up,   dejar,  abandonar ;  cesar ; 

it  up,  dejarse  por  vencido. 

Glad,  to  be,  alegrarse ;  to,  ale- 

grarse  de  (with  infin. ). 

Go,  ir;  llegar;  pasar;  (  =  "  assist"), 

acudir  ;  (of  watch)  an  dar ; and, 

ir  d  ;  away^  ir,  irse,  marcharse ; 

further,   pasar  mds  adelante ; 

into,  entrar  ;  on,  adelan- 

tar ;  on  with,  continuar ;  

out,   salir  ;  through,    recorrer  ; 

to    bed,    acostarse ;    up, 

ascenderse ;    with  the  stream, 

bailar  al  son  que  se  toca. 

Gold,  s.,  oro,  m. 

Good,   bueno ;   evening,   buenas 

tardes  ;    many,   muchos  ;  

morning,  buenos  dias ;    to  say 

morning,  dar  los  buenos  dias ;  to  be 

for    nothing,   no    servir    para 

nada  ;  to  be enough  to,  tener  la 

bondad  de  ;  to  do ,  hacer  bien. 

Goodness,  s.,  bondad,  f.;  to  have  the 
to,  tener  la  bondad  de. 

Govern,  gobernar. 

Government,  s.,  gobierno,  m. 

Grammar,  s.,  gramdtica,  f. 

Grape,  s.,  uva,  f. 

Great,  adj.,  grande  ;  many,  mu- 

chisimo  ;  er,  mayor. 

Green,  adj.,  verde. 

Grieved,  to  be,  sentir  (lo). 

Groan,  s.,  ay,  m.;  gemido,  m. 

Groan,  dar  gemidos. 

Ground,  s.,  terreno,  m. 

Guess,  adivinar. 

Guilty  (of  misdemeanor),  adj.,  delin- 
cuente. 

Guitar,  s.,  guitarra,  f. 

Habit,  s.,  habito,  m.;  old  habits,  an- 

dadas,  f.  pi. 
Hail,  granizar. 
Hair,  s.,  pelo,  m ;  cabello,  m. 
Half,  s.,  mitad,  f. 
Half,  ad j . ,  medio ;  an  hour,  una 

media  hora  ;  dead  with,  muer- 

tecito  de  ; past  (of  time  of  day), 

y  media. 


Hand,  s.,  mano,  f.;    hy  the of,  i, 

manos  de  ;  shake with,  dar  la 

mano  d  ;  have  at ,  tener  d  mano. 

Hand,  presentar. 

Handkerchief,  s.,  panuelo,  m. 

Handsome,  adj.,  hermoso. 

Happen,  suceder. 

Happiness,  s.,  felicidad,  f. 

Happy,  adj.,  feliz ;    (  =  ''faithful  " ) 

fiel ;    to  be ,  alegrarse  de,  tener 

gusto  en  ;  to  wish  one  a Easter, 

dar  las  pascuas. 
Hard,  dificil ;  to,  dificil  de  (with 

infin.). 
Hat,  s.,  sombrero,  m. 
Hate,  aborrecer. 
Hateful,  adj.,  aborrecible. 
Hatter,  s.,  sombrerero,  m. 
Havana,  s..  la  Habana. 
Have,  haber ;  tener ;  to to,  haber 

de  ;  tener  que  ;  done  with,  ha- 

berse  servido  de. 
Head,  s.,  cabeza,  f. 
Headache,  s.,  dolor  (m.)  de  cabeza; 

to  have ,  tener  dolor  de  cabeza, 

doler  (3rd.  pers.)  la  cabeza  (ind. 

obj.  of  pers.). 
Health,  s.,  salud,  f. 
Hear,   oir;    (by    hearsay)    o'ir   hab- 

lar ;  from  or  of,  saber  de  ;  

news  of,  saber  de. 
Hearsay,  by,  de  oidas. 
Heart,  s.,   corazon,   m.;    by ,  de 

memoria. 
Heat,  s.,  calor,  m. 

Heaven,  s.,  cielo,  m.;  Dios,  m.  (41,  6). 
Heavenly  adj.,  celesto. 
Heavy,    adj.,    pesado;    (  =  "deep,'^ 

"strong")  fuerte. 
Heels,  to  take  to  one's,  tomar  las  de 

Villadiego. 
Heigrbt,  s.,  altura,  f. 
Help,  ayudar ;   cannot ,  no  poder 

menos  de  (with  infin.). 
Hen,  s.,  gallina,  f. 
Henry,  s.,  Enrique. 
Here,  adv.,  aqui. 
Hidden  from,  oculto  d. 
Hide,  ocultar. 
Higrh,  adj.,  alto ;  grande  ;  caro  ; 

er,  mas. 
Hill,  s.,  collina,  f. 
Hint,  at  the  slightest,  d  media  pa- 

labra. 
History,  s.,  historia,  f. 
Hold,    caber;     hacer    (  =  ''to  con- 
tain");   tongue,  csllaT. 

Home,  at,  en  casa. 
Honor,  s.,  honor,  m. 
Honorable,  adj.,  honrado. 
Honorably,  adv.,  con  honor. 
Hope,  s.,  esperanza,  f. 


VOCABULARY. 


505 


Hope,  esperar. 

Horror,  oh  (interj.),  I  Que  horror ! 

Horse,  s.,  caballo,  m. 

Horseback,  on,  d  caballo ;  rid- 
ing, el  pasear  i,  caballo. 

Hospital,  s.,  hospital,  m. 

Hot,  adj.,  caliente. 

Hotel,  s.,  hotel,  m.;  fonda,  f. 

Hour,  s.,   hora,   f.;    half ,  media 

hora ;    lesson ,  hora  de  la  lec- 

cion. 

House,  s.,  casa,  f.;  little ,  casita,  f.; 

miserable ,  casuca ;  at  one's , 

en  su  casa  ;   to  one's ,  i,  su  casa. 

How,  adv.,  como;  icomo?;  quetal; 

(exclam.    before   adj.)    que;   

far,   hasta  donde  ;   much,   cu- 

dnto ;    many,    cudntos ;    

often,  cudntos  veces ;  so,  I  como 

es  eso  ?  ;  soon,  cudndo. 

Howl,  aullar. 

Human,  adj.,  humano;  del  hombre. 

Humor,  s.,   humor,   m.;    in ,  de 

humor ;  in to,  de  humor  para. 

Hundred,  s.,    cien;  ciento;   a  

(omit  a). 

I,  pron.,  yo. 

I,  s.,  i,  f. ;  an ,  una  i  (36,  26). 

Ice,  s.,  hielo,  m. 

Idea,  s.,  idea,  f. 

Idiom,  s.,  idioma,  m. 

If,  conj.,  si. 

Ignorant,  adj.,  ignorante  ;  to  he 

of  ignorar. 

Ill,  adj.,  malo. 

Illness,  s.,  enfermedad,  f. 

Imagriue,  pensar. 

Imperfect,  adj.,  imperfecto. 

Important,  adj.,  importante. 

Impossible,  adj.,  imposible. 

Imprudent,  adj.,  imprudente. 

In,  prep.,  en  ;  (after  superl.  and  with 
specific  time  of  day)  de;  {  =  ''ac- 
cording to")  segun  ;   (  =  ^'through," 

of   country)    por,    de ;    case, 

(conj.),  en  caso  que. 

Incommode,  incomodar. 

Incomplete,  adj.,  incompleto. 

Indeed,  adv.,  de  veras ;  verdadera- 
mente  ;  el  hecho  es  que. 

Independence,  s.,  independencia,  f. 

Indicative,  adj.,  indicativo. 

Indigo,  adj.,  anil. 

Induce,  determinar  d. 

Infancy,  s.,  infancia,  f. 

Infinitive,  s.,  infinitivo,  m. 

Infinity  (of),  muchlsimos. 

Inform  of,  informar  acerca  de. 

Inhabitant,  s.,  habitante,  m. 

Initial,  s.,  initial,  m. 

Injure,  danar. 


Injury,  s.,  dano,  m. 

Ink,  s.,  tinta,  f. 

Inkstand,  s.,  tintero,  m. 

Inquire,  preguntar ;  of,  pregun- 

tar  d. 

Inquisitive  (person),  s.,  pregun- 
ton,  m. 

Insist  upon,  empenarse  en. 

Instance,  for,  por  ejemplo. 

Instant,  s.,  momento,  m.;  (  =  "pres- 
ent month  ")  del  corriente. 

Instead  of,  prep.,  en  lugar  de. 

Intend,  iutentar ;  pensar. 

Intention,  s.,  intencion,  f.;  to  have 
honorable s,  obrar  de  buena  fe. 

Interest,  s.,  interes,  m. 

Interesting",  adj.,  interesante. 

Interior,  s.,  interior,  m. 

Interrupt,  interrumpir. 

Introduce,  presentar ;  introducir ; 
introducing  (  =  "introduction"),  la 
presentacion. 

Invite,  invitar. 

Irregular,  adj.,  irregular. 

Isabella,  s.,  Isabel. 

Italian,  adj.,  italiano. 

Italy,  s.,  Italia,  f. 

James,  s.,  Diego. 

Jane,  s.,  Juana. 

January,  s.,  enero,  m. 

Jest,  burlarse  ;  in ,  de  burlas. 

Jester,  s.,  burlon,  m. 

Jesting  aside,  chanzas  aparte. 

John,  s.,  Juan. 

Journey,  s.,  viaje,  m. 

Joy,  s.,  gozo,  m. 

Judge,  s.,  juez,  m. 

Judge,  juzgar. 

July,  Julio,  m. 

June,  junio,  m. 

Just,  adv.,  justamente;     (of    exact 

time)  enT)unto;  to  have ,  aca- 

bar  de  ;  now,  ahora  mismo,  por 

ahora. 

Justly,  adv.,  justamente. 

Keep,  tener ; (a  secret),  guardar ; 

{a  promise),  cumplir  ; good 

time  (of  watch),  andar  bien;  

one's  word,  cumplir  con  su  palabra. 

Kick,  s.,  puntapie,  m. 

Kill,  matar. 

Killed,  p.  p.,  muerto. 

Kind,   s. ,    clase,   f . ;   of  weather^ 

tiempo,  m.;    what of  weather? 

I  que  tiempo  ? 

Kind,  adj.,  bueno  ;   to  be enough 

to,  tener  la  bondad  de. 

King,  s.,  rey,  m. 

Kingdom,  s.,  reino,  m. 


506 


VOCABULARY, 


Knock,  tocar ;  llamar. 

Know,   saber ;    conocer ;    not  that  I 

,  no  que  yo  sepa. 

Know  (how),  saber. 
Knowledg-e,  s.,  conocimiento,  m. 

Lady,  s..  senora,  f. 

Lame,  adj.,  cojo. 

Languag-e,  s.,  lengua,  f. ;  idioma,  m. ; 

lenguaje,  m. 
Large,  adj.,  grande- 
Last,  adj.,  pasado;  ultimo;  (=  '^last 

time'^),  la  ultima  vez;   year, 

month,  el  ano,  mes,  pasado,  year  be- 
fore   ,  hace  dos  anos. 

Last,  at,  en  fin,  al  fin. 

Late,  adj.,  tarde  ;  how ?  (of  time 

of  day),  I  que  hora?  ;  of years, 

en  estos  ultimos  anos. 

Latin,  s.,  latino  ;  dog ,  latinajo,  m. 

Latter  adj.,  este; e«d (of  month), 

los  ultimos. 
Langrh  at,  reirse  de. 
Langhingr-stock,  s.,  hazmereir,  m. 
Law,  s.,  ley,  f. 
Lawyer,  s.,  abogado,  m. ;  's,  casa 

del  abogado. 
Lay  (a  cable),  colocar ;  tender. 
Lazy,  adj.,  perezqso. 
Lead  (=  ''indtice  "),  hacer;  (  =  ''con- 
duct^'), conducir. 
Leaf,  s.,  hoja,  f. 
Learn,  aprender  ("d"  before  infin.); 

o'ir;  saber. 
Learned,  adj.,  instruido. 
Learning,  s.,  saber,  m. ;  conocimien- 

tos,  m.  pi. 
Least,  at,  al  menos. 
Leave,  partir  de  ;  salir  de ;  marcharse 

de ;  dejar ;  word,  dejar  dicho. 

Left  in   lurch,   to  be,  quedarse  en 

bianco. 
Leg,  s.,  pierna,  f. 
Lend,  prestar. 
Less,  adj.  and  adv.,  menos. 
Lesson,  s.,  leccion,  f.  ;  to  he  at  one's 

lessons,  estudiar. 
Let,  dejar  ;  permitir  ;  hacer ; one 

know,  participar ;  off,  poner  en 

libertad ;  off  unpunished,  per- 

donar. 
Letter,  s.,  carta,  f. ;  letra,  f. 

Lie,  yacer  ;  in  bed,  estar  en  cama. 

Life,  s.,  vida,  f. 

Light,  s.,  luz,  f. 

Light,  adj.,  ligero. 

Light,  encender. 

Lighten,  relampaguear. 

Lightning,  s.,  relampajos,  m.  pi. 

Like,   gustar   (impers.,   ind.    obj.   of 

pers.) ; best,  gustar  mds ;  should 

,  quisiera. 


Like,  to  be,  parecer  ^ ;  to  be  more  like 

to  do,  hacer  mas  facilmente. 
Line  (of  letter),  linea  escrita,  f. 
Lion,  s.,  leon,  m. ;  hunt,  caza  de 

leones. 
Lisbon,  s.,  Lisboa. 
List,  s.,  lista,  f. 
Listen  (to),  oir. 
Literature,  s.,  lit^ratura,  f. 
Litre,  s.,  litro,  m. 
Little,  adj.,  pequeno ;  poco. 
Live,  vivir ;  in  the  hope  of,  ali- 

mentarse  de  la  esperanza  de ;  

on,  vivir  de. 
Lively,  adj.,  vivo. 
Living,  s.,  vivir,  m. ;  vida,  f. 
Living,  adj.,  viviente. 
Lock,  echar  la  Have  a. 
London,  s.,  Londres. 
Long,  adj.,  largo;  (of  time),  mucho 

tiempo;     {=  '"  late''^)    tarde;     how 

?,    icuanto  tiempo?;  so  , 

tanto   tiempo ;   ago,    hace  ya 

tiempo. 

Longer,  no,  no ya. 

Look,  mirar ;  at,  mirar  en  ;  

for,  buscar ;  let  him to  that,  alia 

se  los  haya. 
Lose,  perder ;  one^s  reason,  irsele 

la  cabeza. 
Losing-game,  s.,  ganapierde,  m. 
Loss,  s.,  perdida,  f. 
Loud,  adj.,  alto. 
Louis,  s.,  Luis. 
Louisa,  s.,  Luisa. 
Love,  amar. 
Lover,  s.,  amante,  m. 
Loving,  adj.,  amante  ;  que  te  ama. 
Low,  adj.,  bajo, 
Lunch,  merendar. 

Madam,  s.,  senora,  f. 

Madman,  s.,  loco,  m. 

Magnificent,  adj.,  magnifico. 

Make,  hacer ; (condition),  poner; 

living  or  money,   ganar ;  

acquaintance  of  conocer  ;  affi- 
davit, prestar  juramento  ;  fun 

of,  hacer    burla  de,   burlarse  de ; 

most  of,  aprovecharse  de  ;  

object  of  study,  estudiar ;  out, 

encontrar :  up  one's  mind,  de- 

cidirse  ;  virtue  of  necessity,  sa- 

car  fuerzas  de  flaqueza. 

Malaga,  s.,  Malaga,  f. 

Mama,  s.,  mamd,  f. 

Man,  s.,  hombre,  m. ;  litiJe ,  hom- 

brecito,  m. 

Manage  to,  hacer ;  saber ;  poder ; 
acertar  a. 

Mankind,  s.,  humanidad,  f. 

Manner,  s.,  modo,  m.  ;  manera,  f.  ; 


VOCABULARY. 


507 


from  the in  which  one  does,  etc., 

viendole  hacer  ;  in  such  a ,  de 

esa  manera. 

Many,  adj.,  muchos. 

March,  s.,  marzo,  m. 

March,  marchar. 

Margaret,  s.,  Margarita. 

Market,  s.,  mercado,  m. 

Married,  adj.,  casado. 

Marry,  casarse. 

Masks,  in,  de  mdscara. 

Materially,  adv.,  mucho. 

Matter,  s.,  asunto,  m. ;   materia,  f. ; 

negocio,  m. ;   no  ,  no  importa ; 

to  be  the with,  tener. 

May,  s.,  mayo,  m. 

May,  poder. 

Mean,  querer  decir. 

Meaning,  s.,  significacion,  f. ;  senti- 
do,  m.  ;  lo  que  quiere  decir. 

Meanness,  s.,  ruindad,  f. 

Means,  s.,  medio,  m. ;  recursos,  m. 
pi. ;  by  no ,  de  ningun  modo. 

Measure,  f.,  medida,  f. 

Meat,  m.,  came,  f. 

Medicine,  s.,  medicina,  f. 

Meet  (with),  encontrar  ;  (='^  hap- 
pen") suceder  (with  ind.  obj.  of 
person). 

Melon,  s.,  mel6n,  m. 

Member,  s.,  miembro,  m. 

Memory,  s.,  memoria,  f. 

Mention,  s.,  m>enci6n,  f. 

Mention,  mencionar ;  nombrar. 

Merchant,  s.,  mercador,  m. ;  comer- 
ciante,  m. 

Mere  nothing,  a,  un  nada. 

Merit,  merecer. 

Messrs.,  Senores  (or  omit). 

Method  {='' grammar"),  s.,  gramd- 
tica,  f. 

Metropolis,  s.,  metr6poli,  f. 

Mexico,  s.,  Mejico,  m. 

Mexican,  adj.,  mejicano. 

Middle  (of  month),  medidos,  m.  pi. 

Midnight,  s.,  media  noche. 

Milan,  s.,  Mildn. 

Mile,  s.,  milla,  f. 

Milk,  s.,  leche,  f. 

Million,  s.,  millon,  m. 

Mine,  adj.,  mio;  friend  of ,  ami- 
go  mlo. 

Minute,  s.,  minuto,  m. 

Misdemeanor,  s.,  delinquir,  m. 

Misfortune,  s.,  desgracia,  f. 

Miss,  s.,  senorita,  f. 

Mistake,  s.,  equivocaci6n. 

Mistaken,  to  be,  equivocarse. 

Model,  s.,  modelo,  m. 

Moment,  s.,  momento,  m. 

Monarchical,  adj.,  mondrquico. 

Monday,  s.,  lunes,  m. 


Money,  s.,  dinero,  m. 

Month,  s.,  mes,  m. 

Mood,  s.,  modo,  m. ;  in  jesting  , 

de  buen  humor. 

More,  adv.,  mds. 

Morning,  s.,  manana,  f. ;  (before  sun- 
rise) madrugada,  f. 

Most,  s.,  la  mayor  parte. 

Mostly,  adv.,  generalmente. 

Mother,  s.,  madre,  f. 

Mourning,  to  be  in,  ir  de  luto. 

Mr.,  s.,  Senor,  m.  ;  Don,  m. 

Mrs.,  Senora,  f. 

Much,  s.,  mucho;  too  ,  demasia- 

do  ;  of  a,  muy. 

Murderer,  s.,  asesino,  m. 

Music,  s.,  mtisica,  f. ; book,  libro 

de  mtisica. 

Musician,  s.,  musico,  m. 

Must,  deber. 

My,  poss.  pron.,  mi;  mio. 

Name,  s.,  nombre,  m. 

Named,  to  be,  llamarse. 

Naples,  s.,  Napoles. 

Nation,  s.,  nacion,  f. 

Native,  s.,  natural,  m.;  nativo,  m. 

Natural,  adj.,  natural. 

Naturalist,  s.,  naturalista,  m. 

Nature,  s.,  naturaleza,  f. 

Navigation,  s.,  navegaciou,  f. 

Near,  prep.,  cerca  de. 

Near  (by),  adv.,  proximo. 

Nearly,  adv.,  cerca  de  ;  casi. 

Necessary,  adj.,  necesario. 

Necessity,  s.,  necesidad,  f.;  for, 

necesidad  de. 

Need,  necesitar. 

Needle,  s.,  aguja,  f. 

Needless,  to  be,  no  ser  necesario. 

Neglect,  s.,  negligencia,  f. 

Negligent,  adj.,  negligente. 

Neighbor,  s.,  vecino,  m. 

Neither,  conj.,  ni  el  uno  ni  el  otro  ; 

neither nor,  ni ni ;  he 

does,  es  verdad  que  no,  etc.  (37,  22). 

Never,    adv.,    nunca;   jamas;    

mind,  no  importa. 

New,  adj.,  nuevo ;  estrano  ;  it  is  noth- 
ing   ,  no  es  estrano. 

News,  s.,  noticias,  f.  pi. 

New  York,  s.,  Nueva  York. 

Newspaper,  s.,  periodico,  m. 

Next,  adj.,  pr6ximo;  que  viene. 

Next,  adv.,  despues;  luego. 

Next  to,  prep.,  junto  i, ;  inmediato  i. 

Nick  of  time,  in,  de  perilla. 

Niece,  s.,  sobrina,  f. 

Night,  s.,  noche,  f.;  last ,  anoche ; 

before  last,  anteayer  noche. 

Nightfall,  s.,  anochecer,  m. 

Nine,  s.,  nueve. 


508 


VOCABULABT. 


Nineteen,  s.,  diez  y  nueve. 

Ninety,  s.,  noventa. 

No,  adj.,  ninguno. 

No,   adv.,    no;    matter,   no  im- 

porta  ;  sooner,  apenas. 

Nobody,  s.,  nadie. 

Noise,  s.,  ruido,  m. 

None,  pron.,  ningano. 

Noon,  s.,  medio  dia,  m. 

North,  s.,  norte,  m. 

Northern,  adj.,  del  norte. 

Not,  adv.,  no  ;  at  all,  de  ningtin 

modo. 
Notary,  s.,  escribano,  m. 
Note,  s.,   billete,   m.;    at  three 

months,   un    pagare    d    tres    meses 

plazo. 
Nothing,  s.,  nada  ;  ninguna  cosa  ;  to 

be more  than,  no  ser  otra  cosa 

que. 
Notwithstanding",  conj.,  no  obstante; 

sin  embargo  de  que;  ilpesar  de  que ; 

aunque. 
Novel,  s.,  novela,  f. 
November,  s.,  noviembre,  m. 
Now,  adv.,  ahora;  and  then,  de 

cuando  en  cuando. 
Now-a-days,  adv.,  ahora. 
Number,  s.,  numero,  m. 

Obedient  servant,  yonr  most,  S.S.S., 

Q.S.M.B. 
Oblig-ed,  to  be,  agradecer,  estar  obli- 

gado  d,  ser  agradecido  por. 
Obscurity,  s.,  obscuridad,  f. 
Observe,  observar. 
Observed,  adj.,  usual. 
Obtain,  obtener ;   lograr. 
Occasion,  s.,  ocasion,  f. 
Occupation,  s.,  ocupacion,  f. 
Occur,  suceder,  ocurrir. 
O'clock,  s.,  hora,  f.;  what ,  ique 

hora? 
October,  s.,  octubre,  m. 
Of,  prep.,  de. 

Of  course,  adv.,  por  supuesto. 
Offend,  molestar,  ofeuder. 
Offender,  s.,  delincuente,  m.;  reo,  m.; 

acusado,  m. 
Offer,  prometer ;  ofrecer. 
Office,  s.,  posicion,  f.;  oficio,  m.;  escri- 

torio,  m.;  oficina,  f. 
Officer,  s.,  oficial,  m. 
Often,   adv.,   a  menudo :    frecuente- 

mente;  how ?,  icuantas  veces? 

Old,    adj.,    viejo;    how  ?,    6  que 

edad  tener  ? 
Omen,  s.,  agiiero,  m. 
On,    prep.,     en;     {  =  *^ concerning'^) 

sobre,  acerca  de;  (omitted  before 

days  of  week). 
On  account  of,  d  causa  de. 


On  condition  that,  con  la  condicion 

que. 
Once,  adv.,  una  vez  ;  at ,  al  mo- 

mento ;  inmediatamence. 
One,  num.  adj.,  uno  ; o'clocTc,  una 

hora ;  (omitted  after  adjective ;  use 

form  of  el  or  agw^i  before  relatives). 
Only,  adj.   and  adv.,   solo;    tinico; 

solamente  ;    no  mas  que  ;    no 

sino. 
Open,  abrir. 
Open,  adj.,  abierto. 
Opera,  s.,  opera,  f. 
Opinion,  s.,  opinion,  f.;   to  have  a  fine 

of  oneself,  no  pesarle  de  haber 

nacido. 
Opposed  to,  to  be,  oponerse  d. 
Opposite,  prep.,  en  f rente  de. 
Opposition,  s.,  oposicion,  f. 
Or,  conj.,  6  or  u. 
Orange,  s.,  naranja,  f. 
Orange,  adj.,  anaranjado. 
Orchard  (of  apples),  s.,  manzanar,  m. 
Order,  s.,  orden,  m. 
Order,  ordenar. 
Order  to,  in,  prep.,  para. 
Organist,  s.,  orgauista,  m. 
Original,  s.,  original,  m. 
Other,  pron.,  otro. 
Otherwise,  adv.,  de  otro  modo. 
Our(8),  poss.  pron.,  nuestro ;  friend 

of ,  amigo  nuestro. 

Out,  to  be,  estar  fuera  ;  of  town, 

estar  en  el  campo. 
Over  there,  alU. 
Overtake,  alcanzar. 
Owe,  deber. 

Owing  to,  prep.,  d  causa  de. 
Own,  tener. 
Own,  adj.,  proprio. 

Page,  s.,  pagina,  f. 

Pain,  s.,  dolor,  m  ;  in,  dolor  de. 

Pain,  doler  (ind.  obj.  of  person). 

Painful,  to  be,  doler. 

Painter,  s.,  pintor,  m. 

Painting,  s.,  pintura,  f. 

Palace,  s.,  palacio,  m. 

Pantaloons,  s.,  pantalones,  m.  pi. 

Papa,  s.,  papa.  m. 

Paper,  s.,  pa  pel,  m.  (=  ''newspaper'^) 
I      periodico,  m. 
i  Pardon,  perdouar ;  dispensar. 
;  Parents,  s..  padres,  m.  pi. 
j  Paris,  s.,  Paris. 
!  Park,  s.,  parque,  m. 
i  Parlor-play,  s..  comedia  casera,  f. 

Part,  s.,  parte,  f. 

Participle,  s..  participio,  m. 

Particular,  adj.,  particular;  in , 

en  particular. 

Particularly,  adv.,  particularmente. 


VOCABULAEY, 


509 


Party,  s.,  parte,  f ;  tertulia,  f. 

Pass,  pasar ;  for,  pasar  por. 

Passage,  s.,  pasaje,  m. 

Passenger,  s.,  pasajero,  m. 

Past,  y  (of  time  of  day,  placed  after 

hour  passed,  44,  1). 
Pay,    pagar;     attention,   poner 

atencion  ;    no  attention  to,  no 

hacer  caso   de ;    visit,   liacer 

visita. 
Peace,  s.,  paz,  f. 
Peach,  s.,  melocot6n,  m. 
Pen,  s.,  pluma,  f. 
Pen-knife,  s.,  cortaplumas,  m. 
Pencil,  s.,  Mpiz,  ni. 
Peninsula,  s.,  peuinsula,  f. 
People,  s.,  geute,  f. 
Perfect,  adj.,  perfecto ;  to  become , 

perfeccionarse. 
Perfect,  perfeccionar. 
Perfectly,  adv.,  perfectamente. 
Perform,  Uevar  i  cabo. 
Perhaps,  adv..  tal  vez;  quizd. 
Persist,  persistir. 
Person,  s.,  persona,  f. 
Persuade,  persuadir. 
Peter,  s.,  Pedro. 
Philadelphia,  s.,  Filadelfia. 
Philosophaster,  miserahle,  s.,  filo- 

sofastro,  m. 
Philosopher,  s.,  fil6sofo,  m. 
Philosophical,  adj.,  filosofico. 
Phrase,  s.<  sentencia,  f. ;  frase,  f. 
Phrase-book,  s.,  libro  (m.)  de  frases. 
Physician,  s.,  medico,  m. 
Piano,  s.,  piano,  m. 
Pianist,  s.,  pianista,  m.;  's,  d  la 

tienda  del  pianista. 
Pick  quarrel  with,  buscar  cinco  pies 

al  gato. 
Piece,   s.,    pedazo,    m.;     (theatrical) 

pieza,  f . 
Pin,  s.,  alfiler,  m. 
Pine-grove,  s.,  pinar,  m. 
Pipe,  s.,  pipa,  f. 
Pistol-shot,  s.,  pistoletazo,  m. 
Pity,  tener  lastima  de. 
Place,  s.,  lugar,  m.;    (  =  '^position'') 

colocacion,  f.;    in  the  first ,  en 

primer  lugar. 
Play,  s.,  comedia,  f. 
Play  (on  instrument),  tocar ;  (a 

game),  jugar. 
Player,  s.,  jugador,  m. 
Please,  gustar  ;  agradar  ;  if  you , 

si  le  gusta,  si  V.  quiere. 
Pleased,  adj.,  contento. 
Pleasure,  s.,  gusto,  m.;  placer,  m.; 

do to,  hacer  el  favor  de ;  for 

,  para  divertirse ;  have  the 

to,  tener  el  gusto  de ;   take in, 

tener  gusto  en. 


Pocket-handkerchief,  s.,  panuelo  de 

bolsillo,  m. 
Poem,  s.,  poesia,  f. 
Poetical,  adj.,  poetico. 
Poetry,  s.,  poesia,  f. 
Point,  s.,  punto,  m.  ;  come  to  the , 

venir  al  caso ;  not  to  come  to  the , 

andarse  por  las  ramas. 
Politics,  s.,  pblitica,  f. 
Poor,  adj.,  pobre. 
Port;  s.,  puerto,  m. 
Portrait,  s.,  retrato,  m. 
Portugal;  s.,  Portugal. 
Portuguese,  adj.,  portugues. 
Possess,  poseer. 
Possible,  adj.  and  s.,  posible  ;  to  do 

all ,  hacer  todo  lo  posible. 

Post-office,  s.,  correo,  m. 
Pound,  s.,  libra,  f. 
Power,  s.,  poder,  m. 
Practitioner,  s.,  practicante,  m. 
Practise,    practiciir ;    on,   prac- 

ticar. 
Praise,  aplaudir. 
Precisely,    adv.,    precisamente ;    (of 

time)  en  punto. 
Prefer,  preferir. 
Preferred,   to  be    {=  ''preferable^^), 

preferible. 
Prepare,  preparar  (para). 
Present,  adj.,  actual  (55,  7). 
Present,  at,  al  presente. 
Present,  presentar ;  respects,  dar 

memoria  de parte  i. 

Preside  (atj,  presidir  en. 
President,  s.,  presidente,  m. 
Pretension,  s.,  pretension,  f. 
Preterite  definite,  preterite  definido. 
Pretext  of,  under,  con  pretexto  de. 
Pretty,  adj.,  bonito  ;  hermoso. 
Pretty,  adv.,  bastante. 
Price,  s.,  precio,  m. 
Principal,  adj.,  principal. 
Principally,  adv.,  principalmente. 
Prism,  s.,  prisma,  m. 
Prismatic,  adj.,  prism^tico. 
Prison,  s.,  c^rcel,  f. 
Private,  adj.,  privado. 
Private  individual,  s.,  aficionado,  m. 
Probably,  adv.,  probablemente. 
Procession,  s.,  procesion,  f. 
Procure,  procurar. 
Produce,  producir. 
Profession,  s.,  profesi6n,  f. 
Professor,   s.,   profesor,   m. ;    's, 

casa  del  profesor;  Spanish,  French 

,  profesor  de  espanol,  de  fran- 

ces. 
Profound,  adj.,  profundo. 
Project,  s.,  proyecto,  m. 
Promenade,  s.,  paseo,  m. 
Promise,'  s.,  promesa,  f. 


510 


VOCABULAFT. 


Promise,  prometer. 

Promotion,  s.,  ascenso,  m. 

Pronounce,  pronunciar. 

Pronunciation,  s.,  pronunciaci6n,  f. 

Proof,  s.,  prueba,  f. 

Proper,  adj.,  bueno. 

Prophecy,  s.,  profesia,  f. 

Proportion  to,  out  of  (=  ''dispropor- 
tionately ' ' ),  desproporcionadisima- 
mente  (caro)  en  respecto  d  (50,  7). 

Propose,  proponer. 

Prose,  s.,  prosa,  f. 

Prove,  probar. 

Provided  that,  con  tal  que. 

Province,  s.,  provincia,  f. 

Prudent,  adj.,  prudente. 

Prussia  s.,  Prusia,  f. 

Public,  adj.,  publico. 

Publish,   publicar;    to    be  published, 

:  salir  a  luz. 

Punctual,  adj.,  puntual. 

Punish,  castigar. 

Pupil,  s.,  discipulo,  m. 

Purchase,  s.,  compra,  f. 

Purist,  s.,  purista,  m. 

Purpose,  s.,  proposito,  m. ;   on  , 

de  intento. 

Put,  poner ;  in,  poner ;  off, 

jwsponer ;  up,  erigir. 

Quality,  s.,  calidad,  f. 

Quantity,  s.,  cantidad,  f. 

Quarrel,  s.,  rina,  f. ;  to  get  into  a 

with,   andar    en    dares  y  tomares 

con  ;  pick  a  ,  buscar  cinco  pies 

al  gato. 
Quarter,    cuarto,    m. :   past,  y 

cuarto  ;  to,  menos  cuarto. 

Queen,  s.,  reina,  f. 
Question,  s.,  pregunta,  f. 
Quickly,  adv.,  aprisa  ;  pronto. 
Quietness,  s.,  tranquilidad,  f. 
Quixote,  s.,  Quijote. 

Kailroad,  s.,  camino  (m.)  de  hierro; 

ferrocarril,  m. 
Bain,  Hover ;  in  torrents,  dilu- 

viar.  Hover  i,  cantaros. 
Random,  at,  ^  bulto. 
Earely,  adv.,  rara  vez. 
Eascal,  s.,  picaro,  m. 
Rash  action,  temeridad,  f. 
Rather  too,  algo. 
Ray,  s.,  rayo,  m. 

Reach,  within  one's,  d  su  alcance. 
Read,  leer. 
Reader,  s.,  lector,  m. 
Reading,  s.,  lectura,  f. 
Ready,  adj.,  pronto. 
Real,  adj.,  verdadero;  reaL  .  * 
Reality,  in,  en  realidad. 


Really,  adv.,  realment«  ;  verdadera- 

mente. 
Reason,  s.,  causa,  f.;  razon,  f. 
Reasonable,  adj.,  razonable. 
Receipt,  s.,  recibo,  m. 
Receive,  recibir. 
Reception,  s.,  recepci6n,  f.;  recibimi- 

ento,  m. 
Recover,  recobrar. 
Rectify,  rectificar ;  remediar. 
Red,  adj.,  rojo. 
Reduce,  reducir. 
Refuse,  negar. 
Reg^imen,  s.,  regimen,  m. 
Regiment,  s.,  regimiento,  m. 
Regret,  pesar  (impers.,  ind.  obj.  of 

person. ) 
Regular,  adj.,  regular. 
Reign,  s.,  reinado,  m. 
Relative  to,  relativo  i. ;  acerca  d. 
Religious,  adj.,  reHgioso. 
Rely  on,  contar  con  ;  fiarse  de  ;   (of 

things)  dar  por  supuesto. 
Remain,  estarse ;  quedar. 
Remember,  acordarse  de ;  recordar. 
Remuneration,  s.,  remuneracion,  f. 
Repeat,  repetir. 
Represent,  representar. 
Reprove,  reprender. 
Republican,  adj.,  republican©. 
Reputation,  s.,  reputacion,  f. 
Require,  necesitar ;  exigir ;   to  be  re- 
quired, necesitarse. 
Required,  adj.,  necesario. 
Resemble,  haber  salido  d  (60,  15). 
Reside,  residir. 
Residence,  s.,  residencia,  f. 
Resolve,  resolver. 
Respect,  s.,   concepto,  m.;   in  every 

,  en  todo. 

Respectable,  adj.,  respe table. 
Respected,  adj.,  respetado. 
Respecting,  prep.,  acerca  de. 
Rest,  s.,  descanso,  m.;  resto,  m.  (46, 

10);  to  have ,  tranquilizarse. 

Rest,  descansar ;  descansarse. 

Retain,  retener. 

Return,  volver  (intrans.);   devolver 

(trans.). 
Revive,  revivir. 

Reward,  recompensar ;  premiar. 
Rhyme  or  reason,  without,  d  tontas 

y  a  locas. 

Rich,  rico;  fellow,  ricacho. 

Ridicule,  s.,   ridiculo  (preceded  by 

"lo"). 
Ridicule,  ridiculizar. 
Riding,  s.,  pasear  i,  caballo  ;  to  be  out 

,  salir  a  caballo. 

Right,  justo ;    derecho ;     to  be , 

tener  razon  ;   hacer  bien  de  ;  estar 

bien. 


rOCABULASY. 


511 


Rise,  levantarse ;  (of  sun)  salir. 
River,  s.,  rio,  m.;  by  the side,  i> 

lo  largo  del  rio. 
Robber,  s.,  ladron,  m. 
Rogue  (little),  s.,  picaruelo,  m. 
Rome,  s.,  Eoma. 
Room,  s.,  cuarto,  m. 
Round-faced,  adj.,  carirredondo. 
Royal,  adj.,  real. 
Rule,  s.,  regla,  f. 
Run,  ir ;  about,  corretear ;  correr 

por. 

Sad,  adj.,  triste. 

Sadness,  s.,  tristeza,  f. 

Sale,  to  be  for,  estar  de  venta. 

Same,  adj.,  mismo. 

Satirical,  adj.,  satirico. 

Satisfied  (with),  adj.,  contento  (con). 

Saturday,  s.,  sdbado,  m. 

Say,  decir. 

Scarcely,  adv.,  apenas;  casi. 

Scene,  s.,  espect^culo,  ra. 

Scholar,  s.,  discipulo,  m. 

School,  s.,  escuela,  f. ; fellow,  con- 

discipulo,  m. ;  mistress,  maes- 

tra,  f. 
Science,  s.,  ciencia,  f. 
Scold,  reiiir. 
Score,  on  that,  con  respecto  d  eso; 

sobre  esa  materia. 
Sculptor,  s.,  escultor,  m. 
Sealingr-wax,  s.,  lacre,  m. 
Search  (for),  buscar ;   in of,  en 

(su)  busca. 
Seat,  s.  (of  war),  teatro,  m. ;  to  take  a 

,  sentarse. 

Second,  s.,  segundo,  m. 

Second,  num.  adj.,  segundo. 

Secret,  adj.,  secreto,  m. 

See,  ver ;  again,  volver  i  ver ; 

how,  ver  que. 

Seem,  parecer. 

Seldom,  adv.,  raras  veces. 

Sell,  vender. 

Send,     mandar;     enviar;    for, 

mandar  por ;    in,  pasar  ;   

off,  enviar. 
Senses,  to  be  in  one's,  estar  en  sus 

cinco  sentidos. 
Separately,  adv.,  separadamente. 
Separation,  s.,  separacion,  f. 
September,  s.,  setiembre,  m. 
Servant,  s.,  criado,  m. 
Serve,  servir. 
Set,  poner ;    face  against,  opo- 

nerse;  fire  to,  poner  fuegoa; 

foot,  poner  los  pies ;  in  (of 

season ),  entrar ;  comencer ; ont, 

partir ;    out   on,    emprender ; 

sail,  darse  d  la  vela. 

Seven,  num.  adj.,  siete. 


Seventeen,  num.  adj.,  diez  y  siete. 
Seventy,  num.  adj.,  setenta. 
Seventy-five,  num.  adj.,   setenta  y 

cinco. 
Several,  adj.,  varios. 
Sew,  coser. 
Sex,  s.,  sexo,  m. 

Shake  hands  with,  dar  la  mano  ^. 
Shaved,  to  be,  afeitarse. 
Sheep,  s.,  carnero,  m. 
Ship,  s.,  navio,  m. 
Shoe,  s.,  zapato,  m. 
Shoemaker,  s.,  zapatero,  m. 
Shoemaker's  (shop),  s.,  zapateria,  f. 
Shoot,  fusilar. 

Short,  adj.,  corto;  (of  time)  poco. 
Shortly,  adv.,  poco  ;  poco  tiempo. 
Shout,  s.,  dar  gritas. 
Shouts,  s.,  algazara,  f. 
Show,  ensenar ;  mostrar. 
Shut,  adj.,  cerrado. 
Shut,  cerrar ;   oneself  up,  ence- 

rrarse  ;  door  in  one' s  face,  darle 

con  la  puerta  en  la  cara. 
Sick,  adj.,  enfermo  ;  to  be ,  enfer- 

marse. 
Sickly,  adj.,  enfermizo. 
Side,  s.,  costado,  m. ;  by  the  of 

(zz  "  along''),  i>  lo  largo  de. 
Side  with,  ir  con. 
Sight,  s.,  vista,  f. 
Sig-n,  celebrar  (46,  6). 
Silence,  s.,  silencio,  m. 
Silent,  adj.,  callado. 
Silk,  adj.,  de  seda. 
Silk,  s.,  seda,  f. 
Silver,  s.,  plata,  f. 
Simple,  adj.,  simple. 
Since,  adv.,  despues  ;  mds ;  ever , 

desde  entonces. 
Since,  conj.,  que  ;  desde  que. 
Since,   prep.,   hace   (impers.,  also  = 

''ago''). 
Sincerity,  s.,  sinceridad,  f. ;  with , 

de  buena  fe. 
Sinecure,  s.,  bocado  (m.)  sin  hueso. 
Sing,  cantar. 

Singer,  s.,  cantor,  m. ;  cantatriz,  f. 
Single  occasion,  never  on  a,  nunca 

(63,  1). 
Singular,  adj.,  singular. 
Sir,  s.,  seiior,  m. ;  caballero,  m. 
Sister,  s.,  hermana,  f. 
Sit  down,  sentarse. 
Sitting,  to  be,  estar  sentado. 
Situated,  p.  p.,  situado. 
Six,  num.  adj.,  seis. 
Sixteen,  num.  adj.,  diez  y  seis. 
Sixty,  num.  adj.,  sesenta. 
Size,  s.,  tamano,  m. 
Skillful,  hdbil. 
Skin,  s.,  cutis,  m. 


512 


VOCABULAEY, 


Sky,  s.,  cielo,  m. 

Sleep,  s.,  sueno,  m. 

Sleep,  dormir. 

Sleepy,  to  be,  tener  sueno. 

Slightly,  adv.,  ligeramente. 

Slowly,  adv.,  despacio. 

Small,  adj.,  pequeno. 

Smell,  oler ;  like,  oler  d. 

Smoke,  fumar. 

So,     adv.,    tan;     {  =  ''it'')  lo;   (  = 

" also ")  tambien ;  (=   " thm  ")  asi, 

de    ese    modo ;     (as    assent     after 

verb)  que  si;   long  as,  hasta 

que  ;  much,  tanto. 

Soap,  s.,  jabon,  m. 

Society,  s.,  sociedad,  f. ;  go  into , 

visitar  la  sociedad. 
Sofa,  s.,  sofa,  m. 
Soldier,  s.,  soldado,  m. 
Sold,  to  be,  venderse. 
Solicit,  solicitar. 
Some,  adj.  and  pron.,  alguno  (sing.) ; 

algunos  or  unos  (plur.)  ;  one, 

alguuo. 
Something,  algo ;  to  be of  a,  tener 

algo  de,  ser  un  poco  ;  a  ,  uu  no 

se  que  (48.  10). 
Sometimes,  adv.,  algunas  veces. 
Son,  s.,  hijo,  m. 
Song,  s.,  cancion,  f. 
Soon,  adv.,  pronto  ;  as as,  lo  m^s 

pronto. 
Sooner,   adv.,   m^s  pronto ;    or 

later,  tarde  que  temprano  ;  no , 

apenas ;  no said  than  done,  dicho 

y  hecho. 

Sore,  adj.,  loalo  ;  to  he ,  doler. 

Sorry  for,  to  be,  sentir. 

Sort,  s.,  especie,  f. 

Soul,  s.,  alma,  f. 

South,  s.,  sur,  m. 

South    Africa,    s.,    Africa     (f.)    del 

Sur. 
South  America,  s.,  America  (f.)  del 

Sur  ;  el  Sur  de  America. 
South  American,  adj.,   del    Sur    de 

America. 
Spain^  s.,  Espana,  f. 
Spaniard,  s.,  Espanol,  m. 
Spanish,  adj.,  espanol. 
Speak,  hablar;  to  be  spoken  (of  lan- 
guage), hablarse. 
Spectacles,  s.,  anteojos,  m.  pi. ;  espe- 

juelos,  m.  pi. 
Speed,  with  all,  ^  todo  correr. 
Spell,  escribir  (53,  3). 
Spend  (time),  pasar. 
Spirit,  s.,  espiritu,  m. 
Spoil,  perder. 
Spring,  s.,  prima  vera,  f. 
Stand,  hallarse. 
Start,  marchar ;  partir. 


State,  s.,  estado,  m. 

State-prison,  s.,  presidio,  m. 

Stay,  s.,  permanencia,  f. 

Stay,  quedar. 

Steal,  robar. 

Steamer,  s.,  vapor,  m. 

Stepson,  s.,  bijastro,  m. 

Still,  adv.,  todavia. 

Stocking,  s.,  media,  f. 

Stone,  s.,  cal  y  canto  (^48,  4). 

Stop,  pararse. 

Store,  s.,  tienda,  f. 

Story  (of  house),  s.,  piso,  m. 

Strange,  adj.,  extrano;  singular. 

Stranger,  s.,  extraugero,  m. 

Street,    s.,    calle,    f.;    Broome  , 

Walker ,  la  calle  de  B.,  de  W. 

Strength,  s.,  fuerzas,  f.  pi. 

Strip  one  of  his  possessions,  dejar 
en  la  calle. 

Strong,  adj.,  fuerte. 

Student,  s.,  estudiante,  m. 

Studious,  adj.,  estudioso. 

Study,  s.,  estudio,  m. 

Study,  estudiar. 

Subject,  s.,  materia,  f.;  sujeto,  m. 

Succeed,  conseguir ;  lograr ;  tener 
buen  exito  ;  salir  con  ;  in  ob- 
taining, lograr. 

Success,  s.,  buen  6xito,  m. 

Successful,  to  be,  tener  buen  exito. 

Such,  adj.,  tal. 

Sudden,  of  a,  de  repente 

Sue  for,  pretender. 

Suffer,  sutFrir. 

Suffering,  s..  sufriraiento,  m. 

Sufficient,  adj.,  suficiente. 

Suit  action  to  word,  decir  y  hacer. 

Suitable,  adj.,  conveniente  ipani  = 
''for"). 

Suited  to,  to  be,  acomodarse. 

Summer,  s.,  verano,  m. 

Sun,  s.,  sol,  m. 

Sunbeam,  s.,  rayo  (m.)  del  sol. 

Sunday,  s.,  domingo.  m. 

Superior,  adj.,  superior. 

Superstitious,  adj.,  supersticioso. 

Supper,  s.,  cena,  f. 

Support,  aguantar. 

Suppose,  suponer ;  pensar. 

Sure,  adj.,  seguro. 

Surpass,  pasar. 

Surprise,  sorprender. 

Surprised,  to  be,  sorprenderse. 

Surprising,  pres.  part.,  sorprendente. 

Sustain,  sustener. 

Swear,  jurar. 

Sweep,  barrer. 

Sweet,  adj.,  grato. 

Swollen,  adj.,  hinchado. 

Sword,  s.,  espada,  f. 

System,  s.,  sistema,  m. 


VOCABULAET. 


513 


TablCi  s.,  mesa,  f. 

Taciturn,  adj.,  callado. 

Tailor,  s.,  sastro,  m. 

Tailor's  shop,  s.,  sastreria,  f. 

Take,  llevar;    tomar ;    {  =  ^'lead^') 
conducir ;    (  =  "<o  be  necessary^') 

necesitar ;  afternoon-nap,  dor- 

mir  la  siesta ;  care,  tener  cui- 

dado ;  care  to,  guardar  bien  de, 

tener  cuidado  de ;    for,  creer 

ser ;  for  granted,  dar  por  supu- 

esto ;  one  to  be,   dar  d, ;    

out,  quitar  ;  place,  tener  lugar  ; 

seat,   sentarse ;    to    one^s 

heels,  tomar  las  de  Villadiego ;  

(trip,  exercise,  etc.),  hacer. 

Talent,  s.,  talento,  m. 

Talk,    hablar ;    (or   speah)    of, 

decir. 

Talkative,  adj.,  hablador. 

Tall,  adj.,  alto. 

Task,  s.,  tacha,  f. 

Taste,  s.,  gusto,  m. 

Taste,    probar ;    of,    like, 

saber  d,. 

Teacher,  s.,  maestro,  m.;  's,  casa 

del  maestro ;    English  ,   miisic 

,  piano ,  etc. , ;  maestro 

de  ingles,  de  musica,  de  piano,  etc. 

Teleg-raph-cable,  s.,  telegrafo,  m. 

Telegraphic,  adj.,  telegr^fico. 

Telemachus,  s.,  Telemaco. 

Tell,  decir  ;  (story),  con  tar. 

Tell-tale,  s.,  correveidile,  m. 

Tempt,  hacer  (with  infin.)  (65,  10). 

Ten,  num.  adj.,  diez. 

Tense,  s.,  tiempo,  m. 

Termination,  s.,  terminaci6n,  f. 

Than,  conj.,  que;  de  (before  numer- 
als); cuando  (after  "apenas"). 

Thank,  agradecer ;  you,  gracias. 

That,  adj.  and  pron.,  ese,  aquel. 

Theatre,  s.,  teatro,  m. 

Then,  adv.,  entonces;  (interj.)  pues. 

There,  adv.,  alii ;  ail^. 

Therefore,  adv.,  por  consiguiente. 

Thimble,  s.,  dedal,  m. 

Thing,  s.,  cosa,  f. 

Think,  creer ;  pensar. 

Third,   num.   adj.,  tercero ;    tercera 
parte. 
.►Thirsty,  to  be,  tener  sed. 

Thirteen,  num.  adj.,  trece. 

Thirty,  num.  adj.,  treinta. 

This,  adj.  and  pron.,  este. 

Thoroughly,  adv.,  completamente. 

Though,  conj.,  aunque. 

Thought,  s.,  pensamiento,  m. 

Thousand,  s.,  mil. 

Thread,  s.,  hilo,  m. 

Threaten,  amenazar. 

Three,  num.  adj.,  tres. 
35 


Throne,  s.,  trono,  m. 

Throug'h,  prep.,  por. 

Throw  down  (sword),  tirar  (57,  6). 

Thunder,  s.,  trueno,  m. 

Thunder,  tronar  (impers.). 

Thunderstruck,     to     be,     quedarse 

hecho  una  pieza. 
Thursday,  s.,  jueves,  m. 
Thus,  adv.,  asi. 
Time,  s.,  tiempo,  m.;   vez  (f.);  

(of  day)  hora,  f. ;  have to,  tener 

tiempo  de. 
Tire,  cansar. 
Tiresome,  adj.,  cansado. 
To,  prep.,  d;    (purpose)  para;    to  go 

anyone's,  ir  ^  casa  de. 

Toast,  s.,  brindis,  m. 

Today,  adv.,  hoy  ;  's,  las  de  hoy 

(21,  7). 
Together,  adv.,    reunidos;    juntos; 

hours ,  boras  enteras. 

Tomorrow,    adv.,    manana,   f.;   

morning,  manana  por  la  maiiana; 

day  after ,  pasado  manana. 

Too,  adv.,  tambi^n  ; much,  dema- 

siado. 
Tooth,  s.,  muela,  f. 
Toothache,  s.,  dolor  de  muelas. 
Top,  s.,  cima,  f. 
Towards,  prep.,  hacia. 
Town,  s.,  ciudad,  f. 
Trade,  s.,  oficio,  m. 
Tramping"  of  feet,  rumor  de  pasos. 
Transgressor,  s.,  delincuente,  m. 
Translate,  traducir. 
Travel,  s.,  viaje,  m. 
Travel,  viajar. 
Treat,  tratar. 
Treatise,  s.,  tratado,  m. 
Treaty,  s.,  tratado,  m. 
Trial,  s.,  juicio,  m. ;  causa,  f. 
Trifle,  s.,  friolera,  f. 
Trimmings,  s.,  guarnicia,  f. 
Trinity-Church,  s.,  la  Iglesia  de  la 

Trinidad. 
Trip,  s.,  viaje,  m.  ;  to  take  a ,  ha- 
cer un  viaje. 
Trouble,  s.,  trabajo,  m.  ;  molestia,  f., 

take  the to,  tomar  trabajo  de. 

Trouble,  molestar  ;  oneself  about 

nothing,  no  darse  nada  por  nada. 
True,  adj.,  verdadero;  verdad ;  it  is 

,  es  verdad. 

Trunk,  s.,  baul,  m. 

Truth,  s.,  verdad,  f. 

Try,  probar. 

Tuesday,  s.,  martes,  m. 

Tune,  templar. 

Turn  (direction),  tomar  (50,  4) ; 

out,  salir  (61,  3 ;  62,  4)  ;  out  to 

be,  salir  ;  up  for,  salir  ;  to 

account,    sacar   provecho  de ;   how 


514 


VOCABULARY, 


matters  will  out,  cudl  serd  el 

resultado. 
Twelve,  num.  adj.,  doce;  at  ,  i> 

las  doce. 
Twenty,  num.  adj.,  veinte. 
Twice,  adv.,  dos  veces. 
Two,  num.  adj.,  dos. 

Umbrella,  s.,  paraguas,  m. 

Unable,  to  be,  no  poder. 

Uncle,  s.,  tio,  m. 

Understand,  entender ;  comprender ; 

creer ;  pensar ;  one  another,  ir 

claros. 
Undertake,  emprender ;  hacer. 
Undertaking  s.,  empresa,  f. 
Undoubtedly,  adv.,  sin  duda. 
Unfortunate,  adj.,  desgraciado. 
Unfortunately,     adv.,    desgraciada- 

mente. 
Union,  s.,  union,  f. 
Unite,  unirse. 
United-States,    s.,     Estados-Unidos, 

m.  pi. 
Unless,  conj.,  i,  no  ser  que  (followed 

bysubjunc). 
Until,  prep.,  hasta. 
Until,  conj.,  hasta  que. 
Unwell,  to  be,  no  estar  bueno. 
Up,  to  be,-  levantarse. 
Up,  interj.,  i  arriba  ! 
Upon,  prep.,  ^. 
Upper  part,  s.,  parte  alta,  f. 
Upstairs,  adv.,  arriba. 
Use,  s.,  uso,  m. 
Use,  usar ;  servirse  de  ;  (of  cigars,  = 

"swiofce  ")  fumar. 
Used     to     (translate    by    imperfect 

tense). 
Useful,  adj.,  util. 
Useless,  adj.,  inutil. 
Usually,  adv.,  de  costumbre. 

Value,  s.,  valor,  m. 

Vegetation,  s.,  vegetaci6n,  f. 

Verb,  s.,  verbo,  m. 

Very,  adv.,  muy;  this day,  hoy 

mismo  ;  much,  muy  ; much 

of  a,  muy. 
Vest,  s.,  chaleco,  m. 
Victory,  s.,  victoria,  f. 
Vienna,  s.,  Viena. 
Violet,  adj.,  violado. 
Violin,  s.,  violin,  m. 
Virtue,  s.,  virtud,  f. 
Visit,  s.,  visita,  f. 
Vivifying,  pres.  part.,  viviente. 
Volume,  s.,  tomo,  m. 
Voyage,  s.,  viaje,  m. 

Wager,  ir  (followed  by  substantive 
indicating  amount  wagered,  63, 
10.) 


"Wait,   esperar;    for,   quedar  ^ 

(with  infin.). 

Wake  up,  despertar. 

Walk,  s.,  paseo,  m. 

Walk,  pasear ;  andar. 

Waltz,  s.,  valz,  m. 

Want,  querer ;  necesitar ;  exigir  ;  fal- 
tar  (65,  12). 

Want  of,  for,  por  falta  de. 

Wanting,  to  be,  faltar. 

War,  s.,  guerra,  f. ;  to  he  at with, 

estar  en  guerra  con. 

Warm,  adj.,  caliente ;  to  he ,  tener 

calor. 

Warm,  calentar. 

Warn,  aconsejar. 

Wash,  lavar. 

Wash-basin,  s.,  palangana,  f. 

Washerwoman,  s.,  lavandera,  f. 

Watch,  s.,  reloj,  m. 

Water,  s.,  agua,  f. 

Way,  s.,  camino,  m. ;  on  one^s  , 

yendo. 

Wear,  usar  ;  llevar ;  gastar. 

Weather,  s.,  tiempo,  m. 

Wednesday,  s.,  miercoles,  m. 

Week,  s.,  semana,  f. ;  hy  this  day , 

de  hoy  en  ocho  dias. 

Weigh,  pesar. 

Weight,  s.,  pesa,  f. 

Welcome,  adj.,  bienvenido. 

Well,   adj.,    bien ;    to  he  ,   estar 

bueno ;  and  good,  en  hora  bue- 

na,  santo  y  bueno. 

West,  s.,  oeste,  m. 

Western,  adj.,  del  oeste. 

What,  inter,  pron.,  ique?;  (as  com- 
pound rel.),  lo  que;  but,  que 

sino  ; for  f,  I  porque  ?  ; 

little  money,  el  poco  dinero  (44,  6). 

Whatever,  s.,  cualquiera. 

When,  adv.  and  conj.,  cuando. 

Where,  adv.  and  conj.,  (of  rest)  don- 
de,  en  donde ;  (of  motion)  d  donde. 

Wherever,  adv.  and  conj.,  donde 
quiei-a. 

Whether,  conj.,  (interrog.)  si ;  (con- 
cess.)  whether  or,   ya ya  ; 

they  he,  ya  scan. 

Which,  pron.,  cud-1;  el  cudl ;  que 
(9,  9). 

While,  s.,  tiempo,  m. 

Whim,  s.,  capricho,  m. 

Whisper,  hablar  al  oido. 

Who,  pron.,  quien  ;  iqui^n?  ;  que. 

Whole  (the),  s.,  todo  el ;  the of, 

todo  el ;    the night  over,  todita 

la  noche. 

Whose,  interr.  pron.,  cuyo  ;  ictiyo? 

Why,  (interr.  pron.,)  i porque?  ;  (ex- 
clam.)  I  como ! 

Wife,  s.,  senora,  f. 


VOCABULARY, 


515 


Will,  s.,  voluntad,  f. 

Will,  querer ;  or  the  future  tense. 

Window,  s.,  ventana,  f. 

Windy,  to  be^  hacer  (impers.)  viento. 

Wine,  s.,  vino,  m.;    very  poor , 

vinacho,  m. 
Winter,  s.,  Inviemo,  m. 
Wise,  adj.,  sabio. 
Wish  s.,  deseo,  m.;  intencion,  f. 
With,    prep.,    con;     {  =  ''  among") 

entre  ;  to  do ,  hacer  de. 

Within,  prep.,  en  ;  (of  time)  de 

i,  esta  parte ;  one's  reach,  d,  su 

alcance. 
Without,  prep.,  sin. 
Woman,  s.,  mujer,  f. 
Wonder,  no  saber  (53,  12). 
Wooden,  adj.,  de  madera. 
Word,  s.,  palabra,  f. 
Work,  s.,  trabajo,  m.;  obra,  f. 

Work,  trabajar  ;  at,  trabajar  en. 

World,  s.,  mundo,  m. 

Worn,    p.  p.,   llevado;    usado    (see 

"wear");  to  be  worn  out  with,  estar 

rendido  de. 
Worth,  to    be,  valer ;    seeing, 

valer  la  pena  de  ver. 
Worse,  adj.,  peor. 
Worst,  adj.,  el  peor;  of  all,  lo 

peor  de  todo. 
Write,  escribir. 


Writer,  s.,  escritor,  m. 

Writingi  s.,  escritura,   f.  (24,  3;  27, 

29). 
Writing",    pres.    part.,    escribiendo; 

escribir. 

Yard,  s.,  (  =  ''court")  patio,  m.;  (of 
measure)  vara,  f. 

Year,  s.,  ano,  m.;   last  ,  el  aiio 

pasado  ;  next ,  el  ano  que  viene  ; 

before  last,  hace  dos  anos ;  of  late 
s,  en  estos  tiltimos  aiios. 

Yellow,  adj.,  araarillo. 

Yesterday,  adv.  and  s.,  ayer ;  day 
before ,  anteayer,  antes  de  ayer. 

Yet,  adv.,  aun ;  todavia;  sin  em- 
bargo ;  not ,  todavia  no. 

You,  pron.,  tu  ;  Usted  ;  vos  ;  voso- 
tros. 

Young*  adj.,  j6ven  ;  lady,  seno- 

rita,  f.;  gentleman,  caballerito, 

m.;  man,  j6ven,  m. 

Your(s),  poss.  pron.,  tu  ;  el  tuyo  ;  de 
Usted ;  el  de  usted ;  vuestro ;  el 
vuestro ;  etc.,  your  most  obedient 
servant,  or  yours  very  truly,  Queda 
de  V.  or  Manda  V.  cuanto  guste  d. 
S.S.S.,  Q.S.M.B.  (Su  seguro  servi- 
dor,  que  su  mano  besa). 

Z,  s.  f.,  the  z,  la  z  (36,  26). 


(84) 


O' 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OF  25  CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


.Sfr 


•'■■■^     fUj__ 


Zl'^.'^'^'^,.. 


^IS'Sllu 


21Maj'52Kl 


yJUX  i  iS; 


>'.iv 


"^6^ 


f^ 


6osr 


21JUL' 


y  o 


■-UQ:^cj 


LD  21-1007/1-12, '43  (8796s) 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


uy      \j^K^ 


coemiiaiM 


